Engine Management

Image Image

Welcome to the Emtron ECU manual.

The latest software updates are available from:

https://emnet.emtronaustralia.com.au/


Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Engine Management

FAQ

Initial Setup & Connection

CAN Bus

For detailed CAN bus information refer to the Communications documentation.

Start files or Base Maps

Some base cal files are included with Emtune and can be found in: C:\Emtron\Cal Files\.

For application specific examples please contact Support.

Injector Data

Many common injector deadtime and linearisation tables are included with Emtrun and can be found in: C:\Emtron\Table Files\Injector Data Tables.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of FAQ

Emtron ECU Features

Emtron Emtron

There’s no shortage of engine management platforms on the market today. It’s not much of a leap to say that most of them can achieve similar results when operated by someone familiar with them. So, what makes Emtron different? Extreme flexibility coupled with advanced engine modelling not typically found in aftermarket engine management. This includes the Emtron mathematical torque model, which is a true paradigm shift in the way we approach torque management, motorsport functions, and engine management in general. This is made possible by the Emtron’s advanced air mass modelling.

Air Mass Modelling

Emtron ECU’s feature a sophisticated air mass model not usually found outside the OE market. The air mass entering the engine is accurately calculated from a variety of sources to allow maximum flexibility of engine tuning. Numerous air mass calculations can be blended in almost any way, giving the tuner maximum flexibility to account for any situation or edge case. Tuning in terms of air mass instead of raw manifold pressure gives a far greater insight into the dynamic operational conditions of an engine. Tuning in terms of Air Mass Flow can greatly simplify many engine systems, reducing complexity and reducing guess work.

  • Bank or Engine MAP Air Mass
  • Bank or Engine MAF Air Mass
  • Bank or Engine Throttle Air Mass
  • Driver Demand Air Mass
  • 2x Volumetric Efficiency tables, freely configurable, switchable and Z-axis blendable
  • Secondary Load Table
  • Charge Temperature Estimation and offset tables
  • Air Mass Modifier table

Throttle Mass Flow

By measuring the pressure before and after a throttle body, Emtron’s TMF model essentially converts a throttle body into a mass air flow meter, providing a very dynamic and fast air mass calculation that’s perfect for accurately adhering to torque targets without the need for estimate tables or open loop guess work. Throttle Mass Flow modelling also opens up a huge variety of approaches to engine tuning and the ability to easily account for dynamics such as changes in cam timing without compensation tables.

Expansion Ratio

Emtron’s air mass model can account for changes in engine efficiency based on the engine’s expansion ratio. This means the difference between the inlet manifold pressure and the exhaust manifold pressure. This can be achieved by Installing an Exhaust Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor or using the EMAP Estimation table.

Fuel Mass Modelling

The primary job of the Air Mass Model is to inform the Emtron Fuel Mass Model. The air mass model, coupled with accurate fuel system and injector data allows the ECU to accurately calculate exactly how to operate the fuel injectors to achieve the desired lambda target, even in the most dynamic environments.

  • Primary and Secondary Injector characterisation with freely customisable 3D Deadtime and Linearisation tables
  • Fuel density modelling, preset based on selected fuel type or custom table
  • Differential fuel pressure correction – Dynamically recalculates the injector flow based on changes in real-time fuel pressure
  • 2x Lambda Target tables
  • 2x Lambda Target Offset tables
  • Fuel Mass Modifier Table
  • Individual Cylinder Trim tables
  • Bank Trim tables
  • Seamless staged injection blending
  • Custom stoichiometric ratio table
  • Z Axis blending on most tables

Torque Management

Having an accurate picture of air and fuel mass allows the Emtron ECU to accurately calculate real-time engine torque data. There’s no need for lookup tables, torque is mathematically modelled.

Using Throttle Mass Flow, the Emtron ECU can calculate the required air mass for a given torque target, allowing for the kind of advanced torque management required by modern transmissions, as well as a highly refined approach to motorsport functions that are usually achieved with crude cuts and ignition retards.

Emtron torque management uses a priority-based combination of throttle control, ignition retard and cutting to achieve and hold a torque target, all parameters of which can be configured. There’s no need to fill in big tables of cut levels or ignition offsets, the torque model will work out what’s required on the fly.

The result is real torque management that is smoother, faster, and better for engine reliability.

  • Torque based gearshift control for modern transmissions such as the Nissan GR6.
  • Torque based Launch control
  • Torque based Traction control
  • 5x Customisable User Torque Limits

Features Overview

Fuel

  • 1 - 16 Injectors
  • Fully fuel mass modelled
  • Sequential, Staged, Group, Non Sequential modes
  • Gasoline Direct Injection (with external driver)
  • GDI/Port Staged
  • Flex fuel fully supported by fuel model
  • Customisable Peak & Hold Injector drivers
  • Primary & secondary injection timing tables
  • Injector Test mode
  • 11x Fuel Model modes
  • 2x Main VE tables
  • Secondary Load table
  • VE Blend Table
  • Fuel Model Blend Table
  • 2x Lambda Target tables, 3x Lambda Target Offset tables
  • Air Mass modifier table, Fuel mass modifier tables
  • MAP, Gear, Engine Temperature, Fuel Temperature, Fuel Pressure, 2x User compensation - tables
  • Cylinder Trim tables
  • Bank Trim tables
  • Transient compensation tables
  • Starting compensation tables
  • Z Axis blending on most tables

Ignition

  • 1 – 12 Coils
  • Direct Fire, Wasted Spark, Distributor, Twin Distributor, Direct/Trailing, Wasted/ - Trailing, CDI
  • Powerful 70mA drivers
  • 2x Dwell tables, 1x Dwell offset table
  • Ignition Test mode
  • 2x Main Ignition Tables, switchable, Z-Axis blendable
  • Secondary load table
  • Individual Cylinder Trim tables
  • Advance/Retard Rate tables
  • Starting, Transient, Temperature, MAP, Gear, 2x User compensation tables

Inputs

  • Input Channels Sources from physical pins or CAN data
  • Configurable fault conditions and DTC’s
  • Limp home limit tables for critical input channels
  • Estimate table fallback for critical channels
  • Ratiometric correction
  • Extensive predefined calibrations
  • Custom user calibrations
  • Arming threshold tables for reluctor speed inputs
  • Configurable digital switch thresholds
  • 4 Channel Trigger Scope
  • 100K samples/second
  • Crank/Sync Inputs
  • Digital Inputs 1-4
  • 32 Mb memory

General Functions

  • Overrun Fuel Cut
  • Closed Loop Lambda, single or dual bank
  • Cam Switch
  • DBW Control
    • Up to 4 motors
    • Anti-surge air bleed control
    • Throttle body model with %Area/Torque Demand table
  • Idle Speed Control
    • DBW Throttle Mass Flow
    • DBW Position
    • Unipolar Stepper
    • Bipolar Stepper
    • 2 Wire Solenoid
    • 3 Wire Solenoid
    • Idle Ignition Control
  • VVT Cam Control, most types supported.
  • Knock Control
    • Individual cylinder
    • Customisable filtering
    • Cylinder gain and threshold tables
  • Boost Control (Closed Loop)
    • Single Solenoid
    • Dual Solenoid (per Bank control)
    • Push/Pull top port control (CO2)
  • TGV Control
  • Cal Slot Control
  • Closed Loop Stepper Control
  • 3x Engine Speed Limits
    • Torque Control
    • Fuel/Ignition Cut
  • 2x MAP Limits
  • Speed Limit
  • Engine Protection
    • Engine Temperature
    • Oil Pressure
    • Fuel Pressure
    • Exhaust Gas Temperature
  • 2x Fuel Pump Control Functions
  • 2x Fuel Pump Speed Control Functions
  • 2x Cooling Fans
  • 2x AC Fans
  • AC Clutch Control (Basic or Full Control)
  • Tacho Output
  • CE Light Output
  • Purge Solenoid
  • Speedo Output
  • 2x NB Oxy Heater Control
  • Turbo Scavenge Pump
  • Fuel Low Pressure Control (Port)
  • Fuel High Pressure Control (DI)
  • Cruise Control (Torque modelled)
    • Light Output
    • Multiplexed analog switch support
  • Engine Start Control
    • Touch Start/Stop
  • Engine Safety Start Inhibit
  • Engine Immobiliser
  • 6x Shift Solenoids (Liberty / Lenco transmissions)
  • Honda S2000 Temp Gauge Output
  • 5x User Timers
  • 1x Race Timer, 1ms resolution
  • 15x User Functions
    • PWM Duty/Frequency Tables on 1-10
    • Up to 4 Channel combination logic on all

Motorsport Functions

  • Overrun Boost (Anti Lag)
  • Launch Control
    • Torque Limiting
    • RPM limiting
  • Rolling Launch Control
  • Traction Control
    • Torque (Slip Target)
    • Torque (RPM Target)
    • Drive Slip
    • Output Shaft Slip
  • Gearshift Control
    • Torque OEM Integration
      • Nissan R35 GTR / 370Z
    • Electronic Paddle
    • Manual Sequential
    • Drag – Auto Upshift
    • Basic Gear Cut/Blip Control
  • Differential Control
    • PWM
    • PWM + ACD
    • Yamaha YXZ
  • Trans Brake Control w/ Bump
  • Water Spray
  • Nitrous Control
    • 4 Stages (2x PWM)
    • Fuel mass flow control
  • Flame Control
  • Downshift Rev Matching (Torque based)
  • G-Speed (Accelerometer based speed channel for AWD traction control)

Torque Management

  • 3x Driver Demand Translation tables
  • Driver Demand Translation Clamp table
  • Frictional Loss compensation
  • 5x Independent Torque Control Strategies (used by all torque control functions)
  • Retard Gain
  • Cut Gain
  • Boost Target Margin Offset
  • 5x User Torque Limits
    • Selectable Control Strategy
    • User Channel Enable
    • Main Limit table
    • Limit Offset table

Communications

  • 2x CAN 2.0B bus nodes
  • 6x Channels per node
  • 4x User Rx data sets
  • 4x User Tx data sets
  • 70x Preset data sets

Logging

  • 1500+ channels available
  • Up to 500 Hz
  • 32Mb memory, circular or single shot
  • Configurable start/stop conditions
  • Tune and review data in one place. All logging managed and reviewed inside Emtune, no exporting to other software required.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Trigger Requests

While Emtron supports a high number of trigger types, there is occasionally the need to add new engine types.

The fastest way to get support for a new engine type is to provide Emtron directly with scope file directly from the Emtune software (exported from the Scope Utility as a *.esf file).

If the vehicle has VVT (variable valve timing), please contact support for any special instructions.

A cranking scope trace with cylinder 1 spark plug removed (or only cylinder 1 spark plug installed) can be helpful in identifying an approximation of crank index offset position. The cranking speed will speed up/slow down at the point of compression.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Getting Started

First Time Use

If using the ECU for the first time

  1. Download software - EmNet
  2. Obtain a Tuning Cable
  3. Set up Ethernet port - Ethernet Setup Guide. Emtune software will communicate to the ECU over a static IP address which must be configured.
  4. Read the KV Series Hardware Manual
  5. Read the particular ECU Data sheet
  6. Familiarise your self with the Emtron EFI relay control & power distribution
  7. Read the help, familiarize yourself with the software and don’t be afraid to ask for assistance if you get stuck or are unsure.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ethernet Connection

Connecting the ECU

Communication Cable

The Emtron proprietary communication cable translates standard high speed Ethernet to a Lemo connector that feeds directly into the ECU header.

Image ImageImage Image

The pin configuration for the Lemo receiver is as follows.

SL series

Image Image

WireSL Pin
Green/WhiteB31 (TX+)
GreenB32 (TX-)
Orange/WhiteB33 (RX+)
OrangeB34 (RX-)

KV series

Image Image

WireSL Pin
Green/WhiteD23 (TX+)
GreenD24 (TX-)
Orange/WhiteD25 (RX+)
OrangeD26 (RX-)

IP Config

The Emtune software will communicate to the ECU over a static IP address.

Set your IP and subnet to the following on the Ethernet port you will be using on your PC.

IP: 192.168.1.50

Subnet: 255.255.255.0

Image Image

With successful connection, the Emtune Welcome screen will display “ECU DETECTED” in blue in the bottom left corner as can be observed in the background in the above example.

For detailed IP Configuration info click here: IP Configuration

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Shortcut Keys

KeyFunction
VToggle View between Tuning and Config
EscToggle focus on menu bar
Alt + FOpen File Tab
F3Open/Close ECU runtimes
HToggle Table Description
[Scroll between views Left
]Scroll between views Right

Table Direct Entry

KeyFunction
Pg UpIncrement value by 0.1
Pg DownDecrement value by 0.1
Shift Pg UpIncrement value by 1.0
Shift Pg DnDecrement value by 1.0

Table Tools

KeyFunction
F5Toggle Fuel and Ignition Main Table
F6Open Lambda Table
AAxis Setup
IInterpolate
Ctrl + ASelect Complete Table
Ctrl + CCopy Selection
Shift + Crtl + CCopy Table
Ctrl + VPaste Selection
Shift + Ctrl +VPaste Table
Ctrl + Alt + CSave Table
Ctrl + Alt + VLoad Table
Ctrl + Alt + IImport Table
Ctrl + Space BarActive Cell Tracking
ZRestore last stored cell/s value \
GToggle Graph
SSmoothing Function
HView Table Description
DDisplay Differences from ECU last stored value
;Table Color Gradient Toggle
LAuto Lambda Correction
MManual Entry Lambda Correction
YInvert Y-Axis
OToggle Logger Position (Yellow Box)
QCopy programmable Live Runtime into active cell

File Management

KeyFunction
F2Save File
Crtl + F2Save As
Crtl + ZUndo Last Change
Shift + Crtl + ZRedo Last Change

Logging

KeyFunction
F8Start/Stop Logging
F9Pause Logging
F7Open Manage Log Files Window
OToggle Overlay
YOverlay Offset Left
Crtl+YOverlay Offset Left Fast
IOverlay Offset Right
Crtl+IOverlay Offset Right Fast
USet Overlay Offset
WZoom Reset
DDual Cursor Mode
SSwap Active Cursor
BBring Cursors Together

Display Settings

KeyFunction
F11Maximize View Area
Crtl+F11Table Full screen

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Hints & Tips

ECU Overview/Pinout

The cal file information such as pin configuration, assignments, and even the FW version can easily be accessed via the file menu under “Show ECU Overview”

Image Image

Setting Paths

Paths can be reset under the file menu under “Options”.

Image Image

Unit Preferences

Units can be converted under the file menu under “Options”.

Image Image

ECU Cal FIle Locking

ECU Cal Files can be locked under the file menu (Password protection).

CautionThe ECU cal file cannot be unlocked by Emtron Support for any reason if it is locked, as this is done in the actual calibration file.

The user is free to load in any cal file they please though, including an unlocked cal file (on top of a locked cal file).

Loading in a new cal file will overwrite the cal file loaded into the ECU, so that current cal file will be lost.

If a cal file is locked, Emtune will allow the user to view the “ECU Overview” though to see what the current pinout of the ECU is.

Image Image

Viewing Runtimes

Pressing “F3” anytime the ECU is open will display all calculated channels in real time. Navigate through the tabs, or “Search” for the channel you are looking to view.

Output Testing

All outputs can be tested in the ECU, and this is a recommended procedure before running the engine and crucial components for the first time.

Outputs controlled by functions, can be tested right from the function output setup. The “Test Output” button brings you to this section, where you can set conditions for the output test :

Image Image

To test fuel and ignition channels, this is done under Config Fuel/Ignition > Injector/Ignition Test

Image Image

Set the pulse width/dwell for the test, and then turn the channels on to test.

CautionDo not test channels with the engine running

Note: The channels are the actual channel assignments from the ECU, and not the cylinder assignments - IE if you have cylinders assigned on different channels, they will NOT correspond during this test.

Starting Engine/No Start

Once configuration is complete, startability of the engine can be observed (and logged) in Runtimes view (F3) under Triggers/Limits > Engine Decoding Status.

Image Image

For sequential configuration, Crank, Sync, 360, and 720 sync must all go “Green” in order for the decoding to be satisfied and the engine startability to be achieved.

Tip Engine Speed should be observed cranking as well

On universal configurations such as “Multi-tooth Custom”, if the engine will not start, the stroke for sequential firing may be on the wrong phase.

An easy way to correct this is to add 360 degrees to the Crank Index Offset value.

Engine Limiting Active

The Emtron ECU can perform a number of different limit types. View what limiters are active in Runtime view (F3) under Triggers/Limits.

Image Image

Limit Requests will show the specific limiter active

Under Limit Summary, Highest priority Fcut/Icut Status will also show the current limiter active (by priority of cut %)

Tip: Highest priority cuts are recommended to always be logged.

Trigger Errors

The following Error channels are calculated in the ECU.

  • Crank/Sync Errors - This is a counter that will register if the ECU sees an issue during an engine cycle where the Crank Tooth and Sync Tooth are not legitimate.
  • Crank/Sync Errors(crk) - This error is the same as Crank/Sync Errors but occurs inside the Cranking Speed entry window (Crank RPM Entry and Crank RPM exit).
  • Crank Tooth Errors - This is a counter that will register if the ECU sees the incorrect number of expected count of crank teeth during an engine cycle.
  • Sync Tooth Errors - This is a counter that will register if the ECU sees the incorrect number expected sync teeth during an engine cycle,
InfoAll trigger errors when they register will result in engine misfire as the ECU will attempt to abort running the engine for that cycle (cut). This is to prevent the engine from running improper timing or improper cycle.

Data Logging/Diagnostic Tips

  • Crank Tooth, Crank/Sync, Crank/Sync(crk) counting during engine cranking/low battery voltage sometimes can be considered normal depending on the trigger type, tooth count, engine compression ratio, etc.

  • This is due to the ECU attempting to scrutinize the trigger accurately during cranking, missing teeth, crank index teeth, etc.

  • Crank Tooth Errors alone usually mean the main Crank Index Signal has issues

  • Crank/Sync Errors alone usually mean there is a Sync Sensor Signal issue.

  • Crank Tooth Errors AND Crank/Sync Errors usually mean there is interference/rouge on one or both of the main trigger inputs. Investigate the Sync Signal first with the ECU Scope.

Image Image

Example of vehicle with failing Sync sensor signal.

Image Image

Example of vehicle with rouge sync sensor signals (triggering both crank and crank/sync tooth errors together).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Support

What is included, and what kind of support should be expected from Emtron?

Emtron provides worldwide technical support to our dealers and customers, with support staff located around the globe for fast response regardless of your time zone.  Our team includes expert calibrators, who have worked on countless applications and engine configurations, and have a comprehensive understanding of the Emtron hardware and software product line to help answer your questions and troubleshoot issues.  

While our support staff are absolutely here to answer questions, support hardware issues, and help point you in the right direction - for a wide variety of reasons, unfortunately our staff cannot tune customer vehicles, provide more than basic base/start up maps, or teach fundamentals of engine tuning or even basic fundamentals of the software.  Emtron software and hardware is incredibly capable and sophisticated, but deserves some dedication and time to learn and understand full functionality.   

Emtron support is here to guide experienced tuners in the use of the hardware and software, as well as to ensure there are no problems with the hardware or software.  Emtron provides training sessions around the world annually and we encourage all dealers and self-tuning end-customers to sign up for these events.  In addition Emtron recommends EFI University’s series of classes particularly those focused on the use of Emtune software. Furthermore, Emtron’s dealer network consists of some of the best tuners in the world - for end-customers seeking one-on-one support and training in the product, we strongly suggest you contact Emtron dealers in your geography to see how they can help you achieve your goals. 

How to contact support?

All support requests are fed into a ticket system, and requests should be made simply by emailing support@emtronaustralia.com.au

Phone Support

Australia: +61 9679 8979

USA: +1978 364 3510

What to include in your support requests

Cal File and Logs: 9 out of 10 times, support staff will need to review the working calibration file and any log file of the conditions in question.

PC logging is the best way to capture the log, as it will record all channels for the staff to review.

If calibration files are locked, our support staff will NOT be able to unlock them. Please provide the password for the cal file in the request, or send unlocked versions of the cal file.

Our support staff do not further record, database, or share any users cal files, passwords, etc.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtune

Requirements

The following are the minimum requirements to be able to utilise Emtune software

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Emtune

Ethernet

Ethernet Wiring

For wiring information click here: Ethernet Wiring

IP Configuration

The Emtune software will communicate to the ECU over a static IP address.

Set your IP and subnet to the following on the Ethernet port you will be using on your PC.

IP: 192.168.1.50

Subnet: 255.255.255.0

Image Image

With successful connection, the Emtune Welcome screen will display “ECU DETECTED” in blue in the bottom left corner as can be observed in the background in the above example.

Auto IP Config

Emtune 1.20.0 and onwards includes a wizard to help configure the ethernet connection (Bottom right of the splash screen)

The wizard may fail to configure the adapter if a previously used adapter was set to the same IP address. Windows can be very finicky about this.

Image Image

This will be visible when an ECU is no connected / detected.

When the ECU is connected & the IP address correctly configure, the software will acknowledge this in the bottom left corner.

Image Image

The process to manually configure windows 11+ is as follows:

Manual IP Config

Info on configuring the IP address for different windows version can be found here:

Troubleshooting

When a correctly configured Ethernet port is in use together with a known good communication cable and you remain unable to establish a connection.

Power supply to the ECU must be verified. That is, the next step is to determine if the ECU is powering up.

Without voltage to the ECU supply pin.

The ECU will fail to power up thereby making communication impossible.

For the KV Series ECU’s this is pin D1

Image Image

For the SL series ECU’s, this is pin B1

Image Image

If 12V is not present at D1/B1 with ignition ON, you will need to determine the power supply fault.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Ethernet

Windows 11

  1. Right click on the Network Connection icon in the system tray. It may appear as a wired connection or a wifi icon. Image Image

  2. Click on Ethernet Image Image

  3. Expand the settings for your ethernet adapter and click on the Edit button for IP Assignment. Image Image

  4. Set it to Manual, turn on IPv4, and enter the emtron IP Address and Subnet mask. Image Image

  5. Click Save.

  6. Done. Connect the Emtron Ethernet cable.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Windows 10

To setup the Ethernet on Windows 10 ready for the ECU connection use the following steps.

Image Image

  • Left Click Windows Icon - Bottom Left corner

Image Image

  • Left Click Settings Icon - 2nd from bottom on Left

Image Image

  • Left Click “Network & Internet” - Top Right

Image Image

  • Left Click “Ethernet” - 4th from Top on the Left

Image Image

  • Left Click “Change Adapter Options” - Top Right

Image Image

  • Right Click “Ethernet”

Image Image

  • Left Click “Properties”

Image Image

  • Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and Left Click “Properties”

Image Image

  • Use the following IP address

Image Image

  • Left Click “OK” and exit, the process is complete
  • Done. Connect the Emtron Ethernet cable.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Windows 8.1

To setup the Ethernet on Windows 8.1 ready for the ECU connection use the following steps.

  • Type “View Network Connections” into the search window, accessed from the start menu. Windows should provide a list of results. Select View Network Connections.

Image Image

Or alternatively if the search function doesn’t provide this:

Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center. Once in this menu select “Change Adapter Settings”

Image Image

  • Once in this menu select “Change Adapter Settings”

Image Image

  • The below menu should be visible. Select “Ethernet”

Image Image

  • Right click to Access Properties

Image Image

  • Select TCP/IPv4 then click Properties

Image Image

  • Select “Use the following IP address” and enter in the address 192.168.1.50. The Subnet should automatically default to 255.255.255.0. Click OK.

Image Image

  • Done. Connect the Emtron Ethernet cable.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Windows 7

To setup the Ethernet on Windows 7 ready for the ECU connection use the following steps.

  • Type “View Network Connections” into the search window, accessed from the start menu. Windows should provide a list of results. Select View Network Connections.

Image Image

or alternatively if the search function doesn’t provide this:

Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. Once in this menu select “Change Adapter Settings”

Image Image

  • The below menu should be visible. Select “Local Area Connection”

Image Image

  • Select TCP/IPv4 then click Properties

Image Image

  • Select “Use the following IP address” and enter in the address 192.168.1.50. The Subnet should automatically default to 255.255.255.0. Click OK.

Image Image

  • Done. Connect the Emtron Ethernet cable.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Windows XP

Emtune is no longer developed to offer Windows XP compatibility.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Basic Configuration Guide

Software Navigation

From the Welcome Screen, selecting Open File, or Open ECU (ECU Detected is required) the calibration file will be opened.

From here, you can navigate through a number of menus, tabs, sub tabs, etc.

Image Image

For configuration, clicking the config tab at the top is where to start.

Image Image

The Emtune software has a very systematical approach to configuration.

Start on the left side “Engine Setup”, and work your way over from left to right.

Do not skip sections. Following this practice as accurately as possible will ensure tuning process will move smoothly in the future.

Improper entry in any part of the setup could be detrimental to the electronics AND the hardware!

Engine Setup

Image Image

Setup each tab from top to bottom. See help file for explanation of each individual function, as well as help text in the respective configuration screens.

Crank Index Offset Setup

This section synchronizes the engine timing.

**Crank index offset MUST always be checked regardless of trigger pre-configuration.

1) Always check crank index position at ignition lock angle 0.0 (especially when running waste spark).

2) Ignition delay time should be validated at this time and adjusted.

3) As RPM is increased, timing should stay at the ignition lock angle.

 If this does not occur - Adjust the ignition delay time until this is achieved.

Image Image

Quick Calibrations

See Quick Calibrations

Fuel

Define all your fuel setting under the Fuel heading.

Image Image

Fuel Flow Rate/Ref Injector Size

Image Image

The Ref Injector Size flow rate must match the Ref Static Fuel Pressure value

The Ref Static Pressure Value is pressure value that differential/relative fuel pressure at the injector for this injector flow rate value.

** If Fuel Model: Fuel Pressure Corr. Is “On (Fuel Press Corr – Sensor Fitted)”, then this Ref Static Fuel Pressure value is used as the base Fuel Pressure Differential.

The following runtimes will be generated from this information:

Fuel Pressure Diff – This is the effective pressure at the injector

Fuel Pressure Diff Offset – This is the deviation from the differential pressure target (or the reference static pressure entered commonly

Fuel Model Pressure Correction – The percentage of compensation added/subtracted based on differential pressure offset

** If Secondary Injection is used, Fuel Pressure 2 channel MUST be used, and all runtimes above (2) are available and act independently.

These channels can be used all over the ECU calibration, for compensation for deadtime, engine protection, etc.

Stoichiometric Ratio Setup

The airflow model will determine air mass flowing through engine a number of ways, then reference the stoich setup to determine how the “Lambda Target” table quantifies the fuel mass needed in the model. There are a number of pre-defined fuel types to choose from, but also a “Custom - Table” selection for pump fuel with ethanol, flex fuel vehicles, etc. See the ECU sample file (Custom - Table), or build your own table if using a odd fuel.

**** Not having the correct Stoich Ratio will bake large error into the entire model and compensations**

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Above is showing how two fuel types can be used with different Stoich values with a “Dual Tune Enable Sw”

Injector Deadtime and Linearsation

It is very important to have your Injector Size (cc/min) as accurate as possible, as well as the Ref Static Fuel Pressure.

If using any fuel pressure compensation in the model (which you can turn on and off), the Ref Static Pressure is what is used to compensate injection quantity vs effective fuel pressure (differential fuel pressure).

There are 3D table functions for Fuel Density, Custom Stoichiometric (commonly used for flex fuel function), Deadtime, and Linearizion.

**** Injector deadtime accuracy is critical.****

Correct deadtimes ensure the proper amount of pulse width is added to the effective pulse width (as calculated by the fuel model).

Improper time entry usually results in exaggerating VE entries, especially in engine load ranges when the pulse width is small.

It should be taken into consideration that effective fuel pressure affects injector deadtime, so using injectors with good data sheets is the best idea. Most good injectors have a latency multiplier vs fuel pressure, or a complete table available.

These values should be translated and entered into the tables as accurately as possible.

Image Image

Image Image

Tuning Tip:

Injector Dead times can be validated using the Emtune Software by using the Wideband Lambda control. If you add 10% to your VE table (@ 3000rpm / 80kpa load for example), you should see a corresponding negative 10% trim applied via the Wideband lambda control. If you don’t, then you know your dead times need some attention.

By utilizing a dead time table available in your Emtune software that is close. The correct dead time for your injector can be quickly arrived at by simply globally moving the table up & down. The voltage slop of the dead times can be further validated by removing the alternator charge and allowing the supply voltage to drop away. Correct dead times allow the engine to operate correctly over a wide range of variable conditions

** Injector Linearization is considered a raw pulse width correction factor to correct the fuel flow at different pulse widths

(generally more sensitive at low pulse widths).  These numbers can be positive or negative.

Image Image

There is a full configuration function for peak and hold injection where you can define the injector type (saturated vs peak and hold), and define opening and hold currents.

Image Image

Image Image

The injector test function also allows you to pulse each injector anytime the engine is off.

Ignition

Define all your ignition setting under the Ignition heading.

Image Image

**Ignition firing edge synchronizes the calculated ignition timing with the physically ignition system itself.

In most cases where the ignition system has ECU controlled dwell (following the dwell table entry), the firing edge will be falling as this is when the coil will inductively transfer spark energy to the spark plug.

Mapped dwell time affects coil charge before this event.

Ignition systems that require the opposite signal (dwell period reversed) generally have a rising firing edge.

Ignition systems that control their own dwell period separately also generally require rising firing edge.

Ignition Timing should be validated with a timing light ALWAYS.

A good test for correct firing edge configuration is to change the dwell time and observe the ignition timing does not change.

Improper set up here can cause false ignition timing, weak spark and even DAMAGE to the ECU or the vehicle Ignition system.

Each cylinder can be assigned two different dwell tables. Each dwell table can be offset by a secondary table as well.

The ignition test function also allows you to pulse each injector anytime the engine is off.

Inputs

This comprehensive setup will specify all Inputs to the Emtron ECU system.

It has a tab structure which has a similar function to the configuration setup.

Input Pins

Inputs can be configured using select analog and digital inputs.

The hardware configuration for different ECU types is listed below.

SL Series ECU –

ANV 1-10 12 bit resolution 0-5v analog voltage inputs

ANV 7-10 have switchable pull up to 5v through 1k ohm (temperature)

DI 1-8 0-30khz input frequency range with switchable pull up to 9v through 4.7k ohms

DI 1-8 10 bit resolution 0-20v analog voltage input mode

**KV Series ECU –**

ANV 1-16 12 bit resolution 0-5v analog voltage inputs

ANV 7-12 have switchable pull up to 5v through 1k ohm (temperature)

DI 1-8 0-30khz input frequency range with switchable pull up to 9v through 4.7k ohms

DI 9-14 Standard switch input (low frequency) switchable pull up to 9v

DI 1-8 10 bit resolution 0-20v analog voltage input mode

DI 9-14 Low resolution 0-20v analog voltage input mode

Starting on the left to right and moving through all required and optional inputs and setup.

Image Image

Analog voltage config window:

Image Image

Sensor input source, filter, calibration, clamp, fault settings, fault value (substitute value), DTC control, and DTC engine limit control are all configured here. There are a number of popular “pre-configured” sensor styles.

If using thermistors, “pull up” must be switched on (only available on ANV 7-10/12).

**Digital inputs can all be pulled up, but they cannot be used for thermistors as the pull up voltage is 9.0V

**Major sensors have the ability to enable “fault table” which allows the user to create an active look up table for substitute values.

Example below is for MAP sensor failure, using TP and engine speed to populate active substitute.

Image Image

A simple switch configuration for digital input (ignition switch dedicated input):

Image Image

Input can be configured as a regular toggle switch, magnetic, hall, or momentary switch.

Edge configuration should be appropriately selected based on switch configuration.

Pull up can be used for ground switch inputs (2 point config would be opposite, falling edge trigger).

For high speed inputs, configuration is similar:

Image Image

High speed inputs (DI 1-8 only) should have “table” as threshold mode, as this will specify the cross over voltage point.

This is similar to “arming thresholds” when configuring triggers

“Scaler” will facilitate the input frequency to unit conversion.

If using KV series internal Lambda sensors, select “Internal” under Input Source

If using CAN bus OEM inputs, select “CANBUS OEM” under Input Source

Custom Runtimes

Efficiency calculation is a runtime commonly used as a load point for fuel tables.

You can select from a number of Emtron calculated runtimes.

Load calculation is a runtime commonly used as a load point for ignition tables and lambda target tables.

You can select from a number of Emtron calculated runtimes.

DI Arming Thresholds

These are the tables generated by high frequency inputs when using the “table” threshold mode.

Lambda Pressure Correction

If using Lambda sensors in situations where exhaust back pressure becomes a factor (Lambda sensor installed before turbocharger or other exhaust restriction), using an exhaust manifold back pressure sensor input allows for correction of the lambda measurement.

Functions

Like Input Pins, this is a comprehensive setup that will specify all outputs to the Emtron ECU system. It has a tab structure which has a similar function to the configuration setup.

Each function that is being used can be enabled here. If there is a required output, then an appropriate output channels can be selected.

An overview of output channel functions from Emtron (see help for more details):

SL Series ECU –

AUX 1-4 Low side

AUX 5-8 Low/High side

AUX 9-10 H-Bridge (One DBW)

Spare fuel and ignition channels can be driven low side

**KV Series ECU –**

AUX 1-8 Low side/high side

AUX 9-12 H-Bridge (Two DBW)

AUX 13-16 Low side/high side

AUX 13-16 H-Bridge (KV12+ - Two DBW)

Spare fuel and ignition channels can be driven low side

**High side drivers and H-Bridge often need control of supply voltage to specified pin locations – see help document

Below is an example of DBW function config.

Image Image

The mode for DBW is selected, the appropriate output channels, driver type (half bridge), and output frequency.

The same setup is required for any other functions that require outputs.

**See help file for specific functional setup

Communication

This section allows for setup using the Emtron CAN bus channels (2) regarding communication between auxuiliary devices such as dash systems, loggers, EGT devices, as well as Emtron CAN devices (ELC – Emtron Lambda controller).

Besides simple pre-configurations for standard logging sets, advanced setup of this system should be overseen by dealers/Emtron support. Contact your dealer or Emtron support for more assistance.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Continuous Logger

Continuous Logger

When connected to the ECU live, using the “P” key will “Pause” the software completely, and allow the user to navigate back a number of seconds using any line plots on the screen and see exactly where they were in the ECU software.

This mode acts as if they were live tuning the ECU in that very instant.

All hot keys such as “L”, “M”, or any other changes to the calibration are active during this mode, using the paused channel information available at that time.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

ECU Password Protection

ECU Password Protection

All Emtron ECU’s have the ability to be locked to prevent access from others

This function is access through the main file menu

Image Image

The Password Protected File cannot be viewed or recovered unless the correct password is known.

Removing Password Protection

If the password is known, this can be done through the main file menu using the Clear Password function

If the password is not know and cannot be retrieved and the ECU must be accessed; the following steps apply.

Sending a Calibration (Cal) File to a Password Protected (Locked) ECU

Any Cal file can be sent to a locked ECU.

Sending a file will load the new Cal file settings into the ECU.

Sending an alternative file will result in the removal of all current ECU settings including the existing password

(when enabled).

There are 2 possible conditions:

  1. The Cal file being sent is Locked. The Cal file will be sent immediately to the ECU overwriting the current ECU file. After the download is complete and the ECU powered cycled the ECU will be locked and you will need the correct password to open the ECU.

  2. The Cal file being sent is Unlocked. The Cal file will be sent immediately to the ECU overwriting the current ECU file. After the download is complete and the ECU powered cycled the ECU will be unlocked.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

ECU Runtimes

ECU Runtimes

The ECU Runtimes can be accessed by pressed the F3 key or selecting the following menu item:

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtune Dash Panel Configuration

Emtune allows the user to customize the dash panel screens to suit their needs accordingly.

When opening Emtune for the first time (also when updating software versions), Emtune will ask if you want to overwrite the existing layouts for both the dash panels and the logger with new default configurations. Select accordingly.

Right Click the Tab section to select Configure Tabs to edit tabs and visibility:

Image Image

The dash panels are organized by Dash Groups located in the Setup section

** If a function in the software does not have linked view (see below), Main Dash, Main panel will be displayed.

Image Image

In each dash group, tabs can be created which then can point a software function to that panel. To connect the software to that particular display panel, select Parameter Linked, then add the table to the list. The ECU will then always select that display tab when in the table being viewed (in the case below, Starting, Cranking Comp Table 1).

Image Image

Right click the panel to change, edit, add, replace gauges in the active panel.

Image Image

Set parameter allows you to define what runtime you want to display. In the case where the display gauge/plot can display more than one runtime, you can add multiple to the list

Image Image

Configure parameter allows you to define the min/max scales for gauges, bar graphs, warning gauges, etc.

Image Image

Each panel can individually be imported/exported at the bottom of the list when right clicking the panel

Image Image

The entire dash layout can be imported and exported via that “Dash Setup” selection under the file menu.

Image Image

** Periodically save your dash setup

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtune Welcome Screen

Welcome Screen

When first opening Emtune software a Welcome Screen is displayed. From here the user has several options in which they would want to use the connection to their PC.

This is one of the unique features to Emtron/Emtune as it eliminates many of the anxieties of connecting to ECU systems.

An end user can easily download an ECU log, or look at one way Live Data communication without actually opening the calibration file.

Open ECU

Only available when ECU is connected

Image Image

Use this option to connect to the ECU to perform configuration, calibration, live PC data logging, scope functions, and more.

This is the main mode for live calibrating.

Image Image

Tuning Tip: The Hot key to achieve connection / disconnection lieu of using the mouse is F12

Live Data

Only available when ECU is connected

Image Image

This option allows the user to connect to the ECU in a “one way” communication mode. The mode does not allow transmitting of any user settings that can change the calibration in any way. The live data display dashboards, runtime plots, gauges, pages, tabs, and more must be configured in the Open ECU/Open File modes. Generally this is performed by the dealer/installer/calibrator of the ECU as depending on the application the display changes may change. All runtime data is also available in the Live Data mode as well.

Image Image

Open File

Available anytime the software is opened

Image Image

This mode allows offline calibration editing, as well as configuration of the Live Data page.

Send File to ECU

Only available when ECU is connected

Image Image

A previously saved calibration file (either from live calibrating, or offline editing) can be sent and stored to the ECU with this option. This allows the user to update the calibration file without having to open the ECU.

Update Firmware

Only available when ECU is connected

Image Image

Use this function to update the ECU Firmware. CautionThis procedure should only be done by authorized dealers unless under strict instruction to do so otherwise. The ECU should have a stable power source during updating as it takes up to 25 min to complete.

Download ECU Log

Only available when ECU is connected

Image Image

This function downloads the ECU log. The ECU logging function is configured in the Open ECU/Open File mode inside the calibration file.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Licence Expired

Image Image

Licence Expired

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Math Expressions

A user definable mathematical equation that allows the user to generate channels for data analysis or to aid in rapidly validation tuning data. The expression is defined by a single line of text that can include most common mathematical operations and many advanced functions.

Image Image In the above example, the expression cv - (if(abs(a) < 100, b, 0)) is used.

When the Q key is pressed, the expression takes the current table cell value cv and subtracts Engine Torque (Uncorrected) b, but only if the absolute Derivative Engine Speed a is less than 100 RPM/s, otherwise it subtracts nothing. This means it will automatically fill in the frictional loss table for you but it makes sure the engine speed is stable.

Syntax

Spaces are ignored by the compiler and can be omitted or included to improve readability. There is no difference to the result.

Operator / CharacterDescriptionUsageExampleResult
Arithmetic
+Addx + y12 + 315
-Subtractx - y12 - 39
*****Multiplyx * y12 * 336
/Dividex / y12 / 34
%Modulus / Remainderx % y12 % 3 12 % 100 2
******Powerx ** y12 ** 31728
Logical
<Less Thanx < y12 < 3 12 < 340 (false) 1 (true)
>Greater Thanx > y12 > 3 12 > 341 (true) 0 (false)
==Equal Tox == y12 == 3 12 == 120 (false) 1 (true)
!=Not Equal Tox != y12 != 3 12 != 121 (true) 0 (false)
<=Less Than or Equal Tox <= y12 <= 3 12 <= 340 (false) 1 (true)
>=Greater Than or Equal Tox >= y12 >= 3 12 >= 341 (true) 0 (false)
&&Andx && y12 && 3 1 && 0 0 && 01 (true) Both sides are non zero 0 (false) 0 (false)
****Orx
!Negationx = !yx = !1 x = !0x = 0 x = 1
Bitwise
«Shift Leftx « y56 « 2224
»Shift Rightx » y56 » 214
&Bitwise Andx & y56 & 158
****Bitwise Orxy
^Bitwise XOR Bitwise Not (32 bit signed integer)x ^ y ^x56 ^ 15 ^5655 -57
Other
=Assignmentx = yx = 5Assigns value of 5 to variable “x”
,Comma. Separates expressions or function argumentsx = y, x * z min(x, y)x = 5, x * 2 min(12, 3)10 3

Variables

The letters a through h can be user assigned to any loggable ECU runtime parameter. These variables can then be used anywhere in the expression. The user assigned variables are updated with the current parameter value every time the expression is evaluated.

Some other variables such as “pi” are pre-assigned for use in the expression.

VariableTypeNote
User Variables
aAssignable Input Parameter
bAssignable Input Parameter
bAssignable Input Parameter
cAssignable Input Parameter
dAssignable Input Parameter
eAssignable Input Parameter
fAssignable Input Parameter
gAssignable Input Parameter
hAssignable Input Parameter
Time
tTime (seconds)Calculated Channels Only
dtDelta Time (seconds)Calculated Channels Only
Constants
piConstant
Special
cvCell ValueTable Math Only. Represents the value of the table cell before any math operation is performed.

It’s possible to create and assign variables within the expression. This can be useful for breaking up the expression to make it more readable.

For example these two expressions are functionally equivalent:

cv * max(a, b, c, d)
m = max(a, b, c, d), cv * m

Here two separate operations are created and separated by the comma character. First a variable called m is created and assigned the result of the max() function. Secondly the table cell cell value cv is multiplied by m. As there is no more work to do the expression returns the result of the second operation which then gets passed to the table to be used.

Variables can remember their value between iterations:

x = x + 1

The variable x is created and incremented by 1 every time the expression is evaluated.

y = 5, x = x + y

The variable y is created and assigned the constant value of 5. With every evaluation, x is increased by the value of y which in this case is 5.

NOTE: The iterative nature of variables should be considered when writing expressions that may use them.

Functions

Functions are purpose built computational blocks that take input arguments to output a result. Functions are called by their name followed by brackets containing a list of arguments separated by commas. For example:

result = func(arg1, arg2, arg3)

Some functions take a single input argument, some take more. Arguments can be any other valid syntax type such as constants, variables, other functions or logic expressions.

See the table below for a list of the available functions and their usage.

*Optional Argument

Function AbbreviationFull NameDescriptionArgumentsExample
abs(x)AbsoluteReturns the absolute (positive) value of the input. Turns a negative value into a positive. Makes no change to a value that is already positive.1. x Input valueabs(123) = 123 abs(-123) = 123
acu(x, t)AccumulatorTime based average of 100 evenly spaced samples taken over the given time ’t’ in seconds.1. x Input value 2. t Time (seconds)acu(a, 10) Returns the average of the last 10 seconds worth of the variable ‘a’. Can be used to generate accumulated load values from parameters such as Manifold Pressure or Throttle Area Demand.
av(x, y, z, *…)*AverageAverages the values of all given inputs. Requires 2 or more inputs.1. x Input Value 1 2. y Input Value 2 3. z Optional. Input Value 3 And so on…av(a, b) Returns the average of inputs ‘a’ and ‘b’. av(a, b, c, d, e, f) Returns the average of inputs ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, ’d’, ’e’, ‘f’. av(123, 45, 67) Returns 78.333
dv(x, ti)Delta ValueCalculates the rate of change in the input value over per second. Samples are taken at the specified time interval. The output is expressed in units per second.1. x Input Value 2. ti Time Interval (seconds)dv(a, 0.2) Suppose ‘a’ was 10 at the previous sample. Now, 0.2 seconds later the value of a is 15. ‘a’ has changed by +5 over 0.2 seconds. The result will be 5 / 0.2 = 25 or 25 units per second.
if(cond, true, false)**IfPerforms Logical evaluation and either outputs a boolean (0 or 1) result or it outputs the optionally provided true/false values. The function checks the value of the first argument (cond). If the value is greater than 0 then it will either return the value passed in to the second argument (true) or 1. If the cond value is 0, then it will either return the value passed in to the third argument (false) or 0.1. cond Input condition. Can be any variable, function or logic expression. 2. true Optional#8202;.* This value is returned by the if() function when the input condition evaluates to greater than 0. If a true argument is not provided, the true result defaults to 1. 3. false* Optional. This value is returned by the if() function when the input condition evaluates to zero. If a false argument is not provided, the false result defaults to 0.if(a > b) Only argument 1 provided. If the value of channel ‘a’ is greater than the value of the channel ‘b’ then the function will output 1, else it will output 0. if (a, b) Arguments 1 & 2 provided. If the value of channel ‘a’ is greater than 0, then the result will be the value of channel ‘b’, else 0 (as no 3rd argument for false is given). if(a ** 2 == 9, 10, b + 1) Arguments 1, 2, & 3 provided. If the value of the channel ‘a’ squared is equal to 9, then the result is 10, else the result is the value of channel ‘b’ plus 1.
lim(x, min, max)LimitClamps the input value to the given range limits.1. x Input Value 2. min Minimum allowed output 3. max Maximum allowed outputlim(a, 10, 90) If ‘a’ is less than 10, the output will be 10. If ‘a’ is greater than 90, the output will be 90. If ‘a’ is within the range of 10 to 90, the output will be ‘a’ unchanged.
lp(x, α)Low Pass FilterA simple low pass filter. Output = (α % of the filtered value) + (100 - α % of the new value)1. x Input Value 2. α Alpha (%)lp(a, 85) Suppose ‘a’ has a current filtered result of 95. Now the filter is given the new value of 100. The new filtered result = (95 * 0.85) + (100 * 0.15) = 80.75 + 15 = 95.75. The filter will now store 95.75 as the previous result and return 95.75 as the output. If the input was to stay at 100, after several iterations the output will arrive at 100 also.
map(x, x1, x2, y1, y2)Map / InterpolateLinearly Maps/Interpolates the input value to a new range of output values. For example if x values are voltage and y values are percentages, the function would interpolate the input voltage to the spanned output percentage.1. x Input Value 2. x1 Input Range Position 1 3. x2 Input Range Position 2 4. y1 Output Range Position 1 5. y2 Output Range Position 2map(a, 0.5. 4.5, 0, 100) If ‘a’ is 0.5, the output will be 0. If ‘a’ is 4.5 the output will be 100. If ‘a’ is 2.0, the output will be 37.5. If ‘a’ is 0.2 the output will be -7.5. If ‘a’ is 4.8 the output will be 107.5.
mapl(x, x1, x2, y1, y2)Map / Interpolate (Limited)Similar to map() however the output result is clamped to the y1, y2 range limits.1. x Input Value 2. x1 Input Range Position 1 3. x2 Input Range Position 2 4. y1 Output Range/Limit Position 1 5. y2 Output Range/Limit Position 2mapl(a, 0.5. 4.5, 0, 100) If ‘a’ is 0.5, the output will be 0. If ‘a’ is 4.5 the output will be 100. If ‘a’ is 2.0, the output will be 37.5. If ‘a’ is 0.2 the output will be 0. If ‘a’ is 4.8 the output will be 100.
max(x, y, z, …*)*Max ValueReturns the highest of any of the given input values. Requires 2 or more inputs.1. x Input Value 1 2. y Input Value 2 3. z Optional. Input Value 3 And so on…max(a, b) Returns the maximum of inputs ‘a’ or ‘b’. max(a, b, c, d, e, f) Returns the maximum of inputs ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, ’d’, ’e’, ‘f’. max(123, 45, 67) Returns 123
min(x, y, z, …*)*Min ValueReturns the lowest of any of the given input values. Requires 2 or more inputs.1. x Input Value 1 2. y Input Value 2 3. z Optional. Input Value 3 And so on…min(a, b) Returns the maximum of inputs ‘a’ or ‘b’. min(a, b, c, d, e, f) Returns the maximum of inputs ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, ’d’, ’e’, ‘f’. min(123, 45, 67) Returns 45
sqrt(x)Square RootCalculates the square root of the input value.1. x Input Valuesqrt(a) Returns square root of a sqrt(123) Returns 11.0905365
sin(x)SineCalculates the Sine of the input value.1. x Input Valuesin(a) Returns sine of a sin(123) Returns 0.83867
cos(x)CosineCalculates the Cosine of the input value.1. x Input Valuecos(a) Returns cosine of a cos(123) Returns -0.544639
tan(x)TangentCalculates the Tangent of the input value.1. x Input Valuetan(a) Returns tangent of a tan(123) Returns -1.539865

Examples

VE Table Quick Validate

cv * (a / b)
  • a = Lambda Avg
  • b = Lambda Target

This is equivalent to the operation performed when pressing the L key during live tuning. The advantage here is that the the expression can be performed using the the current log cursor position values as inputs.

Image Image

Bank 1 Trim Table Quick Validate

trim = ((a / b) - 1) * 100, cv + trim
  • a = Lambda 1*
  • b = Lambda Target*

Similar to the VE expression except that it gives a percentage offset value to be used in the bank trim table. Assumes Bank 1 is measured by Lambda 1.

First the trim is calculated, then the trim is added to the cell value

Image Image

Bank 2 Trim Table Quick Validate

trim = ((a / b) - 1) * 100, cv + trim
  • a = Lambda 2
  • b = Lambda Target

Similar to the VE expression except that it gives a percentage offset value to be used in the bank trim table. Assumes Bank 2 is measured by Lambda 2

Image Image

Frictional Loss Table

cv - (if(abs(a) < 100, b, 0))
  • a = dRPM
  • b = Engine Torque (Uncorrected)

When the engine is accelerating, torque is positive. When the engine is decelerating torque is negative. When the the engine speed is stable (unloaded free revving) the torque is 0. The frictional loss table is used to account for the internal drag of the engine rotating assembly in order to give the correct 0mn final torque value.

The expression checks the dRPM to make sure the engine is held at a near constant RPM (less than a generous 100 rpm/s in this example) where final torque should be 0nm. The abs() function is used to turn a negate dRPM value into a positive to simplify the < (less than) logic. If the dRPM check is true, the current Engine torque value is subtracted from the cell value, if not 0 is subtracted from the cell value, ie. nothing happens.

Image Image

Calculated Channels

Extreme Example: Knock Threshold Level Helper

mK = max(a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h), aK = av(a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h), dK = dv(mk, 0.1), lp(aK, if (dK <= 500, 95, 99.9)) * 3.2
  • a - h = Knk Level Cyl #

An example of using some nested expressions to generate a bit of an idea of what the ideal knock threshold value might be.

The expression finds the max knock (mK), then the average knock (aK), then the derivative of the max over 100ms. Next applies a low pass filter over the average, and adjusts the filter level depending on the derivative. Finally it multiplies the result by 3.2.

This is an example only and isn’t intended to be useful as is for any or all applications. It does however show how functions and variables can be nested in a variety of ways.

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Store Cal (F4)

The Store Cal function stores the Cal File to the ECU permanently.

It is also accessible by the F4 hotkey or from the File Tab.

Warning: Failure to Store Cal after making changes will result in lost of data.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Tips & Tricks

Tips on Improving your Emtune tuning efficiency…

Methods of validating VE Table

Auto Lambda Correction:

Utilise “L” Auto Lambda Correction feature of the software. “L” applies current Lambda Target Error % to live location in map automatically.

Manual Entry Lambda Correction:

Using “M” key “Manual Entry Lambda correction method”. “M” is pressed & the Lambda target value is imputed together with the measured value. Enter and the result is applied to the highlighted cell.

Direct Entry Lambda Correction

The maths value supplied in the target error runtime can be applied to the VE table as you would when using an excel spreadsheet, thereby correcting it. The table is highlighted & the correction manually entered.

Direct entry VE Correction Manual Maths examples:

Rich condition:

Lambda target: 0.864

Lambda 1: 0.782

Lambda Target error: 0.082

Highlight the cell to be corrected – Type 1.082 “/ “

Positive target error = division factor

Lean Condition:

Lambda target: 0.845

Lambda 1: 0.902

Lambda Target error: -0.057

Highlight the cell to be corrected – Type 1.057 “*” (Shift 8)

Negative target error = multiplication factor

Your goal should be to efficiently eliminate or minimise the error between the VE table & the Lambda target table.

Tip: To use this feature & validate the VE table, alter the dashboard to show not only the Lambda Target and Lambda 1/2, but also the Lambda Target Error.

Utilising “P” key (Pause)

Tuning tables can be quickly validated by utilising the “P” key to pause the live logging in the dashboard independent of the PC logging. This will allow you to drive through an area of a particular table, press “P” & then come back & edit where you have been.

Double clicking the mouse over the desired dashboard runtimes will allow you to move left & right through the paused data using the left & right arrow keys & will also highlight (overlay) the cells referenced in the table being validated.

“L”, “M”, and Table Maths are all available and usable as if being utilized “live” wherever the cursor is “paused”

Live logging recommences when “P” is pressed for the 2nd time.

Utilising “O” Toggle Logger Position (The Yellow Box)

Using the PC logger (F8) the tune can be interrogated against target tune parameters.

Note: Setup your logger view to show the Lambda Target Error not found in default logger layout.

Once an area has been identified that needs attention.

The cursor is moved to highlight this area.

Image Image

Returning to the referenced VE table in the tuning software.

Pressing “O” will toggle the yellow box over the referenced cell/s.

Image Image

Lambda vs Lambda target can be utilised via “M” - Manual entry lambda correction.

Image Image

Or direct entry method can be utilised.

Image Image

Working example:

Lambda Target is 0.845

Lambda 1 (La) is 0.867

Lambda 1 Target Error (La) is -0.022 % (Lean)

To correct the table simple left mouse, click the referenced cell

Start typing 1.022* (shift 8)

This multiplies the missing percentage of fuel into the VE table thereby validating the table.

Maths values are explained in dropout box once typing commences.

(Rich values are divided)

Your goal should be to efficiently eliminate or minimise the error between the VE table & the Lambda target table.

Utilising “Scatter Plot” Correction

A useful feature of the Emtune logging is the Mixture Scatter Plot.

This is an often overlooked powerful and accurate tool for validating your VE table/s.

By utilising the features of the setup, this table can be utilised as a form of histogram of engine operation.

Note: Scatter plot correction applications are not limited to only VE tables. This method of validation is easily applied to bank trims & more.

Example: Lambda 1 active / Lambda control off

Validation performed on chassis dyno

Image Image

VE Table for purpose of demonstration

The vehicle is driven and a PC log is produced recording the activity

Image Image

Raw scatter plot is produced

Image Image

Enter the Scatter Plot Setup (Right Mouse Click)

Image Image

Confirm Plot Settings

Image Image

Confirm Correction Settings

Image Image

Set appropriate filters as required

Image Image

Return to the filtered scatter plot

Image Image

Apply the correction

Image Image

Emtune with acknowledge when this is complete

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Tuning

Software Navigation

From the Welcome Screen, selecting Open File, or Open ECU (ECU Detected is required) the calibration file will be opened.

From here, you can navigate through a number of menus, tabs, sub tabs, etc.

Image Image

The Emtune software has a very systematical approach to configuration.

Start on the left side, and work your way over from left to right.

Do not skip sections. Following this practice as accurately as possible will ensure tuning process will move smoothly in the future.

** Tuning should only be done once Basic Configuration and ECU Setup is complete (Config) - See Basic Configuration

*** If Tuning Functions are not available, it is due to the Configuration not being completed (see Config)

Table tools/maths

Several hotkeys and shortcuts are available in all tables to make management of entering values quick and easy.

Hotkeys PgUp/PgDwn will increase and decrease cells. Holding shift key will increase/decrease values faster.

Using the mouse, you can select multiple cells, to change multiple cells at a time, or use the keyboard while holding the CTRL key.

With cells selected, you can:

Increase/Decrease incrementally using PgUp/Down (holding shift key will increase/decrease values faster)

Interpolate between cells using keys I, R, C (I will interpolate diagonally, R horizontally - row, C vertically - column)

Or use table maths. Typing numbers into the keyboard will allow you to add, subtract, multuply, divide, or increase/reduce %.

Image Image

Selecting a lot of cells, also holding the CTRL key, allows you to drag them around with the arrow keys to move them around the table (so easily move a line/section around the map).

Right clicking the table shows options for hot keys mentioned above, but also the ability to Save Table externally, Load table from a separate file, but also import table.

Importing a table allows you to select another calibration file, and the software will reference the cal file selected, and grab the table from that location for the current working cal file.

This is a useful tool when building new calibrations if the user is trying to bring over certain tables that mostly will cross over.

**** If Compensation (or other) Tables are not available, they must be enabled within the specific sub menu -> Fuel -> Fuel Table Control

Image Image

Fuel

Fuel section allows the user to tune multiple tables for air flow , user compensations, air and fuel mass modifiers, Lambda Target, and more.

Some noteworthy functions are :

Charge Temperature Estimation

To properly estimate actual “inlet air temperature”, the Emtron will generate a channel called “Charge Temperature”, which is calculated and offset based on a number of variables.

The Charge Temperature Estimation table is available under Tuning -> Fuel -> Compensations -> Charge Temperature Estimation

Image Image

A value of 100 will set the Charge Temperature as Engine Temperature (commonly water temp), and a value of 0 will set the Charge Temperature as Inlet Air Temperature.

A careful blending of these values will allow the user to properly estimate the charge temperature going into the engine under varying loads to anticipate heat soak scenarios, and eliminate error from the engine model.

** See KV Sample file for an example of of how the Charge Temperature Estimate Table can be used.

Charge Temperature Offset

The Charge Temperature Runtime can also be “offset” by a table under Tuning -> Fuel -> Compensations -> Charge Temperature Offset

Image Image

The purpose of this table allow the Charge Temperature runtime to gain greater accuracy based on any other variables the user deems necessary

The most common use of this table is to account for charge cooling based on fuel injected in the engine as shown above, where the ECU is using “Stoich Target”, that is a runtime generated by the ECU using the current Stoich value multiplied by the live Lambda Target value (therefore current Air to Fuel Ratio). The fuel type being used for example can vastly affect the actual AFR and subsequently offset the actual Charge Temperature

The Air to Fuel Ratio in this instance is relative to charge cooling, and how this table is being built.

Ignition

Ignition section allows the user to tune multiple tables regarding ignition control

Some noteworthy functions are :

Charge Temperature Comp Table

As mentioned in the fuel section, due to some differences in how the Charge Temperature channel is calculated in the Emtron model (particularly how it is offset-ted in the Charge Temperature Offset Table), this table must have special attention as the values for Charge Temperature may not be what the user is “used” to.

** The values may be much lower where ignition compensation must be applied than normal vs compensating using standard Inlet Air Temperature

Image Image

Ignition Advance/Retard Rate Tables

These tables located under Tuning -> Ignition -> Transient are always active

They dictate how quickly the ignition advance can be changed, and a table can be generated to slow/speed up the advance/retard rate.

The values are in degrees/second. Maximum values are 3000 degrees/second.

Image Image

Engine Functions

Engine Functions section allows the user to tune functions related to “Engine”, such as throttle body, torque, idle speed, drive by wire, etc.

Some noteworthy functions are :

Torque Management

The Torque Management section allows the user to dictate various torque settings.

One main difference is if Drive By Wire throttle is used, the targeting structure is based on a Pedal Demand -> Throttle area function.

Image Image

Please see the Drive By Wire, Throttle Body Model, and Torque Management sections for more help on these sections.

Vehicle Functions

Vehicle Functions section allows the user to tune functions related to “Vehicle”, such as EFI Relay Control, Cooling Fan, Fuel Pumps, Air Con, etc.

Some noteworthy functions are :

Vehicle Dynamics

Vehicle Dynamics section allows the user to dictate wheel sizes, gear ratios, slip channels, etc.

For advanced Motorsport Functions to correctly operate, these settings must all be properly configured.

Image Image

Gear Management

Emtron has multiple methods of Gear Detection. In this section, these detection methods can be configured.

** In order for Motorsport Functions to correctly operate, these settings must all be properly configured.

Image Image

Motorsport Functions

Motorsport Functions section allows the user to tune functions related to “Motorsport”, such as Anti-Lag, Launch Control, Gearshift Control, Traction Control, etc.

Some noteworthy functions are and more complex functions are listed below simply as a preview of these complex functions :

Image Image

** Config -> Functions -> Motorsport Functions Setup shown

When selecting Torque Limiting Launch Control, multiple types of Torque Limiting Launch are available under the tuning tab

Image Image

See Launch Control Help section for more details on different Launch Control Programs

Gearshift Control

Emtron can control multiple types of Gearshift Control (mechanical gear stick, paddle shift, etc). Once enabled, there are many settings to further refine gearshift functions and very specific and special runtimes available. This is one of the most flexible systems in the ECU.

Image Image

An example of “Upshift Gear %Position” which is the percentage between valid gear (between tolerance voltages if defined in the gear voltage input) being used to limit Ignition cut through a gearshift

Timer Functions

Timer Functions section allows the user to tune functions related to “Timers”. There are 5 user configurable timers, plus multiple standard timers, and a race timer.

Image Image

These timers generate channels that can be used in the ECU in tables, functions, etc.

User Functions

There are 10 User Functions that allow the user to create universal functions in the ECU.

These functions have multiple conditions to make them active, can be set up to run physical outputs (outputs assigned), or virtual outputs (outputs assigned as “On - No Output”), set as PWM, and even set as variable Frequency.

See Config -> Functions -> User Functions for more details on the flexibility of these functions

** User Function Output status and Duty Cycle runtimes are available to be used furthermore in other locations in the ECU.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Configuration

To enter the ECU configuration, click the Config tab at the top

Image Image

This will give access the the Engine Setup, Fuel, Ignition, Channels, Functions & Communications tabs

Image Image

The Emtune software has a very systematical approach to configuration.

Start on the left side “Engine Setup”, and work your way over from left to right.

Do not skip sections. Following this practice as accurately as possible will ensure tuning process will move smoothly in the future.

WARNING: Improper entry in any part of the setup could be detrimental to the electronics AND the hardware!

Image Image

Tuning Tip

Any increases to the accuracy of the information entered into the configuration of the ECU, will serve to reduce the level of calibration error.

The importance of this cannot be overstated if the project is to be torque modeled. What this means is you should spend the extra time to ensure all entries are facts. Example: If the engine capacity is said to be a 6.2 litres, but the actual capacity is 6162cc, it is important that the correct actual capacity is entered. Any error minimization in the configuration stage will serve to minimize the included calibration error in the tuning stage after. This is true for all configuration entries an not isolated to engine capacity. In short, if you put the effort into the configuration, your job will be easier when it comes to tuning.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Configuration

Engine Setup

Emtune has a very systematical approach to configuration.

Start on the left side “Engine Setup”, and work your way over from left to right.

Do not skip sections. Following this practice as accurately as possible will ensure tuning process will move smoothly in the future.

Improper entry in any part of the setup could be detrimental to the electronics AND the hardware!

Image Image

Setup each tab from top to bottom. See help file for explanation of each individual function, as well as help text in the respective configuration screens.

**Crank index offset MUST always be checked regardless of trigger pre-configuration.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Engine Setup

Engine Main

Image Image

Engine Type

This setting defines the two engine cycle type supported by the ECU.

4-Stroke – The most common engine type. One complete engine cycle occurs over two crankshaft revolutions (720°).

2-Stroke – One complete engine cycle occurs over one crankshaft revolution (360°).

Rotary engines are regarded as 2 stroke engines

Image Image

Engine Size

The total engine displacement, entered in cc.

This setting is critical and must be configured accurately, as the engine displacement is used by the ECU in various calculations to build the engine model.

Image Image

Compression Ratio

This value is the static compression ratio of the engine. ie: Swept volume over clearance volume.

NOTE: This input effects the Torque Model as well as the Fuel Model: Expansion Ratio calculation.

Crank RPM Entry

Used to determine the Engine Speed which is considered as cranking. Various compensations also use this value to determine when to be enabled.

The value entered must be low enough at cranking speeds to ensure the cranking compensations can be enabled.

Crank RPM Exit

Defines the engine speed above which the engine is considered to be running. Various compensations also use this value to determine when they should be enabled.

NOTE: Should you have an engine that is difficult to initially cold start, that is it doesn’t start on first crank, rather on the second or third attempt, then increasing the Crank RPM Exit in some instances can help. This allows the engine to utilize the Crank Comp Table for a little longer allowing for a faster start and quicker handover to a run condition.

Engine Speed Valid

Engine Speed is considered valid when it exceeds this value, allowing the ECU to begin Fuel and Ignition control.

Engine Speed Invalid

Engine Speed is considered invalid when it falls below this value, causing the ECU to stop Fuel and Ignition control.


Tuning Tip. Any increase in the accuracy of the information entered into the ECU configuration will help reduce calibration error.

The importance of entering the correct engine information cannot be overstated if the project is to be torque modelled. Extra time should be spent to ensure that all configuration entries are accurate.

For example, if an engine is described as a 6.2-litre engine but its actual capacity is 6162 cc, the correct value of 6162 cc should be entered. Any errors introduced during the configuration stage will carry through into the tuning process and contribute to calibration error.

This applies to all configuration entries, not just engine capacity. In short, the more effort you put into getting the configuration correct, the easier and more accurate the tuning process will be.


Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Firing Order Setup

Firing Order Setup

This table is used to define the engine firing order and the base angle for each cylinder.

Most engines are even-fire, meaning that each firing event occurs at an equal crankshaft angle from the previous firing event.

Image Image

For example, a 4-cylinder, 4-stroke, even-fire engine commonly uses a firing order of 1-3-4-2.

The corresponding base angles are: 0° – 180° – 360° – 540°

For even-fire engines, the Generate Base Angles function can be used to automatically calculate the base angles once the firing order is entered.

Image Image

For odd-fire engines, the base angles are not equally spaced and must be entered manually, as shown below for a Dodge Viper application.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Bank Cylinder Setup

Bank Cylinder Setup

Assigns each cylinder to Bank 1 or Bank 2. This allows the ECU to determine which cylinders the bank-specific fuel or ignition trims are applied to.

Image Image

Used in the Bank controlled Fuel Models 5-7.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Air Mass

Air Mass Model Setup

Overview

The Air Mass Model defines how the ECU calculates the mass of air entering the engine.

Accurate air mass calculation is critical for two primary functions within the ECU:

  1. The calculated air mass is used to determine the required fuel mass to achieve the commanded Lambda Target, before being converted into an injector pulse width using the injector configuration data.

  2. The calculated air mass is used by the Engine Torque Model to estimate engine torque. Accurate air mass calculation is therefore essential to ensure Torque Control and Torque Reduction functions operate correctly.

Important Notes on Air Mass.
  • Throttle Torque Reduction can only operate when Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) is enabled within the Air Mass Model. TMF is required to accurately calculate the change in air mass across the throttle plate during throttle movements and can therefore provide accurate throttle torque reduction control.

  • The selected Air Mass Model forms the foundation of the ECU fuel and torque calculations and should be configured before starting engine tuning.

  • The Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) air mass model cannot be used as a standalone air mass calculation and must always be blended with a secondary air mass model. At throttle pressure ratios above 0.9 (Post-Throttle Pressure / Pre-Throttle Pressure), the pressure differential across the throttle body becomes very small, significantly reducing the sensitivity and resolution of the TMF calculation. This requirement is referenced multiple times throughout the documentation due to its importance when configuring TMF based air mass models.


Different engine combinations may benefit from different air mass calculation strategies. Emtron provides several Air Mass Models to suit a wide range of applications. The ECU can calculate engine air mass using the following Air Mass Models:

Setup Options

ValueAir Mass Model
0Speed Density (MAP)
1Speed Density (BAP)
2Mass Air Flow (MAF)
3Air Mass Modelled + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend
4Speed Density (MAP) + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend
5Emtron Air Mass Model (Custom)

Air Mass Model Descriptions

Speed Density (MAP)

Calculates engine air mass using the Ideal Gas Law based on Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), Charge Temperature, Engine Displacement, and Volumetric Efficiency (VE).

See here for more information: MAP air mass

Speed Density (BAP)

Calculates engine air mass using Barometric Absolute Pressure (BAP) instead of manifold pressure. This mode is typically used on naturally aspirated engines operating with individual throttle bodies (ITBs), where manifold pressure is not a reliable indicator of engine load.

See here for more information: BAP air mass


Mass Air Flow (MAF)

Calculates engine air mass directly from the measured airflow provided by the configured Mass Air Flow sensor.

See here for more information: MAF air mass


Air Mass Modelled + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend

The final engine air mass is generated by blending the calculated Air Mass Modelled value and Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) calculation using the ratio defined by the Air Mass Blend Table.

When this mode is enabled the The Air Mass Blend Table becomes active:
Tuning -> Fuel -> Air Mass Model Blending Table

  • 0% Blend = 100% Air Mass Modelled
  • 100% Blend = 100% Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)

See here for more information: TMF air mass
See here for more information: Modelled air mass


Speed Density (MAP) + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend

The final engine air mass is generated by blending Speed Density (MAP) value and Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) calculation using the ratio defined by the Air Mass Blend Table.

When this mode is enabled the The Air Mass Blend Table becomes active:
Tuning -> Fuel -> Air Mass Model Blending Table

  • 0% Blend = 100% Speed Density
  • 100% Blend = 100% Throttle Mass Flow

See here for more information: TMF air mass
See here for more information: MAP air mass


Important Notes on TMF Blending.
  • At throttle pressure ratios above approximately 0.9 (Post-Throttle Pressure / Pre-Throttle Pressure), the pressure differential across the throttle body becomes very small, reducing the resolution of the Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) calculation. This is why TMF must always be blended with an alternative air mass calculation method and cannot be used as the sole air mass model for engine operation.

  • The Air Mass Blend Table should therefore progressively transition from TMF to an alternative air mass calculation method as the throttle pressure ratio approaches 1.0

  • The Air Mass Blend Table forms part of the engine air mass model and must be finalised before tuning starts.

  • TMF tuning is accomplished by validating the Throttle Body Area Table

  • The TMF Correction Table can be used to make small adjustments to the TMF calculation if required. In most applications, little or no correction should be necessary.


Emtron Air Mass Model (Custom)

Uses the custom Emtron air mass model. See here for more information: Emtron air mass


Air Mass Blend Table

When Air Mass Model 3, 4 or 5 is selected, the Air Mass Blend table is enabled.

This table determines the contribution(ratio) of each air mass model used to calculate the final engine air mass.

Intermediate values proportionally blend between the selected air mass models.

See here for more information on Air Mass Blend Table : Air Mass Blend Table

Air Mass Bank Control

This option is only available using the Emtron Air Mass Model. See Emtron Air Mass Model

Air Mass Runtimes

All ECU air mass related runtimes can be viewed from: ECU Runtime -> Air Mass

Note on Units: Air Mass Flow is expressed in units of g/s (grams per second), while Air Mass is expressed in units of g/cyl (grams per cylinder), representing the mass of air trapped in the cylinder during a single engine cycle.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Speed Density (BAP)

Speed Density (BAP Sensor)

Speed Density (BAP) mode is predominantly used in TPS only tuning methods.

This mode uses the same Fuel Model and equations as listed for mode 0 (Speed Density (MAP)), the only difference is the MAP sensor is replaced with the BAP sensor.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Speed Density (MAP)

Overview

The ECU’s primary Air Mass Model is Speed Density (MAP Sensor).. The basis of this calculation is derived using the Ideal Gas Law; PV = nRT

The ECU calculates the injection time for speed density using the following information:

  • Displacement volume per cylinder (cc).
  • Intake Manifold Air Pressure - MAP(kPa)
  • Lambda Target (La)
  • Stoichiometric Ratio of the Fuel (Stoich)
  • Injector Flow rate (cc/min)
  • Charge Temperature (DegC)
  • Fuel Density (g/ml)
  • Fuel Pressure (kPa)
  • Engine VE (%)
  • Gas Constant - R = 287J/Kg/K for Dry Air.

Image Image

Using these inputs, the ECU calculates the mass of air trapped within each cylinder for every engine cycle. The calculated air mass is then used to determine the required fuel mass to achieve the commanded Lambda Target, before being converted into an injector pulse width.

ℹ️ Important

  • Since the air mass is calculated rather than measured directly, the accuracy of the Speed Density model depends heavily on correct calibration of the Volumetric Efficiency (VE) table(s).

See here for more information: VE Tables

  • In the predefined Speed Density (MAP) Air Mass Model, the pressure source is fixed to the Manifold Pressure input channel and cannot be changed.

  • If an alternative pressure source is required, this is only available when using the Emtron Air Mass Model (Mode 5):

    • Set Air Mass Model = Emtron Air Mass Model
    • Configure Calculation 1 or Calculation 2 as Speed Density
    • Configure the desired pressure source from: Config → Air Mass → Speed Density Setup → Speed Density MAP Source

Speed Density Setup

The Speed Density setup parameters are configured from: Config → Air MAss → Speed Density (SD) Setup

The following settings are used to configure the Speed Density Air Mass Model.

VE Table Control

Selects the method used to generate the final Volumetric Efficiency (VE) value used by the Speed Density calculation (Non-Banked Mode).

This setting is only available when the selected Air Mass Model uses Speed Density.

ValueMode
0Not Available
1Table 1
2Table 2
3Not Available
4Cal Slot
5Not Available
6Z-Axis
7VE Blend (VE Table 1 / VE Table 2)

Table 1: Uses VE Table 1 exclusively for all engine operating conditions.

Table 2: Uses VE Table 2 exclusively for all engine operating conditions.

Cal Slot: Allows the active VE table to be switched dynamically in real time using the Calibration (Cal) Slot Table function. See : Tuning → Cal Control

Z-Axis: Enables a user configurable third operating axis to blend or switch between VE Table 1 and VE Table 2. The Z-axis can use any available ECU runtime making it suitable for applications such as:

  • Variable camshaft systems (VTEC/VVL)
  • Alternate fuel calibrations

VE Blend: Uses the VE Blend Table to generate the final VE value by blending between VE Table 1 and VE Table 2.

  • 0.0% = All VE Table 1
  • 50.0% = Equal blend of VE Table 1 and VE Table 2
  • 100.0% = All VE Table 2

Speed Density Charge Temperature Enable

When enabled, the ECU includes Charge Temperature in the Speed Density air mass calculation. The ECU automatically corrects the calculated air mass based on Charge Temperature Estimate using the Ideal Gas Law. For this reason, the Charge Temperature Compensation Tables should initially be configured to zero (not used).

When disabled, the Speed Density model assumes a fixed charge temperature of 20°C and the Charge Temperature Compensation Tables are therefore required to provide the necessary fuel compensation.

Recommended Setting: ON

VE Expansion Ratio

The VE Expansion Ratio feature uses the relationship between:

  • Exhaust Manifold Pressure (EMAP)
  • Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
  • Engine Static Compression Ratio

to correct the effective volumetric efficiency of the engine as exhaust backpressure changes.

This is particularly beneficial on turbocharged engines operating at high boost pressures where increasing exhaust backpressure can significantly influence cylinder filling efficiency.

Exhaust manifold pressure can be sourced from:

ValueSource
0Off
1EMAP Sensor 1
2EMAP Estimation Table
3EMAP Sensor 1 / 2 Average
  • EMAP Sensor 1 uses the measured Exhaust Manifold Pressure 1 input.
  • EMAP Estimation Table generates an estimated exhaust pressure using the configured Exhaust Pressure Estimated (EMAP) Table.
  • EMAP Sensor 1 / 2 Average uses the average of Exhaust Manifold Pressure Bank 1 and Bank 2 sensors.

Exahust Pressure Estimated Reference: Tuning view -> Air Mass -> Exhaust Pressure Estimation Table.

Speed Density MAP Source

Selects the pressure source used by the Speed Density calculation. This setting is ONLY available when the selected Air Mass Model is Emtron Air Mass Model.

For all predefined Air Mass Models this setting defaults to the Manifold Pressure input and cannot be modified.

The following pressure sources are available:

ValuePressure Source
0Off
1Barometric Pressure
2Manifold Pressure
3Manifold Pressure - Bank 1
4Manifold Pressure - Bank 2
5Manifold Pressure - Bank 1 / 2 Average
6Boost Pressure
7Boost Pressure - Bank 1
8Boost Pressure - Bank 2
9Boost Pressure - Bank 1 / 2 Average
10MAP Estimate
11User Pressure 1
12User Pressure 2
13User Pressure 3
14User Pressure 4

Speed Density MAP Bank 1 and Bank 2 Source.

Selects the pressure source used for each individual bank Speed Density calculation.

This setting is only available when:

  • The selected Air Mass Model is Emtron Air Mass Model
  • Air Mass Bank Control is enabled

The same pressure source options described in Speed Density MAP Source are available for both Bank 1 and Bank 2 calculations.


Example:

  • MAP = 252kPa
  • Charge Temperature = 30.7 DegC
  • Volume Per Cylinder = 666.6
  • Stoich Ratio = 9.9
  • Lambda Target = 0.785
  • Engine VE = 96.6 %

Fuel Mass (g) = 0.2395

In this basic example, if the cylinder achieves 96.6% volumetric efficiency, then 0.2395 grams of fuel is required to achieve a Lambda Target of 0.785.

The VE Table(s) define the volumetric efficiency of the engine at varying engine speeds and loads and represent the True VE of the engine. A typical table is shown in Figure 1 for a turbo charged engine.

Fuel VE Table Image Image Figure 1

Also, the Stoichiometric Ratio will vary with Fuel Type. A Single Zone if the fuel type is fixed (Figure 2) can be used or a Table allowing the ECU to constantly correct for varying alcohol content. See Figure 3.

Stoich Ratio Setup (single)
Image Image
Figure 2

Stoich Ratio Setup (table)
Image Image
Figure 3


Notes on Effective Pusle width

Once the required Fuel Mass has been determined from the calculated Air Mass, the ECU calculates the effective injector pulse width using:

  • Injector Size
  • Fuel Density. Fuel density is used to convert between fuel mass and fuel volume and can be a function of both Fuel Temperature and Alcohol Content. A typical Fuel Density table is shown below in Figure 4
  • Fuel Pressure Correction. Fuel Pressure Correction is based on the injector flow relationship described by Bernoulli’s Equation and allows the effective injector flow rate to be adjusted as the differential pressure across the injector changes.

Note: Fuel Pressure Correction is only applied when enabled using the Config -> Fuel -> Fuel Main → Fuel Pressure Corr. setting.

Fuel Density Table
Image Image
Figure 4

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAF)

Overview

The Air Flow Sensor(s) provides a measured Air Mass Flow in g/s. The ECU then converts this into air mass per cylinder (g/cyl) giving actual Air Mass into the Engine.

The following MAF input channels can be used:

  • Mass Air Flow Sensor(s) 1 and 2
  • Mass Air Flow Bank Sensor(s) 1 and 2 can be used

The ECU will search which channel(s) are enabled and use those inputs. “Mass Air Flow Sensor” takes priority over “Mass Air Flow Bank Sensor”. For example if both

Mass Air Flow Sensor1 and Mass Air Flow Sensor2 input channels are configured the ECU will automatically use both inputs.

MAF systems are more flexible in their ability to compensate for engine changes(like altitude and IAT) since they actually measure airflow instead of calculating it like the Speed Density Fuel Model. It also greatly reduces the tune time as you no longer need to adjust the fueling based on the VE of the Engine… its automatically accounted for by the MAF sensor.

However they also have limitations around restriction and sensor range on high power engines.

Once the Mass Air has been measured, if the MAF requires further scaling this can be done using a 3D Table. In the real world “small” corrections will need to be applied. This can be done using the Secondary Load Table which will allow a +/- percentage correction to be applied.

A Typical example is shown in below. Table Control should be used to put the Secondary Load Table into this “special” mode shown below

Secondary Load Table used for MAF Sensor Image Image

Table Control for Secondary Load Table Image Image

Once the Air Mass has been determined, the Stoichiometric Ratio and Lambda Target are used to generate a Fuel Mass (g). The Stoichiometric Ratio will vary with Fuel Type. A Single Zone if the fuel type is fixed can be used or a Table allowing the ECU to constantly correct for varying alcohol content.

Once the Fuel Mass is determined, the Effective Injector Pulse Width can be calculated using:

  • Injector Size
  • Fuel Density. Fuel Density can be a function of both Fuel Temperate and Alcohol Content.
  • Fuel Pressure Correction. The Fuel Pressure Correction is a Fluid Dynamics equation. It allows the injector flow rate to be adjusted as the differential pressure across the injector changes. NOTE: This correction MUST be enabled using the “Fuel Model : Fuel Pressure” setting

Flow Chart Overview for Mass Air Flow Sensor Fuel Model:

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Throttle Mass Flow

Overview

Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) as the name indicates, is the rate at which air mass is flowing through a throttle body in units of grams/second (g/s). Using the throttle body size, throttle area, temperature, pre and post throttle pressures,the ECU can very accurately calculate air flow through the throttle body and therefore into the engine; this is known as the TMF Calculation. Other sensors that also generate air mass flow (g/s) data are Manifold Pressure and MAF sensors. The TMF Calculation is just another method of determining air mass flow and has benefits over MAP and MAF as discussed further down.

The image below illustrates the basic elements required to calculate TMF.

Image Image

Getting into more detail, the flow through a throttle body is governed by three physical elements, Conversation of mass, Newtons second law of motion for fluids and Conservation of energy. By combining these elements the ECU can model the flow of fluid through the throttle body accounting for throttle plate thickness and throttle shaft size. By then including real-time data such as the pressure ratio across the throttle plate and the instantaneous throttle area, the ECU can precisely calculate the mass flow rate through a throttle body.

Although these calculation are complex, the TMF setup process for the user is kept as simple as possible with the following inputs and setup required:

Sensor Inputs required

  1. Pressure Before the throttle Plate
  2. Pressure After the throttle Plate
  3. Temperature

Setting required

  1. Throttle Body Size
  2. Throttle Area to Servo Position Correlation Table (Throttle Body Area Table)

The TMF calculation can be summarised by the following equation:

Throttle Mass Flow (g/s) = ( Pafter /  Pbefore)  x Throttle Area x  Modelled throttle body fluid dynamics equation

Settings

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Mass Flow Setup

Image Image

Throttle Mass Flow Enable

Allows the TMF function to be enabled. At this point the ECU is only calculating air mass flow into the engine. Once setup other functions like the Fuel Model and Idle Speed Control can be configured to use the TMF calculated air mass data.

Select which type of throttle system you have:

1x DBW Throttle

2x DBW Throttle

1x Cable Throttle

Throttle Mass Idle Valve Enable

Enables the Idle Valve Area to be accounted for in the TMF calculation; the Throttle Body Area AND Idle Valve Area are used to give a Total Area.

Normally only required on a Cable Throttle when an external Idle Air Bleed is used.

Throttle Before Plate Pressure

Pressure source before throttle plate

  • Commonly Boost Pressure
  • Also referred to as Charge Pressure

Normally aspirated vehicles can use Barometric Pressure as Pre Throttle pressure source

Throttle After Plate Pressure

Pressure source after throttle plate

  • Commonly Manifold Pressure

Throttle Temperature Source

The Air temperature input used in the TMF Calculation

Throttle Body Size

The Throttle Body inside diameter in millimeters.

See Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Body Setup.

Throttle Body Area

Gives the direct relationship between Throttle Area and Servo Position. See Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Body Area Table


Throttle Mass Flow Runtimes

The following TMF calculated runtimes are generated. See the Runtime menu (F3) Engine Data Calculated tab.

Image Image

  • Throttle Air Mass calculations report in units of g/s or g/cyl
  • Throttle Pressure Ratio is the ratio of Pre Throttle Pressure sensing vs Post Throttle pressure sensing (Boost Pressure vs MAP Pressure most commonly)
  • Throttle Eff Area is the calculated Throttle Area using the Servo Position and the Throttle Body Area lookup table.

All these runtimes can be utilized within other functions.


Functions that can utilize the TMF Calculation

The following functions can use the air mass data generated from the TMF calculation:

Fuel Model

Option 3: Blend - MAP Modelled + Throttle Mass Flow. TMF Fuel Model calculations can offer advantages when the throttle pressure ratio is low (partial throttle) and respond much faster in transient conditions.

For more information see the Fuel Model section.

Idle Speed Control

Option 6: DBW 1 TMF

Option 7: DBW 1+2 TMF

This allows the Idle Speed control to target Mass Flow Rate of g/s. The Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) idle speed control function delivers extremely accurate and rapid idle calculation based on actual engine’s airflow requirements. See TMF Idle Speed Control section for more information

Launch Control

Option 2: Torque Limiting.

The TMF is used to control throttle plate position to achieve a target torque and target launch engine speed.


Tuning TMF

Once TMF is appropriate set up, it can make mapping the engine when it is in use very fast. Using TMF wherever possible is strongly advised by Emtron, especially depending on what kind of dynamometer being used, test conditions, and more – often part throttle and proper transient setup is often forgiven due to time constraints.

Version 1.0

Due to strictly calculating airflow via pressure ratio, the calculation will become invalid at a near equal pressure ratio through the throttle.

Gradually accelerate the engine under load and increase to increase the throttle area demand/effective area.

** Final air mass calculation which can be affected by engine speed (and more) can affect the optimal blend point. This is why most default configurations for the Fuel Model Blend Table include Air Mass Final runtimes.

Image Image

In this particular case the TMF signal at around 0.830 throttle pressure ratio is being unusable.

At this same moment, the Air Mass Modelled/blended calculation is stable and can be blended in.

And/or TMF Out-flowing can generate correct TMF values.

TMF Outflowing calculates TMF airflow when pressure ratio cannot.

Image Image

Image Image

Improper “Outflow Scaler” setting. Adjust Throttle Mass Flow Outflow Scaler to correct

Image Image

Throttle Mass Flow Air Flow values can only be compared to validated/tuned air flow values (tuned) such as MAP Air Mass or MAF Air Mass.

TMF Correction Table

This correction table essentially exists to help remove an error remaining in the system across a wide variety of load & rpm conditions.

Image Image

Image Image

Demonstrating error in TMF Calculation that needs to be corrected in TMF Correction Table

Tuning the Throttle Body Area Table

The Throttle Body Area table tells the ECU how much actual throttle area is effective at different throttle positions. This is key to the ECUs further Torque Managing functions, as accurate air mass measurement and actual engine torque go hand in hand.

For torque management, Throttle Area Demand can be manipulated which will be directly proportional to air mass when this is configured correctly

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Body Area Table

Image Image

This 2D table is all that is needed to appropriately map the given throttle area vs throttle position. As mentioned previously, this allows for extremely fast and accurate mapping of the engine when TMF is active.

It is important to understand that the Pedal Demand and other targeting of throttle area will target the "unit location" in this table, which will then correspond to the DBW Servo Position.  

This means, there could be little relationship between Throttle Area Demand and actual DBW Servo Position on fully tuned setups.

Blend tables must be configured completely before tuning

There are multiple ways to calibrate the appropriate throttle area.

Method 1 – Torque verification

With calculated torque channels configured and functional, tuning the Engine Torque (TMF) channels to match the standard Engine Torque channels will allow full mapping of the Throttle Area table. See Torque Management Tuning

Method 2 – Matching other forms of Air Mass measurement

If the application is using a calibrated MAF sensor. Then the throttle area % can be adjusted and matched to TMF air mass VS MAF air mass at different throttle/DBW servo positions.

The same can be done matching TMF air mass VS MAP air mass

MAF/MAP air mass must be validly running the engine - running the commanded lambda target, etc

Method 3 – Matching Lambda

If no MAF sensor is available, setting fuel trims to 0 (or near 0), you can adjust the throttle area to match the target mixture very quickly.

Some extreme applications where live Lambda is unstable may be more difficult to map with Method 3

💡️ Tuning Tip Per the Matching Lambda validation method, the Throttle Area Table is used to quickly tune the engine operating in TMF by simply manipulating the table at the various throttle areas to match the Lambda Target Table values for that given load. When the correct air fuel ratio is achieved, the Throttle Area Table is essentially validated for the purpose of running the engine. To do this the wideband lambda control should be turned off and the blend bias toward TMF be set to 100%.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Air Mass Modelled

Overview

Air Mass Modelling allows the ECU to generate a custom Air Mass Modelled (g/cyl) runtime by blending two independent air mass calculations together. The “Blend Table” determines the blend ratio between both parameters.

The resulting Air Mass Modelled runtime can be used throughout the ECU, including as the primary air mass source for the Fuel Mass Calculation and Engine Torque Model.

This provides a flexible method of constructing advanced air mass calculation strategies that are not possible using the predefined Air Mass Models alone.

The configuration takes place in: Config -> Air Mass -> Air Mass Modelled Setup. See Air Mass Modelled Setup

The Air Mass Modelled Blend Table is configured from: Tuning → Fuel → Air Mass Model Blend Table

Air Mass Modeling allows the ECU to blend different methods of air mass calculation to generate the Air Mass Modeled runtime

Air Mass Modelled Setup

Image Image

The Air Mass Modelled Setup determines the two air mass calculations used to generate the final Air Mass Modelled runtime.

Two independent inputs are available:

  • Air Mass Modelled Blend Parameter 1
  • Air Mass Modelled Blend Parameter 2

Air Mass Modelled Blend Parameters have the following options. Select the two air mass calculations that will be blended together to generate the final Air Mass Modelled runtime:

ValueBlend Parameter
0Off
1Manifold Pressure Sensor
2Manifold Pressure Bank 1
3Manifold Pressure Bank 2
4Manifold Pressure + Bank 1 Sensor Average
5Manifold Pressure + Bank 2 Sensor Average
6Manifold Pressure Bank 1 / Bank 2 Average
7MAF Meter 1
8MAF Meter 2
9MAF Meter Bank 1
10MAF Meter Bank 2
11MAF Meter Bank 1 / Bank 2 Average
12Throttle Mass Flow 1
13Throttle Mass Flow 2
14Throttle Mass Flow 1 / 2 Average
15Manifold Pressure Estimate

Air Mass Modelled Blend Parameter 1

Select the method of air mass calculation for Parameter 1

Air Mass Modelled Blend Parameter 2

Select the method of air mass calculation for Parameter 2

A common application is blending between Manifold Pressure Sensor and Manifold Pressure Estimate (see further help on MAP Estimate).

If blending is not required, configure both parameters to use the same air mass source or configure the blend table to fully favour the desired calculation method.

Air Mass Modelled Blend Table

Image Image

The example below shows Speed Density configured as Parameter 1 and Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) configured as Parameter 2.

The Air Mass Modelled Blend Table is a three-dimensional table with configurable axes that determines the blend ratio between the two selected Air Mass Modelled parameters.

  • 0.0% = All Parameter 1
  • 100.0% = All Parameter 2

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Air Mass Model Blend Table

Overview

The Air Mass Blend Table defines the contribution of two air mass calculations used to generate the final engine air mass value.

The table output is expressed as a percentage and determines the weighting applied to each air mass calculation based on the selected Air Mass Model configuration.

A value of:

  • 0.0% uses 100% of the primary air mass calculation.
  • 100.0% uses 100% of the secondary air mass calculation.
  • 50.0% uses an equal contribution from both calculations.

This allows the ECU to transition smoothly between two air mass calculation methods as engine operating conditions change, combining the advantages of each model over different areas of the engines operating range.

The Air Mass Blend Table is configured from:

Tuning → Fuel → Air Mass Model Blend Table


Air Mass Model 3: Air Mass Modelled + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend**

  • 0.0% → 100% Air Mass Modelled
  • 100.0% → 100% Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)

Air Mass Model 4: Speed Density (MAP) + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend**

  • 0.0% → 100% Speed Density (MAP)
  • 100.0% → 100% Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)

Air Mass Model 5: Emtron Air Mass Model

  • 0.0% → 100% Air Mass Model Calculation 1
  • 100.0% → 100% Air Mass Model Calculation 2

The calculation methods used by Calculation 1 and Calculation 2 are configured from the Emtron Air Mass Model setup page.

ℹ️ Important Note: Air Mass Validation*

When an Air Mass Blend mode is enabled, both air mass calculations continue to operate simultaneously regardless of the blend ratio currently being applied.

This allows the individual air mass calculations to be logged and compared directly against one another.

If both air mass models have been calibrated correctly, the calculated air mass values should closely overlay one another when operating under the same engine conditions.

For example, when using Speed Density + TMF Blend, the calculated Speed Density Air Mass and TMF Air Mass should produce similar air mass values for a given engine speed and load condition.

Significant differences between the two calculations typically indicate calibration errors within one of the air mass models, such as:

  • Volumetric Efficiency (VE) calibration errors
  • TMF model calibration errors
  • Throttle Body Area table errors
  • Charge Temperature model errors
  • Sensor scaling or sensor placement issues

Comparing multiple air mass models in this manner provides a powerful method for validating the engine air mass calibration and improving overall model accuracy.

Below is an example datalog illustrating the correlation between the calculated Speed Density and TMF air mass values under the same operating conditions.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron Air Mass Model

Overview

The Emtron Air Mass Model allows the ECU air mass calculation to be customised using one or two independent air mass calculation methods.

Most applications can be accurately modelled using the predefined Air Mass Models (0 to 4) and no further customisation is required. The Emtron Air Mass Model is intended for advanced applications requiring custom air mass calculations or blending between multiple air mass calculation methods.

Two independent air mass calculations are available:

  • Air Mass Model Calculation 1
  • Air Mass Model Calculation 2

Each calculation can be configured to use one of the following air mass calculation methods:

ValueCalculation Method
0Off
1Speed Density
2Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAF)
3Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)
4Air Mass Modelled

Single Calculation Mode

If only a single air mass model is required, configure Calculation 1 as required and set Calculation 2 to Off.

In this configuration, the ECU uses the output of Calculation 1 as the final engine air mass value.

Dual Calculation Blend Mode

For applications requiring the advantages of multiple air mass calculation methods, both Calculation 1 and Calculation 2 may be enabled simultaneously.

When both calculations are enabled, the ECU uses the Air Mass Model Blend Table to determine the contribution of each calculation to the final air mass value.

  • 0.0% Blend = 100% Calculation 1
  • 100.0% Blend = 100% Calculation 2
  • 50.0% Blend = Equal contribution from Calculation 1 and Calculation 2

This allows the ECU to transition smoothly between two air mass calculation methods as engine operating conditions change, combining the advantages of each model over different areas of the operating range.

Application Examnple: Speed Density + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)

A common application of the Emtron Air Mass Model is blending Speed Density and Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) calculations to take advantage of the strengths of each method.

At low Pressure Ratios (PR) across the throttle body, such as idle, cruise and part-throttle operation, Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) provides superior airflow estimation due to the strong relationship between throttle pressure drop and mass flow.

As the throttle opens and the pressure ratio across the throttle approaches 1.0, the pressure drop across the throttle body becomes very small and the accuracy and sensitivity of TMF reduces. Under these conditions, Speed Density generally provides a more accurate estimation of cylinder air mass.

The Air Mass Model Blend Table can therefore be configured to:

  • Use predominantly TMF at low pressure ratios.
  • Progressively transition towards Speed Density as the pressure ratio approaches 1.0.
  • Operate using predominantly Speed Density during high load and wide open throttle operation.

This approach combines the excellent transient response characteristics of TMF with the steady-state accuracy of Speed Density.

See here for more informationAir Mass Blend Table


ℹ️ Important Notes on TMF Blending

  • At throttle pressure ratios above approximately 0.9 (Post-Throttle Pressure / Pre-Throttle Pressure), the pressure differential across the throttle body becomes very small, reducing the resolution of the Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) calculation. This is why TMF must always be blended with an alternative air mass calculation method and cannot be used as the sole air mass model for engine operation.

  • The Air Mass Blend Table should therefore progressively transition from TMF to an alternative air mass calculation method as the throttle pressure ratio approaches 1.0.

  • The Air Mass Blend Table forms part of the engine air mass model and must be finalised before tuning starts.

  • TMF tuning is accomplished by validating the Throttle Body Area Table

  • The TMF Correction Table can be used to make small adjustments to the TMF calculation if required. In most applications, little or no correction should be necessary.


Air Mass Bank Control

Air Mass Bank Control allows the ECU to independently calculate the engine air mass for each cylinder bank. This option is only available using the Emtron Air Mass Model.

When enabled, each bank operates as an independent air mass model and requires the appropriate sensors and inputs to support bank-specific airflow calculations.

Typical examples include:

  • Independent inlet manifolds.
  • Dual throttle body systems.
  • Dual plenum engines.
  • Engines equipped with bank specific pressure, temperature or airflow sensors.

ℹ️ Important Note: Bank Control Notes

1) Engines with inlet manifolds connected by a balance tube or crossover passage may not exhibit true banked airflow behaviour. Any pressure differential between the manifolds will result in airflow transfer through the balance passage, reducing the effectiveness and accuracy of independent bank air mass calculations.

2) Air Mass Bank Control is available for all Air Mass Model types.

2) Ensure the Bank Cylinder Setup table is configured correctly before enabling Bank Mode.

3) Air Mass Bank Control is not compatible with Staged Injection operation.

For more information refer to Bank Cylinder Setup

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Air Mass Modifier Table

The Air Mass Modifier Table is enabled via Tuning -> Fuel Table Control -> Fuel Modifier Tables

Image Image

Values in this table modify the ECUs Final Air Mass directly as a percentage

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Bank Mass Air Flow Sensor

Image Image

The ECU Independently controls the Fueling for the Engines Banks 1 and 2 using either two MAF Sensors . Required when there

is no common plenum between the cylinders banks.

Make sure the “Bank Cylinder Setup” Table is correctly initialised.

  • The Input “Mass Air Flow Meter 1” is used to control the Fueling on Bank 1.
  • The Input “Mass Air Flow Meter 2” is used to control the Fueling on Bank 2

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Banked Speed Density

Image Image

The ECU Independently controls the Fueling for the Engines Banks 1 and 2 using two MAP Sensors . Required when there is no common plenum between the cylinders banks.

Make sure the “Bank Cylinder Setup” Table is correctly initialised.

  • The Input channel “Manifold Pressure - Bank 1” is used to control the Fueling on Bank 1.
  • The Input channe; “Manifold Pressure - Bank 2” is used to control the Fueling on Bank 2.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Exhaust Pressure Estimate

For use when no Exhaust Pressure sensor is available.

Exhaust Pressure Estimate Setup

  • 0: OFF
  • 1: ON

Exhaust Pressure Estimate Table

3D table that with configurable axis to tune the Exhaust Pressure Estimate.

Units = kPa

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Manifold Pressure Estimate

Generates a Manifold Pressure Estimate using a % Scaling table on the selected parameter.

Manifold Pressure Estimate Setup

0: OFF

Function is off

1: Table Value

Manifold Pressure Estimate Table = Raw Value

Table value = 50.8%

Manifold Pressure Estimate = 50.8 kPa (1:1)

2: % Barometric Pressure

Table value = 50.8%

Barometric Pressure = 96.8kPa

Manifold Pressure Estimate = 96.8kPa x 50.8% = 49.1kPa

3: % Manifold Pressure

Table value = 50.8%

Manifold Pressure = 96.8kPa

Manifold Pressure Estimate = 96.8kPa x 50.8% = 49.1kPa

4: % Manifold Pressure Bank 1/2 Average

Table value = 50.8%

Manifold Pressure Bank 1/2 Average = 96.8kPa

Manifold Pressure Estimate = 96.8kPa x 50.8% = 49.1kPa

5: % Boost Pressure

Table value = 50.8%

Boost Pressure = 253.6kPa

Manifold Pressure Estimate = 253.6kPa x 50.8% = 128.8kPa

6: % Boost Pressure Bank 1/2 Average

Table value = 50.8%

Boost Pressure Bank 1/2 Average = 253.6kPa

Manifold Pressure Estimate = 253.6kPa x 50.8% = 128.8kPa

Manifold Pressure Estimate Table

3D table that with configurable axis to tune the Manifold Pressure Estimate

Units = % and correspond to Manifold Pressure Estimate Setup parameter

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAF) + AirMass Modelled (Blend)

Image Image

A Blend Table generates a Final Air Mass using a ratio from the MAF Sensor and Air Mass Modelled.

The following MAF input channels can be used:

  • Mass Air Flow Sensor(s) 1 and 2
  • Mass Air Flow Bank Sensor(s) 1 and 2 can be used

The ECU will search which channel(s) are enabled and use those inputs. “Mass Air Flow Sensor” takes priority over “Mass Air Flow Bank Sensor”. For example if both

Mass Air Flow Sensor1 and Mass Air Flow Sensor2 input channels are configured the ECU will automatically use both inputs.

The fuel model blending control table is accessed from : Tuning -> Fuel -> Fuel Model Blending Control

Image Image

Image Image

0% = Air Mass Modelled ONLY

100% = Mass Air Flow Sensor ONLY

Air Mass Modelled setup must be configured - Air Mass Modelled Setup

Mass Air Flow setup must be configured - Mass Air Flow Meter 1 Input

** Blend tables must be configured completely before tuning

Mass Air Flow tuning/re-scaling is accomplished by generating and validating a Secondary Load Table. This allows

the MAF sensor scaling to adjusted under different user conditions:

Example. MAF value of 10.0 g/s and scaling of 25% will yield a scaled MAF value of 12.5 g/s.

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

The secondary load table becomes a primary tuning table when linked to the MAF scaling

To tune the secondary load table the fuel model blend table is set to 100%

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Triggers

Engine Decoding Mode

The Engine Decoding Mode selects the trigger pattern and decoding used by the ECU to determine engine position and synchronisation.

The selected mode determines how the ECU interprets the crankshaft and camshaft trigger signals, establishing the engine position used by the ECU for ignition timing, fuel injection timing and other engine position-dependent functions including Variable Valve Timing (VVT), knock control and torque control etc.

Image Image

For predefined decoding modes (Option 3 and above), the ECU will initialize both the Crank Index and Sync Sensor channels to the correct settings. This includes:

  • Sensor Type
  • Sensor Edge
  • Sensor Pull-up
  • Arming Threshold Tables

This is considered Pre-Defined Decoding. All settings for Tooth Count, Index Tooth and Crank Index Offset are controlled by the ECU firmware and cannot be customized. However, the Edge Type, Pull-up, and Arming thresholds can all be adjusted after the new decoding mode has been selected.

The most common adjustment is configuring the Arming Threshold Tables when using magnetic (VR) sensors. As a general guideline, the arming thresholds should initially be set to approximately 60% of the peak sensor voltage.

Use the Emtron Scope function to measure the peak crankshaft and camshaft sensor signal voltages to configure the Arming Threshold Tables correctly. See here for more information: Setting Arming Threshols

The predefined decoder modes are intended for engines using the standard OEM trigger pattern. If your engine uses a modified or custom trigger arrangement based on one of these engines, select Multi-Tooth Custom where appropriate or contact Emtron Support for assistance configuring the trigger system.
Any setting change in the Crank Index or Sync Sensor menu that differ from the default values may cause permanent engine damage.

Modifying the automatically configured Crank Index or Sync Sensor settings for a predefined decoder may result in incorrect engine synchronisation and ignition timing. Incorrect Engine decoding configuration can prevent the engine from starting or, in severe cases, may result in engine damage.

Engine Speed Calculation

This setting defines the number of crankshaft degrees over which engine speed is calculated. A wider measurement window provides greater averaging and a more stable engine speed calculation.

Typical values range from 1 TDC event (90° for an 8-cylinder engine, 180° for a 4-cylinder engine) up to 1/2 of an engine cycle (360°).

The maximum value is 2 engine cycles (1440°)


Sync Lockout RPM

The Sync Sensor input is ignored when engine speed is above this value.

This setting is primarily used to help diagnose engine decoding errors occurring at high engine speeds. For example, if an engine decoding error occurs at 6500 RPM, setting Sync Lockout RPM to 6000 RPM will cause the ECU to ignore the Sync Sensor above 6000 RPM.

If the decoding error no longer occurs, this indicates that the Sync Sensor or its associated signal may be the cause of the issue.

Setting this value to 20,000 RPM disables the Sync Lockout feature.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Arming Thresholds

Overview

The Arming Threshold defines the voltage level that the input signal must cross before the input circuit considers the signal valid. This applies regardless of signal type, including magnetic (VR) and digital inputs.

Magnetic (VR) Sensors

The Arming Threshold defines the voltage level that the input signal must exceed before the input circuit is armed and ready to detect a trigger event. Once armed, the input circuit waits for the signal to transition through the zero-crossing point from a positive voltage to a negative voltage.

NOTE: The Arming Threshold does not define the actual trigger point in this mode. It only determines when the input circuit is armed and ready to detect the subsequent zero-crossing event.

Hall Effect/ Digital Sensors

The Arming Threshold defines the voltage level that the input signal must cross before the trigger circuit is armed and ready to detect the selected trigger edge. Once the arming condition has been met, the trigger event occurs when the signal transitions through the configured Sensor Edge (rising or falling edge).

The correct Arming Threshold configuration ensures reliable trigger detection across the full engine operating range and helps prevent trigger errors, excessive error counts, misfires, or no-start conditions.

Additional Information
  • For Magnetic (VR) sensors, the required Arming Threshold typically increases with engine speed as the generated signal voltage increases. For this reason, the Arming Threshold should be configured using a table that increases with RPM to maintain reliable trigger detection across the full engine operating range. In most applications, the maximum Arming Threshold required for stable operation is typically no more than 8 V.

  • For Magnetic (VR) sensors, the required Arming Threshold naturally increases with engine speed as the sensor output voltage increases. This is a desirable characteristic, as the higher threshold also improves noise immunity by rejecting low-amplitude electrical interference while maintaining reliable trigger detection.

  • For Hall effect and other digital sensors, the signal voltage is normally independent of engine speed. As a result, the Arming Threshold typically remains constant across the full engine operating range.

  • The maximum configurable Arming Threshold is 12V.

  • The Emtron trigger inputs are designed to withstand signal amplitudes of up to ±100V.


Arming Threshold Setup

The Emtron Scope function should be used to setup the Arming Threshold Tables by measuring the peak sensor voltage across the engine operating range.

Magnetic (VR) Sensor Arming Threshold Setup

Configure the Arming Threshold to approximately 50% of the measured peak sensor voltage at each engine speed. This positions the threshold above ground noise while allowing sufficient margin for normal signal amplitude variation, improving trigger reliability.

In most applications, the maximum Arming Threshold required for reliable operation is approximately 8 V. If the peak sensor voltage exceeds 16 V, an Arming Threshold of 8 V is generally suitable.

Digital Sensor Arming Threshold Setup

For digital 0–5 V square-wave signals, configure the Arming Threshold to a fixed value of approximately 2.0 V across the entire engine operating range. This provides a stable switching point while maintaining adequate noise margin between the low and high signal levels.


Example:

The following example uses the Emtron Scope function to view the crankshaft sensor signal and identify a trigger signal integrity issue. The measured signal amplitude is then used to re-configure the Arming Threshold, resulting in reliable trigger detection.

Image Image

The above example shows a crankshaft trigger signal with the Crank Sensor Arming Threshold set too low (0.5 V), represented by the green line.

Image Image

With the above example zoomed in, the trigger signal can be seen crossing the Arming Threshold (green line) twice, indicated by the red arrows. Each time the signal subsequently transitions through the zero-crossing point, the ECU detects a trigger event (purple markers). The first trigger event is the valid tooth, while the second is a false trigger caused by the Arming Threshold being set too low.

Increasing the Arming Threshold above the secondary signal oscillation prevents the input circuit from re-arming, eliminating the false trigger. In this example, increasing the Arming Threshold to approximately 3.0 V resolves the issue.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Crank Index Offset Setup

Overview

The Crank Index Offset Setup is one of the most critical configuration steps within the ECU.

The ECU determines engine position by detecting a known trigger event, commonly referred to as the Index Tooth. Since the Index Tooth position does not normally coincide with Top Dead Centre (TDC) Cylinder #1 Compression, the Crank Index Offset defines the angular relationship between these two events. This allows the ECU to accurately determine crankshaft position and maintain synchronisation with the engine.


Image Image

Tuning Tips:

1) For Wasted Spark applications, always set the Ignition Lock Angle to 0.0° BTDC when verifying the Crank Index Offset.

Many timing lights calculate ignition advance using the measured ignition pulse frequency. Since wasted spark systems generate two ignition events per engine cycle, some timing lights may calculate an incorrect engine speed and display an incorrect ignition advance value. Using a lock angle of 0.0° BTDC allows the crankshaft TDC mark to be verified directly and eliminates this source of error.*

2) For Direct Fire ignition systems, the Ignition Lock Angle may be set to any convenient crankshaft timing mark available on the engine pulley.

3) The fuel injectors can be disabled to validate the initial Crank Index Offset value.prior to starting the engine. See Config -> Fuel -> Fuel Main -> Injection Mode -> Off.

4) Direct fire engines may be 360deg out of cycle which can be corrected numerically (i.e add or subtract 360 from the Crank Index value).


Ignition Timing Synchronisation

Before calibrating the ignition system, the ECU ignition timing must be synchronised with the actual engine crankshaft position.

Crank Index Offset Calibration

  1. Enable Ignition Lock and configure a fixed ignition timing value using the Ignition Lock Angle.
    NOTE: When Ignition Lock Enable is ON, Ignition Lock Angle value overrides all other timing values in ECU.
  2. Start the engine and use a timing light to measure the actual ignition timing.
  3. Compare the measured ignition timing with the configured Ignition Lock Angle.
  4. Adjust the Crank Index Offset until the timing light reading matches the configured Ignition Lock Angle.

This procedure should be performed with the engine operating at idle speed.

Ignition Delay Time Calibration

Once the Crank Index Offset has been calibrated at idle, ignition timing should be verified over the engine operating range.

As engine speed increases, ignition coil turn-on delays, ignition module propagation delays and ECU output delays can introduce small timing errors.

The Ignition Delay Time parameter compensates for these delays to ensure the commanded ignition timing accurately matches the actual crankshaft position across the complete engine speed range.

Adjustment guidelines:

  • If the measured ignition timing retards as engine speed increases, increase the Ignition Delay Time value.
  • If the measured ignition timing advances as engine speed increases, decrease the Ignition Delay Time value.

Once correctly calibrated, the timing light should indicate a constant ignition timing value regardless of engine speed when Ignition Lock is enabled.


Important:

The Crank Index Offset and Ignition Delay Time should always be verified regardless of trigger presets or predefined trigger configurations.

Incorrect calibration will result in the ECU commanding ignition timing that does not match the actual crankshaft position, potentially causing poor engine performance or engine damage.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Crank Index and Sync Sensor

Overview

The Crank Index Sensor establishes the crankshaft position, while the Sync Sensor identifies the engine phase within the complete engine cycle. This allows the ECU to determine the exact engine position and correctly identify the individual cylinder events.

For example, a conventional four-stroke engine has a 720° engine cycle, while a rotary engine has a 360° engine cycle.

The sensor type, signal edge, and pull-up configurations can be set from this menu.

Image Image

Sensor Type

Image Image

The Sensor Type setting defines the type of sensor connected to the selected Crank Index Sensor or Sync Sensor input.

ValueSensor Type
0Magnetic
1Hall Effect or Optical
2Proximity
3Logic (available in a future release)

Magnetic

Magnetic sensors are voltage-generating sensors that produce a sinusoidal signal. The signal swings both positive and negative around 0V, with the signal amplitude generally increasing as engine speed increases. Magnetic sensors can typically be identified by having two signal wires.

Warning
  1. Always use the dedicated positive and negative trigger inputs on the ECU for the Crank and Sync sensors. Do not connect the sensor ground to the engine block or chassis. The sensor(s) must be wired directly to the dedicated ECU trigger inputs.

  2. Magnetic sensors must use shielded cable from the sensor through to the ECU input. Magnetic sensor signals are particularly susceptible to electrical interference, especially from radiated interference generated by the ignition system. Sensor wiring must be routed well away from ignition coils, ignition wiring, and other sources of electrical interference. The cable shield must be connected to the ECU Shield connection, correct wiring practices are therefore essential.

  3. Magnetic sensor polarity must be correct. Incorrect polarity can result in poor or unstable engine decoding. See Using the Scope – Incorrect Crank/Sync Sensor Polarity for further information.

Hall Effect / Optical

Hall Effect and optical sensors produce a digital square-wave signal and require a power supply to operate. They can typically be identified by having three wires: supply, signal, and ground.

Emtron ECUs provide a dedicated 8V sensor supply to provide a regulated and clean power supply for these sensors.

Warning
  1. Always use the dedicated positive and negative trigger inputs on the ECU for the Crank and Sync sensors. DO NOT connect the sensor negative or ground to the engine block or chassis.** DO NOT connect Hall Effect ground (or any other “Pulsed” sensor grounds) to Analog Volt Ground pins. The sensor(s) must be wired directly to the dedicated ECU trigger inputs.

Sensor Edge

Image Image

This setting defines which edge of the Crank Index or Sync Position sensor signal is used by the ECU for engine position and synchronisation.

ValueEdge
0Rising
1Falling
2Rising & Falling

Sync Sensor Rising and Falling

Image Image

Engines with multi-tooth sync sensors will typically have a “long” tooth at the crank index point.

In this configuration, the Sync Sensor provides a different signal level for each half of the engine cycle:

For example in the above image:

  • 0–360°: Sync signal is Low (Purple trace)
  • 360–720°: Sync signal is High (Purple trace)

The ECU uses the Crank Index gap to establish the crankshaft position and the Sync signal level to immediately determine which 360° half of the engine cycle the crankshaft is in.

This means the ECU does not need to wait for an additional Sync edge to determine the engine position. As soon as the first crank index gap is detected, the ECU can determine the 720° engine position from the combination of the crank index position and the current Sync signal level.

For these trigger types, set the Sync Sensor Edge configuration to Rising and Falling.

Additional Information

For further information on multi-tooth sync sensors, Rising and Falling Edge configuration, or trigger decoding, contact Emtron Technical Support.

Custom Engine Decoding Modes

When using a custom decoding mode, such as 1 Tooth per TDC or Multi-Tooth Custom, Falling Edge should be used unless otherwise instructed by Emtron Support.

: Edge Selection Notes]
  • Magnetic Sensors have the edge selection locked to Falling Edge. The ECU detects the positive to negative transition of the sensor signal and determines the trigger position from the zero-crossing point.

  • For Hall Effect Sensors, the Falling Edge is generally preferred as it provides the sharpest and most consistent signal transition. A faster signal transition allows the ECU to determine the engine position more accurately and reduces timing variation caused by slow or noisy signal transitions. This is particularly important for the Crank Index Sensor, where accurate and repeatable trigger position is critical.

  • For a Sync Position Sensor, the sensor is not normally used to determine the primary crankshaft position, so the exact edge transition and its slope are less critical. For this reason, the Rising Edge may also be used if required. For example, if the selected sync edge is too close to a crank decoding edge, the opposite edge can be selected to move the sync event further away from the crank decoding event and provide a more reliable sync position.


Image Image

The example above illustrates the fast Falling Edge of a magnetic sensor signal


Image Image

The example above illustrates the fast Falling Edge of a Hall Effect sensor signal.

Triggering from the Rising Edge in either of the two examples above will cause the engine timing to wander as RPM changes.


Sensor Pullup

Image Image

This setting controls the internal 5V pull-up used with Hall Effect, Optical, and Proximity Crank Sensors.

The pull-up is not available when using a Magnetic sensor.

ValuePull-Up
0OFF
1ON

Sensor Arming Threshold

Arming thresholds for digital signals (including crank and sync sensors) describe the level in which the voltage level must go above before the signal can be valid. Regardless of signal (magnetic, or digital), the threshold voltage level must be reached before the signal can be considered valid.

** The threshold value does not mean this is the value in which the ECU “triggers”.

See Arming Threshold section for more information.

Image Image

Typical Arming Threshold values for a Magnetic Sensor are shown in the image above. Note how the Arming Threshold increases as engine speed increases.

Image Image

Typical Arming Threshold values for a Hall Effect Sensor are shown in the image above. For a standard 0–5V square-wave signal, it is recommended to set the Arming Threshold to a constant 2.0V across the entire table. This is approximately 40% of the sensor pull-up supply voltage.

Additional Information:
  • Arming Threshold control is available for all trigger types.
  • Use the Scope function within the Emtron to validate the voltage threshold to be used.

Pre-Defined Engine Decoding Modes

When using a Pre-Defined Engine Decoding Mode (3 or higher), the Crank/Sync Sensor Type, Edge Configuration, and Pull-Up Configuration are pre-configured for the selected decoding mode. These settings should not normally be changed.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Multi Tooth Setup

Multi Tooth Setup

This allows the user to define a Custom decoding mode for the ECU to use. In order for the ECU to synchronize timing of the engine, an “index tooth” position must be identified. :

The following settings are configured in this menu item :

Crank Tooth Count. See Crank Tooth Count for more information.

Missing Tooth Count. See Missing Tooth Count for more information.

Crank Index Position. See Crank Index Position for more information.

Sync Position Sensor. See Sync Sensor Position for more information.

Gap Detection Method. SeeGap Detection Method for more information.

When using a Custom Decoding mode, it is important to understand how and where the “index tooth” is identified, especially if the engine has adjustable triggers (mechanically).

On Non-Missing tooth Crank Triggers, there must be a sync sensor so the ECU can identify the “Index Tooth”

The Sync Sensor must be Camshaft driven if sequential fuel injection/direct fire ignition modes are being used

Missing Tooth Triggers do not require a sync sensor to identify the “Index Tooth”

Image Image

An example of a 4 Tooth Crank Wheel with a single tooth (50/50) Sync Sensor driven off a Camshaft (both Hall sensors)

Also known as 1-Tooth per TDC

** Note - This trigger could also be an example of a Crank Trigger being driven off of a Distributor (8 teeth), and therefore Camshaft driven

Image Image

In this case, Edge configuration being set to both Falling Edge (see Crank Index/Sync Sensor Setup), the “Index Tooth” is identified as above

Image Image

With a Missing Tooth crank trigger, the “Index Tooth” is recognized by the next Falling Edge after the gap position.

** Note - no Sync Sensor is even shown

** When using Magnetic Triggers, with incorrect polarity the ECU will not be able to recognize the gap and/or the “Index Tooth” position correctly. See Scope - Uses of Scope - Improper Crank/Sync Sensor Polarity

Sync Position %

Sync position refers to the point in which the ECU is identifying the Sync Edge location. This reference point can be critical as if there is any discrepancy to this position mechanically (wandering between the crank and cam trigger due to slack in cam belt/chain), it can cause crank/sync errors, engine cycle change, or even the firing order to change (especially in the case of non-missing crank trigger setup).

Emtron calculates the following channel for monitoring, diagnosis, and logging purposes - Sync Position %

The Sync Position % is calculated by factoring the position of the Sync Edge between consecutive Crank Teeth.

Image Image

Looking at falling edges, the distance between crank teeth can be identified by the green lines, and the sync edge is identified by the yellow arrow. The value would be Sync Position % - 33% approximately in this case.

Best practice is to aim for a Sync Position % - 50%.

** Note - The higher the crank tooth count, the less resolution this runtime generally will have. IE a 60-2 trigger will have a much more unstable Sync Position % value vs a 1-Tooth Per TDC

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Sync Position %

Sync Position %

Sync Position refers to the point at which the ECU identifies the Sync Edge location. This reference point is critical, as any mechanical variation between the crank and cam trigger positions, such as timing belt or chain slack, can cause the Sync Position to move.

Variations in the Sync Position can result in crank/sync errors, changes in the detected engine cycle, or even an incorrect firing order, particularly when using a non-missing crank trigger setup.

Emtron calculates the following channel for monitoring, diagnosis, and logging purposes - Sync Position %

The Sync Position % is calculated by factoring the position of the Sync Edge between consecutive Crank Teeth.

Image Image

Looking at falling edges, the distance between crank teeth can be identified by the green lines, and the sync edge is identified by the yellow arrow. The value would be Sync Position % - 33% approximately in this case.

Best practice is to aim for a Sync Position % value of 50%.

NOTE: The higher the crank tooth count, the less resolution this runtime generally will have. IE a 60-2 trigger will have a much more unstable Sync Position % value vs a 1-Tooth Per TDC

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Trouble Shooting

Improper Crank/Sync Sensor Polarity

During most start up support, we often encounter reversed polarity of crank/sync sensors. The Scope can be used to easily identify the issues. These polarity situations are especially sensitive when using missing tooth triggers due to the gap position affecting the index tooth position (see Crank Index Position), or not being able to be recognized at all.

When the trigger tooth passes the sensor, the magnetic sensor should produce a positive voltage before dropping voltage negative.

Image Image

This is easier to identify on a trigger wheel with a lower tooth count as you can see above.

Image Image

On a trigger wheel with multi tooth, it is more difficult to identify polarity.

For multi-tooth wheels with a missing tooth –

Use the gap to identify the polarity of this crank sensor is correct. Do this by ensuring that the next tooth after the gap rises before it falls.

Image Image

On a non-missing tooth multi-tooth trigger, the polarity can be validated generally by observing the “fast edge” being the falling edge. The above example shows this where the rising slope of the trace is much slower than the falling slope of the trace. The rising slope also will change based on the speed of the trigger wheel.

** Note – this is also why the falling edge provides most stable timing on magnetic triggers (with correct polarity).

** See Crank Index/Sync Sensor Setup

Image Image

Crank trigger wired with incorrect polarity. Observe the voltage drops as the tooth after the gap approaches instead of rises.

In the case of missing tooth trigger wired with backwards polarity, the index tooth would either be recognized in the wrong position (earlier/before the index tooth has passed), or the “gap” not recognized properly due to not being able to differentiate a clear space. Subsequently this does not allow the ECU to identify the index tooth for timing the engine. Additionally, the uneven spacing (besides the expected “gap tooth number”) will cause the ECU to count crank tooth errors. The gap between the “false” index tooth position/gap and evenly spaced teeth will change with RPM as well.

Image Image

Crank trigger wired with correct polarity. Observe the voltage rises as the tooth after the gap approaches.

With the polarity correct, it is clear the gap can be recognized, and the index tooth is being appropriately recognized at the true position (tooth after the gap).

Improper Edge Configuration for Crank/Sync Sensor

Falling Edge

With correct sensor polarity, both magnetic and hall sensors should have falling edge polarity in most cases. This is because these sensors have consistent “fast” performance when the tone ring teeth pass the sensors.

Image Image

An example of a magnetic sensors fast edge being the falling.

Image Image

An example of a hall senor fast edge being the falling. Most hall sensors produce a very good “square” wave, so the point can be argued that rising edge can be used, however at higher revs some will produce this “saw tooth” pattern which means triggering that way will cause timing to wander.

Rising and Falling Edge Sync Mode

Image Image

Engines with multi-tooth sync sensors usually will have a “long” tooth during the “crank index point”. Normally, a custom decoding mode is needed to run the engine with multiple sync teeth, but in this case because there is a clear difference in signal on the sync input on each stroke (low vs high), the ECU can determine the stroke immediately (this is the fastest way to decode starting/720 sync). Set Sync Sensor Edge configuration to Rising and Falling for these trigger types.

** See Sync Sensor Setup – Sync Sensor

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Vehicle

Clutch Slip Calculation

Clutch Slip Calculation uses 2 Inputs:

  1. Engine Speed (RPM)

  2. Input Shaft Speed (RPM)

Example.

Engine Speed = 6000

Input Shaft Speed = 5756 RPM

Clutch Slip(%) = Input Shaft Speed - Engine Speed

            Engine Speed

Clutch Slip(%) = -4.06 %

This means the Input Shaft is rotating 4.06% slower than the Engine Speed… i.e 4.06% Clutch Slip.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Drive Slip Calculation

Drive Slip

Given as a percentage of the difference between the speed of the driven wheel compared to the speed of an undriven wheel. The Drive Slip can be both positive and negative.

Drive Slip = (Speed Channel 1 - Speed Channel 2) / Speed Channel 2

which is normally expressed as:

Drive Slip = (Driven wheel speed - undriven wheel speed) / undriven wheel speed

0.0% = The driven and undriven wheels are at the same speed.

+10.0% = The driven wheels are turning 10% faster than the non driven wheels.

-10.0% = The driven wheels are turning 10% slower than the non driven wheels .

Example 1 - Drive Slip settings. Front wheel drive, 4 wheel speed inputs connected.

Drive Speed Front L = DI 1

Drive Speed Front R = DI 2

Undriven Speed Rear L = DI 3

Undriven Speed Rear R = DI 4

The ECU will average the front wheel speed and load this value into the runtime " Front Axle Speed"

The ECU will average the rear wheel speed and load this value into the runtime " Rear Axle Speed"

Driven Speed Channel = Front Axle Speed

Undriven Speed Channel = Rear Axle Speed

Example 2 - Drive Slip Settings. Rear wheel drive, 4 wheel speed inputs connected.

Undriven Speed Front L = DI 1

Undriven Speed Front R = DI 2

Drive Speed Rear L = DI 3

Drive Speed Rear R = DI 4

The ECU will average the front wheel speed and load this value into the runtime " Front Axle Speed"

The ECU will average the rear wheel speed and load this value into the runtime " Rear Axle Speed"

Driven Speed Channel = Rear Axle Speed

Undriven Speed Channel = Front Axle Speed

Turning Slip

The difference between the wheel speeds on the left side of the vehicle and the wheel speeds on the right side of the vehicle. The ECU uses “Front Axle Speed” and “Rear Axle Speed” to calculate this.

ECU calculated values: If sufficient Input Speed channels are selected the ECU can calculate the following addition data.

Front Axle Speed.

The average of either:

    1. The Drive Speed Front L and R or
      
    2. The Undriven Speed Front L and R
      

Rear Axle Speed.

The average of either:

    1. The Drive Speed Rear L and R or
      
    2. The Undriven Speed Rear L and R
      

Cornering Speed L.

The average of the Speed Front L (driven or undriven) and Speed Rear L (driven or undriven)

Cornering Speed R.

The average of the Speed Front R (driven or undriven) and Speed Rear R (driven or undriven)

NOTE: The ECU will check which speed channels are assigned and use this information to calculate the data. For this to work correctly for example the Speed Front L Driven and Undriven channels can never both be selected.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Management

Gear Management

The first step to proper gear management/detection is a properly scaled and validated speed signal.

Gear Management in Emtron can be detected in various ways.

Fundamentally, gear control and detection are a part of the ECU functions.

Several channels are linked to the gear functions that can be viewed, logged, and used as active channels :

Image Image

Gear Position (RPM/Speed) Setup

Speed Lockout

Gear Detection Ratio Calculation stops when the speed fall below this value.

0 = OFF

Typical: 2-5.

Default Gear

Default gear for Gear Detection Ratio Calculation.

Gear Valid Time

Typical: 10ms

Tolerance

Typical: 10%

Fault Time

Fault Time for Gear Detection Ratio Calculation.

Typical: 1000ms

Clutch Switch Lockout

Gear Ratio Detection Calculation temporary stops when the Clutch Switch is ON i.e. during a gear change.

Clutch Switch Input Channel MUST be configured

Gear Position (RPM/Speed) Table

Image Image

Define the multiplier here to get speed for the ratio calculation to work. IE:

100kph *34 in 5th gear = 3400rpm.

Speed channel must be configured and scaled

RPM/Speed ratio is also actively calculated in Runtimes

Image Image

3rd gear engaged shown

Gear Position (Input/Outputshaft)

Gear Ratio (Input/Outputshaft Speed) = Inputshaft Speed Source/ Outputshaft Speed Source

Outputshaft Speed Lockout

Gear Detection Ratio Calculation stops when the Outputshaft speed fall below this value.

0 = OFF

Typical: 2-5.

Default Gear

Default gear for Gear Detection Ratio Calculation.

Gear Valid Time

Typical: 6ms

Tolerance

Typical: 7%

Fault Time

Typical: 10ms

Gear Position (Input/Outputshaft Speed) Table

Image Image

Define the transmission ratios the ECU should expect for calculating gears via Input/Outputshaft speed correlation

Actual Gear Ratio (Input/Outputshaft) can be validated actively calculated in Runtimes

Image Image

3rd gear engaged shown

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Configuration

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Fuel Configuration

Fuel Model Overview

In both Speed Density and MAF modes the ECU performs the following steps to calculate the final Injector OpeningTime.

  1. Calculate the Air Mass per cylinder.

    In Speed Density Mode PV = nRT is used to Calculate Air Mass.

    In MAF mode, Air Mass is measured directly from the MAF Sensor.

    In Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) mode the Air Mass is calculated by looking at the pressure ratio across the throttle body, calculating the

    throttle area and applying these to a 2nd order thermodynamics equation.

  2. Calculate Fuel Mass using Air Mass, Stoichiometric ratio, Lambda Target, Engine VE and other parameters outlined below.

  3. Calculate Effective Pulse Width using Fuel Mass, Injector Mass Flow, Fuel Density and Bernoulli’s equation for Fuel Pressure correction.

Fuel Model: Charge Temp

Image Image

This setting ONLY applies when the Fuel Model is selected to Speed Density. There are 2 separate methods that control how the fueling is adjusted based on Charge Temperature.

  1. With this setting set to ON (and this is the recommended setting) the Charge Temp will be used to adjust the Air Mass as part of the Ideal Gas Law equation. The ECU is then able to automatically adjust the Air Mass (g) based on this temperature.
  2. When this setting is OFF the Air Mass is not modified base on Charge Temp. Instead the Tuning View -> Compensations -> Charge Temp Comp Table 1 can be used to manually correct the fueling based on Charge Temperature.

NOTE: It is NOT recommended to have both systems ON at the same time.

Fuel Model: Fuel Pressure

Image Image

This setting applies to ALL Fuel Models. A Fuel Pressure Sensor MUST be fitted. The ECU will correct/adjust the Injector Flow as the differential pressure across the injector changes. This means any fuel surge causing an sudden drop in fuel pressure the ECU can correct the fueling and maintain the correct mixture.

NOTE: Fuel Pressure Units MUST be in kPa to match both the MAP and BAP units.


Sensor Requirements

Additional to MAP and MAF the following sensors should be used to take full advantage of ECUs Fuel Model(s):

Fuel Temperature.

Used to help accurately calculate Fuel Density (g/ml) by spanning the x-axis on the Fuel Density Table (see Config View -> Fuel -> Fuel Density Table). See Figure 1 below.

If the Fuel Temp channel is not selected it defaults to 20 DegC which will then be used to span the Fuel Density Table. Note: If an Ethanol Sensor is selected the Fuel Temp information from the sensor is automatically copied into the Fuel Temp Runtime.

Image Image

Figure 1: Fuel Density Table

Fuel Pressure Sensor.

Required if Fuel Pressure Correction is to be used.

Ethanol Sensor

Strongly recommended to use this sensor when running Ethanol based fuels. It allows the ECU to automatically correct fueling based on Ethanol Content. i.e Petrol (0% Ethanol) up to 100% Ethanol. It does this by adjusting the Fuel Density and Stoichiometric Ratio . See Figure 1.

The Final Air and Fuel Mass used by the ECU can be viewed from the Runtime menu -> Fuel Tab (F3). You can also view data from the Speed Density (SD) and MAF Sensor Calculations. See Figure 2.

Image Image

Figure 2. Final Mass values (Fuel and Air) shown in red box.


Fuel Model Modes

To configure the Fuel Model select the appropriate method from the Config View -> Fuel -> Fuel Main -> Fuel Model Setup

Image Image


Air and Fuel Mass Modifier Tables

There are additional Tables available to modify the Air Mass and Fuel Mass if required. These can be switching ON from Tuning View -> Fuel Table Control -> Mass Modifier Tables. See Figure 3.

Image Image

Figure 3: Mass Modifier Tables

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Model: Fuel Pressure

Fuel Model : Fuel Pressure

Fuel Model: Fuel Pressure Corr.

Fuel Pressure Correction - Primary Injectors

** Secondary Injectors configured separately

Includes the Fuel Pressure in the Fuel Model Calculation. The ECU is able to automatically adjust the Mass Injector Flow based on the differential pressure across the Injector.

** NOTE: ONLY uses Fuel Pressure 1 Input Channel **

0: OFF

1: ON (Fuel Press Corr - Sensor Fitted)

2: ON (Static Fuel Pressure - No Sensor)

0 = ECU will not correct fuel mass at all. This means the Fuel Mass Calculation is functioning solely off the Ref Injector Size (Primary) and Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Prim).

** Using a Vacuum Referenced (rising/falling rate regulator) should provide stable differential pressure.

1 = ECU will calculate new fuel mass requirements based on deviation from Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Prim) value.

2 = ECU will calculate differential pressure loss (without a sensor) assuming the Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Prim) cannot be maintained due to having a non-vacuum referenced/rising rate fuel pressure regulation system installed (static pressure all the time).

Channels to reference :

  • Fuel Pressure 1 - Pressure value generated by calculated channel - as calibrated by input setup
  • Fuel Pressure 1 Diff - Effective/Relative/Differential pressure across injector - uses Injector Nozzel Ref Pressure to calculate
  • Fuel Pressure 1 Diff Offset - +/- pressure deviation from Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Prim)
  • Fuel Model - Fuel Pressure Correction (Prim) % - Percentage of Fuel Mass correction applied due to Fuel Pressure 1 Diff Offset

**** Recommended Setting - “1” due to Vacuum Referenced regulators not always providing 1:1 pressure change vs Injector Nozzle Ref Pressure and other inadequacies of most fuel systems (starvation, voltage supply, out-flowing, etc)**

Image Image

Example demonstrating loss of fuel pressure and ECU compensating fuel mass until specified “cut off - Fuel Pressure Engine Protection

** Observe Lambda staying on target with negative Fuel 1 Diff Offset, and Positive Fuel Model - Fuel Pressure Correction (Prim)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Density Table

Fuel Density Table

Image Image

Image Image

The Fuel Density Table is utilized by the Fuel Model to determine the fuel mass.

Fuel Temperature has a major influence on the fuel density and hence the mass of the fuel.

This 3D table can also account for fuel density changes based on any parameter in the ECU.

This setting is particularly useful when using multiple fuel compositions such as ethanol which also influence the fuel mass.

The Emtune software has pre determined Fuel Density Tables available in it that are only a right click of the mouse away

Image Image

By selecting “Load Table” you can quickly arrive at the correct density table to suit commonly used fuels.

Image Image

The Ethanol Fuel Density Table.etf is as shown in the example above & spans the increase in ethanol against gasoline.

Methanol & Gasoline specific Fuel density tables are also included.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Main

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Model Blending control

Fuel Model Blending Control

The Fuel Model Blending Control Table is available when “Blend” modes are being used.

Common uses for Fuel Model Blending would be when switching between MAF and Speed Density (when MAF resolution may become ineffective for the application), or Throttle Mass Flow and Speed Density (when Throttle Pressure Ratio doesn’t support TMF measurement).

** Note the Blend Function actually connects to MAP Modeling which allows for further blending of fuel model modes additionally. See - MAP Modeling

Image Image

Select “blending” - Modes 3 or 4 in :

Config -> Fuel -> Fuel Model Setup

Image Image

This table is available for the user to control the ratio of which model is used.

Image Image

MODE 3:

0.0% : Air Mass = All MAP Modelled

100.0% : Air Mass = All Throttle Mass Flow

MODE 4:

0.0% : Air Mass = All MAP Modelled

100.0% : Air Mass = All Mass Air Flow Sensor

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Secondary Setup

Fuel Secondary Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Table Control

Fuel Table Control

Tuning -> Fuel -> Fuel Table Control

The fuel table control allows you to tailor the number of fuel tables used and how they are utilized.

There are 3 Main VE tables available, they can be used individually, on a user selectable cal slot

(Example: The position of the Si Drive selector in a Subaru Sti over the CAN BUS)

On a user defined Z-Axis (Example: Spanned across ethanol content)

Or a user defined blend across tables based on specified parameters.

This allows a user defined level of complexity

Image Image

Main VE Fuel Table Control Tab shown as an example.

This level of complexity flexibility is common to all fuel control tables.

Image Image

Compensation Tables:

The compensation tables offer the tuner the ability to compensate for a wide range of variable conditions

All compensation tables are user definable 3D tables that can be utilized against any runtime

More commonly used compensations are already named & linked to their specific purpose

With 2 additional User Comp tables where all parameters are defined by the user.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injection Mode

Injection Mode

Image Image

0: OFF

1: Sequential

2: Sequential/Staged Sequential

3: Sequential/Staged Group

4: Non Sequential

5: GDI Sequential

6: GDI Sequential/Staged - Prim(GDI) / Sec (Port)

See Injector Channel Setup for channel setup help.

** Note In Non Sequential Mode. Injector PW Per Cyl channels will NOT Calculate

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injection Timing Sec

Injection Timing Sec

Image Image

Injection Timing event is referenced at the start or end injection. End of Injection is commonly used.

0: Start of Injection

1: End of Injection

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Channel Setup

Injector Channel Setup

Image Image

This tables assigns an Injection Channel to a Cylinder Number.

A 0 value indicates this channel is not used for Fueling and is therefore available for other functions.

Injection Mode = Sequential

Example 1: KV12 ECU, 10 Cylinder application, 10 Sequential Injectors allocated on Injection Channels 1- 10

Image Image

Injection Mode = Sequential/Staged Sequential

WARNING:

DO NOT use Fuel Engine Limiting when Staged Injection is enabled.

If there is an Injection Phasing difference between Primary and Secondary Injectors,

Cut synchronization is not always possible and may result in engine damage.

Cylinder (Prim) = Enter the cylinder number for each channel connected to a primary injector

Cylinder (Sec) = Enter the cylinder number for each channel connected to a Secondary injector

Example 2: KV16 ECU, 8 Cylinder application, 8 Sequential Primary Injectors, 8 Sequential Secondary Injectors

Sequential Primary Injectors: Allocated on Injection Channels 1-8.

Sequential Secondary Injectors: Allocated on Injection Channels 9-16.

Image Image

**** Staging mode must have primary cylinders start with Cylinder 1**

Injection Mode = Non Sequential

In this mode the odd injector channels are fired on one cycle, and even injector channels on the next. The ECU will calculate fuel mass required and divide it by the number of cylinders NOT the number of injector channels.

**** Cylinder numbering, bank assignment, firing order is disregarded in this injection mode**

Example 1:

6 injectors connected individually on a 6 cylinder engine

Image Image

ECU will activate 1+3+5 on one TDC, 2+4+6 on the next (odd and even)

Example 2:

6 injectors connected individually on a 6 cylinder engine but ordered so the cylinders fire per bank

If the engine has dual banks (123 / 456), and the firing order is 1536242, the installer can re-order the cylinders vs injector outputs to synchronize firing per bank

Image Image

ECU will activate 1+3+5 on one TDC, 2+4+6 on the next (odd and even)

Injection Channels 123456

Cylinder Numbers 142536

This will fire 1+2+3 cylinders on one cycle, 4+5+6 on the next

8 injectors connected individually on a 8 cylinder engine but ordered so the cylinders fire per bank

If the engine has dual banks (1357 / 2468), and the firing order is 18436572, the installer can re-order the cylinders vs injector outputs to synchronize firing per bank

Image Image

ECU will activate 1+3+5+7 on one TDC, 2+4+6+8 on the next (odd and even)

Injection Channels 12345678

Cylinder Numbers 12345678

If the engine has dual banks (1234 / 5678), and the firing order is 15486372, the installer can re-order the cylinders vs injector outputs to synchronize firing per bank

Image Image

ECU will activate 1+3+5+7 on one TDC, 2+4+6+8 on the next (odd and even)

Injection Channels 12345678

Cylinder Numbers 15263748

ECU will activate 1+2+3+4 on one TDC, 5+6+7+8 on the next (odd and even)

Example 3:

2 injectors connected with 3 injectors paired to each output on a 6 cylinder engine

Image Image

Engine will fire output 1 on one TDC, 2 on the next

The installer can group the cylinders they want to fire on each cycle

** This method will NOT provide the best injector deadtime and linearization control.

Injection Mode = Sequential/Staged Group

WARNING:

DO NOT use Fuel Engine Limiting when Staged Injection is enabled.

If there is an Injection Phasing difference between Primary and Secondary Injectors,

Cut synchronization is not always possible and may result in engine damage.

In this mode the Primary Injectors are sequential and the Secondary Injectors are Group/Non sequential. The Secondary Injectors are opened once per engine cycle. The Secondary Odd and Even Injection channels are run anti-phase. The Injectors on Even Channels are started at 0.0 Degrees BTDC. The Injectors on Odd Channels are started at 360.0 Degrees BTDC

Cylinder (Prim) = Enter the cylinder number for each Injection Channel connected to a primary injector

Inj Count (Sec) = Enter the number of secondary injectors connected to an Injection Channel. This is group staged and is NOT referenced to cylinders.

Example 3:

Sequential Primary Injectors: Allocated on Injection Channels 1-4.

Grouped Secondary Injectors: One injector on each Injection Channel 5,6,7,8

Image Image

Example 4:

Sequential Primary Injectors: Allocated on Injection Channels 1-8.

Grouped Secondary Injectors: Two injectors on each Injection Channel 9,10.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Deadtime Table

Injector Dead Time Table

Image Image

Image Image

The Injector Dead Time Table is utilized by the ECU to compensate for the latency (or Deadtime) of the Primary injectors

The injector deadtime is the time factor in milliseconds when no fuel is injected accounting for the reaction time of the injector.

Setting the correct deadtime of an injector is critical for ECU fuel mass calculations.

All injectors have a deadtime which may be affected by a number of factors.

The voltage at the injector generally has the highest influence on the injector deadtime.

Other factors such as fuel pressure also have a major affect on the injector deadtime.

Saturated injectors tend to have longer deadtimes when compared to peak & hold injectors

The Emtune software has commonly used Injector Deadtime Tables available in it that are only a right click of the mouse away.

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Tuning Tip:

Injector Dead times can be validated using the Emtune Software by using the Wideband Lambda control. If you add 10% to your VE table (@ 3000rpm / 80kpa load for example), you should see a corresponding negative 10% trim applied via the Wideband lambda control. If you don’t, then you know your dead times need some attention.

By utilizing a dead time table available in your Emtune software that is close. The correct dead time for your injector can be quickly arrived at by simply globally moving the table up & down. The voltage slop of the dead times can be further validated by removing the alternator charge and allowing the supply voltage to drop away. Correct dead times allow the engine to operate correctly over a wide range of variable conditions

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Driver Setup

Injector Driver Setup

Image Image

Image Image

The Injector Driver Setup is where the injector driver output is configured.

For High Impedance or Saturated injectors the Saturated setting should be used

KV based ECU’s also have the ability for user defined Peak and Hold setting.

Peak & Hold refers to low impedance injectors that require significantly more current to run correctly

Peak and Hold Examples:

Peak Current = 4A

Peak/Hold Ratio = 4. This gives 4A/4 = 1A Hold Current

Peak Current = 6A

Peak/Hold Ratio = 6. This gives 6A/6 = 1A Hold Current

Peak Current = 6A

Peak/Hold Ratio = 1.5. This gives 6A/1.5 = 4A Hold Current

The Custom setting allows for individual injector channel setup

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Linearisation Table

Injector Linearisation Table

Image Image

Image Image

The Injector Linearisation table is a low pulse adder table which uses offset values that vary with pulsewidth, correcting the lower non linear operating range of the injector. Its only used a small pulsewidths and this data is available from most injector manufactures.

The Emtune software has commonly used Injector Linearisation Tables available in it that are only a right click of the mouse away

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Max Duty Clamp

Injector Max Duty Clamp

Image Image

Clamps the Injector Duty Cycle.

NOTE:

The runtime Injector Duty will show past this value as it represents the duty cycle required to achieve the current pulse width.

This maximum duty clamp value applies to both primary & secondary injectors when using staged injection mode

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Nozzle Ref Pressure

Injector Nozzle Ref Pressure

Image Image

0: Manifold Pressure

1: Manifold Pressure - Bank 1

2: Manifold Pressure - Bank 2

3: Manifold Pressure Bank 1/2 Avg

4: Boost Pressure - Bank 1

5: Boost Pressure - Bank 2

6: Boost Pressure Bank 1/2 Avg

7: Barometric Pressure (Inj Before Plate)

Sets the reference against which injector differential pressure is measured

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector P/H Advanced

Injector P/H Advanced

Image Image

Image Image

Injector Peak and Hold Advanced

This feature allows for user definable hold current & transition timing control of low impedance injector drivers

This is an advanced feature for experienced tuners only.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ref Injector Size (Primary)

Ref Injector Size (Primary)

Image Image

Flow rating of the primary injectors in cc per minute at the primary reference static fuel pressure

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ref Injector Size (Sec)

Ref Injector Size (Sec)

Image Image

Flow Rating of the Secondary injectors

at the reference static fuel pressure

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Prim)

Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Prim)

Image Image

Reference static fuel pressure is set without the engine running at the current barometric pressure.

It is important that this setting is correct especially when the fuel pressure is enabled as part of the “fuel model”.

The ECU will correct the fueling if the fuel pressure goes above or below the differential fuel pressure.

The “Differential Fuel Pressure Offset” should be 0 or close to under normal operating conditions.

  1. When “Fuel Model: Fuel Pressure” setting is ON

  2. Provides a Diff Fuel Pressure Offset runtime.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Sec)

Ref Static Fuel Pressure (Sec)

Image Image

Static reference pressure of secondary injectors

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Secondary Injector Deadtime Table

Image Image

Image Image

The Injector Dead Time Table (Sec) is utilized by the ECU to compensate for the latency (or Deadtime) of the Secondary injectors

The injector deadtime is the time factor in milliseconds when no fuel is injected accounting for the reaction time of the injector.

Setting the correct deadtime of an injector is critical for ECU fuel mass calculations.

All injectors have a deadtime which may be affected by a number of factors.

The voltage at the injector generally has the highest influence on the injector deadtime.

Other factors such as fuel pressure also have a major affect on the injector deadtime.

Saturated injectors tend to have longer deadtimes when compared to peak & hold injectors

The Emtune software has commonly used Injector Deadtime Tables available in it that are only a right click of the mouse away.

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Tuning Tip:

Secondary Injector Dead times can be validated using the Emtune Software by using the Wideband Lambda control. Once the secondary blend is biased 100% towards the secondary injectors. If you add 10% to your VE table (@ 3000rpm / 80kpa load for example), you should see a corresponding negative 10% trim applied via the Wideband lambda control. If you don’t, then you know your dead times need some attention.

By utilizing a dead time table available in your Emtune software that is close. The correct dead time for your injector can be quickly arrived at by simply globally moving the table up & down. The voltage slop of the dead times can be further validated by removing the alternator charge and allowing the supply voltage to drop away. Correct dead times allow the engine to operate correctly over a wide range of variable conditions

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Starting Tables

Emtune has multiple tables for many engine functions. The table behavior is based on comprehensive selections in Tuning under the respective function (IE, Fuel, Ignition, DBW, Cam control). Some functions have many tables that can be enabled such as Fuel and Ignition tabs. These main functions allow you to enable a variety of compensations, modifiers, individual trims, and more.

For main table controls, the selections are mostly universal.

(Fuel example shown)

Image Image

Not all of the above example will be available for every function, but generally most functions are the same.

**ON – Table *** enable those respective tables always.

Cal Slot enables which table is currently being commanded by the Cal Slot Control (see Cal Slot Control)

Z-Axis uses a separate X axis lookup that can allow the blending of all the available tables.

Image Image

Any runtime can be used, and the units equal which table to run in this case. You can see in the above example the ECU will switch (and interpolate in between) the three different tables available based on TP1 position.

*** Blend** tables allow switching between two tables only.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Stoich Ratio Setup

Stoich Ratio Setup

Image Image

Used as part of the Fuel Model in conjunction with the Lambda Target to determine the required Fuel Mass.

Units: AFR

0: Default: 14.70 AFR

1: Custom - Table

2: Gasoline

3: E85 Alcohol

4: E100 Alcohol

5: Methanol

6: Propane

7: Diesel

A custom table allow the user to adjust the Stoich in real-time as the Fuel-type changes. An Ethanol example is shown below.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Stoichiometric Custom Table

Stoichiometric Custom Table

Image Image

Image Image

Gasoline to Ethanol Stoichiometric Custom Table example shown - available to load in Emtune software

This table is used by the ECU to determine the stoichiometric fuel ratio.

This is critical when multiple fuel compositions are used.

The most common application of this table is in a multi fuel system which uses a flex meter to determine the alcohol content.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Ignition Configuration

Ignition Mode

Overview

Image Image

Selects the ignition output strategy used by the engine. The selected ignition mode determines how ignition events are distributed across the available ignition output channels.

⚠️ Warning

The ECU Ignition Output provides a TTL-level trigger signal intended to control an external ignitor or a coil with an integrated ignitor module.

Do not connect the ECU Ignition Output directly to a coil negative terminal. Incorrect connection will result in damage to the ECU and/or ignition system.

Options

ValueMode
0Off
1Direct Fire
2Wasted Spark
3Distributor
4Twin Distributor
5Direct Fire + Direct Trailing Spark
6Wasted Spark + Direct Trailing Spark
7CDI 8

Mode Descriptions

Off

Disables all ignition outputs.

Direct Fire

Each cylinder is assigned its own dedicated ignition output channel.

Wasted Spark

Each ignition output fires two cylinders simultaneously, with one spark occurring on the compression stroke and the other on the exhaust stroke.

Distributor

Uses a single ignition output to drive a conventional distributor ignition system.

Twin Distributor

Uses two ignition outputs to drive a twin distributor ignition system.

Direct Fire + Direct Trailing Spark

Provides individual ignition outputs for both leading and trailing spark plugs. Commonly used on rotary engines requiring independent control of leading and trailing ignition events.

Wasted Spark + Direct Trailing Spark

Uses wasted spark ignition for the leading plugs while maintaining individual control of the trailing spark plugs.

CDI 8

Configures the ECU for operation with an external 8-channel Capacitive Discharge Ignition (CDI) system.


ℹ️ Note

  • Ignition Channel 1 is the only ignition output available in Distributor mode.
  • Ignition Channels 1 and 2 are the only ignition outputs available in Twin Distributor mode.
  • For Direct Fire + Direct Trailing Spark and Wasted Spark + Direct Trailing Spark modes, a maximum of 6 trailing ignition channels are available.
  • All other ignition modes provide fully configurable ignition channel assignments.

See Ignition Channel Setup for channel setup help.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Firing Edge

Overview

Image Image

Selects the ignition output edge used by the ECU to trigger the ignition firing event.

The selected edge defines the polarity of the ignition control signal. One edge initiates coil charging (Dwell Edge) while the opposite edge commands the ignition coil to discharge and generate the spark (Firing Edge)

Warning.
  • Ensure the correct ignition edge is selected before connecting the ECU to the ignition system. Selecting the incorrect edge may result in damage to the ECU, ignition module, ignition coil(s), or associated wiring.

  • The ECU Ignition Output provides a TTL-level trigger signal intended to control an external ignitor or a coil with an integrated ignitor module.

  • Do not connect the ECU Ignition Output directly to a coil negative terminal. Incorrect connection will result in damage to the ECU and/or ignition system.

Options

ValueModeDescription
0FallingCoil charging begins on the Rising Edge and the spark is fired on the Falling Edge.
1RisingCoil charging begins on the Falling Edge and the spark is fired on the Rising Edge.

ℹ️ Typical Configuration

Most modern ignition coils and ignition modules incorporate an internal ignitor and require a Falling Edge spark output.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition MBT Reference

Overview

Selects the ignition table that represents MBT (Minimum Spark Advance for Best Torque).

MBT is defined as the ignition timing that produces the maximum engine torque for a given engine speed and load operating point. Additional ignition advance beyond MBT will typically provide little or no increase in torque, while ignition timing retarded from MBT will result in a reduction in engine torque output.

ℹ️ Why is MBT Required?

The ECU Engine Torque Model requires a reference for the ignition timing that produces maximum engine torque at each engine speed and load operating point. The selected MBT reference table provides this reference and defines the maximum available engine torque for the Engine Torque Model.

By comparing the active ignition timing against the MBT reference table, the ECU can determine when the engine is operating below its maximum torque potential due to ignition retard and apply the appropriate correction to the calculated engine torque.

The ECU continuously calculates the difference between the active ignition timing and the configured MBT reference table:

Ignition MBT Offset = Active Ignition Timing - MBT Reference Timing

Where:

  • 0° Offset = Engine operating at MBT torque.
  • Negative Offset = Ignition timing is retarded relative to MBT, resulting in a reduction in the ECU calculated engine torque.
  • Positive Offset = Ignition timing is advanced beyond MBT and will typically result in little or no increase in engine torque.

Options

ValueMode
0Off
1Table 1
2Table 2

Off

Disables MBT referencing. The Engine Torque Model assumes no torque reduction due to ignition retard.

Table 1

Uses Ignition Table 1 as the MBT reference table.

Table 2

Uses Ignition Table 2 as the MBT reference table.

ℹ️ Recap

When the MBT Offset becomes negative, the active ignition timing is retarded relative to the MBT reference timing. As a result, the ECU determines that the engine is operating below its maximum torque potential and applies a corresponding reduction to the calculated engine torque used by the Engine Torque Model.

The MBT reference table should represent the ignition timing required to achieve maximum engine torque.

If dual ignition tables are used for different fuel types, such as Petrol and E85, the ignition table representing the highest achievable engine torque should generally be selected as the MBT reference table.

Since E85 typically requires greater ignition advance to achieve MBT than an equivalent Petrol calibration, the E85 ignition table will often be the preferred MBT reference.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Dwell Setup

Dwell Setup

Image Image

Overview

There are two Dwell Tables available. This setting determines which Dwell Table is assigned to each cylinder.

In most applications all cylinders will use the same Dwell Table. However, multiple dwell tables can be useful when different ignition coil types are used, or when leading and trailing ignition systems require different dwell characteristics.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Dwell Tables

Overview

Image Image

The Dwell Table defines the ignition coil charge time (dwell) as a function typically of ECU Supply Voltage and Engine Speed.

Dwell time is the amount of time the ignition coil primary winding is energised prior to the spark event and is expressed in units of milliseconds (ms).

During the dwell period, energy is stored within the ignition coil magnetic field and is subsequently released when the ignition event occurs. Insufficient dwell time may result in a weak spark and ignition misfire, while excessive dwell time can overheat the ignition coil and ignition driver circuitry.

Two independent Dwell Tables are available and can be assigned to individual cylinders using the Dwell Setup configuration page. See Dwell Setup for more infomration.

ℹ️ Note

Excessive dwell time does not generally increase spark energy once the ignition coil has reached magnetic saturation and may result in unnecessary heating and/or failure of the ignition coil and ignition drivers.


Dwell Offset Table 1

Image Image

The Dwell Offset Table 1 is a user-defined offset table that allows ignition coil charge time (dwell) to be adjusted based on operating conditions or factors not directly accounted for by Dwell Table 1.

Final Dwell = Dwell Table 1 + Dwell Offset Table 1

ℹ️ Note

Dwell Table 1 supports a user-defined Dwell Offset Table. Dwell Table 2 does not have an associated offset table and uses the base dwell values defined within the table only.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Test

Overview

Image Image

The Ignition Test function allows each ignition output channel to be manually fired for installation, diagnostics and troubleshooting purposes.

This function can be used to:

  • Verify ignition coil wiring.
  • Confirm cylinder numbering and firing order.
  • Check ignition output operation.
  • Verify spark plug and ignition coil functionality.
  • Diagnose ignition system faults.

The Ignition Test Dwell setting specifies the coil charge time used during the test event and is expressed in units of milliseconds (ms). A test dwell value of 3.0 to 4.0 ms is suitable for most modern inductive ignition coils.

When an ignition channel test is activated, the ECU charges the selected ignition coil for the configured test dwell period before firing a spark event. The test rate runs at 10Hz

The ignition test function operates at a fixed test rate of 10 Hz (10 ignition events per second).

⚠️ Warning

The Ignition Channel Output must have a cylinder assigned for this function to operate. See See Ignition Channel Setup for help.

Ensure the ignition system is configured correctly before performing an ignition test.

High voltages are generated during ignition testing which may cause injury or damage to ignition components if used incorrectly.

Do not perform ignition tests in the presence of fuel vapour or near flammable materials.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Channel Setup

Overview

Image Image

The Ignition Channel Setup table assigns each ECU ignition output channel to an engine cylinder number.

This configuration determines which ignition output is used to fire each cylinder.

A value of 0 indicates that the ignition output is not assigned to a cylinder and is therefore available for use by other ECU functions.

ℹ️ Note

The ignition channel assignments are independent of the engine firing order, which is configured separately using the Engine Firing Order settings. See Firing Order Setup

In most applications the ignition outputs are wired sequentially to simplify installation and diagnostics:

  • Ignition Output 1 → Cylinder 1
  • Ignition Output 2 → Cylinder 2
  • Ignition Output 3 → Cylinder 3
  • etc.

However, the ignition outputs may be assigned in any order to suit the wiring requirements of the installation.

Wasted Spark Configuration

For Wasted Spark applications, assign only the first cylinder in each firing pair to the ignition channel.

The ECU automatically determines the corresponding paired cylinder from the configured Engine Firing Order and generates the required wasted spark pairing and fills in the assignment table accordingly

The ignition channels should be assigned in engine firing order sequence.

Image Image

Assign Ignition Channels as shown below (regarding above firing order). Enter cylinder 1 into Ignition Channel 1 and the ECU will automatically also assign its pair, cylinder 6. Likewise enter cylinder 5 into Ignition Channel 2 and the ECU will automatically assign its pair, cylinder 2 etc.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Main

Overview

Image Image

Ignition Main allows for configuring the ECU to suit the engine’s ignition system.

The following settings are configured in this menu item :

  • Ignition Mode
  • Ignition Firing Edge
  • Ignition Current Source
  • Ignition Advance Clamp
  • Ignition Retard Clamp
  • Ignition Spark Duration

⚠️ Warning

The ECU Ignition Output provides a TTL-level trigger signal intended to control an external ignitor or a coil with an integrated ignitor module.

Do not connect the ECU Ignition Output directly to a coil negative terminal. Incorrect connection will result in damage to the ECU and/or ignition system.


Ignition Mode

See Ignition Mode for help.


Ignition Firing Edge

See Ignition Firing Edge for help.


Ignition MBT Reference

See Ignition MBT Reference for help.

Ignition Current Source

Controls the available current drive capability for all Ignition Channels

The ECU provides two selectable ignition output current modes:

  • Standard Current Mode 35mA at 5V
  • High Current Mode 70mA at 8.2V

High Current mode provides increased drive capability for ignition systems that require a higher input current (for example one ignition output driving two ignitors).


Ignition Advance Clamp

Limits the maximum ignition advance that the ECU is permitted to command.

If the final ignition timing calculation exceeds this value, the ignition timing will be clamped to the configured advance limit.

This function can be used to protect the engine from excessive ignition advance due to calibration errors, sensor failures or unexpected operating conditions.

Example:

  • Calculated Ignition Timing = 49°
  • Ignition Advance Clamp = 45°

Final Ignition Timing = 45°


Ignition Retard Clamp

Limits the maximum ignition retard that the ECU is permitted to command.

If the final ignition timing calculation is retarded beyond this value, the ignition timing will be clamped to the configured retard limit.

This limit is applied to the final ignition timing calculation after all ignition corrections, compensations and modifiers have been applied.

Allowing sufficient ignition retard range is important for functions that intentionally reduce engine torque using ignition timing retard, for example traction control, launch control and anti-lag etc.

A typical value for this setting is -45° BTDC.


Ignition Spark Duration

Specifies the minimum off-time after an ignition firing event before the ignition coil is permitted to begin charging again.

This ensures the coil remains de-energised long enough for the energy from the previous spark event to fully dissipate before the next dwell period begins.

This setting only applies when the ignition mode is configured as Distributor or Twin Distributor.

Default: 1.0 ms

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Retard Clamp

Ignition Retard Clamp

Image Image

The minimum ignition timing allowed even if the the calculated output is lower .

Typical : -20 deg

The ECU also provides a Status flag to indication this condition. Open the ECU Runtimes menu (F3) and select the Ignition Tab.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Spark Duration

Ignition Spark Duration

Image Image

The user definable time factor after a firing event before the coil can be switched back on.

This function keeps the ignition coil switched off for a fixed time, allowing the energy from the previous firing event to fully discharged.

Default: 1.0ms

0.5ms to 5.0ms time window available

Note: Distributor systems only

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Channels

Analog Channels 7-12 have configuration pull-up resistors. Sensors requiring a pull-up such as Engine Temperature or Inlet Temperature should use these channels.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Channels

Input Setup

Input Setup

There are two main groups of Input Setup Type - Analog Inputs and Digital Inputs. They are grouped into to standard form types, that are mostly the same for all inputs.

Analog Inputs

Image Image

Above example shows Manifold Pressure Sensor channel.

Input Source

Choose your input source.

** See ECU Hardware Specifications for assigning the best source for your input channel

Filter

Each input can have its own moving average filter applied.

Pull Up

If the channel has pull up capability, the pull up flag will be available.

Sensor V. Reference

Select number of Analog Inputs have Ratio Metric input functions. Select the 5V V Reference Pin if applicable.

** See Ratio Metric Reference Manual available online

Calibration Type

Customize - via Multii-point table on the right

Pre-defined - Via dropdown list (Predefined Calibration)

Clamp Lo/H

Clamp the Low/High value of the input

Fault Lo/Hi

Set Low/High fault voltages

Detect Time Lo/Hi

Set Low/High detect time for fault values to be effective

Fault Value

Set the substitute value for each individual input when Fault is active

DTC Control

Set DTC (diagnostic trouble code) behavior

Auto Clear

Manual Clear (ECU must be connected to clear fault codes)

DTC Engine Limit

Set the Limp Home Limit Table to be used if DTC is active

Limp Home Table 1

Limp Home Table 2

Off

Fault Table

Some major sensor inputs (MAP, TPS, etc) have the ability to enable “Fault Table”, where in fault mode, substitute values can be more than one value.

Image Image

When enabling Fault Table, Fault Value becomes inactive. Clicking Edit Fault Table gives the user a larger table to add more than one value for substitute values

Image Image

Axis for table is open, and as an example you can see for MAP substitute values, the axis is selected to look at TPS vs RPM

Digital Inputs

Image ImageImage Image

Above examples show a Brake Switch Input and wheel speed input

Input Source

Choose your input source.

** See ECU Hardware Specifications for assigning the best source for your input channel

Sensor Type

Select the Sensor Type

Magnetic

Hall

Momentary

Status will "latch" whenever the thresholds are satisfied

Switch

Will be active when the thresholds are satisfied 

Active Edge

Rising

Falling

Both

Off

Pull Up

If the channel has pull up capability, the pull up flag will be available.

Filter

Filter value

Threshold Mode

2 Point

** Only to be used for switch inputs

Table

Table value dictates voltage crossover where signal is valid (voltage level must be **higher** than this arming voltage)

Used for frequency inputs

Active Edge must be configured correctly 

See ECU Hardware Specifications for inputs with configurable table arming thresholds 

2 Point On/Off

Voltages in which 2 Point mode thresholds are active

Hardware Specifications

Analog Inputs 1- 14

  • Input Analog Voltage Range: 0 - 5.0V
  • 12 Bit ADC (4096 points)
  • 1st order 100Hz Low pass filter.
  • 1.22 mV (0.0122V) resolution.

DI 1- 8

  • Input Analog Voltage Range: 0 - 20.0V
  • 4.88mV resolution (10 bit effective resolution using 20V Range - 1024 points)
  • Maximum usable analog input voltage: 20.0V

.

DI 9- 14

  • Input Analog Voltage Range: 0 - 20.0V
  • 19.5 mV resolution (10 bit effective resolution using 20V Range) - 256 points
  • Maximum usable Analog Input Voltage: 20.0V

Example A. Take MAP sensor 0 - 5V input into the ECU with range of 0.0 kPa to 400.0 kPa (3 bar of boost)

a) Using AN 1- 14 (12 Bit resolution)

MAP Resolution = 400 kPa / 4096 = 0.097 kPa. This means the ECU can measure the pressure actuate to within 0.097 kPa using a 4Bar Map sensor.

b) Using DI 1- 8 (10 Bit resolution)

MAP Resolution = 400 kPa / 1024 = 0.488 kPa. This means the ECU can measure the pressure actuate to within 0.488 kPa using a 4Bar Map sensor.

c) Using DI 9- 14 (8 Bit resolution)

MAP Resolution = 400 kPa / 256 = 1.56 kPa. This means the ECU can measure the pressure actuate to within 1.56 kPa using a 4Bar Map sensor.

Example B. Take EGT 0- 5V input into the ECU with range of 0.0 DegC to 1000.0 DegC

a) Using AN 1- 14 (12 Bit resolution)

EGT Temperature Resolution = 1000 degC / 4096 = 0.24 degrees. This means the ECU can measure the EGT temperature actuate to within 0.24 degrees

b) Using DI 1- 8 (10 Bit resolution)

EGT Temperature Resolution = 1000 degC / 1024 = 0.98 degrees. This means the ECU can measure the EGT temperature actuate to within 0.98 degrees or 1.0 degrees rounded up.

c) Using DI 9- 14 (8 Bit resolution)

EGT Temperature Resolution = 1000 degC / 256 = 3.90 degrees. This means the ECU can measure the EGT temperature actuate to within 3.90 degrees or 4.0 degrees rounded up.

NOTE: The Digital Input voltage channels are normally used to read switch inputs and for ECU self testing procedures. However, DI1-8 channels still has very good resolution at 10 Bit with a 0 - 20V range so pressure and temperature sensors can still use connected to these channels.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Quick Calibrations

Quick Calibrations

Config -> Engine Setup

Image Image

Calibrate Pedal (for DBW applications), and Throttle Position quickly from these menu choices

** To calibrate DBW plate position (with fully configured inputs/outputs), this is done in the Tuning Section, as generally the PID and other functions must be “tuned” as well - Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Drive By Wire -> DBW 1/2 Configuration

Image Image

Changing DBW Calibration modes will calibrate the plate. See DBW specific help sections for more information.

Validation of the programmed voltages can be observed under the input setup Config -> Channels -> Input Setup. Find the PP/DBW sensors under the DBW tab, or the TPS sensor under the Engine tab (depending which was calibrated), and you can validate if the programmed voltages are correct if there are any issues.

Image Image

Make sure the fault settings are correct for swept voltages, and the raw voltages can even be viewed in the default view under the Config tab.

Voltages can also be viewed under F3 Runtimes under Raw Inputs, but also the calculated values can then be validated (Pedal Position %, DBW Servo, Throttle Position %).

Image Image

TPS Open Calibrate

Image Image

This function is used to calibrate the Open position of the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) for cable throttle systems

For DBW systems, the DBW servo position (main & sub) are calibrated in the DBW Setup

To utilise, Left mouse button click on tab (see above example)

When completed, an acknowledgment tab will appear

Image Image

TPS Closed Calibrate

Image Image

This function is used to calibrate the closed position of the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) for cable throttle systems.

For DBW systems, the DBW servo position (main & sub) are calibrated in the DBW Setup

To utilise, Left mouse button click on tab (see above example)

When completed, an acknowledgment tab will appear

Image Image

PPS Open Calibrate

Image Image

This function is used to calibrate the Open position of the Pedal Position Sensor (DBW)

To utilise, Left mouse button click on tab (see above example)

When completed, an acknowledgment tab will appear

Image Image

PPS Closed Calibrate

Image Image

This function is used to calibrate the closed position of the Pedal Position Sensor (DBW)

To utilise, Left mouse button click on tab (see above example)

When completed, an acknowledgment tab will appear

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Barometric Pressure

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 45

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Calculated Runtimes

Main

Image Image

Image Image

The Calculated runtimes Main is where the Efficiency Calculation and Load Calculation runtimes are defined.

The runtime is defined by nominating the air mass calculation and or blend to used to arrive at the runtime result

This permits the user to quickly utilize more complex forms of efficiency & load calculation

Both the efficiency & load calculation runtimes are labeled with a specific task in mind and also available as a selectable runtime for any table

Example:

In the KV sample file; note the main VE table load axis (Y axis) is configured as “Efficiency Calculation”, and the main ignition map is configured as “Load Calculation”

Efficiency Calculation

** Efficiency Calculation is used for Fuel Tables

Select how the runtime calculates Efficiency Calculation

0: MAP

Manifold Pressure converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP = 55.7kpa

Efficiency Calculation = 55.7%

1: TPS

Throttle Position converted to Efficiency Calculation %

TPS = 98.5%

Efficiency Calculation = 98.5%

2: BAP

Barometric Pressure converted to Efficiency Calculation %

BAP = 93.4kpa

Efficiency Calculation = 93.4%

3: MAP/BAP %

Manifold Pressure divided by Barometric Pressure converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP = 85kpa

BAP = 87kpa

Efficiency Calculation = (85/87)*100 = 97.70%

4: MAP/EMAP %

Manifold Pressure divided by Barometric Pressure converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP = 220kpa

EMAP = 240kpa

Efficiency Calculation = (220/240)*100 = 91.66%

5: TPS/BAP %

Throttle Position divided by Barometric pressure converted to Efficiency Calculation  %

TPS = 98%

BAP = 85kpa

Efficiency Calculation = (98/85)*100 = 115.29%

6: Air Mas Final (mg/cyl)

Air Mass milligrams per cycle converted to Efficiency Calculation %



Air Mass = 0.121g/cyl

Efficiency Calculation = 0.121*1000 = 121%



Air Mass = 1.373g/cyl

Efficiency Calculation = 1.373*1000 = 1373%

7: MAP Bank 1 & 2 Avg

Manifold Pressure Bank 1 and 2 averaged together converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP Bank 1 = 224kpa

MAP Bank 2 = 236kpa

Efficiency Calculation = 224+236/2 = 230%

8: MAP Modelled

Manifold Pressure Modelled converted to Efficiency Calculation %

Manifold Pressure Modelled = 155kpa

Efficiency Calculation = 155%

9: MAP Modelled Bank 1 & 2 Avg

Manifold Pressure Modelled Bank 1 and 2 averaged together converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP Modelled Bank 1 = 224kpa

MAP Modelled Bank 2 = 236kpa

Efficiency Calculation = 224+236/2 = 230%

10 : MAP Modelled/BAP %

Manifold Pressure Modelled divided by Barometric Pressure converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP Modelled = 85kpa

BAP = 98kpa

Efficiency Calculation = (85/98)*100 = 86.73%

11: MAP Modelled Bank 1 & 2 Avg/BAP %

Manifold Pressure Modelled Bank 1 and 2 averaged together, divided by Barometric Pressure, and converted to Efficiency Calculation %

MAP Modelled Bank 1 = 75kpa

MAP Modelled Bank 2 = 78kpa

BAP = 90kpa

Efficiency Calculation = ((75+78/2)/90)*100 = 85%

Load Calculation

** Load Calculation is used for Ignition Tables

Select how the runtime calculates Load Calculation

0: MAP

Manifold Pressure converted to Load Calculation %

MAP = 55.7kpa

Load Calculation = 55.7%

1: TPS

Throttle Position converted to Load Calculation %

TPS = 98.5%

Load Calculation = 98.5%

2: BAP

Barometric Pressure converted to Load Calculation %

BAP = 93.4kpa

Load Calculation = 93.4%

3: MAP/BAP %

Manifold Pressure divided by Barometric Pressure converted to Load Calculation %

MAP = 85kpa

BAP = 87kpa

Load Calculation = (85/87)*100 = 97.70%

4: MAP/EMAP %

Manifold Pressure divided by Barometric Pressure converted to Load Calculation %

MAP = 220kpa

EMAP = 240kpa

Load Calculation = (220/240)*100 = 91.66%

5: TPS/BAP %

Throttle Position divided by Barometric pressure converted to Load Calculation %

TPS = 98%

BAP = 85kpa

Load Calculation = (98/85)*100 = 115.29%

6: Air Mas Final (mg/cyl)

Air Mass milligrams per cycle converted to Load Calculation %



Air Mass = 0.121g/cyl

Load Calculation = 0.121*1000 = 121%



Air Mass = 1.373g/cyl

Load Calculation = 1.373*1000 = 1373%

7: MAP Bank 1 & 2 Avg

Load Pressure Bank 1 and 2 averaged together converted to Load Calculation %

MAP Bank 1 = 224kpa

MAP Bank 2 = 236kpa

Load Calculation = 224+236/2 = 230%

8: MAP Modelled

Manifold Pressure Modelled converted to Load Calculation %

Manifold Pressure Modelled = 155kpa

Load Calculation = 155%

9: MAP Modelled Bank 1 & 2 Avg

Manifold Pressure Modelled Bank 1 and 2 averaged together converted to Load Calculation %

MAP Modelled Bank 1 = 224kpa

MAP Modelled Bank 2 = 236kpa

Load Calculation = 224+236/2 = 230%

10 : MAP Modelled/BAP %

Manifold Pressure Modelled divided by Barometric Pressure converted to Load Calculation %

MAP Modelled = 85kpa

BAP = 98kpa

Load Calculation = (85/98)*100 = 86.73%

11: MAP Modelled Bank 1 & 2 Avg/BAP %

Manifold Pressure Modelled Bank 1 and 2 averaged together, divided by Barometric Pressure, and converted to Load Calculation %

MAP Modelled Bank 1 = 75kpa

MAP Modelled Bank 2 = 78kpa

BAP = 90kpa

Load Calculation = ((75+78/2)/90)*100 = 85%

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cooling System Pressure

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Crankcase Pressure

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cruise Command Switch

Notes on “Cruise Control Switch Type = Custom “

When the Voltage setting = 0.0V the corresponding setting is disabled within the Cruise Command Switch channel. In the below example the “Enable Sw” setting is disabled.

Image Image

As the Enable Sw is disabled within the “Cruise Command Switch” channel in the above example, it allows the dedicated “Cruise Enable Switch” channel to be used.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Oil Pressure

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Oil Temperature

This sensor should use Analog Input Channels 7 -12 as these have configurable pull-up resistors.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Temperature

This sensor should use Analog Input Channels 7 -12 as these have configurable pull-up resistors. Recommended channel for Engine Temperature is Analog Input Channel 7.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 40 - 45

Specs

Minimum Value = -50.0 DegC

Maximum Value = 250.0 DegC

Resolution = 0.1 DegC

Accuracy = +/-0.5 DegC

The ECU measures the 5V pull-up supply, then applies a ratio-metric correction to give very accurate measurements.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ethanol Content Sensor - Continental

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Exhaust Manifold Pressure

![IMPORTANT] Only absolute pressure sensors can be used. Gauge type sensors will NOT work as an EMAP sensor.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Pressure 1

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 20 - 25

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Temperature

This sensor should use Analog Input Channels 7 -12 as these have configurable pull-up resistors.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Inlet Air Temperature

This sensor should use Analog Input Channels 7 -12 as these have configurable pull-up resistors. Recommended channel for Inlet Temperature is Analog Input Channel 8.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 10 - 15

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Input Shaft Speed

Input Shaft Speed is available on Channels DI 1- 8 on the KV Series and DI1-4 on the SL Series. The units are RPM.

See Speed Settings for information on sensor setup.

Input Shaft Speed Calculation

With 0% Clutch Slip, for the Input Shaft RPM to match the Engine Speed the Scaler should be calculated as follows:

Scaler = 60

         Number teeth on Input Shaft

Example1: 4 teeth on the Input Shaft

Scaler = 60 / 4 = 15.00

Example1: 7 teeth on the Input Shaft

Scaler = 60 / 7 = 8.57

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Intake MAF Air Temperature

This sensor should use Analog Input Channels 7 -12 as these have configurable pull-up resistors.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 35 - 40

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Internal LSU Sensor Control

Internal LSU Sensor Control

Image Image

The KV series ECU has the ability to interface directly to a Bosch Lambda Sensor(s), model LSU4.9.

To achieve the optimal control of this sensor, the ECU uses a genuine Bosch Integrated Circuit technology. It provides very accurate data on pump current which equates to Lambda

and also Nernst Cell Temperature which is used for precise heater control.

The ECU assigns the correct the Heater Output Channel based on ECU Type and Serial Number. The only setup required to enable the Internal Lambda 1 or 2 control is from the Config View -> Inputs-> Engine tab.

  • If “Lambda 1” Input Channel has the Input Source selected to “Internal Lambda 1” the function becomes enabled.
  • If “Lambda 2” Input Channel has the Input Source selected to “Internal Lambda 2” the function becomes enabled

Image Image

Adjustments to the operation of On-board Lambda Sensor Control can be made from the Tuning view -> Engine Functions -> Internal LSU Sensor Control

Image Image

The ECU uses all 6 sensor wires per sensor.

Sensor Shock

In some situations during normal operation, the sensor will temporally shutdown for between 0.5 sec to 2.5 secs. This is usually caused by a combination of sensor incorrect placement and Fuel type resulting in the sensor being “shocked” ; either thermally or by a pressure wave inside the exhaust system. For the correct sensor placement please read the Sensor Installation and Wiring topic.

Although the sensor shutdown is outside the ECU’s control, the status is constantly monitored. In the event of a shutdown the heater control is put into a Hold mode as it the Closed Loop Lambda.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Inputs

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 15 - 20

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Sensor Installation and Wiring

Sensor Installation

Installation angle must be inclined at least 10° towards horizontal, (electrical connection upwards) up to a maximum of 75°. This prevents the collection of liquids between sensor housing and sensor element during the cold start phase.

The angle against the exhaust gas stream should be aimed as 90°. Maximum inclination should be 90°+15° (protection tube towards gas stream) or 90°-30°.

NOTE: NEVER mount the sensor directly on the horizontal or within 10 degrees of the horizontal. Doing so will result in intermittent sensor shutdown.

Image Image

Also route the sensor cable to avoid high moisture locations – just a small amount of moisture is enough to provide a conductive path within the connector that will upset measurement from the sensor.

Winter and salted roads compound this issue. Always check for a cracked or broken connector when strange results occur.

Noise Immunity

To minimize signal contamination and maximize noise immunity, the wire pairs shown in the below Table must be twisted. It is recommended to twist the wire pairs at a minimum one twist per 40mm of cable. This is very important and should always be implemented on the LSU sensor wiring.

Pair 1Pair 2
Pump Current<——->Cal Resistor
Nernst Cell Voltage<——->Virtual Ground

Wire pairing for twisting

NOTE: To avoid signal errors and loss of accuracy, a cable of a maximum length of 1.5 m between sensor and ECU is recommended.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

LSU 4.9 ADV / LSU 4.9 Comparison

Difference between LSU4.9 ADV and LSU 4.9

Heater Power and Light-Off Times: The LSU4.9 Adv has a bigger heater element allowing the sensor to start operating sooner when compared to a LSU4.9:

LSU4.9 ADV has a 8.7W heater - 5sec lite-off time from cold to start operating

LSU4.9 has a 7.5W heater - 12sec lite-off time from cold to start operating

Temperature Range: The LSU4.9 ADV has a wider working temperature range (930DegC). A version of this sensor called the ”LSU 4.9 Adv pre-Turbo” is also available and has a protection tube of Inconel for pre-turbo applications.

Sensor Element: LSU4.9 ADV has a new generation sensor element which is ideal for motorsport as it improves stability under thermal shock conditions.

Service Life - 200Hrs Example

LSU4.9 response time will slow over time.

LSU4.9 ADV response time will show no significant change over this time.

Connector: The LSU 4.9 Adv has no trimming resistor inside the connector (pin 5) and is therefore only a 5-wire plug. This also means any connector system can be used if required (cut off the connector and re-terminate).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Manifold Pressure

Manifold Pressure Input

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 15 - 25. This setting is heavily dependent on engine setup and the stability of the MAP signal at idle. Engines with large overlapping camshafts for example, will most likely need a larger filter value to achieve a more stable MAP signal.

Specs

Minimum Value = 0.0 kPa

Maximum Value = 1000.0 kPa

Resolution = 0.1 kPa

Accuracy = +/-0.1 kPa

The ECU measures the MAP Sensor Supply, then applies a ratio-metric correction to give a very accurate measuremens. What this means is the MAP sensor output is not affected but its supply voltage.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Speed Inputs

Normally these are frequency based inputs and should be connected between Digital Input 1 - 8. The ECU can can read a frequency range on these input from 0Hz - 25kHz (25000Hz).

The following Speed Options are available:

  • Left Drive Speed.
  • Right Drive Speed
  • Left Drive Speed 2
  • Left Drive Speed 2
  • Left Ground Speed
  • Right Ground Speed
  • Drive Speed
  • Ground Speed
  • Turbo Speed 1
  • Turbo Speed 2
  • Input Shaft Speed
  • Tail Shaft Speed

Sources

The following channel assigns are recommended.

Four Wheel Drive

If the speed data is collected by the ECU on all 4 wheels, then assign the front wheels to the Left and Right Drive Speed Channels and the rear wheels to the Left an Right Speed 2 Channels

Gearbox Output

Assign this to the Drive Speed Channel.

CAN

CAN Data: Input Source = CAN Bus OEM

This allows speed data that is available on a factory CAN bus to be displayed. The following channels can be used for different CAN bus systems.

NOTE: When the Input Source is selected as “CAN Bus OEM” only the Filter setting is used. All other settings are not required as the data is already calibrated.

See Build Packages for application specific information.

Configuration

Each Speed Input has a range of settings that must to be configured to match the input type.

Sensor Type

  • Magnetic.
  • Hall Effect
  • Logic
  • Switch.

Active Edge

  • Rising
  • Falling
  • Both
  • Off

Pull Up

Can be used to switch on a 9V pull up resistor.

Scaler

Scales the frequency based input into kph or into the units that have been selected. The raw frequency value can be viewed from the Runtime Menu -> Raw Inputs Tab.

Arming Thresholds

Each channel when assigned between DI 1-8 can have two options for arming threshold control; 2 point or Table.

NOTE: It is recommended on ALL frequency based Magnetic inputs that the Table option is used. This allows better signal integrity control due to the improved functionality offered by the table.

Scaler Calculation

Scaler = Number of Sensor Teeth / Wheel Diameter(cm) * 3180

Scaler = 360 when using CAN Speed Inputs

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Throttle Position

Used primarily by the ECU for Transient Accel and Decel fueling. It can be used in 4D/5D mapping and also controls the lockout conditions for many ECU functions.

Clamp Settings

The available range is from -100.0 % to 100.0%, however after calibration the range should show 0.0%(closed throttle) to 100.0%(open throttle).

NOTE: The ECU does not clamp the minimum TP to 0.0% nor the maximum to 100.0%. These settings are adjustable from the Input Setup Form.

Clamp Lo

Recommended value = -10.0%.

Clamp Hi

Recommended value = 105.0%.

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 50

Recommended Filter Range = 2 - 5

Specs

Minimum Value = -100.0 %

Maximum Value = 100.0 %

Resolution = 0.1 %

Accuracy = +/-0.1 %

In DBW Applications also refer to DBW Input Setup

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Turbo Speed

Turbo Speed is available on Channels DI 1- 8 on KV Series and DI1-4 on SL Series. The units are RPM

Tip: See Speed Inputs for information on sensor setup.

Turbo Speed Calculation

Turbo Speed(RPM) = Frequency x Scaler x 10

Example: 2351 Hz, Scaler = 2.56 Turbo Speed = (2351 Hz x 2.56) x 10 = 60180 RPM

Example: 4436 Hz, Scaler = 2.56 Turbo Speed = (4436 Hz x 2.56) x 10 = 113560 RPM

Note: Turbo speed sensor electronics divide the raw frequency by 8

Scaler

Turbo Fin Count: 14 Electronics Divider : 8 Turbo Speed : 100,000 Convert Pulse to Frequency : /60

(100000 / 8) x 14 / 60 = 2916.67 Hz

Resolution Modifier : 10

2916.67 x 10 = 29166.7

Scaler = 10000 / 29166.7 = 3.43

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

VVT

VVT Input Channel Selection

For closed loop position control, each camshaft must be assigned a position sensor. \

Config View -> Inputs -> Input Pin Setup -> VVT

Example Config (quad cam VVT control):

Image Image

Configure sensor inputs as required. Magnetic, Hall, DI threshold table, etc.

******* Since one Cam position sensor is being used for sync, select which camshaft should reference the Sync Sensor for position – IE Intake (LH). ***

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Communications

CAN Bus

Introduction

The ECU has 2 independent CAN Nodes.; CAN 1 and CAN 2. The Baud rate can be independently set for each node.

The ECU has 128 message boxes. This means the ECU can Receive or Transmits on 128 different Addresses. This is a very large number and offers great flexibility. In order the simply setup procedure the CAN 1 and CAN 2 will be separated into Channels, with each Channel having a fixed number of available messages boxes/addresses.

CAN Termination

The ECU does not include an internal 120ohm CAN terminating resistor. This allows the ECU to be placed at any location within the CAN bus system.

If the ECU is located at the end of the CAN bus, an external 120 ohm terminating resistor will need to be used.

CAN Nodes

CAN 1

CAN 1 node is divided up into 6 Channels, 64 message objects in total

MO = Message Object

CAN 1 Channel NumberNumber of Message
CAN 1 - Channel 114 CAN message objects
CAN 1 - Channel 210 CAN message objects
CAN 1 - Channel 310 CAN message objects
CAN 1 - Channel 410 CAN message objects
CAN 1 - Channel 510 CAN message objects
CAN 1 - Channel 610 CAN message objects

CAN 2

CAN 2 node is divided up into 6 Channels, 64 message objects in total

CAN 1 Channel NumberNumber of Message
CAN 2 - Channel 114 CAN message objects
CAN 2 - Channel 210 CAN message objects
CAN 2 - Channel 310 CAN message objects
CAN 2 - Channel 410 CAN message objects
CAN 2 - Channel 510 CAN message objects
CAN 2 - Channel 610 CAN message objects

Addressing

  • 0: Single (11-BIT)
  • 1: Sequential (11-BIT)
  • 2: Single (29-BIT)
  • 3: Sequential 29-BIT)

Base Address

Starting CAN Address / PID (Parameter ID). The CAN Base Address tells the ECU where to start transmitting data from.

These values are in DECIMAL, not hex.

Single

Only the single “CAN Address” is active. This means data can only be TX/RX on that single CAN Base Address

Sequential

The CAN address starts at the “CAN Address” defined then sequentially increments that address until all the data has been transmitted

Once the data (TX/RX) on the CAN Base Address is full, the ECU will poll the next address sequentially for additional data

IE 1250, 1251, 1252, …

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Bandwidth Considerations

Bus bandwidth needs to be considered when data is transmitted over CAN. The ECU has Transmit rates from 10Hz up to 1000Hz.

Example 1:

The following uses the Predefined 1 Tx DATA set. This uses 10 sequential addresses and it total transmits the value of 40 parameters. CAN Baud rate at 1Mbps

Tx RateNumber of MessagesBandwidth Used (%)Available Bandwidth for other devices
10Hz101.2%98.8%
50Hz106.1%93.9%
100Hz1012.2%87.8%
500Hz1061%39%
1000Hz10Cannot be achieved

Example 2:

The following uses the Custom 1 Tx DATA set. This uses 5 sequential addresses and it total transmits the value of 20 parameters. CAN Baud rate at 1Mbps

Tx RateNumber of MessagesBandwidth Used (%)Available Bandwidth for other devices
10Hz50.6%99.4%
50Hz53.05%96.95%
100Hz56.1%93.9%
500Hz530.5%69.5%
1000Hz561%39%

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

OBD II J1979

Onboard Diagnostics 2 or OBD2 is supported by the ECU using the SAE J1979 standard. The ECU supports the following service requests:

  • Show current data
  • Mil Status
  • Show stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
  • Clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and stored values
  • Request vehicle information

OBD II Service Mode 01 - Show Current Data

The ECU supports the following PIDs when the “Show Current Data” serviced is requested.

PID (hex)PID (Dec)Data bytes returnedDescriptionMin valueMax valueUnitsNotes
0114Monitor status since DTCs cleared. (Includes malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) status and number of DTCs.)
0332Fuel system statusOnly displayed when Closed Loop Fuel enabled. See Below
0441Calculated engine load0100%
0551Engine coolant temperature-40215°C
0661Short term fuel trim—Bank 1-10099.2%Only displayed when Closed Loop Fuel enabled
0771Long term fuel trim—Bank 1
0881Short term fuel trim—Bank 2
0991Long term fuel trim—Bank 2
0A101Fuel pressure (gauge pressure)0765kPaOnly displayed when Fuel Pressure input enabled
0B111Manifold absolute pressure0255kPa
0C122Engine RPM016,383rpm
0D131Vehicle speed0255km/h
0E141Timing advance-6463.5° before TDC
0F151Inlet Air Temperature-40215°C
10161Final Mass Flow Rate0655.35g/sNote. This is Final flow rate, not MAF flow rate
11171Throttle Position/Servo Main (for DBW Application)0100%
14201Narrow Band Oxygen Sensor 101.275VOnly displayed when Narrow-band input enabled
15211Narrow Band Oxygen Sensor 201.275VOnly displayed when Narrow-band input enabled
1C281OBD standards this vehicle conforms toSee Below
1F312Run time since engine start065535seconds

Supplementary Information

PID 0x03 - Fuel System Closed Loop Status

CAN ValueSuffixDescription
1OPENOpen loop due to insufficient engine temperature
2CLSDClosed loop, using oxygen sensor feedback to determine fuel mix
4OPEN1Open loop due to lockout condition or OFF (fuel cut due to deceleration, limiting, post start etc)
8OPEN 2Open loop due to system failure
16CLSD1Closed loop, using at least one oxygen sensor but there is a fault in the feedback system

PID 0x04 - Calculated Engine Load

There are 2 types of load defined by the SAE J1979, one is Calculated engine load the other Absolute engine load. The Calculated Load is referenced to engine speed, so its the %Engine Load at that RPM.

As defined by ODB II regulations Calculated load = (Current airflow / peak airflow @sea level) x (Baro @sea level / Baro) x 100%

PID 0x1C - OBD standards this vehicle conforms to

A request for this PID returns a single byte of data which describes which OBD standards this ECU was designed to comply with. Emtron replies with a value of 6

ValueDescription
1OBD-II as defined by the CARB

| 3 | OBD and OBD-II | | 4 | OBD-I | | 5 | Not OBD compliant | | 6 | EOBD (Europe) | | 7 | EOBD and OBD-II | | 8 | EOBD and OBD | | 9 | EOBD, OBD and OBD II | | 10 | JOBD (Japan) | | 11 | JOBD and OBD II | | 12 | JOBD and EOBD | | 13 | JOBD, EOBD, and OBD II | | 14 | Reserved | | 15 | Reserved | | 16 | Reserved |

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Bus Errors

CAN Diagnostics information can be found under the Communications Tab in the Runtime (F3) menu.

Last Error Code Status

  • Ack Error. This normally indicates the ECU cannot communicate with other devices on the BUS. Check all devices are running the same BUS Baud rate.
  • BIT 0 Error. If this error is constant, it normally indicates a direct short between CAN Lo and CAN Hi.
  • BIT 1 Error. If this error is constant, it normally indicates a direct short between CAN Lo and CAN Hi.
  • BIT 0 & Ack Error. If the error is toggling between these two messages, this normally indicates the CAN Lo and CAN Hi are reversed.

Command Bus Errors

  • Emtron Transmitting data , but receiving device is missing from the CAN Bus.

Image Image

  • Emtron Transmitting data , but receiving device is missing from the CAN Bus and 120 Ohm terminating resistor missing.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Bus Termination

CAN Bus High and Low are differential signals, so twisted pair MUST be used. Failing to do so will compromise the entire CAN Bus System.

Shielded twisted pair may be required to help with reliability and data integrity.

The less connectors in any transmission system the better. Unnecessary connectors are almost guaranteed to present an impedance discontinuity and hence may cause reflections and data loss.

CAN Bus termination must be done correctly by using a 120 ohm 0.25W resistor at each END of the bus system.

Maximum Stub length to a device from the main Bus is recommended at 0.3m, in accordance with High-Speed ISO 11898 Standard specification. See Figure 3.3.

The ELC devices do not include an on-board CAN termination resistor, allowing the device to be wired at any position on the Bus. CAN Bus termination must be done correctly by using a 120 ohm 0.25W resistor at each end of the bus system as mentioned above. Figures 3.1 and 3.2 show possible CAN Bus Implementation examples

Image Image

Figure 3.1. CAN Bus Wiring Example. ECU and Dash at each end with 120 Ohm Termination

Image Image

CAN Bus Wiring Example

  • ECU and ELC2 at each end with 120 Ohm Termination.
  • Stub Length less than 0.3m

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Bus Torque Modifier

CAN Bus Torque Modifier

Image Image

This table is used to modify the torque calculation to be delivered as an output for use on an OEM Can Bus or other CAN bus applications. The Torque value can be “bent” allowing the user to change the behavior of a vehicle system e.g Traction or Gearshift . This gets applied as an offset to both the Engine Torque and Driver Demand Torque. Table range is +/- 500Nm.

The default table is a single cell without axis. However, both the X & Y axis are available and can be enabled at any time in the axis setup form.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Custom RX Data Sets

Emtron can be configured to receive Custom Messages over CAN bus channels.

To Receive the Custom RX Data sets, select them under

Config -> Communications -> CAN Bus 1/2 -> DATA Set

** Scaling per data set will be fixed. IE - CAN Speed for Data Set 1 must all be the same

Image Image

** Channels received are raw CAN runtimes. These channels must be assigned to “real” runtimes to be used in different sections of the ECU.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Parameter Scaling

Info
All values are 16 bit unsigned intergers, LSB Byte Order
InfoUnlisted runtimes are raw
TypeMultiplierOffsetUnit
Lambda0.0010Lambda
Lambda Target Error0.001-10Lambda
STFT/LTFT0.01-100%
Cam Position0.1-200Degree
MGP0.1-100KPA
Fuel/Oil Pressure0.10KPA
PPS/TPS/Motor Position0.1-100%
VE0.10%
IdleP0.10%
PP/TP Error0.10%
DBW Target Error0.1-100%
Injector duty0.10%
Inj PW0.0010ms
F/I Cut0.10%
Speed KPH0.10KPH
RPM ROC1-20000RPM/second
PP/TP ROC0.1-100%/second
ECU G0.01-10G
Ignition angle0.1-100Degree
Ignition trims0.1-100Degree
FP Diff Offset0.1-1000KPA
Voltage0.0010Voltage
Drive Slip0.01-100%
Temps0.1-50Degrees C
Fuel Level0.10Liters
Fuel used0.010Liters
Gear1-10Gear
Time Milliseconds0.010Milliseconds
Time Seconds0.10Seconds
Time Min10Min
Force0.1-100KG
Mass flow /Sec0.10G/s
Mass flow /Cyl0.0010G/cyl
Traction Target0.10%
Traction Target Error0.1-100%
Power10KW
Torque1-1000NM
Torque Reduction (Frictional loss)-10NM
Vehicle Accel (M/S/S)0.01-100m/s/s
Vehicle Accel (KM/HR/S)0.01-100km/hr/s

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Torque Limit

The ECU can receive Torque Limit Request(s) over the CAN Bus.

ImportantThis is available on firmware 2.20.0 or later.

The torque limit frame can be received from 3 different data sets. If more than one are received they are used with the following priority:

  1. Emtron CAN Torque Limit (ID 1428).
  2. Advanced Rx Data Set 1
  3. Pre-defined Rx Set 1 v0.1 - Message 5 (ID 1428).
InfoThis is an Absolute Engine Torque Limit Request. Eg: If 350.0Nm is requested the Torque Limiting function will target 350.0Nm from the engine.

The frame contains 2 torque limits, the lowest one will be applied (assuming it’s the lowest of all other active torque limits).

CAN Rx ID: 1428 (0x594)

SignalStart BitLengthFactorOffsetNote
CAN Torque Limit 1 (NM)0160.1-500Absolute engine torque limit. -500 = Off.
CAN Torque Limit 2 (NM)16160.1-500Absolute engine torque limit. -500 = Off.
CAN Torque Limit 1 Strat Select32410Selects the torque limit strategy used to apply the torque limit.
CAN Torque Limit 2 Strat Select36410Selects the torque limit strategy used to apply the torque limit.
CAN Torque Limit 1 User Mode40410Can be used to span a table axis. Values of 0-15.
CAN Torque Limit 2 User Mode44410Can be used to span a table axis. Values of 0-15.
CAN Torque Loss481010Applies a reduction to the ECU’s Uncorrected Torque calculation. Can be used to account for drive train losses. Should always be 0 unless you have very good reason to change it!

Note: All data is Unsigned, Little Endian (LSB First) format.

Example

Example CAN Channel Setup:

Image Image

Received raw data can be viewed in the F3 window on the CAN Tab.

Image Image

Final CAN Torque limit result is shown here:

Image Image

The CAN Torque Limit User Mode 1 & 2 values are available to be used anywhere in the ECU as table axis’ or inputs to user functions.

To use the incoming torque limit, you must setup a User Torque Limit. This allows the tuner to decide how they want the ECU to act on the incoming torque limit request.

To use the CAN Torque Limit Strat Select value, set the Strat Mode to CAN Tq Request, otherwise you can force a Strat of your choosing.

Image Image

InfoIf the CAN Torque Limit Strat Select value is zero and The User Torque Limit Strat Mode is set to CAN Tq Strat Request, no limit will be applied.

Setup the Torque Limit’s Main Table to utilize the CAN Rx Torque Limit value. You can also use the CAN Torque Limit User Modes like in the example below.

Here you can see the incoming request for is being modified for User Modes above 0:

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

EML-4 CAN Setup

EML-4 Setup.

Up the 3x EML-4 may be connected to the Emtron CAN bus. This allows the lambda data for up to 12 cylinders to be connected to the ECU. With the addition of every EML-4 module the CAN address for each data packet MUST use sequential addressing. The preferred addresses are listed below.

  • EML-4

    • CAN Data Address = 65
    • CAN Status Address = 66
  • EML-4

    • CAN Data Address = 67
    • CAN Status Address = 68
  • EML-4

    • CAN Data Address = 69
    • CAN Status Address = 70

ECU Setup.

ECU CAN Setup

  • Select an available CAN node, CAN1 or CAN 2
  • Select Baud Rate to 1Mbps
  • Turn the selected CAN channel ON
  • Select DATA Set = EML-4 (option 14)
  • Select CAN Address = 65 (On a single installation this address MUST match the EML-4 CAN Data address. With multiply EML-4 modules connected to the BUS use the lowest address. The ECU CAN protocol in the mode uses sequential addressing and expects the received CAN address to get larger.

NOTE: All other CAN settings are not used.

ECU Input Setup

The Software allows each EML-4 sensor channel to be assigned to a cylinder. 
  • Select Input -> Input Pins Setup. Select the Lambda Cyls Tab

  • Select the Lambda Cyl you want to config.

  • Select the correct CAN Lambda Channel .In this example Cylinder 1 has been allocated to the LA 1 channel on the first EML-4 module.

    The 1st EML-4 assigns LA1-4, the 2nd EML-4 assigns LA 5-8, the 3rd EML-4 LA 9-12.

Image Image

  • Select Predefined Calibration to Lambda NTK EML-4. Don’t select Custom. Select Clamp Lo and Clamp Hi if required.

Image Image

  • The Fault Settings are not used from this form, as this operation if performed internally by the EML-4 are transferred to the ECU over CAN.
  • The Engine Limit Table is still used.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron 8 Way Keypad

Configure Emtron CAN as follows to use Emtron 8 Way Keypad

Set CAN Baud Rate to 1Mbps

Config -> Communications -> CAN Bus 1/2 -> CAN Bus 1/2 Setup

Image Image

Set CAN Channel Settings as follows :

Config -> Communications -> CAN Bus 1/2 - Channel 1-6 -     40 : Emtron 8 - way Keypad

Image Image

Configure the Keypad behavior as follows :

Config -> Communications -> Emtron CAN Devices -> Emtron Keypad 

Image Image

Keypad button behavior has multiple modes of configuration

0: Toggle (2 Position)

1: Sequential (3 Position)

2: Sequential (4 Position)

3: Binary (8 Position)

4: Momentary

Keypad Button1 Mode

Toggle: x2 Position

OFF - No LED

ON - Green LED

Sequential: x3 Positions

OFF - No LED

Position 1 - Green LED

Position 2 - Orange LED

Sequential: x4 Positions

OFF - No LED

Position 1 - Green LED

Position 2 - Orange LED

Position 3 - Red LED

Binary: x8 Positions

OFF - No LED

Position 1 - Green LED

Position 2 - Orange LED

Position 3 - Green & Orange LED

Position 4 - Red LED

Position 5 - Red & Green LED

Position 6 - Red & OrangeLED

Position 7 - Red & Green & Orange LED

Momentary: Green light ON while button is pressed

Assign Keypad inputs as follows :

Config -> Channels -> Input Setup -> 

Image Image

Image Image

** When using Keypad input in multiple positions (sequential or binary), the keypad position runtime can be used in tables as in above example

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron EIC10 Setup

EIC10 ANV1-10 Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the Analog Channels 1 -10 are transmitted from the EIC10 device.

Applied to ALL connected EIC10 devices

EIC10 Frequency Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the Frequency data are transmitted from the EIC10 device.

Applied to ALL connected EIC10 devices

EIC10 #1 ANV7-10/Freq1-4 Pullup

0: OFF

1: ON

Enables 1k Pullup to 8.0V

EIC10 #1 Frequency 1-4 Edge

0: OFF

1: Falling

2: Rising

EIC10 #2 ANV7-10/Freq1-4 Pullup

0: OFF

1: ON

Enables 1k Pullup to 8.0V

EIC10 #2 Frequency 1-4 Edge

0: OFF

1: Falling

2: Rising

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron EIC16M Setup

EIC16M #1 ANV1-12 Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the Analog Channels 1 -12 are transmitted from the EIC16 device.

Applied to ALL connected EIC16 devices

EIC16M #1 ANV13-16 Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the Analog Channels 13 -16 are transmitted from the EIC16 device.

Applied to ALL connected EIC16 devices

EIC16M #1 Frequency Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the Frequency data are transmitted from the EIC16 device.

Applied to ALL connected EIC16 devices

EIC16M #1 ANV9-12 Pullup

0: OFF

1: ON

Enables 1k Pullup to 5.0V

EIC16M #1 Freq 1-4 Pullup

0: OFF

1: ON

Enables 1k Pullup to 8.0V

EIC16M #1 Frequency 1-4 Edge

0: OFF

1: Falling

2: Rising

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron ETC4 Setup

ETC4 CAN Data Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the EGT Channels are transmitted from the ETC device.

Applied to ALL connected ETC devices

ETC4 Fault Value

Controls the EGT value when the Input is in Fault or Open Circuit

Applied to ALL connected ETC devices

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron ETC8M Setup

ETC8M CAN Data Tx Rate

0: 200 Hz (default)

1: 50 Hz

2: 100 Hz

3: 500 Hz

Controls the rate the EGT Channels are transmitted from the ETC device.

Applied to ALL connected ETC devices

ETC8M Fault Value

Controls the EGT value when the Input is in Fault or Open Circuit

Applied to ALL connected ETC devices

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtron Lambda to CAN (ELC/ELCM) Setup

For details :

Emtron Lambda CAN Manual

Click the link below to download or visit Emtron www Downloads

ELC

Reset CAN IDs to Default

0: OFF

1: ON

This will reset the ELC CAN IDs back to their default values

Channel 1 = 671, Channel 2 = 672

Set back to zero when finished.

Enable Heater Override

0: OFF

1: ON

When enabled, the ECU controls when the Lambda heater is ON or OFF. This is done through the “ELC HEater RPM Lockout” and “ELC Heater Post Start Lockout: settings.

When disable the ELC controls the heater(s) which will turn On 15 secs after the device power up.

Enable EMAP

0: OFF

1: ON

When enabled, the ECU will send EMAP data to the ELC. This units should be in kPa

** When enabled please make sure the EMAP is configured correctly inside the ECU.

ELC Heater RPM Lockout

RPM Below which heater will be locked out

ELC Heater Post Start Lockout

Timer before which heater will turned on Post Start up

ELC Lambda 1 Test Enable

Forces the ELC to send this Test Value over the CAN bus.

Allows the user to confirm the ECU calibration is setup correctly.

0 = OFF

ELC Lambda 2 Test Enable

Forces the ELC to send this Test Value over the CAN bus.

Allows the user to confirm the ECU calibration is setup correctly.

0 = OFF

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Generic Dash Configuration

Configure Emtron CAN as follows to send Pre-Defined Data set for most Dash Systems

*** Emtron has provided Pre-Defined Data set to most dash manufacturers to match these settings

Set CAN Baud Rate to 1Mbps

Config -> Communications -> CAN Bus 1/2 -> CAN Bus 1/2 Setup

Image Image

Set a CAN Channel Setting as follows :

Config -> Communications -> CAN Bus 1/2 - Channel 1-6

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Parameter Scaling

ALL data/parameters transmitted from the ECU over CAN have units defined by the corresponding parameter calibration table(s). This can be setup and adjusted through the PC tuning software Emtune.

  1. All Data is unsigned
  2. All Data is 16 bits
  3. Low byte of each word (16bit) is transmitted first.

Examples:

  • Temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit

  • Pressure in kPa, PSI, InHg

  • Speed in Kph, mph, m/s

    • Speed in Kph, mph, m/s
TypeUnitsMin ValueMax ValueConversion Raw to Displayed Value
Position%Posn-100.0 %100.0 %Display = ECU value x 0.1 - 100 OR ECU value A: 0000 becomes -100.0 % ECU value B: 2000 becomes 100.0 %
PressurekPa/PSI0.06500.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 OR ECU value A: 0 becomes 0.0 kPa/PSI ECU value B: 1000 becomes 100.0 kPa/PSI
TemperatureoC / oF-50.0250.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 - 50 OR ECU value A: 0 becomes -50.0 oC/ oF ECU value B: 1500 becomes 100.0 oC / oF
LambdaLa0.0002.000Display = ECU value x 0.001 OR ECU value A 0 becomes 0.000 La ECU value B 1000 becomes 1.000 La
TypeUnitsMin ValueMax ValueConversion Raw to Displayed Value
SpeedKph/mph0.06500.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 OR ECU value A 0 becomes 0.0 kph ECU value B 1000 becomes 100.0 kph
Ignition AngleoBTDC-100.0 oBTDC100.0 oBTDCDisplay = ECU value x 0.1 - 100 OR ECU value A 1000 becomes 0.0 oBTDC ECU value B 2000 becomes 100.0 oBTDC
VoltageV0.00020.000Display = ECU value x 0.001 OR ECU value A 0 becomes 0.000V ECU value B 20000 becomes 20.000V
Percentage1%0.0100.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 OR ECU value A 0 becomes 0.0% ECU value B 1000 becomes 100.0%
Percentage2%-100.00100.00Display = ECU value x 0.01 - 100 OR ECU value A 0 becomes -100.00% ECU value B 10000 becomes 0.00% ECU value C 20000 becomes +100.00%
TypeUnitsMin ValueMax ValueConversion Raw to Displayed Value
Rate of Change1%/sec-100.0+ 100.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 - 100 OR ECU value A 0 becomes -100.0 %/sec ECU value B 1000 becomes 0.0 %/sec Or ECU value B 2000 becomes +100.0 %/sec
Rate of Change2rpm/sec-2000020000Display = ECU value x - 20000 OR ECU value A 0 becomes - 20000 rpm/sec ECU value B 20000 becomes 0 rpm /sec Or ECU value B 40000 becomes + 20000 %/sec
G-ForceG-10.00 G10.00 GDisplay = ECU value x 0.01 - 10 OR ECU value A 0 becomes -10.00 G ECU value B 1000 becomes 0.00 G or ECU value B 2000 becomes 10.00 G
RPMRPM0300000Display = ECU value x 1 OR ECU value A 0 becomes 0 RPM ECU value B 20000 becomes 20000 RPM
Pressure DiffkPa/PSI0.06500.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 - 1000 OR ECU value A: 10000 becomes 0.0 kPa/PSI ECU value B: 8000 becomes - 200.0 kPa/PSI
Counter065535Display = ECU value OR ECU value A 0 becomes 0 ECU value B 10 becomes 10
VVT PositionDeg-100.0+100.0Display = ECU value x 0.1 - 200 OR ECU value A: 2000 becomes 0.0 Deg ECU value B: 2304 becomes 30.4 Deg (Cam Advanced) ECU value 3: 1871 becomes -12.9. Deg (Cam Retarded)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Pre-defined Rx Set 1

Pre-defined Rx Set 1

Image Image

This data set allows a huge range of parameters to be read from the CAN bus and used by the ECU.

The DBC file is available at [emnet.emtronaustralia.com.au](https://emnet.emtronaustralia.com.au/ “target="_blank”")

The data is received sequentially from ID 1424 to 1433.

Message 5 (ID 1428) includes the Emtron CAN Torque Limit Rx frame. It is received as part of this data set with the lowest priority.

Raw data received is displayed in the F3 window on the CAN Tab.

Image Image

To use the data you must set the relevant input channel’s source to “CAN Predef Rx 1/Custom Rx1”.

Example: Wheel Speed Channels:

Image Image

Example: Gear Detection:

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Pre-defined Transmit Set 1

All 16 bit values have low byte transmitted first by the ECU. Sequential addressing is used. All parameters are transferred in the units defined inside the ECU. These can be rescaled if required by the receiving device.

Custom Packet 1 contains 10 Message Objects each with a different sequential address. This can be selected on CAN1 or CAN2 and on any of the 6 channels within that CAN node. In total the Custom Packet 1 transmits 40 parameters on one CAN Channel.

NOTE: If all 6 channels were used within one CAN node a total of 240 parameter could be transmitted

Message 1

Address: 1250 (Emtron preferred. User Adjustable)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12501-2Engine Speedrpm
12503-4Engine Manifold PressurePressure
12505-6Engine TemperatureTemperature
12507-8Engine Inlet TempTemperature

Message 2

Address: 1251 (Sequential based on address in Message 1)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12511-2Throttle Position 1Position
12513-4Estimated Charge TempTemperature
12515-6GearNA
12517-8Battery VoltsVoltage

Message 3

Address: 1252 (Sequential based on address in Message 2)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12521-2Oil PressurePressure
12523-4Oil TemperatureTemperature
12525-6Fuel PressurePressure
12527-8Fuel TemperatureTemperature

Message 4

Address: 1253 (Sequential based on address in Message 3)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12531-2Exhaust PressurePressure
12533-4Fuel Pressure DifferentialPressure Diff
12535-6Crankcase PressurePressure
12537-8Coolant PressurePressure

Message 5

Address: 1254 (Sequential based on address in Message 4)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12541-2Lambda 1La
12543-4Lambda 1La
12545-6Lambda TargetLa
12547-8Drive SpeedSpeed

Message 6

Address: 1255 (Sequential based on address in Message 5)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12551-2Lambda 1 ShortPercentage2
12553-4Lambda 2 ShortPercentage2
12555-6Lambda 2 LongPercentage2
12557-8Lambda 2 LongPercentage2

Message 7

Address: 1256 (Sequential based on address in Message 6)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12561-2Injector Duty CyclePercentage1
12563-4Ignition AngleIgn Angle
12565-6BaroPressure
12567-8ECU TempTemperature

Message 8

Address: 1257 (Sequential based on address in Message 7)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12571-2dTPSRate of Change1
12573-4dRPMRate of Change2
12575-6Fuel Cut LevelPercentage1
12577-8Ignition Cut LevelPercentage1

Message 9

Address: 1258 (Sequential based on address in Message 8)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12581-2Ethanol ContentPercentage1
12583-4G-Force LatG-Force
12585-6G-Force LongG-Force
12587-8G-Force VertG-Force

Message 10

Address: 1259 (Sequential based on address in Message 9)

Transmits: 8 bytes/4 parameters.

Addressing Mode: Sequential.

CAN AddressByte PositionParameterUnit
12591-2Crank/Cam Error Countercounter
12593-4Max Engine Speedrpm
12595-6Sync PositionPercentage1
12597-8DTC Countcounter

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Racepak Dash CAN Setup

This section describes how to connect an Racepak IQ3 dash to the Emtron CAN bus.

Racepak Device Compatibility

250-ds-Iq3s - Street display

250-ds-iq3d - Drag logger

250-ds-iq3ld - Logger dash

250-ds-iq3sl - Street logger

250-ds-iq3 – Display only

These devices require an interfacing module to talk to additional ECU systems/components

** Requires Universal EFI Module 230-vm-efiucan

Racepak CAN Wiring colors

  • Green = ground
  • Black = CAN Lo
  • White = CAN Hi

ECU Setup

  • Select either CAN1 or CAN2
  • Select a Channel with CAN1 or CAN2
  • Set Enable to ON
  • Set CAN Address = 1250
  • Select required DATA Set; Predefined or custom
  • Set Direction to transmit
  • Set Addressing to sequential
  • Set required Transmit Rate. CAUTION. Do NOT set to high as this will limit the available bandwidth to other devices on the bus

Racepak Setup

A default RacePak Config file has be created to match the Emtron ECU Predefined1 DATA set. This is called Emtron_Predefined1_IQ3_Config.rcg. This should be programmed into the ECU.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Sequential Addressing

Many CAN data sets in the ECU use a sequential addressing approach. This simply means that each message is on an ID that is some offset from the “Base Address”.

Image Image

In the above example, Pre-defined Tx Set 1 send it’s first frame on ID 1250. The whole data set contains 10 frames. They’re sent out incrementally from 1250.

eg: 1250, 1251, 1252, 1253 … 1259.

Custom Rx Data Sets

All parameters are received as 16 bit unsigned integers.

A CAN frame holds up to 8 bytes of data which means each frame can hold up to 4 parameters.

Each parameter must occupy 2 bytes.

When the receiving CAN Channel is set to Sequential, the ID must be increased by 1 every 4 channels so

that the whole data set can be processed.

Example:

Custom Rx Data 1 set contains 5 or more parameters.

CAN Channel 1 is set to Receive Custom Tx Data Set 1, Sequentially, on ID 1000.

Parameters 1-4 will be read from ID 1000,

Bytes 0+1, 2+3, 4+5, 6+7.

Paramerers 5-8 will be read from ID 1001,

Bytes 0+1, 2+3, 4+5, 6+7.

Paramerers 9-12 will be read from ID 1002,

Bytes 0+1, 2+3, 4+5, 6+7.

And so on….

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Tuning

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Tuning

Air Mass Model Blend Table

Background

The Air Mass Model defines how the ECU calculates the mass of air entering the engine. The calculated air mass is then used to determine the required fuel mass to achieve the commanded Lambda Target, before being converted into an injector pulse width using the configured injector characteristics.

Different engine combinations may benefit from different air mass calculation strategies. Emtron provides several Air Mass Models to suit a wide range of applications.

Options

ValueAir Mass Model
0Speed Density (MAP)
1Speed Density (BAP)
2Mass Air Flow (MAF)
3Air Mass Modelled + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend
4Speed Density (MAP) + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend
5Emtron Air Mass Model (Custom)

When Air Mass Model 3, 4 or 5 is selected, the Air Mass Blend Table becomes active. The Air Mass Blend Table is a three-dimensional calibration table that determines the contribution of each selected Air Mass Model to the final calculated engine air mass.

The table output is expressed as a percentage, where:

  • 0% = 100% Primary Air Mass Model
  • 100% = 100% Secondary Air Mass Model
  • Intermediate values proportionally blend the two Air Mass Models.

This allows the ECU to transition smoothly between two air mass calculation methods as engine operating conditions change, combining the advantages of each model over different areas of the operating range.

Air Mass Modelled + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend (Option 3)

  • 0.0% → 100% Air Mass Modelled
  • 50.0% → Equal blend of both models
  • 100.0% → 100% Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)

Speed Density (MAP) + Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Blend (Option 4)

  • 0.0% → 100% Speed Density (MAP)
  • 50.0% → Equal blend of both models
  • 100.0% → 100% Throttle Mass Flow (TMF)

Emtron Air Mass Model (Option 5)

  • 0.0% → 100% **Calculation 1
  • 50.0% → Equal blend of both models
  • 100.0% → 100% **Calculation 2

ℹ️ Note

The X and Y axes of the Air Mass Blend Table are fully configurable and may be assigned to any suitable ECU runtime. This allows the blend ratio to be tailored to the specific engine and application.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Air Mass Compensation Table

Overview

The Air Mass Compensation Table applies a percentage adjustment to the final calculated air mass.

This 3D table can be used to compensate for engine operating conditions that are not fully represented by the selected Air Mass Model, improving air mass accuracy across the operating range.

The compensation is applied after the primary air mass calculation has been completed.

  • 0.0% = No compensation applied
  • Positive values = Increase calculated air mass
  • Negative values = Decrease calculated air mass

ℹ️ Note

  • The Air Mass Compensation Table should not be used to compensate for incorrect VE calibration or sensor scaling errors. These should be corrected at their source wherever possible.

  • The X and Y axes of the Air Mass Comp Table are fully configurable and may be assigned to any suitable ECU runtime. This allows the compensation to be tailored to the specific engine and application.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Tuning

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Fuel Tuning

Fuel VE Tables

Overview

The fueling calculations used by Emtron are based on an Air Mass per cycle which is then converted to a Fuel Mass based on the requested lambda target. This is true whether the system is using directly measuring airflow from the air mass meter, or calculated air mass from speed density or throttle mass flow (TMF)

The Volumetric Efficiency (VE) table is used when the Air Mass Model is configured for Speed Density.

In Speed Density mode, the ECU does not directly measure the engine airflow. Instead, it calculates the air mass entering each cylinder using the Ideal Gas Law based on:

  • Engine Displacement
  • Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
  • Charge Temperature
  • Volumetric Efficiency (VE)

The calculated Air Mass per Engine Cycle is then used to determine the required Fuel Mass based on the commanded Lambda Target. The ECU then converts the required fuel mass into an injector pulse width using the configured injector characteristics.

ℹ️ Note

The ECU supports one or two Volumetric Efficiency (VE) tables. The active table configuration is selected using the VE Table Control setting, which determines whether a single VE table is used or whether blending between two VE tables is enabled (Z- Axis).


Volumetric Efficiency (VE) Table

Image Image

The Volumetric Efficiency (VE) table represents the engine’s ability to fill its cylinders with air under varying engine speeds and loads.

Although referred to as Volumetric Efficiency (VE), the ECU uses VE to determine the air mass trapped within the cylinder. VE is expressed as a percentage and represents the ratio of the actual air mass trapped within the cylinder to the theoretical air mass that would occupy the engine’s swept cylinder volume under standard atmospheric conditions.

The calculated air mass is then used by the ECU to determine the required fuel mass to achieve the commanded Lambda Target.

A higher VE indicates the engine is filling its cylinders more efficiently, requiring more fuel to maintain the commanded Lambda Target.

Most engines typically operate below 100% VE.

ℹ️ Note

  1. The term Volumetric Efficiency is historical and can be misleading. While VE is expressed as a percentage of the cylinder’s theoretical filling, the ECU ultimately uses the VE value to calculate the air mass entering the cylinder. Since fuel delivery is based on air mass rather than air volume, VE is simply a convenient way of modelling the engine’s air pumping efficiency.

  2. Due to intake and exhaust tuning, pressure wave dynamics and scavenging effects, a well-designed naturally aspirated engine can exceed 100% VE over parts of its operating range.


Tuning

Before calibrating the VE table(s), the Lambda Target table(s) should first be configured with the desired lambda or air-fuel ratio for each operating condition.

Once the Lambda Target table(s) have been calibrated, the VE table is adjusted until the measured lambda matches the commanded Lambda Target. The two tables are intrinsically linked, the Lambda Target defines the desired result, while the VE table determines the amount of fuel required to achieve it.

For more information, refer to the Lambda Target Tables.


Typical Values

Typical VE values vary depending on engine design and operating conditions.

  • Idle: 35–40%
  • Engines at full load: 80–100%
  • High-performance naturally aspirated engines: 90–110% (typical peak)

Image Image The above VE table example shows the typical range of values.

🔧Tuning Notes

  • The VE table is calibrated by adjusting its values until the measured lambda matches the commanded Lambda Target across the engine’s operating range.
  • This process is most efficient when the ECU is configured with a Wideband Lambda input, allowing the measured lambda to be compared directly with the commanded target.
  • Once the VE table has been correctly calibrated, the engine’s volumetric efficiency model has been established, providing an accurate basis for fuel delivery calculations.
  • The objective is to minimise the error between the measured lambda and the Lambda Target under all operating conditions.
  • A simple method of validating the VE calibration is to change the Lambda Target at a specific operating point. If the VE table and injector characterization have been calibrated correctly, the measured lambda should follow the new Lambda Target without requiring further VE adjustments.
  • If changes to the VE table are required to achieve the new Lambda Target, this may indicate an error in the VE calibration or the configured injector characterization (injector flow, deadtime, or non-linearity).
  • When Closed Loop Lambda Control is enabled, the VE table provides the feed-forward fuel calculation, while the closed loop controller applies only the corrections necessary to eliminate any remaining fueling error.

VE Table Control

This control determines whether a single target table is used or whether Z-axis blending is enabled between two calibration tables.

Available Options

ValueMode
0OFF
1ON - Table 1
2ON - Table 2
3Not Available
4Not Available
5Cal Slot
6ON - Z-Axis

Mode Descriptions

OFF (0)

Disables the Lambda Target table input

ON - Table 1 (1)

Uses VE Table 1 only for air masss speed density model

ON - Table 2 (2)

Uses VE Table 2 only for air masss speed density model

Not Available (3–4)

Reserved for future functionality and should not be selected.

Cal Slot (5)

Enables real-time switching of the Fuel VE tables via calibration slot selection.

This allows the ECU to switch between pre-defined calibration sets without modifying the Table Control setting. See Tuning view -> Cal Control menu

Dual VE tables are particularly useful for engines with significantly different airflow characteristics between operating modes. For example, on a Honda VTEC engine, one VE table can be calibrated for the low-lift cam profile and the second VE table calibrated for the high-lift cam profile. Once both tables have been tuned across the full operating range, the VTEC changeover point can be adjusted to determine the optimum switching RPM without requiring the VE calibration to be retuned.>

Example application:

  • Table 1 = VTEC Low-lift Cam
  • Table 1 = VTEC high-lift Cam

The active table can be switched in real time based on RPM or a user defined switch condition

ON - Z-Axis (6)

The Z-Axis enables a user-defined third axis used to swap or blend between VE Table 1 and VE Table 2.

The ECU performs real-time linear interpolation between both VE tables based on the configured Z-Axis input. This allows fuel delivery to be dynamically adjusted across a third operating dimension, which can be spanned using any available runtime parameter within the ECU.

  • 0% Z-axis → 100% Table 1
  • 100% Z-axis → 100% Table 2
  • Intermediate values → linear interpolation between both tables

For a Fuel Tuning Overview see: Fuel Tuning Overview

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

VE Blend Table

VE Blend Table

VE Blend Table can be enabled under Fuel Table Control :

Tuning -> Fuel -> Fuel Table Control

Image Image

VE Blend can blend only two VE tables at a time.

Units are 0-100%

0% = First VE Table

100% = Second VE Table

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Global Fuel Trim

This function applies a global fuel trim to the base calibration.

It provides a percentage-based adjustment to injector pulse width, allowing the overall air-fuel ratio to be shifted richer or leaner without modifying individual fuel tables.

The trim is applied uniformly across all operating conditions and is independent of engine speed (RPM) and load.

Specifications

  • Units: %
  • Minimum Value: -50.0%
  • Maximum Value: +50.0%

Function Behaviour

  • Positive values increase fuel delivery (richens mixture)
  • Negative values decrease fuel delivery (leans mixture)
  • Applied globally to all fuel calculations derived from the base calibration

⚠️ Notes

This function is intended as a calibration and setup aid only.

It allows for a rapid changes to the overall mixture and works independent of RPM and load.

This trim should be returned to 0% before final tuning to ensure the base fuel model is accurate and consistent.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Target Tables

Overview

The Lambda Target table enables the user to define the desired Lambda target across the operating range of the engine.

The Lambda Target is a primary input to the ECU airflow and fuel model and therefore directly influences the final calculated fuel mass injected into the engine.

Once the Engine VE (Volumetric Efficiency) table is correctly calibrated to achieve the commanded Lambda Target, the engine’s operating Lambda can be adjusted simply by changing the Lambda Target value, without requiring changes to the main fuel calibration.

This target must be defined prior to the calibration of the VE table(s).

For example, if the Main Fuel Table is calibrated such that the engine operates at 1.00 Lambda when the Lambda Target is 1.00, then reducing the Lambda Target to 0.80 will result in the ECU automatically increasing fuel delivery to achieve 0.80 Lambda, without any changes to the Main Fuel Table.

Note: If a change in Lambda Target (e.g. from 1.00 to 0.80) does not result in the measured Lambda matching the target, this indicates an error in the fuel system model, most commonly incorrect injector characterisation which should be corrected before continuing.

Why Lambda is used instead of AFR

Lambda is used as the primary combustion target because it represents the relative air–fuel ratio to stoichiometric, rather than an absolute fuel value.

Since different fuels have different stoichiometric air–fuel ratios, the same AFR value does not represent the same combustion condition across fuels. For example, petrol, ethanol blends, and methanol all require different AFR values to achieve the same combustion state.

Lambda removes this dependency by normalising the mixture to stoichiometric:

  • Lambda = 1.00 → stoichiometric combustion (regardless of fuel type)
  • Lambda < 1.00 → rich mixture
  • Lambda > 1.00 → lean mixture

Because of this, a single Lambda Target can be used across all fuels, while the equivalent AFR target would change depending on fuel composition.

This allows calibration to remain consistent when fuel type changes, while still maintaining the same combustion behaviour.

For this reason, Lambda Targets are preferred over AFR Targets in the ECU fuel model, as they provide a universal reference independent of fuel stoichiometry.

Lambda Target Tables

Two Lambda Target tables are available within the ECU. Either table can be used to define the engine’s Lambda target across the operating range.

The active table is selected using the Lambda Target Table Control setting.

Only the selected (active) table is used by the ECU for fuel model calculations and closed-loop control. The inactive table has no effect on engine operation until it is selected as the active source.

Normally Lambda Target Table 1 is used.

Image Image

Image Image

Should an actual Air Fuel Ratio be required to be displayed, this can be achieved by right mouse click on table and selecting AFR Unit . Once activated, if the fuel model is set to a single fuel type, the Lambda Table 1 will be displayed in regular AFR units.

⚠️ Warning: This feature will not work with flex or dual fuel models - see Stoich Ratio Setup

Image Image

Example 1: Gasoline fuel AFR shown

Image Image

Example 2: Methanol fuel AFR shown

Image Image

Lambda Target Offset Table

The Lambda Target Offset is applied as an absolute correction to the base Lambda Target defined in the Lambda Target table.

For example, if the Lambda Target table value is 1.000 and a Lambda Target Offset of -0.150 Lambda is applied, the resulting effective Lambda Target becomes:

1.000 + (-0.150) = 0.850

This offset is absolute (not percentage-based) and directly adds or subtracts from the base Lambda Target value.

It allows the final Lambda Target to be adjusted dynamically without modifying the base calibration table.

Image Image

Lambda Target Table Control

See here for more information: Lambda Target Table Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Target Table Control

Table Control Setup

This control determines whether a single target table is used or whether Z-axis blending is enabled between two calibration tables.

Available Options

ValueMode
0OFF
1ON - Table 1
2ON - Table 2
3Not Available
4Not Available
5Cal Slot
6ON - Z-Axis

Mode Descriptions

OFF (0)

Disables the Lambda Target table input


ON - Table 1 (1)

Uses Table 1 only for Lambda Target calculation.

Typically represents the base calibration (e.g. Petrol Lambda Target strategy).


ON - Table 2 (2)

Uses Table 2 only for Lambda Target calculation.

Typically represents an alternative calibration strategy (e.g. Methanol or high-load enrichment strategy).


Not Available (3–4)

Reserved for future functionality and should not be selected.


Cal Slot (5)

Enables real-time switching of the active Lambda Target table via calibration slot selection.

This allows the ECU to switch between pre-defined calibration sets without modifying the Table Control setting. See Tuning view -> Cal Control menu

Example application:

  • Table 1 = Petrol Lambda Target calibration
  • Table 2 = Methanol Lambda Target calibration

The active table can be switched in real time depending on:

  • Fuel type
  • Engine mode
  • Test or development configuration

This mode is commonly used for:

  • Rapid calibration comparison
  • Track-side strategy changes
  • Different Fuel system

ON - Z-Axis (6)

Enables Z-axis blending between Table 1 and Table 2.

The ECU interpolates between both tables based on the configured Z-axis input (typically Ethanol Content %), producing a blended fuel value.

  • 0% Z-axis → 100% Table 1
  • 100% Z-axis → 100% Table 2
  • Intermediate values → linear interpolation between both tables

Z-Axis Blended (Dual Table Interpolation)

The ECU supports a Z-axis blending strategy that allows lambda targets to be interpolated between two tables based on a third operating axis.

Concept Overview

Two base Lambda Target tables are defined:

  • Table 1 (Reference Fuel – Petrol)
    Defines Lambda Targets for standard petrol operation.

  • Table 2 (Alternative Fuel – High Oxygen Content Fuel)
    Defines Lambda Targets for high ethanol or methanol operation.

A Z-axis input (typically fuel composition such as ethanol content) is used to interpolate between the two tables.

This example shows the blend between Table 1 and Table 1 spanned on the Z-axis using Ethanol content

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injection Timing

⚙️ Injection Timing Table

The Injection Timing table defines the desired injection event angle as a function of engine operating conditions.

Table values are expressed in crankshaft degrees Before Top Dead Centre (BTDC) and are referenced to Cylinder 1 Compression TDC (i.e 400 = 400 degrees before TDC Cylinder 1 compression). The table is configured as an advance-style table, therefore larger values schedule the injection event earlier in the engine cycle.

The interpretation of the table values depends on the selected Injection Timing Reference mode:

Start of Injection – Table values define when the injector begins delivering fuel.
End of Injection – Table values define when the injector finishes delivering fuel.

Table Size: 22 columns x 12 rows

Resolution: 0.1 Deg
Range: 0.0 - 720.0 Degs

⚠️ Notes

When Staged Injection is enabled, a secondary Injection Timng Table can be used which operates independently of the Primary Injectors. The Sec Injectors can be advanced up during the initial transition into staged mode to help improve the overall smoothness during this event

⚙️ Injection Timing Reference

The Injection Timing Reference setting determines whether the Injection Timing table values specify the Start of Injection (SOI) or End of Injection (EOI) event.

Injection Timing determines when fuel is delivered into the engine cycle relative to Cylinder 1 Compression Top Dead Centre (TDC).

Injection Timing values are expressed in crankshaft degrees Before Top Dead Centre (BTDC) . Larger values schedule the injection event earlier in the engine cycle.

Timing Reference Examples

ValueDescription
400° BTDC400° before Cylinder 1 Compression TDC
360° BTDCTDC between the exhaust and intake strokes (valve overlap period)
300° BTDCApproximately 60° after intake valve opening on a typical 4-stroke engine

Options

ValueMode
0Start of Injection
1End of Injection

Start of Injection (SOI)

The Injection Timing table value defines when the injector begins delivering fuel.

The ECU calculates the corresponding End of Injection based on the injector pulse width and operating conditions.

This mode is typically used when the desired fuel delivery strategy is based on the opening point of the injection event.

End of Injection (EOI)

The Injection Timing table value defines when the injector finishes delivering fuel.

The ECU automatically calculates the corresponding Start of Injection based on the injector pulse width and operating conditions.

This mode is commonly used when precise control of fuel delivery relative to intake valve events is required.

For sequential injection systems, End of Injection mode is often preferred because the completion of fuel delivery can be aligned with intake valve events. This can reduce fuel wall wetting, improve fuel preparation and promote more consistent cylinder-to-cylinder fuel distribution.

⚠️ Notes

  • Injection timing values are referenced to Cylinder 1 Compression TDC regardless of the cylinder being fuelled.
  • Higher values move the injection event earlier in the engine cycle.
  • Whether the value represents the Start or End of Injection depends on the selected Injection Timing Reference mode.
  • The actual injector opening and closing points will vary with pulse width, engine speed and operating conditions.

⚙️ Setting

To locate setting Injection Timing Reference see:
Config -> Fuel -> Fuel Main -> Injection Timing Reference (Prim)
Config -> Fuel -> Fuel Secondary Setup -> Injection Timing Reference (Sec)

To locate Injection Timing Table see: Tuning View -> Fuel -> Injection Timing Tables

Example for Primary Injection.

Image Image

Example for Staged Injection with the angle spanned across intake camshaft target angle & fuel mass final (g/cyl).

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Starting Fuel Setup

Starting Fuel Overview

Engine starting fuel requirements differ significantly from those required during normal engine operation. At low engine speeds and temperatures, a portion of the injected fuel does not immediately contribute to combustion as it can condense on intake surfaces, intake valves and cylinder walls. Additional fuel compensation is therefore required to ensure sufficient combustible fuel reaches the cylinder during the starting process.

The starting fuel strategy consists of three distinct phases:

Phase 1 – Pre-Crank Fuel

Pre-crank fuel is delivered before or at the beginning of engine cranking. The purpose of this fuel is to establish an initial fuel film on the intake port and valve surfaces, reducing the amount of fuel lost to wall wetting during the first combustion events.

Correctly calibrated pre-crank fuel can improve start quality, reduce cranking time and promote faster engine burst.

Phase 2 – Cranking Fuel

During cranking additional fuel enrichment is required to compensate for fuel condensation and poor fuel vaporisation, particularly at lower engine and ambient temperatures.

Cranking fuel provides the additional fuel necessary to achieve a combustible air-fuel mixture while the engine is rotating below its self-sustaining speed. Fuel requirements during this phase are highly dependent on coolant temperature, fuel characteristics, engine design and injector placement.

Phase 3 – Post-Start Fuel

Once the engine has fired and transitioned from cranking to running, additional fuel compensation is typically required for a short period. The Fuel films established during the starting process continues to evolve and combustion stability may not yet be fully established.

Post-start fuel provides a temporary enrichment immediately after engine burst and gradually decays over time. This ensures a smooth transition from starting operation to normal fuel calculations while maintaining stable combustion and drivability. As the post-start compensation decays to zero, fueling returns entirely to the standard operating fuel model with no additional start-related compensation applied.

⚙️ Pre-Crank Fuel Enable

Enables and configures a pre-crank fuel injection event. This feature can improve engine start-up by providing an initial fuel charge before or during cranking, helping the engine fire more quickly.

Options

ValueMode
0Off
1Start Position
2First Crank Index Signal (Single Event)
3Key On
4First Crank Index Signal (Multiple Events)

Mode Descriptions

Off

Disables all pre-crank injection events.

Start Position

Triggers a pre-crank injection event when the configured Start Position Switch becomes active. The Start Position Switch must be configured for this mode to operate.

First Crank Index Signal (Single Event)

Triggers a single pre-crank injection event when the first crank index signal is detected after ECU power-up.

Key On

Triggers a single pre-crank injection event when the ignition is switched to the ON position after ECU power-up.

First Crank Index Signal (Multiple Events)


Triggers the pre-crank injection event on the first crank index signal detected during engine cranking. Unlike the other modes, this mode automatically re-arms after the engine has stopped, allowing the pre-crank injection event to occur again on subsequent start attempts without requiring an ECU power cycle. To prevent repeated pre-crank injection events during unsuccessful starts or engine stalls, a lockout mechanism is applied. Before another pre-crank event can occur, the engine re-arming conditions must be met:

Exceed 400 RPM. Remain above 400 RPM for at least 1 second.

Once these conditions have been satisfied and engine speed subsequently returns to 0 RPM, the pre-crank injection event will be re-enabled and available for the next engine start.

⚠️ Notes

  • Modes 1, 2 and 3 perform only a single pre-crank injection event after ECU power-up. The ECU power must be cycled before another pre-crank injection event can occur using the Modes.
  • Mode 4 the pre-crank event can be re-triggered automatically once the re-arming conditions have been met.

⚙️ Pre-Crank Pulse Count

Sets the number of fuel injection pulses during the pre-crank priming event. Using multiple shorter pulses helps improve fuel atomisation and distribution while reducing the risk of liquid fuel accumulation.

Increasing the pulse count can be beneficial when using fuels that require significantly more fuel for cold starting, such as ethanol-based fuels. Rather than using a single large injection pulse, the required fuel can be distributed across multiple smaller pulses.

This approach can improve fuel atomisation and reduce the likelihood of fuel pooling or entering the cylinder in a liquid state, which can lead to spark plug wetting and poor starting performance.

Typical Applications:

  • Ethanol and high-ethanol-content fuels.
  • Engines requiring large amounts of pre-crank fuel.
  • Situations where a single large pulse results in poor start quality.

⚙️ Pre-Crank Pulse Interval

Sets the time delay between consecutive pre-crank injection pulses. This parameter only applies when Pre-Crank Pulse Count is greater than 1.

It controls the spacing between each injection pulse during the pre-crank event, allowing adjustment of fuel delivery timing and mixture preparation.

  • Short interval: higher fuel density, increased wetting risk.
  • Long interval: improved atomisation, reduced total delivery rate.

The interval should be long enough to allow fuel from each pulse to disperse and form a stable fuel film before the next pulse is delivered. Excessively short intervals may reduce the benefit of using multiple pulses, while excessively long intervals can unnecessarily delay the start sequence.

🔧 Tuning Guidelines

When additional pre-crank fuel is required, it is generally preferable to increase the Pre-Crank Pulse Count rather than significantly increasing the fuel delivered in a single pulse.

A good starting point is:

  • Set Pre-Crank Multi Pulse Interval to approximately 10 ms.
  • Increase Pre-Crank Pulse Count by one pulse at a time.
  • Evaluate cold start performance after each adjustment.
  • Continue increasing the pulse count until no further improvement in start quality is observed.

Typical applications require between 1 and 6 pulses, with higher pulse counts generally only required for ethanol-based fuels or engines requiring large amounts of pre-crank fuel.

⚙️ Table Editing

See the below link(s) for table editing:

See here for more information on Pre Crank Fuel Tables : Pre Crank Fuel Tables
See here for more information on Cranking Fuel Tables : Cranking Fuel Tables
See here for more information on Post Start Fuel Tables : Post Start Fuel Tables

⚙️ Starting Fuel Table Control

See here for more information: Starting Fuel Table Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Pre-Crank Fuel

Overview

Pre-crank fuel is used to establish an initial fuel film on the intake port and valve surfaces before the engine begins cranking. This helps compensate for fuel that would otherwise be lost to wall wetting during the first combustion events, improving engine start quality and reducing cranking time.

Pre-crank fuel is calibrated using a three-dimensional Pre-Crank Fuel Table. The table allows the amount of fuel delivered during each pre-crank injection event to be varied over two configurable operating axes, providing flexibility for different engine and fuel combinations.

In most applications, the table is configured as a function of Engine Coolant Temperature only (effectively operating as a 2D table), with colder engine temperatures requiring greater pre-crank fuel.

The fuel quantity defined in this table is applied whenever a pre-crank injection event is triggered via the Pre-Crank Injection Mode setting .

🔧 Tuning Guidelines

  • Increase fuel values if the engine requires excessive cranking before firing.
  • Increase fuel values if the engine struggles to fire during cold starts.
  • Decrease fuel values if the engine exhibits signs of flooding, spark plug wetting, or excessively rich starts.
  • Ethanol-based fuels typically require significantly more pre-crank fuel than gasoline-based fuels.
  • Large increases in fuel quantity are often better achieved using multiple pulses rather than a single large pulse. Refer to Pre-Crank Pulse Count and Pre-Crank Multi-Pulse Interval for additional tuning options.

⚠️ Important Notes

  • Excessive pre-crank fuel can result in spark plug wetting and poor start quality.
  • The optimum fuel quantity will vary depending on fuel type, injector location, engine design, and ambient temperature.
  • Pre-crank fuel should be used to improve initial combustion quality, not to compensate for incorrectly calibrated cranking fuel.

Pre-Crank Fuel Settings

See here for more information on Starting Fuel Settings : Starting Fuel Overview

⚙️ Starting Fuel Table Control

See here for more information: Starting Fuel Table Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cranking and Post Start Fuel

Crank Fuel Table

During cranking, engine speed is low and fuel atomisation is poor. Additional fuel is required to compensate for fuel condensation on intake and cylinder surfaces and to ensure a combustible air-fuel mixture.

Cranking fuel is calibrated using one or two three-dimensional Cranking Fuel Tables. Each table allows the amount of fuel delivered during the cranking injection event to be varied over two configurable operating axes, providing precise control over cranking fuel under different starting conditions.

The cranking threshold is defined when the engine speed is below the configured Crank Exit RPM setting.

The Crank Fuel Table is typically configured as a function of coolant temperature and firing events ; the colder engine temperatures requiring greater fuel enrichment.

Fuel from this table is applied continuously while the engine remains in the cranking state.

🔧 Tuning Guidelines

  • Increase fuel values if the engine struggles to fire or requires excessive cranking time.
  • Decrease fuel values if the engine exhibits signs of flooding.
  • Cold temperature regions generally require significantly more fuel than warm temperature regions.

Post-Start Fuel Table

The Post-Start Fuel Table provides temporary fuel enrichment immediately after the engine transitions from cranking to running.

When engine speed exceeds the configured Crank Exit RPM, the ECU exits the cranking state and begins applying the Post-Start Fuel Table. This additional fuel helps stabilise combustion during the first few seconds of engine operation while fuel films and air-fuel mixture conditions settle.

The Post-Start Fuel Table is typically configured as a function of coolant temperature, with colder engine temperatures requiring greater enrichment.

Post-start fuel compensation gradually decays to zero over a user-configurable period, allowing a smooth transition to normal fuel calculations.

🔧 Tuning Guidelines

  • Increase fuel values if the engine starts successfully but immediately stumbles, misfires, or stalls.
  • Decrease fuel values if the engine starts cleanly but runs excessively rich following start-up.
  • Ensure the post-start decay period is long enough to maintain stable combustion, particularly during cold starts.

ℹ️ Crank Exit RPM

The Crank Exit RPM setting defines the engine speed at which the ECU transitions from the Crank Fuel Table to the Post-Start Fuel Table.

Once engine speed exceeds the configured Crank Exit RPM, the engine is considered to be running and post-start fueling becomes active.

Note: Crank Exit RPM is a global ECU setting and may also be used by other ECU functions to determine whether the engine is in a cranking or running state.

Setting Location: Config -> Engine Setup -> Cranking RPM Entry/Exit

Image Image

Starting Fuel Table Control

See here for more information: Starting Fuel Table Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Starting Fuel Table Control

Table Control Setup

Each starting fuel phase (Pre-Crank Fuel, Cranking Fuel, and Post-Start Fuel) includes a Table Control parameter which defines how the ECU sources fuel values during engine start.

This control determines whether a single fuel table is used or whether Z-axis blending is enabled between two calibration tables.

Available Options

ValueMode
0OFF
1ON - Table 1
2ON - Table 2
3Not Available
4Not Available
5Not Available
6ON - Z-Axis

Mode Descriptions

OFF (0)

Disables the selected starting fuel phase. No fuel contribution is applied from this table.

ON - Table 1 (1)

Uses Table 1 only for fuel calculation.

Typically represents the base calibration (e.g. Petrol / 0% Ethanol reference).

ON - Table 2 (2)

Uses Table 2 only for fuel calculation.

Typically represents the alternative calibration (e.g. E100 / 100% Ethanol reference).

ON - Z-Axis (6)

Enables Z-axis blending between Table 1 and Table 2.

The ECU interpolates between both tables based on the configured Z-axis input (typically Ethanol Content %), producing a blended fuel value.

  • 0% Z-axis → 100% Table 1
  • 100% Z-axis → 100% Table 2
  • Intermediate values → linear interpolation between both tables

Not Available (3–5)

Reserved for future functionality and should not be selected.

Z-Axis Blended Fueling (Dual Table Interpolation)

The ECU supports a Z-axis blending strategy that allows fuel values to be interpolated between two tables based on a third operating axis, typically Ethanol Content (E-content).

This feature is used to account for differences in fuel properties, vaporisation characteristics and cold start behaviour between fuels like Petrol (Gasoline) and Ethanol (E100).

Concept Overview

Two base tables are defined:

  • Table 1 (0% Ethanol Reference)
    Represents fuel requirements for standard Petrol operation.

  • Table 2 (100% Ethanol Reference)
    Represents fuel requirements for full Ethanol (E100) operation.

A third axis (Z-axis), typically Ethanol Content (0–100%), is used to interpolate between these two tables.

Operation

For any given operating condition, the ECU:

  1. Looks up the required value in Table 1
  2. Looks up the required value in Table 2
  3. Reads the current Z-axis value (e.g. Ethanol Content %)
  4. Calculates a blended output using linear interpolation between the two tables

Example

  • At 0% Ethanol, the output is taken entirely from Table 1 (Petrol)
  • At 100% Ethanol, the output is taken entirely from Table 2 (Ethanol)
  • At 50% Ethanol, the output is a 50/50 blend of both tables
  • At intermediate values, the ECU smoothly interpolates between the two

Application to Starting Fuel

This blending method can be applied to multiple starting fuel phases:

  • Pre-Crank Fuel
  • Cranking Fuel
  • Post-Start Enrichment

Each phase is independently blended using the same Z-axis strategy, allowing the ECU to automatically adjust fuel delivery based on ethanol content.

Benefits

  • Eliminates the need for separate fuel maps per fuel type
  • Ensures smooth transitions between fuel blends
  • Maintains consistent start behaviour across ethanol ratios
  • Improves cold-start robustness for flex-fuel operation

PreCrank Z-Axis Setup

Image ImageThe Z-Axis activates a user definable X-Axis to swap or blend between PreCrank tables based on the selected runtime

Image ImagePreCrank ZAxis spanned across ethanol content example shown above

Crank Z-Axis Setup

Image ImageThe Z-Axis activates a user definable X-Axis to swap or blend between Crank tables based on the selected runtime

Image ImageCrank ZAxis spanned across ethanol content example shown above

Post Start Z-Axis Setup

Image ImageThe Z-Axis activates a user definable X-Axis to swap or blend between Post Start tables based on the selected runtime

Image ImagePost Start ZAxis spanned across ethanol content example shown above

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Temperature Fuel Table

Overview

Additional fuel is typically required when the engine is cold to compensate for reduced fuel vaporisation and increased fuel condensation on intake port surfaces, intake valves and cylinder walls.

At low engine temperatures, a portion of the injected fuel does not immediately contribute to combustion. Instead, fuel can form liquid films on engine surfaces, reducing the amount of combustible fuel available within the cylinder. To maintain the desired air-fuel ratio and ensure stable engine operation, additional fuel compensation is required.

As engine temperature increases, fuel vaporisation improves and wall-wetting effects are reduced. The amount of compensation required therefore decreases progressively as the engine approaches normal operating temperature.

Engine load and airflow also influence the amount of compensation required. At higher engine loads, increased air mass flow and air velocity improve fuel atomisation and vaporisation, reducing the amount of fuel lost to wall wetting. As a result, less temperature-based enrichment is typically required at higher loads than at idle or light load conditions for the same engine temperature.

The Engine Temperature Fueling table is used to define this compensation as a function of engine coolant temperature and load (engine air mass flow). Larger corrections are required at low temperatures, gradually reducing to zero additional compensation once normal operating temperature has been reached.

Correct calibration of Engine Temperature Fueling is important for cold start performance, idle stability, throttle response and overall drivability during engine warm-up.

Image Image

Engine Temperature Warm-up Z-axis Setup

The Z-Axis activates a user definable X-Axis to swap or blend between Engine Temperature Tables 1 and 2 based on the selected runtime. Refer to the supplied sample showing Engine Temperature ZAxis spanned across ethanol content.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Tuning Overview

Overview

The fueling calculations used by Emtron are based on an Air Mass per cycle which is then converted to a Fuel Mass based on the requested lambda target. This is true whether the system is using directly measuring airflow from the air mass meter, or calculated air mass from speed density or throttle mass flow (TMF)

Example.

With an engine operating at 85% VE and has a known Charge Temperature and Manifold Pressure, the ECUs calculates an Air Mass per Induction of 0.789 grams. To achieve at Lambda target of 0.85 (12.50 AFR petrol) the corresponding fuel mass needs to be 0.06312 grams. With a known Injector Size in cc/min and Fuel Density (g/ml) the injector mass flow can be determined. Lets use 10.73 grams/sec.

ℹ️ Note Other factors also affect the injector mass flow. When enabled the ECU monitors the differential pressure across the injector and corrects if it moves away from the nominal static pressure. It does this using “Bernoulli’s equation” which is a square root law.

Knowing that our fuel injector has a static flow rate of 10.73 grams per second, we divide that into our fuel mass and arrive at a injector pulsewidth value of 5.704 ms. However, the injector cannot just be opened for this time to achieve the calculated Fuel Mass. The Dynamic Characteristics of the fuel injector must be used. This includes injector deadtime and low pulse width non-linearities.

The Graph below of Theoretical vs Actual flow explains this better. The Blue line is the Raw/Theoretical Flow and the Red line is the actual Injector Flow .. note the large error. At 5.7ms the actual fuel mass produced by the injector is 0.0587g instead of the calculated 0.06312 g. This is only 93% of the fuel requested.

Image Image

The flow error is caused by an offset that exists between the actual injector flow (Red line) and the theoretical flow (Blue line). This offset exists on all injectors and must be included for the fuel calculation to be accurate. As the offset is constant across the “majority” of the injector operating range, we can correct for it by adding it to our final injector pulsewidth. This offset error/flow error is known as Injector Deadtime. The ECUs uses a 3D deadtime table spanned on Battery Voltage and Differential Fuel Pressure. See section Injector Deadtime Table for more information.

Once the offset is corrected the Theoretical vs Actual flow graph looks like:

Image Image

The correction across “most” of the operating range is complete and we can expect the ECU calculated pulsewidth to deliver the requested mass flow. However the range at low pulsewidth still has errors i.e there is a difference between the theoretical and actual pulse with. This is known as the “non linear operating range” of the injector and the graph below has this area zoomed in.

Image Image

Below 2 ms we have a situation similar to our initial conditions where there was an offset between the actual flow, and theoretical flow of the injector. Unlike the offset within the linear operating range of the injector, this is not constant, and cannot be corrected for with a single value.

The solution is the low pulse adder table which uses offset values that vary with pulsewidth, correcting the lower non linear operating range of the injector. More information can be found Injector Low Pulsewidth Linearisation

With the addition of these values the ECU can achieve nearly perfect fueling down to practically zero flow, and the ECU can do its job of calculating and commanding the correct air fuel ratio under all operating conditions.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Charge Temperature Estimation

Charge Temperature Estimate Table - Overview

The Charge Temperature Estimate table is used to calculate the estimated temperature of the air entering the combustion chamber. This estimated charge temperature is derived by blending the Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) sensor reading with the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT).

Under many operating conditions, the measured intake air temperature does not accurately represent the temperature of the air charge entering the cylinder. Heat transfer from the intake manifold, cylinder head and engine components can significantly warm the intake charge, particularly during idle, low airflow and hot restart conditions.

The Charge Temperature Estimate table allows the ECU to compensate for these effects by blending the Intake Air Temperature with the Engine Coolant Temperature as a function of engine operating conditions.

Table Values

Table values are expressed as a percentage and determine the contribution of the Engine Coolant Temperature to the calculated charge temperature.

ValueEstimated Charge Temperature
0%Charge Temperature = Intake Air Temperature
50%Charge Temperature = Midway between Intake Air Temperature and Engine Coolant Temperature
100%Charge Temperature = Engine Coolant Temperature

ℹ️ Important

The Charge Temperature Estimate function uses only the configured Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) sensor and Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor to estimate the Charge Temperature.

No other air temperature source is considered during this calculation. If multiple temperature sensors are configured within the ECU, only the Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is used for the air temperature component of the blend.

🔧 Tuning Guidelines

At low engine speed and light engine load, airflow through the intake system is relatively low. This allows heat from the engine to warm the intake manifold and incoming air, causing the actual charge temperature to be significantly higher than the measured Intake Air Temperature. Higher blend values are therefore typically required.

As engine speed and engine load increase, air mass flow through the intake system also increases. The higher airflow reduces heat transfer from the engine, allowing the Intake Air Temperature sensor to more accurately represent the temperature of the air entering the cylinder. Consequently, lower blend values are generally required.

For turbocharged and supercharged engines operating under boost, the Intake Air Temperature sensor typically provides an accurate measurement of the compressed intake charge. Little or no Engine Coolant Temperature blending is therefore normally required at higher engine loads.

ℹ️ Notes

  • The table axes are Engine Speed (RPM) and Efficiency Calculation/ Manifold Pressure (kPa).
  • Lower table values place greater reliance on the Intake Air Temperature sensor.
  • Higher table values increase the influence of Engine Coolant Temperature to compensate for engine heat soak.
  • Correct calibration improves air density estimation, resulting in more accurate fuel delivery and ignition calculations during idle, heat soak, hot restart and transient operating conditions.

Image Image


Charge Temperature Offset Table

The Charge Temperature Offset table applies an absolute temperature correction to the calculated Charge Temperature Estimate. This table is used to compensate for the cooling effect of fuel evaporation, which is not directly accounted for by the Charge Temperature Estimate calculation.

Table values are expressed in degrees Celsius (°C) and are added to or subtracted from the calculated Charge Temperature Estimate. A negative value reduces the calculated Charge Temperature, while a positive value increases it.

Typical Table Axes

  • X-Axis: Stoichiometric Target (AFR)
  • Y-Axis: Inlet Air Temperature (IAT)

Operation

Different fuels absorb different amounts of heat as they evaporate. Fuels with a high latent heat of vaporisation, such as Ethanol and Methanol, can significantly cool the intake charge during the injection process. By applying a negative Charge Temperature Offset, the ECU can compensate for this evaporative cooling effect, producing a more accurate estimate of the air charge temperature for fuel and ignition calculations.

For conventional gasoline fuels, little or no offset is typically required.

🔧 Tuning Guidelines

  • Gasoline applications typically require minimal or no correction.
  • Ethanol blends generally require a moderate negative offset.
  • Methanol applications often require a larger negative offset due to its high evaporative cooling effect.
  • Flex Fuel applications can use this table to progressively increase the cooling correction as ethanol content increases. Refer to the supplied sample calibration for an example implementation.

ℹ️ Important

The Charge Temperature Offset is applied after the Charge Temperature Estimate has been calculated. It does not alter the Charge Temperature Estimate blending between the Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) and Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT); it simply adds or subtracts a fixed temperature offset from the final calculated Charge Temperature Estimate.

Image Image


Charge Temperature Fuel Table

The Charge Temperature Fuel table applies a percentage fuel correction to the Base Pulse Width

The ECU uses the Charge Temperature Estimate during the air mass calculation to determine the amount of air entering the engine. The calculated air mass is then used to determine the required fuel delivery.

In some engine combinations, the calculated charge temperature may not perfectly model the actual cylinder charge temperature under all operating conditions. This can result in small fueling errors. The Charge Temperature Fuel table provides a means of applying a fine fuel correction to compensate for these residual errors.

Table Values

Table values are expressed as a percentage (%).

  • Positive values increase the Base Pulse Width (richer).
  • Negative values decrease the Base Pulse Width (leaner).
  • 0% applies no fuel correction.

🔧Tuning Notes

  • In most applications, this table can be left at 0% across the entire operating range.
  • The Charge Temperature Estimate table should be calibrated first to provide the most accurate estimate of the cylinder charge temperature. Then adjust the Charge Temperate Fuel Table if required.
  • Large corrections typically indicate that the Charge Temperature Estimate table should be reviewed before using this table for compensation.

ℹ️ Important

This table does not modify the calculated Charge Temperature. It applies a percentage correction to the Base Pulse Width after the Charge Temperature Estimate has been used during the ECU’s air mass calculation.


Charge Temperature Fuel Table Control

Enables or disables the Charge Temperature Fuel Table.

When enabled, the Charge Temperature Estimate Fuel Table applies a percentage fuel correction to the Base Pulse Width.

When disabled, no fuel correction is applied and the Charge Temperature Fuel Table is ignored.

Options

ValueMode
0Disabled
1Enabled

⚠️ Notes

In most applications, the Charge Temperature Fuel Table can remain disabled, as little or no additional fuel correction is typically required.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Acceleration Fuel Compensation

During rapid changes in throttle position and engine load, fuel delivery does not immediately track the change in airflow. This is due to a portion of the injected fuel temporarily adhering to the intake port walls and intake valves as a liquid film before it evaporates and is drawn into the combustion chamber.

When airflow increases rapidly, additional fuel is temporarily required to establish the larger fuel film while maintaining the correct air-fuel ratio. Without this compensation, the engine will momentarily operate lean, resulting in hesitation, poor throttle response or engine stumble.

Conversely, when airflow decreases rapidly, the existing fuel film continues to evaporate even though less fuel is being injected. This can temporarily enrich the mixture, requiring fuel to be removed to maintain the commanded air-fuel ratio.

Transient Fuel Compensation automatically adds or subtracts fuel during rapid changes in engine airflow to maintain the commanded air-fuel ratio, improve throttle response and ensure smooth engine drivability. During operation, the ECU continuously calculates the following transient fuel runtimes. These values are applied to the Final Injection Pulse Width to compensate for transient fuel film dynamics.

RuntimeDescription
Accel FuelAdditional injector pulse width calculated during acceleration and added to the Final Injection Pulse Width.
Accel ClampMaximum transient fuel that may be added under the current operating conditions.
Decel FuelInjector pulse width removed during deceleration and subtracted from the Final Injection Pulse Width.
Decel ClampMaximum transient fuel that may be removed under the current operating conditions.
Fuel Accel/Decel ScalerEngine Temperature compensation multiplier applied to the calculated Accel Fuel and Decel Fuel corrections.

Transient Setup

Accel Enable
Enables or disables Transient Acceleration Fuel Compensation.

Decel Enable
Enables or disables Transient Deceleration Fuel Compensation.

Accel/Decel Mode
Selects the runtime input used to initiate the transient fuel compensation function.

ValueInput
0TPS 1 – Throttle Position Sensor 1 or Drive-By-Wire Servo Position Sensor 1(when enabled)
1MAP – Manifold Absolute Pressure
2PP 1 – Pedal Position Sensor 1

Accel/Decel Threshold (+/-)
Defines the minimum rate of change required to activate the transient fuel compensation function. The threshold is expressed as the rate of change per second.

  • Lower values increase sensitivity, causing the function to activate more readily.
  • Higher values reduce sensitivity and help prevent unnecessary transient fuel corrections.
  • A typical starting value is 1.0 units/second of the selected input.

A typical value is 1.0 %/sec.


Accel Sensitivity Table

The Accel Sensitivity Table is the multiplication factor, expressed as a percentage, that determines the amount of transient fuel added based on the rate of change of the selected Accel/Decel Mode.

Example:

Operating Conditions

  • TPS Rate of Change (dTPS1) = 20 %/sec
  • Accel Sensitivity = 10%
  • Base Pulse Width = 5.0 ms

Calculation

Accel Fuel = dTPS1 × Accel Sensitivity
           = 20 × 0.10
           = 2.0 ms

Final Injection Pulse Width
= Base Pulse Width + Accel Fuel
= 5.0 ms + 2.0 ms
= 7.0 ms

Image Image


Accel Clamp Table

The Accel Clamp Table limits the maximum amount of additional fuel that can be applied during transient acceleration enrichment events. It defines the maximum allowable increase in injector pulse width (PW), expressed as a percentage of the calculated base fuel pulse width. This prevents excessive transient enrichment during rapid throttle changes, helping to maintain stable air-fuel ratio control and avoiding over-fuelling.

Example:

Calculation

Accel Clamp = 50% 
Base Fuel Pulse Width = 4.0 ms 

Maximum additional fuel allowed: 
= 50% of 4.0 ms 
= 0.5 × 4.0 ms 
= 2.0 ms 

Therefore: 
- Base PW = 4.0 ms 
- Max Accel Enrichment = 2.0 ms 
- Total Maximum PW = 6.0 ms

Image Image


Accel Engine Temperature Comp Table

The Accel Engine Temperature Compensation Table introduces a multiplier of the calculated accel fuel value against engine temperature

Example:

Calculation

Accel fuel = 10ms
Engine Temperature Comp = 1.5 

Total Accel fuel = 10 * 1.5 = 15.0ms

Image Image


Accel Decay Table

The Accel Decay Table defines the rate at which transient acceleration fuel is removed from the fueling calculation. This value determines how quickly the additional enrichment decays over successive engine cycles, expressed as a percentage reduction per cycle.

Example:

Calculation

Accel decay = 10%
Accel fuel will decay back 10% every cycle

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Deceleration Fuel Compensation

During rapid changes in throttle position and engine load, fuel delivery does not immediately track the change in airflow. This is due to a portion of the injected fuel temporarily adhering to the intake port walls and intake valves as a liquid film before it evaporates and is drawn into the combustion chamber.

When airflow increases rapidly, additional fuel is temporarily required to establish the larger fuel film while maintaining the correct air-fuel ratio. Without this compensation, the engine will momentarily operate lean, resulting in hesitation, poor throttle response or engine stumble.

Conversely, when airflow decreases rapidly, the existing fuel film continues to evaporate even though less fuel is being injected. This can temporarily enrich the mixture, requiring fuel to be removed to maintain the commanded air-fuel ratio.

Transient Fuel Compensation automatically adds or subtracts fuel during rapid changes in engine airflow to maintain the commanded air-fuel ratio, improve throttle response and ensure smooth engine drivability. During operation, the ECU continuously calculates the following transient fuel runtimes. These values are applied to the Final Injection Pulse Width to compensate for transient fuel film dynamics.

RuntimeDescription
Accel FuelAdditional injector pulse width calculated during acceleration and added to the Final Injection Pulse Width.
Accel ClampMaximum transient fuel that may be added under the current operating conditions.
Decel FuelInjector pulse width removed during deceleration and subtracted from the Final Injection Pulse Width.
Decel ClampMaximum transient fuel that may be removed under the current operating conditions.
Fuel Accel/Decel ScalerEngine Temperature compensation multiplier applied to the calculated Accel Fuel and Decel Fuel corrections.

Transient Setup

Accel Enable
Enables or disables Transient Acceleration Fuel Compensation.

Decel Enable
Enables or disables Transient Deceleration Fuel Compensation.

Accel/Decel Mode
Selects the runtime input used to initiate the transient fuel compensation function.

ValueInput
0TPS 1 – Throttle Position Sensor 1 or Drive-By-Wire Servo Position Sensor 1(when enabled)
1MAP – Manifold Absolute Pressure
2PP 1 – Pedal Position Sensor 1

Accel/Decel Threshold (+/-)
Defines the minimum rate of change required to activate the transient fuel compensation function. The threshold is expressed as the rate of change per second.

  • Lower values increase sensitivity, causing the function to activate more readily.
  • Higher values reduce sensitivity and help prevent unnecessary transient fuel corrections.
  • A typical starting value is 1.0 units/second of the selected input.

A typical value is 1.0 %/sec.


Decel Sensitivity Table

The Decel Sensitivity Table is the multiplication factor, expressed as a percentage, that determines the amount of transient fuel removed based on the rate of change of the selected Accel/Decel Mode.

Example:

Operating Conditions

  • TPS Rate of Change (dTPS1) = 10 %/sec
  • Decel Sensitivity = 10%
  • Base Pulse Width = 5.0 ms

Calculation

Decel Fuel = dTPS1 × Accel Sensitivity
           = 10 × 0.10
           = 1.0 ms

Final Injection Pulse Width
= Base Pulse Width - Accel Fuel
= 5.0 ms - 1.0 ms
= 4.0 ms

Image Image


Decel Clamp Table

The decel Clamp Table limits the maximum amount of fuel that can be remvoved during transient deceleration event. It defines the maximum allowable decrease in injector pulse width (PW), expressed as a percentage of the calculated base fuel pulse width. This prevents excessive transient enleanment during rapid throttle changes, helping to maintain stable air-fuel ratio control and avoiding under-fuelling.

Example:

Calculation

Accel Clamp = 50% 
Base Fuel Pulse Width = 4.0 ms 

Maximum additional fuel allowed: 
= 50% of 4.0 ms 
= 0.5 × 4.0 ms 
= 2.0 ms 

Therefore: 
- Base PW = 4.0 ms 
- Max Decel Enleanment = 2.0 ms 
- Total Maximum PW = 2.0 ms

Image Image


Decel Decay Table

The Decel Decay Table controls the rate of decay or how quickly the removed decel fuel is returned as a percentage of an engine cycle

Example:

Decel fuel start value = 10ms Decel decay = 10% Decel fuel will decay back to zero 10% per engine cycle

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cylinder Fuel Trims

Cylinder trims are used to apply fine fuel corrections on a per-cylinder basis in order to improve combustion balance across all cylinders. Even in well-calibrated engines, small differences in airflow distribution, injector flow characteristics, and combustion efficiency can result in uneven cylinder operation.

Typical reasons for using cylinder trims include:

  • Balancing EGT distribution across all cylinders to reduce thermal stress
  • Correcting minor airflow or volumetric efficiency differences between cylinders
  • Compensating for injector flow variation or ageing effects
  • Improving overall engine smoothness and combustion consistency
  • Reducing the risk of individual cylinders running lean or rich under load

Cylinder trims can be enabled per cylinder and provide a ± fuel mass percentage correction via a 3D table.

Image Image


Table Control

Cylinder Trims are enabled from Fuel -> Cylinder Fuel Trims -> Cylinder Trim Table Control

OFF – The Trim Table is Off
ON - The Trim Table is On

Each trim table will appear individually under Fuel -> Cylinder Fuel Trims

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Bank Trims

Overview

  • Bank Trims allow fuel mass percentage corrections to be applied independently to each cylinder bank.
  • Each cylinder can be assigned to either Bank 1 or Bank 2, enabling separate fuel control for grouped cylinders.
  • Bank 1 and Bank 2 each include a dedicated 3D correction table, used to apply fuel compensation based on engine operating conditions such as engine speed and load.
  • These trims are typically used to correct for bank-to-bank fuel distribution differences, sensor tolerances, or airflow imbalance between intake paths.

Image Image

ℹ️ Important

Cylinder-to-bank assignment is required for this function. Each cylinder must be mapped to either Bank 1 or Bank 2 to ensure accurate fuel trim application across all cylinders.

See Config -> Engine Setup -> Bank Cylinder Setup

Image Image


Table Control

Bank Trims are enabled from Fuel -> Bank Fuel Trims -> Bank Trim Table Control

OFF - The Trim Table is Off
ON - The Trim Table is On

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Compensations

Compensations

All Fuel Compensations (other than Charge Temperature Estimate and Charge Temperature Offset) are percentage compensations added/subtracted onto Final Fuel Mass calculations :

Fuel Mass Final Uncorrected = 0.0367g

Injector Mass Flow = 309 g/sec

User Comp 1 = +19.5%

 

Fuel Mass Final Corrected = 0.0367 x 1.195 = 0.0438g

 

Effective Pulsewidth Effective = Fuel Mass Final Corrected x  (1/Injector Mass Flow )x 60

Effective Pulsewidth Effective = 0.0438 x 1/309 x 60 = 8.515ms

Image Image

Compensation Tables

Fuel Sec Load (Secondary Load Compensation) can be turned on/off.

The compensation can be turned on/off or be selected to be on via a User Function (only active when User Function is active).

Image Image

OFF – The Compensation Table is Off

ON – The Compensation Table is always On

User Function 1-10 – The Compensation Table is on only when the selected User Function is Active

MAF Scaling – The Compensation is a “Scaler” (in %) of the MAF signal * Used for Sec Load Table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Secondary Injection Balance Table

Overview

The Secondary Balance Table defines how the total fuel required for each injection event is divided between the Primary and Secondary injectors.

Table values are expressed as a percentage (%) and represent the proportion of the total fuel volume delivered by the Secondary injectors. The remaining fuel is automatically delivered by the Primary injectors.

Table Values

ValueFuel Distribution
0%0% Secondary injectors, 100% Primary injectors
50%Equal fuel volume delivered by the Primary and Secondary injectors
100%100% Secondary injectors, 0% Primary injectors

Intermediate values proportionally divide the required fuel between the Primary and Secondary injectors.

ℹ️ Note

The Secondary Balance Table controls the fuel volume distribution between the Primary and Secondary injectors. The ECU automatically calculates the individual injector pulse widths based on the injector flow rates and the configured Secondary Balance value to achieve the required total fuel delivery.

When the Primary and Secondary injector flow rates are correctly configured and calibrated, changing the Secondary Balance value should have little or no effect on the overall engine air-fuel ratio

Image Image

Example 1:

Operating Conditions

  • Primary Injector = 1000 cc/min
  • Secondary Injector = 1000 cc/min
  • Required Total Injector Flow = 20.000 ms
  1. Balance Table = 50.0%(Equal flow from both injectors):
    Primary Injector Flow = 10.000ms Secondary Injector Flow = 10.000ms

  2. Balance Table = 25.0%( 25% of the flow supplied from Sec Injectors):
    Primary Injector Flow = 15.000ms Secondary Injector Flow = 5.000ms

  3. Balance Table = 75.0%( 75% of the flow supplied from Sec Injectors):
    Primary Injector Flow = 5.000ms Secondary Injector Flow = 15.000ms

Example 2:

Operating Conditions

  • Primary Injector = 1000 cc/min
  • Secondary Injector = 2000 cc/min
  • Required Total Injector Flow = 20.000 ms
  1. Balance Table = 50.0%(Equal flow from both injectors):
    Primary Injector Flow = 10.000ms Secondary Injector Flow = 5.000ms

  2. Balance Table = 25.0%( 25% of the flow supplied from Sec Injectors):
    Primary Injector Flow = 15.000ms Secondary Injector Flow = 2.500ms

  3. Balance Table = 75.0%( 75% of the flow supplied from Sec Injectors):
    Primary Injector Flow = 5.000ms Secondary Injector Flow = 7.500ms

⚠️ Note

Ideally you want to adjust the the Balance Table so the pulse width and hence duty cycle is the same for both Primary and Secondly Injectors. To calculate the Balance value use the following formula:

Secondary Balance (to achieve equal Prim/Sec Pulse Widths)

                    (Sec/Prim Ratio × 100)
Secondary Balance = ──────────────────────
                     (1 + Sec/Prim Ratio)

Where:

                    (Num Sec Injectors × Inj Size Sec)
Sec/Prim Ratio  = ─────────────────────────────────────
                    (Num Prim Injectors × Inj Size Prim)

Example

Using the data from the above Example 2:

                    (4 × 2000cc/min)
Sec/Prim Ratio  =  ──────────────────  = 2.00
                    (4 x  1000cc/min)

Secondary Balance (to achieve equal Prim/Sec Pulse Widths):

                    (2.00× 100)
Secondary Balance = ──────────── = 66.6%
                     (1 + 2.00)

Image Image

The above example is from a Mitsubishi EVO IX with staged injectors


Getting creative…

In the case where 2 separate fuel systems are utilized with 2 different fuel types. Example: Gasoline and Methanol

The secondary balance table becomes the runtime the fuel density change is spanned across in the main fuel configuration

See Gasoline to Methanol examples below

Image Image

The Stoichiometric custom table should also be spanned across the secondary blend runtime in this application.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ethanol Sensor - Flex Fuel

Flex Fuel configuration example:

KV and SL series ECU both support the GM (Continental) and Ford style flex fuel sensors.

Step 1

Wire in the Ethanol Sensor to the ECU using one of the available digital inputs that can read frequency (DI 1-8) and configure the DI as follows:

Go to Config -> Inputs -> Input Pins Setup then select the Vehicle tab

Image Image

The Input Source should match the Digital Input channel the sensor is wired to. In this example Digital Input 6 (DI 6) is used.

Edit the input sensor settings to be as follows:

Active Edge = Falling
[Arming thresholds] -> Threshold Mode = Table

“Edit Table” values Set to 2.0 Volts

Image Image

Configure the type of Ethanol sensor used within Emtune software, Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Ethanol Sensor -> Setup

Image Image

0: GM / Continental

1: FORD

Verify the operation of the Ethanol sensor by pulling up the run time variables by pressing the shortcut key F3 and selecting the Fuel 2 tab.

Image Image

Step 2

Configure the VE fuel model to load the Ethanol % compensation tables: (Fuel Density Table and Stoichiometric Custom Table)

Preconfigured templates/copies of these tables are included within the Emtune installation package and can be found in the folder C:\Emtron\Table Files

To load these preconfigured tables simply right click within the current table you wish to change and select “Load Table” and browse to the file location listed above.

The below tables allows the ECU to accurately make adjustments injector pulse widths based on the characteristics of ethanol based fuel and its different % blends with Gasoline.

To configure this table to go Config-> Fuel -> Fuel Density Table

Image Image

Configure the custom stoichiometric table which also is based on the Ethanol % of the fuel

To configure this table to go Config-> Fuel -> Stoichiometric Custom Table

Image Image

Step 3

Next we go onto configuring the Z-Axis control on the Main Ignition Tables.

This allows the tuner to have the ability to manipulate the tune based on the Ethanol Content % value provided by the flex fuel sensor. This Z-Axis (ethanol %) is used to determine the % blend between the two Main Ignition tables.

Tuning -> Ignition -> Ignition Table Control -> Main Ignition Tables

Image Image

Set the Ignition table control to 6: ON –Z-Axis.

Image Image

This will activate the Main Ignition Tables 1-3 as well as the Ign Main Table Z-Axis Setup table.

Step 4

Go to Tuning -> Ignition -> Z-Axis Setup -> Ign Main Table ZAxis Setup

Image Image

Configure the Ign Main Table Z-Axis setup table such that the X-Axis parameter is Ethanol Content %. (Shortcut key A to access axis setup)

Image Image

This table controls the percentage of blend used by the ECU between the Main Ignition tables.

A value of 1.0 = use 100% Main Ignition Table1 (Gasoline / pump gas Ignition Table)

A value of 1.5 = use the average value of Main Ignition Table 1 and Main Ignition Table 2

A value of 2.0 = use 100 % percent of Main Ignition Table 2 (E85% tune Ignition table)

The engine should be tuned on 100 % Gasoline (pump gas) and E85 separately and the appropriate Ignition tables populated before attempting to tune any Z-Axis setup tables.

Steps 2 -4 can and should be repeated for other aspects of a Flex Fuel tune. These include:

  • Starting Enrichment compensation tables
  • Boost Target Table Control
  • Map Limit Table Control
  • Lambda Target Tables
  • Any table within the ECU that can be spanned against Ethanol Content %

NB:

The VE fuel table should not need any compensation based on Ethanol Content as the Fuel Model accounts for this.

Should you need to make corrections Ethanol % then the Fuel Mass Modifiers table could be used to correct for any inaccuracies in the fuel model. Such causes of error could be attributed to incorrect injector data, inaccuracies in the Flex Sensor and any other sensors in the system the ECU relies on to create an accurate model.

To enable the Fuel Mass Modifier table to go Tuning -> Fuel -> Fuel Table Control -> Fuel Modifier Tables

Image Image

Enable the Fuel Mass Modifer Table Control set value to 1

Image Image

Configure Fuel Mass Modifier Table such that Ethanol Content % on the X-axis and Efficiency Calculation % on the Y-axis Shortcut key (A) to configure table axis. Eg below shows Fuel Mass Modifier Table with percentage trims being applied to the Main VE Fuel Fable

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Modifier Tables

Fuel Modifier tables can be turned on/off.

These tables compensate the raw air mass or fuel mass calculation within the model

Image Image

OFF – The Compensation Table is Off

ON - The Compensation Table is On

Each compensation table will appear individually under Fuel -> Fuel Modifier Tables

Image Image

Fuel Mass Modifier Table"

Fuel Mass Modifier Table is enabled via : Tuning -> Fuel Table Control -> Fuel Modifier Tables

Image Image

Values in this table modify the ECUs Final Fuel Mass directly as a percentage

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Z-Axis Setup

Z-Axis Setup

A Z-Axis function allows for a definable blend or swap based on a definable X Axis parameter.

The available Fuel Z-Axis table functions are enabled via Fuel Table Control

Image Image

Once enabled, the Z-Axis is defined by the user

Right mouse click on the table to enter Table Axis setup

Image Image

Within the Axis setup, any runtime can be selected and utilized as the X Axis

Image Image

% Ethanol Content runtime shown as an example above

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Ignition Tuning

Ignition Main Tables

The Ignition Tables are the primary ignition calibration used by the ECU and define the base ignition timing as a function of engine speed and load.

The table values represent the desired ignition timing in degrees Before Top Dead Centre (BTDC) and are typically indexed by Engine Speed (RPM) and Engine Load.

The ECU uses the active Ignition Table as the starting point for all ignition calculations before applying additional ignition corrections, compensations, torque reduction strategies (Strat Modes) to determine the final commanded ignition timing.

Specifications

  • Units: Degrees BTDC
  • Minimum Value: -100.0 Deg
  • Maximum Value: 100.0 Deg

Function Behaviour../../config/triggers/crank-index-offset-setup.md

  • Higher values command more ignition advance.
  • Lower values command less ignition advance.
  • A value of 0.0 Deg represents no ignition advance before TDC.
  • Negative ignition timing values represent ignition after TDC (ATDC)

The final ignition timing delivered by the ECU may be modified by additional ignition corrections and compensations, including:

  • Global Ignition Trim
  • Coolant Temperature Compensation
  • Intake Air Temperature Compensation
  • Knock Control
  • Idle Ignition Control
  • Ignition Retard Torque Reductions via User Torque Limits and Strat Modes
  • Other configured ignition corrections

⚠️ Important - Ignition Timing Synchronisation

Before calibrating the Ignition Table, the ECU ignition timing must be synchronised with the actual engine crankshaft position.

See the overview below or view : Crank Index Overview for more help.

To verify synchronisation:../../config/triggers/crank-index-offset-setup.md

  1. Enable Ignition Lock and set a fixed ignition timing value (Ignition Lock Angle).
  2. Use a timing light to measure the actual ignition timing at the engine.
  3. Compare the timing light reading with the configured Ignition Lock Angle.
  4. Adjust the Crank Index Offset until the timing light reading matches the Ignition Lock Angle. This test should be completed at idle.
  5. Next, verify the ignition timing as engine speed is increased while adjusting the Ignition Delay Time. Correct Ignition Delay Time calibration ensures the commanded ignition timing accurately matches the actual crankshaft position across the complete engine speed range.

Adjustment guidelines:

  • If the measured ignition timing retards as engine speed increases, increase the Ignition Delay Time value.
  • If the measured ignition timing advances as engine speed increases, decrease the Ignition Delay Time value.

Once synchronised, disable Ignition Lock and the ECU will accurately command the ignition timing values defined by the Ignition Table and associated ignition corrections.


⚠️ Warning

Incorrect ignition synchronisation will result in the ECU commanding ignition timing that does not match the actual engine timing, which can lead to poor engine performance or engine damage.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Global Ignition Trim

This function applies a global ignition timing trim across all ignition channels.

The configured trim value is added to the final calculated ignition timing after all other ignition corrections and compensations have been applied. The trim is applied uniformly across all operating conditions and is independent of engine speed (RPM) and load.

Specifications

  • Units: Deg
  • Minimum Value: -100.0 Deg
  • Maximum Value: +100.0 Deg

Function Behaviour

  • Positive values advance ignition timing.
  • Negative values retard ignition timing.
  • A value of 0.0 Deg applies no global ignition correction.

⚠️ Notes

This function is intended as a quick global adjustment to the overall ignition timing.

For permanent calibration changes, adjust the appropriate ignition table(s) or compensation maps rather than relying on the global ignition trim.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Compensations

All Ignition Compensations (within the Ignition Tab) are raw degree values added/subtracted onto the Ignition Base Angle Calculation :

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cylinder Trims

Cylinder Trims can be enabled for each cylinder to adjust a timing +/- in a 3D table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Ignition Control

Base Idle Ignition Table

Defines the base ignition angle of the idle ignition control.

This table can be expanded into a 3D look up table using any runtime for axis.

Image Image

Above example shows the table spanned using Idle Target error & dRPM

  • Idle Target error references Idle Speed Control Main Idle Target table

** dRPM is the engine Speed rate of change

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Advance Clamp

Ignition Advance Clamp

Image Image

The maximum ignition advance allowed even if the the calculated output is higher.

Typical : 50 deg

The ECU also provides a Status flag to indication this condition. Open the ECU Runtimes menu (F3) and select the Ignition Tab.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Advance Rate Table

Ign Advance Rate Table

Globally controls how fast the rate of advance can be applied by the ECU

Units = Degrees/sec

Example:

Ign Advance Rate Table = 500/sec

Ignition Advance Rate of Change = 500 degrees/sec

** This function/parameter is always active

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Main Table Z-Axis Setup

Z-Axis uses a separate X axis lookup that can allow the blending of all the available tables.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Retard Rate Table

Ign Retard Rate Table

Globally controls how fast the rate of retard can be applied by the ECU

Units = Degrees/sec

Example:

Ign Retard Rate Table = 500/sec

Ignition Retard Rate of Change = 500 degrees/sec

** This function/parameter is always active

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Ignition Table Control

Table Control

Emtune has multiple tables for many engine functions. The table behaviour is based on comprehensive selections in Tuning under the respective function (IE, Fuel, Ignition, DBW, Cam control). Some functions have many tables that can be enabled such as Fuel and Ignition tabs. These main functions allow you to enable a variety of compensations, modifiers, individual trims, and more.

For main table controls, the selections are mostly universal.

(Fuel example shown)

Image Image

Not all of the above example will be available for every function, but generally most functions are the same.

**ON – Table *** enable those respective tables always.

Cal Slot enables which table is currently being commanded by the Cal Slot Control (see Cal Slot Control)

Z-Axis uses a separate X axis lookup that can allow the blending of all the available tables.

Image Image

Any runtime can be used, and the units equal which table to run in this case. You can see in the above example the ECU will switch (and interpolate in between) the three different tables available based on TP1 position.

*** Blend** tables allow switching between two tables only.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Transient Ignition

Transient Ignition

Tuning transient functions in Emtune is done through a combination of function setup and table settings.

The following runtimes are generated which are applied/added/subtracted to final base Ignition calculations.

  • Ignition Rate of Change – The current ignition rate of change in degrees per second
  • Ign Accel Trim – Ignition retard trim being added by accel trim function
  • Ign Decel Trim – Ignition advance trim being added by decal trim function

Transient Ignition Setup

Tuning -> Ignition -> Transient -> Ignition Transient Setup

Image Image

Enable functions

Turn on and off Accel and/or Decel modes here.

Ign Accel/Decel Mode

Choose pedal position, throttle position, or MAP sensor to initiate the function. This configures what runtime the threshold lockout looks at.

Accel/Decel Threshold (+/-)

The minimum rate of change required to initiate the accel/decel function – related to Acce/Decel Mode

Ign Accel Sens Table

Control the amount of Ignition Accel Retard for a given Rate of Change.

Ignition Accel Retard = Rate of Change x Sens.

Example:

dTP1 = 5.0%/sec

Sens = 4.5

Ignition Retard = 5.0%/sec * 4.5 = 22.5 of ignition retard.

Ign Accel Clamp Table

Clamps the maximum amount of accel timing allowed by accel ignition.

Example:

Accel Clamp = 10 degrees (retard)

Ignition base angle = 35 degrees

Ignition angle = 25 degrees

Ign Accel Decay Table

Controls the percentage Ign Accel Decay per Engine Cycle

Example:

Ign Accel = -10.0 Retard start value

Ign Decay = 10.0%.

Ignition Accel will decay back to zero at 1.0 degree per engine cycle.

Ign Decel Sens Table

Control the amount of Ignition Decel Advance for a given Rate of Change

Ignition Decel Advance = Rate of Change x Sens.

Example:

dTP1 = 8.0%/sec

Sens = 1.5

Ignition Advance = 8.0 %/sec x 1.5 = 12.0 of ignition advance

Ign Decel Clamp Table

Clamps the Maximum Ignition Decel Advance

Example:

Accel Clamp = 10 degrees (advance)

Ignition base angle = 20 degrees

Ignition angle = 30 degrees

Ign Decel Decay Table

Controls the percentage Ign Decel Decay per Engine Cycle

Example:

Ign Decel = 10.0 Adv start value

Ign Decay = 10.0%.

Ignition Decel will decay back to zero at 1.0 degree per engine cycle.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Throttle Mass Flow

TMF Idle Speed Control

Introduction

Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) as the name indicates, is the rate at which air mass is flowing through a throttle body in units of grams/second (g/s).

The flow through a throttle body is governed by three physical elements:

  1. Conversation of mass
  2. Newtons second law of motion for fluids
  3. Conservation of energy

By combining all these elements the ECU can model the flow of fluid through the throttle body accounting for throttle plate thickness and throttle shaft size. One key piece of data is knowing the pressure ratio across the throttle body as shown in the below diagram, the other key piece of data is the current throttle area. If the pressure ratio and throttle area is known, the ECU can very accurately calculate the mass flow rate through a throttle body.

Image Image

Although the ECU completes these complex calculations internally, the process of calculating Throttle Mass Flow is kept as simple as possible for the user with the following inputs and setup required:

Inputs required

  1. Pressure Before the throttle Plate
  2. Pressure After the throttle Plate

Setting required

  1. Throttle Body Size
  2. Throttle Area to Servo Position Correlation Table (Throttle Body Area Table)

The TMF calculation can summarised in the below equation :

Throttle Mass Flow (g/s) = ( Pafter / Pbefore) x Throttle Area x Modelled throttle body fluid dynamics equation

Throttle Mass Flow Idle Speed Control

The Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) idle speed control function delivers extremely accurate and rapid idle calculation based on actual engine’s airflow requirements. Any engine load change will be detected by a pressure ratio change across the throttle body allowing the ECU to make instantaneous corrections. In all DBW applications we strongly recommend that the TMF Idle speed control is employed. TMF Idle speed control is an independent idle speed control function that utilises the Emtron’s comprehensive air mass flow modelling without effect on the fuel model used.

The Throttle Mass Flow (g/s) becomes the target flow for the Idle Speed Control system i.e how much air mass flow is required for a given target rpm. So the TMF becomes the feed-forward/Initial value. The ECU will then apply a PID correction to this flow target until the Target RPM is reach. By rearranged the TMF equation, the ECU will convert the final Throttle Mass Flow(g/s) into Throttle Area and move the plate to that position. A feed-forward/Initial value table example is shown below.

Image Image

Typical TMF Idle Feed forward table in units of g/s

NOTE:

Any fuel model mode can be selected and does not need to include TMF for the TMF idle speed control function to work correctly.

TMF fuel model is covered in the Fuel section and not discussed here.

Warning - DBW setup must be completed before setting up TMF idle

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Throttle Body Area Table

Overview

The Throttle Body Area table is a 40-cell correlation table; it gives the direct relationship between Throttle Area and Throttle Position (Servo Position). The ECU uses this table to convert any Throttle Area request into Servo Position which is then used as the DBW Target. Throttle Body templates are available to load into the ECU from the File -> Import Module File menu.

Example:

Throttle Area Demand from the pedal = 4.37%

Using the table in the below image, the ECU would find the 4.37% area and correlate this to 9.0% Servo Position. The DBW Servo Position Target therefore becomes 9.0%

i.e the ECU is asking for 4.37% area and moves the throttle plate to 9.0% servo position to achieve this.

Image Image

Nissan GT-R R35 Throttle Body Area table

Throttle body templates are also available to load into the ECU from the File -> Import Module File menu

There are multiple ways to calibrate the appropriate throttle area.

Method 1 – MAF verification

If the application is using a calibrated MAF sensor. Then the throttle area % can be adjusted and matched to TMF air mass VS MAF air mass at different throttle/DBW servo positions.

Method 2 – Matching Lambda

If no MAF sensor is available, setting fuel trims to 0 (or near 0), you can adjust the throttle area to match the target mixture very quickly.

** The only way to truly validate error in the TMF calculation is to use Method 1

** Some extreme applications where live Lambda is unstable may be more difficult to map with Method 2

See Torque Management Tuning Guide, Throttle Mass Flow, and Torque Reduction(throttle) sections for more specific information, and guides on how to tune.

Tuning Tip:

Per the Matching Lambda validation method, the Throttle Area Table is used to quickly tune the engine operating in TMF by simply manipulating the table at the various throttle areas to match the Lambda Target Table values for that given load. When the correct air fuel ratio is achieved, the Throttle Area Table is essentially validated for the purpose of running the engine. To do this the wideband lambda control should be turned off and the blend bias toward TMF be set to 100%.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Throttle Body Model

Overview

The throttle body model is a key component to unlocking the advanced tuning features of the Emtron ECU. That is Throttle Mass Flow & Torque Modeling & Management. The accuracy of your setup in the throttle body mode is critical for good results.

Image Image

Once the throttle mass flow feature is characterized and enabled, the throttle body model setup can be accessed and setup

The Throttle Body setup consists of 2 main parts:

  • Throttle body diameter and scaler.
  • Throttle body area table.

Image Image

See the DBW Torque Management  help topic for more information on the process of converting Pedal Position to Throttle Area to DBW Servo target.  

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Throttle Body Setup

Overview

The Throttle Body setup consists of 2 main parts:

  • Throttle body diameter and scaler.
  • Throttle body area table.

Settings are adjusted from the Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model menu. Throttle body templates are also available to load into the ECU from the File -> Import Module File menu

Image Image

See the DBW Torque Management help topic for more information on the process of converting Pedal Position to Throttle Area to DBW Servo target.

Throttle Body Setup

The Throttle Body diameter and scaler can be adjusted from this menu.

Image Image

Throttle Body Area Table

The Throttle Body Area table is a 40 cell correlation table; it gives the direct relationship between Throttle Area and Throttle Position (Servo Position). The ECU uses this table to convert any Throttle Area request into Servo Position which is then used as the DBW Target. Throttle Body templates are available to load into the ECU from the File -> Import Module File menu.

Example:

Throttle Area Demand from the pedal = 4.37%

Using the table in the below image, the ECU would find the 4.37% area and correlate this to 9.0% Servo Position. The DBW Servo Position Target therefore becomes 9.0%

i.e the ECU is asking for 4.37% area and moves the throttle plate to 9.0% servo position to achieve this.

Image Image

Nissan GT-R R35 Throttle Body Area table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Torque Management

Torque Modelling

The engine torque produced by combustion is calculated by the ECU using modelled algorithms and is referred to as Ideal Engine Torque. The moving parts inside the engine assembly create drag and therefore limit the torque available. The estimate of torque required to overcome this drag effect is called Frictional Loss.

The ECU also produces a calculation for Driver Demand Torque using a weighted mathematic model from multiple inputs. This is explained more in the Driver Demand Torque topic below.

The Engine Torque and Driver Demand Torque calculations have no correlation and operate independently. Both calculations will merge and track very closely, however the accuracy of these calculations will depend on the accuracy of the engine setup and mapping: i.e Injector Data, Fuel Density, VE Model etc. The ECU calculates Torque in the units of Newton-metre (Nm).

The Engine Torque and Driver Demand Torque data can be transmitted over the CAN bus in some OEM applications, which is another reason the accuracy of the calculation is important.

Engine Torque (Nm)

The Primary data source for calculating Engine Torque is the Final Air Mass (g/s) entering the engine. The Final Air Mass will be heavily influenced by VE table and Injector charachterisation so this data must be as accurate as possible to ensure the accuracy of the Engine Torque calculation.

Ideal Engine Torque is caclulated using the following inputs:

  • Final Air Mass (g/s)
  • Throttle Area
  • Lambda Target
  • Stoichiometric Ratio
  • Number of cylinders

Uncorrected Engine Torque is calculated by accounting for the frictional loss of the engine. It is named “uncorrected” because other inputs can further change the Engine Torque. An Engine Torque Correction factor can also be applied and is described further down the page.

Engine Torque (Uncorrected) = (Engine Torque Ideal - Torque Frictional Loss) x Engine Torque Correction

Final Engine Torque accounts for the additional inputs that can reduce or increase Engine Torque such as:

  • Engine Cutting (Reduce Engine Torque)
  • Ignition Retard (The Torque Model assumes the engine has the Ignition tuned for peak torque, so any retard will therefore reduce Engine Torque)
  • Throttle (Throttle Mass Flow function(s) can close the throttle plate, reducing the Air Mass and hence Engine Torque. For example VDC control)
  • Nitrous (This will increase Engine Torque)

Driver Demand Torque (Nm)

The Driver Demand Torque is the torque requested by the driver, primarily as a function of engine speed and pedal position to give a requested throttle area. We know through mathematical modeling that from throttle area we can calculate airflow and from airflow we can calculate torque.

Apart from some specific exceptions, the engine torque must be controlled by the driver. Some exceptions include: downshifts, traction control (VDC event), pit lane speed limiter and cruise control.

The driver only has control of torque by using the pedal, but other factors get included into the mathematical model to give a final Driver Demand Torque. These include:

  • Engine Speed
  • Throttle Area and Diameter
  • Engine VE
  • Charge Temperature
  • Boost Target (Used as peak load indicator)
  • Lambda Target
  • Number of cylinders

All those parameters get included in a complex mathematical model which generates a runtime called Driver Demand Torque Ideal.

Accounting for frictional loss of the engine the final Driver Demand Torque can be expressed as:

Driver Demand Torque = (Driver Demand Torque Ideal - Torque Frictional Loss) x Driver Demand Torque Correction

Boost Target Table

It is worth mentioning the Boost Target and how the Boost Target table should be setup to help generate a more accurate Driver Demand Torque. The Y-Axis or load axis should be set to “Throttle Area Demand - Pedal” and not the raw Pedal Position Sensor.

Boost Target Table Boost Target Table

Nissan GT-R R35 Boost Target table.

Torque Runtime Data

Engine Torque and Driver Demand Torque data is available in the Runtime Values(F3) > Torque Data tab.

Torque F3 Torque F3

Torque Limit Ignition Retard Scaling Table

This table calibrates the torque reduction % per degree. When a torque request is applied the ECU will calculate how much retard is required to achieve this torque request.

Image Image

Typical Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Gain Table

In a wide variety of applications, the default table shown above will give very useable results.

Torque Limit Cut Gain Table

This table calibrates the torque reduction % per %cut. When a torque request is applied the ECU will calculate how much cut is required to achieve this torque request.

Image Image

Typical Torque Reduction Cut Gain Table

Torque Corrections

Torque Correction Tables Torque Correction Tables

Firstly, the Engine Torque values must be validated on a dyno to ensure the ECU Torque Calculation (Engine Torque Ideal, Engine Torque), are close to the values being produced on the dyno.

Note: If using a dyno where wheel power is reducing values, then this error must be factored in.

A properly tuned engine, with no error in the basic fuel model is the first step. Having proper injector data, engine displacement, fuel type/stoich, and a tuned VE table will already calculate accurate engine torque.

Engine Torque Correction Table

If engine torque is not calculating accurately, you can correct the torque calculation via the Engine Torque Correction Table.

Tip: A value of 1.0 = no correction.

Driver Demand Torque Correction Table

Driver Demand channel is used in some OEM applications, but also can be used as a channel in the ECU to feed forward the driver tour requests. The Driver Demand can be corrected via the Driver Demand Torque Correction Table.

Tip: A value of 1.0 = no correction.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cranking Throttle Area Demand

During engine cranking (Engine Speed < Crank Exit RPM setting) this table is used to generate a Throttle Area Demand ,overriding any request from the pedal. The ECU then uses the Throttle Body Area table to convert Throttle Area into the DBW Servo Position target.

See the DBW Torque Management help topic for more information on the process of converting Pedal Position to Throttle Area to DBW Servo target.

This table is available from the Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Cranking Throttle Area Demand menu.

Image Image

Image Image

Cranking Throttle Area Demand data

This is available from the runtime (F3) menu , Torque or DBW 1/2 tab.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

CAN Torque Reported Modifier

CAN Torque Reported Modifier

Torque Information over the CAN bus can be modified.

This can change the behavior of the Gearshift along with clutch pressure in gear.

If there is excessive slip typically the Torque reported should be increased.

If the gearshift feel is too sharp and aggressive the Torque reported should be reduced.

The table applies an offset.

This effects:

  1. Engine Torque Demand

  2. Engine Torque

Table range is +/- 500Nm

Image Image

The above example shows a typical setting.

The increase in Torque reported over the CAN bus will have the effect of sharpening the transmission shifting and clutch lockup.

It is important to note that directly programming the TCM through a third party flashing tool is advised over using the ECU to offset the torque reported.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW Torque Management

Introduction

The ECU uses a torque based system for DBW throttle plate control, which means all torque requests are done using Throttle Area, not Throttle Position.  

There is no direct DBW Servo Position “Target” table, but instead a Throttle Area Demand table (more information below). So the throttle area directly relates to the engine torque which is why this function is under Torque Management.

For Engine torque calculations and during Torque limiting events the ECU converts the engines throttle area into engine airflow (g/s), then into engine torque (Nm) using mathematical models. This model allows the ECU to use this calculation in either direction:

  • Throttle Area -> Airflow -> Engine Torque. Starting with throttle area the ECU can calculate the engine torque.
  • Torque Target -> Airflow -> Throttle Area Target. Starting with a torque Target, the ECU can target a throttle plate area to achieve that torque.

Throttle Area data is available either in the Runtime menu(F3) -> Torque or DBW 1/2 tab. The “Throttle Area Demand Status” indicates the current throttle area in use.

Image Image

How does the ECU then convert throttle area to DBW servo position target?

This is done using the “Throttle Body Area Table " which translates Throttle Area into Servo Position. The ECU uses this as a lookup table, converting any requested Throttle Area into a Servo Position target for the DBW system. See the Throttle Body Area help topic for more information.


The process of converting Pedal Position -> Throttle Area Demand -> DBW Servo Target

To understand the process of converting Pedal Position into Throttle Area, carefully read this section.

  1. Make sure the Throttle Body setup is completed correctly. See DBW Calibration Guide.
  2. Note the Throttle Cranking Area table. This ONLY gets applied during cranking and overrides any pedal request. See Cranking Throttle Area Demand

Image Image

  1. The Pedal Position Sensor goes through a pedal position filter table to give you Pedal Position Demand . This will help smooth out signal fluctuations and improve the driving experience. Press H to read the help below the table. So this step is Pedal Position Sensor  -> Pedal  Position Demand

See the Pedal Demand Filter help topic for more information.

Image Image

  ![Image](</img/Tuning Tip.jpg>)            

 **Tuning Tip**: To avoid large input delays from the Pedal Position Sensor the filter setting on the raw input should be keep small . i.e the input filtering is done during the **Pedal Position Sensor  -> Pedal  Position Demand**         so minimal filtering is required on the raw Pedal Position Sensor Input (See Config View -> Channels -> Inputs Setup -> DBW/Servo Tab). A Typical value will be between 0 - 4.

Image Image

  1. The new Pedal Position Demand should be used to span the Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Table 1. This demands a Throttle Area (not a position). This table controls the “feel”, making the engine feel more responsive or less responsive by controlling the Torque demand through Throttle Area.

So this step is Pedal Position Demand  ->Throttle Area Demand

See the Pedal to Throttle Area Translation help topic for more information.

Image Image

  1. In this last step the ECU will convert the Throttle Area Demand into the Servo Position Target for the DBW function. This is when the ECU uses the “Throttle Body Area”  table mentioned at the start of this section. The ECU uses this as a “lookup” table to convert the Throttle Area Demand into a DBW Servo Position Target.

So this final step is Throttle Area Demand -> DBW Servo Position Target

See the Throttle Body Area help topic for more information and examples

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Driver Demand Torque Correction Table

Driver Demand Torque Correction Table

Image Image

Driver Demand Torque is calculated based on various parameters in the ECU along with driver controlled pedal inputs.

If however there are correlation errors between the actual Engine Torque and Driver Demand torque, these can be trimmed using this table.

The range is 0.000 to 2.000. A value of 1.000 being equivalent to the calculated torque demand without correction. As with the Engine torque correction table the default table is produced using only the the X axis as an example. However both the X & Y axis are available and can be enabled at any time in the axis setup form.

Image Image

Note: The Driver Demand Torque is calculated fully Independent to the Engine Torque, so there will always be a small error between the two. A normal and acceptable error is around 10%. For example Driver Demand Torque might be 470Nm and Engine Torque 490Nm. This is an acceptable error & not unusual.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

TCM Throttle Torque Gain

TCM Throttle Torque Gain

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Torque Limit Gain Tables

Torque Limit Ignition Retard Gain Table

Image Image

This table calibrates the torque reduction % per degree. When a torque request is applied the ECU will calculate how much retard is required to achieve this torque request.

Example : 1.5%/ Deg.

The Engine is running at 600Nm and a Torque Reduction to 400Nm is requested.

This is a 33% reduction in Torque so at 1.5%/Deg the ECU will Retard the Ignition 22 Degrees.

(33% / 1.5%/deg = 22 Deg)

Example : 16 degrees of ignition trims (Ignition Trims Total) are being applied - for any reason (comps, secondary load, etc)

The ECU will calculate 20% of torque reduction - can be observed with Runtime “Torque Reduction - Retard (Nm)”

See default table settings below.

Image Image

Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Gain Table

Torque Limit Cut Gain Table

Image Image

This table calibrates the torque reduction % per %cut. When a torque request is applied the ECU will calculate how much cut is required to achieve this torque request.

See default table settings below.

Image Image

Torque Reduction Cut Gain Table

Torque Limit Boost Target Margin Table

Image Image

During Torque Limiting the ECU calculates (when enabled) the Minimum Boost Target required for the engine to achieve this Torque. The engine actually needs more than this minimum for the Throttle Mass Limiting to be effective so the " Boost Target Margin" is added to this value.

Example: ECU calculates a Boost Target of 150 kPa. If Boost Target Margin is 20kPa, the final Boost Target during Throttle Mass Flow Limiting will be 170kPa

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Torque Limit Strategies

A total of 5 different Torque Limit strategies can be configured. Different situations and scenarios may call for multiple methods of torque limiting strategies.

Torque Strategies can use a combination of Throttle Area, Ignition Retard, and Cutting to achieve the requested torque target. A priority system is used to determine the prefferred method of torque reduction, this is particularly useful during long sustained Torque Limit conditions.

The first priority is always given preference, however should the chosen priority mode not achieve the torque target before hitting a clamp value or during the time it takes for Throttle Air Mass to change, the next priority mode will be used.

Example:

  • Priority 1 = Throttle Area
  • Priority 2 = Ignition Retard
  • Priority 3 = Fuel/Ign Cutting
  • Ignition Retard Max Clamp Table = 15 deg.

When the Torque Limit is entered, the Throttle Area will begin to transition to the position calculated to acheive the requested torque air mass. During this transition the torque limit will likely not be achieved, so the system will shift to Priority 2 and introduce the calculated Ignition Retard required to achieve the torque target.

Should be torque target still not be met and the Retard applied has reached the max clamp, the system will shift to Priority 3 to complete the torque reduction with cutting.

Similarly, when the Ignition Retard is enough to maintain the torque reduction, the cutting will be removed. Finally, once the Throttle Area is able to sustain the Torque Limit, the Ignition Retard will be removed.

Torque Limit Flow Torque Limit Flow

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Torque Management Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Clamp

This clamp value sets the maximum amount of ignition timing retard the ECU is able to apply during a torque reduction event.

Note: An insufficient clamp value will result in an insufficient torque reduction when requested resulting in an failed torque reduction event

Torque Nitrous Gain

In applications where Nitrous is used to increase torque. The ECU calculates this torque increase however if required the gain of this torque increase can be used to trim the output.

BSFC

The brake specific fuel consumption of an engine depends on many factors including thermal efficiency, mechanical efficiency and air to fuel ratios.

Brake specific fuel consumption should be set at Lambda 1.000. The ECU will automatically scale this value based on Lambda Target. The assumption is the engine is tuned to this Target.

Typical Value: 304 - 243 g/kW.h

Conversion:

  • 364 g/kW.h = 0.60 lb/hp.h
  • 304 g/kW.h  = 0.50 lb/hp.h
  • 244 g/kW.h  = 0.40 lb/hp.h
InfoAt this time, Brake Specific Fuel Consumption torque calculation is not used by the ECU however it can be useful when calibrated correctly to cross check the ECU calculated torque levels.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

User Torque Limits

In addition to Motorsport and special features included in the firmware that utilize Torque Management (Launch Control, Traction Control, Engine Speed limiting), there are 5 User Configurable Torque Limits.

User Torque Limits 1-5

User Torque Limit Function Setup

The User Torque Limits must be enabled in the Function Output Setup

Furthermore, a Custom Label can be assigned to the function

Image Image

Torque Limit Control Setup

Image Image

Choose Strat to use for each Torque Limit

Choose Target Gear for Normalised Torque target

Example Below: (Gear Ratio Table MUST be setup)

  • 1 = 3.266
  • 2 = 2.130
  • 3 = 1.517
  • 4 = 1.212
  • 5 = 0.972
  • 6 = 0.780

Normalised Gear = 2 (which is Ratio 2.130)

Feedforward Torque = 300Nm

Torque Target:

Gear 1 = 2.130/3.266 = 0.652 * 300 = 195.7Nm
Gear 2 = 2.130/2.130 = 1 * 300 = 300Nm
Gear 3 = 2.130/1.517 = 1.404 * 300 = 421.22Nm

Select Tq Limit User Enable

User Torque Limit Main Table (Nm)

This entry value in Nm is the torque target when the limit is active.

Image Image

User Torque Limit Correction Table (%)

This entry will compensate the torque target table. Values entered are +/- %.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Torque Correction

Engine Torque Correction Table

Image Image

The ECU accurately calculates the Engine Torque, however if any calibration errors lead to incorrect readings, this table allows the user to adjust the gain based on any parameter listed in the axis setup form.

The range is 0.000 to 2.000, a value of 1.000 being equivalent to the calculated torque demand without correction. The default table is produced using only the X axis as an example. The Y axis is available and can be enabled at any time in the axis setup form.

Image Image

Example

Engine Torque Ideal = 490Nm

Frictional Loss Total = -88Nm

Engine Torque Correction = 0.985

Engine Torque (Uncorrected) = (490Nm - 88Nm ) x 0.985 = 396Nm

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Frictional Loss Tables

Frictional Loss Tables

Image Image

The engine torque produced by combustion is calculated by the ECU and referred to as “Ideal” Engine Torque.  The moving parts within the engine have mass and are subject to frictional losses and therefore limit the actual torque available. As such, the estimate of torque required to overcome this drag effect is called Frictional Loss. This estimate is found in the Frictional Loss Table in units of Nm.  A default table is provided as a guide to be adjusted (See below)

These internal torque losses are mainly influenced by the cylinder count i.e. the more cylinders you have, the more moving parts and therefore more friction & the more parasitic loss of torque.

Image Image

Calibrating Frictional Loss

The engine must be actually mapped and calibrated before editing this table. An easy way to get a close representation of this loss is to adjust the frictional loss value at each RPM point to achieve a normal Engine Torque (uncorrected) value of 0 Nm (i.e. no engine acceleration or deceleration). Another hint that there is an incorrect setting will be correlation problems between the ECU calculated torque and a known accurate reading. See the Torque tab in the Runtime menu (F3) to view this data

Engine Torque (Uncorrected) = (Engine Torque Ideal - Torque Frictional Loss) x Engine Torque Correction

Image Image

Frictional Loss Offset Tables

There are two (2) tables that allow offsetting of the frictional loss. One typical example will be adjusting the loss based on oil temperature.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Frictional Loss

Frictional Loss

Frictional loss is instrumental in torque management tuning. If any function in the ECU requires torque targeting, feeding error here will cause the system to not function correctly.

Tuning the Frictional Loss tables when the engine is in “maintenance” free revving range (neutral) is the simplest way to do this -

Example - change the engine speed in neutral (with nothing dragging on the engine) and adjust the frictional loss table until Engine Torque (Uncorrected) = 0

**** Note - engine temperature, oil temperature, and other factors will greatly affect Frictional loss. There are two offset tables available to adjust for those factors.**

**** Error in fuel model or basic setup will cause base torque values to not calculate correctly. Make sure there is no error in lambda target during tests.**

Image Image

Torque Frictional Loss = -76.0

Engine Torque Ideal = 74.4

Engine Torque Uncorrected = -1.6

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Frictional Loss Table

Image Image

This procedure teaches the ECU how much “Ideal” torque is required to achieve different engine speeds, and is instrumental in RPM targeting the engine for any kind of function requiring that (RPM limiting, Launch Limiting, etc)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Pedal Position Demand Filter

Introduction

The ECU takes the raw Pedal Position Sensor 1 input, passes it through exponential filter to help smooth out signal fluctuations, then generates a new runtime Pedal Position Demand.

Pedal Position Sensor -> EXPONTENTIAL FILTER -> Pedal Position Demand

The filter coefficients for the exponential filter are adjustable using a table. These filter coefficients can be used to heavily filter small throttle corrections, while allowing large throttle changes to have little or no filtering. By heavily filtering small throttle corrections, throttle sensitivity can be reduced, helping the throttle “feel” when driving over bumpy roads or when making small throttle changes. Little filtering when making large throttle changes helps to give a fast throttle response when a large acceleration or deceleration is requested.

See the DBW Torque Management help topic for more information on the process of converting Pedal Position to Throttle Area to DBW Servo target.


Pedal Position Demand Filter Lockouts

These settings allow for the lockout of the pedal filter based on the pedal position.

Image Image


Pedal Position Demand Filter Table

This controls how much filtering is applied. It is common to filter heavily at low rates of pedal position sensor output in order to achieve a smooth driver torque demand.

0 = Filtering OFF

99 = Max Filtering

Important Note: It is strongly recommended to span the table axis as follows:

  • X - Axis = Rate of Pedal Position sensor change
  • Y - Axis = Pedal Position Sensor

Example

Using dPedal Position Sensor 1 and Pedal Position Sensor 1, the Throttle Area Demand can be softened at low dPedal rates whilst also giving the ability to change the filtering based on the raw pedal position.

Image Image

Reviewing PC/ECU logs will allow the user to achieve the desired effect.

  • Top Plot (white trace) shows Throttle Area Demand
  • Bottom Plot shows the Pedal Position Sensor (green trace) vs Pedal Position Demand (white trace)

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation

Introduction

As discussed at the beginning of this section DBW Torque Management the ECUs Torque Management using DBW requires the plate control to be in Throttle Area, not Throttle position.

.


Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Tables

Pedal to Throttle Area Demand translation is performed using a 3D table. Three tables are available, only 1 can be active at any one time.

NOTE: This table targets Throttle Area (NOT DBW Servo Position)

The relationship of Servo Position should be ignored with a properly tuned Throttle Body Area system in the Throttle Body Model. Torque targeting should be the overall mentality of this map, and while with everything configure as it should (TMF, etc), linearized table may produce linearized Driver Demand, this may not be ideal for how the vehicle will want to drive. More often than not the demand table will end up in a shape where the higher end of the table (60+) has much larger values in it - to demand more torque.

The Y-Axis runtime should be spanned using “Pedal Position Demand” which is a filtered version of the raw Pedal Position sensor. See Pedal Position Demand Filter .

A typical runtime for the X-Axis is Engine Speed.

Image Image

Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation table


Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Clamp Table

This is a 3D table that clamps the maximum allowable throttle area. If no clamping of the Throttle Demand is needed, a single value of 100% can be used.

Two examples are shown below.

Image Image

Basic Throttle Area clamp table (no Throttle Demand Clamping is needed)

Image Image

Advanced clamp table (based on Traction Target Error and Ground Speed Limiter)


Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Table Control

As mentioned at the start, there are 3 tables which can be control in a variety of ways. The following options are available

0: N/A (Tables OFF)

1: ON – Table 1 (Table 1 Available)

2: ON – Table 2 (Table 2 Available)

3: ON – Table 3 (Table 3 Available)

4: N/A

5: Cal Slot (Cal Slot Control selects active table)

6: ON – Z-Axis (Z Axis Table selects/blends active table)

7: ON – Table 1 = DBW 1/Table 2 = DBW2 Air Bleed

Modes 1-3: Activate individual tables

** Mode 1 is most common (Table 1 activated)

Mode 5: Allows Cal Slot Control to select the active table (See Cal Slot Control)

Image Image

Mode 6: Enables a Z-Axis table that allows selection/blending of the active table,

Image Image

Axis based on Front Axle Speed. Units are active table

Mode 7: Allows two different drive by wire servos to have different targets. DBW Servo 1 controlling the main airflow into the engine, and DBW Servo 2 being used for a different purpose like DBW Air Bleed on turbocharged or supercharged engines.

Example

Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table 1 = DBW 1 Control .

Image Image

Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table 2 = DBW 2. This is used for compressor surge control by venting excess air the engine cannot use.

This is a good example of how Emtron allows you to layer multiple functions together to obtain a desired result

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Functions

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Functions

Accelerometer

Overview

The KV8, KV12, KV16 ECUs have an internal 3-Axis Accelerometer. This can be used to measure:

  • Braking and acceleration g-force (longitudinal acceleration)
  • Cornering g-force (lateral acceleration)
  • Up/down g-force (vertical acceleration)

Other features include:

  • 16 Bit Resolution
  • +-2g / +-4g / +-8g dynamically selectable full-scale
  • Output Data Rate 500Hz

Orientation

The diagram below shows the orientation of each ECU axis.

Image Image

The diagram below shows the orientation of each axis reference from the vehicle.

Image Image

The ECU allows each vehicle axis to be assigned to an ECU axis (X,Y,Z). For example the Longitudinal Axis can be assigned to the ECUs X or Y or Z axis. This allows the ECU to be mounted at any position/orientation within the car.

These settings are available from the Tuning view > Vehicle Setup > Accelerometer Setup Menu.

Typical Values

Longitudinal positive g-force = Acceleration. Typical values 0.3 to 0.5g

Longitudinal negative g-force = Braking. Typical values: -1.5 to -1.8g

Lateral negative g-force = Turning Left. Typical value for race car on slicks : -1.8g

Lateral positive g-force = Turning Right. Typical value for race car on slicks : 1.8g

Accelerometer Full Range

This sets the maximum g-force that can be measured in any axis. There are 3 Full Range modes adjustable through EMtune.

  • +-2g
  • +-4g
  • +-8g

Normally 2g is enough for most racing applications where there is limited downforce. However, on applications with significant downforce such as under-body trays or large wings then the 4g or 8g option is recommended.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Active Center Differential Pump Control (ACD)

Active Center Differential (ACD) Hydraulic Pump Control

This function reads the pressure from the “Active Center Diff Pressure” input channel and uses this to control the ACD hydraulic pressure. The ECU provides a Pressure Target Table so that different pressures can be targeted under different conditions.

This function can be enabled when the Motorsport Differential Control Function is ON AND an Output Channel has been assigned.

Image Image

ACD Control Output Status

The following Status information is available from the “ACD Output Status” runtime. This can be viewed from ECU runtime menu, under the Motorsport Tab.

0 = Function is OFF

1 = Output OFF

2 = Output ON

3 = Output OFF- RPM Lockout

4 = Output OFF- User Lockout

5 = Output OFF- Timeout

6 = Output OFF- ACD Pressure Input not selected

7 = Output OFF- ACD Input in Fault

ACD Pump Lockouts

  • ACD RPM Lockout: The ACD Pump Output will be switched OFF below this Engine Speed. Used normally to switch OFF the Pump during low RPM and cranking.

0 = OFF

Typical Value = 400 RPM

  • ACD User Lockout: The ACD Pump Output will be switched OFF when the User Channel is ON/Active.

ACD Pump Protection

The following features have been implemented to prevent pump damage:

    • ACD Timeout Setting. With the Pump ON, if the Target pressure cannot be reached within this timeout value the Pump will be switched OFF. The timer will only be reset when the Lockouts become active or the ECU power is reset.
    • ACD Pressure Sensor Fault. When the sensor is in fault the Pump will be switched OFF.

ACD Pump Priming.

The hydraulic system can be primed using the “Test “Output” function. Simply open this menu, set Test Output to ON and the Pump should start.

CAUTION: Priming the pump should be done with care as the ECUs safety systems are disabled and pump damage may occur.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Boost Control

The following calculated runtimes are generated by Emtron that are Boost Control related (to be further discussed more specifically):

Image Image

Boost Control Function Setup

Emtron has three methods of Boost Control

Config > Function Setup > Engine Functions > Boost Control

Single Solenoid

Control of a single solenoid.

Duel Solenoids (Bank Control)

Control of dual solenoids in Bank Configuration.

This option allows 2 individual boost control functions to operate using 2 different MAP Source Inputs.

Normally used to control boost pressure independently on each engine bank when there is no common plenum.

Setting the PID Table axis to “Dual Boost 1/2 Target Error” will allow both Boost 1 and Boost 2 functions to access the same PID tables but the ECU will automatically set the correct axis for interpolation (i.e “Boost 1 Target Error” for Boost Control 1 and “Boost 2 Target Error” for Boost Control 2).

Push-Pull Top Port Solenoids

Uses 2 solenoids on the Top Port of the wastegate to either Increase or Decrease the pressure. Manifold pressure is connected to the bottom wastegate port.

Normally use CO2 on the top port and the ECU channel “Wastegate Top Port Pressure”.

  • Solenoid 1 = Increasing Pressure
  • Solenoid 2 = Decreasing Pressure

Image Image

Some solenoids are sensitive to flywheel diodes on ECU outputs regarding Boost Control and must be matched appropriate.
  • Standard MAC valve Aux Output – Aux 1-16 – Low Side
  • AMS/Bullet type valve – Spare Fuel/Ignition channel – Low Side

Valves that need to be ran at higher frequency, or in the case of Push-Pull functionality, where the valves must not float - require non-flyweel controlled outputs (Fuel/Ignition channels) to ensure the control function is appropriate.

See KV Series Hardware Manual section 3.52


Boost Control Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Boost Control Mode

Used to select either Open or Closed Loop.

Open Loop mode is generally used to setup initial settings before using Closed Loop mode.

  • 0: Open Loop
  • 1: Closed Loop – Absolute Target
  • 2: Closed Loop – Gauge Target
Mode 2 works with “0” Manifold Pressure Input only. The ECU generates a channel Manifold Gauge Pressure. Manifold Gauge Pressure is derived from the Barometric Pressure Channel. Barometric Pressure Channel must be configured.

Examples

Absolute Mode

Target = 250kPa. The ECU will Target an Absolute pressure of 250kPa. Boost Pressure inside the engine will increase as Barometric pressure reduces.

Barometric Pressure of 100kPa. Boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

Barometric Pressure of 80kPa. Boost pressure inside the engine will be 170kPa. (250kPa - 80kPa)

Gauge Mode.

Target = 150kPa. The ECU will Target a boost pressure of 150kPa above Barometric pressure.

Barometric Pressure of 100kPa. ECU Boost Target will be 250kPa, boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

Barometric Pressure of 80kPa. ECU Boost Target will be 230kPa, boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa

Boost Target Tables are used in Closed Loop mode.

Note – Push/Pull Solenoid Mode: Open Loop mode is not available as Closed Loop functionality is required to continuously regulate the target pressure.

Boost Control 1/2 Pressure Input

Allows the Boost Control PID Input/Setpoint to be controlled.

The input for the boost target to be used in closed loop.

  • 0: Manifold Pressure
  • 1: Manifold Pressure - Bank 1
  • 2: Manifold Pressure - Bank 2
  • 3: Manifold Pressure Bank 1/2 Avg
  • 4: Boost Pressure - Bank 1
  • 5: Boost Pressure - Bank 2
  • 6: Boost Pressure Bank 1/2 Avg
  • 7: Wastegate Top Port Pressure 1
  • 8: Wastegate Top Port Pressure 2
  • 9: Boost Pressure

Boost OL/CL Lockouts

Image Image\

Throttle Lockout

The Boost Solenoid will switch OFF below this Throttle Position

Applies to both Open and Closed Loop modes

Typical: 10.0% ( 0 = OFF)\

RPM Lockout

The Boost Solenoid will switch OFF below this RPM.

Applies to both Open and Closed Loop modes

Typical : 1200 RPM ( 0 = OFF)

Pressure Lockout

The Boost Solenoid will switch OFF below this pressure

Applies to both Open and Closed Loop modes

Open Loop: ECU uses “Manifold Pressure” runtime

Closed Loop: ECU uses the pressure channel selected in the PID Setup Menu -> Boost 1 PID Input Source

Typical : 110 kPa ( 0 = OFF)

ET Lockout

The Boost Solenoid will switch OFF below this Engine Temperature

Applies to both Open and Closed Loop modes

Typical : 10.0 °C ( -50.0 = OFF)


Boost Solenoid Deadtime Table (ms)

This look up table defines the deadtime of the Boost Solenoid.

Image Image

The deadtime of the solenoid is crucial where control of the boost solenoid duty cycle is especially crucial – IE applications using Push-Pull solenoids or 4-port solenoid control.

Note: Deadtime will automatically add Boost Valve Position %.

A good way to set solenoid deadtime is to do it on a bench and monitor leakage through the valve. Increase deadtime until the brink of leakage, and deadtime is correct.

Boost Target Tables

Used by the ECU to determine the base Boost Pressure Target

Boost Control Target can be selected as Absolute or Gauge. NOTE: The ECU will always generate the final Boost Target as Absolute value.

Absolute Mode. This is the Target Boost Pressure independent of Barometric Pressure.

Gauge Mode. This is the Target Boost Pressure above Barometric Pressure

Example.

Absolute Mode. Target = 250kPa. The ECU will Target an Absolute pressure of 250kPa. Boost Pressure inside the engine will increase as Barometric pressure reduces.

Barometric Pressure of 100kPa. Boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

Barometric Pressure of 80kPa. Boost pressure inside the engine will be 170kPa. (250kPa - 80kPa)

Gauge Mode. Target = 150kPa. The ECU will Target a boost pressure of 150kPa above Barometric pressure.

Barometric Pressure of 100kPa. ECU Boost Target will be 250kPa, boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

Barometric Pressure of 80kPa. ECU Boost Target will be 230kPa, boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa

Boost Target Table 1/2/3

Image Image

3 tables are available depending on CAL slot control or Boost Table Control

Table are active when closed loop boost control are active

Offset Target Tables

Allows the user to define a target change to the Boost Target during the specified functions:

These tables can be expanded into a 3D look up table using any runtime for the axis.

Target Offsets are specific tables and 3 additional user definable tables.

Image Image

Boost Target Clamp Table

Clamps the final Boost Target.

0 kPa or 500.0 kPa= OFF.

Boost Target Table Control

Selects the active control method of the Boost Target Table

  • 0: Not Available
  • 1: ON - Target Table 1
  • 2: ON - Target Table 2
  • 3: ON - Target Table 3
  • 4: Not Available
  • 5: Cal Slot
  • 6: ON - Z-Axis

Boost Target Table Z-Axis Setup

When using Mode 6 in Boost Target Table Control, Boost Target Table Z-Axis Setup becomes available

Blend through the 3 different Boost Target Tables using Emtron available Runtimes.

Image Image

  • 1.000 = Table 1
  • 2.000 = Table 2
  • 3.000 = Table 3
  • 1.750 = 75% of the way between Table 1 and Table 2.

Initial Position Table

Used by the ECU as the main feed forward value to determine the output duty cycle.

This table is used in Open Loop Mode

Image Image

Initial position is the feed forward for Boost Valve Position %, and the closed loop PID if CL is active.

Boost Valve Deadtime is pre-calculated and added to Initial Position.
Push/Pull Solenoid Control will require no/very little initial position.

Compensation Tables

Offset change to the Initial Position table (Duty Cycle %) during the specified functions:

These tables can be expanded into a 3D look up table using any runtime for the axis.

Image Image


Boost Closed Loop Control

For 4 Port Solenoid and Push-Pull Top Port Solenoid Control, it is advised to use much smaller gains to start.

Control Rate

The rate at which the PID control algorithm calculations are performed.

Typical : 25 Hz

Boost Deadband +/-

The output control signal is held constant when the Input Signal (normally MAP) falls within the deadband range of the Setpoint (Boost Target). This helps reduce steady state error and oscillations.

Typical : 2 kPa

Input Filter

Filters the Input signal to help smooth out any pulsations

Note: Input Signal usually MAP.

Typical Value: 5 ( 0 = OFF)

Target Filter

Filters the Target signal to help smooth out any pulsations

Typcial Value: 4 ( 0 = OFF)

Pos/Neg Integral Limit Tables

The minimum or maximum Integral Gain the Boost Control system can apply


Min/Max Duty Tables

The minimum or maximum duty cycle the Boost Control system can apply

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cal Slot Control

Cal Slot Control

This function in an extremely powerful feature which allow the user to customize special calibration slots.

There are 4 calibration slots available.

There are 4 Calibration slots which the user may configure. The cal slot is controlled through the 3D user table “Cal Slot Control”. Below is a simple example of how the cal slots could be switched. In this case AN Volt1 has been configured on the X axis. If AN Volt 1 is between 0.0V and 1.49V then Cal Slot 1 will be selected. If AN Volt 1 is between 1.50V and 2.49V then Cal Slot 2 will be selected and so on.

Image Image

The corresponding table must be configured to be Cal Slot controlled. In this case the Fuel Tables will be configured to be controlled by the Cal Slot.

Image Image

Below is the Cal Config table. This is where the tables are linked to the Cal Slot. In the below example Table 1 is used no matter what Cal Slot is selected.

Image Image

The slot positon is defined by the setup of the Cal Slot Control table.

The Cal Slot Control table can be expanded into a 3D axis and any runtimes can be used to select each slot. This can be setup to use simple digital switch inputs, rotary position sensors, and/or any other runtime the user needs. This includes live runtime data that can aid in “automatic” cal switching.

Examples table axis:

Simple digital input

Rotary position switch

Analog voltage input

Temperature runtimes

Dual tune enable runtimes

Engine load runtimes

Image Image

The above example looks at Dual Tune Enable switch as a condition for the Y axis, but the slot position is still dependant on Throttle Position on the X axis. If the engine is throttled past 20%, the ECU will automatically switch back to Cal Slot 1.

In order for the Cal Slot configuration to work properly, under all Table Controls (see Table Control) being used, “Cal Slot” must be selected

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Cam Control

VVT Cam Control

VVT Cam Control Setup

All Emtron ECU’s can support variable camshaft position control (VVT – Variable Valve Timing). Up to 4 Cam Control channels can be configured depending on the ECU model (two intake, two exhaust).

Select the control system and appropriate outputs:

Config View -> Function Setup -> Engine Functions -> Cam Control

OFF = Function is switched off and the selected output channels are deallocated.

ON = Function is switched on.

Function Type

Choose the supported VVT system from the list.

Output Channel Selection

All Emtron outputs can be configured for Cam Control, however standard Aux Channels should be prioritized for this. Most of Emtron Aux Channels are flexible in regards to output polarity as well (dependant on VVT system being used. All Cam Control systems used closed loop position control - see Cam Switch for open loop control)

  • Sl4/SL8 - Aux 1 – 8 Low side, Aux 5 – 8 High side, Aux 9 – 10 Half bridge
  • KVx Rev 1 - Aux 1 – 8 Low/High side, Aux 9 – 12 Half bridge, Aux 13 – 16 Low side
  • KV8 Rev 2 - Aux 1 – 8, 13 - 16 Low/High side, Aux 9 – 12 Half bridge
  • KV12 Rev 2 - Aux 1 – 8 Low/High side, Aux 9 – 16 Half bridge
  • KV16 Rev 2 - Aux 1 – 8 Low/High side, Aux 9 – 16 Half bridge
Spare fuel and ignition channels are Low side. Prioritize VVT channels to Aux channels.

Channel selection is as follows:

  • Inlet LH - Bank 1 intake camshaft
  • Exhaust LH - Bank 1 exhaust camshaft
  • Inlet RH - Bank 2 intake camshaft
  • Exhaust RH - Bank 2 exhaust camshaft

Driver Type

Select either Low side, or High side depending on the VVT system being used.

See engine wiring schematic. VVT solenoids are normally supplied with constant 12V+ or ground (use opposite control polarity).

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

BMW VANOS

BMW VANOS Support

Early BMW Motorsport VANOS systems were unique. It uses an auxiliary oil pump that boosts operating oil pressure to a constantly regulated 100bar of pressure. The high pressure is used to hydraulically lock the cam position to target during all operating conditions. The design of the system requires two channels per camshaft as there is no default position (ie – Intake retarded position, exhaust advanced position). This means there are separate channels for each camshaft for retard and advance. If the control system is at target, the cams remained hydraulically locked by switching the control system off. Because of the unique mechanical nature of the system, ECU control must be very specific. Emtron has developed a special strategy that mimics the OE function, but allows complete flexibility to enable even more precise control.

BMW Engines that use high pressure BMW Motorsport VANOS

  • BMW S50B30 - Single VANOS intake cam
  • BMW S50B32 - Double VANOS intake and exhaust cam
  • BMW S54 - Double VANOS intake and exhaust cam
  • BMW S62 - Double VANOS intake and exhaust cam (two banks)
USA versions BMW S50B30 (and BMW S52B32) do NOT use BMW Motorsport VANOS.
Later Motorsport models updated VANOS to more conventional control. BMW S65 and BMW S85 use only one output per camshaft like conventional systems.

When selecting these function types, there will be additional options available for choosing the specific channels for retard or advance channels.

Image Image

BMW Motorsport VANOS is driven high side. If the installer chooses to drive low side, the solenoids MUST be modified as the flyback diodes will now allow them to be driven low. Diodes must be reversed or removed.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cam Control - PID

PID Setup

Applicable to both intake & exhaust PID setup

Image Image

The positioning control of the Camshaft(s) is governed by the Emtron PID closed loop function.

Image Image

Intake Deadband +/-

The output control signal is held constant when the Input Signal (Cam Position) falls within the deadband range of the Target.

This helps reduce steady state error and oscillations.

**BMW Motorsport VANOS systems switches off the control signal automatically when in deadband to hydraulically lock the cam position.

Typical : 0.5 degrees

Integral Positive Clamp

Allows the user to set the the maximum Integral gain compensation used by the closed loop system.

Integral Negative Clamp

Allows the user to set the minimum Integral gain compensation used by the closed loop system

Feed Forward

Having a correct feed forward duty cycle value allows for more precise control.

This feed forward value is added to the control signal before the PID is applied.

Image Image

Tuning Tip:

This is the expected duty cycle of the solenoid to hold the camshaft in a given position.

It can be quickly determined by commanding the camshaft to a position & witnessing the required duty to do so.

Commanding an alternative angle will deliver a similar result, the average of these is your feed forward value.

Intake Target Filter

Filters the Target signal to help smooth out any pulsations.

Typical Value: 5 ( 0 = OFF)

VVTiE Base Control Frequency

Toyota 2URFSE/2URGSE VVTiE Base frequency setting at 1000rpm

For PID Exhaust setup

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cam Lockouts

CAM Lockouts

Image Image

Image Image

RPM Lockout

RPM Lockout

Engine speed above which Cam Control is set to become active

Typical : 500 RPM

Engine Temp Lockout

Engine Temp above which Cam Control is set to become active.

Typical : 60 degC

VVT Startup Lockout

Delay timer from Crank RPM Exit before VVT Cam Control is permitted to become active.

This setting helps prevent the Cam Control Solenoid “Rattling” at startup due to low oil pressure.

Typical : 500 RPM

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cam Position Offsets

Image Image

Like Crank Position Offset, the ECU must know the offset position of each Camshaft used for Cam Control as well.

The offset allows the target look up table to either add or subtract desired position based on this entry.

Image Image

To program the Position Offset, the ECU must put the engine into a special mode to return the camshafts to default positions (intake retarded, exhaust advanced).

Generally, this forces the ECU to stop attempting to regulate the camshafts (VVT solenoids OFF).

There are 2 methods to achieve the same goal.

Method 1

Start engine (warm engine)

Set VVT Offset(s) = 1 (ON)

Display VVT Abs Position = choose camshaft to display

Image Image

Under Runtimes (F3, VVT/VVL)

Use absolute position runtimes to populate the offset.

Each position represents either a rising or falling edge per cycle (dependent on edge selection under inputs). Choose the lowest number.

Image Image

Method 2

Image Image

Whilst on the Cam Position Offset page

Start engine (warm engine)

Set VVT Offset(s) = 1 (ON)

Open ECU Runtimes (F3) go to VVT/VVL

Use the VVT target Error to validate the position offset number.

This can be do by simply increasing or decreasing the value until as close to zero error is achieved.

Once completed for each cam, set VVT Offset(s) to = 0 (Off)

Image Image

BMW VANOS Support

Because BMW Motorsport VANOS systems to not return to default positions when the VVT solenoids are OFF, Emtron has a specialized function that will automatically apply a constant duty to the intake retard channels and exhaust advance channels when the Set VVT Offset(s) mode = 1. This allows the user to program the Position Offsets for each camshaft as normal.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cam Switch

Image Image

The Emtron ECU Cam Switch function is a comprehensive function to control simple cam switch solenoids

(VTEC, Lift solenoids, advance/retard solenoids).

Instead of just having standard switch criteria like a simple RPM or load threshold, the Emtron Cam Switch function has a series of setup functions, plus a 3D table to control its activation.

The 3D table should not be mistaken for a PWM duty table – This is not a closed loop control system.

For PWM duty control, use the VVT Cam Control function.

Output Setup

Output Channel Selection

Select open outputs that are appropriate for the type of Cam Switch system you are using

Driver Type

Set Low or High side function

Frequency

There should be no frequency/PWM function enabled for this function. It is a “switch” function only.

Function Setup

Image Image

Image Image

RPM Lockout

RPM above when the Cam Switch can become active. Typically 500rpm.,

Engine Temp Lockout

Temperature above when the Cam Switch can become active. Typically 20 DegC

TP Lockout

Throttle above when the Cam Switch can become active. Typically 10.0%

Oil Pressure Lockout

Oil Pressure above when the Cam Switch can become active. Only applies if Oil Pressure Input Channel has been configured.

Oil Switch Lockout

Used to ensure there is oil pressure when the Cam Switch can become active. Only applies if Oil Pressure Switch Input Channel has been configured.

Speed Channel

Select Speed Channel to be used for Speed Lockout (below)

Speed Lockout

Speed above when the Cam Switch can become active. Typically 5kph.

User Lockout

Allows the Cam Switch function to be locked out by a user function. When the User Function is ON, the lockout is active.

Switch ON -> OFF Hold Timer

When the Output has been commanded to switch OFF, this setting will keep the Output ON for the time entered. Useful for example by allowing the Output to remain ON during gearshift.

Cam Switch Table

This look-up table commands the ECU to switch the Cam Switch Output OFF, ON, or remain unchanged.

Value 0 = Cam Switch OFF

Value 100 = Cam Switch ON

Any number in between 1-99 is hysteresis mode which causes the output to remain unchanged. Typical value used is 50. This prevents the Cam Switch function output toggling ON/OFF when the mapped point is close to the edge of activation.

Image Image

The above picture illustrates an example of how to implement hysteresis in a CAM Switch Table.

  1. RPM Axis. Between 4001 and 4199 there is no output change defined by a Table value of 50. With increasing RPM at 4200 the output will Switch ON defined by a Table value of 100. With Decreasing RPM at 4000 the Output will Switch OFF defined by a Table value of 0. The result is a Hysteresis of 200 RPM

  2. Throttle Position. Between 20.1% and 23.9% there is no output change defined by a Table value of 50. With increasing Throttle at 24.0% the output will Switch ON defined by a Table value of 100. With decreasing Throttle at 20.0% the Output will Switch OFF defined by a Table value of 0. The result is a Hysteresis of 4% Throttle.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Exhaust Cam Angle Target Tables

Exhaust Cam Angle Target Tables

Image Image

Image Image

This is the Exhaust camshaft position command tables where the required camshaft position in degrees is set

Table units start from 0.

Negative numbers represent targeting retarded position of the camshaft.

Exhaust target map = -20 degrees = 20 degrees of exhaust cam retard

**Typically numbers close to 0 represent the least amount of overlap which helps with idling.

Exhaust Cam Angle Target Table 2 can be accessed/activated via Cam Target Table Control

There are a variety of methods of integration available.

Image Image

WARNING

Incorrect setting of the Exhaust Cam Angle Target Table can result in engine damage.

In modified engines, the piston to valve clearance of the engine should be measured.

The maximum safe advance angle should be known prior to setting VVT travel range.

If the valve clearance is compromised within the available travel range a mechanical limit should be employed to prevent contact.

DO NOT rely on closed loop Cam Control to prevent piston to valve contact when there is a mechanical ability to cause contact.

BMW Motorsport VANOS should not be targeted to the fully retarded or advanced position at any point.

This is because the system is designed to hydraulically lock the position once at the target (no solenoid regulation).

If for whatever reason the offset position is not exact (some variance with temp, engine speed, etc), the system could potentially over-regulate the solenoids.

Targeting a few degrees before each end stop is typical and mimics the OE function.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Intake Cam Angle Target Tables

Intake Cam Angle Target Tables

Image Image

Image Image

This is the Intake camshaft position command tables where the required camshaft position in degrees is set

Table units start from 0.

Positive numbers represent targeting advanced position of the camshaft.

Intake target map = +25 degrees = 25 degrees of intake cam advance

**Typically numbers close to 0 represent the least amount of overlap which helps with idling.

Intake Cam Angle Target Table 2 can be accessed/activated via Cam Target Table Control

There are a variety of methods of integration available.

Image Image

WARNING

Incorrect setting of the Intake Cam Angle Target Table can result in engine damage.

In modified engines, the piston to valve clearance of the engine should be measured.

The maximum safe advance angle should be known prior to setting VVT travel range.

If the valve clearance is compromised within the available travel range a mechanical limit should be employed to prevent contact.

DO NOT rely on closed loop Cam Control to prevent piston to valve contact when there is a mechanical ability to cause contact.

BMW Motorsport VANOS should not be targeted to the fully retarded or advanced position at any point.

This is because the system is designed to hydraulically lock the position once at the target (no solenoid regulation).

If for whatever reason the offset position is not exact (some variance with temp, engine speed, etc), the system could potentially over-regulate the solenoids.

Targeting a few degrees before each end stop is typical and mimics the OE function.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Intake/Exhaust Target Offset Tables

Intake/Exhaust Target Offset Tables

These are user defined tables are used to offset the Cam Target.

The tables operate in Absolute values (degrees).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cruise Control

Cruise Control Application Build

1.0 Introduction

The Cruise Control Application Build is available for all Emtron ECUs. This build allows unique application-specific firmware to be installed into the ECU. The strategy involves the ECU managing engine torque (Nm) by calculating the correct throttle area for the target vehicle speed. The speed error is then corrected using a PID controller.

It is important that the throttle body model is calibrated and the engine model is correctly configured. The air flow model using the throttle mass flow calculation (TMF) requires a pressure reference pre and post throttle. In naturally aspirated applications the use of barometric pressure for the pre-throttle channel will be enough to achieve reasonable results; however, it is recommended to install a pressure sensor pre-throttle. Turbocharged applications must run a pre-throttle pressure sensor. Any of the three boost pressure input channels may be used for the pre-throttle pressure.

For further information on Throttle Mass Flow (TMF), refer to the Help Topic “Throttle Mass Flow Setup” in the Emtune software for a detailed explanation on how to configure and tune this system properly. DO NOT attempt to use the Cruise Control function until TMF calibration is complete.

WarningDISCLAIMER Cruise Control is designed to assist the driver and is not a substitute for safe and attentive driving practices. Any failure to follow the directions provided in the Cruise Control Application Build is at the sole risk of the user. Not all vehicle configurations allow the use of Cruise Control due to hardware limitations. Emtron Australia will not be liable for any physical or financial injury, loss or damage arising from the improper use or improper setup of this function.

2.0 Build Setup

The Cruise Control Application Build needs to be enabled by an authorised Emtron dealer before it may be installed into the ECU. Each build is locked to an ECU serial number, then available for installation from the Emtron online server.

2.1 Installation procedure

  1. Internet access is required for the build installation, allowing Emtune to access the Emtron online server.
  2. Connect Emtune to the ECU.
  3. Firmware Version 2.17.0 or later should be used.
  4. Select the File → Build Management menu. A window will open and display all build options.
  5. Select the Cruise Control option which should be listed as INSTALL. Press OK.
  6. The installation process will take 5-10 seconds. A message box will confirm a successful installation.
  7. To further verify the installation and view the status of all available builds, open the Runtime menu (F3) and select the “ECU Internal” tab.
File → Build Management — install the Cruise Control build.

File → Build Management — install the Cruise Control build.

2.2 Uninstall procedure

If the build has been previously installed it can be uninstalled at any time. With internet access and Emtune connected, select File → Build Management, select the Cruise Control option (listed as UNINSTALL), and press OK. The uninstall process takes 5-10 seconds.

3.0 Configuration

For the function to operate correctly the following minimum requirements MUST be adhered to.

3.1 Input Switches

  • Brake Switch
  • Clutch Switch (Manual Transmission with mechanical clutch)
  • Cruise Enable Switch
  • Cruise SET/COAST Switch
  • Cruise RESUME/ACCEL Switch
  • Cruise CANCEL Switch

3.2 Sensors

  • Speed Sensor
  • Boost Pressure Sensor (pre-plate pressure sensor)
  • Inlet Manifold Pressure Sensor (after-plate pressure sensor)
  • Pedal Position Sensor Main
  • Pedal Position Sensor Sub
  • Servo Position Sensor Main
  • Servo Position Sensor Sub

3.3 Hardware

  • Electronic Throttle Body (DBW)
  • Throttle Pedal with two (2) position sensors

3.4 Function Lockouts

The ECU constantly monitors the required channels and will lock out cruise control if one of these is not configured, in fault, or not selected.

Critical Lockouts

  1. X-TMF1 Sensor Before Fault — Sensor in fault or not selected for DBW 1
  2. X-TMF1 Sensor After Plate Fault — Sensor in fault or not selected for DBW 1
  3. X-TMF2 Sensor Before Fault — Sensor in fault or not selected for DBW 2
  4. X-TMF2 Sensor After Plate Fault — Sensor in fault or not selected for DBW 2
  5. X-TMF Disabled — Throttle Mass Flow function is off so Cruise Control is disabled
  6. X-Cruise Enable Sw Config — The Cruise Control Enable (Off/On) switch is not configured
  7. X-Cruise SET Sw Config — Cruise Control Set switch is not configured
  8. X-Cruise RESUME Sw Config — Cruise Control Resume switch is not configured
  9. X-Cruise CANCEL Sw Config — Cruise Control Cancel switch is not configured
  10. X-Cruise No Sw Config — There are no Cruise Control switches configured
  11. X-Speed Source Config — There is no Cruise Speed channel configured
  12. X-Brake Input Config — There is no Brake switch configured
  13. X-Firmware Lockout — Application build is disabled

Non-Critical Lockouts

OFF-Cruise Enable Sw, OFF-Cruise Cancel Sw, OFF-Engine Speed Zero, OFF-Ref Speed Zero, OFF-Limiting Active, OFF-Brake Switch, OFF-Neutral, OFF-Clutch Switch.

The Cruise Control Status runtime will update to indicate which condition is locking out the function.

3.5 Function Enable

Once the Cruise Control Build is enabled, the function needs to be enabled via Config → Functions → Function Output Setup → Vehicle Functions 2 → Cruise Control.

4.0 Tuning System

Calibration of the Cruise Control system is done in the Emtune Tuning View tab: Tuning → Vehicle Function → Cruise Control → Cruise Setup.

4.1 Cruise Setup

  • Cruise Max Target Speed — The maximum target speed that can be set. The ECU clamps to this value.
  • Cruise Resume Speed Incr Ramp Time — The time the ECU will gradually increase the speed target back to the previously “Set” speed after a lockout has been invoked, to achieve a smooth acceleration rate back to the target speed.
  • Cruise Resume Speed Decr Ramp Time — The time the ECU will gradually decrease the speed target back to the previously “Set” speed after a lockout state has been cleared, to achieve a smooth transition back to the target speed.

4.2 Cruise Closed Loop Setup

The system relies on a combination of feedforward TMF torque-based latching coupled with a PID system to control the speed.

  • Cruise Control Speed Channel — Any speed channel in the ECU may be used as the input channel. This is used by the speed target.
  • Cruise Proportional Gain — The gain due to the instantaneous error in speed. Typical value 1.00.
  • Cruise Integral Gain — The gain due to the error with respect to time. Typical value 0.010.
  • Cruise Derivative Gain — The gain due to the rate of change of the error. Typical value 12.00.
  • Cruise Deadband +/- — The speed range which will hold the output. Typical value 0.2 km/h.
  • Cruise Maximum Torque Clamp — The maximum clamp the system can use to attain the target speed. Set to allow the system enough torque to always achieve the target. Typical value 200-300 Nm.
  • Cruise Minimum Torque Clamp — The minimum clamp the system can use to attain the target speed. Usually set to ensure maximum deceleration. Typical value -100 Nm.

The system employs an error counter which is triggered when the Cruise Minimum/Maximum Torque Clamps have been hit. The larger the target error when the torque clamps are latched, the faster the error counter increments. The system shuts down once the counter reaches the pre-determined (non-user-adjustable) value.

Cruise Control closed loop (PID) setup.

Cruise Control closed loop (PID) setup.

4.3 Runtimes

Accessed via the ECU Runtime Menu (F3): Runtime Data → Vehicle Functions → Cruise Control.

Figure 3.0 — Runtime menu, Cruise Control runtimes.

Figure 3.0 — Runtime menu, Cruise Control runtimes.

Cruise Control Status — the current system status:

  • Disabled — System is OFF
  • ON — System is currently active
  • … Waiting SET/RESUME Sw — System is armed but in a lockout state awaiting user input to re-engage
  • Starting-SET Pressed — Set has been pressed and the system will become active. The current speed is loaded as the “Speed Target”
  • Restarting-RESUME Pressed — The system will resume and the last loaded Speed Target will be re-engaged
  • ON – Paused Pedal — The system is active but the driver is inputting a higher throttle area demand than is being requested. Normal operation resumes after the driver input is removed. As this state is controlled by the pedal area demanded, it is important that the “Pedal to Throttle Area Translation Table” has a 0.0 setting in the “Pedal Position Demand” 0% axis.

Other runtimes: Cruise – Torque Target Base (TMF) (the TMF calculated torque value loaded as the base torque reference, converted into a throttle area demand); Cruise – Torque Target Final (TMF) (the PID-adjusted torque output using the base as feedforward); Cruise – Speed Target; Cruise – Speed Input (the actual reported speed); and the switch states Cruise RESUME Sw / SET Sw / CANCEL Sw / ON/OFF Sw (monitor these to confirm correct button assignment).

Appendix A – Bit CAN Message Information (“Cruise Control Status”)

BitStatusBitStatus
0Disabled25OFF-Brake Switch
1ON26OFF-Neutral
2… Waiting SET/RESUME Sw27OFF-Clutch Switch
3Starting-SET Pressed29X-TMF Disabled
4Restarting-RESUME Pressed30X-TMF1 Sensor Before Fault
5ON - Paused Pedal31X-TMF1 Sensor After Fault
20OFF-Cruise Enable Sw32X-TMF2 Sensor Before Fault
21OFF-Cruise Cancel Sw33X-TMF2 Sensor After Fault
22OFF-Engine Speed Zero34X-Cruise Enable Sw Config
23OFF-Ref Speed Zero35X-Cruise SET Sw Config
24OFF-Limiting Active36X-Cruise RESUME Sw Config
37X-Cruise CANCEL Sw Config
38X-Speed Source Config
39X-Brake Input Config
40X-Firmware Lockout

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Differential Control

Overview

The ECU can electronically control a Differential by modulating a solenoid at a fixed frequency and varying duty cycle.

The Differential Control and corresponding output duty cycle is determined by 3 different operating modes. A flow chart in the next section provides a visual overview of how the system works.

1) Handbrake. When this input is configured and the handbrake is ON the ECU applies 0%DC at its control output to unlock the diff. This overrides all other controls.

2) Throttle/Braking Select Table. This controls the selection of either the Throttle tables or Braking tables.

3) Braking Table. Used when the vehicle is under braking conditions.

4) Throttle Table. Used when the vehicle is under normal driving conditions.

Differential Control Status

The following Status information is available from the “Differential Output Status” runtime. This can be viewed from ECU runtime menu, under the Motorsport Tab.

0 = Function is OFF

1 = OFF - Output Channel not selected

2 = ON - Handbrake mode active

3 = ON - Throttle Tables active

4 = ON - Braking Tables active

Throttle/Braking Select Tables

A 3D Table is used to select which Table controls the Duty Cycle to the Differential. This is either the Throttle Table(s) or Braking Table(s).

Table value 0 = Throttle Table(s)

Table value 100 = Braking Table(s)

Any other value = no change (hysteresis) . Normally use a value of 50 for this

There is no interpolation on this table.

This allows for a number of different strategies to control the switching between these two tables.

Examples:

  1. Using Brake Pressure and Speed

Image Image

  1. Using Brake Switch and Speed. 0 = Brake switch OFF, 1 = Brake Switch ON.

Image Image

  1. Using Longitudinal g-force from the ECUs internal accelerometer and Speed. A negative g-force is braking.

Image Image

Braking Tables

When this mode is active 2 tables are used to generate the final Duty Cycle:

  1. Main Braking Table

  2. Braking Offset Table

Example:

Braking Table = 100%

Braking Offset Table = -10%

Final Duty Cycle = 100% -10% = 90 %DC

Throttle Tables

When this mode is active 3 tables are used to generate the final Duty Cycle:

  1. MainThrottle Table

  2. Throttle Offset Table

  3. Steering Angle Offset Table

Example:

Throttle Table = 23%

Throttle Offset Table = -13%

Steering Angle Offset Table. = +8%

Final Duty Cycle = 23% -13% + 8 % = 18 %DC

Control Flow Chart

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Drive By Wire

All KV Series and SL Series ECU’s support from 1 up to 4 independently controlled Drive by Wire (DBW) Systems.

The DBW availability is ECU based and summarized below:

  • Shadow 8 - 1 motor
  • SL4 and SL8 – 1 motor
  • KV8 – 2 motors
  • KV12, KV16 (Rev2) – 4 motors

Select the control system and appropriate outputs from:

Config View -> Function Setup -> Engine Functions -> DBW Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Drive By Wire

Drive by Wire (DBW)

Function Enable

OFF = Function is switched off and the selected output channels are deallocated.

ON = Function is switched on

Image Image

Function Type

4x DBW channels: (3 and 4 channels are only available on KV12/KV16 Serial Number > 1350)

  • Single DBW - Using 2 Half-Bridge Drivers
  • Dual DBW - Using 4 Half-Bridge Drivers
  • 3 Channel - Using 6 Half-Bridge Drivers
  • 4 Channel - Using 8 Half-Bridge Drivers

** See graphic above – Yellow

Output Channel Selection

There are dedicated paired outputs for each DBW channel.

DBW x Motor +ve (Positive) = Auxiliary 9 - 5A Continuous 8A Limit

DBW x Motor -ve (Negative) = Auxiliary 10 - 5A Continuous 8A Limit

OR

DBW x Motor +ve (Positive) = Auxiliary 11 - 5A Continuous 8A Limit

DBW x Motor -ve (Negative) = Auxiliary 12 - 5A Continuous 8A Limit

OR KV12 and KV16 Rev2

DBW x Motor +ve (Positive) = Auxiliary 13 - 10A Continuous 20A Limit

DBW x Motor -ve (Negative) = Auxiliary 14 - 10A Continuous 20A Limit

.

OR KV12 and KV16 Rev2

DBW x Motor + (Positive) = Auxiliary 15 - 10A Continuous 20A Limit

DBW x Motor - (Negative) = Auxiliary 16 - 10A Continuous 20A Limit

** See graphic above – Yellow

NOTE: DBW +ve (Positive) and DBW – ve (Negative) polarity is defined as fully opening the throttle plate when +12V and Ground is respectively applied to these pins.

Driver Type

Select “Half-Bridge Driver” in both the “DBW Motor +” and “DBW Motor – " tabs.

Frequency

In most situations select 2000Hz. A range of 500Hz to 10kHz is available.

NOTE: Select the same frequency in both the DBW Motor + and DBW Motor – tabs for each respective motor.

DBW Relay

This relay will supply +12V to the ECU pin “Aux9-12 " (and/or Aux13-16) which will power the Half-Bridge drivers used to control the DBW Motor.

For safety reasons the DBW system will not operate until an Output Channel has been assigned.

When the ECU detects one of the following system errors the DBW relay will be switched off, shutting the DBW system down.

  • Target Tracking Error
  • Servo Position Tracking Error

Input Servo Position Channels

For safety reasons, there are redundant inputs for pedal position and drive by wire servo position. Once the sensors are setup and calibrated, these positions are used to define the DBW target in closed loop.

Image Image

There are pre-configured functions to help quickly calibrate the pedal position sensors, and throttle position sensors. See

Each DBW Channel has 2 dedicated inputs for Position Feedback. These are:

DBW 1 Channel Position Feedback

DBW 1 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 1 - 16

DBW 1 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 1 – 16

*Or Maximum ANV channel count depending on ECU model

DBW 2 Channel Position Feedback

DBW 2 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 1 - 16

DBW 2 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 1 – 16

DBW 3 Channel Position Feedback

DBW 3 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 1 - 16

DBW 3 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 1 – 16

DBW 4 Channel Position Feedback

DBW 4 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 1 - 16

DBW 4 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 1 – 16

Input Pedal Position Channels

Pedal Position 1 = Analog Volt 1 - 16

Pedal Position 2 = Analog Volt 1 - 16

Sensor Calibration

The positioning sensors for the system must be calibrated like any other sensor. This can be done manually using the Calibration Table or there is an auto calibrate function described below.

Image Image

Auto Calibration of Pedal Sensors

See the following menu: Config View -> Engine Setup -> PPS closed and PPS open calibrate.

Image Image

Throttle Position Input Channel

The Throttle Position Input channel is NOT required in DBW applications as the DBW uses Servo Positions Inputs; the Throttle Position Input channel can be switch OFF.

The ECU will automatically copy the DBW 1 Servo Position Main into the Throttle Position 1 runtime.

This will allow functions requiring this input (gauges, logging, ORFC, Lockouts) to continue working.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW 1/2 Configuration

DBW 1/2 Configuration

Image Image

Image Image

DBW Calibrate Plate

See the following menu: Tuning View-> Engine Functions -> Drive By Wire -> DBW 1/2 (or 3/4) Configuration

The following options are available:

0: Normal DBW Operation

1: TEST Mode ON

2: Calibrate DBW 1 ON

3: Calibrate DBW 2 ON

Modes 2 and 3 will calibrate the Plate Position (Servo Position):

The auto calibrate procedure populates the sensor calibration tables under input channels automatically for both fully closed and fully open positions.

NOTE:

** Will ONLY operate when RPM = 0

** TEST Mode temporarily disables the error checking allow final checks on the system to be performed

** Under no conditions should the vehicle be driven with the DBW system in TEST Mode.

** Calibrate Plate will not be possible where the Servo Position (Sub) reading clamps before complete blade deflection – Manual calibration will be required in this case.

Procedure for calibration:

  1. Select which plate you need to calibrate (DBW1/2, or DBW 3/4)

Input pins for DBW Servo Positions must be enabled and setup correctly.

  1. The ECU will move the throttle plate and calibrate the open and closed positions.

Use the ECU Runtime (F3) -> DBW/Sevro Tab -> DBW 1/2/3/4 - System Status window to view progress.

When the status reads “Calibrate Complete” , the DBW Calibrate Plate setting to can switched to “TEST Mode ON”.

This allows PID plate control but disables ALL tracking and safety features allowing PID calibration.

Image Image

  1. For PID control see Tuning View-> Engine Functions -> Drive By Wire -> DBW Closed Loop Control

Once the PID has been calibrated and the DBW Servo Position inputs are tracking correctly the TEST mode can be disabled.

  1. Select DBW 1/2 Plate Calibration back to Normal mode.

DBW Response Time

The response time is the time from a commanded input change to the output changing.

Typical Time: 8 -12ms

DBW Fault mode

Emtron has an added layer of protection regarding a DBW fault (Servo position tracking, Target error, etc). The user can further define the engine behavior here.

DBW Fault Mode

0: Limit - 2000 RPM Fixed

1: Limp Home Table 1

2: Limp Home Table 2

In the case of a mechanically blocked throttle plate for example, even if the DBW system power supply is shut down, the engine could still run away.

This extra layer of protection allows the ECU to limit the engine RPM as well.

This makes a DBW system used with the Emtron product safer than even a cable operated system in regards to mechanical situation where a throttle is physically blocked open.Throttle Position Input Channel

The Throttle Position Input channel is NOT required in DBW applications as the DBW uses Servo Positions Inputs; the Throttle Position Input channel can be switch OFF.

The ECU will automatically copy the DBW 1 Servo Position Main into the Throttle Position 1 runtime. This will allow functions requiring this input (gauges, logging, ORFC, Lockouts) to continue working.

DBW Engine Stopped Disable

When the engine is stopped (RPM = 0 ) and Pedal Position is < 0.5% the DBW system can be disabled.

(Prevents battery drain with prolonged key-on use)

As soon as a Crank Signal is detected or the pedal moves > 0.5% the system becomes active again.

Pedal Error Tracking Threshold

When the difference between Pedal Position 1 and 2 is greater than the threshold, the ECU determines this to be an error condition and and increments a Error Counter.

The greater the difference, the faster the counter increments.

DBW Shutdown condition occurs when Error Counter reaches 100.

Typical 5.0%

Since the pedal position is validated by redundant inputs, once calibrated the position values can be compared and ultimately shutdown the DBW system if a sensor is failing.

The threshold here can be adjusted for the minimum amount of error needed for Error Tracking to start counting.

Image Image

NOTE"

** Once “Error Tracking” for Pedal Position (PP) or Servo Position (SP) reaches 100%, the DBW system will be shut down and remain shutdown until the ECU power is cycled.

The Error Tracking rate is proportional to error so the bigger the error the faster the counter increments .

Servo Error Tracking Threshold

When the difference between DBW Servo Position Main and Sub is greater than the threshold, the ECU determines this to be an error condition and and increments a Error Counter.

The greater the difference, the faster the counter increments.

DBW Shutdown condition occurs when Error Counter reaches 100.

Typical 5.0%

DBW 1 Servo Position Sub Clamp

Used in applications when the DBW 1 Servo Position Sub signal does not span the full movement of the throttle plate.

Enter in the maximum %Servo Position as seen when the plate is fully open.

Typical applications include the Ford BA/BF/FG where this value is 51.0%

In normally applications set to 100% or

0 = OFF

DBW 2 Servo Position Sub Clamp

Used in applications when the DBW 2 Servo Position Sub signal does not span the full movement of the throttle plate.

Enter in the maximum %Servo Position as seen when the plate is fully open.

Typical applications include the Ford BA/BF/FG where this value is 51.0%

In normally applications set to 100% or

0 = OFF

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW Calibration Guide

Steps to Calibrating and Tuning DBW

  1. Set up Output and Input configuration functions for your ECU type as instructed here -> Drive by Wire (DBW)

  2. Once Inputs and Outputs are set up, select a “Module File” that is closest to your throttle system

Image ImageImage Image

This will pre-populate all basic settings for DBW throttle PID, response time, delay, etc.

  1. Calibrate Pedal, See “Quick Calibrations” here -> Basic Configuration

Validate the Pedal is channels are tracking correctly in Runtimes (F3)

Image Image

  1. Calibrate DBW positions using Auto Calibrate Procedure, See “DBW Calibrate Plate” here -> DBW 1/2 Configuration

Validate the DBW Servo Position channels are tracking correctly in Runtimes (F3)

Image Image

  1. Adjust PID to suit the throttle if is not moving/tracking appropriately -> DBW Closed Loop tables

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW Closed Loop Control - DBW PID Setup

DBW PID Setup

Image Image

Image Image

DBW Deadband +/-

The output control signal is held constant when the Input Signal (Throttle Position) falls within the deadband range of the Target.

This helps reduce steady state error and oscillations.

Typical : 0.2 %TP

DBW 2 Custom PID

If a second DBW servo is used that is of a different type, then the PID can be customized separately.

This enables configuration tables for DBW 2

** Most commonly used when a DBW servo is used for bypassing air for a turbocharged or supercharged vehicle (DBW Air Bleed)

0: OFF

1: ON

DBW Target Filter - Time Constant

Low pass digital filter Time Constant characterizes the speed taken to respond to a step input.

The value entered represents the time (in ms) it takes for the output to reach 63% of the stepped input value.

For example if the step input changed occurred from 0 - 50.0% and the Time Constant was 25ms, the filtered output would reach 31.5% after 25ms.

Tuning DBW PID

DBW servo position is controlled in the Torque Management section -> Pedal Demand.

See Torque Management – Throttle Mass Flow

See Torque Management – Pedal to Throttle Demand

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW Closed Loop tables

DBW Feed Forward %DC Table

Image Image

Emtron uses a Feed Forward Table to provide a base duty for the PID function to operate from.

This allows for very fast response as the ECU has an initial lookup table before any PID is applied.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

DBW Proportional Gain Table

Image Image

Proportional gain controls how aggressive instantaneous correction must be.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

Above is an example where the change Proportional Gain is spanned across Battery Voltage.

DBW Integral Gain Table

Image Image

Integral gain controls how much adaptive correction is needed.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

DBW Derivative Gain Table

Image Image

Derivative gain controls predictive correction where gain is based on the rate of change of error.

This function is used to prevent overshooting targets by looking at a number of factors like rate of change, and P and I gain.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

DBW Min Duty Clamp Table

Image Image

Allows the user to set the minimum duty cycle that can be used by the closed loop system.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

DBW Max Duty Clamp Table

Image Image

Allows the user to set the maximum duty cycle that can be used by the closed loop system.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

DBW Pos Integral Limit Table

Image Image

Allows the user to set the maximum I gain compensation used by the closed loop system.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

DBW Neg Integral Limit Table

Image Image

Allows the user to set the minimum I gain compensation used by the closed loop system.

This table can be expanded into 3D (X axis enabled), and any runtime can be used.

NOTE:

** If using dual DBW, then axis for target errors should be selected as “shared” runtimes. This tells the PID system to look at the respective DBW to apply closed loop gains

Image Image

Tuning DBW PID

The DBW servo position is controlled in the Torque Management section.

The Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Tables control the driver demand translation into throttle area demand.

The relationship between throttle area demand & DBW servo position is validated in Throttle Body Model > Throttle Body Area Table

The Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Table does not relate to DBW servo position directly

To tune the DBW PID, it is useful to reconfigure the target function & zero the Pedal Position Demand Filter

For the purpose of tuning the PID, change the Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Tables and the Throttle Body Area Table to be linear.

This will deliver a 1:1 relationship

Once PID control is validated, return to non linear Pedal to Throttle Area Demand Translation Tables & validate the Throttle Body Area Table

See Torque Management – Throttle Mass Flow

See Torque Management – Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table

See Throttle Body Setup - Throttle Body Area Table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW Input Setup

Filter Settings

FIlter Setting Minimum = 0 (OFF)

FIlter Setting Maximum = 100

Recommended Filter Range = 2 - 5

Single DBW.

When using single DBW the following 4 inputs should be used. Although these inputs have no restrictions on their input assignment, the following is recommended.

DBW 1 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 1

DBW 1 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 2

Pedal Position 1 = Analog Volt 13

Pedal Position 2 = Analog Volt 14

Dual DBW.

When using Dual DBW the following 6 inputs should be used. Although these inputs have no restrictions on their input assignment, the following is recommended.

DBW 1 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 1

DBW 1 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 2

DBW 2 Servo Position Main = Analog Volt 3

DBW 2 Servo Position Sub = Analog Volt 4

Pedal Position 1 = Analog Volt 13

Pedal Position 2 = Analog Volt 14

DBW Pedal Position (PP) Calibration

Two options are available:

  1. Manually enter in the Open and Closed voltages into each Calibration Table. Select Calibration Type to “Custom” and enter the value into the table as shown.

Image Image

  1. Automatic Calibration. Use the PP Closed/Open Calibration menu to automatically set these voltages. This can be access from Config View-> Engine Setup as shown.

When selected the PP1 and PP2 voltages will be written into their corresponding calibration tables. Make sure these channels have an Input Source set before selecting these menus.

These voltages can be viewed be going back to the Input Setup form as shown above.

Image Image.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Engine Protection

Engine Protection

Image Image

Emtron has 4 preset engine protection functions available in the software

Engine Temperature - Engine Temperature Sensor

Oil Pressure - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor (If Fitted)

Fuel Pressure - Fuel Pressure Sensor (If Fitted) - Fuel Pressure 1 Differential Offset runtime is utilised

EGT - EGT Sensors (If Fitted)

Each function must be enabled and cut type selected to become active.

(Fuel or Ignition Cut) - Fuel Cut is recommended

Once active, each function must be defined for correct operation.

Further engine protection can be defined by the user through the use of user functions and or timers.

Fuel Pressure 1 Differential Offset runtime

The Fuel Pressure 1 Differential Offset runtime reports the offset value in kPa between calculated and measured differential pressure.

Fuel Pressure sensor is required

.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Temperature Limit Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Engine Temp Limit

The Engine Temp Limit will become active then Engine Temperature exceeds this value.

Limit Hysteresis

Engine Temperature must return to the (Limit Value - Hysteresis Value) for the “Recovery Hold Time” entered before the Limit is switched OFF.

Engine Speed Limit

Engine speed limit applied when limit is active

Control Range (-/+)

Engine Speed Limit control range in RPM when limit is active

Minimum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the start of the control range.

The cut type is defined in the Function Output.

Maximum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the end of the control range

The cut type is defined in the Function Output.

Post Start Lockout

Will prevent the limit operating during crank and for a time after the engine has started.

Limit Recovery Mode

Controls the limit exit strategy.

Mode 0: Engine Temp < (Target Limit - Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

Mode 1: Engine Temp < Target Limit - Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

AND Engine Speed must have reached the Engine Speed Limit.

0: Mode 0

1: Mode 1

Limit Recovery Hold Time

When the Engine Protection limit is activated a time delay can be applied before the engine can recover.

This to prevent premature engine recovery from an Engine Protection event.

Limit Recovery Cut Time

Allow the cut to be progressively removed from the engine.

User Lockout

Allows the user to Lockout the Limit.

When the selected User Channel is ON a Limit request will still be generated but the engine will not be limited. ie %Cut will be zero.

Used for situations when you want to generate a Limit Request but not actually limit/cut the engine.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Exhaust Temperature Limit Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Engine Speed Limit

Engine speed limit applied when limit is active

Control Range (-/+)

Engine Speed Limit control range in RPM when limit is active

Minimum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the start of the control range.

The cut type is defined in the Function Output.

Maximum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the end of the control range

The cut type is defined in the Function Output

Limit Hysteresis

Exhaust Temperature must return to the (Limit Value + Hysteresis value) for the “Recovery Hold Time” entered before the Limit is switched OFF.

Post Start Lockout

Will prevent the limit operating during crank and for a time after the engine has started.

Limit Recovery Mode

Controls the limit exit strategy.

Mode 0: Exhaust Temperature > (Target Limit Temperature + Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

Mode 1: Exhaust Temperature > (Target Limit Temperature + Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

AND Engine Speed must have reached the value in the Engine Speed Limit setting

0: Mode 0

1: Mode 1

Limit Recovery Hold Time

When the Engine Protection limit is activated a time delay can be applied before the engine can recover.

This to prevent premature engine recovery from an Engine Protection event.

Limit Recovery Cut Time

Allow the cut to be progressively removed from the engine.

User Lockout

Allows the user to Lockout the Limit.

When the selected User Channel is ON a Limit request will still be generated but the engine will not be limited. ie %Cut will be zero.

Used for situations when you want to generate a Limit Request but not actually limit/cut the engine.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Exhaust Temperature Limit Table

Image Image

User defined Exhaust Temperature limit table. Limit is active above Deg C input values.

Exhaust Temperature Limit - Turn ON Delay Table (Sec)

Image Image

User defined limit activation delay table in seconds.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fuel Pressure Limit Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Engine Speed Limit

Engine speed limit applied when limit is active

Control Range (-/+)

Engine Speed Limit control range in RPM when limit is active

Minimum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the start of the control range.

The cut type is defined in the Function Output.

Maximum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the end of the control range

The cut type is defined in the Function Output

Limit Hysteresis

Fuel Pressure must return to the (Limit Value + Hysteresis value) for the “Recovery Hold Time” entered before the Limit is switched OFF.

Post Start Lockout

Will prevent the limit operating during crank and for a time after the engine has started.

Limit Recovery Mode

Controls the limit exit strategy.

Mode 0: Fuel Pressure > (Target Limit Pressure + Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

Mode 1: Fuel Pressure > (Target Limit Pressure + Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

AND Engine Speed must have reached the value in the Engine Speed Limit setting

0: Mode 0

1: Mode 1

Limit Recovery Hold Time

When the Engine Protection limit is activated a time delay can be applied before the engine can recover.

This to prevent premature engine recovery from an Engine Protection event.

Limit Recovery Cut Time

Allow the cut to be progressively removed from the engine.

User Lockout

Allows the user to Lockout the Limit.

When the selected User Channel is ON a Limit request will still be generated but the engine will not be limited. ie %Cut will be zero.

Used for situations when you want to generate a Limit Request but not actually limit/cut the engine.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Fuel Pressure Limit Table

Image Image

User defined Fuel differential offset pressure limit table. Limit is active below the offset kPa input values.

Fuel Pressure 1 Differential Offset runtime value is utilised

Fuel Pressure Limit - Turn ON Delay Table (Sec)

Image Image

User defined limit activation delay table in seconds.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Limp Home Limits

This function provides Engine Speed Limiting when a DTC error occurs on an Input Channel. The operation of these table(s) can be controlled independently from each Input Channel setup page.

Image Image

The following settings are not adjustable:

Start Cut - Set at 50%

End Cut - Set at 95%

Control Range = Set at +200 RPM

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Oil Pressure Limit Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Engine Speed Limit

Engine speed limit applied when limit is active

Control Range (-/+)

Engine Speed Limit control range in RPM when limit is active

Minimum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the start of the control range.

The cut type is defined in the Function Output.

Maximum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the end of the control range

The cut type is defined in the Function Output

Limit Hysteresis

Oil Pressure must return to the (Limit Value + Hysteresis value) for the “Recovery Hold Time” entered before the Limit is switched OFF.

Post Start Lockout

Will prevent the limit operating during crank and for a time after the engine has started.

Limit Recovery Mode

Controls the limit exit strategy.

Mode 0: Oil Pressure > (Target Limit Pressure + Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

Mode 1: Oil Pressure > (Target Limit Pressure + Hysteresis) for the specified Hold Time.

AND Engine Speed must have reached the value in the Engine Speed Limit setting

0: Mode 0

1: Mode 1

Limit Recovery Hold Time

When the Engine Protection limit is activated a time delay can be applied before the engine can recover.

This to prevent premature engine recovery from an Engine Protection event.

Limit Recovery Cut Time

Allow the cut to be progressively removed from the engine.

User Lockout

Allows the user to Lockout the Limit.

When the selected User Channel is ON a Limit request will still be generated but the engine will not be limited. ie %Cut will be zero.

Used for situations when you want to generate a Limit Request but not actually limit/cut the engine.

Example: During a Launch the Oil Pressure may temporally drop below the Limit Target.

            A User Channel can be configured to lockout this limit during the first stages of Launch Control.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Oil Pressure Limit Table

Image Image

User defined oil pressure limit table. Limit is active above kPa input values.

Oil Pressure Limit - Turn ON Delay Table (Sec)

Image Image

User defined limit activation delay table in seconds.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Engine Speed Limits

Engine Speed Limit 1/2/3

Engine Speed Limits/Cuts

The following calculated runtimes are generated by Emtron that are Engine Speed Limit/Cut related (to be further discussed more specifically):

Image Image

** Highest priority Fcut and Highest priority Icut Runtimes will always show the active limit request. It is highly recommended to always have these channels in the ECU logger.

The Limit with the highest percentage cut ALWAYS get priority over other pending limits. This also means any Ignition or Fuel adjustments associated with the function also get priority.

So ONLY 1 limit can be active at any one time.

Functions that can limit the engine are:

  • Engine Speed Limit 1
  • Engine Speed Limit 2
  • Engine Speed Limit 3
  • MAP Limit 1
  • MAP Limit 1
  • Ground Speed Limit 1
  • Ground Speed Limit 2
  • Launch Limit
  • Gear Cut
  • Traction Control Limit
  • Anti-Lag Cut
  • Anti-Lag cool down
  • DBW Safety Limit
  • Limp Home Limit 1
  • Limp Home Limit 2

Example. RPM limit is currently active.

RPM LImit 1 = 60% Cut

RPM Limit 1 Ignition retard = 15 Deg

Then get a Gear Cut request is generated:

Gear Cut = 90% Cut

Gear Cut Ignition retard = 20 Deg.

The ECU will stop the RPM limit1, remove the 15 degree of retard, activate a 90% cut and apply 20 degrees retard.

RPM Limit Function Setup

Emtron has three different RPM Limiters and four different methods for each

  • Config, Function Setup, Engine Functions, RPM Limit 1/2/3

Select the cut type and order of priority for each RPM limit function

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Speed Limiter Setup

Engine Speed Limiter Setup

Cut Pattern

Select the cut pattern type

.

0: Random Pattern 1

1: Random Pattern 2

2: Sequential Pattern 1

3: Sequential Pattern 2

Ign Retard Mode

Applies the Ignition Retard as either an Offset or Percentage of Base Angle (Table value)

Example: Current Ignition Angle = 25.0 BTDC

Offset = 15.0 Deg Retard. Ignition Angle During

Limiting = 25.0 - 15.0 = 10.0 Deg BTDC

Percentage = 50.0 % Retard.

Ignition Base Angle = 20.0 Deg.

Ignition Angle During Limiting = 20 - 50% x 20.0 = 10.0 Deg BTDC

(assuming no other Ignition trims)

Control Range

Control Range (-/+) RPM Units

The Control Range applies to the Min/Max % Cut values

Example :

Min % Cut Clamp 10%

Max % Cut Clamp 90%

Control Range -200rpm

RPM Limit 7000rpm

At 6800rpm the engine will begin its cut routine at the Min % Cut Clamp of 10%

At 7000rpm the engine will finish its cut routine at the Max % Cut Clamp of 90%

Minimum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the start of the control range.

Maximum %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine at the end of the control range.

NOTE: Maximum Cut MUST be > Minimum Cut

Hard Limit Adder

Used in Limit types 2 and 3.

Added to the start on the limit and determines the point at which a 100% cut will be applied.

Example:

Limit Type = 2 (Fuel Cut + Ign Hard Cut)

RPM Limit = 7000

Control Range = -200 RPM

Hard Limit Adder = 180 RPM

Fuel %cut Engine Limiting starts at 6800 at the Minimum %Cut

Fuel %cut Engine Limiting ends at 7000 at the Maximum %Cut

Ign 100% cut occurs at 6980 RPM and above.

dRPM Gain

Compensates for a fast rate of change in engine speed by reducing the limit value.

Used to prevent the engine pushing through the limit.

Locked out when dRPM < 2000 RPM/sec.

A Gain of 100 will reduce the limit by 100 RPM for every dRPM 1000 RPM/sec over the 2000 start threshold.

Example 1:

dRPM Gain = 100

RPM limit = 6500

dRPM = 3000 RPM/sec

New RPM Limit = 6500 - 100 = 6400

Example 2:

dRPM Gain = 100

RPM limit = 6500

dRPM = 4000 RPM/sec

New RPM Limit = 6500 - 200 = 6300

0 = OFF

Ignition Retard

The amount of Ignition Retard applied during limiting.

There are 2 modes :

  • Offset (Deg)

  • Percentage (%)

Post Start Lockout

Will prevent the limit operating during crank and for a time after the engine has started.

Useful when channels like oil pressure are assigned to an RPM limiter function.

** Using the Engine Protection Control function is highly recommended instead

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

RPM Limit - Turn ON Delay Table

RPM Limit - Turn ON Delay Table

Table in which you can set the delay for the RPM limit

Units in Seconds

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

RPM Limit - User 1/2 Offset Table

RPM Limit - User 1/2 Offset Table

Table in which you can offset the main RPM limit table +/-15000 RPM.

Span this table using any Emtron calculated runtime like Rotary Position, Race Timer, User Timer, etc.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

RPM Limit Table

RPM Limit Table

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Start Control

Overview

This function controls both Engine Starter Function output and Immobiliser Function.

The Engine Start Function will switch an Output ON to start the engine cranking. The ECU Output would normally be connected to the Starter Relay. Once the ECU determines the engine is running the relay will be switched OFF.

NOTE: Both an Input and Output Channel MUST be selected for the Engine Start function to work.

The Immobiliser Function prevents Fuel and Ignition occurring while the Immobiliser Function is active. An Output can also be configured to further enhance this function. For example you might want to inhibit the starter relay operating.

Engine Start Function

Input Channel

One of two Inputs can be configured to control this function:

  • Start/Stop Switch. (See Config View -> Input Pins Setup -> Switches Tab). With this Input the Switch can Start and Stop the Engine
  • Start Position Switch. (See Config View -> Input Pins Setup -> Switches Tab). This Switch will ONLY Start the engine.

Output Channel

1. Starter Relay Output - Input Switch Configured as “Start/Stop Switch”:

  • When the engine speed is zero and the button is pressed the ECUs interprets this as a request to START the engine. At this point the ECU will switch ON the Starter Relay. During the “Cranking Timeout” period the ECU will monitor Engine Speed and when it exceeds the “Engine Started RPM” the Starter Relay will be switched OFF. If the “Cranking Timeout” period is reached and the engine has not started the Starter Relay will be switched OFF.
  • When the engine is running and the button is pressed the ECUs interprets this as a request to STOP the engine. The ECU will switch OFF Fuel and Ignition until the Engine Speed has reached zero.

2. Starter Relay Output - Input Switch Configured as “Start Position Switch”:

  • When the engine speed is zero and the button is pressed the ECUs interprets this as a request to START the engine. At this point the ECU will switch ON the Starter Relay. During the “Cranking Timeout” period the ECU will monitor Engine Speed and when it exceeds the “Engine Started RPM” the Starter Relay will be switched OFF. If the “Cranking Timeout” period is reached and the engine has not started the Starter Relay will be switched OFF.

This mode is more used in Motorsport applications. The Start Button starts the engine and the Main kill switch is used to shut the engine down and disconnect power from all systems.

NOTE: In this Mode the Switch CANNOT be used to STOP the engine when it is running. It is a Start ONLY function. However, there is a safety feature build; when the engine is cranking if engine needs to be stopped, pressing the Start button again will stop the engine cranking.

Immobiliser Function

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Shift Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Gear Shift Control

Downshift DBW Position

Downshift DBW Position

Sets the throttle position target that the DBW throttle will move to during the down shift.

This is an absolute position of the DBW Servo.

** This position will override other torque management functions regarding throttle control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Ignition Retard

Downshift Ignition Retard

This is the amount of Ignition Retard applied during the entire Downshift event

There are 2 modes :

  • Offset (Deg)

  • Percentage (%)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Next Gear Ignition Recovery Time

Downshift Next Gear Ignition Reovery Time

This is the total time the ignition retard will be phased back to 0.

Resolution = 1ms

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Next Gear Solenoid Hold Time

Downshift Next Gear Solenoid Hold Time

This is the time the Solenoid stays ON once next gear stable has been achieved .

Resolution = 1ms

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Pre-Cut Time

Downshift Pre-Cut Time

Engine Pre-Cut Time

Normally only required when the Throttle is held open on a downshift request. The Pre-cut allow the gearbox dog to be unloaded before the Downshift solenoid is switched ON. This allows the servo to be position before the power is re-applied for the downshift blip

0 = OFF

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Request Enable Table

Downshift Request Enable Table

The Table output must be Enabled allowing the Downshift request to be valid.

(set to 100 if not required)

0 = Shift Request Disabled

100 = Shift Request Enabled

50 = No Change

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction

Downshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction

This table controls adjusts the Rev-Match RPM Target +/- in units of %.

Use this to raise or lower the Rev-Match RPM Target

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Setup

Downshift Debounce Time

The Downshift Paddle must be held for this time for the request to be valid.

This setting prevents accidental requests in harsh Motorsport

environments (vibration and vehicle harmonics).

Downshift Torque Reduction Type

0: Fuel Cut Only

1: Ign Cut Only

2: Fuel + Ign Cut

3: Off

\

Downshift Ign Retard Mode

0: OFF

1: Offset

2: Percentage

Applies the Ignition Retard as either an Offset or Percentage of Current Ign Angle

Example: Current Ignition Angle = 20.0 BTDC

Offset = 15.0 Deg Retard.

Ignition Angle during Gear Cut is = 20.0 - 15.0 = 5.0 Deg BTDC

Percentage = 50.0 % Retard.

Ignition Angle During Cut : = 20 - 50% x 20.0 = 10.0 Deg BTDC

Downshift Pre-Cut Percentage Cut

Fuel and/or Ignition Cut Percentage used in the Downshift Precut.

Downshift Throttle Override

0: OFF

1: DBW 1 - Duration Table

2: DBW 1 - Function Controlled

3: Throttle Solenoid - Duration Table

4: Throttle Solenoid - Function Controlled

This setting overrides or “blips” the thottle on downshift .

Duration Table is Open Loop mode and used to control the length of time the DBW or Solenoid is held open.

Function Controlled is Closed Loop so the Gearshift

Function is used to control the length of time the DBW or Solenoid is held open.

The goal is to increase the airflow into the engine to match the engine speed of the requested downshift gear.

NOTE: The Rev-matching Limit setting can also be switched ON, which limits the engine to the correct rpm assuming enough air has benn introduced into the engine.

Downshift Rev-Matching Limit

0: OFF

1: ON - Outputshaft Speed

2: ON - Outputshaft Speed Calculated

Rev-matching Downshift Function will Limit the engine RPM to match the requested Downshift gear. The ECU uses Output shaft RPM and Transmission ratios between the current gear and requested gear to calculate a Rev-matched RPM Target.

i.e. Matching Transmission Input and Output speed referenced by Gear Ratio

Make sure the “Downshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction “table is setup/Initialised correctly

You also MUST introduce extra air into the engine either by using the DBW or a solenoid to manual open the throttle.

(Select this from the Downshift Throttle Override setting)

Example:

Current rpm = 6000, In 4th gear and downshifting to 3rd

Gear ratio 4th = 1.000

Gear ratio 3rd = 1.230

Target Downshift Engine Speed RPM = 6000 x 1.230/1.000

Target Downshift Engine Speed RPM = 7380

So the ECU will Limit the Engine Speed to 7380 assuming sufficient air has been introduced

NOTE: The Gear Ratio Table MUST be completed for this function to operate correctly. See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu.

Downshift Rev-Match Control Range (-/+)

Example:

Rev-match RPM Target = 4000

Min Cut = 0%

Max Cut = 95%

  1. Range = +500 0RPM,

Engine Speed: 4000 RPM = 0% Cut, 4500 RPM = 95% Cut

  1. Range = -500 RPM (Recommended)

Engine Speed: 4000 RPM = 95% Cut, 3500 RPM = 0% Cut

Downshift Rev-Match End Timeout

Once DBW has returned to within 5% of the Target this timeout gets applied. When Time = 0 the Rev-match limit is then removed.

ONLY applies to DBW applications.

Downshift Next Gear Timeout

The Next Gear MUST be reached within this time for the Downshift to be valid. If this does not occur the ECU will re-try the gear shift by the number of times set in the Upshift “Downshift Re-retry Count” Setting.

Time starts when Downshift Solenoid is switched ON.

Typical Value = 100ms

Downshift Re-Try Count

The number of time the ECU will re-attempt a failed Gear Shift.

ONLY Applies when Electronic(Paddle) mode selected

Typical Value = 3

Downshift Stacking Limit

Sets the maximum number of Upshift Requests that can be stacked.

0 =OFF

Downshift Min Engine Speed

The Engine Speed MUST be less than this value for the Downshift request to be valid

0 = OFF

Downshift Min Throttle

The Throttle Position MUST be less than this value for the Downshift request to be valid

0 = OFF

Downshift Max Pedal

The Pedal Position 1 max position for Dowshift request to be valid

0 = OFF

Downshift User Enable

The User Channel when selected must be ON

for the Downshift request to be valid.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Downshift Force Hysteresis

Prevents Gearshift re-triggering.

Example:

Gear Force Positive = 8kg

Downshift Force Hysteresis = 60%

Downshift will be triggered when Gear Force > 8kg.

Once complete the Gear force will not be allowed to trigger the Gearshift until it falls below 60% of 8kg ..ie Force MUST be less than 3.2Kg (8- 4.8)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Solenoid Delay

Downshift Solenoid Delay

This is the length of time from the initial Downshift Request to when the Downshift Solenoid is switched ON.

Resolution = 1ms

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Downshift Throttle Duration

Downshift Throttle Duration

  • Sets the Duration of the DBW throttle position change when Force is used

  • Sets the Timeout of the DBW throttle position change when Paddle shift is used

** This position will override other torque management functions regarding throttle control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Cut End Source

Gear Cut End Source

This setting controls the way the cut is to be ended once triggered. The following settings are available :

0: Timed Setting uses the Cut Time Table to

control the Cut length

1: “Clutch Switch” Status changing to OFF ends

the Cut

2: “Gear Cut Switch” Status changing to OFF ends

the Cut

3: If Positive Force Started the cut, the cut End

will occur when the Force is less than the

Postive Force Threshold - Gear Cut Force Hysteresis.

The inverse applies for a Negative Force Start Cut

Example:

Force Threshold = 8.0kg

Gear Cut Force Hysteresis = 3.0kg

Start Cut at > 8.0 kg

End Cut at < 5.0 kg

Force Threshold = -6.0kg

Gear Cut Force Hysteresis = 3.0kg

Start Cut at > -6.0 kg

End Cut at < -3.0 kg

NOTE: “Gear Cut Start Source” MUST be

selected as 2 (Gear Shift Force) for this setting

to work

4: Next Gear Stable will determine the cut time. Once

the next gear is confirmed the ECU will initiate a cut end

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Cut Ign Retard Mode

Gear Cut Ign Retard Mode

Applies the Ignition Retard as either an

Offset or Percentage of Current Ign Angle

Example: Current Ignition Angle = 20.0 BTDC

Offset = 15.0 Deg Retard.

Ignition Angle during Gear Cut is

= 20.0 - 15.0 = 5.0 Deg BTDC

Percentage = 50.0 % Retard.

Ignition Angle During Cut :

= 20 - 50% x 20.0 = 10.0 Deg BTDC

0: Offset

1: Percentage

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cut Level Recovery Time Table

Cut Level Recovery Time Table

The total time that the cut will be phased back to 0.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Cut Start Source

Gear Cut Start Source

This is the source ECU uses to trigger the cut for gear shift. There are three methods that can be selected :

0: Digitial Input set to Clutch Switch

This setting will allow the system to trigger by “Clutch.Switch” input.

1: Digitial Input set to Gear Cut Switch

This setting will allow the system to trigger by “Gear Cut Switch” Input. Commonly this signal is supplied by a gear shifter mounted switch

2: Gear Shift Force

This setting will allow the system to trigger by “Gear Shift Force” Input. Commonly this signal is supplied a gear shift mounted amplified strain gauge output. This is generally the best method for triggering but does require hardware which can provide the ECU a voltage output based on the force.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cut Level Table

Cut Level Table

This is the engine cut % applied when gear cut it active

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cut Time Table

Cut Time Table

This table sets the cut time if the “Gear Cut End Source” is set

to “Timed”

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Cut Timeout Table

Cut Timeout Table

Time in seconds that the cut time will be clamped to. No matter what

setting is configured the total cut time will be limited by the ECU to

this time.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Detection Setup

Gear Detection Setup

Gear Position Enable

Enables the Gear Detection

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Gear Position Calculation

Choose the method of Gear Position Calculation

Image Image

Various modes are available.

0 = Gear Position Voltage 1 - Input must be assigned and calibrated

1 = RPM/Speed Ratio - Gear is derived by RPM/speed channel defined (Under Gear Position RPM/Speed Setup)

2 = CAN Bus - Gear is received over CAN bus

3 = Inputshaft/Outputshaft Ratio - Gear is derived by calculating ratio of inputshaft/outputshaft speed

4= Gear Position Voltage 2 - Input must be assigned and calibrated

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Detection

Gear Detection

Emtron has various methods of Gear Detection. See -> Gear Detection Setup

Proper gear detection and channel calculation such as Input shaft Speed (Calc) are important for functions in the ECU such as Motorsport Gearshift control (regarding rev matching control), some Application Build systems (CAN Integration), and other general functions in the ECU that may be being used.

Input/Outputshaft Speed Calculations

Inputshaft speed Calculated can be derived from looking at Outputshaft Speed Channels -> Vehicle Dynamics -> Inputshaft Speed Calculated

Image Image

“1” Output Shaft Speed Calculated is derive from selecting a calibrated speed channel. -> Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics -> Outputshaft Speed Calculated

Image Image

** The ECU generates this channel by deriving the speed through the wheel circumference and final drive under Vehicle Dynamics -> Vehicle Main Setup ->

Image Image

The Inputshaft speed is calculated furthermore through the Transmission Ratio Table. Vehicle Dynamics -> Transmission Gear Ratio Table ->

Image Image

Validating Inputshaft speed (Calc) channel

To validate Inputshaft speed (Calc), logging engine speed vs Inputshaft Speed (Calc) can be plotted ->

Image Image

Also by looking at runtimes for channel comparisons can be done ->

Image Image

** Note Gear Ratio (Input/Outputshaft) (calculated from Input shaft speed (Calc) vs Output shaft Speed (Calc) vs Gearbox Ratio (Transmission Ratio tabe) is the same

** Note Clutch Slip Channels are near 0% (calculated % difference between Engine Speed and Clutch Slip Source Channel)

(define clutch slip in Tuning -> Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics -> Clutch Slip = Currently Set to Inputshaft Speed Calculated)

** If there is error in Input shaft Speed (Calc) vs Engine Speed (therefore there will be error in Gear Ratio (Input/Outputshaft) and Clutch Slip), then settings/calibration needs attention in regards to speed sensor calibration, wheel diameter, final drive, or transmission ratios

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Force Negative

Gear Force Negative

This is the negative force required to trigger a cut event if

this “Gear Cut Start Source” is configured to “Gear Shift Force”

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Force Positive

Gear Force Positive

This is the positive force required to trigger a cut event if

this “Gear Cut Start Source” is configured to “Gear Shift Force”

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fault Mode Cut Time

Fault Mode Cut Time

Gearshift Mode:

This table sets the open loop cut time when the system is in fault mode.

(For example Gear Position sensor has failed or Gear Position Tracking Error)

Gearcut Mode:

This table sets the cut time if the “Gear Cut End Source” is set to “Timed”

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear Shift Control

Gearshift Control Function Setup

Emtron has multiple methods of Gearshift Control

  • Config, Function Setup, Motorsport, Gearshift Control

Mechanical - Manual Shift (Force)

Electronic - Paddle

There are also other CAN BUS Triggered modes for Application Build versions.

** See those Application Build Manuals for details

Image Image

  • Configure Gear Position using the “Gear Detection Voltage” channel . This is normally a barrel position sensor located on the sequential gearbox. See Config View -> Inputs -> Vehicle Tab
  • Configure the Inputs. Configure the following from the Inputs -> Motorsport tab:

Paddle Shift mode

    • Upshift Paddle Input
    • Downshift Paddle Input
    • Reverse Lockout Switch if required
    • Compressor Pressure Input if required

In Force Shift mode

    • Gearshift Force Input

Image Image

  • For Paddle Shift to function correctly and safely at least least two(2) gear channel needs to be tracked for redundancy purposes. Commonly a Gear Detection voltage will be reported from a gear drum mounted to the transmission along with a speed sensor which may be used by the ECU to calculate the gear along with generating Engine Speed requests fro rev-matching limiters. The vehicles wheel diameter and final drive ratio should be confirmed correct. Then enter the correct transmission gear ratios into the table :

    See Vehicle Dynamics->Vehicle Main The gear ratio table needs to be accurately set for this to occur.

. See Tuning view -> Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu -> Transmission Gear Ratio table. Use -1 for Reverse.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear-Shift-Down-Shift-Flow

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gear-Shift-Up-Shift-Flow

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Compressor Setup

Gearshift Compressor Setup

Gearshift Comp Pressure Target

Pressure Target for Compressor. The Output will be switch off when the pressure is reached.\

Gearshift Comp Pressure Hysteresis

This value is subtracted from the Pressure Target and determines when the Output will be switched back ON.

Pressure Target = 150.0 PSI

Pressure Hysteresis = 10.0 PSI

The Pump will stay ON until 150.0 PSI is reached. The Pump will then turn OFF. When the pressure drops to 140 PSI to pump will switch back ON\

Gearshift Comp Voltage Lockout

The Gearshift Compressor Output will be switched OFF below this Voltage. Used normally to switch OFF the Compressor to prevent battery drain in Low Voltage situations.

0 = OFF\

Gearshift Comp RPM Lockout

The Gearshift Compressor Output will be switched OFF below this Engine Speed. Used normally to switch OFF the Pump during low RPM and cranking.

0 = OFF

Typical Value = 400 RPM

Gearshift User Lockout

The Gearshift Compressor Output will be switched OFF when the User Channel is ON/Active.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Gearshift Comp Timeout

With the Compressor ON, if the Target pressure cannot be reached within this timeout value the Output will be switched OFF. The timer will only be reset when the Lockouts become active OR the Re-try Interval is reached/used.

0 = OFF

Typical Value = 30secs

Gearshift Comp Re-try Interval

In the event the Timeout is reach and the output is switched OFF the system will switch the ouput back ON at this interval in an attempt to keep system pressure. This event normally occurs when the feedback input fails.

0 = OFF

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Compressor Status

0    Disabled    

1    OFF    

2    ON    

3    OFF - RPM Lockout    

4    OFF - User Lockout    

5    OFF - Timeout    

6    OFF - I/P not selected    

7    OFF -  Input in Fault    

8    OFF - Voltage Lockout    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Control Status

0    Disabled    

1    OK    

2    X Gear I/P Fault - Open Loop     

3    X Gear Position Setup Err    

4    X Gear Request Setup Err    

5    X Gear Voltage Input OFF    

6    X Gear Cut Func ON    

7    X Rev-match set Gear Ratios    

8    X Missing UpShift Output    

9    X Missing DownShift Output    

10    X Missing UpShift Input    

11    X Missing DownShift Input    

12    X Missing Force Input    

13    X Timeout Setting LOW    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Control Tuning

Gearshift Control Tuning

The first step in the tuning section of the function is to setup the gear request input method.

…………..

Gearshift Compressor Setup

Tuning View -> Motorsport Functions -> Gearshift Control -> Gearshift Compressor Setup

Image Image

Gearshift Comp Pressure Target

The target compressor pressure represented in kpa. The transmission manufacturer should be able to advise on the maximum pressure to operate with however common settings are between 600-800kpa.

Gearshift Comp Pressure Hysteresis

The amount the compressor pressure needs to drop below the target before the compressor is switched back on. Ideally the supply pressure should be kept as constant as possible for consistent shift performance.

Gearshift Comp Voltage Lockout

Minimum ECU supply voltage to allow the compressor to operate.

Gearshift Comp RPM Lockout

Minimum Engine Speed to allow the compressor to operate. This is usually set to reduce battery load while the vehicle supply is powered.

Gearshift Comp User Lockout

A user channel may be used to lockout the compressor if the default lockouts are not satisfactory for the application.

Gearshift Comp Timeout

If the compressor target is not reached within this time the ECU will assume there must be a fault in the system. Most common faults would be a leak or faulty compressor motor.

Gearshift Comp Re-Try Interval

Once the compressor pressure target is not reached within the time out the ECU will wait for the re-try interval and attempt to turn on the compressor again.

Upshift Setup

Tuning View -> Motorsport Functions -> Gearshift Control -> Upshift Control -> Upshift Setup

Image Image

Upshuft Cut Type

This sets the type of cutting used for gearshift control.

Fuel Cut Only

This system will cause a slower recovery of the engine from the cut leading to longer overall effective shift times. The will lead to quieter operation on the gearshift due to lack of unburnt fuel in the exhaust to ignite.

Ignition Cut Only

This system will cause very fast recovery as the fuel film does not require rebuilding after the shift recover. Depending on the tuning strategy and hardware careful consideration needs to be taken when choosing this cutting method. Unburnt fuel igniting in the exhaust can lead turbocharger and exhaust damage. Valve train needs to be considered also when choosing this system.

Fuel + Ign Cut

This system employs a combination of both fuel and ignition cutting strategies. This system is generally the most favored method as there is a lot of flexibility with the cut strategy balance.

Upshift Throttle Override

The ECU can override the DBW throttle position during and Upshft event. Generally for the fastest shifting performance cutting and retard strategies alone will allow will achieve the best results. During low traction surface shifting is can be possible to help unload the dog by closing the throttle during the shift.

Upshift Rev-matching Limit

This setting toggles the rev matching feature. The ECU can perform a user level cut strategy which then leads into the Engine Speed Limit rev-matching strategy. It is advised to always have this feature enabled for best performance.

Upper Rev-match Control Range (+/-)

This is the range the Engine speed limit controls the cut %. For upshift this should be a positive(+ve) number. 400rpm is a good starting range. Once the engine is within 400rpm of the ECU calculated rev-match target cut will commence.

Upshift Re-Try Count

The ECU employs a strategy of retrying the shift if it is deemed to have either failed or will fail based on a the in coming sensor data.

Upshift Next Gear Timeout

This is the timeout allowed for the upshift event to occur in total. All cutting and instructions should have completed within this time. If the gear has failed to achieve a shift and upshift counter will increment. All retries would have occurred within this timeout.

Upshift Stacking Limit

The ECU has the ability to increment a shift request counter for the purpose of “stacking” shifts. This number limits the amount of shifts that can be stacked. When the conditions are satisfied a shift will occur and the stack count will decrement until the count reaches zero.

Upshift Min Engine Speed

Upshift Min Throttle

Upshft Min Pedal

Upshift User Enable

Downshift Setup

Rev-matching describes the process of matching engine speed to the gear you are shifting into/requested gear. With Downshifting the Engine Speed must be increased so additional air needs to be introduced with the ECU supporting a variety of methods. This reduces stress on the drive-line.

The Downshift setting can be found in the Tuning View -> Motorsport Functions -> Gearshift Control -> Downshift Control menu.

Image Image

Downshift Cut Type

This setting is used in 1) The Pre-Cut Downshift function which allows the “dog” to be unloaded 2) For Rev-Matching

Downshift Throttle Override

Allows additional air to be introduced into the engine on downshift. There are 5 options:

0: OFF

1: DBW 1 - Duration Table

2: DBW 1 - Function Controlled

3: Throttle Solenoid - Duration Table (Non DBW application)

4: Throttle Solenoid - Function Controlled (Non DBW application)

The “Duration Table” is an open loop control. A table is used to enter in the length of time the Downshift Throttle Override will be active

“Function Controlled” allows the ECU to dynamically change the Throttle Override time based on the functions state. For example as the Gearshift “Next-Gear Stable” time varies, the ECU dynamically adjusts the Throttle Override time to match.

NOTE: You can use this function with the Rev-matching OFF. However, there is nothing limiting the engine speed so caution should be used when setting the amount of additional air introduced into the engine.

Downshift Rev-matching Limit

The Downshift Rev-matching Limit function will Limit the engine RPM to match the requested downshift gear. The ECU uses the transmission gear ratios between the current gear and requested gear to calculate a Rev-matched RPM Limit Target.

Make sure the Downshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction table is setup correctly. Initialise to 0% for first time setups.

Additional air MUST also be introduced into the engine, either by using the DBW or a solenoid to manual open a cable throttle. The ECU will control this with options available in the Downshift Throttle Override setting.

Downshift Rev-Match Cut Control Range

Controls the RPM Range over which the engine will be cut when the Downshift limit is active. The Min Cut and Max Cuts are locked respectively at 0% and 95%

Example:

Rev-match RPM Target = 4000

Min Cut = 0%

Max Cut = 95%

  1. Range = +400 0RPM,

Engine Speed: 4000 RPM = 0% Cu

Engine Speed: 4400 RPM = 95% Cut

  1. Range = -400 RPM (Recommended)

Engine Speed: 4000 RPM = 95% Cut

Engine Speed: 3400 RPM = 0% Cut

Downshift Rev-Match End Timeout

The Rev-match Limit will be removed once the DBW has returned to within 5% of its normal position. This Timeout allows additional time for the system to stabilize before the limit is removed. If this setting is required typical times range from 10 - 50ms.

NOTE: This setting ONLY applies to DBW applications. If not used set to zero.

Downshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction Table

Applies a percentage correction to the calculated Rev-Match Target. The range is +/- 100%.

Example:

Rev-match RPM Target = 4000

Driver Torque Demand = 25Nm

Based on the below table the %Correction is 5%.

Final Rev-match RPM Target = 4000 x 1.05 = 4200 RPM

Image Image

Downshift DBW Override Position Table

Sets the Servo Position target that the DBW will move to during the downshift. This is an absolute position. The below table shows a typical 4 cylinder engine example.

Image Image

Downshift DBW/Throttle Override Duration Table

The length of time the air override system is introducing additional air during the downshift. This can be a Solenoid pushing on a cable throttle or DBW. This table is only enabled when the Downshift Throttle Override setting is non-function controlled i.e. Open Loop Duration Table as shown below.

Image Image

Image Image

Final Example

In 4th gear, downshifting to 3rd:

Downshift Rev-Match Control Range = -400 RPM

Current rpm = 6000

Gear ratio 4th = 1.000

Gear ratio 3rd = 1.230

Downshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction = 2%

Target Downshift RPM = 6000 x 1.230/1.000

Target Downshift RPM = 7380

Apply 2% Target Correction:

Target Downshift RPM = 7380 x 1.02

Target Downshift RPM = 7527

Downshift RPM High: 7527 RPM at 95% Cut

Downshift RPM Low: 7127 RPM at 0% Cut

So the ECU will Limit the Engine Speed between 7127 and 7527 assuming sufficient air has been introduced

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Downshift Status

0    Disabled    

1    Ready ...    

2    ON    

3    OFF - Max TPS     

4    OFF - Max RPM    

5    OFF - User     

6    OFF - Enable Table    

7    OFF - Max PPS     

8    OFF - Gearshift Status    

9    OFF - SPARE    

10    Rev: Dnshift Sw Timer    

11    R: Upshift Sw Waiting ..    

12    R: Reverse Sw Waiting ..    

13    R: Clutch Switch    

14    R: Clutch Position    

15    R: User Lockout    

16    R: Speed Lockout    

17    R: RPM Lockout    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift - Paddle

Gearshift without “shift position” – Tolerance Voltage

Image Image

Larger tolerance voltage number will achieve next gear stable sooner. Consider volt change per gear, to determine tolerance volt.

Gear volt spread is 0.60x volt. 0.225 tolerance will achieve “gear change” 63% of the way through the barrel turn.

This is a way control the shift timing if using “Next Gear Stable” function

Image Image

Above example is vehicle using a static cut value (75%).

Next Gear % Cut Level and Ignition Retard Recovery Time are being leveraged to phase back in engine power.

Pre-loading Gearbox

Necessary to achieve swift ratchet action, similar to a “stick” setup where you’d deny cut until a specific force on the shifter.

Mechanical lag of linakge, air lines, etc – all contribute to needing pre-loading.

Cars with high forward momentum will need pre-loading to ensure the middle phase of the gearshift happens at the right time, when the dogs are fully dis-engaged.

Image Image

Observe engine in full cut off, engine speed decelerating, but speed still increasing. The barrel has not turned at the right time (when the engine speed decelerated) and caught the previous gear deceleration side of the dog hanging the upshift up.

Pre-loading can be done with Torque Reduction Delay table, or if Shift Position is available, in full closed loop ->

Image Image

Torque Reduction and Re-Introduction

Reduction in torque can be achieved many ways with fuel, ignition, or both cut tables. Retard tables. Rev matching cut functions, and even DBW target hijacking.

Different scenarios will call for different methods of reduction types.

On turbocharged engines, using too much cut may reduce exhaust energy affecting turbine speed.

Too much retard may increase exhaust energy

A global boost control comp for “Ignition Trims Total” is suggested

Re-Introduction of torque is critical to prevent drivetrain from clashing, bouncing on dogs (drive/decel), and creating excessive ringing in the driveline.

  • Plotting/observing Engine Torque (requires tuned torque model) runtimes can help what the engine is doing during the shift quickly

  • Using Shift Position channels in cut tables

    • Cut Recovery Time table functions off values in the cut table – if last value is “0” then recovery time has nothing to recover from
    • Tolerance Voltage in the Gear Volt input setup should be considered. Suggest using a lower tolerance voltage to control the ECU through the shift

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Setup

Gear Position Order

0: N123456

1: RN123456

2: 1N23456

This settings allows the ECU can determine the correct shift and half-shift sequence

Option 1: RN123456.

In some transmissions neutral is located half-way between R and 1st. To allow Neutral to be selected, the “Half-Shift” setting should be enabled.

NOTES:

** 1st -> Neutral will require a Half-Shift. (Downshift Solenoid will be modulated)

** Reverse -> Neutral will require a Half-Shift (Upshift Solenoid will be modulated)

** Neutral to reverse Half-Shift is not required as reverse gear is located at the end of the shift drum.

Option 2: 1N23456

In this configuration neutral is located half-way between 1st and 2nd. To allow Neutral to be selected, the “1st -> N Half-Shift” setting should be enabled.

NOTES:

** 1st -> Neutral will require a Half-Shift (Upshift Solenoid will be modulated)

** N -> 1st upshift request, the ECU will activate the downshift solenoid

** Neutral to 1st Half-Shift is not required as 1st gear is located at the end of the shift drum.

Gear Position Tracking

0: OFF

1: RPM/Speed Ratio

2: Gear Detection Voltage 2

3: InputShaft /Output Shaft Speed Ratio

Gearshift tracking feature helps reduce transmission damage by cross referencing two independent Gear positions at the start of a gearshift. The ECU uses the Main and Tracking Gear Positions to achieve this.

It is HIGHLY recommended to use this feature.

  1. Main/Primary Gear Position: The Gear Position Voltage 1 Input channel is used.

  2. Tracking Gear Position: This is selectable under this setting.

When the Main and Tracking Gear positions don’t match the actual Gear Position cannot be determined with absolute certainty. This can be caused by a sensor entering a Fault condition or an absolute tracking error.

To prevent transmission damage the following precautions are used:

  1. The ECU requires the clutch to be depressed before a shift can occur. The ECU checks this condition by looking at the Clutch Switch Status or Clutch Pressure. The ECU will NOT upshift or downshift until the clutch is depressed.

  2. The Gearshift runs in open-loop mode. The gearshift time is calculated from the “Fault Mode Cut Time” table and does not use the “next gear stable” strategy.

  3. Rev-matching is disabled.

In the event the Main Gear position enters a Fault condition, the Tracking Gear position will be loaded as the main Gear Position.

NOTE: Gear Position Gear Tracking is always locked out in the following gears : R, N, 1st

Gear Tracking Clutch Pressure Threshold

When a Gear Position tracking error occurs the clutch pressure MUST exceed this setting before the ECU will allow a downshift or upshift.

NOTE: Clutch Pressure or Clutch Switch can be used but MUST be configured.

1st -> N Half-Shift Enable

0: OFF

1: ON

  1. Neutral Gear Ordering RN12345 - Neutral placed half-way between R and 1st.

This setting allows the ECU to “Half-Shift” when selecting 1st -> Neutral. It does this by appling a PWM signal to the downshift solenoid with a user adjustable duty cycle and ramp rate

  1. Neutral Gear Ordering 1N2345 - Neutral placed half-way between 1st and 2nd.

This setting allows the ECU to “Half-Shift” when selecting 1st -> Neutral. It does this by appling a PWM signal to the upshift solenoid with a user adjustable duty cycle and ramp rate

1st -> N Half-Shift Start Duty Cycle

Start Duty Cycle in Half Shift Mode applied to the gear solenoid. The solenoid used will depend on the Gear Position Order.

NOTE: The “Next Gear Timeout” can be overwritten in Half-Shift Mode by holding the Downshift Paddle. For a maximum of 2 seconds the Half-Shift mode will operate until the paddle is released. The Half-shift mode will switch OFF when next stable is reached overriding any paddle input.

Freq fixed at 20Hz

Typical Value = 50 %DC

Resolution 2.0%

1st -> N Half-Shift Ramp Rate

The Duty Cycle will be increased by this amount per cycle.

Typical Value = 4 %DC

Resolution 2.0%

Example:

Half-Shift Start Duty Cycle = 50.0%

Half-Shift Ramp Rate = 6.0%

1st PWM Pulse = 50% DC

2nd PWM Pulse =56% DC

3rd PWM Pulse = 62% DC

The PWM will be switched OFF when the next gear has been detected or when the paddle is released.

Maximum Time limited to 2 seconds.

1st -> N Half-Shift Max Duty Cycle

Maximum duty cycle allowed on the solenoid during Half-Shift operation.

Resolution 2.0%

1st -> N Half-Shift Duty Cycle - Opposite

Fixed Duty Cycle to be used on the opposing gearshift solenoid. This can be used as a “brake” and help prevent over rotation of the shift drum. This PWM runs in-phase with the “1st -> N: Half-Shift Start Duty Cycle” PWM signal.

0 = OFF

Typical Value = 10 %DC

Resolution 2.0%

Rev -> N Half-Shift Enable

0: OFF

1: ON

  1. Neutral Gear Ordering RN12345 - Neutral placed half-way between R and 1st.

This setting allows the ECU to “Half-Shift” when selecting Reverse -> Neutral. It does this by appling a 20Hz PWM signal to the upshift solenoid with a user adjustable duty cycle and ramp rate.

Rev -> N Half-Shift Start Duty Cycle

Start Duty Cycle in Half Shift Mode applied to the gear solenoid. The solenoid used will depend on the Gear Position Order.

NOTE: The “Next Gear Timeout” can be overwritten in Half-Shift Mode by holding the Downshift Paddle. For a maximum of 2 seconds the Half-Shift mode will operate until the paddle is released. The Half-shift mode will switch OFF when next stable is reached overriding any paddle input.

Freq fixed at 20Hz

Typical Value = 50 %DC

Resolution 2.0%

Rev -> N Half-Shift Ramp Rate

The Duty Cycle will be increased by this amount per cycle.

Typical Value = 4 %DC

Resolution 2.0%

Example:

Half-Shift Start Duty Cycle = 50.0%

Half-Shift Ramp Rate = 6.0%

1st PWM Pulse = 50% DC

2nd PWM Pulse =56% DC

3rd PWM Pulse = 62% DC

The PWM will be switched OFF when the next gear has been detected or when the paddle is released.

Maximum Time limited to 2 seconds.

Rev -> N Half-Shift Max Duty Cycle

Maximum duty cycle allowed on the solenoid during Half-Shift operation.

Resolution 2.0%

Rev -> N Half-Shift Duty Cycle - Opposite

Fixed Duty Cycle to be used on the opposing gearshift solenoid. This can be used as a “brake” and help prevent over rotation of the shift drum. This PWM runs in-phase with the “Rev -> N: Half-Shift Start Duty Cycle” PWM signal.

0 = OFF

Typical Value = 10 %DC

Resolution 2.0%

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Gearshift Upshift Status

0    Disabled    

1    Ready ...    

2    ON    

3    OFF - Min TPS     

4    OFF - Min RPM    

5    OFF - User     

6    OFF - Enable Table    

7    OFF - Min PPS     

8    OFF - Gearshift Status    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift DBW Position

Upshift DBW Position

Sets the throttle position target that the DBW throttle will move to during the up shift.

This is an absolute position of the DBW Servo.

** This position will override other torque management functions regarding throttle control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Next Gear Solenoid Hold Time

Upshift Next Gear Solenoid Hold Time

This is the time the Solenoid stays ON once next gear stable has been achieved .

Resolution = 1ms

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Next Gear Torque Recovery Delay

Upshift Next Gear Torque Recovery Delay

Rev-Match OFF

This is the time the Engine Cut/Ignition Retard stays active once Next Gear Stable has been achieved.

Rev-Match ON

This is the time the Rev-match cut and Ignition Retatd remains active once Next Gear Stable has been achieved.

Resolution = 1ms

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Request Enable Table

Upshift Request Enable Table

The Table output must be Enabled allowing the UpShift request to be valid.

(set to 100 if not required)

0 = Shift Request Disabled

100 = Shift Request Enabled

50 = No Change

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Rev-Match Enable Table

Upshift Rev-Match Enable Table

This table controls when the Rev-Match function is started.

0 = OFF

100 = ON

Any other value = no change

It is important the Rev-match RPM limiting starts AFTER the initial Torque Reduction Cut/Retard. This is because the Upshift Rev-Match RPM limit will be lower than the current Engine Speed and will most likely take %cut priority, preventing the initial Torque Reduction Cut/Retard from working as expected.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction

Upshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction

This table controls adjusts the Rev-Match RPM Target +/- in units of %.

Use this to raise or lower the Rev-Match RPM Target

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Setup

Upshift Debounce Time

The Upshift Paddle must be held for this time for the request to be valid.

This setting prevents accidental requests in harsh Motorsport environments (vibration and vehicle harmonics).

Upshift Torque Reduction Type

0: Fuel Cut Only

1: Ign Cut Only

2: Fuel + Ign Cut

\

Upshift Ign Retard Mode

0: OFF

1: Offset

2: Percentage

Applies the Ignition Retard as either an Offset or Percentage of Current Ign Angle

Example: Current Ignition Angle = 20.0 BTDC

Offset = 15.0 Deg Retard.

Ignition Angle during Gear Cut is= 20.0 - 15.0 = 5.0 Deg BTDC

Percentage = 50.0 % Retard.

Ignition Angle During Cut := 20 - 50% x 20.0 = 10.0 Deg BTDC

Upshift Torque Reduction Min Time

The Upshift function works by initially applying Torque Reduction, before then entering the Rev-Matching phase controlled by the Rev-Match Enable Table.

This setting ensures the Torque Reduction is ALWAYS active at the start of the gearshift for the time entered before the Rev-Matching can occur.

Typcial value : 10 -20ms

Upshift Throttle Override

0: OFF

1: DBW 1 - Duration Table

2: DBW 1 - Function Controlled

This setting overrides the throttle on upshift .

Duration Table is Open Loop mode and used to control the length of time the DBW is controlled.

Function Controlled is Closed Loop so the Gearshift Function is used to control the length of time the DBW is controlled.

The goal is to reduce the airflow into the engine to match the engine speed of the requested upshift gear.

NOTE: The Rev-matching Limit setting can also be switched ON, which limits the engine the to correct rpm.

Upshift Rev-Matching Limit

Upshift Rev-matching Limit

Rev-matching Upshift Function will Limit the engine RPM to match the requested Upshift gear. The ECU uses Output shaft RPM and Transmission ratios between the current gear and requested gear to calculate a Rev-matched RPM Target.

i.e. Matching Transmission Input and Output speed referenced by Gear Ratio

NOTE 1: Output Shaft must be configured. This means Wheel Diameter and Final Drive ratios must be set correctly.

NOTE 2: The Gear Ratio Table MUST be completed for this function to operate correctly. See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu.

NOTE 3: It is important the Rev-match RPM limiting starts AFTER the initial Torque Reduction Cut/Retard. This is because the Upshift Rev-Match RPM limit will be lower than the current Engine Speed and will most likely take %cut priority, preventing the initial Torque Reduction Cut/Retard from working.

NOTE 4: Make sure the “Upshift Rev-Match RPM Target Correction” table is setup/initialised correctly

0: OFF

1: ON - Outputshaft Speed

2: ON - Outputshaft Speed Calculated

Upshift Rev-Match Cut Type

0: Fuel Cut Only

1: Ign Cut Only

2: Fuel + Ign Cut

Upshift Rev-Match Control Range (-/+)

Example:

Rev-match RPM Target = 4700

Min Cut = 0%

Max Cut = 95%

  1. Range = +500 0RPM (Recommended)

Engine Speed: 4700 RPM = 0% Cut, 5300 RPM = 95% Cut

  1. Range = -500 RPM

Engine Speed: 4700 RPM = 95% Cut, 4200 RPM = 0% Cut

Upshift Rev-Match Max %Cut Clamp

Percentage cut applied to the engine

at the end of the control range.

Upshift Next Gear Timeout

The Next Gear MUST be reached within this time forthe Upshift to be valid. If this does not occur the ECU willre-try the gear shift by the number of time set in the Upshift “Upshift Re-retry Count” Setting.

Time starts when Upshift Solenoid is switched ON.

Typical Value = 100ms

Upshift Re-Try Count

The number of time the ECU will re-attempt a failed Gear Shift.

ONLY Applies when Electronic(Paddle) mode selected

Typical Value = 3

Upshift Stacking Limit

Sets the maximum number of Upshift Requests

that can be stacked.

0 =OFF

Upshift Min Engine Speed

The Engine Speed MUST be greater than this

value for the UpShift request to be valid

0 = OFF

Upshift Min Throttle

The Throttle Position MUST be greater than

this value for the UpShift request to be valid

0 = OFF

Upshift Min Pedal

The Pedal Position 1 MUST be greater than

this value for the UpShift request to be valid

0 = OFF

Upshift User Enable

The User Channel when selected must be ON

for the UpShift request to be valid.

0: OFF

1: User Channel 1

2: User Channel 2

3: User Channel 3

4: User Channel 4

5: User Channel 5

6: User Channel 6

7: User Channel 7

8: User Channel 8

9: User Channel 9

10: User Channel 10

Upshift Force Hysteresis

Prevents Gearshift re-triggering.

Example:

Gear Force Positive = 8kg

Upshift Force Hysteresis = 60%

Upshift will be triggered when Gear Force > 8kg.

Once complete the Gear force will not be allowed to trigger the Gearshift until it falls below 60% of 8kg ..ie Force MUST be less than 3.2Kg (8- 4.8)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Throttle Duration

Upshift Throttle Duration

  • Sets the Duration of the DBW throttle position change when Force is used

  • Sets the Timeout of the DBW throttle position change when Paddle shift is used

** This position will override other torque management functions regarding throttle control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Torque Reduction Delay

Upshift Torque Reduction Delay

This is the length of time from when :

  1. Upshift solenoid is switch ON (Electronic) OR

  2. Force Threshold is exceeded (Mechanical)

to when the Engine Torque Reduction begins with Engine %Cutting and Ignition Retard.

Resolution = 1ms

** For Electronic Paddle Shift, this is used to pre-load the shift

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Torque Reduction Ign/Fuel %Cut Level

Upshift Torque Reduction Ign/Fuel %Cut Level

This is the %cut applied when gear cut it active

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Upshift Torque Reduction Ignition Retard

Upshift Torque Ignition Retard

This is the amount of Ignition Retard applied during the entire Upshift event

There are 2 modes :

  • Offset (Deg)

  • Percentage (%)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Re-Arm Delay

Re-arm Delay

Delay until the Gear Cut

can re-reactivated.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Idle Speed Control

Min/Max Deviation From Initial Position Table

Min/Max Deviation From Initial Position Table

Allows the user to set the minimum and maximum deviation that can be used by the closed loop system.  

These parameters can be expanded into a 3D look up tables to provide greater accuracy regarding closed loop control.  

** These values are Duty Cycle when using a solenoid, Step counts if using a stepper motor, or Position if using DBW.  

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Closed Loop Control

Idle Closed Loop Control

** For DBW, it is advised to use a PI control strategy (put D-Gain at zero).  Also keep Idle PI Gains small.

See Plugin Sample Files for examples on these settings.

** For DBW, it is advised to use TMF mode for better closed loop control (see Idle Speed Tuning)

** If Idle Ignition Control is also ON, make sure the Idle Ignition I-Gain is set to zero so both Idle Ignition and Idle DBW systems are not fighting each other

Example : Do not have I-Gain active on both systems.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle PID Setup

Control Rate

The rate at which the PID control algorithm calculations are performed.

Typical : 10 Hz

Idle Deadband +/-

The output control signal is held constant when the Input Signal (RPM) falls within the deadband range of the Setpoint (Idle Target). This helps reduce steady state error and oscillations.

Typical : 20 RPM

RPM Filter

Filters the RPM signal to allow better PID control

Typical : 5

Integral Positive/Negative Clamp

Allows the user to set the minimum and maximum I gain compensation used by the closed loop system.  

Re-entry Delay

Delay once all lockouts are cleared before Closed Loop Idle Control becomes active.

** Will immediately become active if engine speed falls below the Target RPM

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control Configuration (TMF)

This section assumes the DBW has been configured and operating correctly.

The following steps should be used to configure the Idle Speed control system to work using Throttle Mass Flow.

  1. Configure the Throttle Mass Flow Idle Speed Control output function type using the menu:

    Config -> Functions -> Function Output Setup -> Engine Functions Tab -> Idle Speed Control

Select either DBW 1 TMF or DBW 1 + 2 TMF

Image Image

  1. Configure the throttle body model using the menu: Tuning -> Engine Function -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Body Setup

    See Throttle Body Setup help topic for more information

  2. Configure the Throttle Mass Flow model using the menu: Tuning -> Engine Function -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Mass Flow Setup

Image Image

Step 1- Select the throttle mass flow enable type that is applicable to your configuration. Example: ON x 1 DBW Throttle Body

  • TMF idle valve option is for TMF fuel model on cable throttle engines & is not applicable to DBW TMF idle speed control.
  • The TMF idle valve size input is also only applicable to cable throttle TMF applications

Step 2 - Set Throttle 1 before plate pressure source

  • If you intend to use TMF in areas other than idle, there should be a pressure sensor already fitted before the throttle plate and this should be selected.

    Example: Boost Pressure Sensor  
    
    In the case of only wanting to achieve TMF Idle Speed Control and there is no sensor fitted before the plate, simply select the internal       Barometric Pressure sensor. 
    
    Other more complicated methods are also available for advanced users..
    

Image Image

Step 3. Set the Throttle 1 After Plate Pressure source. This is normally the MAP sensor

Step 4. Set the Throttle 1 Temperature source. This is normally set to charge temperature

Repeat for Throttle 2 if applicable

  1. Throttle Body Area Table. See Throttle Body Setup help topic for more information

  2. Confirm the Throttle Mass Flow calculations are operating, the data can be viewed from the Runtime menu (F3) -> Engine Data Calculated tab

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control Lockouts (TMF)

Idle speed control lockouts (TMF)

Tuning –> Engine Functions –> Idle Speed control –> Idle Speed Control lockouts (TMF)

Image Image

Image Image

TP1/PP1 Lockout

For TMF idle speed control, this is a Pedal Position 1 lockout target.

This feature uses a 0.5% hysteresis in its application.

Example: TP1/PP1 Lockout = 1.5%

PP1 < 1.5% Closed Loop becomes active

PP1 >= 2.0% Closed Loop goes into hold.

A typical value is 0.5% Pedal Position

Speed Channel

Used to define how the “Speed Lockout” is used.  

0: OFF

1: Drive Speed

2: Ground Speed

3: Drive Speed Front L

4: Drive Speed Front R

5: Drive Speed Rear L

6: Drive Speed Rear R

7: Undriven Speed Front L

8: Undriven Speed Front R

9: Undriven Speed Rear L

10: Undriven Speed Rear R

11: Front Axle Speed

12: Rear Axle Speed

13: Vehicle Speed

**** Speed inputs must be defined and properly calibrated under “Input Setup”**

Speed Lockout

Locks out Idle Speed Control when the speed is greater than or equal to this value (KPH).

A typical value is 5.0

Note: A Speed Channel must be defined to function

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range

The engine speed must fall to the Idle Target + Idle Target Tracking RPM Range. This is the rpm threshold for TMF idle speed control activation.

Example:

Idle Target rpm (Plus any Offsets applied) = 800

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range = 350

TMF Idle Speed Control will become active when the engine speed falls to equal 1150 RPM.

A typical vale is 350 RPM

Idle Target Tracking Decay – Neutral

This function sets the rate of decay to idle in rpm per second that the engine speed reduction is applied once the engine speed is within the Idle Target Tracking RPM Range and the transmission is regarded to be in Neutral

A typical value is 250 rpm/sec

Idle Target Tracking Decay – In Gear

This function sets the rate of decay to idle in rpm per second that the engine speed reduction is applied once the engine speed is within the Idle Target Tracking RPM Range and the transmission is regarded to be in Gear

A typical value is 250 rpm/sec

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control Lockouts

Idle Speed Lockouts

TP1/PP1 Lockout

% below in which Idle Speed Control system becomes active.  

  • Throttle Position 1 used on Solenoid and Stepper systems

  • Pedal Position 1 used on DBW systems

Speed Channel

Used to define how the “Speed Lockout” is used.  

0: OFF

1: Drive Speed

2: Ground Speed

3: Drive Speed Front L

4: Drive Speed Front R

5: Drive Speed Rear L

6: Drive Speed Rear R

7: Undriven Speed Front L

8: Undriven Speed Front R

9: Undriven Speed Rear L

10: Undriven Speed Rear R

11: Front Axle Speed

12: Rear  Axle Speed

13: Vehicle Speed

** Speed inputs must be defined and properly calibrated under “Input Setup”

Speed Lockout

Locks out Idle Speed Control when the speed is greater than or equal to this value (KPH).

Typical : 5.0

** Speed Channel must be defined.  

Idle Range Lockout

The engine speed must fall below the Idle Target + Idle Range Lockout before Idle Speed Control becomes active.

Example:

Idle Target = 800 (set from Idle Speed Control menu)

Idle Range Lockout = 400.

Idle Speed Control will become active when the engine speed falls below 1200 RPM.

Typical: 400 RPM

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control Setup (TMF)

Idle speed control Setup (TMF)

Tuning –> Engine Functions –> Idle Speed control –> Idle Speed Control setup (TMF)

Image Image

Image Image

Control method

Used to select either Open or Closed Loop.

Open Loop mode is generally used to setup initial settings before using Closed Loop mode.

0: Open Loop

1: Closed Loop

** Closed Loop applies PID functions to Idle Feed Forward

** Idle Feed Forward is derived from Idle Initial Position + any comp tables

Start-up idle hold time:

How long the ECU is required to remain at the predetermined flare rpm on start up.

This additional rpm target is added in the Start-up Offset target Table

The additional air flow required to allow this to occur correctly is added in the Idle Speed Control - Initial position table (g/s) at the required idle speed at the given temperature.

Please note: The Initial position table when in open loop mode is just that, the initial position in g/s of airflow that the engine will target. Once closed loop TMF idle control is activated, the Idle Speed Control – Initial Position Table (g/s) becomes the feed forward table for TMF closed loop idle. It is no longer an initial position, rather it is an expected value that feeds into the TMF idle speed PID control strategy. The values to be set in this table are arrived at when using the TMF Idle speed control in Open Loop control much as one would with Open & Closed Loop Boost control (See Idle Speed Control – Initial Position Table (g/s)

Start-up idle decay rate:

This function sets the rate of decay to idle in rpm per second that engine speed reduction is applied; from the start up offset target rpm (Flare) to the idle target rpm once the engine is running and the start-up idle hold time has expired (See above)

Throttle area demand (idle) clamp:

The throttle area clamp is a safety feature that prevents the DBW servo from exceeding a set throttle body area percentage at idle and prevents unintended values when calibrating the function.

This value is directly related to the values previously imputed into the Throttle body area table

A typical value is 10% - this refers to 10% throttle area, not DBW servo position or TPS

See Throttle body set up – throttle body area table

Min Throttle area blend pedal to idle:

This is the threshold below which the Pedal Throttle Area Demand starts to blend

into the Idle Throttle Area Demand

A typical value is 6% area

See: Pedal to throttle area demand translation table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control Setup

Idle Speed Control Setup

Control Method

Used to select either Open or Closed Loop.

Open Loop mode is generally used to setup initial settings before using Closed Loop mode.

0: Open Loop

1: Closed Loop

** Closed Loop applies PID functions to Idle Feed Forward

** Idle Feed Forward is derived from Idle Initial Position + any comp tables

Startup Idle Hold Time

Time delay before idle speed control is active after startup

Startup Idle Decay Rate

Decay rate (in RPM/sec) after Startup Idle Hold Time expires

Stepper Direction

Used to set polarity of the stepper motor.

0: Normal

1: Reversed

Stepper Position Full Reset

Used to reset the stepper motor to its fully closed position. When set to ON the ECU will command the stepper motor to move 200 steps. Once complete the motor is returned to its default position.

This setting should be used on first installation when the position of the stepper motor is unknown.

Can be switched back to OFF at any time without effecting stepper motor operation.

0: OFF

1: ON

Stepper Reset

When set to Key-On the ECU will command the stepper motor to move 200 steps fully closed at Key-On.

Once completed the motor is returned to its default position.

The Key-OFF option requires the ECU EFI Relay control on be connected and working correctly (recommended).

0: Key-ON

1: Key-OFF

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Control

Idle Speed Control

The following calculated run times are generated by Emtron that are Ide Speed Control related (to be further discussed more specifically):

Idle Target         –     Current Target Idle Speed

Idle Position        -    Current Live Idle Position

Idle Target Error         -     Error from Target Idle Speed 

Idle Position Base     -     Base Position of Idle Speed (%/Steps)

Idle Position Flow Target    -     Flow Target when using Idle TMF mode (g/second)

Throttle Area - Idle     –     Idle Throttle Area %  

Pedal Position 1        –     Pedal Position 

Idle Target Offsets (grp)    –     Offsets to Idle Target (RPM)

Idle Comps (group)     –     Offsets to Idle Position (%/Steps)

Idle Status         –     Current status of Idle Speed Control

Idle PID Status        -    Status of Idle Speed Control Closed Loop PID 

Idle P, I, and D        -    Proportional, Integral, and Derivative live data from Closed Loop 

Idle Feed Forward    -    Feed forward position for Idle Speed Closed Loop Control 

Idle Speed Control Function Setup

Emtron has eight methods of Idle Speed Control

  • Config, Function Setup, Idle Speed Control

2 Wire Idle Solenoid

Configure one output for control

3 Wire Idle Solenoid

Configure two outputs for control (Main/Slave)

Bipolar Stepper

Configure four outputs for control

Unipolar Stepper

Configure four outputs for control

DBW 1

No outputs, as the function takes over DBW positioning (raw position)

DBW 1+2

No outputs, as the function takes over DBW 1+2 positioning (raw position)

DBW 1 TMF

No outputs, as the function takes over DBW positioning (Throttle Mass Flow target)

DBW 1+2 TMF

No outputs, as the function takes over DBW 1+2 positioning (Throttle Mass Flow target)

** Idle Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Setup

Use the “Tuning View -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model” menu to config the Throttle Mass Flow settings. As TMF uses the pressure before and after the throttle plate, these pressure references in this menu must be setup correctly. See Idle Speed Tuning

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Tuning Guide

Idle Speed Tuning Guide

Idle Speed Tuning

Idle Speed Control in Emtune has comprehensive functions. There are a multiple tuning parameters, target, and position compensations.

Ignition timing is a contributing factor to engine idle speed. Please make sure you have reasonable timing being commanded by the ECU to make idle speed configuration go smoothly and function consistently.

** If planning to use idle ignition control, the static value for tuning idle speed should be in between the working range of the idle ignition control for both systems to be affective.

Example: Idle Ignition Clamp 0-25 degrees.  Lock timing at 12.5 degrees.  

Commanding ignition timing off the main ignition table is recommended for first startup of an engine. The values in the main table can later be edited once functions (like Idle Ignition Control) are subsequently added.

Tuning Idle Speed Control

Regardless of the system being used, starting idle speed control in open loop is best.

Initial Position:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Initial Position Table

This is the feed forward position for the idle speed control.

The value in this table is constant regardless of idle speed lockouts, except if DBW or DBW TMF modes.

** Initial Position can always be compensated by Position Offsets

Example:     Idle Target = 800rpm

         Idle Position = 37.5% (with closed loop enabled)

Idle speed is then locked out due to throttle position and engine speed (10%TP, 3000PRM)

Initial Position = 40%

Idle Position = 40% until lockouts are satisfied (engine rpm, TP, etc)

Units in this table vary depending on the Idle Speed Control method used,

IE - Stepper count for stepper motor, Duty cycle for solenoid, DBW position, or Target Throttle Mass Flow

Image Image

It is recommended to configure one of the axes of the Initial Position table to an Idle Target Speed (Main Idle Target, see below).

Initial Position can be compensated several ways under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Position Offsets

** Position compensations (comp tables) add/subtract to the initial position

** This is the feed forward if closed loop control is used

Main Idle Target:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Main Idle Target Table

This table allows you to build an idle target speed in RPM

Image Image

Like all Emtron tables, different runtimes are available for axis configuration making the system very flexible.

** This table is active if the Idle Ignition Control function is turned on as well.

Once you have a base set up for initial position and main idle target, match the initial position to target idle speed during different engine environmental conditions (most commonly engine temperature).

With this properly configured, going back to the Main Idle Target Table in different operating conditions should make the engine speed change and match the target accordingly.

** A good open loop configuration is the basis for enabling Closed Loop Control.

Main Idle Target can be adjusted by several offset tables under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Target Offsets

Closed Loop Control

Depending on the system being used, closed loop settings will vary. Basic PID tuning principles apply.

See specific examples below for notes on individual systems regarding Closed Loop (when applicable)

2 Wire Idle Solenoid

A Two Wire Idle solenoid is generally supplied power and the ECU Aux Output pulse the other pin to open the valve.

Units in position tables are in %Duty

Typical frequencies for 2 Wire Idle Solenoids are 50-250hz

Closed loop:

2 Wire Idle Solenoids often have a default air bleed position when they are not powered (failure position). The min and max deviation from the initial position when using closed loop must be carefully configured so the idle valve does not fall into those ranges while the engine is running. Otherwise the idle engine speed will not be able to be controlled.

Example:

0-20% = default position air/bleed. At 0% (same as being powered off), the idle valve is flowing air through the mechanical default air bleed to prevent engine stall. It then closes completely at 20%.

20-100% re-opens the idle valve with precision. This is the range the ECU must operate in for good idle speed control.

3 Wire Idle Solenoid

A 3 Wire Idle solenoid is generally supplied power from the EFI Relay circuit and the ECU Aux Outputs pulse the second and third extra pins to open and close the valve.

The Idle Speed Solenoid output should be the opening winding.

The Idle Slave Solenoid output should be the closing winding.

Image Image

Units in position tables are in %Duty

The ECU mirrors the opposite of the opening duty on the slave channel (closing wining), providing more accurate open loop positioning vs 2 wire idle solenoids.

IE –

Idle Speed Solenoid Output 75%

Idle Slave Solenoid Output 25%

Idle Speed Solenoid Output 30%

Idle Slave Solenoid Output 70%

The frequency of the valve is configured in output setup (See Idle Speed Setup).

Typical frequencies for 3 Wire Idle Solenoids are 50-250hz

Bi-Polar/Uni-Polar Stepper Motor

DC Stepper Motors convert rotation into step counts which the ECU can move incrementally to change the amount of air bleeding around the closed throttle. See wiring guides regarding wiring different types of stepper motors.

Image Image

Units in position tables are in Steps from Closed position

** Stepper Valves have extra settings such as “Closed position is reset either at Key On/Off” under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Idle Speed Control Setup

DBW (1, 1 + 2)

When set to DBW 1, or DBW 1+2, the ECU will use the DBW motor position to control idle speed of the engine.

Units in position tables are in raw DBW position.

** DBW Control must be fully configured

** DBW PID must be set up accurately to ensure precision during Idle Speed due to the air flow being very sensitive to airflow vs DBW position (especially with a large throttle body).

Setting Initial Position Table

A good way to initially set up DBW motor position is recommended to lockout idle speed completely and work off the Pedal to Throttle Demand Table:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table

Once the engine is idling at the appropriate RPM, use Runtimes to look at what the raw DBW position/Throttle Position to populate the Initial Position Table.

Image Image

Initial Position built off above examples at operating temperature. Estimation for extra air flow can be extrapolated regarding colder temps and blended as shown (must be checked on cold start).

** Position is much more sensitive to air flow than solenoids or stepper motors

Transitioning smoothly from Idle Speed to Pedal Demand

Because the Idle Speed Control Initial Position is controlling the DBW target, when the idle speed control is locked out (pedal is pushed), the DBW target will transition back into the Pedal to Throttle Demand Table. It is important to have a minimum position that corresponds to somewhere close to the idle Initial Position. If 0% (or a lower number than Idle Initial Position) is targeted in the Pedal Demand Table, the engine may stall/stumble due to lack of airflow.

Image Image

Initial Position Highlighted

Image Image

Pedal Demand Highlighted

** Throttle Body Area Table is 1:1 in this example

** If Throttle Body Area is worked out, then Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table will not match DBW initial position, and the raw position needed will need to be matched vs Throttle Body Area

** If Throttle Body Area Table is worked out, then Idle Speed Control mode should be DBW 1/1 + 2 TMF

Closed loop:

Using Closed Loop Control with DBW Idle Speed Control (%TP/%DBW Servo Posn) requires much less aggressive PID settings and limits. The reason for this is only a small change to the DBW position is needed to make a large affect on airflow.

For initial setup use the following PID settings:

Image Image

Proportional Gain Table = 0.00

Integral Gain Table = 0.025

Derivative Gain Table = 0.00

Min/Max Deviation from Initial Position Table = +/- 1%

The above settings will limit how quickly the Closed Loop will change the initial position, and limit how far the throttle can be moved from the initial position.

** Final settings will probably have less minimum deviation than max deviation for Anti-Stall functions

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Tuning Guide

Idle Speed Tuning Guide

Idle Speed Tuning

Idle Speed Control in Emtune has comprehensive functions. There are a multiple tuning parameters, target, and position compensations.

Ignition timing is a contributing factor to engine idle speed. Please make sure you have reasonable timing being commanded by the ECU to make idle speed configuration go smoothly and function consistently.

** If planning to use idle ignition control, the static value for tuning idle speed should be in between the working range of the idle ignition control for both systems to be affective.

Example: Idle Ignition Clamp 0-25 degrees.  Lock timing at 12.5 degrees.  

Commanding ignition timing off the main ignition table is recommended for first startup of an engine. The values in the main table can later be edited once functions (like Idle Ignition Control) are subsequently added.

Tuning Idle Speed Control

Regardless of the system being used, starting idle speed control in open loop is best.

Initial Position:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Initial Position Table

This is the feed forward position for the idle speed control.

The value in this table is constant regardless of idle speed lockouts, except if DBW or DBW TMF modes.

** Initial Position can always be compensated by Position Offsets

Example:     Idle Target = 800rpm

         Idle Position = 37.5% (with closed loop enabled)

Idle speed is then locked out due to throttle position and engine speed (10%TP, 3000PRM)

Initial Position = 40%

Idle Position = 40% until lockouts are satisfied (engine rpm, TP, etc)

Units in this table vary depending on the Idle Speed Control method used,

IE - Stepper count for stepper motor, Duty cycle for solenoid, DBW position, or Target Throttle Mass Flow

Image Image

It is recommended to configure one of the axes of the Initial Position table to an Idle Target Speed (Main Idle Target, see below).

Initial Position can be compensated several ways under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Position Offsets

** Position compensations (comp tables) add/subtract to the initial position

** This is the feed forward if closed loop control is used

Main Idle Target:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Main Idle Target Table

This table allows you to build an idle target speed in RPM

Image Image

Like all Emtron tables, different runtimes are available for axis configuration making the system very flexible.

** This table is active if the Idle Ignition Control function is turned on as well.

Once you have a base set up for initial position and main idle target, match the initial position to target idle speed during different engine environmental conditions (most commonly engine temperature).

With this properly configured, going back to the Main Idle Target Table in different operating conditions should make the engine speed change and match the target accordingly.

** A good open loop configuration is the basis for enabling Closed Loop Control.

Main Idle Target can be adjusted by several offset tables under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Target Offsets

Closed Loop Control

Depending on the system being used, closed loop settings will vary. Basic PID tuning principles apply.

See specific examples below for notes on individual systems regarding Closed Loop (when applicable)

2 Wire Idle Solenoid

A Two Wire Idle solenoid is generally supplied power and the ECU Aux Output pulse the other pin to open the valve.

Units in position tables are in %Duty

Typical frequencies for 2 Wire Idle Solenoids are 50-250hz

Closed loop:

2 Wire Idle Solenoids often have a default air bleed position when they are not powered (failure position). The min and max deviation from the initial position when using closed loop must be carefully configured so the idle valve does not fall into those ranges while the engine is running. Otherwise the idle engine speed will not be able to be controlled.

Example:

0-20% = default position air/bleed. At 0% (same as being powered off), the idle valve is flowing air through the mechanical default air bleed to prevent engine stall. It then closes completely at 20%.

20-100% re-opens the idle valve with precision. This is the range the ECU must operate in for good idle speed control.

3 Wire Idle Solenoid

A 3 Wire Idle solenoid is generally supplied power from the EFI Relay circuit and the ECU Aux Outputs pulse the second and third extra pins to open and close the valve.

The Idle Speed Solenoid output should be the opening winding.

The Idle Slave Solenoid output should be the closing winding.

Image Image

Units in position tables are in %Duty

The ECU mirrors the opposite of the opening duty on the slave channel (closing wining), providing more accurate open loop positioning vs 2 wire idle solenoids.

IE –

Idle Speed Solenoid Output 75%

Idle Slave Solenoid Output 25%

Idle Speed Solenoid Output 30%

Idle Slave Solenoid Output 70%

The frequency of the valve is configured in output setup (See Idle Speed Setup).

Typical frequencies for 3 Wire Idle Solenoids are 50-250hz

Bi-Polar/Uni-Polar Stepper Motor

DC Stepper Motors convert rotation into step counts which the ECU can move incrementally to change the amount of air bleeding around the closed throttle. See wiring guides regarding wiring different types of stepper motors.

Image Image

Units in position tables are in Steps from Closed position

** Stepper Valves have extra settings such as “Closed position is reset either at Key On/Off” under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Idle Speed Control Setup

DBW (1, 1 + 2)

When set to DBW 1, or DBW 1+2, the ECU will use the DBW motor position to control idle speed of the engine.

Units in position tables are in raw DBW position.

** DBW Control must be fully configured

** DBW PID must be set up accurately to ensure precision during Idle Speed due to the air flow being very sensitive to airflow vs DBW position (especially with a large throttle body).

Setting Initial Position Table

A good way to initially set up DBW motor position is recommended to lockout idle speed completely and work off the Pedal to Throttle Demand Table:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table

Once the engine is idling at the appropriate RPM, use Runtimes to look at what the raw DBW position/Throttle Position to populate the Initial Position Table.

Image Image

Initial Position built off above examples at operating temperature. Estimation for extra air flow can be extrapolated regarding colder temps and blended as shown (must be checked on cold start).

** Position is much more sensitive to air flow than solenoids or stepper motors

Transitioning smoothly from Idle Speed to Pedal Demand

Because the Idle Speed Control Initial Position is controlling the DBW target, when the idle speed control is locked out (pedal is pushed), the DBW target will transition back into the Pedal to Throttle Demand Table. It is important to have a minimum position that corresponds to somewhere close to the idle Initial Position. If 0% (or a lower number than Idle Initial Position) is targeted in the Pedal Demand Table, the engine may stall/stumble due to lack of airflow.

Image Image

Initial Position Highlighted

Image Image

Pedal Demand Highlighted

** Throttle Body Area Table is 1:1 in this example

** If Throttle Body Area is worked out, then Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table will not match DBW initial position, and the raw position needed will need to be matched vs Throttle Body Area

** If Throttle Body Area Table is worked out, then Idle Speed Control mode should be DBW 1/1 + 2 TMF

Closed loop:

Using Closed Loop Control with DBW Idle Speed Control (%TP/%DBW Servo Posn) requires much less aggressive PID settings and limits. The reason for this is only a small change to the DBW position is needed to make a large affect on airflow.

For initial setup use the following PID settings:

Image Image

Proportional Gain Table = 0.00

Integral Gain Table = 0.025

Derivative Gain Table = 0.00

Min/Max Deviation from Initial Position Table = +/- 1%

The above settings will limit how quickly the Closed Loop will change the initial position, and limit how far the throttle can be moved from the initial position.

** Final settings will probably have less minimum deviation than max deviation for Anti-Stall functions

DBW (1 TMF, 1 + 2 TMF)

When set to DBW 1 TMF, or DBW 1+2 TMF, the ECU will use the DBW motor position to control idle speed of the engine based on a target Throttle Mass Flow of air. For DBW applications, this function is superior to any other type of idle speed control, especially with the closed loop function.

Units in position tables are in raw grams per second (g/s).

** DBW Control must be fully configured

** DBW PID must be set up accurately to ensure precision during Idle Speed due to the air flow being very sensitive to airflow vs DBW position (especially with a large throttle body).

Setting Initial Position Table

Since Throttle Mass Flow is the target, The Throttle Body Area table must be configured in the Throttle Body Model. Because that function needs to be tuned previously, setting the throttle target at a static number, or using regular DBW Idle Speed mode to get the engine running/idling may be a good start.

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Body Area Table

Image Image

Once the throttle area is worked out (see Throttle Mass Flow), the ECU will generate Throttle Mass Flow runtimes.

This is the expected airflow in g/s for the engine at a given idle rpm & temperature. A channel Air Mass Final – Flow g/s, generates the actual airflow consumed by the engine.

Use this runtime to help set the values in this table. The more accurate this table is, the better the closed loop idle control will function

Image Image

Transitioning smoothly from Idle Speed to Pedal Demand

Because the Idle Speed Control is targeting a Throttle Mass Flow, the transition to Pedal Demand is much easier.

** Works best if Throttle Area is correct

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range and Decay

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Idle Speed Control Lockouts (TMF)

When using TMF for Idle Speed Control, some extra settings are available to make the Idle Speed Control even more flexible.

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range raises the idle target when locked out until the Idle Speed Lockouts are satisfied again. This adds somewhat of a “dashpot” function to the system as if your Target Mass Flow is RPM based (like the above example), the Idle Speed will go to the Idle Speed Target PLUS the Target Tracking RPM.

Idle Target Tracking Decay then subsequently removes the Target Tracking Range in RPM/second

Good staring numbers are as follows:

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range = 100

Idle Target Tracking Decay = 25

Image Image

Closed loop:

TMF Closed Loop control is superior to standard DBW Position Idle Control due to higher resolution targeting Mass Flow vs small DBW position changes.

For initial setup use the following PID settings:

Image Image

Proportional Gain Table = 0.50

Integral Gain Table = 0.050

Derivative Gain Table = 0.25

Min/Max Deviation from Initial Position Table = +/- 3.00g/s

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Speed Tuning Guide

Idle Speed Tuning Guide

Idle Speed Tuning

Idle Speed Control in Emtune has comprehensive functions. There are a multiple tuning parameters, target, and position compensations.

Ignition timing is a contributing factor to engine idle speed. Please make sure you have reasonable timing being commanded by the ECU to make idle speed configuration go smoothly and function consistently.

** If planning to use idle ignition control, the static value for tuning idle speed should be in between the working range of the idle ignition control for both systems to be affective.

Example: Idle Ignition Clamp 0-25 degrees.  Lock timing at 12.5 degrees.  

Commanding ignition timing off the main ignition table is recommended for first startup of an engine. The values in the main table can later be edited once functions (like Idle Ignition Control) are subsequently added.

Tuning Idle Speed Control

Regardless of the system being used, starting idle speed control in open loop is best.

Initial Position:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Initial Position Table

This is the feed forward position for the idle speed control.

The value in this table is constant regardless of idle speed lockouts, except if DBW or DBW TMF modes.

** Initial Position can always be compensated by Position Offsets

Example:     Idle Target = 800rpm

         Idle Position = 37.5% (with closed loop enabled)

Idle speed is then locked out due to throttle position and engine speed (10%TP, 3000PRM)

Initial Position = 40%

Idle Position = 40% until lockouts are satisfied (engine rpm, TP, etc)

Units in this table vary depending on the Idle Speed Control method used,

IE - Stepper count for stepper motor, Duty cycle for solenoid, DBW position, or Target Throttle Mass Flow

Image Image

It is recommended to configure one of the axes of the Initial Position table to an Idle Target Speed (Main Idle Target, see below).

Initial Position can be compensated several ways under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Position Offsets

** Position compensations (comp tables) add/subtract to the initial position

** This is the feed forward if closed loop control is used

Main Idle Target:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Main Idle Target Table

This table allows you to build an idle target speed in RPM

Image Image

Like all Emtron tables, different runtimes are available for axis configuration making the system very flexible.

** This table is active if the Idle Ignition Control function is turned on as well.

Once you have a base set up for initial position and main idle target, match the initial position to target idle speed during different engine environmental conditions (most commonly engine temperature).

With this properly configured, going back to the Main Idle Target Table in different operating conditions should make the engine speed change and match the target accordingly.

** A good open loop configuration is the basis for enabling Closed Loop Control.

Main Idle Target can be adjusted by several offset tables under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Target Offsets

Closed Loop Control

Depending on the system being used, closed loop settings will vary. Basic PID tuning principles apply.

See specific examples below for notes on individual systems regarding Closed Loop (when applicable)

2 Wire Idle Solenoid

A Two Wire Idle solenoid is generally supplied power and the ECU Aux Output pulse the other pin to open the valve.

Units in position tables are in %Duty

Typical frequencies for 2 Wire Idle Solenoids are 50-250hz

Closed loop:

2 Wire Idle Solenoids often have a default air bleed position when they are not powered (failure position). The min and max deviation from the initial position when using closed loop must be carefully configured so the idle valve does not fall into those ranges while the engine is running. Otherwise the idle engine speed will not be able to be controlled.

Example:

0-20% = default position air/bleed. At 0% (same as being powered off), the idle valve is flowing air through the mechanical default air bleed to prevent engine stall. It then closes completely at 20%.

20-100% re-opens the idle valve with precision. This is the range the ECU must operate in for good idle speed control.

3 Wire Idle Solenoid

A 3 Wire Idle solenoid is generally supplied power from the EFI Relay circuit and the ECU Aux Outputs pulse the second and third extra pins to open and close the valve.

The Idle Speed Solenoid output should be the opening winding.

The Idle Slave Solenoid output should be the closing winding.

Image Image

Units in position tables are in %Duty

The ECU mirrors the opposite of the opening duty on the slave channel (closing wining), providing more accurate open loop positioning vs 2 wire idle solenoids.

IE –

Idle Speed Solenoid Output 75%

Idle Slave Solenoid Output 25%

Idle Speed Solenoid Output 30%

Idle Slave Solenoid Output 70%

The frequency of the valve is configured in output setup (See Idle Speed Setup).

Typical frequencies for 3 Wire Idle Solenoids are 50-250hz

Bi-Polar/Uni-Polar Stepper Motor

DC Stepper Motors convert rotation into step counts which the ECU can move incrementally to change the amount of air bleeding around the closed throttle. See wiring guides regarding wiring different types of stepper motors.

Image Image

Units in position tables are in Steps from Closed position

** Stepper Valves have extra settings such as “Closed position is reset either at Key On/Off” under:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Idle Speed Control Setup

DBW (1, 1 + 2)

When set to DBW 1, or DBW 1+2, the ECU will use the DBW motor position to control idle speed of the engine.

Units in position tables are in raw DBW position.

** DBW Control must be fully configured

** DBW PID must be set up accurately to ensure precision during Idle Speed due to the air flow being very sensitive to airflow vs DBW position (especially with a large throttle body).

Setting Initial Position Table

A good way to initially set up DBW motor position is recommended to lockout idle speed completely and work off the Pedal to Throttle Demand Table:

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table

Once the engine is idling at the appropriate RPM, use Runtimes to look at what the raw DBW position/Throttle Position to populate the Initial Position Table.

Image Image

Initial Position built off above examples at operating temperature. Estimation for extra air flow can be extrapolated regarding colder temps and blended as shown (must be checked on cold start).

** Position is much more sensitive to air flow than solenoids or stepper motors

Transitioning smoothly from Idle Speed to Pedal Demand

Because the Idle Speed Control Initial Position is controlling the DBW target, when the idle speed control is locked out (pedal is pushed), the DBW target will transition back into the Pedal to Throttle Demand Table. It is important to have a minimum position that corresponds to somewhere close to the idle Initial Position. If 0% (or a lower number than Idle Initial Position) is targeted in the Pedal Demand Table, the engine may stall/stumble due to lack of airflow.

Image Image

Initial Position Highlighted

Image Image

Pedal Demand Highlighted

** Throttle Body Area Table is 1:1 in this example

** If Throttle Body Area is worked out, then Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation Table will not match DBW initial position, and the raw position needed will need to be matched vs Throttle Body Area

** If Throttle Body Area Table is worked out, then Idle Speed Control mode should be DBW 1/1 + 2 TMF

Closed loop:

Using Closed Loop Control with DBW Idle Speed Control (%TP/%DBW Servo Posn) requires much less aggressive PID settings and limits. The reason for this is only a small change to the DBW position is needed to make a large affect on airflow.

For initial setup use the following PID settings:

Image Image

Proportional Gain Table = 0.00

Integral Gain Table = 0.025

Derivative Gain Table = 0.00

Min/Max Deviation from Initial Position Table = +/- 1%

The above settings will limit how quickly the Closed Loop will change the initial position, and limit how far the throttle can be moved from the initial position.

** Final settings will probably have less minimum deviation than max deviation for Anti-Stall functions

DBW (1 TMF, 1 + 2 TMF)

When set to DBW 1 TMF, or DBW 1+2 TMF, the ECU will use the DBW motor position to control idle speed of the engine based on a target Throttle Mass Flow of air. For DBW applications, this function is superior to any other type of idle speed control, especially with the closed loop function.

Units in position tables are in raw grams per second (g/s).

** DBW Control must be fully configured

** DBW PID must be set up accurately to ensure precision during Idle Speed due to the air flow being very sensitive to airflow vs DBW position (especially with a large throttle body).

Setting Initial Position Table

Since Throttle Mass Flow is the target, The Throttle Body Area table must be configured in the Throttle Body Model. Because that function needs to be tuned previously, setting the throttle target at a static number, or using regular DBW Idle Speed mode to get the engine running/idling may be a good start.

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Body Area Table

Image Image

Once the throttle area is worked out (see Throttle Mass Flow), the ECU will generate Throttle Mass Flow runtimes.

This is the expected airflow in g/s for the engine at a given idle rpm & temperature. A channel Air Mass Final – Flow g/s, generates the actual airflow consumed by the engine.

Use this runtime to help set the values in this table. The more accurate this table is, the better the closed loop idle control will function

Image Image

Transitioning smoothly from Idle Speed to Pedal Demand

Because the Idle Speed Control is targeting a Throttle Mass Flow, the transition to Pedal Demand is much easier.

** Works best if Throttle Area is correct

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range and Decay

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Idle Speed Control Lockouts (TMF)

When using TMF for Idle Speed Control, some extra settings are available to make the Idle Speed Control even more flexible.

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range raises the idle target when locked out until the Idle Speed Lockouts are satisfied again. This adds somewhat of a “dashpot” function to the system as if your Target Mass Flow is RPM based (like the above example), the Idle Speed will go to the Idle Speed Target PLUS the Target Tracking RPM.

Idle Target Tracking Decay then subsequently removes the Target Tracking Range in RPM/second

Good staring numbers are as follows:

Idle Target Tracking RPM Range = 100

Idle Target Tracking Decay = 25

Image Image

Closed loop:

TMF Closed Loop control is superior to standard DBW Position Idle Control due to higher resolution targeting Mass Flow vs small DBW position changes.

For initial setup use the following PID settings:

Image Image

Proportional Gain Table = 0.50

Integral Gain Table = 0.050

Derivative Gain Table = 0.25

Min/Max Deviation from Initial Position Table = +/- 3.00g/s

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Valve Area Table

Idle Valve Area Table %

Tuning –> Engine Functions –> Throttle Body Model –> Idle Valve Area Table %

Image Image

Image Image

When Throttle Mass Flow is utilized without a DBW throttle - I.E: 3: ON x1 Cable Throttle Body

The area of the idle valve needs to be accounted for in the TMF calculation.

The Idle Valve Area Table % allows setting & adjustment of the correlation between Idle Valve Area and the Idle valve step position or duty cycle. These values then feed into the airmass calculation and add to the Throttle Area Demanded and Throttle Effective Area

The table is user generated & should be verified for accuracy.

Method 1 – MAF verification

If the application is using a calibrated MAF sensor.  Then the idle valve area % can be adjusted and matched to TMF air mass VS MAF air mass at different idle air control valve step positions/duty cycle.  

Method 2 – Matching Lambda

If no MAF sensor is available, setting fuel trims to 0 (or near 0), you can adjust the idle valve area to match the target mixture very quickly

(throttle area verification required prior to these steps)

** The only way to truly validate error in the TMF calculation is to use Method 1

** Some extreme applications where live Lambda is unstable may be more difficult to map with Method 2

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Main Idle Target Table

Main Idle Target Table

This look up table tells the ECU the desired RPM target for Idle Speed Control.  

Image Image

Above example shows the table spanned in 3D using Engine Temperature and Ground speed as axis.  

** This target table is also used for Idle Ignition Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Main Idle Target Table

Main Idle Target Table

This look up table tells the ECU the desired RPM target for Idle Speed Control.  

Image Image

Image Image

Above example shows the table spanned in 3D using Engine Temperature and Drive speed as the axis.  

**** This target table is also used for Idle Ignition Control ****

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Initial Position Table

Initial Position Table

This look up table defines the base position of the idle speed control valve.  

If a 2 or 3 wire Idle Solenoid is used, then this a base duty cycle to define position.

Units = % Duty Cycle

Image Image

If a stepper motor, these are step counts from the closed position.

Units = Step Count

Image Image

If DBW, this is a feed forward table for the electronic throttle positioning.  

Units = Drive By Wire Servo Position 

Image Image

If DBW TMF, this is a feed forward table for air flow in g/s for the electronic throttle positioning.

Units = Throttle Mass Flow g/s

Image Image

** Recommended Axis Configuration is Engine Temp vs Idle Speed Target for Closed Loop control\

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Initial Position Table g/s

Initial Position Table (g/s)

Image Image

This is a feed forward table for air flow in g/s for the electronic throttle positioning.

Units = Throttle Mass Flow g/s

Image Image

Above example shows the table spanned in 3D using Engine Temperature and Idle target RPM as the axis.

Image Image

 **Tuning Tip**: As a feed forward table, this is the expected airflow in g/s for the engine at a given idle rpm & temperature.

                             The actual airflow consumed by the engine is found in the Air Mass Final – Flow g/s runtime.

                             Use this runtime to help 1Nsigh7set the values in this table.

                             The more accurate this table is, the better the closed loop idle control will function

                             See the example given below

Image Image

The above example shows a typical R35 Nissan GTR Initial Position table g/s and how this correlates to the Air Mass Final value  

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Integral Gain Table

Integral Gain Table

Integral gain controls how much adaptive correction is needed.

This parameter can be expanded into a 3D look up table to provide greater accuracy regarding closed loop control.  

I is Gain * 0.01 *Idle Target Error to convert to g/s added – counts/increments with the control frequency

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Fan Offset Target Table

Engine Fan Offset Target Table

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Startup Offset Target Table

Start-up Target Offset Table

Start-up offset works in conjunction with Start-up Idle Hold Time, and Start-up Idle Decay Rate under Idle Speed Control Setup

Image Image

Image Image

  The above example is spanned in 3D using intake air temperature and Engine Temperature

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Target Offsets

Target Offsets

Offset Target Tables

Allows the user to define a target change to the Main Idle Target table (RPM) during the specified functions:

Startup offset works in conjunction with Startup Idle Hold Time, and Startup Idle Decay Rate under Idle Speed Control Setup

These tables can be expanded into a 3D look up table using any runtime for the axis.\

** These values offset RPM units

Target Offsets are specific tables and 2 additional user definable tables.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Idle Ignition Control

The Emtron ECU supports idle speed control via ignition timing correction.

Image Image

Select the control system and appropriate outputs via

Config -> Function Setup -> Engine Functions -> Idle Ignition Control -> ON

Idle Ignition Control Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Idle Ignition PID Enable

Enables Idle Ignition closed loop PID. Without closed loop, the system will still reference the Base Idle Ignition Table (recommended ON).

  • 0: OFF
  • 1: ON

Idle Ignition Clamp Hi/Lo

Sets the minimum and maximum ignition angle the Idle Ignition Control can apply to the Base Timing setting.

Typical: 5 Deg (min), 22 Deg (max)

Idle Ignition Lockouts

Image Image

TP1/PP1 Lockout

Throttle position below which Idle Ignition Control can become active

When “Pedal Position 1” input is active this channel will be used. Otherwise ‘Throttle Position 1"input is used.

Typical : 2%

Speed Channel

Used to define how the “Speed Lockout” is used.

Speed inputs must be defined and properly calibrated under “Input Setup”

Speed Lockout

Locks out Idle Ignition Control when the speed is greater than or equal to this value (KPH).

Typical : 5.0

** Speed Channel must be defined.

Idle Range Lockout

The engine speed must fall below the Idle Target + Idle Range Lockout before Idle Ignition Control becomes active.

Example:

Idle Target = 800 (set from Idle Speed Control menu)

Idle Range Lockout = 400.

Idle Speed Control will become active when the engine speed falls below 1200 RPM.

Typical: 400 RPM

Post Start Delay

Delay after the engine speed has exceeded the crank exit RPM before Idle Ignition Control becomes active.

Typical : 2 sec

Re-entry Delay

Delay once all lockouts are cleared before Idle Ignition Control becomes active.

Base Idle Ignition Table

Defines the base ignition angle of the idle ignition control.

This table can be expanded into a 3D look up table using any runtime for axis.

Image Image

Above example shows the table spanned using Idle Target error & dRPM

  • Idle Target error references Idle Speed Control Main Idle Target table

** dRPM is the engine Speed rate of change

Idle Ignition Closed Loop Contro

Image Image

The Emtron ECU adds closed loop correction factors to Idle Speed Ignition functions.

This means it can added closed loop correction factors on top of the base idle ignition angle based on engine speed rate of change VS idle speed target.

Idle Ignition PID Setup

Image Image

Control Rate

The frequency or rate at which the PID control algorithm calculations are performed.

Typical : 10 Hz

Idle Ignition Deadband +/-

The output control signal is held constant when the Input Signal (RPM) falls within the deadband range of the Setpoint (RPM Target). This helps reduce steady state error and oscillations.

Typical : 25 RPM

RPM Filter

Filters the RPM signal to allow better PID control

Typical : 5

Integral Positive/Negative Clamp

Allows the user to set the minimum and maximum Integral gain compensation used by the closed loop system.

Idle Ignition PID Gain

Image Image

Proportional Gain

Proportional gain controls how aggressive instantaneous correction must be.

Integral Gain

Integral gain controls how much adaptive correction is needed.

Derivative Gain

Derivative gain controls predictive correction. This function is used to prevent overshooting targets by looking at a number of factors like rate of change, and P and I gain.

Commonly the I gain is not used and this allows the control oscillate over and below the Base Ignition Timing value. This can be important when operating the system in conjunction with an Idle Control valve so the valve position required can remain close to it’s Feed Forward value.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Position Offsets

Offset Position Tables

Allows the user to define a target change to the Initial Position table (Duty Cycle, Step counts, or DBW motor position) during the specified functions:

These tables can be expanded into a 3D look up table using any runtime for the axis.

** These values offset Duty Cycle when using a solenoid, Step counts if using a stepper motor, or Position if using DBW.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Knock Control

Knock Channel Cylinder

Knock Channel Cylinder

Select the appropriate Knock Channel (Knock Sensor) for each cylinder

Image Image

Example - V8 Chev LSA with two knock inputs

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Knock Control Setup

Tuning Knock Control

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Knock Control -> Knock Control Setup

Image Image

Knock Control Setup

Image Image

  • Knock Gain - Gain added to knock signal (can multiply)
  • Knock Mode - 0 = Global 1 = Individual (allows ECU to detect per cyl)
  • Short Term Retard Gain - Retard for each percentage over the knock threshold
  • Short Term Advance Rate - Rate at which timing is reintroduced when Short Term Retard is 0
  • Short Term Retard Limit - Maximum Short Term Retard that can be applied
  • Long Term Retard Gain - Long Term Retard applied based on Short Term Retard
  • Long Term Advance Rate - Rate at which timing is reintroduced to Long Term Trim when Short Term Retard is 0
  • Long Term Retard Limit - Maximum Long Term Retard that can be applied
  • Knock Window Start Angle - Point at which ECU will start to sample the Knock Signal
  • Knock Window Angle - The length in degrees in which the ECU will sample the Knock Signal

** Knock Window Angle must be less than the angle between TDCs

<90 degrees V8

<60 degrees V12

Knock Lockouts

  • RPM Lo Lockout - Knock Control will be OFF below this RPM
  • RPM Hi Lockout - Knock Control will be OFF above this RPM
  • Post Start Delay - Delay in which Closed Loop Knock detection is active
  • TP Lockout - Minimum Throttle Position before Knock detection is active
  • dTP Lockout - Maximum Throttle Rate of Change in which Knock detection can become active
  • dMAP Lockout - Maximum Manifold Pressure Rate of Change in which Knock detection can become active
  • User Lockout - Allows user to create custom lockout channel

Knock Channel Cylinder

Select the appropriate Knock Channel (Knock Sensor) for each cylinder

Image Image

Example - 6 cylinder with two knock inputs

Knock Threshold Table

Table in which the maximum allowable measured Knock Level is allowed

Knock Threshold Cyl Gain Table

Used to multiply the signal gain per cylinder

** The X-Axis MUST be set to the Cylinder Numbers

Knock Level Cyl Gain Table

Used to multiple the knock level per cylinder

** The X-Axis MUST be set to the Cylinder Numbers

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Knock Control

Knock Control Introduction

All Emtron ECU’s have Knock control, using inputs from a piezoelectric sensor. The ECU monitions the knock level for individual cylinders over a user defined crank angle window.

Each knock input is fully differential, giving superior common-mode noise rejection in the harsh automotive environment. The ECU starts by passing the analog signal from the knock sensor (piezoelectric) through an anti-aliasing signal conditioning filter before using Bosch integrated circuit technology for advanced digital signal processing. The digital filter is a fully programmable  finite impulse response (FIR) filter allowing the user to adjust both the centre frequency and bandwidth. This is extremely powerful and very flexible, allowing the user to customise the filter design to suit the application.

Hardware Specification

  • SL4 - Single knock input
  • SL8/KV8/12/16 - Dual knock input

Knock Control Function Enable

Config ->Functions -> Function Output Setup -> Engine Functions -> Knock Control

Or

Utilities ->Knock Studio ->Knock Control

Disabled = Function is switched off

Enabled = Function is switched on

Filter Window Type

The effects of Filter Window can be visually seen when the different options are selected. It is a complicated topic, but basically a Window function is used to limit the signal in time and generate a different frequency response. The Hamming window provides tighter bandwidth control, requiring the centre frequency to be more accurate. The Blackman has a slightly more relaxed bandwidth by comparison and therefore the centre frequency is not as critical.

  • None = Using raw Digital Filtering with no windowing
  • Hamming
  • Blackman

Centre Frequency = Central frequency the knock control will operate at. This is the dominant frequency the engine is expected to knock at.

An estimation or initial guess of the knock frequency can be done using this basic equation. This is ONLY a starting point and should be verified on the vehicle.

Knock Frequency(Hz) = 1800 x 1000 = 1800 x 1000

             Piston Circumference(mm)            3.14 x Piston Diameter (mm)

Example . Piston Diameter 85mm. Knock Frequency = 1800 / (3.14 x 85mm) x 1000 = 6744 Hz

Bandwidth = Defines the frequency range (higher = wider) over which the knock control will operate. Outside that range all knock signals will be ignored. The engine will never knock at exactly the same frequency every time due to changes in combustion pressure and temperature, so the correct bandwidth is important. Too small and important knock events might be missed, too big and normal engine noise may contaminate the knock data. Typical values are recommend at 200 - 400Hz.

The below example shows the setup for a Centre frequency of 7000Hz and Bandwidth if 200Hz.

Image Image

Knock Control using the 2nd harmonic

Sometimes an engines noise profile at the base frequency or 1st harmonics shows an indistinguishable difference between a knock event and normal engine noise. In this situation the 2nd harmonics (double the base frequency) can be used to achieve a better signal to noise ratio on a true knock event.

For example a Subaru engine has a knock frequency (1st harmonic) of approximately 6.0Khz. The second Harmonics would therefore be 12.0khz. If the engine noise profile at 6.0Khz showed an indistinguishable difference between a knock event and engine noise, the centre frequency off 12.0Khz could be used.

NOTE:

  • There are 2 types of knock sensors, “wide-band” and “tuned”. Wide-band sensor will work over a range of 0 -20Khz, whereas a “tuned” sensor is designed to have a resonant frequency, producing a larger output level at the one frequency.
  • Tuned knock sensors usual operate at the 2nd harmonic

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Knock Cylinder Gain Tables

Knock Threshold Cyl Gain Table

This table is used to apply a multiplication factor to the knock threshold applied to cylinders individually.

The default table value is 1.00 giving equivalence to the Knock Threshold Table

By adjusting this table, one can bend the knock threshold across an alternative runtime and also each cylinder individually.

The Y-Axis can spanned across any runtime or disabled

** The X-Axis MUST be set to the Cylinder Numbers

Image Image

Example show - Porsche 996

This table is user defined and should only be adjusted and validated by an experienced tuner.

Image Image

Knock Level Cyl Gain Table

This table is used to multiply the knock level measured at each cylinder individually

This is table is commonly used to effectively quieten noisy cylinders in relation to others to enable the use of a tight knock overall knock threshold.

By adjusting this table, one can bend affect volume of the knock signal source across an alternative runtime and also each cylinder individually.

Agani, the Y-Axis can spanned across any runtime or disabled. This table can be used on it’s own or together with the (Above) Knock Threshold Cyl Gain Table

This table is user defined and should only be adjusted and validated by an experienced tuner.

** The X-Axis MUST be set to the Cylinder Numbers

Image Image

Example show - Porsche 996 spanned against uncorrected engine torque

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Knock Lockouts

Knock Lockouts

Image Image

  • RPM Lo Lockout - Knock Control will be OFF below this RPM
  • RPM Hi Lockout - Knock Control will be OFF above this RPM
  • Post Start Delay - Delay in which Closed Loop Knock detection is active
  • TP Lockout - Minimum Throttle Position before Knock detection is active
  • dTP Lockout - Maximum Throttle Rate of Change in which Knock detection can become active
  • dMAP Lockout - Maximum Manifold Pressure Rate of Change in which Knock detection can become active
  • User Lockout - Allows user to create custom lockout channel

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Knock Studio

Knock Studio

The ECU uses a high precision digital filter to detect engine knock. To achieve high accuracy the center frequency and bandwidth of the filter are controlled from this menu.

A Filter Window is a mathematical function that overlays the filter design helping to enhance the filter design. This effect of these different windows can be viewed using this Knock Studio. Testing different windows is recommend to select the option that gives the best signal to noise ratio.

Once the filter design is complete, pressing Ok allows the filter coefficients to be calculated and the Knock Control system is ready to be used.

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Knock Threshold Table

Knock Threshold Table

This table defines the permissible maximum measured Knock Level

That is, in the logger, the knock threshold is the value (or line) that once crossed is considered knock.

If this table is set too high, knock will not be detected.

Both the X & The Y-Axis can spanned across any runtime or disabled

Engine Torque (Uncorrected) & Engine RPM are commonly used (See example below)

This table is user defined and must be validated by the tuner.

Image Image

Example Shown - Porsche 996 (Uncorrected engine toque spanned against rpm)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Lambda Control

Dual Lambda Cylinder Setup

Dual Lambda Cylinder Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Chev LS Engine example

Select the appropriate sensor for each cylinder

0 = La1

1 = La2

** Normally corresponds to which bank the Lambda sensor is installed in.

** Does not correspond to Bank Cylinder Setup

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Control PID Setup

Lambda Control PID Setup

Image Image

Image Image

0 - Standard = Basic P Gain Controller

1 - Revised = More advanced PI Gain Controller

La1 Deadband - Deadband for CL to operate within for Lambda Sensor 1

La2 Deadband - Deadband for CL to operate within for Lambda Sensor 2

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Control Setup

Lambda Control Setup

Image Image

Image Image

  • Engine Temp Lockout - Engine temp above which Lambda Control can become active
  • RPM Lo Lockout - Lambda control will be switched OFF below this RPM
  • RPM Hi Lockout - Lambda control will be switched OFF above this RPM
  • Recovery Delay - Delay in which Lambda Control can become active once within the lockout criteria
  • Post Start Delay - Delay in which Lambda Control can become active after start up

d**** NOTE: When using the Internal Lambda the Closed Loop will not start until either or both sensors are ready to operate.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Control - Wide Band

Lambda Control - Wideband

All Emtron ECU’s can support closed loop wideband lambda control using various methods. KV series ECUs have two internal wideband control systems that allow the user to wire lambda sensors directly to the ECU. In addition to this, Emtron ELC (Emtron Lambda to CAN) devices may be connected over CAN networking (included in all Emtron ECUs), and even an external Lambda controller that has a standard AV output can be used.

Hardware specification

  • SL4/SL8 - No internal lambda control. Use ELC, standard AV, user CAN
  • KV8/12/16 - Dual internal lambda control, and/or ELC, standard AV, user CAN

Select the control system and appropriate outputs:

Config View -> Function Setup -> Engine Functions -> Closed Loop Lambda Control

OFF = Function is switched off and the selected output channels are deallocated.

ON = Function is switched on

Function Type

  • Wideband Control – Lambda 1 Channel = Single Lambda input using Lambda Channel 1
  • Wideband Control – Lambda 2 Channel = Single Lambda input using Lambda Channel 2
  • Wideband Dual Control (La1 + La2) = Dual Lambda inputs using Lambda Channel 1 and 2
  • Narrowband Control – Sensor 1 = Single narrowband input on channel 1(See Narrowband Lambda)
  • Narrowband Control – Sensor 2 = Single narrowband input on channel 2 (See Narrowband Lambda)
  • Dual Narrowband Control (Sensor 1+2) = Dual narrowband input on both channels (See Narrowband Lambda)

Input Channel Selection

Emtron Lambda inputs must be defined under input selection.

Config View -> Inputs -> Input Pin Setup ->Engine ->

Lambda 1 – Select input

Lambda 2 – Select input

Input selection is as follows

  • Internal Lambda 1 - Uses internal lambda controller #1 (KV series only)
  • Internal Lambda 2 - Uses internal lambda controller #2 (KV series only)
  • CAN ELC #x Ch-x - Defines which ELC channel to use (See Emtron ELC)
  • ANV x - Define and calibrate as standard AV input
  • CAN Lambda x - Define input as user received CAN input (see CAN Bus)
  • CAN NTK EL-4 x - For use with NTL Lambda Controller EL-4

Input options

  • Pressure Correction - Lambda sensors can have EMAP compensation enabled (see Exhaust Back Pressure)

  • Calibration Type - Select Custom for configuring ANV input, or Predefined if using internal Lambda controller,

                                                                Emtron ELC, or NTK EL-4
    
  • Predefined Calibration - Select LSU internal or NTK EL-4

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Transport Delay Guide

Lambda Transport Delay Tuning Guide

The Lambda Closed Loop system is a fairly standard PID routine (with Proportional, Integral, and Derivative gains). See the Lambda Control - Wide Band section for more details

However, for it to function correctly, latency from o2 sensors signals must be programmed/tuned into the ECU system. This is known as “Lambda Transport Delay”

** Physical location/distance from the engine or pre-/post-turbo configuration of o2 sensors will affect transport delay

Tuning -> Engine Functions -> Lambda Control - Wideband -> Lambda Transport Delay

Image Image

Tuning Lambda Transport Delay

Lambda Transport Delay is often confused as a measurement of time it takes for the lambda to reach lambda targets (once lambda is changed), however

Lambda transport delay = the time (in seconds) measured it takes for the lambda to start once target has changed

A simple way to tune this function is to put the engine at varying loads and make lambda target change while logging. Measure with the differences cursor (“D”) in the logger to see the time it takes for the lambda to change from the original value to the new value. This is your “Lambda Transport Delay”

Image Image

Next, populate the transport delay value (in seconds), into the “Lambda Transport Delay” table.

Image Image

** Example shown is 2D following Air Mass Flow Final (g/s) - but a 3D table axis is available for using standard values such as RPMxMAP, etc.

Repeat the process for varying loads to populate the transport delay table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda Transport Delay

Lambda Transport Delay

Image Image

3D table that defines the delay in which the Lambda sensor reports its input

** A sensor placed very far down the exhaust stream will have a larger delay

** Transport delay is dependent on engine load. Higher exhaust velocity reduces delay

Image Image

Axis is spanned via RPM x TP. Any runtime can be used

***Transport delay can affect closed loop fuel PID routine.

Image Image

Tuning Tip:

The Lambda Transport Delay table time factor can be validated using the Emtune Logger by changing the Lambda Target table at varying loads.

By utilizing the Differences mode of the logger to measure the time it takes for the Lambda to start changing after the Lambda Target table is manipulated, you are able to verify & validate your Lambda Transport Delay Table time factor is correct.

Bare in mind, once the engine is tuned. IE: The VE table agrees with the Lambda Target Table.

The VE table then becomes the feed forward value for the closed loop Wideband Lambda control PID routine.

The more accurate your transport delay table is. The better your closed loop Wideband Lambda control will be.

*See Lambda Transport Delay Guide*

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lean LTFT Limit Table

Lean LTFT Limit Table

Image Image

Units define the maximum lean (negative) compensation for closed loop fueling

Image Image

Axis configuration is open. Example shows limited fuel trimming under higher engine loads.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

LTFT Range Table

LTFT Range Table

Image Image

Image Image

There are 10 ranges which can be set by the user in a 3D table. Each number defines a range.

Each range allows for storage of LTFT values.

This allows the user to define “zones” so that different LTFT learning values do not affect each other, but also allow the trims to be fed forward appropriately

When in this range the LTFT looks at the STFT and loads values for these ranges.

A value of “0” disables the LTFT for that zone

LTFT Range Values can be viewed in Runtimes under Lambda as well

Image Image

** Note - LTFT Range Values clear on ECU Power Cycle

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

LTFT Setup

LTFT Setup (Long Term Fuel Trim)

Image Image

Image Image

  • LTFT Post Start Lockout - Delay in which LTFT can become active after start up
  • LTFT Min Eng Temp Lockout - Minimum engine temperature for LTFT to become active
  • LTFT Max Eng Temp Lockout - Maximum engine temperature for LTFT to become active
  • LTFT Min STFT Lockout (+/-) - The minimum STFT allowed before LTFT can start correcting
  • LTFT Update Rate - Update rate for LTFT
  • Long Term Gain - Percentage of STFT applied per second

** For STFT Lockout -

Min STFT Lockout = +/- 2.5% The LTFT will start operating when the STFT is greater the 2.5% or less than -2.5%

** For Long Term Gain -

The Gain is percentage of the short term trim applied per second.

Example: Short Fuel Trim = 10.00%

Long Term Gain = 2.0%

Long Term Fuel Trim = 2.0% of 10.00% per second

Long Term Fuel Trim = 0.20% per second

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda LSU4.9 Sensor Control

Introduction

The KV series ECU has the ability to interface directly to a Bosch Lambda Sensor(s), model LSU4.9.

To achieve the optimal control of this sensor, the ECU uses a genuine Bosch Integrated Circuit technology. It provides very accurate data on pump current which equates to Lambda

and also Nernst Cell Temperature which is used for precise heater control.

The ECU assigns the correct the Heater Output Channel based on ECU Type and Serial Number. The only setup required to enable the Internal Lambda 1 or 2 control is from the Config View -> Inputs-> Engine tab.

  • If “Lambda 1” Input Channel has the Input Source selected to “Internal Lambda 1” the function becomes enabled.
  • If “Lambda 2” Input Channel has the Input Source selected to “Internal Lambda 2” the function becomes enabled

Image Image

Adjustments to the operation of On-board Lambda Sensor Control can be made from the Tuning view -> Engine Functions -> Internal LSU Sensor Control

The ECU uses all 6 sensor wires per sensor.

Sensor Shock

In some situations during normal operation, the sensor will temporally shutdown for between 0.5 sec to 2.5 secs. This is usually caused by a combination of sensor incorrect placement and Fuel type resulting in the sensor being “shocked” ; either thermally or by a pressure wave inside the exhaust system. For the correct sensor placement please read the Sensor Installation and Wiring topic.

Although the sensor shutdown is outside the ECU’s control, the status is constantly monitored. In the event of a shutdown the heater control is put into a Hold mode as it the Closed Loop Lambda.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Exhaust Back Pressure

Wideband Lambda sensors primarily count oxygen atom numbers through measuring the oxygen ion current within the sensors pump cell. The exhaust gas pressure affects this oxygen ion current – more pressure means more atoms per unit volume and a higher pump current at the same Lambda.i.e will cause the sensor to read farther from stoichiometric

  • A rich reading will appear richer than it really is.
  • A lean reading will appear leaner than it really

This predominantly becomes an issue in Turbocharged applications. This is the main reason you should position the sensor after the turbo where exhaust back-pressure is lowest.

When measuring Exhaust Back Pressure an Absolute Pressure Sensor MUST be used. (i.e do not used a Gauge Pressure Sensor)

The ECU can applied EMAP correction when enabled. This ONLY applies when the Internal LSU4.9 control is used. This correction is not available to data on Analog inputs or CAN channel as it requires precise correction the sensors Pump Current.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Rich LTFT Limit Table

Rich LTFT Limit Table

Image Image

Units define the maximum Rich (positive) compensation for closed loop fueling

Image Image

Axis configuration is open. Example shows limited fuel adding under higher engine loads.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Integral Gain Table

Integral Gain Table

Image Image

Integral gain controls how much adaptive correction is needed over time.

Image Image

0.1 is a good starting value

** Above example shows under higher engine loads Integral is phased out and under higher lambda target error. This is to help eliminate Integral corrections from interfering with Proportional correction

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lean STFT Limit Table

Lean STFT Limit Table

Image Image

Units define the maximum lean (negative) compensation for closed loop fueling

Image Image

Axis configuration is open. Example shows limited fuel trimming under higher engine loads.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Proportional Gain Table

Proportional Gain Table

Image Image

Proportional Gain controls how aggressive instantaneous correction is based on the current target error vs Transport Delay

Image Image

** When using Dual Lambda Control - Lambda 1/2 Target Error - Shared must be used for the gain table to operated on the individual sensors

** Transport Delay must be set correctly

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Rich STFT Limit Table

Rich STFT Limit Table

Image Image

Units define the maximum Rich (positive) compensation for closed loop fueling

Image Image

Axis configuration is open. Example shows limited fuel adding under higher engine loads.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Heater Control and Sensor Calibration

Heater Control

During engine start-up, condensation forms in the exhaust which may damage the sensor. It is recommended to only start heating the LSU sensor after the engine is running and the moisture content in the exhaust has evaporated. The ECU has settings to prevent this damage; “Heater RPM Lockout” and “Heater Post Start Lockout”

Typical Values:

Heater RPM Lockout = 500 RPM

Heater Post Start Lockout = 4.0 Sec

Calibration

The sensor is calibrated automatically by the ECU on power up. During the calibration process two important pieces of data are read:

  • The optimal Nernst Cell Temperature which is used for sensor heater control. The ELC applies duty cycle and a PID routine to maintain a constant and accurate heater temperature which results in a very stable and accurate Lambda value.
  • The Pump Current that corresponds to a Lambda reading of 1.000 Lambda.

NOTE: A Free-Air Calibration is NOT required on the LSU4.9. The sensor uses a reference pump current instead of reference air. The big advantage with this is that the reference is a calibrated electrical signal and remains constant.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Lambda NB Sensor Heater Control

The Narrow Band Oxygen Sensor heater can be controlled using either switched or PWM mode. The method of control is adjusted from the Config View, Function Setup menu.

Image Image

Switched Mode

  • This is the most basic mode and switches the heater channel ON after the Post Start Lockout has finished. Same setup as below except Output Mode = Switched.

Switched Mode (Table)

  • From Config View -> Functions, select the required Channel, either Heater 1 and 2 and open.
  • Select the Output Channel. In this example Sensor Heater 1 has been assigned to Auxiliary 4.
  • Select Driver Type (Normally Low Side).
  • Select Output Mode = Switched (Table). This puts the heater control in switched mode and allows a 3D table to control the switching conditions.

NOTE: The Output Mode set to “Switched” has the same effect as “Switched (Table)”

  • Select Ok.
  • The setup is complete. Now move to the tuning view.

Image Image

  • In the tuning view select Engine Functions -> Narrow Band Heater 1 Table. This table now controls to switching of Auxiliary 4 and in turn controls the Lambda Heater.

** Important Table Rules in switched:**

Table value of 100     = Output ON

Table value of 0        = Output OFF

Any other value         = No change to the Output. This is user defined hysteresis. In the example below 50 is the value selected.

Image Image

PWM Mode

  • Select the required Channel, either Heater 1 and 2 then open the menu.
  • Select the Output Channel. In this example Sensor Heater 1 has been assigned to Auxiliary 4.
  • Select Driver Type (Normally Low Side).
  • Select Output Mode = PWM. This puts the heater control in PWM mode and allows a 3D table to control the duty cycle.
  • Select the Frequency.
  • Select Ok.
  • The setup is complete. Now move to the tuning view.

Image Image

  • In the tuning view select Engine Functions -> Narrow Band Heater 1 Table. This table now controls the Duty Cycle applied to Auxiliary 4 and in turn controls the Lambda Heater

** Important Table Rules in PWM mode:**

Table value of 100%     = 100% Duty Cycle

Table value of 0%    = 0% - Output is OFF

Table value of 30%    = 30% Duty Cycle

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Launch Control

RPM Control: Retard (PID) >Cutting (PID)

RPM Control: Retard (PID) >Cutting (PID):

Balancing “Torque Reduction – Retard” vs “Torque Reduction – Cut” is important when using both static and moving target modes for PID Launch Targeting.

Generally, timing retard is good for control of torque and can also help spool turbines in those applications.

However, during launch, as engine load/boost increases the potential engine torque, ignition timing can/will continue to retard to overcome engine speed from increasing.

** EGT, Turbine speed, and boost pressure must be considered, to determine the Static/Moving Ignition Retard Clamp points in their respective tables.

At these points of ignition trim/retard, the Launch system will switch to Launch Torque Reduction – Cut functions.

See:

Image Image

Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Table:

Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Table

The runtime %Torque Reduction – Retard is used.

The channel correlates to how much retard will be applied vs the amount of Torque Reduction requested.

This is a global function of the ECU, which is why it is under the Torque Management section.

Image Image

** Warning - The maximum value in this table (at 100% %Torque Reduction – Retard), must be at a higher value than the Static/Moving Ignition Retard Clamp

Static Mode Example Data:

Image Image

In the above static example, you can see the ECU holding the “Launch Torque Target” (Yellow Arrows) in the second plot.

This is done by Torque Reduction – Retard (Blue Arrow), until the load is increased by throttle and boost (Green Arrow).

The Launch Control system automatically controls the Launch Control Target with the required additional Torque Reduction Cut under the higher loads to control the Launch Torque Target (Orange Arrow).

Cuts are introduced once the Static Ignition Retard Clamp is reached.

Moving Mode Example Data:

Image Image

In this moving target example, the ECU is holding “Launch Torque Target” (Yellow Arrows) in the second plot by Torque Reduction – Retard alone.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

RPM Control: Throttle Plate(PID) + (Retard Table)

RPM Control: Throttle Plate(PID) + Retard (Table):

With a properly tuned Throttle Area table (Throttle Mass Flow), the ECU can calculate the outflow requirement for desired torque requests

In some cases depending onm the hardware, an open loop a timing retard table can be applied to generate “reserve” torque as well in Turbocharged applications.

** EGT, Turbine speed, and boost pressure should be considered

Static Mode Example Data:

Image Image

In the above static example, you can see the ECU holding the “Launch Torque Target” (Yellow Arrows) in the second plot.

This is done by adjusting final torque via Engine Torque (TMF) channels

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Arming

Launch Arming

Image Image

Image Image

Launch Arming Notes:

For the Launch System to become armed ALL the following conditions must be true.

(This means all these conditions are “ANDed” together)

  1. Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Arming

       *** AND ***
    
  2. Engine Speed > Arming RPM

       *** AND ***
    
  3. Clutch Switch Status = ON (when enabled)

       *** AND ***
    
  4. Clutch Position > Clutch Position Arming (when enabled)

       *** AND ***
    
  5. Speed > Arming Speed

       *** AND ***
    
  6. User Channel = ON (when enabled)

       *** AND ***
    
  7. Arming time > Arming Timer settings (s)

Launch TP/PP Arming

The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the TPS1 or PPS1 (if assigned) is above this value.

***NOTES ***

1: All remaining Arming Conditions MUST be be satisfied before the Launch Control becomes armed.

  1. The “Launch TP/PP Arming” setting MUST be greater than the “Launch TP/PP Disarming” setting.

0.0% = OFF

Clutch Switch Arming

Enables the Clutch Switch as an arming input for the Launch Control System. (Clutch Switch Status = ON)

***NOTES ***

1: All remaining Arming Conditions MUST be be satisfied before the Launch Control becomes armed.

2: Clutch Switch Input Channel MUST be configured

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Arming Timer

Once all the arming conditions are meet this timer will start. After this time is past the Launch Control system will become Armed.

0 = OFF.

Arming RPM

The minimum engine speed to exceed to arm the Launch control system.

***NOTES ***

1: All remaining Arming Conditions MUST be be satisfied before the Launch Control becomes armed.

  1. The “Arming RPM” setting MUST be greater than the “Disarming RPM” setting.

0 = OFF

Clutch Position Arming

The minimum clutch position percentage to arm the Launch control system. Values above this amount are armed

***NOTES ***

1: All remaining Arming Conditions MUST be be satisfied before the Launch Control becomes armed.

  1. The “Clutch Position Arming” setting MUST be greater than the “Clutch Position Disarming” setting.

  2. 100.0% Position = Clutch fully depressed

0 = OFF

Arming Speed

The Launch Control speed reference channel input source value below which the Launch Control system is armed

This ensures the vehicle is stationary or near stationary for Launch Control arming.

***NOTES ***

1: All remaining Arming Conditions MUST be be satisfied before

the Launch Control becomes armed.

Arming User Channel

Create a custom Arming method from a User Function.

The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the User Channel is ON.

***NOTES ***

1: All remaining Arming Conditions MUST be be satisfied before the Launch Control becomes armed.

0: OFF

1: User Output Channel 1

2: User Output Channel 2

3: User Output Channel 3

4: User Output Channel 4

5: User Output Channel 5

6: User Output Channel 6

7: User Output Channel 7

8: User Output Channel 8

9: User Output Channel 9

10: User Output Channel 10

.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Ignition Offset 1/2/3 (Deg)

Launch Ignition Offset 1/2/3 (Deg)

Image Image

Image Image

The Launch Ignition Offset Table is used to set the ignition retard applied when the Launch Control System is Armed.

Multiple or alternative Launch Ignition Offset tables can be activated via Launch Table control.

Tables are user defined.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control

Launch Control Config

Image Image

The following 2 modes are available for Launch Control:

  • RPM Limiting
  • Torque Limiting

RPM Limiting

This is a conventional RPM limiting mode where where ECU adjusts the engine cutting to achieve a target Launch RPM.

Torque Limiting

The ECU will limit and control the Engine Torque to achieve a Target RPM. The feedforward torque setting is used to achieve stable/constant RPM which

is typically 0 Nm. The ECU then applies a PID over the top to latch the engine speed to the Launch RPM Target.

The methods used by the ECU to control torque are user adjustable with the following options:

  1. DBW Plate Control(PID) + Ignition Retard(Table). The ECU will calculate the required DBW Throttle Area for the RPM Target/Torque Request and move the plate to the position. The ECU is able to calculate the plate position using the TMF calculations so this function MUST be calibrated correctly. An Ignition retard table can be used in an open-loop setup to reduce torque and the ECU will automatically correct for this torque loss during the TMF throttle plate calculation.

This mode is most suitable for road applications

  1. Engine Cutting(PID) + Retard(Table). The ECU will PID the Torque Target (closed loop) to achieve the correct Launch RPM Target. An Ignition retard table can be used in an open-loop setup (non ECU calculated) to help reduce Torque and spool turbos. The PID closed loop system will account for this Torque loss during the Engine Cut calculation.

This mode is most suitable for track applications

  1. Ignition Retard (PID) + Cutting (PID). The is a fully closed loop system with the ECU calculating both the Ignition Retard and %Cut to achieve the Launch RPM/Torque target. The ECU calculates the Retard first until the Retard clamped is reached, then removes any remaining Torque with %Cut.

This mode is most suitable for track applications

For tuning help see Launch Control (Nm) Setup and Launch Control Tuning Guides

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control (Nm) Setup

Launch Control (Nm)

Entry Range

Controls when the Launch Torque Limit function will turn ON.

The Launch Torque Limit and PID control will switch ON when the RPM enters set range of the Launch RPM Target.

This is a negative engine speed value that sets the range below the Launch RPM Target

Once ON it will latch and remain ON until the system exits to standby mode

Exit of the Launch control is user defined in Launch Disarming

Example:

Launch RPM Target = 4000

Entry Range = -200

Rpm < 3800 Launch Control Torque Limit is OFF

Rpm >= 3800 Launch Control Torque Limit is ON

Torque Target Margin

This setting is used to increase/decrease the Engine Torque Target once the engine is within the Entry Range of the Launch RPM Target.

The margin is added to the Launch Torque target on entry and decays to the Launch Torque Target at a linear rate as the engine approaches the Launch RPM Target.

Image Image

Tuning Tip:

Use 0Nm initially as a starting point. This setting is used to control the entry behavior.

*** If the engine is struggling to reach Launch Target, Increase Margin*

Example:

Launch RPM Target = 3000 RPM

Entry Range = -200 RPM

Launch Torque Target = 10 Nm

Launch Torque Target Margin = 100Nm

RPM < (Launch RPM Target - Entry Range ) the Torque Limit is OFF

RPM > (Launch RPM Target - Entry Range) the Torque Limit is latched ON

Rpm < 2800. Torque Limit OFF

Rpm = 2800. Torque Target = 10Nm + 100Nm = 110Nm

Rpm = 2850. Torque Target = 10Nm + 75Nm = 85Nm

Rpm = 2900. Torque Target = 10Nm + 50Nm = 60Nm

Rpm = 2950. Torque Target = 10Nm + 25Nm = 35Nm

Rpm = 3000. Torque Target = 10Nm + 0Nm = 10Nm

Launch Torque Transfer User Channel

Allows the User to control when the Torque Target transitions from “Static Torque Target” table to the “Launch Moving Torque Target”

***** This User MUST be set up or Launch Control will not enable***

Example:

Trans Brake Switch Status could be used as a user channel input to trigger the transition from Launch Torque Target to Launch Moving Torque Target

Image Image

Launch Static Mode Speed Lockout

When the speed input is greater than this value, the Launch System will lockout the “Static Torque Target" and maintain the “Moving Torque Target". This prevents the accidental return of the launch system back into Static Mode.

** NOTE: Make sure the “Launch Speed Reference Channel” is set correctly **

Typical Value = 10 kph

Launch Speed Reference Channel

Defines the speed channel used to Disarm/Arm the Launch Control System.

0: OFF

1: Drive Speed

2: Ground Speed

3: Drive Speed Front L

4: Drive Speed Front R

5: Drive Speed Rear L

6: Drive Speed Rear R

7: Undriven Speed Front L

8: Undriven Speed Front R

9: Undriven Speed Rear L

10: Undriven Speed Rear R

11: Front Axle Speed

12: Rear Axle Speed

13: Vehicle Speed

14: Engine Speed

15: Input Shaft Speed

16: Output Shaft Speed

17: GPS Speed

Launch Enable Switch Lockout

When set to ON the Launch Switch can be used to activate the Launch Control System.

0: OFF

1: ON

ET Lo Lockout

This is an under-temperature lockout. The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the Engine Temperature is greater than this value.

For the Launch System to be ready for arming the following must be true:

Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature > ET Lo Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature < ET Hi Lockout setting AND

User Lockout = ON (if enabled)

ET Hi Lockout

This is an over-temperature lockout. The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the Engine Temperature is less than this value.

For the Launch System to be ready for arming the following must be true:

Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature > ET Lockout setting AND

User Lockout = ON (if enabled)

Launch User Lockout

The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the User Channel (if assigned) is ON.

For the Launch System to be ready for arming the following must be true:

Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature > ET Lockout setting AND

User Lockout = ON (if enabled)

0: OFF

1: User Output Channel 1

2: User Output Channel 2

3: User Output Channel 3

4: User Output Channel 4

5: User Output Channel 5

6: User Output Channel 6

7: User Output Channel 7

8: User Output Channel 8

9: User Output Channel 9

10: User Output Channel 10

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control (Nm)

Launch Control (Nm)

This function of launch control utilizes the “Torque Management” function of the ECU.

A PID loop is utilized when “Static” mode is functional to control engine torque to run against Launch RPM Target

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control (RPM) Setup

Launch Control (RPM) Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Launch Control modes of operation.

  • Always On. The Launch Control system is always ON.
  • Clutch Switch Only

Arming: When the Clutch switch is ON the Launch control is armed.

Disarming: When the Clutch is OFF the Launch Control is in standby.

  • Speed Only.

Arming: When the Speed is less than the " Arming Speed" the Launch Control is armed.

Disarming: When the Speed is greater than the " Disarm Speed" the Launch control is back into standby mode.

  • Clutch and Speed.

Arming: When the Clutch switch is ON AND the Speed is less than the " Arming Speed" the Launch Control is armed.

Disarming: When the Speed is greater than the " Disarm Speed" the Launch control reverts back into standby mode.

NOTE: The Clutch switch is not used during disarming

Launch Speed Reference Channel

Sets speed channel referenced by launch control function - can be used to arm/disarm the Launch control system.

0: OFF

1: Drive Speed

2: Ground Speed

3: Drive Speed Front L

4: Drive Speed Front R

5: Drive Speed Rear L

6: Drive Speed Rear R

7: Undriven Speed Front L

8: Undriven Speed Front R

9: Undriven Speed Rear L

10: Undriven Speed Rear R

11: Front Axle Speed

12: Rear Axle Speed

13: Vehicle Speed

14: Engine Speed

15: Input Shaft Speed

16: Output Shaft Speed

17: GPS Speed

Launch Enable Switch Lockout

When set to ON, the Launch Enable Switch can be used to enable/disable the Launch control system.

0: OFF

1: ON

The launch enable switch is found in the software: Config >Channels >Input Setup >Motorsport >Launch Enable switch

ET Lo Lockout

This is an under-temperature or low engine temperature lockout.

The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the Engine Temperature is greater than this value.

This lockout references the Engine Temperature sensor

For the Launch System to be ready for arming the following must be true:

Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature > ET Lo Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature < ET Hi Lockout setting AND

User Lockout = ON (if enabled)

ET Hi Lockout

This is an over-temperature or high engine temperature lockout.

The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the Engine Temperature is less than this value.

This lockout references the Engine Temperature sensor

For the Launch System to be ready for arming the following must be true:

Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature > ET Lo Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature < ET Hi Lockout setting AND

User Lockout = ON (if enabled)

Launch User Lockout

The Launch Control system will be ready for arming when the User Channel (if assigned) is ON.

For the Launch System to be ready for arming the following must be true:

Throttle/Pedal > Launch TP/PP Lockout setting AND

Engine Temperature > ET Lockout setting AND

User Lockout = ON (if enabled)

0 = Off

Launch Limit Type

This sets the type of launch limit to be applied to control the engine speed

0: Fuel Cut Only

1: Ign Cut Only

2: Ign Cut + Fuel Cut

Cut Pattern

Where the cut pattern for engine speed limiting is set.

0: Random Pattern 1

1: Random Pattern 2

2: Sequential Pattern 1

3: Sequential Pattern 2

Ign Control Range (-/+)

Sets the engine speed range above or below the launch target rpm limit where ignition cut control is applied

Negative values start to the cut the ignition below the launch target rpm limit

Example: -200 RPM

200 rpm before the cut target the minimum cut clamped value is applied

The ignition cut percentage increases to the maximum cut clamp value at the launch rpm limit

Positive values are above the launch target rpm limit

Example: +200 RPM

At the Launch target rpm limit, the minimum cut clamp percentage value is applied

The ignition cut percentage increases to the maximum cut clamp value at 200 rpm above the Launch target rpm limit.

Ign Minimum %Cut Clamp

Sets the minimum ignition cut clamp percentage applied at the start of the control range

Ign Maximum %Cut Clamp

Sets the maximum ignition cut clamp percentage applied at the end of the control range.

Fuel Control Range (-/+)

Sets the engine speed range above or below the launch target rpm limit where fuel cut control is applied

Negative values start to the cut the fuel below the launch target rpm limit

Example: -200 RPM

200 rpm before the cut target the minimum cut clamped value is applied

The fuel cut percentage increases to the maximum cut clamp value at the launch rpm limit

Positive values are above the launch target rpm limit

Example: +200 RPM

At the Launch target rpm limit, the minimum cut clamp percentage value is applied

The fuel cut percentage increases to the maximum cut clamp value at 200 rpm above the Launch target rpm limit.

Fuel Minimum %Cut Clamp

Sets the minimum fuel cut clamp percentage applied at the start of the control range

Fuel Maximum %Cut Clamp

Sets the maximum fuel cut clamp percentage applied at the end of the control range.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control Tuning Guides

Launch Control Tuning Guides

Preliminary information:

For Torque Based Launch Control to work properly, the ECU torque calculations must be correct.

The calibration file must have accurate VE calculations, fuel injector data, etc.

Frictional loss tables of the engine are crucial for the correct torque calculations.

See the Torque Management Tuning Guide

Torque Reduction:

There are three methods of Torque Reduction that can be used regarding Launch Control.

Retarding ignition timing, cutting, or throttle area vs torque reduction % will reduce torque of the engine.

There are 3 different Launch RPM Torque Modes that can be selected in Launch Control Setup (See Launch Control Setup).

Image Image

Option 0: RPM control using Throttle Mass Flow + Retard.

The ECU will calculate the required throttle area for the RPM target and move the plate to the position. Ignition retard Torque loss will be factored into the calculation to give the correct plate position.

Option 1: RPM control using Cutting(PID) + Retard(Table).

The ECU will PID the Torque Target (closed loop) to achieve the correct Launch RPM Target. An Ignition retard table can be used in an open-loop setup (non ECU calculated) to help reduce Torque and spool turbos. The PID closed loop system will account for an Torque loss due the to retard.

Option 2: RPM control using Retard(PID) > Cutting(PID)

The is a fully closed loop system with the ECU calculating both the Retard and %Cut to achieve the Torque target. The ECU calculates the Retard first until the Retard clamped is reached, then removes any remaining Torque with %Cut.

Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Table:

Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Table

The runtime %Torque Reduction – Retard is used.

The channel correlates to how much retard will be applied vs the amount of Torque Reduction requested.

This is a global function of the ECU, which is why it is under the Torque Management section.

Image Image

** Warning - The maximum value in this table (at 100% %Torque Reduction – Retard), must be at a higher value than the Static/Moving Ignition Retard Clamp

Basic Launch Control Settings:

See Launch Control

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Control

Launch Control

Launch Control Function enable

Config > Function Setup > Motorsport Functions > Launch Control

Emtron has two methods of Launch Control

RPM Limiting - Standard control of Launch - with RPM targeting

Torque Limiting - Advanced control of Launch - With Torque targeting

Image Image

Runtimes

The following calculated runtimes are generated by Emtron that are Launch Control related (to be further discussed more specifically):

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Disarming

Launch Disarming

Image Image

Image Image

Launch Disarming Notes:

For the Launch System to become disarmed any the following conditions must be true with the exception of the User Channel.

(This means all these conditions are “ORed” together except the User Channel which is ANDed with all other conditions)

  1. Throttle/Pedal < Launch TP/PP Disarming

    *** OR ***
    
  2. Engine Speed < Disarming RPM

    *** OR ***
    
  3. Clutch Switch Status = OFF (when enabled)

    *** OR ***
    
  4. Clutch Position < Clutch Position Disarming (when enabled)

    *** OR ***
    
  5. Speed < Disarming Speed

    *** AND ***
    
  6. User Channel = ON (when enabled)

    *** AND ***
    
  7. Disarming time > Disarming Timer settings (s)

Launch TP/PP Disarming

The Launch Control system will be immediately disarmed when the TPS1 or PPS1 (if assigned) is less than this value

AND “Disarming User Channel = ON” (when assigned)

AND “Disarming Timer” has finished .

***NOTE ***

The “Launch TP/PP Arming” setting MUST be greater than the “Launch TP/PP Disarming” setting.

0.0% = OFF

Disarming Timer

Disarms Launch Control once all disarming condition are meet and this time has been reached.

0 = OFF.

Disarming RPM

The Launch Control system will immediately disarm when the Engine Speed is below this value

AND “Disarming User Channel” is ON (when enabled)

AND “Disarming Timer” has finished.

***NOTE ***

The “Arming RPM” setting MUST be greater than the “Disarming RPM” setting.

0 = OFF

Clutch Switch Disarming

When enabled, the Launch Control system will immediately disarm when the Clutch Switch is OFF

AND “Disarming User Channel” is ON (when enabled)

AND “Disarming Timer” has finished.

***NOTE ***

1: Clutch Switch Input Channel MUST be configured

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Clutch Position Disarming

When enabled, the Launch Control system will immediately disarm when the Clutch Position is less than this value

AND “Disarming User Channel “is ON (when enabled)

AND “Disarming Timer” has finished.

*** NOTES ***

  1. The “Clutch Position Arming” setting MUST be greater than the “Clutch Position Disarming” setting.

  2. 100.0% = Clutch fully depressed

0 = OFF

Disarm Speed

The Launch Control system will immediately disarm when the Launch speed reference channel input is greater than this value

AND “Disarming User Channel “is ON (when enabled)

AND “Disarming Timer” has finished.

NOTE: The “Disarming Speed MUST always be greater than “Arming Speed”.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch RPM Target 1/2/3

Launch RPM Target 1/2/3

Image Image

Image Image

The Launch RPM Target Table is used to set the engine speed limit target when the Launch Control System is Armed.

Multiple or alternative Launch target tables can be activated via Launch Table control.

Tables are user defined.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Fuel Enrich/Enlean 1/2/3

Launch Fuel Enrich/Enlean 1/2/3

Image Image

Image Image

The Launch Fuel Enrich/Enlean (%) Table is used to set amount of extra fuel added or removed when the Launch Control System is Armed.

Multiple or alternative Launch Fuel Enrich/Enlean tables can be activated via Launch Table control.

Tables are user defined.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Moving Torque Target Table

Launch Moving Torque Target Table

Image Image

3D Table with user selectable runtimes to allow a torque target during Moving Launch Mode to be entered.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Fuel Enrich/Enlean Table

Launch Fuel Enrich/Enlean Table

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch PID Setup

Launch PID Setup

Image Image

Image Image

Launch System Delay

This is the time delay for the system to react to changes. It is used to help integral gain windup. Typical setting is 100ms.

0 = 10ms

1 = 20ms

2 = 50ms

3 = 100ms

Launch Control Proportional Gain

Proportional gain controls how aggressive instantaneous correction must be.

Example:

A value of 1.00 will output +/- 10Nm

for every 100 RPM of Target error.

Launch Control Integral Gain

Integral gain controls how much adaptive correction is needed.

Launch Control Derivative Gain

Derivative gain controls predictive correction where gain is based on the rate of change of error.

Launch Control Integral Positive Clamp

Positive clamp value for Integral Gain

Units - NM

Launch Control Integral Negative Clamp

Negative clamp value for Integral Gain

Units - NM

Launch Control Max Torque Clamp

Positive clamp value for Torque Launch Control

Units - NM

Launch Control Min Torque Clamp

Minimum clamp value for Torque Launch Control

Units - NM

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Static Strat Select

Launch Static Strat Select

3D Table with user select-able runtimes to allow the user to dictate which Torque Strat Mode

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Moving Strat Select

Launch Moving Strat Select

3D Table with user select-able runtimes to allow the user to dictate which Torque Strat Mode

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Static Torque Target Table

Launch Static Torque Target Table

Image Image

3D Table with user selectable runtimes to allow a torque target during Static Launch Mode to be entered.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Status

0    Disabled    

1    OFF: TP/PP Lockout    

2    OFF: Launch En Sw    

3    OFF: User Lockout    

4    OFF: Engine Temp Hi    

5    Standby: Clutch Sw    

6    Standby: Clutch Posn    

7    Standby: Speed    

8    Standby: User CH    

9    Standby: Launch En Sw    

10    Standby: Timer active ...    

11    Standby: RPM    

12    Armed: Clutch Posn    

13    Armed: Speed    

14    Armed: User CH    

15    Armed: Launch En Sw    

16    Armed: Timer active...    

17    Armed: Clutch Sw    

18    Armed: RPM    

19    OFF: RPM = 0    

20    Standby: R35    

21    Armed: R35    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Launch Table Control

Launch Table Control

Image Image

Image Image

Selects the active control method of the Launch Control - 3 tables are available

0: .. Please Select

1: ON - Table 1

2: ON - Table 2

3: ON - Table 3

4: Not Available

5: ON - Cal Slot

6: Launch Select Table

  • Launch RPM Table. Sets the Launch RPM when the Launch Control System is Armed.

    • Size: 12 x 11
    • Resolution: 1 RPM
    • Max value = 20000 RPM
    • Min value = 0 RPM
  • Ignition Retard Table. Sets the amount of Ignition Retard used when the Launch Control System is Armed.

    • Size: 12 x 11
    • Resolution: 0.5 Deg
    • Max value = -100.0 Deg/%
    • Min value = 0 Deg/%
  • Fuel Enrich/Enlean Table. Sets the amount of Fuel Enrichment/Enleanment used when the Launch Control System is Armed.

    • Size: 12 x 11
    • Resolution: 1%
    • Max value = +100%
    • Min value = -100%

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

PID Based Launch Control

PID Based Launch Control:

The Emtron PID based Launch Control will apply gains in the static mode function only, as the PID target is the Launch RPM.

** RPM Control is the only PID base

This means in “Moving” mode, the ECU will follow Engine reduction calculates via the Torque Reduction Ignition, Torque Reduction Cut, and Throttle Area Demand

Launch PID Setup

Launch System Delay

This setting delays the routine to allow the closed loop system to function, as the torque is calculated.

0 = 10ms

1 = 20ms

2 = 50ms

3 = 100ms

Typical setting for Ignition Based PID - "2" 

Typical setting for Throttle Based PID - "1"

Launch Control Proportional Gain

A value of 1.00 will output +/- 10Nm for every 100 RPM of Target error.

Typical setting for Ignition Based PID - "3" 

Typical setting for Throttle Based PID - "0.5"

** Throttle Based PID - the least amount of error in the throttle area/TMF calculation feeds forward this PID

Launch Control Integral Gain

A value of 1.00 will output +/- 10Nm for every 100 RPM of Target error, but increment/count up to the integral gain limit

Typical setting for Ignition Based PID - "0.150" 

Typical setting for Throttle Based PID - "0.050"

** Throttle Based PID - the least amount of error in the throttle area/TMF calculation feeds forward this PID

Launch Control Derivative Gain

The derivative change of the engine torque vs the target will be affected by this gain value

Typical setting for Ignition Based PID - "3" 

Typical setting for Throttle Based PID - "1"

** Throttle Based PID - the least amount of error in the throttle area/TMF calculation feeds forward this PID

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Overrun Boost (Anti-lag)

The Overrun Boost (ORB) or Anti-Lag System (ALS) can be switched ON from the Function Output Setup window.

Image Image

Currently Only Mode 1 is available.

Mode1 allows either:

  • The Throttle plate is NOT permanently opened; the plate operates in its normal range.
  • The Throttle plate is partially cracked opened. In this situation the “Cooldown Mode” MUST be set to ALWAYS ON. See tuning help section for more information. Cooldown ALWAYS On

Additional air is bleed into the engine using the existing Idle Speed Solenoid /Idle Speed Stepper/DBW. If DBW is enabled to ECU will automatically use this to provide addition air by using an Air Bleed Override Table. Otherwise the Idle Speed Mode selected will be used by the ECU to provide the addition air. i.e Solenoid or Stepper.

There is an option to add extra air using the Output Channel selection from the ORB Menu shown above. This option allows a device/solenoid to be switched ON or controlled using Duty Cycle from a 3D Table in the Tuning view. This table will ONLY be active when the Anti-Lag system is armed and is switched OFF in Cooldown mode.

ORB/Anti-Lag modes of operation.

This can be broken down into 4 modes:

  • OFF. ORB function is switched OFF.
  • Disarming/Standby Mode. The ORB function is ON but all the conditions required to Arm the system have not yet been met or the system has just completed cooldown and re-entered Standby mode.
  • Armed. All the conditions required to arm the system have been met. The Ignition Retard, Ignition Cut, Fuel Enrich/Enlean, Air Bleed Override, Extra Air Bleed Tables are ALL active.
  • Cooldown. In this mode ONLY the Cooldown Air Bleed Table is active, ALL on other tables are OFF. Extra air is bleed into the engine to help cool engine components. The ECU will limit the engine speed by applying a Fuel Cut.

This status information can be viewed from the Runtime Menu -> Motorsport Tab.

Enable RPM Table

This 3D capable look up table tells the ECU the desired RPM above which the ORFC can become active.

** RPM must exceed this value for ORFC to become active

Image Image

Above example shows just one axis using Engine Temperature.  

Arming

There are three conditions used to arm the Overrun Boost System.

Before the Arming Conditions are evaluated the Engine Temperature MUST be less than “Maximum ET” setting and EGT1 and/or EGT2 less than the “Maximum EGT” setting.

Arming Condition 1. When the Engine Speed exceeds the RPM Arming threshold AND the Anti-Lag Arming switch in ON.

OR

Arming Condition 2. When the Throttle Position 1 exceeds the TPS1 Arming threshold AND the Anti-Lag Arming switch in ON.

OR

Arming Condition 3. When the User Channel (if selected) is ON AND the Anti-Lag Arming switch in ON.

NOTE: The Anti-Lag Arming Switch ONLY gets checked/used if an Input Source Channel has been selected.

Disarming

There are 4 conditions used to disarm the Overrun Boost System. Once disarmed the system enters Cooldown Mode.

Disarming Condition 1

The Engine Speed reduces below the RPM Arming threshold

AND

The Throttle Position drops below the TPS Arming threshold

AND

User Channel (if selected) is OFF

AND

Disarming Time is reached.

OR

Disarming Condition 2

The Anti-Lag Arming switch is OFF. The System Immediately enters Cooldown Mode.

OR

Disarming Condition 3

The Engine Temperature exceeds Maximum ET Setting. The System Immediately enters Cooldown Mode.

OR

Disarming Condition 4

The EGT1 and/or EGT2 Temperature exceeds Maximum EGT Setting. The System Immediately enters Cooldown Mode.

Disarming Timer

When the RPM and TPS Disarming conditions are met (i.e RPM < threshold AND TPS < threshold) the timer starts counting. When the Disarming Time is reached (without any arming condition being met) the system enters cooldown mode.

Cooldown

Cooldown Always ON

Normally required when the Throttle plate is permanently cracked opened. As the throttle plate is opened bleeding addition air into the engine, when the ORC is disarmed the ECU uses cyclic limiting to control Engine Speed.

When set to ON the Standby Mode is never used. See the ORB Flow Chart for more information.

Cooldown Idle Target

Target Engine Speed with ORB is operating in Cooldown/Cyclic Idle Mode.

Typical Value = 1500 RPM

Cooldown Timer

The length of time the ORB will operate in Cooldown/Cyclic Idle mode before returning to Standby mode.

Cooldown TPS Hi

When TPS1 Signal is above this value the engine speed is not limited to the Cooldown Idle Target. Between TPS1 Lo and TPS1 Hi the ECU will remove the Cooldown Idle limit . This allows the vehicle to be drive while still in cooldown mode.

TPS Hi MUST be greater than TPS Lo

Cooldown TPS Lo

When TPS Signal is below this value the Engine Speed will be limited to the Cooldown Idle Target.

TPS Hi MUST be greater than TPS1 Lo

Flow Diagram

Image Image

Overrun Boost Status

The following Status information is available from the “Anti-Lag Status” runtime

  • 0 = Function is OFF
  • 1 = System is waiting in standby mode. This means no Retard, Cut, Fuel or additional Air Bleed
  • 2 = System is OFF as the Engine Speed is zero.
  • 3 = System is OFF as the Anti-Lag Enable Switch “Input Source” is selected but the switch is OFF.
  • 4 = System is ON. The following tables are active
    • Ignition Retard
    • Ignition Cut
    • Fuel
    • Air Bleed Override
    • Extra Air Bleed Table
  • 5 = Cooldown Mode. System has disarmed and entered cooldown/Cyclic Idle mode
  • 6 = Cooldown Mode High ET. The Maximum Engine Temperature has been exceeded and the ECU has forced the Anti-Lag system into Cooldown mode.
  • 7 = Cooldown Mode High EGT. The Maximum EGT has been exceeded and the ECU has forced the Anti-Lag system into Cooldown mode.
  • 8 = Cooldown ALWAYS ON. The Cooldown mode is running in the “Always ON” setting.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Overrun Fuel Cut

This Function allows for the shutdown of the injectors during overrun.

Function Enable

OFF = Function is switched off and the selected output channels are deallocated.

ON = Function is switched on

Function Type

There is one mode are available.

  • ORFC Mode 1

Image Image

ORFC Setup

Image Image

Image Image\

ORFC TP/PP Select

Selects which input is used to control the ORFC

0: Throttle Position 1

1: Pedal Position

ORFC TP/PP Threshold

When the TPS 1 or PPS value is below this setting the Over Run Fuel Cut can become active.

** Follows ORFC TP/PP Select

Post Start Delay

Delay after the engine has been started before ORFC can become active

Ignition Retard

Ignition Retard from the total ignition advance when ORFC is active

Ignition Recovery rate

Rate which the ignition Overrun Fuel Cut Ignition Retard is decayed to 0 once the engine has recovered.

Typical : 10 deg / sec

Engine Temperature Lockout

Engine Temperature that must be exceeded before ORFC can become active

Speed Channel

Used to define how the “Speed Lockout” is used.  

0: OFF

1: Drive Speed

2: Ground Speed

3: Drive Speed Front L

4: Drive Speed Front R

5: Drive Speed Rear L

6: Drive Speed Rear R

7: Undriven Speed Front L

8: Undriven Speed Front R

9: Undriven Speed Rear L

10: Undriven Speed Rear R

11: Front Axle Speed

12: Rear  Axle Speed

13: Vehicle Speed

14: Engine Speed

15: Input Shaft Speed

16: Output Shaft Speed

** Speed inputs must be defined and properly calibrated under “Input Setup”

Speed Lockout Range Lo

Speed below which ORFC cannot become active\

Speed Lockout Range Hi

Speed above which ORFC cannot become active\

Speed Range Hysteresis

Hysteresis to prevent Overrun Fuel Cut becoming active on the threshold of a speed lockout value.

Example : A speed Lockout Range Hi setting of 60 and a Speed Range Hysteresis setting of 5 will not allow Overrun Fuel Cut to become active until Speed has reduced to 55 after being over 60.

ORFC Cut Ramp Time

Used to progressively increase the cut from 0% to 100% over the specified time.

Allows for a smoother transition into the Fuel Cut.

ORFC On DelayTable

Once all ORFC conditions are met, this look up table tells the ECU how long to delay fuel cut off for in seconds

** ORFC will only become active once all conditions are met, including exceeding the Enable RPM.

Image Image

Recover RPM Table

This 3D capable look up table tells the ECU at what RPM to switch off the ORFC fuel cut off

** ORFC will only become active once all conditions are met, including exceeding the Enable RPM.

Image Image
Above example shows uses one axis using Engine RPM and one for Engine Speed Rate of Change (dRPM)

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Speed Limits

The ECU offers two Ground Speed Limit Tables which can operate either independently and together to produce a single speed limit value. Each Limit Table also has two Offsets Tables.

The Function is enabled from the Config View -> Functions Tab.

Table selection is controlled using the “Speed Limit Table Control” setting.

0: Speed Limit Table 1 is the only table active

1: Speed Limit Table 2 is the only table active

3: Both Table 1 and Table 2 active, allowing two independent speed limits

5: The Cal Slot Table selects the active Speed Limit Table (1 or 2).

6: Z-Axis control calculates a single Speed Limit value by interpolating between Speed Limit Table 1 and 2.

NOTE: In Z-Axis mode only Speed Limit Table 1" single zone settings are used. Table 2 settings are not used

Speed Limit EN Switch:

When the ‘Speed Limit EN Switch’ has an Input Source assigned, the Speed Limit is only active when the switch is ON. Can be used for pit lane limiting.

This applies to all Table Control modes.

Use the Runtime menu to view the current Limit values. 0 = OFF

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Timers

Timers

The following calculated runtimes are generated by Emtron that are Timer related (to be further discussed more specifically):

  • User Timers - Status of User Timers
  • Crank Exit Timer - Time counter after cranking
  • Crank Timer - Time count during cranking
  • Firing Events Counter - Count of engine firing events
  • Engine Cycle Counter - Count of engine cycles
  • Engine Runtime - Engine runtime
  • ECU Runtime - ECU on runtime
  • TPS WOT Timer - Time throttle position is wide open
  • TPS Closed Timer - Time throttle position is closed
  • MAP High Timer - Time manifold pressure is high
  • Gear Cut Timer - Gear cut duration
  • Pedal Closed Timer - Time pedal position is closed
  • Race Timer - Race timer
  • Gearshift Cut Start - Gearshift time from cut start
  • Gearshift Next Gear - Gearshift time to next gear
  • Upshift Measured - Measured upshift time
  • Downshift Measured - Measured downshift time
  • Anti-Lag Disarm - Disarm timer for Anti-Lag

Many of these timers are pre-configured and function automatically.

User Timers

Timers must be enabled Config > Function Setup > Timer Functions

User Timer Setup

Timers are configured in the Tuning section

Tuning > Timer Functions Configuring timer 1-5 opens up a configuration window to set conditions, max time, and Timer Reset Mode

Set the conditions for the timer to start using Emtron ECU runtimes or status. There are up to 4 conditions that can be used to start the timer.

Image Image

Max Time

Set the max time the timer can count

Timer Reset Mode

Image Image

Reset when Timer Function turns OFF

The timer will reset when the conditions are no longer met

Example:

Timer condition is >3000 rpm, the timer will reset every time the engine speed falls below 3000rpm.

Reset when Timer Function turns ON

The timer will reset when the conditions are met again

Example:

Timer condition is >3000 rpm, the timer will reset when the engine speed falls below 3000rpm, and then goes past it again

Never

The timer will not reset

Fixed Timer Setup

Fixed Timers are configured in the Tuning section

  • Tuning, Timer Functions, Fixed Timer Setup

Image Image

TP1 WOT Timer ON

Set what position TP1 needs to surpass to start counting TP WOT time

TP1 Closed Timer ON

Set what position TP1 needs to be below to start counting TP Closed time

MAP High Timer ON

Set what kPa MAP needs to surpass to start counting MAP High time

PP1 Closed Timer (pp1)

Set what position PP1 needs to be below to start counting PP Closed time

PP1 Closed Timer (rpm)

Set what RPM needs to be below to start counting PP Closed time

Race Timer Start Mode

Select from the following to trigger the Race Timer to start or create a custom function using a User Output

Image Image

Race Timer Max Time

Max time for Race Timer

Race Timer Reset Mode

Select from the following to trigger the Race Timer to reset or create a custom function using a User Output

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Traction Control

Traction Control

The following calculated runtimes are generated by Emtron that are Traction Control related (to be further discussed more specifically):

  • Traction Status – The working status of the traction control
  • Traction Control State - The working state of the traction control
  • Ign Traction Trim - Ignition advance compensation
  • Traction Target - %Slip Target when Traction Control is active
  • Traction Feedforward - % feed forward when Traction Control is active
  • Traction Target Error – The total drive slip percentage above/below the Traction Target
  • Traction PID – Proportional, Integral, and Derivative gains
  • Traction Limit Request – Status of Traction Control being utilized in real-time
  • Traction Target Table – Active traction target table
  • Drive Slip Calculation – Percentage of slip between defined speed channels
  • Outputshaft Slip - Percentage of slip between Outputshaft speed source and Ideal
  • Outputshaft Ideal Speed - Outputshaft Ideal Speed as defined by look up table
  • Traction RPM Target - Outputshaft Source calculates Engine Speed

All these runtimes can be utilized within other functions of Emtron.

Traction Target Error for example can offset torque management functions (DBW target, Pedal Demand clamps, etc)

Slip Channel Mode

Emtron has two methods of generating slip channels so the traction control function can work.

%Slip (Drive Speed)

%Slip (Outputshaft Speed)

Image Image

%Slip (Drive Speed)

Drive Speed % Slip Calculation compares two speed channels to derive %Slip

Drive Slip% = (Speed Channel 1 - Speed Channel 2) / Speed Channel 2

** Runtimes for Speed Channels must be pre-configured under inputs

Configure Drive Slip Calculation system via Tuning > Vehicle Functions > Vehicle Dynamics > Drive Slip Calculation

Speed Channel 1

Select which calculated runtime is to be used for Speed Channel 1

** Speed Channel 1 = Normally Driven Speed Channel

Speed Channel 2

Select which calculated runtime is to be used for Speed Channel 2

** Speed Channel 2 = Normally Undriven Speed Channel

Slip Calculation Filter

Filters the Slip Calculation to help smooth out any pulsations

Typcial Value: 6 ( 0 = OFF)

Range: 0 - 20

%Slip (Outputshaft Speed)

Outputshaft Speed % Slip Calculation compares an Outputshaft Speed source vs an Outputshaft Speed Ideal table to derive %Slip

Outputshaft Slip% = (Outputshaft Source - Outputshaft Speed “Ideal”) / Outputshaft Speed “Ideal”

** Outputshaft Source options are :

  • Outputshaft Speed Channel = ECU input using the selected source channel.

  • Outputshaft Speed Calculated = Speed reverse calculated from the Wheel Speed and Final Drive Ratio

Configure Outputshaft Speed Slip system via Tuning > Vehicle Functions > Vehicle Dynamics > Outputshaft Speed Slip

Slip Calculation Filter

Filters the Slip Calculation to help smooth out any pulsations

Typcial Value: 6 ( 0 = OFF)

Range: 0 - 15

Outputshaft Slip Source Channel

0: Outputshaft Speed

1: Outputshaft Speed Calculated

***- Outputshaft Speed Channel = ECU input using the selected source channel.

***- Outputshaft Speed Calculated = Speed reverse calculated from the Wheel Speed and Final Drive Ratio

Traction Control Setup

Limit Type

Sets up how the traction control will cuts

0: Fuel Cut Only

1: Ign Cut Ony

2: Fuel Cut + Ign Cut

Cut Pattern

Defines cut pattern

0: Random Pattern 1

1: Random Pattern 2

2: Sequential Pattern 1

3: Sequential Pattern 2

Fuel/Ign %Cut Ratio

Allows the ratio between fuel and ignition %cut to be controlled.

0% = Requested cut all Ignition (no Fuel)

100% = Requested cut all Fuel (no Ign)

** Example: Ratio = 80%

Fuel Cut = 80% of requested Cut

Ign Cut = 20% of requested Cut

** Example: Ratio = 20%

Fuel Cut = 20% of requested Cut

Ign Cut = 80% of requested Cut

Traction RPM Target : Outputshaft Source

Channel used to calculate the Traction RPM Target

0: Outputshaft Speed Channel

1: Outputshaft Speed Calculated

2: Outputshaft Speed Ideal

  • Outputshaft Speed Channel = ECU input using the selected source channel.

  • Outputshaft Speed Calculated = This is the speed reverse calculated from the Wheel Speed and Final Drive Ratio

  • Outputshaft Speed Ideal = This is the speed setup using the 2D Output Shaft Ideal Speed table

Traction RPM Target : Clutch Slip Channel

Channel used as Clutch Slip to calculate the Traction RPM Target

0: OFF

1: Clutch Slip

2: Clutch Slip Calculated

  • Clutch Slip = Clutch Slip = (Engine Speed - Input Shaft Speed) / Input Shaft Speed

  • Clutch Slip Calculated = Clutch Slip (Calculated) = (Engine Speed - Input Shaft Speed Calculated) / Input Shaft Speed Calculated

Traction RPM Target : Traction Slip Target

This enables the Traction Slip Target to correct the Traction RPM Target

0: OFF

1: %Slip Target

Example: Output Shaft Speed = 2000 RPM

Clutch Slip = 21%

Gear Ratio = 2.056

Traction Slip Target = 8%

Traction RPM Target = 2000 x 2.056 x 1.21 x 1.08 = 5373 RPM

Traction Control Lockouts

RPM Lo Lockout

Traction Control will be OFF below this Engine Speed.

Typical : 1500 RPM

0 = OFF

RPM Hi Lockout

Traction Control will be OFF above this Engine Speed.

Typical : 200 RPM below RPM limit

0 = OFF

TP Lo Lockout

Traction Control will be OFF below this Throttle setting.

Typical : 5.0 %

0 = OFF

TP Hi Lockout

Traction Control will be OFF above this Throttle setting.

0 = OFF

%Slip Lo Lockout

Traction Control will be OFF below this %Slip.

Typical : 5.0 %

User Lockout

Create a custom lockout using a User Channel.

When the channel is ON the lockout is active

Traction Table Control

Selects the active Table Control method of the Traction Control

0: Tables OFF

1: ON - Table 1

2: ON - Table 2

3: ON - Table 3

4: Not Available

5: ON - Cal Slot

6: ON - Z-Axis

Traction Target Tables

These look up table define the amount of %Slip to be maintained by the ECU. Slip below the value will generate a positive Traction Target Error, while slip above the value will generate a negative Traction Target Error. Slip above the value triggers the ECU to cut engine torque by use of fuel/ignition cuts, timing retard, or other connected functions.

See the following examples:

Image Image

A simple fixed value for traction control to become active

Image Image

Traction Target vs Front Axle Speed

** Rear axle as Drive Speed

Image Image

A more comprehensive table utilizing internal G-Force sensor (Lateral Accel)

** Rear axle as Drive Speed

** G-Force sensor must be pre-configured

Traction Slip Offset Tables

Like any other “offset” table in Emtune, these tables add to the main target tables. Tables can be configured to use any runtime, and spanned in 3D.

See the following example:

Image Image

A more comprehensive use of the offset table utilizing KV series Internal G-Force sensor (Verticle Force), and a Rotary Position Switch to change the final Slip Target.

** G-Force sensor must be pre-configured

** Rotary Position Switch must be pre-configured

Ignition Retard Tables

Amount of ignition retard the traction system can employ once the system is active. Tables can be configured to use any runtime, and spanned in 3D to enhance flexibility.

See the following example:

Image Image

** Gear Recognition must be pre-configured

** Retard is being applied here only when the Traction Target Error is negative, meaning the %slip is above the Traction Target.

Traction PID setup

Traction Deadband +/-

The output control signal is held constant when the Input Signal (DriveSlip) falls within the deadband range of the Setpoint (Slip Target). This helps reduce steady state error and oscillations.

Typical: 0.20 %

Integral Positive Clamp

Used to clamp the contribution of the integral term in the PID loop and prevent Integal Windup.

Typical Value: 20.0 %

Integral Negative Clamp

Used to clamp the contribution of the integral term in the PID loop and prevent Integal Windup.

Typical Value: - 20.0 %

Slip Target Filter

Filters the Target signal to help smooth out any pulsations

Typcial Value: 6 ( 0 = OFF)

Range: 0 - 10

Feed Forward %Cut Table

Emtron uses a Feedforward Table for a base %Cut for the PID function to operate from.

This allows for very fast response as the ECU has a basic lookup table for %Cut to function from before the PID is applied.

See the following example:

Image Image

A more comprehensive use of the Feed Forward %Cut table utilizing the Traction Target Error calculation and gear recognition.

** Gear Recognition must be pre-configured

Proportional Gain Table

Proportional gain controls how aggressive instantaneous correction must be vs Target Error.

This parameter can be expanded into a 3D look up table to provide greater accuracy regarding closed loop control.

Integral Gain Table

Integral gain controls how much adaptive correction is needed.

This parameter can be expanded into a 3D look up table to provide greater accuracy regarding closed loop control.

Derivative Gain Table

Derivative gain controls predictive correction. This function is used to prevent overshooting targets by looking at a number of factors like rate of change, and P and I gain.

This parameter can be expanded into a 3D look up table to provide greater accuracy regarding closed loop control.

Traction Max Cut Table (% Cut)

This clamps the maximum cut the traction control can apply based on the entered values.

See the following example:

Image Image

** Rear Axle Speed must be pre-configured

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Transmission Brake Control

The Transmission Brake Function allows the ECU to directly control the Trans Brake inside the gearbox.

Output

The Function can be switched ON from the Config view -> Functions -> Motorsport Functions tab -> Transmission Brake Control. This menu allows the Output Channel to be selected and configured.

When driving the solenoid directly from the ECU, use ONLY Auxiliary Channels 13-16. These solenoids typically require a minimum of 10A to switch. Make sure the ECU is grounding the solenoid and sufficient ECU grounds are connected to support the current. Typically a PDM would be used to supply power to the solenoid.

Input

Two Inputs will need to be setup under the Config View -> Inputs -> Motorsport Tab

  1. Trans Brake Switch. When the switch is ON, the selected output will be switched ON

  2. Trans Brake Bump Switch. When the switch is ON, the Output will be switch OFF for the time set in the “Trans Brake Bump Time”. This allows the Trans Brake to be released for a sort period of time allowing the vehicle to move forward.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

User Functions

User outputs are configured from this menu item. Once the function has been enabled in the Functions setup menu the following form may be configured to control the output or status :

Image Image

There are up to 4 channels which can produce a result. When the channel conditions and operations are met the result becomes “TRUE”.

Once the result is true the output will perform depending on the how the function has been setup. 1 of 3 options can be configured :

  1. Switched. In this mode when the Result is “TRUE” the output simply turns ON

Image Image

  1. Switch Table.  When the Result is TRUE the Table becomes active .0 = Output = off, 100.0 = ON. Any other setting does nothing to the output.

Image Image

3) PWM.  When the Result is TRUE the Table becomes active . The value in the table is the %DC of the output.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Diagnostics

Cylinder Inhibit Functions

Cylinder Inhibit Function

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DTC's

System errors within the ECU show up as DTC Errors illuminated in red in the Emtune software.
They are also associated with the engine check light, should one be configured.

Image Image

The source of the error is straight forward to determine.

Click on the red DTC tab & a breakout DTC list will appear.

This list will contain all of the current errors.

For this example, we will look at P0107 - Manifold Absolute Pressure Circuit Low Input.

Image Image

Press F3 to open the ECU Runtime Values Tab

Using the Raw inputs tab, determine if the voltage observed at the input is within the defined range of operation

Ensure the input calibration error threshold is set outside the normal operating range of the sensor.

If the calibration data is correct together with correctly set error thresholds.

The error can be considered valid and should be investigated.

A valid version of the example error (P0107) may indicate a dead short or simply the sensor is unplugged

What is a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)?

Diagnostic trouble codes (or fault codes) are codes that are stored by the ECU. These are stored in response to a problem when a sensor in the car reports a reading that is outside the normal/accepted range
These DTC’s identify a particular problem area and are intended to provide the user with a guide as to where a fault might be occurring within the vehicle. The ECU will always reply with a ‘P’ code or Powertrain code

Image Image

Difference Between Generic & Manufacturer Specific…

Code typeExplanation
Generic (normally P0xxx)The definition for the code is defined in the EOBD / OBD-II standard and will be the same for all manufacturers.
Manufacturer-specific (normally P1xxx)Where manufacturers feel that a code is not available within the generic list, they can add their own codes. The definitions for these are set by the manufacturer.

In general, codes that begin with P0 are Generic codes, whereas codes that begin with P1 are manufacturer-specific in this case codes generated by Emtron.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Injector Test

Injector Test

Image Image

Image Image

Injector test permits individual testing of each injector - Systems check / Diagnostic Tool

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Scope Utility

Emtron features a built in Scope for all ECU types except the Shadow 8. Depending on the ECU (or if a plug in model – the type it is based off of), the number of channels that can be scoped is variable:

ECUChannels
Shadow 8NA
SL4Crank, Sync
SL6Crank, Sync
SL8Crank, Sync
KV8Crank, Sync, DI 1-4
KV12Crank, Sync, DI 1-8
KV16Crank, Sync, DI 1-8
KV16MCrank, Sync, DI 1-8

The scope function records the channels assigned to internal memory when started/stopped.

The memory can be subsequently downloaded, erased, saved, and loaded by the other buttons in the scope tools.

Utilities > Scope

Image Image

Image Image

When you select Scope, it opens a new window with the Scope.

Image Image

Configuration details are as follows:

Purple:

Select what channel to display, and whether you want the trace to be visible or not

Red:

Change the volts per division for each channel

The chart is divided in blocks up and down. Each block equals 2 volts in the above example.

Orange:

The traces can be offset so they do not overlay on top of each other. The default value is 0.00V, meaning the voltage will trace from the centre (so it will read +/- 0V). It is useful to offset the traces, so they can be all visible at the same time on the chart as in the above example.

Green:

Sec Offset moves the trace to a specific position

Blue:

Time Sec Per Div changes the zoom level of the scope by adjusting the time per division horizontally. Like voltage per division vertically. After starting and stopping the scope, this will need to be adjusted until a trace draws an appropriate picture as in the example above.

Light Blue:

Sample Rate should be adjusted to set the scope recording rate. In most cases the default value of 10ksps should be enough, but if scope traces are requested for troubleshooting purposes (on running engines for example – not just for trigger decoding requests), then a higher speed may be requested.

** Note a higher sampling rate will use up the Emtron internal memory much faster. A shorter period of recording should be anticipated (a few seconds generally).

Scope Voltage Clipping

The scope can only read +/- 25v. Anything over 25v (regardless of input specifications) will display signals that can be misconstrued as error.

Image Image

Above is an example of the scope “clipping” over its 25v limit.

This is normal and should not be considered an error in signal.

If signals need to be measured reliably beyond +/-25v, then an external scope tool must be used.

Troubleshooting Trigger Errors

There are several runtimes the ECU generates to diagnose/validate triggers the ECU is using. You can see these runtimes live under:

F3 Runtimes > Triggers/Limits, Engine Decoding/Engine Decoding Status

Image Image

Green runtimes simply are notifications that there is a “signal” present on these inputs. They do not signify if the signals are valid.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Logging

ECU Logger

EFI Relay control is very important for stable logging recording, this is due to memory transfer from high speed ram in the ECU to permanent memory when the ECU is shut down.

Overview

ECU logging allows ECU Engine and Vehicle data to be transferred into memory and then permanently stored. When required the data can then be downloaded from the ECU using Emtune so it can be analyzed.

The ECU logging uses 2 types of memory for data storage.

  1. RAM (Volatile - ECU requires power to maintain the stored data).
  2. Flash Memory (Non-volatile - Data is permanently stored).

Stage 1

The logging starts by first transferring data into a large high speed DDR RAM buffer. This can store up to 32MB of data. RAM memory is volatile which means when the power is removed the data is lost. It is fast and has an unlimited number of Write(Store) and Read cycles.

Stage 2

As the RAM data can be lost when the ECU is powered down, the data must be periodically transfered into Flash Memory where is can be permanently stored. Flash memory has a limited number of write (Store) cycles which is why the data can only be stored periodically. The following condition(s) are used to control this storing:

  1. When a logging channel is ON, Data is transferred from RAM into Flash memory at approximately 30sec intervals.
  2. When a logging channel switches from ON to OFF all unstored data is transferred into Flash memory.
  3. When the ECU is controlling the Main EFI Relay and the ECU receives a request to shut down, the ECU will transfer all unstored data into Flash Memory before switching itself off.

Logging rates can be selected from 1Hz up to 500Hz.

Data can be transferred from ECU to PC at approximately 0.5MB/sec. So a 4MB log will take 8 seconds and a 16MB log will take 32 seconds.

Tip: Use the Runtime menu (F3) > ECU Internal tab to view the Logging Status

NOTE: With 500 Hz Rate selected ONLY Dataset 1 is available for logging .

Logging Start Conditions

For ECU logging to START for a selected Dataset the following must occur:

  • RPM is greater than RPM Start AND
  • TPS is greater than TPS Start AND
  • MAP is greater than MAP Start AND
  • Selected User Channel is ON (if Enabled) AND
  • Logging Switch Status is ON (if Enabled) AND
  • Start Delay time has been reached.

Entering a 0 into any of the Start Parameters means it will not be used to control the start of logging.

If ALL Start conditions are zero, the logging will never start.

If ONLY the logging switch is required then assign this to an input using the Inputs Pins Setup menu (F10), switches Tab and then set ALL the Start parameters to zero.

Logging Stop Conditions

For ECU logging to STOP for a selected Dataset the following must occur:

  • RPM is less than RPM Stop AND
  • TPS is less than TPS Stop AND
  • MAP is less than MAP Stop AND
  • Selected User Channel is OFF (if Enabled) AND
  • Logging Switch Status is OFF (if Enabled) AND
  • Stop Delay time has been reached.

Entering a 0 into any of the Stop Parameters means it will not be used to Stop the logging.

If ALL Stop conditions are zero, the logging will never stop. This should be avoided. Make sure the Stop conditions are set correctly.

If ONLY the logging switch is required then assign this to an input using the Inputs Pins Setup menu (F10), switches Tab and then set ALL the Stop parameters to zero.


Calculating Logging Time

Time to 100% fll the ECU logging Memory can be calculated with the following equation:

Time(s) = (Memory Size (bytes) / 2 ) / (Logging Rate x Number of Parameters)

NOTE: When the logging mode is set to “Circular” this is the time to complete one logging cycle

Example1 :

  • Dataset 1 Logging Rate = 100Hz. Logging 20 parameters.
  • Memory Size at 4MB
Time = ((4 x 1000000) / 2) / (100 x 20) = 1000 secs = 16.6 minutes

Example2 :

  • Dataset 1 Logging Rate = 100Hz. Logging 20 parameters.
  • Dataset 2 Logging Rate = 5Hz. Logging 20 parameters.
  • Memory Size at 4MB
Time = ((4 * 1000000) / 2) / ((100 x 20) + (5 x 20)) = 952 secs = 15.87 minutes

Example3 :

  • Dataset 1 Logging Rate = 100Hz. Logging 50 parameters.
  • Memory Size at 32MB
Time = ((32 * 1000000) /2) / (100 x 50) = 3200 secs = 53.3 minutes

Data Set Configuration

There are 6 data sets that can hold 50 channels each.

Each data set has select-able “Logging Rate” so the user can manage what channels are being recorded at what speeds.

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

PC Logger

Software Navigation

From the Welcome Screen, you can Open Log directly from there. This will open the software in a limited viewing mode where the logging view is only available.

Image Image

Otherwise, when the ECU, or a calibration file is open, navigating over to the Logging tab at the top will put you into the Logging section.

From here, you can navigate through a number of menus, tabs, sub tabs, etc.

Opening a log file

Select “Manage Log Files” or press hotkey (F7)

Use the file menu to open PC/ECU Log file (".elf" files) and they will populate the log manager list so you can easily switch between log files

Image Image

PC Logging

PC logging allows the ECU to record all channels available with the PC (at medium rates). The PC logger is a very powerful tool for this reason, as it can diagnose many issues. Technical support will almost certainly request a “PC Log” for most inquiries.

Starting and stopping a PC log is done either in logging tab by clicking “PC Logger Start (F8)”, or just by simply pressing “F8” key on the PC. Logging will confirm recording has begun on the bottom left with a Blue confirmation

Image Image

** All PC logs will auto save to your hard drive under the specified paths (File -> Options)

When stopping the PC log, the ECU will direct you into the logging view (can be turned off - set ON by default)

Image Image

Saving a log file

Select “Manage Log Files” or press hotkey (F7)

Use the file menu to save PC/ECU Log file (".elf" files) and they will populate the log manager list so you can easily switch between log files

** Double click the log file you want to save in a new location

Image Image

* PC Logs will auto save to your hard drive under the specified paths (File -> Options)

Overlaying a log file

With two or more log files in the log manager, Select the second log file and click “Toggle Log Overlay”

Image Image

The overlay offset can be entered in, however inside the logger once the Log Manager is closed, hot keys can be used to shift the log view around

Image Image

** Right Clicking the logging area will show all hot keys available

Managing groups, pages, and complete layout

Under the “View” tab, all management of the logging layout can be configured. Each logging page can be individually exported and saved, as well as the complete layout

** It is highly recommended that users back up their logging layout periodically

** New Emtune version installations will ask you to overwrite the logging layout

Image Image

Setting up Graphs

Right clicking in the page, then clicking Setup Graphs brings up the menu choices to choose channels for line graphs.

Choose your channels, min/max scales for each channel, what channel ultimately you want on your Y-Axis label

Image Image

Setting up XY Plot

XY Plots have similar settings. Set up X and Y channels. Z channel will be the color channel for the dot plot to populate.

There are also correction and filter settings that can further customize the XY Plot

** XY Plot Correction is covered in a different section

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Calculated Channels

Calculated Channel Setup

Calculated Channels are available for users to set up inside Emtune

** These channels are only available “software side” for use in the logger, live dash channels, and programmable parameter channels (Set Cell to Parameter Value), and cannot be used as permanent ECU channels

Image Image

Calculated Channel Examples

Calculated Channels are accessed via the File Menu.

A “new” channel can be created, where the user can define name, abbreviation, min/max, units, etc.

There are pre-defined Math Functions that can be selected, in which the Maths Function Description will dictate how it can be used.

Derivative Speed Example

Image Image

The example above is showing how the derivative math function can be used to create a channel for the Rear Axle Speed channel.

Once created, the channel can be selected in the logger, live dash, or programmed as a Set Cell Value (Q).

Image Image

Simple Channel Re-naming

Image Image

The example above is showing how the User Pressure 2 channel name is being converted to a name that can be easily displayed.

The Exponential Filter math function is being used (a math channel MUST be selected), however the filter strength being set to 0.000 will output a 1:1 value in the logger exactly as the User Pressure 2 channel is being reported

** A different math function can be used, such as “sum”, with no actual sum (0.000).

Channel Re-naming with math

In some cases, channels may need re-naming, but also an offset applied to them. Most commonly if a sensor needs a simple way to “zero” it’s value. Instead of re-scaling the sensor in the sensor input every single time, this can be done in the calculated channels.

Image Image

A User Position is set up here for a rear shock sensor.

The voltage range represents it’s complete range (0-250mm)

Image Image

The calculated channel is created using the “sum” Math Function.

The Input variable of -40, zeros the value in the data logger/live parameters.

The value needed can be derived easily by looking at the current User Position channel, and then quickly entered to adjust the value, without re-scaling the position input.


Advanced Functions

Advanced Math Functions can be added by the user themselves.

Image Image

Clicking Explore Advanced Functions allows the user to import new .dll files as new Math Functions

Creating New Functions

To create a new function, firstly - Download the c compiler: https://github.com/llvm/llvm-project/releases/download/llvmorg-10.0.0/LLVM-10.0.0-win32.exe

** When installing, ensure you check the box saying ‘add to path’ or else Emtune will not be able to find the compiler.

To add a new function, you need to create a source file for the function. The file extension must be .c and not contain any spaces.

There is an example file in the source directory for the users to use as a template:

Example: testfunction.c

The new file should look like this (don’t worry too much about the icon):

Image Image

Open the file in a text editor compatible with .c files such as - Notepad++ https://notepad-plus-plus.org/downloads/

To get started you can paste the following into your new math function as a starting point:

#include "math_function.h"

char *name(void) { return "derivative"; }

char *description(void) {

    return "Calculates the derivative of the provided parameter.\\n\\n"

           "Input Parameters:\\n"

           "Required=1\\n"

           "Optional=0\\n"

           "Required Parameter 1: The parameter to differentiate\\n\\n"

           "Input Values:\\n"

           "Required=1\\n"

           "Optional=0\\n"

           "Required Input 1: Derivative gain. A scaler applied to the output. Set to 1 if "

           "unused.\\n"

           "";
}

typedef struct {

    int channelCount;

    float gain;

    float previousValue;

} Impl;

int initialise(int argc, float argv[], void *memory) {

    if (argc != 2) {

        return -1;

    }

    Impl *impl = (Impl *)memory;

    impl->channelCount = argv[0];

    impl->gain = argv[1];

    impl->previousValue = 0;

    return 0;
}

int nextValue(float inputValues[], float timeDeltaSeconds, float *outputValue, void *memory) {

    Impl *impl = (Impl *)memory;

    float difference = inputValues[0] - impl->previousValue;

    if (timeDeltaSeconds != 0) {

        *outputValue = impl->gain * (difference / timeDeltaSeconds);

    } else {

        *outputValue = 0;

    }

    impl->previousValue = inputValues[0];

    return 0;
}

** The file in the source folder called math_function.h contains more technical information about how the math functions work.

This is the source for the derivative function shipped with Emtune.

Once pasted in, at the very least, the function name must be renamed.

Changed the line:

char *name(void) { return “derivative”; }

to

char *name(void) { return “testfunction”; }

This is the name that will appear in Emtune in the dropdown list.

Save the file.

Back in emtune, click the button ‘Recompile’ which is left of the highlighted button in the first screen shot.

The function will now be available to select from the dropdown list.


Math Expressions

As a simpler alternative to advanced functions, you can also specify a calculated channel as a math expression.

See Math Expressions for a detailed explanation.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Reference

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Reference

Sensor Ratiometric Correction

Overview

A sensor’s analog output is always proportional (ratiometric) to its supply voltage. The lower the supply voltage, the lower the sensor output voltage. The ECU can correct for this variation in supply voltage and improve sensor performance by applying a ratiometric correction; this is a ratio of the actual sensor supply to the calibrated/ideal sensor supply (5.0V). To do this the ECU must know what supply has been wired to the sensor. There are currently 4 options:

  1. OFF — ECU applies no sensor ratiometric correction
  2. ECU 5V Ref — Pin D21 on a KV Series ECU OR Pin B2 on SL series ECU
  3. ECU 5V Ref2 — Pin D22 on a KV Series ECU
  4. 5V Ref Ext Supply

The sensor reference supply can be selected from Emtune by opening the Setup panel of a selected Input Channel.

5V Ref Ext Supply

Some sensors may be supplied from an external voltage/supply source. For the ECU to apply ratiometric correction to such a sensor, the ECU needs to know this voltage, so it must be wired into the ECU for measurement. Set up as follows:

  1. Connect to the ECU with Emtune. Config View → Channels → Calculated Runtime → Main. Select the “5V Ref Ext Supply” setting and pick an input source from the list.
Calculated Runtime → Main: the “5V Ref Ext Supply” is assigned to an input source (here ANV 2).

Calculated Runtime → Main: the “5V Ref Ext Supply” is assigned to an input source (here ANV 2).

  1. This runtime can now be viewed from the Runtime menu (F3) → ECU Internal tab. This runtime will be used for the “5V Ref Ext Supply” ratiometric correction, so it must accurately represent the sensor supply voltage.
ECU Internal runtimes — the measured 5V Ref Ext Supply value used for the ratiometric correction.

ECU Internal runtimes — the measured 5V Ref Ext Supply value used for the ratiometric correction.

Example

The following test was completed using a 3.0-Bar MAP sensor operating at barometric pressure. A comparison is shown in Table 1.0 between the Ratiometric Correction OFF and ON. With the Ratiometric Correction ON the ECU is able to generate a consistent output for variations in the sensor supply voltage.

Table 1.0 — MAP Sensor output, Ratiometric OFF/ON Comparison

5V Ref Supply (V)MAP (Vref Correction OFF)MAP (Vref Correction ON)
5.000V99.9 kPa99.9 kPa
4.996V99.8 kPa99.9 kPa
4.975V99.4 kPa99.9 kPa
4.950V98.8 kPa99.8 kPa
4.900V98.0 kPa99.8 kPa
4.850V96.8 kPa99.8 kPa
4.700V93.7 kPa99.8 kPa

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Aux Output Notes

Emtron ECU systems have a high number auxiliary outputs on all products offered in addition to being able to utilize unused fuel and ignition channels as additional outputs. These extra outputs can be used for various functions such as solenoid control, relay control (fans, fuel pumps, etc), PWM systems, and more. Keeping with the concept of Emtron flexibility, the Aux Outputs match these needs.

Regardless of this added flexibility, careful planning for best output use is still necessary.

Aux Output Connections

SL Series ECU – 10 Aux Outputs

Auxiliary 1-4: Low side

Outputs rest at 0V when ECU is powered off

Outputs are open when not being commanded on

    Low side control of relays, solenoids, lights, etc

Auxiliary 5-8: High side/Low side

Outputs rest at 0V when ECU is powered off

Outputs are open when not being commanded on regardless of polarity

    Low side or high side control of relays, solenoids, lights, etc 

Auxiliary 9-10: Half bridge (DC motor control – DBW)

Outputs rest at 0V when ECU is off 

Outputs command the opposite polarity when off

    IE – High side output as commanded on is low side when off

KV Series ECU – 16 Aux Outputs

Auxiliary 1-8: High side/Low side

Outputs rest at 0V when ECU is powered off

Outputs are open when not being commanded on/off regardless of polarity

    Low side or high side control of relays, solenoids, lights, etc 

Auxiliary 9-16: Half bridge (DC motor control – DBW – Aux 9-12 KV8 ONLY)

Outputs rest at 0V when ECU is off

Outputs command the opposite polarity when off

            IE – High side output as commanded on is low side when off

** KV8 Aux 13-16 cannot be used as DBW control, but the functionality regarding output state is the same

Common Issues

When using an Aux Output to control a low side output that is connected to constant power.

The result is the output is ON when the ECU is powered off.

See KV Series Hardware Manual - Section 3.6

This is why the control side of many systems (relays, solenoids, etc) is switched on with ignition supply (OEM).

Due to the flexibility of the output, controlling the system as High Side instead can resolve this issue.

When using a Half Bridge output on a circuit that is sensitive to reverse polarity, this can create issues with actuation if that particular output is expecting an open circuit when commanded off.

**** For output specifications (frequency, PWM, current ratings), see ECU specification sheets.**

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Closed Loop and PID

The function “Closed Loop” is defined as a control system’s ability to react automatically based on a form of feedback (position, calculated value, frequency, etc).

This is usually dependent on some sort of PID strategy.

The Emtron ECU has closed loop controls for many Functions throughout the ECU.

Common functions that rely on closed loop are:

Closed Loop Lambda Control

Idle speed control

Idle Ignition Control

VVT Cam control

DBW Control

Boost Control

Launch Control - Torque Limiting

Traction Control

All Emtron PID configurations can be very comprehensive. .

Proportional Gain: controls how aggressive instantaneous correction is based on the current target error.

Correction based on proportional error

Example 1 -

Boost Target Error = 10%

P Gain Table Entry = 1.0

P Gain Correction = 10% * 1.0 = 10%

Example 2 -

Boost Target Error = 10%

P Gain Table Entry = 2.0

P Gain Correction = 10% * 2.0 = 20%

Integral gain: controls how much adaptive correction is needed over time after the application of proportional control.

The Integral Gain will multiply the gain value vs the target error at the control rate speed.

Derivative gain: controls predictive correction. It is based on the rate of change of the error.

The target error rate of change will multiply vs the Derivative gain.

A delicate balance of these values is normally needed to provide accurate and precise control of the closed loop system.

To provide more accurate closed loop control, Emtron allows values can be spanned in 3D to allow a look up table to actively adjust based on whatever runtime is desired.

This allows the user to fine tune the closed loop functions without just relying on the target error solely.

Feed forward functions

The feed forward value allows the PID function to operate with greater accuracy if drive duty can be predicted.

Min/Max limits

These are used to clamp the PID functional range if necessary.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Enumerations

Active Center Differential

ValueStatus
0Disabled
1OFF
2ON
3OFF - RPM Lockout
4OFF - User Lockout
5OFF - Timeout
6OFF - ACD I/P not selected
7OFF - ACD Input in Fault
8ON - Bleed Override
9OFF - Bleed Override Timeout
10OFF - Bleed Override Waiting …
11OFF - Timeout Retry Delay

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Boost Status

0    OFF    

1    ON    

2    ET Lockout    

3    TP Lockout    

4    MAP Lockout    

5    RPM Lockout    

6    Re-Entry Delay    

7        

8    OFF- RPM Zero    

9    Func. Disabled    

10    X No O/P Channel    

11    X No Input Source    

12    OFF - MAP Sensor Fault    

13    OFF - MAP Limit    

14    ON-Open Loop    

15    ON-Mass Flow Limit    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Closed Loop Fuel Status

ValueStatus
0OFF
1ON
2OFF - Post Start
3OFF - Eng. Temp
4OFF - RPM Lo
5OFF - RPM Hi
6OFF - Rate(hz) = 0
7OFF - Waiting.. La1
8OFF - Waiting.. La2
9OFF - ORB Active
10OFF - Limiting on
11-
12X - Input in Fault
13OFF - La1 Input Error
14OFF - La2 Input Error
15X - Lam 1 Input OFF
16X - Lam 2 Input OFF

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW PID Status

0    OFF    

1    ON    

2    Min DC Clamp    

3    Max DC Clamp    

4    -  Int Clamp    

5    +  Int Clamp    

6    Deadband    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

DBW System Status

0    OFF    

1    ON    

2    DBW + OP Err.    

3    DBW - OP Err.    

4    Main Relay Err.    

5    OP Freq low Err.    

6    TP 1 Sensor Err.    

7    TP 2 Sensor Err.    

8    PP 1 Sensor Err.    

9    PP 2 Sensor Err.    

10    Calibrating ....    

11    Calibrate RPM Err.    

12    Calibrate Complete    

13    Disabled: RPM=0    

14    Safety shutdown    

15    TEST Mode    

16    OFF: DBW2 in Cal    

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Engine Protection Status

ValueStatus
0Disabled
1OFF
2ON
3OFF - PostStart
4ON - User Lockout
5Cut Exit in progress
6Waiting: Exit Conds

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Highest Priority Fuel/Ign Cut Status

ValueStatus
0OFF
1RPM Limit 1
2RPM Limit 2
3RPM Limit 3
4MAP Limit 1
5MAP Limit 2
6Ground Speed 1
7Ground Speed 2
8DBW 1 Limit
9DBW 2 Limit
10Launch Limit
11Gear Cut Limit
12Limp Home 1
13Limp Home 2
14Anti-Lag Ign Cut
15Anti-Lag Cooldown
16Traction Limit
17Gear Rev-match Limit
18Gearshift Limit
19Rolling Launch Limit
20ORFC
21Oil Pressure Limit
22Fuel Pressure Limit
23EGT Limit
24Engine Temp Limit
25VDC - Engine Cut

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

ORFC Status

ValueStatus
0Disabled
1ON
2OFF
3Lockout - TP/PP
4Lockout - RPM
5Lockout - Speed
6Lockout - Downshift
7Lockout - ECT
8Lockout - Startup

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Traction Control Status

ValueStatus
0Disabled
1OFF
2Armed - %Slip Drive
3OFF -Post Start Delay
4OFF- RPM Lo
5OFF- RPM Hi
6OFF- TPS Lo
7OFF- TPS Hi
8OFF- Slip Lo
9OFF-RPM Zero
10OFF-User
11OFF - TC Sw OFF
12Armed - %Slip Outputshaft

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

VVT System Status

ValueStatus
0Disabled
1I/P Pin Not Selected
2O/P Pin Not Selected
3Startup Lockout
4ET Lockout
5RPM Lockout
6User Lockout
7No Signal
8Sync Error
9
10
11
12
13Setting VVT Offset
14Pulse Count High
15Pulse Count Low
16Error: 1st VVT Signal
17Error: 2nd VVT Signal
18Error: 3rd VVT Signal
19Error:4th VVT Signal
20Error: 6th VVT Signal
21Error: 7th VVT Signal
22Error: 9th VVT Signal
23Error: 10th VVT Signal
24Error: 11th VVT Signal
25Error:12th VVT Signal
26
27
28Active

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Fault Modes & DTC Codes

The ECU monitors the relationship between the Servo Positions 1/2 signals, Pedal Positions 1/2 signals and Target vs Actual Plate Position. When an error occurs the ECU will generate the following DTC’s

  • P1574 Throttle Position Sensor Disagreement between Sensors
  • P1577 Pedal Position Sensor Disagreement between Sensors
  • P1570 DBW Target Tracking Error
  • P1581 DBW Shutdown

The DTC code will be cleared automatically by the ECU when the fault condition is removed. However, an error counter will be incremented so the fault history can be viewed.

During an active DBW DTC the ECU will limit the engine speed for safety reasons. There are several options available using the DBW Fault Mode setting:

  1. Non adjustable engine limit set at 2000RPM.(Recommended setting)
  2. Use Limp Home Table1. This is an adjustable 3D table.
  3. Use Limp Home Table2. This is an adjustable 3D table.
When using the Limp Home Tables make sure these are setup correctly.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Wiring References

V7-V9 & H6 ISC Pinout - Subaru

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Bipolar Stepper Motor Pinout - Delco

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

LS1 DBW Throttle Body Pinout

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

LSU 4.9 Pinout

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Magnetic-Resistive Sensor Wiring

Magneto-Resistive Sensors

Magneto-resistive (MR) sensors are commonly used in driver assistance systems such as ABS, TCS and ESP to measure wheel speed, the frequency being proportional to the rotational speed of the wheel. These sensors detect a magnetic field and because there is no electrical contact the sensor can operate across a relatively large air gap. The amplitude of the output signal does not depend on speed.

A typical MR wheel speed sensor reading an ABS reluctor ring.

A typical MR wheel speed sensor reading an ABS reluctor ring.

These are active sensors which means they become “active” when a power supply is connected to it and a digital output waveform is then generated. However, the signal does not switch to ground like a conventional Hall sensor. Instead the signal swings between a high and low voltage, with the swing voltage dependant on the current passing through the sensor, i.e. the value of the pullup or pulldown current limiting resistor. Typical currents required to make the sensor operate are 4 – 8mA.

Two important checks must be completed.

  1. The polarity of the sensor must be correct.
  2. The pullup/pulldown resistor might need adjustment to ensure the digital signal swings within the correct levels.

Sensor Polarity

The sensor polarity can be determined by measuring the diode voltage drop across the sensor (sensor resistance cannot be used) using a Multimeter. The direction with the highest voltage drop is the correct polarity. See Table 1.0 as an example. Pin 1 should be connected to the pullup resistor and pin 2 should be connected to the ground.

Table 1.0

Diode Voltage DropPin 1Pin 2Notes
1.781 VPositiveNegativeCorrect Polarity
0.637 VNegativePositiveIncorrect Polarity

Device Connection

A Magneto-resistive sensor can be connected directly to an Emtron ECU and the internal Scope function can be used to view the signal. Once you have the signal image, the arming threshold can be set correctly.

Sensor Supply and Wiring

The sensor is powered through a pullup resistor. The minimum supply voltage is 8V, ideally a regulated supply should be used to ensure consistent readings. The figure below illustrates how the sensor should be wired.

MR sensor wiring — powered through a pullup resistor from the supply, with the signal taken between the pullup and the sensor.

MR sensor wiring — powered through a pullup resistor from the supply, with the signal taken between the pullup and the sensor.

NoteNOTE If the pullup resistor is too big there will be insufficient current to make the output switch. Typical Pullup resistor range is 330 Ohms to 1000 Ohms. The ECU has a 4k7 pullup resistor which may not activate the sensor. In this situation an external pullup will need to be fitted.

The Low and High output levels will vary with different sensors, so for signal integrity each sensor output should be checked using an oscilloscope. Table 1.1 shows some typical results from a Toyota Sensor. Figure 1.0 shows a scope trace of an MR Sensor with 330R pullup supplied at 8V. The High Output level is 5.9V and the Low Output Level is 3.6V.

Figure 1.0 — Scope of an MR sensor (330R pullup at 8V): High output 5.9V, Low output 3.6V, against the 0V reference.

Figure 1.0 — Scope of an MR sensor (330R pullup at 8V): High output 5.9V, Low output 3.6V, against the 0V reference.

Table 1.1

SupplyPullup ResistanceLow OutputHigh OutputSwitching RangeComments
5V330 Ohms5.2V5.2V0.0VInsufficient Current
8V330 Ohms3.6V5.9V2.3V(see Figure 1.0)
12V330 Ohms7.6V9.9V2.3V
8V470 Ohms5.25V5.25V0.0VInsufficient Current
12V470 Ohms6.3V9.45V3.15V

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Vehicle Specific

Mitsubishi EVO 4-8

Mitsubishi EVO 4-8 Plug-in ECU User Manual

1.0 Introduction

The Mitsubishi EVO 4-8 ECU is designed to be plugged into the OEM harness to allow for a true “Plug and Play” install. The system is based on the KV Series Motorsport ECU, so all the same features are available excluding any limitations based around the OEM connector system. An Expansion port is included giving access to unused Input channels. CAN Bus 1 is also available providing additional I/O expandability.

2.0 Plugin Features

General

  • KV8 ECU based platform — Dual 100MHz processors, 32MB ECU logging memory, over 1000 logging channels, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Aluminium 6061 Grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Compatible with all Emtron proven motorsport features (Launch Control, Rolling Launch, Anti-Lag, Traction Control)
  • Upgradeable to run the Emtron fuel model through installation of a flex meter, fuel temperature and fuel pressure sensor
  • Idle speed closed loop control using DBW with advanced Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) airflow calculations
  • Knock control with high speed digital filtering for each cylinder using the OEM sensor with selectable centre frequency and bandwidth
  • Pre-configured calibration file loaded providing a comprehensive tuning platform
  • Input Expansion Capabilities through DTM connector: 3× User Analog Volt Inputs (Fuel Temperature, Fuel Pressure, Inlet Temperature), 1× User Digital Input (Flex Meter Input and switch inputs), 2× User Analog Inputs
  • Emtune software for tuning and data analysis

Communications: CAN 2.0B Bus 1 (User CAN Bus for I/O expansion — Lambda, EGT); High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection.

Operating Temperature: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical: Enclosure Size 160 × 162 × 38 mm, 890g

3.0 Installation

3.1 Expansion Port

The ECU’s input capabilities can be expanded using the expansion connection, which is a male DTM 12 Way. These additional inputs can be connected to any sensor, but the recommended sensors are indicated in brackets.

EVO 4-8 expansion port connector (DTM 12-way).

EVO 4-8 expansion port connector (DTM 12-way).

Table 3.0 — Expansion Port Pinout (DTM06-12SA)

PinFunction
1Analog Sensor 0V Reference
25V Vref2 Supply
3AN 8 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
4AN 11 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
5AN 12 (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
6DI 6 (e.g. Ethanol Content Sensor)
7DI 13
8DI 14
914V Out Protected (e.g. ELC2 Power Supply). Post ECU SN 2700 only.
10ECU Ground (e.g. ELC2 or E85 Sensor Ground). Post ECU SN 2700 only.
11CAN 1 Hi
12CAN 1 Lo

3.2 CAN Bus 1 Wiring

The ECU CAN Bus 1 is reserved for Emtron CAN Bus devices, expanding the IO capability of the ECU. The following devices can be connected: ELC1/2 (Lambda to CAN), ETC4/ETC8M (Thermocouple to CAN), EIC10/EIC16M (Input to CAN). All these CAN devices share a common power, ground and CAN pinout using a 4-way DTM.

Table 3.1 — CAN Device Power and CAN Deutsch Connector Pinout

PinFunctionWire Colour
1GroundBLACK
2CAN LoGREEN
3CAN HiYELLOW
412V SupplyRED

To help with installation time, each CAN Device pin can be directly connected into the ECU IO Expansion port:

Table 3.2 — IO Expansion to CAN Device wiring

NameECU IO Expansion 12-Way DTMCAN Device 4-Way DTM
GroundPin 8Pin 1
CAN 1 LoPin 12Pin 2
CAN 1 HiPin 11Pin 3
PowerPin 7Pin 4

Standard CAN bus precautions apply — twisted pair (min one twist per 40mm), minimise connectors, 120 ohm 0.25W termination at each END, stub length < 0.3m (ISO 11898). All Emtron CAN devices have no on-board terminating resistor, allowing them to be wired at any position on the Bus.

3.3 Sensor Wiring

5V VRef2 Sensor Supply (Pin 2 of Expansion port) — A 250mA 5V output designed to supply automotive sensors.

Sensor 0V Reference (Pin 1 of Expansion port) — This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the 0V Reference pin directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. This is a dedicated and specialised 0V/ground output for analog sensors.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Use Pin 8 (Ground) in the Expansion port.

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

3.4 Ethanol Content Sensor Wiring

An Ethanol Content sensor can be wired into the ECU using the Expansion port. The following channel assignment is recommended for the GM sensor:

GM Sensor PinoutExpansion PortDescription
Pin 1Pin 9 — 14V ProtectedSupply, 8V or 14V
Pin 2Pin 10 — ECU GroundGround
Pin 3Pin 6 — DI 6Output. Temperature and Ethanol Content

NoteNOTE DO NOT connect the Ethanol Content sensor ground to the “Analog Sensor 0V Reference” — use the ECU Ground from Pin 10. The Ethanol sensor produces a frequency-based output; suitable ECU channels are DI 1-8.

DescriptionCalibration
Ethanol Content (%)50Hz = 0% Ethanol, 150Hz = 100% Ethanol
Fuel Temperature1ms = -40°C, 5ms = 125°C

To configure the ECU for this sensor, select the Ethanol Sensor Input Source to DI6. The ECU will automatically decode the Ethanol Content and Fuel Temperature. Once assigned, more settings become available in the Tuning View → Engine Functions menu.

4.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-4Fuel Injector Cyl 1-4
Injection 5Rear Lambda Heater
Injection 6Front Lambda Heater
Injection 7A/C Fan Relay (High)
Injection 8CE Light
Injection 9-12Not Used

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1Ignition Cylinder 1/4
Ignition 2Ignition Cylinder 2/3
Ignition 3A/C Fan Relay (Low)
Ignition 4IC Spray Lamp
Ignition 5Alternator Load Control
Ignition 6Fuel Pump Relay
Ignition 7Fuel Pump Speed Relay
Ignition 8A/C Clutch Relay
Ignition 9-12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1MAP
Analog Voltage 2TPS
Analog Voltage 3O2 Front
Analog Voltage 4O2 Rear
Analog Voltage 5-6Not Used
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8 (Pull-up)(IO Expansion port)
Analog Voltage 9 (Pull-up)Intake Temperature (IAT MAF)
Analog Voltage 10 (Pull-up)Fuel Tank Temp (USDM)
Analog Voltage 11-12 (Pull-up)(IO Expansion port)
Analog Voltage 13-14Not Used

Analog Voltage Channels 7-12 have switchable pull-ups suitable for temperature measurement.

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1MAF Reset
Digital Input 2Vehicle Speed
Digital Input 3Clutch Switch
Digital Input 4Power Steer Pressure Switch
Digital Input 5Alternator FR Signal
Digital Input 6IO Expansion port (Ethanol Sensor)
Digital Input 7MAF
Digital Input 8I/C Spray Switch - Auto
Digital Input 9I/C Spray Switch - Manual
Digital Input 10ACD Input
Digital Input 11Ignition Start
Digital Input 12A/C Pressure Switch
Digital Input 13-14IO Expansion port

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1Purge Solenoid
Auxiliary 2Wastegate Solenoid
Auxiliary 3Tacho
Auxiliary 4Engine Fan Relay (EVO 7-8) - PWM
Auxiliary 5Stepper Motor A1
Auxiliary 6Stepper Motor A2
Auxiliary 7Stepper Motor B1
Auxiliary 8Stepper Motor B2
Auxiliary 9Fuel Pressure Solenoid
Auxiliary 10I/C Spray Relay
Auxiliary 11Engine Fan Relay
Auxiliary 12Sec Air/EGR Solenoid
Auxiliary 13EVO8 Crank ground / EVO7 Cat Light
Auxiliary 14-16Not Used

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorCam Position - Inlet LH

5.0 Plug-in Specific Information

5.1 Fuel Model

The base ECU calibration is supplied in Speed Density mode. It is recommended to install an Emtron 4Bar MAP sensor and wire it to a spare ANV Input in the Emtron expansion port. The ECU may also be configured to run on MAF only, or using a combination of MAF and Speed Density (MAP).

5.2 Inlet Air Temperature

ANV9 (ECU Pin 72) is assigned to the Inlet Air Temperature Sensor, which is physically located in the Mass Air Flow Meter. This is not ideal for the fuel model — it is recommended to install an inlet air temperature sensor in the inlet manifold. The Mass Air Flow Meter wiring can be reassigned, or the Air Temp sensor can be wired directly to pin 3 or 4 in the Emtron expansion port connector. ANV8, 11 or 12 may then be assigned in the inputs setup page in Emtune. Some EVO models have an inlet air temperature sensor fitted; however, this is not accounted for in the Emtron Plugin ECU — it is recommended to wire to the expansion port connector.

5.3 ECU Pin 40 Configuration

ECU Pin 40 configuration depends on the model. A low current, low side driver is connected to this pin, controlled by Auxiliary Output 13.

  • EVO 8 — Crank/Cam Sensor Ground: A ground pin for the Crank and Cam sensors that acts as an immobiliser function. Aux 13 needs to be switched ON to provide a ground and allow the engine to start.
  • EVO 4-7 — CAT Light: The CAT light requires a ground to switch the light on. Aux 13 can be used to control this light.

6.0 Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

On initial installation it is advised to clear all the DTCs if errors are reported. Connect to Emtune and look at the DTC status in the bottom toolbar. If there are errors the status box will be red. To open the DTC window, click on the DTC Status box in the bottom toolbar OR use File → Open DTC. Select “Clear ALL DTCs” and confirm all the Error Codes have been removed — the DTC Status box should go green. If the error codes have not all been removed, select “Update DTC” then use the DTC window to locate the sensor that is on fault.

7.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron Mitsubishi EVO 4-8 Plugin1609-52248
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15

Appendix A – EVO 4-8 ECU Pinout

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
1Injector 1INJ 1
2Injector 3INJ 3
3Fuel Pressure SolenoidAUX 9
4Stepper Motor Coil A1AUX 5
5Stepper Motor Coil B1AUX 6
6EGR Solenoid RelayAUX 12
8Fuel Pump RelayIGN 6
9Purge SolenoidAUX 1
10Ignition Coil 1 & 4IGN 1
11Wastegate SolenoidAUX 2
12ECU 14V from Main RelayECU SUPPLY
13Engine Block/Power GroundECU GROUND
14Injector 2INJ 2
15Injector 4INJ 4
16Evaporative Purge SolenoidAUX 1
17Stepper Motor Coil A2AUX 6
18Stepper Motor Coil B3AUX 8
19Volume Airflow Sensor Reset SignalDI 1
20Engine Fan Speed low (EVO 4-6)AUX 11
21Engine Fan PWM Control (EVO 7-8)AUX 4
22A/C Clutch RelayIGN 8
23Ignition Coil 2 & 3IGN 2
25ECU 14V from Main RelayECU SUPPLY
26Engine Block/Power GroundECU GROUND
32A/C Fan Relay HighINJ 7
33Alternator G TerminalIGN 5
34A/C Fan Relay LowIGN 3
35I/C Spray LampIGN 4
36CE LightINJ 8
37Power Steer Pressure SwitchDI 4
38ECU Main Relay ControlMAIN EFI RELAY
39Fuel Pump SpeedIGN 7
40Crank/Cam sensor ground (EVO8) / CAT (EVO 4-7)AUX 13
41Alt FR terminal (Field response) - Freq BasedDI 5
43Clutch SwitchDI 3
44I/C Spray Switch - AutoDI 8
45AC Pressure SwitchDI 12
51Immobiliser
53Sec Air Solenoid (EVO7)AUX 12
54O2 Heater RearINJ 5
55I/C Spray Relay (EVO7)AUX 10
56Diagnostics – OBD II Pin 1
57I/C Spray Relay (EVO8)AUX 10
58TachoAUX 3
60O2 Heater FrontINJ 6
62Diagnostics – OBD II Pin 7
71Start SwitchDI 11
72Intake Air TemperatureANV 8
73Manifold Absolute Pressure SensorANV 1
75O2 Sensor Signal RearANV 4
76O2 Sensor Signal FrontANV 3
77Fuel Tank Temperature (USDM)ANV 10
78Knock SensorKNOCK 1+
80Battery Backup (+12 Constant)Internal Flywheel Supply
81+ 5V Supply+5V Vref1
82Ignition SwitchIgnition Switch
83Engine Coolant TemperatureANV 7
84Throttle Position SensorANV 2
85External Barometric Pressure
86Vehicle SpeedDI 2
87ACD Signal/Idle SwitchDI 10
88Cam SignalSync Sensor
89Crank SignalCrank Index
90Volume Air Flow SensorDI 7
91I/C Spray Switch – Manual (EVO 7-8)DI 9
92Sensor Ground (MAP, TPS)Sensor 0V Reference

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Mitsubishi EVO 9

Mitsubishi EVO 9 Plug-in ECU User Manual

1.0 Introduction

The Mitsubishi EVO 9 ECU is designed to be plugged into the OEM harness to allow for a true “Plug and Play” install. The system is based on the KV Series Motorsport ECU, so all the same features are available with the limitation based around the OEM connector system. An Expansion loom is included giving access to unused Input channels. CAN Bus 2 is also available providing additional I/O expandability.

2.0 Plugin Features

General

  • KV8 ECU based platform — Dual 100MHz processors, 32MB ECU logging memory, over 1000 logging channels, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Aluminium 6061 Grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Compatible with all Emtron proven motorsport features (Launch Control, Rolling Launch, Anti-Lag, Traction Control)
  • Upgradeable to run the Emtron fuel model through installation of a flex meter, fuel temperature and fuel pressure sensor
  • Idle speed closed loop control using DBW with advanced Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) airflow calculations
  • Knock control with high speed digital filtering for each cylinder using the OEM sensor with selectable centre frequency and bandwidth
  • Pre-configured calibration file loaded providing a comprehensive tuning platform
  • Input Expansion Capabilities through DTM connector: 3× User Analog Volt Inputs (Fuel Temperature, Fuel Pressure, Inlet Temperature), 3× User Digital Input (Flex Meter Input and switch inputs)
  • Emtune software for tuning and data analysis

Communications: CAN 2.0B Bus 2 (User CAN Bus for I/O expansion — Lambda, EGT); High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection.

Operating Temperature: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical: Enclosure Size 160 × 162 × 38 mm, 890g

3.0 Installation

3.1 Expansion Port

The ECU’s input capabilities can be expanded using the expansion connection, which is a male DTM 12 Way. These additional inputs can be connected to any sensor, but the recommended sensors are indicated in brackets.

EVO 9 expansion port connector (DTM 12-way).

EVO 9 expansion port connector (DTM 12-way).

Table 3.0 — Expansion Port Pinout (DTM06-12SA)

PinFunction
1Analog Sensor 0V Reference
25V Vref2 Supply
3AN 8 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
4AN 9 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
5AN 10 (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
6DI 6 (e.g. Ethanol Content Sensor)
714V Out Protected (e.g. ELC2 Power Supply). Post ECU SN 2700 only.
8ECU Ground (e.g. ELC2 or E85 Sensor Ground). Post ECU SN 2700 only.
9DI 13
10DI 14
11CAN 2 Hi
12CAN 2 Lo

3.2 CAN Bus 2 Wiring

The ECU CAN Bus 2 is reserved for Emtron CAN Bus devices, expanding the IO capability of the ECU. The following devices can be connected: ELC1/2 (Lambda to CAN), ETC4/ETC8M (Thermocouple to CAN), EIC10/EIC16M (Input to CAN). All these CAN devices share a common power, ground and CAN pinout using a 4-way DTM.

Table 3.1 — CAN Device Power and CAN Deutsch Connector Pinout

PinFunctionWire Colour
1GroundBLACK
2CAN LoGREEN
3CAN HiYELLOW
412V SupplyRED

To help with installation time, each CAN Device pin can be directly connected into the ECU IO Expansion port:

Table 3.2 — IO Expansion to CAN Device wiring

NameECU IO Expansion 12-Way DTMCAN Device 4-Way DTM
GroundPin 8Pin 1
CAN 2 LoPin 12Pin 2
CAN 2 HiPin 11Pin 3
PowerPin 7Pin 4

Standard CAN bus precautions apply — twisted pair (min one twist per 40mm), minimise connectors, 120 ohm 0.25W termination at each END, stub length < 0.3m (ISO 11898). All Emtron CAN devices have no on-board terminating resistor, allowing them to be wired at any position on the Bus.

3.3 Sensor Wiring

5V VRef2 Sensor Supply (Pin 2 of Expansion port) — A 250mA 5V output designed to supply automotive sensors.

Sensor 0V Reference (Pin 1 of Expansion port) — This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the 0V Reference pin directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. This is a dedicated and specialised 0V/ground output for analog sensors.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Use Pin 8 (Ground) in the Expansion port.

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

3.4 Ethanol Content Sensor Wiring

An Ethanol Content sensor can be wired into the ECU using the Expansion port. The following channel assignment is recommended for the GM sensor:

GM Sensor PinoutExpansion LoomDescription
Pin 1Pin 9 — 14V ProtectedSupply, 8V or 14V
Pin 2Pin 10 — ECU GroundGround
Pin 3Pin 6 — DI 6Output. Temperature and Ethanol Content

NoteNOTE DO NOT connect the Ethanol Content sensor ground to the “Analog Sensor 0V Reference” — use the ECU Ground from Pin 10. The Ethanol sensor produces a frequency-based output; suitable ECU channels are DI 1-8.

DescriptionCalibration
Ethanol Content (%)50Hz = 0% Ethanol, 150Hz = 100% Ethanol
Fuel Temperature1ms = -40°C, 5ms = 125°C

To configure the ECU for this sensor, select the Ethanol Sensor Input Source to DI6. The ECU will automatically decode the Ethanol Content and Fuel Temperature. Once assigned, more settings become available in the Tuning View → Engine Functions menu.

4.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-4Fuel Injector Cyl 1-4
Injection 5Rear Lambda Heater
Injection 6Front Lambda Heater
Injection 7Purge Solenoid 1
Injection 8Secondary Air Solenoid
Injection 9-12Not Used

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1Ignition Cylinder 1/4
Ignition 2Ignition Cylinder 2/3
Ignition 3I/C Spray Lamp
Ignition 4Alternator Load Control
Ignition 5Fuel Pump Relay
Ignition 6Fuel Pump Speed Relay
Ignition 7A/C Clutch Relay
Ignition 8CE Light
Ignition 9A/C Fan High
Ignition 10A/C Fan Low
Ignition 11-12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1MAP
Analog Voltage 2TPS
Analog Voltage 3O2 Front
Analog Voltage 4O2 Rear
Analog Voltage 5MAF Baro
Analog Voltage 6Fuel Level
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8-10 (Pull-up)IO Expansion port
Analog Voltage 11 (Pull-up)Intake Temperature in MAF
Analog Voltage 12 (Pull-up)Fuel Tank Pressure (US Models)
Analog Voltage 13-14Not Used

Analog Voltage Channels 7-12 have switchable pull-ups suitable for temperature measurement.

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1Cam Position - Inlet
Digital Input 2Vehicle Speed
Digital Input 3Clutch Switch
Digital Input 4Power Steer Pressure Switch
Digital Input 5A/C Switch 2
Digital Input 6IO Expansion Loom (Ethanol Sensor)
Digital Input 7MAF
Digital Input 8I/C Spray Switch - Auto
Digital Input 9I/C Spray Switch - Manual
Digital Input 10Fuel Level Low Light
Digital Input 11Ignition Start
Digital Input 12A/C Pressure Switch
Digital Input 13-14IO Expansion port

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1VVT Inlet Solenoid
Auxiliary 2Wastegate Solenoid
Auxiliary 3Tacho
Auxiliary 4Engine Fan Relay
Auxiliary 5Stepper Motor B1
Auxiliary 6Stepper Motor A1
Auxiliary 7Stepper Motor A2
Auxiliary 8Stepper Motor B1
Auxiliary 9Fuel Pressure Solenoid
Auxiliary 10I/C Spray Relay
Auxiliary 11EGR Solenoid
Auxiliary 12Evap Ventilation Solenoid
Auxiliary 13-16Not Used

Auxiliary Channel 9/10 can be reconfigured to run DBW.

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorCam Position - Inlet LH

5.0 Plug-in Specific Information

5.1 Fuel Model

The base ECU calibration is supplied in Speed Density mode. It is recommended to install an Emtron 4Bar MAP sensor and wire it to an unused ANV Input in the Emtron expansion port. The ECU may also be configured to run on MAF only, or using a combination of MAF and Speed Density (MAP).

5.2 Inlet Air Temperature

ECU Pin 62 is assigned to the Intake Air Temperature (MAF), which is physically located in the Mass Air Flow Meter. This is not ideal for the fuel model — it is recommended to install an inlet air temperature sensor in the inlet manifold, wired directly to pin 3 in the Emtron expansion port connector. ANV8 may then be assigned in the inputs setup page in Emtune. Some models have an inlet air temperature sensor fitted in the plenum, connected to Pin 94 in the ECU and also assigned to ANV8 — if the vehicle is already fitted with a plenum-mounted sensor the input channel simply needs to be assigned.

NoteNOTE If the OEM sensor is fitted, pin 3 on the Emtron expansion port will no longer be available (unless that sensor is disconnected) as the pin is shared.

5.3 Drive by Wire (DBW)

Auxiliary Channels 9 and 10 can be reconfigured to run DBW.

ChannelOEM ConfigurationReconfigured
Auxiliary Output 9Fuel Pressure SolenoidDBW Motor +
Auxiliary Output 10I/C Spray RelayDBW Motor -

6.0 Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

On initial installation it is advised to clear all the DTCs if errors are reported. Connect to Emtune and look at the DTC status in the bottom toolbar (red if errors are present). Open the DTC window via the DTC Status box or File → Open DTC, select “Clear ALL DTCs”, and confirm all the Error Codes have been removed (status box goes green). If the error codes have not all been removed, select “Update DTC” then use the DTC window to locate the sensor that is on fault.

7.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron Mitsubishi EVO 9 Plugin1609-5229
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15

Appendix A – EVO 9 ECU Pinout

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
1Injector 1INJ 1
2Injector 4INJ 2
3Front O2 HeaterINJ 6
4Secondary Air SolenoidINJ 8
6EGR Solenoid RelayAUX 11
8Alternator G TerminalIGN 4
9Injector 2INJ 2
11Ignition Coil 1 & 4IGN 1
12Ignition Coil 2 & 3IGN 2
14Stepper Motor Coil A1AUX 6
15Stepper Motor Coil B1AUX 5
16Evaporative Purge SolenoidINJ 7
18Engine Fan (4kHz)AUX 4
19Volume Airflow Sensor Reset Signal
20A/C Compressor Clutch RelayIGN 7
21Fuel Pump RelayIGN 5
22Check Engine Indicator LampIGN 8
24Injector 3INJ 3
26Rear O2 Sensor Heater (USDM)INJ 5
28Stepper Motor Coil A2AUX 7
29Stepper Motor Coil B2AUX 8
30A/C Condenser Fan Relay (Low)IGN 9
31A/C Condenser Fan Relay (High)IGN 10
32MIVEC Oil Control SolenoidAUX 1
34Sensor Ground (CAS, AFM)ECU GROUND
35Evaporative Ventilation Solenoid (USDM)AUX 12
41Wastegate Solenoid #1AUX 2
42+ 5V Supply+5V Vref1
43Crank SignalCrank Index +
44Engine Coolant TemperatureANV 7
45TachoAUX 3
46Engine Block/Power GroundECU Ground
47ECU 14V from Main RelayECU Supply
48Fuel Pressure SolenoidAUX 9
49Sensor Ground (MAP, TPS)Sensor 0V Reference
50CAM Angle Sensor (Exhaust Cam)Sync Sensor
51Barometric Pressure Sensor (MAF)ANV 5
52Alt FR terminal (Field response) - Freq Based
53Inlet Cam Position SensorDI 1
54Power Steer Pressure SwitchDI 4
55Fuel Pump Speed RelayIGN 6
56I/C Spray RelayAUX 10
57Main Relay (Gnd to operate)EFI RELAY
58Engine Block/Power GroundECU Ground
59ECU 14V from Main RelayECU Supply
60Battery Backup (+12 Constant)Internal Flywheel Supply
61Volume Air Flow SensorDI 7
62Intake Air Temp Sensor (MAF)ANV 11
63Wastegate Solenoid #2AUX 2
65A/C SwitchDI 5
66I/C Auto SwitchDI 8
67I/C Manual SwitchDI 9
68Ignition Start SignalDI 11
71O2 Sensor Signal FrontANV 3
73O2 Sensor Signal RearANV 4
75(N/C)ECU Ground
78Throttle Position SensorANV 2
80Vehicle SpeedDI 2
83A/C Request (Pressure Switch)DI 12
85Diagnostics K-line (OBD Pin 7)
88Clutch SwitchDI 3
90I/C Spray LampIGN 3
91Knock SensorKnock 1 +
92Manifold Absolute Pressure SensorANV 1
93Fuel Tank Differential Pressure SensorANV 12
95Fuel LevelANV 6
96Inlet Plenum TemperatureANV 8
97Fuel Level Low (USDM)DI 10
98Immobiliser
99Ignition SwitchIgnition Switch
100Diagnostics

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Nissan GTR R35

Nissan GTR R35 Build

Nissan GT-R R35

Nissan GTR R35 dedicated menu shown with GTR R35 build enabled

The Nissan R35 GT-R’s turbo control system and monitoring is different than many turbocharged cars.

Commonly turbocharged engines have a common plenum that feeds all the engines cylinders.

Each cylinder draws air from a common plenum.

On the Nissan R35 GT-R one bank feeds one set of three cylinders(1-3) and the other turbo feeds the other three cylinders (4-6) via separated plenum’s. There is also a cross over balance pipe between the plenum’s.

To correctly calculate the fueling requirements for each bank the ECU uses MAF Meter 1 (Bank 1) to control the fueling on Cylinders 1-3 and MAF Meter 2 (Bank 2) to control the fueling on Cylinders 4-6. There are also boost pressure sensors on each bank along with a single manifold pressure sensor on one bank. These pressure sensors allow for various calculations to be made by the ECU, offering a number methods to use for fuel calculations.

The Emtron R35 GT-R Plug-in ECU is a replacement engine management system designed to be installed and integrate seamlessly with the vehicle, whilst also allowing extreme flexibility and control from the KV12 based ECU platform.

The Nissan GTR R35 tab allows access to dedicated R35 features:

▪ Nissan Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) – This system employs an extremely complex system of vehicle sensors including wheel speed, steering angle, g-force and yaw which are used to generate various torque requests which the ECU must abide by accurately. This will not only achieve maximum vehicle performance, it is also a safety feature.

▪ Nissan Transmission Control Module Integration (TCM) - The ECU must accurately calculate and perform torque requests assigned by the TCM for the drive-train to function correctly and smoothly for all driving conditions. Limitations on the transmission torque capacity must also be considered and hence another reason why the torque supplied by the engine must be accurately metered.

▪ Launch Control – The TCM provides the ECU torque requests during a launch OFF mode and is able to place the ECU into launch mode where the Torque Limit is not requested, allowing the ECU to increase the launch limit through a raised engine speed limit and an ECU determined torque limit.

▪ Downshift Rev Matching – The ECU must accurately calculate and increase torque to smoothly match the engine RPM in the next gear on downshift, by increasing the throttle mass flow (TMF) during the downshift event until the TCM is satisfied with the engine speed and torque levels.

NoteNOTE This page covers the plug-in install reference. For the detailed dedicated R35 tuning menus see Nissan GTR R35 VDC, Nissan GTR R35 TCM and TCM Torque Limit Engine Cut Setup.

Plugin Features

  • KV12 ECU based platform — Dual 100MHz processors, 32MB ECU logging memory, over 1000 channels, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate, Emtune software, Dual Knock Control using Bosch digital filtering
  • 6061 Grade Aluminium CNC Billet Enclosure
  • Fully compatible with all OEM systems and user programmable, including Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) via throttle torque reduction, Transmission (TCM) Torque and Shift Management, and Torque Management Launch Control
  • Compatible with all Emtron proven motorsport features
  • Sequential Staged injection option available through the OEM header
  • Upgradeable to run the Emtron Fuel model through installation of a Flex Meter, Fuel Temperature and Fuel Pressure Sensor
  • Input Expansion through DTM connector: 2× User Analog Volt Inputs (Fuel Temperature and Pressure), 1× User Digital Input (Flex Meter Input)

Communications: CAN 2.0B Node 1 — User CAN Bus for I/O expansion (Lambda, EGT); CAN 2.0B Node 2 — 500k Baud Full CAN Bus OEM Integration; High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps.

Operating Temperature: -30 to 125°C (-22 to 257°F). Physical: 160 × 162 × 38 mm, 890g.

Kit Contents

When purchasing a Nissan R35 plug-in the following items are included:

  • GTR R35 Plug-in ECU
  • Ethernet Communications Cable
  • 12 way DTM to ELC Adapter Loom (120 Ohm CAN Termination resistors preinstalled)
  • ELC2 Dual Channel Lambda to CAN controller – LSU4.9 version
  • 2 × LSU4.9 Lambda Sensors + 2 × LSU4.9 Sensor Extension Looms
  • ECU Mounting Kit

Expansion Loom

The ECU’s Input capabilities can be expanded using the expansion connection, which is a male DTM 12 Way. These additional inputs can be connected to any sensor, but the recommended sensors are indicated in brackets.

DTM 12 Way expansion loom connector (ECU side).

DTM 12 Way expansion loom connector (ECU side).

PinFunction
1Analog Sensor 0V Reference
25V Aux Supply
3AN 10 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
4Not Used
5AN 6 (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
6DI 6 (e.g. Ethanol Content Sensor)
714V Out Protected (ELC2 Power Supply)
8Ground (ELC2 Ground)
914V Out Protected (ELC2 Power Supply)
10Ground (ELC2 Ground)
11CAN 1 Hi
12CAN 1 Lo

ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-12Fuel Injector Cylinder 1-12

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1-6Ignition Cylinder 1-6
Ignition 7DBW Relay
Ignition 8Spare
Ignition 9-12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1MAP
Analog Voltage 2DBW Servo Position Main Bank 1
Analog Voltage 3DBW Servo Position Sub Bank 1
Analog Voltage 4DBW Servo Position Main Bank 2
Analog Voltage 5DBW Servo Position Sub Bank 2
Analog Voltage 6Fuel Pressure
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8 (Pull-up)Airbox Temperature
Analog Voltage 9 (Pull-up)Engine Oil Temperature
Analog Voltage 10 (Pull-up)IO Expansion loom (Emtron Fuel Temp/IAT)
Analog Voltage 11 (Pull-up)Pedal Position Sensor (PPS) Main
Analog Voltage 12 (Pull-up)Pedal Position Sensor (PPS) Sub
Analog Voltage 13MAF Bank 1
Analog Voltage 14MAF Bank 2

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1Cam Position - Inlet RH
Digital Input 2Brake Switch
Digital Input 3Neutral Switch
Digital Input 4Fuel Level
Digital Input 5Steering Wheel Button
Digital Input 6IO Expansion Loom (Ethanol Sensor)
Digital Input 7FP Feedback Sec Pump
Digital Input 8FP Feedback Prim Pump
Digital Input 9Power Steering Pressure
Digital Input 10Evap System Pressure
Digital Input 11Secondary Air MAF Sensor
Digital Input 12Boost Pressure Bank 1
Digital Input 13Boost Pressure Bank 2
Digital Input 14AC System Pressure

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1VVT Solenoid Bank 1
Auxiliary 2VVT Solenoid Bank 2
Auxiliary 3Purge
Auxiliary 4Wastegate Solenoid
Auxiliary 5Sub Fuel Pump
Auxiliary 6Purge Vent
Auxiliary 7Fuel Pump Speed Control
Auxiliary 8Tacho
Auxiliary 9DBW + Bank 1
Auxiliary 10DBW – Bank 1
Auxiliary 11DBW + Bank 2
Auxiliary 12DBW – Bank 2
Auxiliary 13Air Pump Relay
Auxiliary 14Air Cut Solenoid Relay Control (Bank 1 & 2)
Auxiliary 15Narrow Band Sensor Heater
Auxiliary 16Not Used

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorCam Position - Inlet Bank 1 (LH)

Plug-in Specific Information

Staged Injection

Injector channels 7-12 are available in the OEM header and can be used for additional outputs or for Sequential Staged Injection: Injector Ch 7 = A11, Ch 8 = A12, Ch 9 = A16, Ch 10 = A35, Ch 11 = A39, Ch 12 = A43.

Fuel Model

The base calibration is supplied with a Blend method of MAP Modelled (MAP Sensor and MAP Estimate) and Mass Air Flow (MAF Sensor). A fully adjustable combination of Throttle Pressure Ratio and Air Mass balances the priority of the two inputs. Many other fuel modelling methods are possible, including removing the MAF Sensors completely — a common implementation when the OEM sensors don’t allow enough flow, or when engine modifications (cams, air bypass valves, larger turbos, modified intake piping) generate unstable Mass Flow readings. When MAF is selected, the Secondary Load table can be used to scale the MAF (switch ON via Fuel Menu → Fuel Table Control → Secondary Load Table, set to 12).

Inlet Air Temperature

A factory-fitted Inlet Temperature Sensor is available on Analog Input 8 and should already be configured in the base calibration.

Check Engine Light / Air-Con Switch

Both are handled through the CAN bus; the base calibration has the CE Light output and Air-Con Switch input source already configured and selected to “CAN Bus OEM”.

User CAN Bus 1

The ECU CAN Bus 1 is available for I/O expansion (ELC1/2, ETC4/ETC8M, EIC10/EIC16M). The ELC Power, Ground and CAN wires connect directly into the ECU IO Expansion Loom using the supplied 12 way DTM to ELC Adapter Loom (120 Ohm termination resistors pre-installed — completely plug and play). If other devices are added to the CAN bus, ensure no additional resistors are introduced.

NameELC 4-Way DTMECU IO Expansion 12-Way DTM
GroundPin 1Pin 8
CAN LoPin 2Pin 12
CAN HiPin 3Pin 11
PowerPin 4Pin 7

OEM CAN Bus 2

The ECU communicates on CAN Bus 2, reserved for the R35 GT-R, maintaining full compatibility with all other CAN devices in the vehicle. Emtune has a dedicated R35 GT-R runtime tab; these runtimes are available throughout the ECU’s functions and viewable in the Emtune logger.

Emtron Torque Management

The ECU performs accurate torque calculations provided the engine model configuration is accurate. The Torque Management section allows the user to calibrate errors in the torque model whilst influencing torque delivery: Torque Reduction Ign Retard Clamp, Torque Nitrous Gain, BSFC, Engine Torque Correction Table, Torque Demand Correction Table, Frictional Loss Table (+ Offset 1 Table, commonly spanned against Engine Oil Temperature), Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Gain Table (% per degree) and Torque Reduction Gain Table (% per %cut).

Launch Control

Launch Control is enabled in the base calibration. The TCM controls how it is armed — the ECU arms based on enabling R Mode of the transmission. The feature allows the user to target a torque level; the base calibration leverages Engine Speed Limit 2 (RPM Limit 2 Table) to control engine speed during launch. The correct torque target achieves good acceleration and traction without requiring engine speed limiting once the vehicle is moving.

Communications Torque

Torque information over the CAN bus can be modified (a ±500Nm offset table), changing gearshift behaviour and in-gear clutch pressure. If there is excessive slip, increase the reported Torque; if the gearshift feel is too sharp/aggressive, reduce it. This affects Engine Torque Demand and Engine Torque. Note: directly programming the TCM through a third-party flashing tool is advised over using the ECU to offset the torque reported.

Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron R35 Plugin1609-1835

Appendix A – ECU Pinout

Connector A

OEM PinFunctionChannel Assignment
A1Throttle Control Motor Supply (paired with pin 49)AUX 9-12 Supply (option 2)
A2Throttle Servo Bank 2 Motor +AUX11
A3AF Sensor 2 Heater (denso narrowband)AUX15
A4AF Sensor 1 Heater (denso narrowband)AUX15
A5Throttle Servo Bank 2 Motor -AUX12
A6Power GroundGROUND
A7Evaporative Purge Canister Vent Control ValveAUX6
A8Evaporative Purge Canister Volume Control SolenoidAUX3
A9Ignition Cylinder 2Ignition Channel 2
A10Ignition Cylinder 1Ignition Channel 1
A11Secondary Injector 1Injector Channel 7
A12Secondary Injector 2Injector Channel 8
A13Ignition Cylinder 3Ignition Channel 3
A15TPS Bank 2 GroundSensor Ground 1
A16Secondary Injector 3Injector Channel 9
A17Fuel Injector Cylinder 3INJ 3
A19MAF Sensor Bank 2 GroundSensor Ground 1
A20TPS Bank 1 GroundSensor Ground 1
A21Fuel Injector Cylinder 2INJ 2
A22MAF Sensor Bank 1 GroundSensor Ground 1
A23SAMAF and TAM GroundSensor Ground 1
A24Secondary Air Injection MAF Sensor (SAMAF)DI 11
A25Fuel Injector Cylinder 1INJ 1
A26Engine Oil Temp / Engine Temp GroundSensor Ground 1
A27Engine Oil TemperatureANV9
A28Throttle Servo Bank 2 Position MainANV4
A29Fuel Pump Control SignalAUX7
A30Fuel Pump Control Diag InputDI 8
A31Mass Flow Sensor Bank 1ANV13
A32Throttle Servo Bank 2 Position TrackingAV5
A33Ignition Cylinder 4Ignition Channel 4
A34Ignition Cylinder 5Ignition Channel 5
A35Secondary Injector 4Injector Channel 10
A36Throttle Servo Bank 1 Position TrackingANV3
A37Fuel Injector Cylinder 4INJ 4
A38Ignition Cylinder 6Ignition Channel 6
A39Secondary Injector 5Injector Channel 11
A40Throttle Servo Bank 1 Position MainANV 1
A41Fuel Injector Cylinder 5INJ 5
A42Fuel Level SensorANV 10
A43Secondary Injector 6Injector Channel 12
A44Airbox TemperatureANV8
A45Fuel Injector Cylinder 6INJ 6
A46Coolant TemperatureANV7
A47Inlet Mass Flow Bank 2ANV14
A48Inlet Manifold Pressure Bank 2ANV1

Connector B

OEM PinFunctionChannel Assignment
B49Throttle Control Motor Supply (paired with pin 1)Aux 9-12 Supply (option 1)
B50Throttle Servo Bank 1 Motor +AUX 9
B51Inlet Camshaft Bank 2 SolenoidAUX 2
B52Inlet Camshaft Bank 1 SolenoidAUX 1
B53Throttle Servo Bank 1 Motor -AUX 10
B54Power GroundGROUND
B55O2HR1 - Wideband bank 1 HeaterNot Connected
B56O2HR2 - Wideband bank 2 HeaterNot Connected
B61Boost Control SolenoidAUX 4
B62Ground - Camshaft Position Bank 1Sync Sensor -
B63Camshaft Bank 1 Position Sensor (inlet)Sync Sensor +
B64Crankshaft Position SensorCrank Index +
B66Ground - Camshaft Position Bank 2Sync Sensor -
B67Camshaft Bank 2 Position Sensor (Inlet)DI 1
B68Ground - Crankshaft Position SensorCrank Index -
B70Ground - WB Sensor 1 and 2 (joined in loom)GROUND
B71Knock Sensor Ground for Bank 1 and 2 (joined)ECU Ground
B72Knock Sensor Bank 1Knock 1 +
B73O2SR1 - Wideband bank 1 sensorNot Connected
B74Ground (Power Steer Pres, MAP, Refrigerant Pres)Sensor Ground 1
B75Ground (Evap sensor, Boost sensor Bank 1 and 2)Sensor Ground 1
B76Knock Sensor Bank 2Knock 2 +
B77O2SR2 - Wideband bank 2 sensorNot Connected
B78Evap Control System Pressure SensorDI 10
B79Boost Pressure Bank 2DI12
B80Boost Pressure Bank 1DI13
B81Denso Sensor AF+ (Bank 1 Narrowband)Not Connected
B82Denso Sensor AF- (Bank 1 Narrowband)Sensor Ground 1
B83Power Steering PressureDI 9
B845V Supply - TPS Bank 25V Engine Supply
B85Denso Sensor AF+ (Bank 2)Not Connected
B86Denso Sensor AF- (Bank 2)Sensor Ground 1
B875V Supply - Crankshaft5V Trigger Supply
B885V Supply - Camshaft Position Bank 15V Trigger Supply
B89Air Conditioner Refrigerant PressureDI 14
B915V Supply - Camshaft Position Bank 25V Trigger Supply
B925V Supply - Evap sensor, Boost sensor Bank 1/25V Aux Supply
B93Sub Fuel Pump + (feedback)DI 7
B94Sub Fuel Pump - (feedback)Not Connected
B955V Supply - Power Steer Pres, MAP, Refrig Pres5V Engine Supply
B965V Supply - TPS Bank 15V Engine Supply

Connector C

OEM PinFunctionChannel Assignment
C97500k vehicle CAN bus to ABSCAN 2 LO (500kbps)
C995V Supply - Pedal Position Sensor 25V Engine Supply
C1005V Supply - Pedal Position Sensor 15V Engine Supply
C101500k vehicle CAN bus to ABSCAN 2 HI
C102Steering Wheel ButtonDI 5
C103Ground - Pedal Position Sensor 1Sensor Ground 1
C104Pedal Position MainANV11
C105ECM relayEFI Relay
C106Ignition SwitchIgnition Switch
C107Ground - Pedal Position Sensor 2Sensor Ground 1
C108Pedal Position TrackingANV12
C109Air Cut Solenoids Relay Control (Banks 1 & 2 joined)AUX14
C110Brake Switch (Stop Lamp Switch)DI 4
C111Neutral Switch (from TCM)DI 3
C113Tacho out (To Power Steer control unit)AUX 8
C114K-Line
C117Cruise Control Brake SwitchDI 2
C118Keep Alive Memory powerHot Supply
C120Air Pump RelayAUX 13
C121VBR - Power from ECM Relay (Sec Air Inj Pump, MAF)ECU Supply
C122VBR - Power from ECM RelayECU Supply
C124Power GroundGROUND
C126Sub Fuel Pump RelayAUX 5
C127DBW on/off relay (coil power from ECM Relay)IGN 7
C128Power GroundGROUND

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Nissan GTR R35 VDC Setup

VDC Setup

Nissan Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

The Nissan Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

The system takes control of braking and control of the engine output to achieve optimal performance, whilst keeping the vehicle on the steered path.

It is extremely important that the engine management system integrates seamlessly to achieve the correct functionality.

The Emtron R35 GT-R Plugin ECU is designed to replicate the OEM engine torque output by accepting and abiding by torque requests from the VDC system.

Image Image

VDC Torque Limiting - Throttle

Image Image

The VDC can request a Nm Torque Reduction/Limit using a combination of 2 methods:

  1. Throttle Plate Area control (TMF)

  2. Engine Cutting

These are separate requests sent over the CAN Bus from the VDC module to the ECU. The ECU then

uses a series of calculations to convert the Torque reduction request into either Throttle Plate position

or/and Engine Cut percentage.

The VDC primary Torque Limiting is done by using the Throttle Plate. The ECU uses Throttle Mass

Flow calculations to derive the required Throttle Area for a given Torque Target.

In some situations this may be insufficient to limit Engine Torque so a blend of Throttle Area

reduction and engine cutting maybe required.

CAUTION: When selected to OFF, the ECU will ignore the Torque Limit Throttle requests from the VDC module.

Default: Throttle.

0: OFF

1: Throttle

VDC Torque Limiting - Engine Cutting

Image Image

The VDC can request a Nm Torque Reduction/Limit using a combination of 2 methods:

  1. Throttle Plate Area control (TMF)

  2. Engine Cutting

These are separate requests sent over the CAN Bus from the VDC module to the ECU. The ECU then

uses a series of calculations to convert the Torque reduction request into either Throttle Plate position

or/and Engine Cut percentage.

The VDC secondary Torque Limiting is done by Engine Cutting.

A VDC Torque Limit (Nm) using Engine Cutting gets converted by the ECU into a calibrated

Engine Cut percentage using the following parameters:

  • Engine Ideal Torque

  • Frictional Loss

  • Torque Reduction Cut Gain Table

CAUTION: When selected to OFF, the ECU will ignore the Torque Limit Cut requests from the VDC module.

Default: Ignition Cut.

0: OFF

1: Ignition Cut

2: Fuel Cut

3: Ignition + Fuel Cut

VDC Torque Limit - Engine Cut Pattern

Image Image

Used when VDC Torque Limiting is controlled with Engine Cutting.

Allows the cutting pattern to be selected.

All patterns will achieve the calculated torque and will simply affect the cylinder order of cutting.

Default: Sequential Pattern 1

0: Random Pattern 1

1: Random Pattern 2

2: Sequential Pattern 1

3: Sequential Pattern 2

VDC Torque Limit - Input Filter

Image Image

A VDC Torque Limit (Nm) gets converted by the ECU into a Throttle Area output called “Throttle Area Demand - VDC”.

The ECUs uses complex Throttle Mass Flow calculations which are influenced strongly by the Pressure Ratio inputs before

and after the throttle plate. This filter gets applied to this ratio and is used to smooth the input torque requests.

0 = OFF (more aggressive VDC Control)

15 = Max Filtering

VDC Torque Limit - Output Filter

Image Image

A VDC Torque Limit (Nm) gets converted by the ECU into a Throttle Area output called “Throttle Area Demand - VDC”.

The output (Throttle Area) can be filtered by adjusting this setting before its used to control the Throttle Plate Area.

0 = OFF (more aggressive VDC Control)

5 = Max Filtering

Plot “Throttle Area Demand %” (filtered value) vs “Throttle Area Demand - VDC” (raw unfiltered) for tuning and to see

the filtering effects.

This can be used to smooth the throttle area demand %.

Increasing the filter will smooth the throttle demand.

However it is important to understand that any filter will reduce the response of the system.

VDC Torque Limit- Throttle Area Min Clamp

Image Image

The VDC Torque Limit (Nm) with Throttle Plate control uses Throttle Mass

Flow calculations to derive the required Throttle Area for a given Torque Target.

This setting controls the Minimum amount of Throttle Area the ECU can apply for a given Torque Limit request.

0% = OFF

Example.: 60%

This means the Throttle Area is clamped between 60% and Max%

This is the minimum throttle area % that the system can apply during the VDC event.

Increasing this will cause the VDC system to favor more cutting to reduce torque to the request target.

An extreme of this setting would be 100% which means the throttle is not able to reduce.

VDC Torque Limit- Throttle Area Max Clamp

Image Image

The VDC Torque Limit (Nm) with Throttle Plate control uses Throttle Mass

Flow calculations to derive the required Throttle Area for a given Torque Target.

This setting controls the Max amount of Throttle Area the ECU can apply for a given

Torque Limit request.

0% = OFF

Example.: 90%

This means the Throttle Area is clamped between Min% Value and 90%.

This should be set to 100% and require no adjustment in all known applications.

VDC Torque Limit - Engine Cut Max Clamp

Image Image

A VDC Torque Limit (Nm) using Engine Cutting gets converted by the ECU into a calibrated

Percentage

This setting controls the Maximum amount of Cut the ECU can apply for a given

Torque Limit request.

Example.: 50%

This means the Maximum Cut applied to the Engine will be clamped to 50%

This is set to 50% by default

Note: In situations where the torque is unable to meet the request target fast enough or at all, this setting would need to be increased. Lowering this setting will cause the VDC system to favor more throttle reduction.

VDC Calibrate - Throttle

Image Image

CAUTION The setting will override the Throttle Plate control and reduce the Throttle Area to achieve the entered Torque value.

The setting allows the VDC system to be calibrated and should be done so in a controlled environment only and preferably on a dynamometer.

ONLY becomes active when VDC Calibrate Throttle Area < Pedal Throttle Area Request

0 = OFF

VDC Boost Target Margin Table

Image Image

VDC Torque Gain

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Nissan GTR R35 TCM Setup

TCM Setup

Nissan Transmission Control Module (TCM)

The transmission control module is responsible for anything related to the transmission.

The ECU does not control any part of the transmission,

However, it is responsible for obeying torque requests accurately which are sent to it via the CAN bus.

The ECU is responsible for reducing torque by closing the throttle and by retard.

Emtron has the ability to adjust torque requests requested by the TCM.

Image Image

TCM Torque Limit Output Filter - Throttle

Image Image

The TCM requests a Torque Limit (Nm) which gets converted by the ECU

into the reduced Throttle Area called “Throttle Area Demand - TCM”

This setting controls the rate at which the TCM Throttle Torque Limit

can reduce the Throttle Area Demand.

0 = OFF (more aggressive TCM Control)

5 = Max Filtering

Plot “Throttle Area Demand %” vs “Throttle Area Demand - VDC” for tuning.

TCM Torque Limit Retard Gain

Image Image

During a TCM Torque Reduction request the ECU can retard the timing to reduce Torque.

This setting indicates to the ECU the percentage of Torque reduced for every 1%/ Deg of Ignition Retard.

Example 1.5%/ Deg.

The Engine is running at 600Nm and a Torque

Reduction to 400Nm is requested.

This is a 33% reduction in Torque so at 1.5%/Deg

the ECU will Retard the Ignition 22 Degrees.

(33% / 1.5%/deg = 22 Deg)

TCM Throttle Area Demand Gain

Image Image

When the current Engine Torque is less than the TCM Torque Demand the Throttle Area will need to be increased.

To overcome inertia and other factors the plate needs to be momentary increased before it comes back to its calculated position.

This setting is primarily used in Launch Control to ensure the ECU tracks the TCM Torque Demand

Gain 0 = OFF

Gains up to the maximum of 5 can achieve good results.

TCM Retard Torque Gain

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Nissan GTR R35 VDC Boost Target Margin Table

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

TCM Torque Limit Engine Cut Setup

TCM Torque Limit Engine Cut Setup

In some motorsport environments and extremely high-end applications the OEM Torque Reductions may not deliver maximum performance. This has been addressed by allowing the user the ability to leverage the factory torque requests and applying a cut for more instantaneous torque reduction.

This is particularly useful on gear shifts where sharper than factory shift response is required.

Image Image

TCM Torque Limiting Engine Cut Mode

Image Image

0: OFF

1: TCM Torque Limit Ref: Throttle

2: TCM Torque Limit Ref: Retard

This mode is used to assist the TCM and ECU in reducing the engines torque for improved gearshift control.

The primary source of Torque Reduction is throttle plate control and retard, but in situations of a large torque reduction, the addition of engine cutting can be used to help this process.

The TCM Sends torque limit requests using either Throttle or Retard.

Either torque value can be selected as the reference for the engine cutting calculation.

  • ONLY gets applied on the Up-shift

  • A minimum Engine Torque lockout is used to prevent the cut operating under light loads

TCM Torque Limiting Engine Cut Type

Image Image

0: Ignition Cut

1: Fuel Cut

2: Ignition + Fuel Cut

TCM Torque Limit Engine Cut Threshold

Image Image

This mode is used to assist the TCM and ECU in reducing the engines torque for improved gearshift control.

The ECU converts the Torque Limit (Nm) sent by the TCM into a calibrated Engine Cut Percentage.

This setting controls the Torque Threshold above which Engine Cutting can be used to reduce torque

Example.:

Cut Threshold 10%

TCM Requesting Torque Limit of 300Nm.

Engine Torque 600Nm

10% of 300Nm = 330Nm

The ECU will calculate the required cut % from 600Nm down to 330Nm.

TCM Torque Limit Engine Cut - Max Clamp

Image Image

This mode is used to assist the TCM and ECU in reducing the engines torque for improved gearshift control.

The primary source of Torque Reduction is the closing of the throttle plate, but in situations of a large torque reduction,

Ignition cutting can be used to help this process.

The ECU converts the Torque Limit (Nm) into a calibrated Engine Cut Percentage.

This setting controls the Maximum amount of Cut the ECU can apply for a given Torque Limit request.

Example: 50%

This means the Maximum Cut applied to the Engine will be clamped to 50%.

TCM Torque Limit Engine Cut Gain

Image Image

During a TCM Torque Reduction request the ECU can cut the engine to reduce Torque.

This setting indicates to the ECU the percentage of Torque reduced for every 1% of Engine Cut.

Example.

  • Engine Torque at 600Nm.

  • 200Nm Torque Reduction is requested.

  • This is a 33% Reduction in Torque

1.0 %/ %Cut. ECU will cut engine at 33%

0.8 %/ %Cut. ECU will cut engine at 41%

1.2 %/ %Cut. ECU will cut engine at 27%

TCM Torque Limit Min Torque

Image Image

The Uncorrected Engine Torque must be greater than the entered value for the Engine Cut to be enabled

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Nissan Patrol Y61

Nissan Patrol Y61 Application Build

1.0 Introduction

The Patrol Y61 Application Build is available for all Emtron ECUs. This build allows unique application-specific firmware to be installed into the ECU. The Y61 build includes:

  • Full CAN Bus OEM integration for both Automatic and Manual Transmissions
  • Y61 Gearshift control for automatic transmissions — controls and monitors the Engine Torque during the gearshift
  • Emtron Nissan Y61 Base Calibration File
  • Cruise Control (requires a DBW and Pedal Position sensor be fitted)

This build version requires Firmware Version 2.17.0 or later. Emtron will supply a recommended pinout configuration that matches the supplied calibration file.

2.0 Build Setup

The Y61 Build needs to first be purchased before it can be installed into the ECU. Each build purchase is locked to an ECU serial number, then available for installation from the Emtron online server.

2.1 Installation procedure

  1. Internet access is required for the build installation, allowing Emtune to access the Emtron online server.
  2. Connect Emtune to the ECU.
  3. Select the File → Build Management menu. A window will open and display all build options.
  4. Select the Y61 option which should be listed as INSTALL. Press OK.
  5. The installation process takes 5-10 seconds. A message box will confirm a successful installation.
  6. To verify the installation and view the status of all available builds, open the Runtime menu (F3) and select the “ECU Internal” tab.

2.2 Uninstall procedure

With internet access and Emtune connected, select File → Build Management, select the Y61 option (listed as UNINSTALL) and press OK. The uninstall process takes 5-10 seconds.

3.0 CAN Bus

The Y61 Base Calibration file is configured for OEM CAN Bus integration using CAN 2. It is highly recommended that no other CAN device(s) be connected to this Bus. Any additional CAN Bus IO expanding devices should be connected to CAN 1.

3.1 OEM CAN Bus – CAN 2

The ECU provides full integration with the OEM CAN bus, both receiving and transmitting data. Critical data like Engine Torque must be calibrated correctly as this is transmitted and used by other systems throughout the vehicle.

Once the build has been installed a “Patrol Y61” tab will be available in the Runtime menu (F3), providing application-specific data received over the CAN bus:

ECU Input Channel NameDescription
Vehicle SpeedThe average speed of the rear wheels
Input Shaft SpeedInput shaft speed of the transmission
GearCurrent gear reported by the transmission ECU
Gear RequestCurrent gear requested, reported by the transmission ECU
Upshift Request SwitchUpshift request reported by the transmission ECU
Downshift Request SwitchDownshift request reported by the transmission ECU
Cruise Control SwitchCruise Control Off/On Switch

ImportantIMPORTANT When wiring into the OEM CAN Bus a 120 Ohm CAN terminating resistor MUST be installed.

Figure 3.0 — OEM CAN Bus 120 Ohm CAN termination.

Figure 3.0 — OEM CAN Bus 120 Ohm CAN termination.

3.2 User CAN Bus – CAN 1

The following devices can be connected to the ECU CAN 1 inputs: ELC1/2 (Emtron Lambda to CAN), ETC4/ETC8M (Emtron Thermocouple to CAN), EIC10/EIC16M (Emtron Input to CAN). Standard CAN bus precautions apply — use twisted pair (min one twist per 40mm), minimise connectors, terminate with a 120 ohm 0.25W resistor at each END of the bus, and keep stub lengths under 0.3m (ISO 11898). All Emtron CAN devices have no on-board terminating resistor, allowing them to be wired at any position on the Bus.

4.0 Application Specific Functions

4.1 Gearshift Control Function Setup

The Nissan Patrol Y61 Application Build includes a special gearshift control feature specific to the vehicle (already enabled in the supplied build). To enable, go to Config → Functions → Function Output Setup → Motorsport functions → Gear Shift Control and select “Nissan Y61 – CAN BUS”.

4.2 Gearshift Control Function Tuning

Once enabled, the tuning view menu item “Gearshift Control Y61” is available. The ECU has no control over the actual shift points — this is handled by the OEM transmission control system. The ECU can only control torque during a gearshift request event, most commonly via a cut event or throttle reduction.

4.3 Gearshift Y61 Setup Menu

All gearshift torque reduction settings are calibrated here.

  • Next Gear Stable Gear Position Source — The input source the ECU uses to consider the gearshift complete (cuts, throttle reductions and retards will be removed). Typical Setting: Gear Position – Input/Output shaft.

4.4 Up Shift Control Menu

4.41 Upshift Setup Menu

  • Upshift Torque Reduction Cut Type — Cut type used for upshift torque reduction. Typical: Fuel + Ign Cut.
  • Upshift Ign Retard Mode — How the ignition retard is calculated. Typical: Percentage.
  • Upshift Torque Reduction Min Time — Minimum time a torque reduction can occur regardless of table configuration. Typical: 20ms.
  • Upshift Throttle Override — A throttle override may be used to reduce torque, timed by either the function or a user duration. Typical: OFF.
  • Upshift Rev-matching Limit — The ECU can calculate the engine speed required to match the transmission ratios using the output shaft speed and gear ratios. Typical: ON Outputshaft Speed Calculated.
  • Upshift Rev-match Cut Type — The rev-matching function limits engine RPM to match the requested upshift gear, using output shaft RPM and transmission ratios. Typical: Ign Cut.
    • NOTE 1: Output Shaft must be configured (Wheel Diameter and Final Drive ratios set correctly).
    • NOTE 2: The Gear Ratio Table MUST be completed (Vehicle Functions → Vehicle Dynamics menu).
    • NOTE 3: Rev-match RPM limiting should start AFTER the initial Torque Reduction Cut/Retard, otherwise the Rev-Match RPM limit (lower than current engine speed) takes %cut priority and prevents the initial reduction from working.
  • Upshift Rev-match Control Range (-/+) — The engine speed range the ECU calculates the cut % over. Typical: 150rpm.
    • Example: Rev-match RPM Target = 4700, Min Cut = 0%, Max Cut = 95%. Range +500 RPM → 4700 RPM = 0% Cut, 5300 RPM = 95% Cut. Range -500 RPM → 4700 RPM = 95% Cut, 4200 RPM = 0% Cut.
  • Upshift Rev-match %Cut Clamp — Percentage cut applied to the engine at the end of the control range.
  • Upshift Next Gear Timeout — The next gear must be reached within this time for the upshift to be valid; otherwise the ECU re-tries the gear shift per the “Upshift Re-retry Count” setting.

4.42–4.46 Torque Reduction Tables

  • Torque Reduction Ign %Cut Level — Sets the ignition %cut level. The default table only provides a cut when torque levels are high, preventing cuts during normal driving.
  • Torque Reduction Fuel %Cut Level — As above, for fuel %cut.
  • Upshift Torque Reduction Retard — Controls the retard component of the torque reduction.
  • Upshift Re-Match Enable Table — Controls when the torque reduction reverts from cut-table control to the rev-matching strategy.
  • Upshift Re-Match RPM Target Correction — Ensures positive torque when on the throttle. Default is a global value of 20%.

4.47–4.411 Additional Upshift Settings

  • Upshift DBW 1 PositionNot Used by Default.
  • Upshift Throttle 1 DurationNot Used by Default.
  • Upshift Next Gear Torque Recovery Delay — Typical: 0ms.
  • Upshift Next Gear %Cut Level Recovery Delay — Typical: 0ms.
  • Upshift Next Gear Ignition Recovery Time — Typical: 0ms.

4.5 Down Shift Control Menu

There is no implementation of this feature at the time of writing.

5.0 Cruise Control

5.1 OEM Cruise Control

The Nissan Patrol Y61 comes fitted with OEM cruise control. A cable is actuated by the cruise control module and overrides the electronic throttle. The ECU has no control over this function and it will operate as normal if the factory throttle body is fitted.

5.2 Emtron Cruise Control

If the factory throttle body is replaced with an aftermarket unit there is no way for the OEM cruise control to operate. Modern DBW throttle bodies will require a custom fitment of a pedal position sensor. Emtron has a special channel for the factory cruise control buttons which is decoded so they may be used with the Emtron Cruise Control feature.

5.21 Emtron Cruise Control Application Build — The Y61 build already has the Emtron Cruise Control function enabled if using firmware V2.17.0 or later. See the Cruise Control build for detailed tuning information.

5.22 Nissan Patrol Y61 Cruise Command Switch — The Factory Cruise Command Switch only requires one wire to be spliced and pinned into the ECU. Any spare Analog Volt or Digital Input may be allocated for this switch. Once pinned in, configure the channel by selecting only the ECU pin (e.g. ANV 10) — no further input configuration is required. To test, press F3 to open the ECU Runtimes form and confirm each button changes state when pressed.

6.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-6Fuel Injector Cyl 1-6
Injection 7AC Clutch Relay
Injection 8Tachometer
Injection 9-12Not Used

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1-6Ignition Cyl 1-6
Ignition 7-12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1MAP
Analog Voltage 2DBW Servo Position Main
Analog Voltage 3DBW Servo Position Sub
Analog Voltage 4Pedal Position (Main)
Analog Voltage 5Pedal Position (Sub)
Analog Voltage 6Not Used
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8 (Pull-up)Inlet Air Temperature
Analog Voltage 9 (Pull-up)Mass Air Flow Sensor
Analog Voltage 10 (Pull-up)*Cruise Command Switch (Y61)
Analog Voltage 11-12 (Pull-up)Not Used
Analog Voltage 13-14Not Used

Analog Voltage Channels 7-12 have switchable pull-ups suitable for temperature measurement. *Cruise Command Switch used when replacing the throttle body with an aftermarket unit.

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 4Power Steer Switch
Digital Input 6Snow Switch
OthersNot Used

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1CAM Switch Solenoid
Auxiliary 2User Output 1 – Manifold Flap
Auxiliary 3Engine Fan Relay
Auxiliary 4Fuel Pump Relay
Auxiliary 9DBW +
Auxiliary 10DBW -
OthersNot Used

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorCam Position Sensor

CAN

ECU ChannelFunction
CAN 1 Lo/HiUser CAN Bus Lo/Hi
CAN 2 Lo/HiOEM CAN Bus Lo/Hi

OEM CAN Inputs

AC Switch, Brake Switch 1, Cruise Enable, Drive Speed, Input Shaft Speed, Gear Upshift Switch, Gear Downshift Switch.

7.0 Y61 ECU Pinout

OEM PinFunctionECU Channel
5Injector Cylinder 1Injector 1
6Injector Cylinder 2Injector 2
7Injector Cylinder 3Injector 3
13Injector Cylinder 4Injector 4
14Injector Cylinder 5Injector 5
15Injector Cylinder 6Injector 6
18Ignition Cylinder 1Ignition 1
19Ignition Cylinder 2Ignition 2
20Ignition Cylinder 3Ignition 3
21Ignition Cylinder 4Ignition 4
24AC ClutchInjector 7
27Inlet Manifold FlapAux 2
29Ignition Cylinder 5Ignition 5
30Ignition Cylinder 6Ignition 6
38TachometerInjector 8
40Fuel PumpAux 4
42EFI Relay ControlEFI Relay
48Idle StepperAux 5
49Idle StepperAux 7
50Idle StepperAux 6
51Idle StepperAux 8
52Speed SensorDI 1
53Ignition SwitchIGN Switch
55Cooling FanAux 3
60Snow SwitchDI 6
63Engine Speed SensorCrank Index +ve
79Steering Pressure SwitchDI 4
84Engine Sync SensorSync Index +ve
86AC RequestDI 5
87Pedal Position Sensor MainAN 4
89Sensor GroundSensor 0V Ref
94+5V Supply5.0V VRef1
98Throttle Servo SubAN 3
100Sensor GroundSensor 0V Ref
108Throttle Servo MainAN 2
109Sensor GroundSensor 0V Ref
117Pedal Position Sensor SubAN 5
121Coolant Temp SensorAN 7
125Knock Sensor Rear +veKnock Sensor 2 +ve
126Knock Sensor Front +veKnock Sensor 1 +ve
151Throttle Motor +ve *(Auto Only)Aux 9
152Inlet Cam ActuatorAux 1
153GroundGround
154Throttle Motor -ve *(Auto Only)Aux 10
156GroundGround
158GroundGround
159GroundGround
163ECU SupplyAux 9-10 Supply / ECU Supply
165GroundGround
166ECU SupplyAux 9-10 Supply / ECU Supply
168GroundGround
171OEM CAN LOCAN 1 LO
174OEM CAN HICAN 1 HI

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Nissan R32-R34

Nissan R32-R34 Plug-in ECU User Manual

1.0 Introduction

The Nissan R32-R34 ECU is designed to be plugged into the OEM harness to allow for a true “Plug and Play” install. The system is based on the KV Series Motorsport ECU, so all the same features are available excluding any limitations based around the OEM connector system. An Expansion port is included giving access to unused Input channels. CAN Bus 1 is also available providing additional I/O expandability.

2.0 Plugin Features

General

  • KV8 ECU based platform — Dual 100MHz processors, 32MB ECU logging memory, over 1000 logging channels, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Aluminium 6061 Grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Compatible with all Emtron proven motorsport features (Launch Control, Rolling Launch, Anti-Lag, Traction Control)
  • Upgradeable to run the Emtron fuel model through installation of a flex meter, fuel temperature and fuel pressure sensor
  • Idle speed closed loop control using DBW with advanced Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) airflow calculations
  • Knock control with high speed digital filtering for each cylinder using the OEM sensor with selectable centre frequency and bandwidth
  • Pre-configured calibration file loaded providing a comprehensive tuning platform
  • Input Expansion Capabilities through DTM connector: 3× User Analog Volt Inputs (Fuel Temperature, Fuel Pressure, Inlet Temperature), 1× User Digital Input (Flex Meter Input and switch inputs), 2× User Analog Inputs
  • Emtune software for tuning and data analysis

Communications: CAN 2.0B Bus 1 (User CAN Bus for I/O expansion — Lambda, EGT); High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection.

Operating Temperature: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical: Enclosure Size 160 × 162 × 38 mm, 890g

3.0 Installation

3.1 Expansion Port

The ECU’s input capabilities can be expanded using the expansion connection, which is a male DTM 12 Way. These additional inputs can be connected to any sensor, but the recommended sensors are indicated in brackets.

Nissan R32-R34 expansion port connector (DTM 12-way).

Nissan R32-R34 expansion port connector (DTM 12-way).

Table 3.0 — Expansion Port Pinout (DTM06-12SA)

PinFunction
1Analog Sensor 0V Reference
25V Vref2 Supply
3AN 8 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
4AN 9 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
5AN 10 (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
6DI 6 (e.g. Ethanol Content Sensor)
7ANV 13
8ANV 14
914V Out Protected (e.g. ELC2 Power Supply)
10ECU Ground (e.g. ELC2 or E85 Sensor Ground)
11CAN 1 Hi
12CAN 1 Lo

3.2 CAN Bus 1 Wiring

The ECU CAN Bus 1 is reserved for Emtron CAN Bus devices, expanding the IO capability of the ECU. The following devices can be connected: ELC1/2 (Lambda to CAN), ETC4/ETC8M (Thermocouple to CAN), EIC10/EIC16M (Input to CAN). All these CAN devices share a common power, ground and CAN pinout using a 4-way DTM.

Table 3.1 — CAN Device Power and CAN Deutsch Connector Pinout

PinFunctionWire Colour
1GroundBLACK
2CAN LoGREEN
3CAN HiYELLOW
412V SupplyRED

To help with installation time, each CAN Device pin can be directly connected into the ECU IO Expansion port:

Table 3.2 — IO Expansion to CAN Device wiring

NameECU IO Expansion 12-Way DTMCAN Device 4-Way DTM
GroundPin 8Pin 1
CAN 1 LoPin 12Pin 2
CAN 1 HiPin 11Pin 3
PowerPin 7Pin 4

Standard CAN bus precautions apply — twisted pair (min one twist per 40mm), minimise connectors, 120 ohm 0.25W termination at each END, stub length < 0.3m (ISO 11898). All Emtron CAN devices have no on-board terminating resistor, allowing them to be wired at any position on the Bus.

3.3 Analog Sensor Wiring

5V VRef2 Sensor Supply (Pin 2 of Expansion port) — A 250mA 5V output designed to supply automotive sensors.

Sensor 0V Reference (Pin 1 of Expansion port) — This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the 0V Reference pin directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. This is a dedicated and specialised 0V/ground output for analog sensors.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Use Pin 8 (Ground) in the Expansion port.

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

3.4 Ethanol Content Sensor Wiring

An Ethanol Content sensor can be wired into the ECU using the Expansion port. The following channel assignment is recommended for the GM sensor:

GM Sensor PinoutExpansion PortDescription
Pin 1Pin 9 — 14V ProtectedSupply, 8V or 14V
Pin 2Pin 10 — ECU GroundGround
Pin 3Pin 6 — DI 6Output. Temperature and Ethanol Content

NoteNOTE DO NOT connect the Ethanol Content sensor ground to the “Analog Sensor 0V Reference” — use the ECU Ground from Pin 10. The Ethanol sensor produces a frequency-based output; suitable ECU channels are DI 1-8.

DescriptionCalibration
Ethanol Content (%)50Hz = 0% Ethanol, 150Hz = 100% Ethanol
Fuel Temperature1ms = -40°C, 5ms = 125°C

To configure the ECU for this sensor, select the Ethanol Sensor Input Source to DI6. The ECU will automatically decode the Ethanol Content and Fuel Temperature. Once assigned, more settings become available in the Tuning View → Engine Functions menu.

4.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-6Fuel Injector Cyl 1-6
Injection 7O2 Heater
Injection 8-12Not Used

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1-6Ignition Cylinder 1-6
Ignition 7FPCM1
Ignition 8FPCM1
Ignition 9Trigger Sensor 120/1 Control
Ignition 10-12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1TPS
Analog Voltage 2O2 Front
Analog Voltage 3O2 Rear
Analog Voltage 4MAF (Rear R32)
Analog Voltage 5MAF Front R32
Analog Voltage 6Not Used
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8-10 (Pull-up)IO Expansion port
Analog Voltage 11-12 (Pull-up)Not Used
Analog Voltage 13-14Not Used

Analog Voltage Channels 7-12 have switchable pull-ups suitable for temperature measurement.

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1Vehicle Speed
Digital Input 2Neutral Switch
Digital Input 3Start Switch
Digital Input 4AC Request Switch
Digital Input 5Alternator FR Signal
Digital Input 6IO Expansion port (Ethanol Sensor)
Digital Input 7Power Steer Pressure Switch
Digital Input 8-14Not Used

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1VTC Solenoid
Auxiliary 2Wastegate Solenoid
Auxiliary 3Tacho
Auxiliary 4ISC Solenoid
Auxiliary 5Fuel Pump Relay
Auxiliary 6A/C Clutch Relay
Auxiliary 7CE Light
Auxiliary 8Fan Relay (R32)
Auxiliary 9EGT Light (R33)
Auxiliary 10Injector %DC Display
Auxiliary 11Connected to pin 111 (user output – 5A)
Auxiliary 12Connected to pin 112 (user output – 5A)
Auxiliary 13-16Not Used

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Position Sensor (120 Deg)
Sync SensorCrank Position Sensor (1 Deg)

5.0 Plug-in Specific Information

5.1 Fuel Model

The ECU has the ability of using any Emtron-based Fuel Model; however, the base calibration provided implements a simple version of Speed Density. The Main VE Table has the Efficiency Calculation configured to span against TPS, which simplifies the mapping process. The fuel calculation will still account for Inlet Manifold Pressure. The Lambda Target is modified by a combination of Engine Speed and Manifold Pressure in the base calibration and allows for increasing enrichment based on an increase in engine load.

5.2 Inlet Air Temperature

Factory Inlet Air Temperature using ECU input ANV 8 is available on most models. If the input shows 4.85V or higher, this sensor is not connected and will need to be fitted and wired in using the Expansion port (refer to section 3.1).

5.3 ECU User Pins 111, 102

ECU pins 111 and 102 are unused OEM pins which connect directly to Aux 11 and 12 respectively. These are Half Bridge drivers rated at 5A continuous and 8A limit, and can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control.

5.3 EGT Light

The R33 models have an EGT Light on Auxiliary 9. This can be configured and controlled from a User Channel.

5.4 Crank (120) and Crank (1) Signal Selection

For correct engine decoding, the ECU Crank Index input should be connected to the Nissan 120 degree signal and the Sync input connected to the Nissan 1 degree signal. The R32 and R33 should not require the signal swap enabled. The R34 will require the enabling of the Crank (120) and Crank (1) signal swap, which will otherwise prevent the engine from starting (cranking RPM will read extremely high if the pin swap is not enabled). These signals can be swapped using internal circuitry controlled by Ignition 9 — it doesn’t require any physical pins to be swapped. A User channel can be configured to control this.

Table 5.0 — Ignition 9 Crank Signal Configuration

ECU PinIgnition 9 OFFIgnition 9 ON
Pin 41/51Crank Signal 120 degreeCrank Signal 1 Degree
Pin 42/52Crank Signal 1 DegreeCrank Signal 120 degree

6.0 Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

On initial installation it is advised to clear all the DTCs if errors are reported. Connect to Emtune and look at the DTC status in the bottom toolbar (red if errors are present). Open the DTC window via the DTC Status box or File → Open DTC, select “Clear ALL DTCs”, and confirm all the Error Codes have been removed (status box goes green). If the error codes have not all been removed, select “Update DTC” then use the DTC window to locate the sensor that is on fault.

7.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron Nissan R32-R34 Plugin1609-1834
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15

Appendix A – Nissan R32-R34 ECU Pinout

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
1Ignition 1IGN 1
2Ignition 5IGN 5
3Ignition 3IGN 3
4Idle Speed Control SolenoidAUX 4
5AT Shift RequestDI 5
6Engine Fan Relay (R32)AUX 8
7TachoAUX 3
8Ignition Switch (some models only)Ignition Switch
9A/C Clutch RelayAUX 6
10Ignition GroundECU GROUND
11Ignition 6IGN 6
12Ignition 2IGN 2
13Ignition 4IGN 4
16ECCS RelayEFI RELAY
17Injector %DC Display (or E85)AUX 10
18Fuel Pump RelayAUX 5
19Power Steer Pressure SwitchDI 7
20Ignition GroundECU GROUND
23Knock Sensor 1Knock 1+
24Knock Sensor 2Knock 2+
25Wastegate SolenoidAUX 2
26MAF GroundECU GROUND
27Mass Air Flow Sensor (Rear)ANV 4
28Engine Coolant TemperatureANV 7
29O2 Sensor FrontANV 2
30Sensor Ground (Coolant, O2)Sensor 0V Reference
31Clock (Sync Signal)
32CE LightAUX 7
33EGT Light (R33)AUX 9
34MAF GroundECU GROUND
35Mass Air Flow Sensor (Front)ANV 5
36Inlet Air Temperature (some models only)ANV 8
38Throttle Closed SwitchANV 1
40Sensor Ground (MAP, TPS)Sensor 0V Reference
41Crank Position Sensor (120)Crank Index
42Crank Position Sensor (1)Sync Sensor
43Start SwitchDI 3
44Neutral SwitchDI 2
45Ignition SwitchIgnition Switch
46A/C Request SwitchDI 4
48TPS +5V Supply+ 5V Supply
49Control Unit Power SupplyECU SUPPLY
50Control Unit GroundECU GROUND
51Crank Position Sensor (120)Crank Index
52Crank Position Sensor (1)Sync Sensor
53Vehicle Speed SensorDI 1
55O2 Sensor RearANV 3
56Throttle Position OutAV OUT 1
58Battery Backup (+12 Constant)Internal Flywheel Supply
59Control Unit Power SupplyECU SUPPLY
60Control Unit GroundECU GROUND
101Injector 1INJ 1
102(N/C — user output)AUX 12
103Injector 3INJ 3
104Fuel Pump Control #1IGN 7
105Injector 2INJ 2
106Fuel Pump Control #2IGN 8
107Injector GroundECU GROUND
108Injector GroundECU GROUND
110Injector 5INJ 5
111(N/C — user output)AUX 11
112Injector 6INJ 6
113VTC Solenoid (R33)AUX 1
114Injector 4INJ 4
115O2 Heater Rear (R33/R34)INJ 7
116Injector GroundECU GROUND

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subaru STi/WRX 06-15

Subaru STi/WRX 06-15 Plug-in ECU User Manual

1.0 Introduction

The Subaru STi MY06-07 and Subaru MY08-15 Plugin ECUs are designed to be plugged into the OEM harness to allow for a true “Plug and Play” install. Both models are almost identical; however, purchase of the correct unit for your model is essential to ensure correct operation. The unit is also compatible with the WRX throughout MY06-07 and MY08-15. Field testing indicates the ECU will also work on MY16-MY17 models, however full support has not been confirmed at the time of writing.

The system is based on the KV Series Motorsport ECU, so all the same features are available with the limitation based around the OEM connector system. An Expansion loom is included giving access to unused Input channels. CAN Bus 2 is also available, operating independently to the OEM Bus, providing additional I/O expandability.

2.0 Plugin Features

General

  • KV8 ECU based platform — Dual 100MHz processors, 32MB ECU logging memory, over 1000 channels, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Aluminium 6061 Grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Fully compatible with all OEM systems and user programmable
  • Compatible with all Emtron proven motorsport features (Launch Control, Rolling Launch, Anti-Lag, Traction Control)
  • Upgradeable to run the Emtron fuel model through installation of a flex meter, fuel temperature and fuel pressure sensor
  • Idle speed closed loop control using DBW with advanced Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) airflow calculations
  • Knock control with high speed digital filtering for each cylinder using the OEM sensor with selectable centre frequency and bandwidth
  • Pre-configured calibration file loaded providing a comprehensive tuning platform
  • Input Expansion Capabilities through DTM connector: 3× User Analog Volt Inputs (Fuel Temperature, Fuel Pressure, Inlet Temperature), 1× User Digital Input (Flex Meter Input)
  • Emtune software for tuning and data analysis

Communications: CAN 2.0B Node 1 — 500k Baud Full CAN Bus OEM Integration (ABS, SI Drive, DCCD); CAN 2.0B Node 2 — User CAN Bus for I/O expansion (Lambda, EGT); High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps.

Operating Temperature: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical: Enclosure Size 160 × 162 × 38 mm, 890g

3.0 Installation

3.1 Expansion Loom

The ECU’s input capabilities can be expanded using the expansion connection, which is a male DTM 12 Way. These additional inputs can be connected to any sensor, but the recommended sensors are indicated in brackets.

Figure 3.0 — DTM 12 Way expansion loom connector (ECU side).

Figure 3.0 — DTM 12 Way expansion loom connector (ECU side).

Table 3.0 — Expansion Port Pinout (DTM06-12SA)

PinFunction
1Analog Sensor 0V Reference
25V Vref2 Supply
3AN 8 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
4AN 9 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
5AN 10 (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
6DI 6 (e.g. Ethanol Content Sensor)
714V Out Protected (e.g. ELC2 Power Supply)
8Ground (e.g. ELC2 or E85 Sensor Ground)
9Not Used
10Not Used
11CAN 2 Hi
12CAN 2 Lo

3.2 CAN Bus 2 Wiring

The ECU CAN Bus 2 is reserved for Emtron CAN Bus devices, expanding the IO capability of the ECU. The following devices can be connected: ELC1/2 (Lambda to CAN), ETC4/ETC8M (Thermocouple to CAN), EIC10/EIC16M (Input to CAN).

NoteNOTE ECU CAN Bus 2 operates independently to the OEM CAN Bus 1.

Table 3.1 — CAN Device Power and CAN Deutsch Connector Pinout

PinFunctionWire Colour
1GroundBLACK
2CAN LoGREEN
3CAN HiYELLOW
412V SupplyRED

To help with installation time, each CAN Device pin can be directly connected into the ECU IO Expansion loom:

Table 3.2 — IO Expansion to CAN Device wiring

NameECU IO Expansion 12-Way DTMCAN Device 4-Way DTM
GroundPin 8Pin 1
CAN 2 LoPin 12Pin 2
CAN 2 HiPin 11Pin 3
PowerPin 7Pin 4

Standard CAN bus precautions apply — twisted pair (min one twist per 40mm), minimise connectors, 120 ohm 0.25W termination at each END, stub length < 0.3m (ISO 11898). All Emtron CAN devices have no on-board terminating resistor, allowing them to be wired at any position on the Bus.

3.3 Sensor Wiring

5V VRef2 Sensor Supply (Pin 2 of Expansion loom) — A 250mA 5V output designed to supply automotive sensors.

Sensor 0V Reference (Pin 1 of Expansion loom) — This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the 0V Reference pin directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. This is a dedicated and specialised 0V/ground output for analog sensors.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Use Pin 8 (Ground) in the Expansion Loom.

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.3 — Correct Pressure Sensor 0V wiring (direct to the Sensor 0V Reference).

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

Figure 3.4 — Incorrect Pressure Sensor 0V wiring.

4.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-4Fuel Injector Cyl 1-4
Injection 5Rear Lambda Heater
Injection 6DBW Relay
Injection 7Purge Solenoid 1
Injection 8-12Not Used

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1-4Ignition Cylinder 1-4
Ignition 5Alternator Load Control
Ignition 6AC Fan Relay
Ignition 7Engine Fan Relay
Ignition 8AC Clutch Relay
Ignition 9-12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1MAP
Analog Voltage 2TPS (Main)
Analog Voltage 3TPS (Sub)
Analog Voltage 4MAF
Analog Voltage 5O2 Rear Narrow Band
Analog Voltage 6TGV RH Position
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8 (Pull-up)IO Expansion loom (Inlet Temperature)
Analog Voltage 9 (Pull-up)IO Expansion loom (Fuel Temperature)
Analog Voltage 10 (Pull-up)IO Expansion loom (Fuel Pressure)
Analog Voltage 11 (Pull-up)Intake Temperature in MAF
Analog Voltage 12 (Pull-up)TGV LH Position
Analog Voltage 13Pedal Position (Main)
Analog Voltage 14Pedal Position (Sub)

Analog Voltage Channels 7-12 have switchable pull-ups suitable for temperature measurement.

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1Cam Position - Inlet RH
Digital Input 2Cam Position - Exhaust LH
Digital Input 3Cam Position - Exhaust RH
Digital Input 4Neutral Switch
Digital Input 5AC Pressure Switch
Digital Input 6IO Expansion Loom (Ethanol Sensor)
Digital Input 7Power Steer Pressure Switch
Digital Input 8AC Switch (non-CAN bus)
Digital Input 9Clutch Switch
Digital Input 10Secondary Air Pipe Pressure Signal
Digital Input 11Brake Switch
Digital Input 12Start-Stop Switch / Start Position Switch
Digital Input 13Cruise Command Switch
Digital Input 14Cruise Switch Main

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1AVCS Solenoid Inlet LH
Auxiliary 2AVCS Solenoid Inlet RH
Auxiliary 3AVCS Solenoid Exhaust LH
Auxiliary 4AVCS Solenoid Exhaust RH
Auxiliary 5Wastegate Solenoid
Auxiliary 6Tacho
Auxiliary 7Fuel Pump Speed Control
Auxiliary 8Check Engine Light (non-CAN bus)
Auxiliary 9DBW +
Auxiliary 10DBW -
Auxiliary 11TGV LH Motor + (LH- & RH+ linked in series)
Auxiliary 12TGV RH Motor -
Auxiliary 13Accessory Cut Relay
Auxiliary 14Starter Relay
Auxiliary 15Secondary Air Pump Relay
Auxiliary 16Secondary Comb. Valve Relay (LH Head - 5 wire)

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorCam Position - Inlet LH

5.0 Plug-in Specific Information

5.1 Fuel Model

The ECU can be tuned using one of the many fuel models available. Speed Density (MAP Sensor) or Mass Air Flow (MAF Sensor) are the two most common. The Fuel Model can be adjusted using Emtune → Config View → Fuel → Fuel Main → Fuel Model Setup.

  • When Speed Density is selected, Fuel Table 1 is used for VE correction.
  • When MAF is selected, the Secondary Load table can be used to scale the MAF if required. This table will need to be switched ON via Fuel Menu → Fuel Table Control → Secondary Load Table (set to a value of 12).

There is also a runtime in the F3 Menu → Fuel Tab showing the current Fuel Model the ECU is running in.

5.2 Inlet Air Temperature

Some STi models have a factory-fitted Inlet Temperature Sensor, available on Analog Input 8. If this sensor is available, the “Inlet Air Temperature” should have the Input Source selected to ANV8. On models without an Inlet Temperature Sensor there are two options:

  1. Fit an Inlet Temperature Sensor and use the expansion port to bring the signal into the ECU (AN8 and Sensor Ground).
  2. Use the MAF Temp to approximate the Inlet Temperature (the default setting), adjustable via Emtune → Config View.

5.3 Tumbler Generator Valves (TGV)

The LH and RH valves are connected in series and controlled using Auxiliary Channels 11 and 12. The control strategies are locked:

  • The valves are either fully open or fully closed.
  • When Engine Temperature is less than 60°C the valves are always Closed at key-on. Once the engine is started they remain closed until the Pedal Position goes above 2.0%, at which point they open and remain open.
  • When Engine Temperature is above 60°C the valves always Open at key-on.
  • The valves are modulated at 10Hz, 50% DC to ensure they don’t move during normal driving conditions.

As these valves significantly affect the VE of the engine when closed, the Fuel User Comp Table 1 can be used to adjust fuelling. If the TGV valves have been removed, switch the function off from Config View → Functions → Engine Functions and zero all fuel corrections in the User Comp Table 1.

5.4 SI Drive

When available, the position of the SI Drive is read from the CAN Bus and used to select the ECU’s Cal Slot position. Positions 1-4 are available. The default Cal File is set up to switch to Requested Torque Tables (see Tuning View → Cal Control for more options).

SI Drive ModeECU ValueCal Slot PositionRequested Torque Table
OFF (no SI Drive)01Table 1
Sports Sharp (S#)12Table 1
Intelligent (I)23Table 2
Sports (S)34Table 3

5.5 Push Button Start vs Key Start

A change to the Cal file is required based on whether the vehicle has a Button Start or Key Start.

5.5.1 Push Button Start — Auxiliary Channel 14 controls the starting of the engine. When the output is Low the engine will crank, so the ECU must control starting using the “Engine Start Control” function. In Config View → Functions → Vehicle Functions 2 → Engine Start Control: set “Engine Starter Output” channel to Auxiliary 14 and “Engine Immobiliser Output” to OFF. In Config View → Input → Switches: set “Start/Stop Switch” Input Source to DI12 and “Start Position Switch” to OFF.

5.5.2 Key Start — On key-start vehicles, Auxiliary Channel 14 prevents the engine starting when the key is moved to the start position (immobiliser function — when the output is Low/at ground the engine will not start). In Engine Start Control: set “Engine Starter Output” to OFF and “Engine Immobiliser Output” to Auxiliary 14. In Switches: set “Start/Stop Switch” to OFF and “Start Position Switch” to DI12.

The Engine Start settings can be adjusted from Tuning View → Vehicle Functions → Engine Start Control.

5.6 Check Engine Light

Control of this light is done either through the CAN bus or Auxiliary Channel 8. The default Cal file has the Output Channel selected on CAN Bus OEM. This can be adjusted from Config View → Functions → Vehicle Functions 1.

5.7 AirCon Switch

The AirCon Switch status is read either through the CAN bus or Digital Input 8. The default Cal file has the Input Source selected on CAN Bus OEM. This can be adjusted from Config View → Inputs → Input Pins Setup → Switches.

6.0 Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

On initial installation it is advised to clear all the DTCs if errors are reported. Connect to Emtune and look at the DTC status in the bottom toolbar (red if errors are present). Open the DTC window via the DTC Status box or File → Open DTC, select “Clear ALL DTCs”, and confirm all the Error Codes have been removed (status box goes green). If the error codes have not all been removed, select “Update DTC” then use the DTC window to locate the sensor that is on fault.

7.0 OEM CAN Bus 1

The ECU communicates on CAN Bus 1, which is reserved for the Subaru OEM Bus. The ECU maintains full compatibility with all other CAN devices within the vehicle. The CAN bus protocol is defined by year and divided into 5 groups:

  • Subaru Liberty MY10 (option 16)
  • Subaru STi MY15+ JDM (option 17) — NOTE: JDM and ADM are different.
  • Subaru STi MY15+ ADM (option 18)
  • MY12-MY14 (option 19)
  • MY07-MY11 (option 20)

This setting can be adjusted from Config View → Communications → CAN Bus 1 → Channel 1 → DATA Set. The Input Source should be selected to “CAN Bus OEM” for a channel to receive this data.

Table 7.0 — Subaru received OEM CAN data

ECU Channel NameDescription
Vehicle SpeedThe average speed of the front wheels
Drive Speed Front L/RWheel Speed Front Left / Right
Drive Speed Rear L/RWheel Speed Rear Left / Right
Steering AngleSteering angle in degrees (negative left, positive right)
Front Brake PressureFront brake pressure (Bar)
AirCon SwitchAirCon Off/On Switch
AC Evap Temp SwitchAirCon Evaporator switch used by the ECU to control the AC Clutch
Traction Control SwitchTraction Control Off/On Switch
SI DriveThe ECU reads 1 of 3 modes: Sports, Intelligent, Sports Sharp

8.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron Subaru STi 06-15 Plugin1609-192015

Appendix A – ECU Pinout

Connector B134

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
B134-5Engine Block/Power Ground
B134-6Manifold Pressure Sensor SignalANV1
B134-7ECU 14V from Main Relay
B134-11Cam Inlet RH Signal (Hall)DI 1
B134-12Cam Exhaust RH Signal (Hall)DI 2
B134-13Crank Position Sensor (+)Crank Index +ve
B134-14Crank Position Sensor (-)Crank Index -ve
B134-15Knock Sensor SignalKnock 1 +ve
B134-16TGV LH Position SignalANV 12
B134-18DBW Position Main SignalANV 2
B134-19+5V Eng (MAP, DBW Pos, FPS, TGV Pos, Sec Air Pres)
B134-21Cam Inlet LH Signal (Hall)Sync Sensor
B134-22Sensor Ground Out (Inlet, Exhaust LH/RH Cam Position)
B134-24SHIELD - Crank Position Sensor
B134-25SHIELD - Knock Sensor
B134-26TGV RH Position SignalANV 6
B134-27Secondary Air Pipe Pressure SignalDI 10
B134-28DBW Position Sub SignalANV 3
B134-29Sensor Ground Out (MAP, TPS, ET, DBW, TGV, Knock, Sec Air)
B134-31Cam Exhaust LH Signal (Hall)DI 2
B134-33Power Steer Oil Pressure SwitchDI 7
B134-34ET SensorANV 7

Connector B135

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
B135-1SHIELD - Front and Rear Oxygen Sensor
B135-2ECU 14V from Main Relay
B135-3Accessory Cut Relay
B135-4Rear Oxygen Sensor SignalANV 5
B135-5Backup Power / Batt Constant
B135-12Cruise Control Main SwitchDI 14
B135-13Starter Switch 2DI 12
B135-18Intake AT Sensor Signal (In MAF)ANV 11
B135-19Ignition SwitchIGN SW
B135-20Brake Switch 1 (Normally Closed)DI 11
B135-21+5V Eng Supply – FPS Main+5V Supply
B135-225V Eng Supply – FPS Sub+5V Supply
B135-23FPS Signal – MainANV 13
B135-24Cruise Command Switch (Set/Resume/Coast/Res/Cancel)DI 13
B135-26Air Flow Sensor SignalANV 4
B135-29FPS Main Sensor Ground
B135-30Sensor Ground Out
B135-31FPS Signal – SubANV 14
B135-34Air Flow Sensor Ground
B135-35SHIELD – Air Flow Sensor

Connector B136

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
B136-1DBW Power (From DBW Relay)
B136-2Front Oxygen Heater Signal 2
B136-3Front Oxygen Heater Signal 1
B136-4Rear Oxygen Heater
B136-6SHIELD – FPS, TPS Main, Neutral Sw
B136-9A/C Clutch RelayIGN 8
B136-10Alternator Load ControlIGN 5
B136-11CEL (Non CAN Bus)
B136-12FPC Unit - Control SignalAUX 7
B136-18Sub Fan Relay ControlIGN 6
B136-20Starter Relay Inhibit
B136-21DBW Power Control RelayINJ 6
B136-22Engine Speed Output (Tacho)AUX 6
B136-23Main Relay ControlMain Relay Control
B136-24A/C Request Switch (Non CAN Bus)DI 8
B136-25Clutch SwitchDI 9
B136-27CAN + (500kBaud)
B136-29Main Fan Relay ControlIGN 7
B136-31Neutral Position SwitchDI 4
B136-32Start/Stop ButtonDI 12
B136-35CAN - (500kBaud)

Connector B137

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
B137-1Engine Block/Power Ground
B137-2Engine Block/Power Ground
B137-3Engine Block/Power Ground
B137-4DBW Motor +AUX 9
B137-5DBW Motor -AUX 10
B137-6Ignition Coil Ground
B137-7Engine Block/Power Ground
B137-8Injector Cylinder 1INJ 1
B137-9Injector Cylinder 2INJ 2
B137-10Injector Cylinder 3INJ 3
B137-11Injector Cylinder 4INJ 4
B137-12TGV LH Motor (+ to open)AUX 11
B137-13TGV LH Motor (- to close)AUX 12
B137-14AVCS Inlet LH Solenoid -AUX 1
B137-15AVCS Inlet LH Solenoid +
B137-16AVCS Inlet RH Solenoid -AUX 2
B137-17AVCS Inlet RH Solenoid +
B137-18Ignition Cylinder 1Ign 1
B137-19Ignition Cylinder 2Ign 2
B137-20Ignition Cylinder 3Ign 3
B137-21Ignition Cylinder 4Ign 4
B137-22TGV RH Motor (+ to open)AUX 11
B137-23TGV RH Motor (+ to close)AUX 12
B137-24AVCS Exhaust RH Solenoid -AUX 4
B137-25AVCS Exhaust RH Solenoid +
B137-26Ignition Coil Ground
B137-27Wastegate Control SolenoidAUX 5
B137-29Purge Control Solenoid Valve #1INJ 7
B137-30AVCS Exhaust LH Solenoid -AUX 3
B137-31AVCS Exhaust LH Solenoid +

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Toyota GT86 / Subaru BRZ / Scion FR-S

GT86/BRZ/FR-S Plug-in ECU User Manual

1.0 Introduction

The Toyota/Subaru GT86/BRZ/FR-S features a flat-four configuration engine that employs an interesting combination of four (4) direct injectors and four (4) port injectors for fuel. The ECU must be able to control both types of injector along with accurately controlling the GDI pump pressure to a target. GDI pressures operate significantly higher than a conventional port injection system.

To correctly calculate the fuelling requirements the ECU is able to accept sensor inputs from the MAF Meter and/or MAP sensor depending on the fuel model mode selected.

This manual does not cover ECU installation.

2.0 Plugin Features

General

  • KV12 ECU based platform — Dual 100MHz processors, 32MB ECU logging memory, over 1000 channels, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Emtune Software for tuning and data analysis; Knock Control using digital filtering with Bosch technology
  • 6061 Grade Aluminium CNC Billet Enclosure
  • Fully compatible with all OEM systems and user programmable, including Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) using throttle torque reduction
  • Compatible with all Emtron proven motorsport features
  • Upgradeable to run the Emtron Fuel model through installation of a Flex Meter, Fuel Temperature and Fuel Pressure Sensor
  • Input Expansion Capabilities through DTM connector: 4× User Analog Volt Inputs (Fuel Temperature, Inlet Temp and Pressure), 1× User Digital Input (Flex Meter Input)
  • Output Expansion Capabilities through the DTM connector: 1× Auxiliary Output (Boost Control Solenoid)

Communications: CAN 2.0B Node 1 — User CAN Bus for I/O expansion (Lambda, EGT); CAN 2.0B Node 2 — 500k Baud Full CAN Bus OEM Integration; High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps.

Operating Temperature: -30 to 125°C (-22 to 257°F)

Physical: Enclosure Size 160 × 162 × 38 mm, 890g

3.0 Kit Contents

When purchasing a Toyota/Subaru GT86/BRZ/FR-S plug-in the following items are included:

  • GT86/BRZ/FR-S Plug-in ECU
  • DTM 12 way Female Connector and pin kit

3.1 Expansion Loom

The ECU’s Input capabilities can be expanded using the expansion connection, which is a male DTM 12 Way (DT06-12SA). These additional inputs can be connected to any sensor, but the recommended sensors are indicated in brackets.

Expansion port connector DT06-12SA (ECU side). Mating connector (car side): DT04-12PA.

Expansion port connector DT06-12SA (ECU side). Mating connector (car side): DT04-12PA.

Table 3.0 — Expansion Port Pinout

PinFunction
1Analog Sensor 0V Reference
25.0V Aux Supply
3AN 8 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
4AN 9 (e.g. Fuel Temp or Inlet Temp)
5AN 10 (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
6DI 6 (e.g. Ethanol Content Sensor)
714V Out Protected (ELC1 Power Supply)
8Ground (ELC1 Ground)
9Auxiliary Output 5 (e.g. Boost Control solenoid)
10NC
11CAN 1 Hi
12CAN 1 Lo

To minimise signal contamination and maximise noise immunity, twist the CAN High and CAN Low wire pair at a minimum of one twist per 40mm of cable.

4.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-4Port Fuel Injector Cyl 1-4
Injection 5Rear Lambda Heater
Injection 6Purge
Injection 7DBW Power Supply Relay
Injection 8Direct Injection Power Supply Relay
Injection 9-12DI Fuel Injector Cyl 1-4

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1-4Ignition Cylinder 1-4
Ignition 5Alternator Control
Ignition 6Engine Fan Relay
Ignition 7AC Clutch Relay
Ignition 8Starter Relay (Push Start) / Start Inhibit (Key Start)
Ignition 9-10Not Used
Ignition 11DI Fuel Pump Control
Ignition 12Not Used

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1MAP
Analog Voltage 2DBW 1 Servo Position Main
Analog Voltage 3DBW 1 Servo Position Sub
Analog Voltage 4MAF
Analog Voltage 5Rear O2 Sensor
Analog Voltage 6IO Expansion Loom (e.g. Fuel Pressure)
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8-10 (Pull-up)IO Expansion Loom (IAT / F.Temp / F.Pressure)
Analog Voltage 11 (Pull-up)Intake Temperature MAF
Analog Voltage 12 (Pull-up)Engine Oil Temperature
Analog Voltage 13Pedal Position Sensor (PPS) Main
Analog Voltage 14Pedal Position Sensor (PPS) Sub

Analog Voltage Channels 7-12 have switchable pull-ups suitable for temperature measurement.

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1Cam Position - Inlet RH
Digital Input 2Cam Position - Exhaust LH
Digital Input 3Cam Position - Exhaust RH
Digital Input 4Neutral Position Switch
Digital Input 5Direct Injection 1 Feedback
Digital Input 6IO Expansion Loom (e.g. Ethanol Sensor)
Digital Input 7Direct Injection 2 Feedback
Digital Input 8DI Fuel Pump Feedback
Digital Input 9Clutch Switch
Digital Input 10Start Signal from Starter Relay (Button Start) / NC (Key Start)
Digital Input 11AC Pressure (some models only)
Digital Input 12Start/Stop Switch (Button Start) / Start Signal from Starter Relay (Key Start)
Digital Input 13Brake Switch
Digital Input 14Cruise Control Switch

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1VVT Solenoid Inlet RH
Auxiliary 2VVT Solenoid Inlet LH
Auxiliary 3VVT Solenoid Exhaust RH
Auxiliary 4VVT Solenoid Exhaust LH
Auxiliary 5IO Expansion Loom (e.g. Boost Control Solenoid)
Auxiliary 6Engine Speed Output
Auxiliary 7Fuel Pump Speed Control
Auxiliary 8AC Fan Relay
Auxiliary 9DBW +
Auxiliary 10DBW -
Auxiliary 11Start Inhibit (Button Start) / NC (Key Start)
Auxiliary 12Not Used
Auxiliary 13Canister Pump Module Relay (PPMP)
Auxiliary 14Canister Pump Module Relay (VPMP)
Auxiliary 15Canister Pump Module Relay (MPMP)
Auxiliary 16Not Used

NoteNOTE Auxiliary Channels 13-15 have drivers suitable ONLY for relay control with switching currents that must be less than 0.5A.

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorCam Position - Inlet Bank 1 (LH)

5.0 Plug-in Specific Information

5.2 Fuel Model

The ECU can use many combinations of methods to generate the fuel mass output. The base calibration is supplied using simple but common Speed Density (MAP). Commonly modified camshafts, aftermarket air bypass valves, larger turbochargers and modified intake piping tend to create unstable Mass Flow Sensor readings, so MAP-based fuel models tend to make the process much simpler. (Press F1 with the Fuel Model setting selected for more detailed help.)

When MAF is selected, the Secondary Load table can be used to scale the MAF if required. This table will need to be switched ON via Fuel Menu → Fuel Table Control → Secondary Load Table (set to a value of 12). There is also a runtime in the F3 Menu → Fuel Tab showing the current Fuel Model the ECU is running in.

5.3 Inlet Air Temperature

A factory-fitted Inlet Temperature Sensor is available on Analog Input 11 and should already be configured in the base calibration shipped with the ECU.

5.4 Check Engine Light

The control of this light is done through the CAN bus. The base calibration file has the output already configured and selected to “CAN Bus OEM”.

5.5 AirCon Switch

The AirCon Switch status is read through the CAN bus. The base calibration file has the Input Source selected to “CAN Bus OEM”.

6.0 Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

On initial installation it is advised to clear all the DTCs if errors are reported. Connect to Emtune and look at the DTC status in the bottom toolbar (red if errors are present). Open the DTC window via the DTC Status box or File → Open DTC, select “Clear ALL DTCs”, and confirm all the Error Codes have been removed (status box goes green). If the error codes have not all been removed, select “Update DTC” then use the DTC window to locate the sensor that is on fault.

7.0 User CAN Bus 1

The ECU CAN Bus 1 is available for Input/Output expansion, allowing a wide range of Emtron CAN devices to be connected: ELC1/2 (Lambda to CAN), ETC4/ETC8M (Thermocouple to CAN), EIC10/EIC16M (Input to CAN).

7.1 Emtron Lambda to CAN

The ELC uses Bosch proven integrated circuit technology to precisely control an LSU4.9 Lambda sensor. The Lambda value is transmitted over the CAN Bus and can be used by the ECU for tuning and closed loop control. The ELC Power, Ground and CAN wires can be directly connected into the IO Expansion Loom:

Table 7.0 — ELC1 to IO Expansion Port wiring

NameELC 4-Way DTMECU IO Expansion 12-Way DTM
GroundPin 1Pin 8
CAN LoPin 2Pin 12
CAN HiPin 3Pin 11
PowerPin 4Pin 7

8.0 OEM CAN Bus 2

The ECU communicates on CAN Bus 2, which is reserved for the GT86/BRZ/FR-S. The ECU maintains full compatibility with all other CAN devices within the vehicle, transmitting a wide range of raw and calibrated data over the Bus while also receiving data.

9.0 Emtron Torque Management

The ECU performs extremely accurate torque calculations provided the engine model configuration is accurate. This section allows the user to calibrate any errors in the torque model whilst also influencing the engine torque delivery characteristics.

  • 9.1 Torque Reduction Ign Retard Clamp — Limits the maximum torque reduction the ECU can perform based on ignition timing retard.
  • 9.2 Torque Nitrous Gain — In applications where Nitrous is used to increase torque, the ECU calculates this torque increase; the gain can be used to trim the output if required.
  • 9.3 BSFC — Brake Specific Fuel Consumption torque calculation is not used by the ECU but can be useful, when calibrated correctly, to cross-check the ECU calculated torque levels.
  • 9.4 Engine Torque Correction Table — Allows the user to adjust the gain on the calculated Engine Torque based on any parameter in the axis setup form (used to correct calibration errors).
  • 9.5 Torque Demand Correction Table — The GT86/BRZ/FR-S requests accurate information on driver-demanded torque so decisions can be made across vehicle systems. If correlation issues exist between reported torque and Torque Demanded, the vehicle will not function as intended and can lead to drivetrain operation issues. This table allows gain control of this channel (should not normally require modification).
  • 9.6 Frictional Loss Table — The combustion torque (“Torque Ideal”) is calculated by the ECU; the moving parts create drag and limit available torque. This table allows entry of the frictional loss in Nm.
  • 9.7 Frictional Loss Offset 1 Table — One of two tables that allow offsetting of the frictional loss (commonly spanned against Engine Oil Temperature).
  • 9.8 Torque Reduction Ignition Retard Gain Table — Calibrates the torque reduction % per degree. When a torque request is applied the ECU calculates how much retard is required to achieve it.
  • 9.9 Torque Reduction Gain Table — Calibrates the torque reduction % per %cut. When a torque request is applied the ECU calculates how much cut is required to achieve it.

10.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron GT86/BRZ/FR-S Plugin1609-72086

Appendix A – ECU Pinout

Connector A

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
A1Throttle Servo Motor -AUX1012 Supply (option 2)
A2Throttle Servo Motor +AUX9
A3Power GroundGND
A4Power GroundGND
A5Cam Solenoid Exhaust RHAux 4
A6O2 NarrowBand HeaterGROUND
A7Cam Solenoid Exhaust LHAux 3
A8Ignition 4Ign 4
A10Ignition 2Ign 2
A11PurgeInj 6
A12Injector 1 (Port)Inj 1
A13Injector 4 (Port)Inj 2
A14Injector 1 (Direct)Inj 1 Direct
A16Cam Solenoid Inlet RHAux 2
A17Cam Solenoid Inlet LHAux 1
A18TPS (Main)An 2
A195V Engine (TP and VSV)Eng 5V
A20Oil TemperatureAn 10
A21Ignition 1Ign 1
A22Injector 2 (Port)Inj 2
A23Injector 4 (Direct)Inj 4 Direct
A24Injector 3 (Direct)Inj 3 Direct
A25Injector 2 (Direct)Inj 2 Direct
A28TPS (Sub)An 3
A29Sensor Ground (Knk, MAF, Oil Temp, Eng Temp)Sensor 0V Ref
A30ECTAn 7
A31Ignition 3Ign 3
A32Injector 3 (Port)Inj 3

Connector B

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
B1Canister Pump Module (VPMP)
B5Direct Injector Power Supply RelayInj 8
B7DBW (ETCS) PowerInj 7
B8Canister Pump Module (MPMP)
B10Fuel Pump FeedbackDI 5
B11Cooling Fan Relay 3Ign 5
B12Cooling Fan Relay 1 2Ign 6
B13EFI Relay (Gnd)
B15TachoAux 6
B17DBW Relay (Gnd)Inj 7
B18Alternator ControlAux 8
B19FPCAux 7
B20Canister Pump ModuleGROUND
B215V Eng (FPS Main)5V Eng
B225V Eng (FPS Sub)5V Eng
B23FPS Main SignalAn 13
B26Starter RelayIgn 8
B29Sensor Ground (PP)Sensor 0V Ref
B30Sensor Ground (PP)Sensor 0V Ref
B31FPS Sub SignalAn 14
B34Start Cut RelayAux 11
B35AC ClutchIgn 7

Connector C

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
C1Power GroundGROUND
C2Power Ground
C3Power Ground
C5O2 Wideband Heater
C614V ECU Power
C9Fuel Pressure SignalAn 6
C11DF1DI 5
C13Fuel Pump FeedbackDI 8
C14Exhaust Cam Position (LH)DI 2
C15Intake Cam Position (RH)DI 1
C16Crank Signal +
C17Knock Signal (RH)
C18O2 Wideband Sensor Signal 1 -
C19O2 Wideband Sensor Signal 1 +
C20Manifold Pressure SensorAn 1
C21O2 NarrowBand Sensor Signal 2
C25Exhaust Cam Position (RH)DI 3
C26Inlet Cam Position (LH)Sync Index
C27Crank Signal -
C28Knock Signal LH +
C29Shield (Knock)
C30Shield (O2)
C31DF2DI 7
C32Fuel Pump DriverAux 12
C345V for CAM Sensors5V Eng
C35Shield (Crank)

Connector D

PinFunctionChannel Assignment
D114V ECU Power
D2Battery
D3Brake Switch (NO)
D4Signal Ground / Shielding
D7Brake Switch (NC)DI 13
D8AC Pressure SensorDI 11
D12Intake Temp (MAF)AN 11
D14Starter Signal from Start RelayDI 10
D15Clutch SwitchDI 9
D16Neutral SwitchDI 4
D17Start RequestDI 12
D18CAN LoCAN Lo
D19CAN HiCAN Hi
D20GROUND
D22MAF SignalAN 4
D24Battery Current SensorGROUND
D27Ignition Switch
D28Shield (MAF)
D29Ground (MAF)
D30Cruise Switch (Main)DI 14

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Datasheets

KV8 ECU Data Sheet

General

Emtron’s KV8 is a wire in ECU with extreme flexibility. Industry leading I/O count will ensure you do not have to make any sacrifices when configuring your engine and vehicle. This ECU will support up to 8 Channels of fuel and 8 Channels fully sequential Ignition. Every KV8 is housed in a durable billet Aluminium enclosure and includes up to 32MB permanent memory for on board logging, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control up to 2 channels, dual on-board LSU4.9 Lambda controllers, dual digital Knock control, Ethernet communications and 3 axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 390mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 134 mm x 162 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 730g
  • Connector system: 120-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
  • Pin diameter: 1 mm
  • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
  • Connector A: 26 pin Key 2 Super Seal
  • Connector B: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal
  • Connector C: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal
  • Connector D: 26 pin Key 1 Super Seal

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors

  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)

  • 32MB ECU logging memory

    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage

    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank and Cam sensor inputs
    • Includes Digital inputs 1-4
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor

    • Range 40 - 115.0 kPa
  • 3-Axis accelerometer

    • 16-Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

Outputs

8x Port Injector Outputs—high or low ohm

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Independent Saturated or Peak & Hold control per channel
  • 8A Peak, 4A hold, 10A Limit Injector Control
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

8x Ignition Outputs

  • Open collector outputs with Logic Level outputs
  • Adjustable Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for Auxiliary ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)
  • Ignitor must be used between ECU and coil

16x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW) up to 2 throttle bodies, dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.

  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz

  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs

    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “ECU Supply” pin D1 connector D
    • Auxiliary 9-12 Flywheel to the “ECU 9-12 Supply” pin D20 connector D
    • Auxiliary 13-16 Flywheel to the “ECU 13-16 Supply” pin D2 connector D
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected

    Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit

  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-12: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)
  • Auxiliary 13-16: Half Bridge 15.0A continuous (pin limited). Can be used as Low Side or High Side.

1x EFI Relay Output

  • Low Side Driver for relay control. Current limited to 200mA (Output will switch ON when Ignition Switch Input (D15) is greater than 4V).

1x Analog Output Buffered

  • Voltage range 0.0 - 5.0V, output current 100mA

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

Inputs

16x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-12 (available on 6 channels)
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input range. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • 160Hz Low pass filter

8x Digital/Speed Inputs (DI 1 - 8)

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up the 30.0kHz on all 8 channels
  • Magnetic and hall/optical effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed, turbo speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1- 4.
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Effective resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 8 channels to 10.0V
  • Maximum/Minimum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

6x Digital/Switched Inputs (DI 9 - 14)

  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 -20.0 V analog input. Effective resolution is 19.61mV (8-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 6 channels to 10.0V

2x Knock Inputs

  • 2 Independent knock input channels
  • Using Bosch, Digital Knock Integrated Circuit Technology with programmable digital filter coefficients
  • Center frequency configurable from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Bandwidth window from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman
  • Gain control(x1, x2, x4, x8)
  • Cylinder selectable knock input
  • Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc)

1x Dedicated Ignition Switch Input

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 4V the EFI Relay output (D9) will switch ON)

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

Lambda

Two Lambda channels supporting the Bosch LSU 4.9 sensor

  • Using Bosch integrated circuit technology for precise sensor control
  • Nernst cell temperature measurement for dynamic PID closed loop heater control
  • Lambda range: 0.580 La to 10.000 La
  • Diagnostics available for each pin and includes, Short to ground, Short to Vbat, Open Load

Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers

1x Auxiliary 9-12 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9 -12. (See KV Series Power Distribution Wiring - A10.pdf for more information on how this should be wired)

1x Auxiliary 13-16 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 13 -16. See KV Series Power Distribution Wiring - A10.pdf for more information on how this should be wired)

2x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 400mA
  • 5V Vref2 output current 400mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse Battery Protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 600mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

4x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 60A

2x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection

NOTE: The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.


Communications

  • 1x High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps/ 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV12 Rev2 Data Sheet

General

Emtron’s KV12 is a wire in ECU with extreme flexibility. Industry leading I/O count will ensure you do not have to make any sacrifices when configuring your engine and vehicle. This ECU will support up to 12 Channels of fuel and 12 Channels fully sequential Ignition. Every KV12 is housed in a durable billet Aluminium enclosure and includes up to 32MB permanent memory for on board logging, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control up to 2 channels, dual on-board LSU4.9 Lambda controllers, dual digital Knock control, Ethernet communications and 3 axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 390mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 134 mm x 162 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 730g
  • Connector system: 120-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
  • Pin diameter: 1 mm
  • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
  • Connector A: 26 pin Key 2 Super Seal
  • Connector B: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal
  • Connector C: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal
  • Connector D: 26 pin Key 1 Super Seal

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors

  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)

  • 32MB ECU logging memory

    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage

    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank and Cam sensor inputs
    • Includes Digital inputs 1-4
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor

    • Range 40 - 115.0 kPa
  • 3-Axis accelerometer

    • 16-Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

Outputs

12x Port Injector Outputs—high or low ohm

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Independent Saturated or Peak & Hold control per channel
  • 8A Peak, 4A hold, 10A Limit Injector Control
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

12x Ignition Outputs

  • Open collector outputs with Logic Level outputs
  • Adjustable Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for Auxiliary ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)
  • Ignitor must be used between ECU and coil

16x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW) up to 2 throttle bodies, dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.

  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz

  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs

    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “ECU Supply” pin D1 connector D
    • Auxiliary 9-12 Flywheel to the “ECU 9-12 Supply” pin D20 connector D
    • Auxiliary 13-16 Flywheel to the “ECU 13-16 Supply” pin D2 connector D
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected

    Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit

  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-12: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)
  • Auxiliary 13-16: Half Bridge 15.0A continuous (pin limited). Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)

(NOTE: Auxiliary 9 -16 can be used to control up to 4x DBW throttle bodies)

1x EFI Relay Output

  • Low Side Driver for relay control. Current limited to 200mA (Output will switch ON when Ignition Switch Input (D15) is greater than 4V).

1x Analog Output Buffered

  • Voltage range 0.0 - 5.0V, output current 100mA

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

Inputs

16x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs.

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-12 (available on 6 channels)
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input range. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • 160Hz Low pass filter

8x Digital/Speed Inputs (DI 1 - 8)

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up the 30.0kHz on all 8 channels
  • Magnetic and hall/optical effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed, turbo speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1- 4.
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Effective resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 8 channels to 10.0V
  • Maximum/Minimum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

6x Digital/Switched Inputs (DI 9 - 14)

  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 -20.0 V analog input. Effective resolution is 19.61mV (8-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 6 channels to 10.0V

2x Knock Inputs

  • 2 Independent knock input channels
  • Using Bosch, Digital Knock Integrated Circuit Technology with programmable digital filter coefficients
  • Center frequency configurable from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Bandwidth window from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman
  • Gain control(x1, x2, x4, x8)
  • Cylinder selectable knock input
  • Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc)

1x Dedicated Ignition Switch Input

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 4V the EFI Relay output (D9) will switch ON)

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

Lambda

Two Lambda channels supporting the Bosch LSU 4.9 sensor

  • Using Bosch integrated circuit technology for precise sensor control
  • Nernst cell temperature measurement for dynamic PID closed loop heater control
  • Lambda range: 0.580 La to 10.000 La
  • Diagnostics available for each pin and includes, Short to ground, Short to Vbat, Open Load

Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers

1x Auxiliary 9-12 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9 -12. (See KV Series Power Distribution Wiring - A10.pdf for more information on how this should be wired)

1x Auxiliary 13-16 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 13 -16. See KV Series Power Distribution Wiring - A10.pdf for more information on how this should be wired)

2x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 400mA
  • 5V Vref2 output current 400mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse Battery Protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 600mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

5x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 60A

2x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection

NOTE: The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.


Communications

  • 1x High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps/ 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV16 Rev2 Data Sheet

General

Emtron’s KV16 is a wire in ECU with extreme flexibility. Industry leading I/O count will ensure you do not have to make any sacrifices when configuring your engine and vehicle. This ECU will support up to 16 Channels of fuel and 12 Channels fully sequential Ignition. Every KV16 is housed in a durable billet Aluminium enclosure and includes up to 32MB permanent memory for on board logging, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control up to 4 channels, dual on-board LSU4.9 Lambda controllers, dual digital Knock control, Ethernet communications and 3 axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 390mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 134 mm x 162 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 730g
  • Connector system: 120-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
  • Pin diameter: 1 mm
  • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
  • Connector A: 26 pin Key 2 Super Seal
  • Connector B: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal
  • Connector C: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal
  • Connector D: 26 pin Key 1 Super Seal

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors

  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)

  • 32MB ECU logging memory

    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage

    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank and Cam sensor inputs
    • Includes Digital inputs 1-4
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor

    • Range 40 - 115.0 kPa
  • 3-Axis accelerometer

    • 16-Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

Outputs

16x Port Injector Outputs—high or low ohm

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Independent Saturated or Peak & Hold control per channel
  • 8A Peak, 4A hold, 10A Limit Injector Control
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

12x Ignition Outputs

  • Open collector outputs with Logic Level outputs
  • Adjustable Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for Auxiliary ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)
  • Ignitor must be used between ECU and coil

16x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW) up to 2 throttle bodies, dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.

  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz

  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs

    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “ECU Supply” pin D1 connector D
    • Auxiliary 9-12 Flywheel to the “ECU 9-12 Supply” pin D20 connector D
    • Auxiliary 13-16 Flywheel to the “ECU 13-16 Supply” pin D2 connector D
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected

    Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit

  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-12: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)
  • Auxiliary 13-16: Half Bridge 15.0A continuous (pin limited). Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)

(NOTE: Auxiliary 9 -16 can be used to control up to 4x DBW throttle bodies)

1x EFI Relay Output

  • Low Side Driver for relay control. Current limited to 200mA (Output will switch ON when Ignition Switch Input (D15) is greater than 4V).

1x Analog Output Buffered

  • Voltage range 0.0 - 5.0V, output current 100mA

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

Inputs

16x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs.

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-12 (available on 6 channels)
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input range. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • 160Hz Low pass filter

8x Digital/Speed Inputs (DI 1 - 8)

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up the 30.0kHz on all 8 channels
  • Magnetic and hall/optical effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed, turbo speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1- 4.
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Effective resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 8 channels to 10.0V
  • Maximum/Minimum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

6x Digital/Switched Inputs (DI 9 - 14)

  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 -20.0 V analog input. Effective resolution is 19.61mV (8-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 6 channels to 10.0V

2x Knock Inputs

  • 2 Independent knock input channels
  • Using Bosch, Digital Knock Integrated Circuit Technology with programmable digital filter coefficients
  • Center frequency configurable from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Bandwidth window from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman
  • Gain control(x1, x2, x4, x8)
  • Cylinder selectable knock input
  • Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc)

1x Dedicated Ignition Switch Input

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 4V the EFI Relay output (D9) will switch ON)

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

Lambda

Two Lambda channels supporting the Bosch LSU 4.9 sensor

  • Using Bosch integrated circuit technology for precise sensor control
  • Nernst cell temperature measurement for dynamic PID closed loop heater control
  • Lambda range: 0.580 La to 10.000 La
  • Diagnostics available for each pin and includes, Short to ground, Short to Vbat, Open Load

Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers

1x Auxiliary 9-12 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9 -12. (See KV Series Power Distribution Wiring - A10.pdf for more information on how this should be wired)

1x Auxiliary 13-16 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 13 -16. See KV Series Power Distribution Wiring - A10.pdf for more information on how this should be wired)

2x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 400mA
  • 5V Vref2 output current 400mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse Battery Protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 600mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

6x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 60A

2x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection

NOTE: The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.


Communications

  • 1x High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps/ 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV16M Data Sheet

General

Emtron’s KV16M is a motorsport wire-in ECU with extreme flexibility built on the race proven KV16 ECU platform with additional flexibility and reliability utilising a 136-way Deutsch Autosport connector system. This ECU will support up to 16 Channels of fuel and 12 Channels fully sequential Ignition. Every KV16M is housed in a durable billet Aluminium enclosure and includes up to 32MB permanent memory for on board logging, 4-channel oscilloscope function, 24 high resolution analog inputs, DBW control up to 4 channels, dual on-board LSU4.9 Lambda controllers, dual digital Knock control, Ethernet communications and 3 axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 450mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection
  • “Smart” internal ECU hold power control

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 134 mm x 162 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 750g
  • Waterproof
  • Connector system: 136-way waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
* 1 x 55 Way, shell size 16 Deutsch Autosport (Red) 
* 1 x 26 Way, shell size 16 Deutsch Autosport (Red)
* 1 x 55 Way, shell size 16 Deutsch Autosport (Yellow)

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors

  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)

  • 32MB ECU logging memory

    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage

    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank and Cam sensors inputs
    • Includes Digital Inputs 1-4
  • 3-Axis accelerometer

    • 16 Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

2.0 Outputs

16x Injector Outputs—high or low ohm.

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Independent Saturated or Peak & Hold control per channel
  • 8A Peak, 4A hold, 10A Limit Injector Control
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

12x Ignition Outputs

  • Open collector outputs with Logic Level outputs
  • Adjustable Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for Auxiliary ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)
  • Ignitor must be used between ECU and coil

16x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire(DBW) up to 4 throttle bodies, dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.

  • All Outputs have PWM Control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz

  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs

    • Aux 1-8 Flywheel to the “Constant 14V Supply” pin 53 Connector C
    • All other Auxiliaries Flywheel to the “ECU 14V Supply” pins
  • All Outputs are short circuit and over current protected

    Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit

  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-12: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)
  • Auxiliary 13-16: Half Bridge 7.5A continuous (pin limited). Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together for DC motor control (DBW up to 2x channels)

(NOTE: Auxiliary 9 -16 can be used to control up to 4x DBW throttle bodies)

1x Analog Output Buffered

  • Voltage range 0 - 5.0V, Output current 100mA

2x Shield Outputs

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

3.0 Inputs

24x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs.

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-12 (available on 6 channels)
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input range. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • 160Hz Low pass filter

8x Digital/Speed Inputs (DI 1 - 8)

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up the 30.0kHz on all 8 channels
  • Magnetic and hall/optical effect sensor compatible with programable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed, turbo speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1- 4.
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Effective resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 8 channels to 10.0V
  • Maximum/Minimum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

6x Digital/Switched Inputs (DI 9 - 14)

  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 -20.0 V analog input. Effective resolution is 19.61mV (8-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 6 channels to 10.0V

2x Knock Inputs

  • 2 Independent knock input channels
  • Using Bosch, Digital Knock Integrated Circuit Technology with programmable digital filter coefficients
  • Center frequency configurable from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Bandwidth window from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman
  • Gain control(x1, x2, x4, x8)
  • Cylinder selectable knock input
  • Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc)

2x Crank and Cam Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

4.0 Lambda

2x Lambda channels supporting the Bosch LSU 4.9 sensor

  • Using Bosch integrated circuit technology for precise sensor control
  • Nernst cell temperature measurement for dynamic PID closed loop heater control
  • Lambda range: 0.580 La to 10.000 La
  • Diagnostics available for each pin and includes, Short to ground, Short to Vbat, Open Load

5.0 Voltage and Ground Supplies

4x ECU Supply Inputs

  • 7.5A per pin, total 30A
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers
  • Supplies Auxiliary 9 -16 Half bridge Drivers

3x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 400mA
  • 5V Vref2 output current 400mA
  • 5V Vref3 output current 400mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse Battery Protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 600mA
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

1x Constant 14V Battery Supply

  • Internal ECU EFI Relay Control (Keep-alive function)
  • Flywheel supply for Auxiliary Channels 1-8

6x ECU Main Grounds

  • 7.5A per pin, total 45A

4x Analog Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection

NOTE: The Analog Sensor 0V Ref pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

6.0 Communications

  • 1x High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps/ 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV Series Hardware Manual

Emtron KV8 ECU

Emtron KV8 ECU

Emtron KV12 ECU

Emtron KV12 ECU


1.0 Analog Inputs

The KV series supports up to 24, 12-bit high resolution analog input channels.

KV ECUAnalog Inputs
KV816
KV1216
KV1616
KV16M24

1.1 Analog Input Channels 1-16/24

All analog input channels are sampled using high resolution 12-bit analog to digital converters with a 0.0 - 5.000V input range. The ECU uses a high precision internal voltage reference giving high-performance signal conversion. Analog channels 7-12 have configurable 1k ohm pullups so temperature sensors can be connected to these channels when required. All analog inputs can also be used as switched inputs with arming levels programmable from 0.0 – 5.0V.

Analog Voltage Input 1-24 Summary

  • 16x/24x Analog Inputs with 6 channels available for temperature measurement with switchable pullup resistors
  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-12 making these inputs suitable for temperature measurement. Pullup supply is to 5.0V Vref1.
  • Every input accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input range. Resolution is 1.22mV using a 12-bit analog to digital converter.
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • 1st order 160Hz Low pass filter
  • All inputs support ratiometric and absolute 3-wire based sensors such as MAP, Throttle position(s) and pressures etc
  • AN7-12 support thermistor 2-wire sensors such as engine temperature, inlet air temperature with the pullup resistor switched ON when required.
Simplified analog input channel — ANV In, 100 kΩ to ground, 0 V Ref.

Simplified analog input channel — ANV In, 100 kΩ to ground, 0 V Ref.

1.2 Analog Temperature Input Channels 7-12

As mentioned in 1.1 these channels have switchable 1k pullup resistors. This allows these channels to support ratiometric and absolute sensors (Pullup switch OFF) or thermistors 2-wire sensors with the pullup(s) switched ON. When the pullup is enabled the ECU applies a ratiometric correction which maintains a very stable output independent of pullup supply variations.

Analog Voltage Input 7-12 Summary

  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors, pullup supply to 5.0V Vref1.
  • Every input accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input range. Resolution is 1.22mV using a 12-bit analog to digital converter.
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • 1st order 160Hz Low pass filter
  • Supports either ratiometric and absolute 3-wire based sensors (pullup Off) or thermistor 2-wire sensors with pullup ON when required.
Analog input 7-12 with switchable 1 kΩ pull-up to 5.0 V Vref1 (for thermistors), or ratiometric mode with the pull-up OFF.

Analog input 7-12 with switchable 1 kΩ pull-up to 5.0 V Vref1 (for thermistors), or ratiometric mode with the pull-up OFF.

1.3 Digital Inputs 1-14 used as analog input(s)

Digital Input channels 1-14 are primarily used to measure frequency based signal and as switched inputs. However, the analog voltage on each digital input is also measured so all digital inputs can support ratiometric and absolute 3-wire based sensors. The input range is extended to 0-20V, which means the effective resolution is 4 times less than Analog Inputs 1-16. For this reason, don’t connect engine critical sensors to these channels e.g. Manifold Pressure, Throttle Position, Pedal Position etc. Digital Input channels 1-14 should be used to measure an analog signal once all the dedicated Analog Inputs 1-16/24 have been allocated.

Digital Analog Inputs 1-8 Summary

  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 pull-up resistor to 8.8V on all 8 channels
  • Input Impedance 39k Ohms to ground
  • Over and under voltage protection

Digital Analog Inputs 9-14 Summary

  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Resolution is 19.61mV (8-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 pull-up resistor to 9.4V on all 6 channels
  • Input Impedance 70k Ohms to ground

1.4 Sensor 0V Reference Pin(s)

These pins are NOT ECU grounds. Although a multi-meter test will show continuity to the ECU ground, these pins are designed as a low current 0V reference for pressure, position and temperature sensors. The following rules MUST always be observed:

  • DO NOT connect these pins to the ECU main ground location(s). This is a specialised ground reference for all analog sensors and should be connected directly to the sensor 0V (ground) pin.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Use the main ECU ground.

Incorrect — the 0V Reference must not be branched or shared with another ground point.

Incorrect — the 0V Reference must not be branched or shared with another ground point.

Incorrect — do not daisy-chain the 0V Reference or tie it to the main ECU/engine ground.

Incorrect — do not daisy-chain the 0V Reference or tie it to the main ECU/engine ground.

Correct — the 0V Reference is wired directly to the sensor’s 0V pin only.

Correct — the 0V Reference is wired directly to the sensor’s 0V pin only.

1.5 Analog Input configuration example

Table 1.0 shows a typical analog input assignment on a Drive by Wire (DBW) application.

Table 1.0. Analog Channel 1-16 assignment example.

ChannelInput Pin
Manifold PressureAnalog Voltage 1
Boost PressureAnalog Voltage 2
DBW1 Servo Position MainAnalog Voltage 3
DBW1 Servo Position SubAnalog Voltage 4
Mass Air Flow Meter 1Analog Voltage 5
Engine TemperatureAnalog Voltage 7 (Pull-up Channel)
Inlet TemperatureAnalog Voltage 8 (Pull-up Channel)
Engine Oil TemperatureAnalog Voltage 9 (Pull-up Channel)
Gearbox Oil TemperatureAnalog Voltage 10 (Pull-up Channel)
Fuel TemperatureAnalog Voltage 11 (Pull-up Channel)
Engine Oil PressureAnalog Voltage 12 (Pull-up Channel)
Fuel PressureAnalog Voltage 13
Gear Detection VoltageAnalog Voltage 14
Pedal Position Sensor 1Analog Voltage 15
Pedal Position Sensor 2Analog Voltage 16

2.0 Digital Inputs

Digital Inputs 1-14 provide frequency and switched based inputs into the ECU. These inputs have a high level of configurability allowing easy interface to all sensor types. Digital Inputs 1-8 can be used to measure frequency, while all channels can accept a switched input. The analog voltage on all 14 channels is measured and can be used for diagnostics or ratiometric sensor interface.

2.1 Digital Input Channels 1-8 – Frequency

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up to 30.0kHz on all 8 channels
  • Magnetic and hall/optical effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s); rising, falling and both.
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed, turbo speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1-4.
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 8 channels to 8.8V
  • Filter time constant = 20us
  • Maximum/Minimum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k Ohms to ground.
  • Switch Input: Switch to 0V, Switch to VBatt, logic signal
Digital frequency input — switchable 4k7 pull-up, protection clamp and zero-crossing comparator stage.

Digital frequency input — switchable 4k7 pull-up, protection clamp and zero-crossing comparator stage.

NOTE

  1. ONLY Digital Inputs 1-4 can be used to measure Cam Position(s) for VVT control.
  2. The ECU uses “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic based signals. This gives precise 0V crossing detection, critical on magnetic sensors used in VVT control.
  3. Emtron Scope function is available on Digital Inputs 1-4.

2.11 Arming Threshold Control – Magnetic Sensors

Arming threshold control is primarily used in zero crossing detection of magnetic based signals. The zero crossing circuitry cannot be triggered until the input signal has crossed an “arming” threshold on the positive-going (rising edge) portion of the waveform. Until this happens the zero crossing circuitry is OFF and all zero crossings will be ignored. Once the input signal has exceeded the arming threshold, the zero crossing circuitry is now ready (armed) and waiting for the zero crossing.

The arming threshold values will need adjusting as the signal frequency increases. i.e. signal amplitude is proportional to frequency until the sensor reaches saturation. For this reason, frequency-based signal should use a 2D tables for arming threshold control.

Below is a scope trace showing a signal over one cycle, scaled at 2V/Div. A conventional oscilloscope or the Emtron scope can be used to view a signal to best determine the correct arming thresholds. The preferred method is to find the lowest amplitude during one cycle (highlighted by the red circle below) and make the arming threshold 60% of that value. In this example the lowest value is 1.9V. Taking 60% gives an arming threshold of 1.1V.

Oscilloscope capture of a magnetic sensor signal (2 V/Div). The red circle marks the lowest amplitude point used to calculate the arming threshold (60% of 1.9 V = 1.1 V).

Oscilloscope capture of a magnetic sensor signal (2 V/Div). The red circle marks the lowest amplitude point used to calculate the arming threshold (60% of 1.9 V = 1.1 V).

In summary when the positive-going input exceeds 1.1V, the zero crossing circuitry becomes armed and is ready to detect the zero crossing on the next falling edge.

2.2 Digital Input Channels 1-14 – Switched Input

Digital Input channels 9-14 are for non-frequency based signal such as switched inputs, while Digital Inputs 1-8 are available for both. The status of a switched input (On/Off) is controlled by measuring the analog input voltage and comparing against user defined On threshold and user defined Off threshold. A switched input can supply either a ground or voltage into the ECU.

  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input.
  • Effective resolution DI 1-8 is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • Effective resolution DI 9-14 is 19.61mV (8-Bit)
  • Switch to 0V, Switch to VBatt, logic signal
  • On/Off switched inputs: AC request, launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with programmable switch-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 14 channels.
  • Over and under voltage protection.
  • Input Impedance DI1-8, 39k ohms to ground
  • Input Impedance DI9-14, 70k ohms to ground
Switched input stage with switchable 4k7 pull-up and comparator.

Switched input stage with switchable 4k7 pull-up and comparator.

Switch to Ground

In the case of a switch supplying a ground, the pullup resistor needs to be turned ON. With the switch in the OFF position, the ECU input will read the voltage supplied by the pullup resistor. With the switch in the ON position, the pullup resistor voltage is pulled to ground and the ECU input will read close to 0V.

NOTE: The current is limited by the 4k7 resistor so pulling the input to ground using the switch will not damage the ECU.

The current can be worked out using Ohms Law: V = I x R. Measure the voltage at the pin with the switch OFF, typically around 9V. Resistor = 4700 Ohm. Current (I) = 9V / 4700 = 1.9mA

Switch to Ground — pull-up switched ON; the switch pulls the input to 0V.

Switch to Ground — pull-up switched ON; the switch pulls the input to 0V.

Switch to Power

In the case of a switch supplying power, the pullup resistor needs to be turned OFF. With the switch in the OFF position, the ECU input will read the 0V through the internal pulldown resistor network. With the switch in the ON position, the switch voltage is fed into the ECU input.

NOTE: The ECU input is protected against high voltage up to +80V. Feeding the battery voltage into an input will not damage the ECU.

Switch to Power — pull-up switched OFF; the switch feeds voltage into the protected input.

Switch to Power — pull-up switched OFF; the switch feeds voltage into the protected input.

2.3 Digital Input Channels 1-14 – Analog Input

When not used as frequency or switched inputs these channels can be used to measure analog signals for ratiometric and absolute 3-wire based sensors. Refer back to Section 1.3.

2.4 Digital Input configuration example

Table 2.0 shows a Digital Input engine configuration example for both Non-VVT and VVT applications.

Table 2.0. Digital Input engine configuration example

DI Input PinChannel (non VVT)Channel (VVT)
Digital Input 1Speed Rear LHIntake LH Cam Position
Digital Input 2Speed Rear RHIntake RH Cam Position
Digital Input 3Power Steer switchExhaust LH Cam Position
Digital Input 4Start SwitchExhaust RH Cam Position
Digital Input 5Clutch SwitchSpeed Front LH
Digital Input 6Turbo SpeedSpeed Front RH
Digital Input 7Launch Enable SwitchSpeed Rear LH
Digital Input 8Fuel Used Reset SwitchSpeed Rear RH
Digital Input 9Rotary SwitchClutch Switch
Digital Input 10AC switchStart Switch
Digital Input 11Launch Enable Switch
Digital Input 12Fuel Used Reset Switch
Digital Input 13AC switch
Digital Input 14Rotary Switch

3.0 Auxiliary Outputs

The ECU has 16 Auxiliary Outputs with a wide variety of driver types to suit all applications. These drives are suitable for controlling relays, resistive and inductive loads, stepper motors, DC servo motors and electronic throttles. All outputs are short circuit and over current protected.

3.1 Auxiliary Output 1-8 – Low side or High side

Auxiliary 1-8 drivers can be configured as Off, Low side or High side driving. Low side refers to an open collector output that switches to ground. A High side driver refers to an output that switches to the ECU Supply voltage.

  • Auxiliary 1-8 drivers can be configured for Low side or High side driving
  • Maximum frequency 15kHz
  • Flywheel diode integrated into all outputs with recirculation current to the ECU Supply pin D1
  • Pin voltage monitored for diagnostics
  • Over current / Short to Battery / Thermal overload protection
  • Electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection
  • Reverse battery protection

Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low side 4A continuous, 8A limit
  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low side 2.5A continuous, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Power sourced from the ECU Supply pin
  • Auxiliary 1-8: High side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Suitable applications

  • High frequency solenoids used in Variable Valve Timing (VVT), Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Idle Speed Control
  • Low frequency solenoids used in boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more
  • Solenoid and relay switching used in cam switching (VTEC), runner length control and basic fuel pump, fan and AC relay control.
Auxiliary 1-8 output stage — selectable high-side / low-side driver with integrated flywheel diode to the ECU Supply.

Auxiliary 1-8 output stage — selectable high-side / low-side driver with integrated flywheel diode to the ECU Supply.

3.2 Auxiliary Output 9-12 – Half Bridge

Half bridge drivers supply either a ground or battery voltage i.e. there is no “off” state. Auxiliary outputs 9-12 are medium power half bridge drivers, primarily used for DBW control. Auxiliary 9/10 can be paired into H-bridge configuration for DBW 1 control and Auxiliary 11/12 can be paired into H-bridge configuration for DBW 2 control.

  • Driver IC for Aux9-12 needs power using “Aux 9-12 Supply” pin D20. In non-DBW applications the ECU Supply power source can be used. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.
  • Maximum frequency 15 kHz
  • Flywheel diode integrated into all outputs with recirculation current to the Aux 9-12 Supply pin D20
  • Over current / Short to Battery / Thermal overload protection
  • Electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection
  • Reverse battery protection
  • Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or paired with another channel for DC motor control (DBW)
Auxiliary 9-12 medium-power half-bridge driver (high-side / low-side), powered from the Aux 9-12 Supply.

Auxiliary 9-12 medium-power half-bridge driver (high-side / low-side), powered from the Aux 9-12 Supply.

3.3 Auxiliary Output 13-16 – Half Bridge

Half bridge drivers supply either a ground or battery voltage i.e. there is no “off” state. These are high power half bridge drivers used to switch high current inductive loads. In a KV12 and KV16 they can also be paired for DBW control giving a total of 4 DBW channels.

  • Driver ICs for Aux13-16 needs power using “Aux 13-16 Supply” pin D2. In non-DBW applications the ECU Supply power source can be used. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.
  • Maximum frequency 15 kHz
  • Flywheel diode integrated into all outputs with recirculation current to the Aux 13-16 Supply pin D2
  • Over current / Short to Battery / Thermal overload protection
  • Electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection
  • Reverse battery protection
  • Half Bridge 15.0A continuous (pin limited). Can be used as Low Side, High Side or paired with another channel for DC motor control (DBW)
Auxiliary 13-16 high-power half-bridge driver, powered from the Aux 13-16 Supply.

Auxiliary 13-16 high-power half-bridge driver, powered from the Aux 13-16 Supply.

3.4 Auxiliary Outputs – Full Bridge Configuration (DBW)

By connecting 2x half bridge outputs together a full bridge can be configured. This is used for DC motor direction and braking control required for applications like DBW control. The below schematic shows Aux 9 and 10 paired to form a full bridge configuration for DBW control.

Full bridge (H-bridge) formed by pairing Aux 9 and Aux 10 for DBW motor direction and braking control.

Full bridge (H-bridge) formed by pairing Aux 9 and Aux 10 for DBW motor direction and braking control.

The following table 3.0 explains the operation for the full bridge.

Table 3.0. Full Bridge operation

Transistor Q1Transistor Q2Transistor Q3Transistor Q4DBW/Motor DirectionAux 9 OutputAux 10 Output
ONOFFOFFONForwardHL
OFFONONOFFReverseLH
ONOFFONOFFHigh side FreewheelingHH
OFFONONOFFLow Side FreewheelingLL

For 1 or 2 channels DBW applications the following output pairing is required:

  • DBW1, it is recommended to pair Auxiliary 9 and Auxiliary 10 outputs.
  • DBW2, it is recommended to pair Auxiliary 11 and Auxiliary 12 outputs.

For KV12 and KV16, 4 channel DBW applications the following output pairing is required:

  • DBW3, it is recommended to pair Auxiliary 13 and Auxiliary 14 outputs.
  • DBW4, it is recommended to pair Auxiliary 15 and Auxiliary 16 outputs.

3.5 Auxiliary Output – Flywheel diodes

Flywheel diodes are used to eliminate the voltage spike or flyback voltage when an inductive load is switched off. The diode recirculates the inductive energy at switch off, so it can be dissipated by the internal resistance of the load. This schematic shows the Low side driver switching off; the red arrows indicate how the current recirculates through the flywheel diode and back through the load. The current will decay until it’s insufficient to keep the load On or solenoid open, at which point the load will turn Off.

Note: The ECU and load share the same power supply allowing the flywheeling to operate.

Low-side driver with integrated flywheel diode. The red arrows show the current recirculation path when the driver turns off.

Low-side driver with integrated flywheel diode. The red arrows show the current recirculation path when the driver turns off.

Important points

  • Flywheel diodes allow inductive energy to be dissipated back into the load
  • Flywheel diodes will increase the time it takes for the load to switch off
  • Flywheel diodes minimize EMI by removing the inductive voltage spike and forcing the current to recirculate. The higher the frequency the more important this is.

3.51 VVT and Idle Solenoids – why we need flywheel diodes

When controlling VVT solenoids flywheel diodes are required for the solenoid to operate correctly. At frequencies between 200Hz - 300Hz, the flywheel diode prevents the solenoid switching fully On or fully Off. The flywheel diode allows the current to recirculate and find an “average” value during the switch On and switch Off times (duty cycle). Instead of the solenoid switching fully On or fully Off we can control its position between these 2 points. By controlling the duty cycle, the solenoid average position can be controlled.

For this reason, Auxiliary channel 1-16 are recommended for VVT/Idle solenoid control. If however a Fuel or Ignition channel is used an external flywheel MUST be fitted.

3.52 Boost Control Solenoid

These solenoids require a fast reduction in current when switched off. As all Auxiliary channels have integrated flywheel diodes this recirculation circuitry slows the switch off time at higher frequencies and will cause solenoid control issues. For this reason, the boost control modulation frequency should be kept below 30Hz. Typical values are 15 – 20Hz.

3.53 Transmission Brake Solenoid

Some Transmission Brake solenoids produce a large amount of energy when released. Auxiliary channels 13-16 are the only outputs with enough current to power such solenoids. It is strongly recommended to run an external flywheel diode to prevent long term ECU damage. If the output is modulated a flywheel diode MUST be installed (See Emtron www for details).

NOTE: Maximum Trans-brake frequency is 100Hz

3.6 Permanently Powered Loads

Auxiliary outputs 1-8 are not suitable for permanently powered loads. The integrated flywheel diode will cause back-feeding onto the flywheel recirculation pin (ECU Power pin) and keep the ECU powered up. This can be viewed using the schematic below. With the Low and High side drivers off, current will flow through the solenoid, through the flywheel diode and back onto the ECU supply. To avoid this issue, move the load to a non-flywheel output such as an unused Fuel or Ignition channel or re-configure the solenoid supply feed.

A permanently powered load on an Aux 1-8 output back-feeds through the flywheel diode onto the ECU supply, keeping the ECU powered up.

A permanently powered load on an Aux 1-8 output back-feeds through the flywheel diode onto the ECU supply, keeping the ECU powered up.

3.7 Auxiliary Output configuration example

Table 3.1 shows an Auxiliary output engine configuration example for both Non-VVT and VVT applications.

Table 3.1. Auxiliary Output engine configuration example

Aux Output PinChannel (non VVT)Channel (VVT)
Auxiliary 1Idle SolenoidVVT Intake LH Solenoid
Auxiliary 2Boost SolenoidVVT Intake RH Solenoid
Auxiliary 3TachoVVT Exhaust LH Solenoid
Auxiliary 4Fuel PumpVVT Exhaust RH Solenoid
Auxiliary 5Fuel Pump SpeedCooling Fan
Auxiliary 6AC ClutchBoost Solenoid
Auxiliary 7Cooling FanTacho
Auxiliary 8Cam SwitchFuel Pump
Auxiliary 9AC FanDBW 1+
Auxiliary 10CELDBW 1-
Auxiliary 11Downshift Solenoid
Auxiliary 12Upshift Solenoid
Auxiliary 13AC Fan
Auxiliary 14CEL
Auxiliary 15AC Clutch
Auxiliary 16DBW Relay

4.0 Injector Outputs

The KV series supports from 8 up to 16 injector outputs and will control both modes of injection; Saturated and Peak and Hold.

KV ECUInjector Outputs
KV88
KV1212
KV1616
KV16M16

4.1 Injector Control

Precise and consistent control is also gained with a high 70V flyback voltage, allowing for rapid current reduction at switch Off time.

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Total current limited to 10A
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • Pin voltage monitored for diagnostics
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT and Idle Speed control)
  • Suitable to connect loads that are permanently powered

4.11 Peak and Hold Injector Control

When using low impedance injectors (< 5 Ohms) the ECU uses a switch mode current limiting technique to minimise heat dissipation in the Injector. This gives better injector control and helps maximize injector life by lowering its operating temperature. Switched Flywheel circuitry is used to recirculate injector current back to the ECU supply during the “Hold” phase. This is ONLY active in Peak and Hold mode.

  • Independently configurable Peak and Hold currents up to 16 cylinders
  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Max Peak current 8A
  • Max Hold current 4A
  • Total current limited to 10A
  • Flywheel recirculation current to the ECU Supply pin D1 during “Hold” phase.
Peak and Hold injector driver with switched flywheel recirculation to the ECU Supply during the Hold phase.

Peak and Hold injector driver with switched flywheel recirculation to the ECU Supply during the Hold phase.

4.2 Saturated Injector Control

Required when injector resistance is greater than 5 Ohms

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Total current limited to 10A
Saturated injector driver with 70 V flyback voltage clamp.

Saturated injector driver with 70 V flyback voltage clamp.

4.3 Auxiliary Load Switching on Injector Outputs

When the Injector output is not configured to drive an injector, it can be used to switch or modulate a resistive or inductive load. i.e. relay, waterspray solenoid, Boost solenoid etc.

  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V
  • Total current limited to 10A
  • Maximum Frequency 5kHz
  • No internal flywheel diodes. VVT and Idle solenoids require external flywheel diodes

4.4 Protection

  • Over current / Short to Battery protection
  • Electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection
  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 70V

5.0 Ignition Outputs

The KV series supports from 8 up to 12 Ignition channels with logic level outputs.

KV ECUIgnition Outputs
KV88
KV1212
KV1612
KV16M12

5.1 Ignition Control

When configured for ignition, these outputs are logic level drivers, capable of sourcing current in the range of 35 - 70mA. DO NOT connect directly to a coil and attempt to drive it. An ignitor MUST be used between the ECU and coil.

  • Open collector output (low side) with active current source control to produce a logic level signal for Ignitor control.
  • Adjustable Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA global control). For example, more current is required when 1 output is driving 2 ignitors.
Logic-level ignition output driver — open collector with active current source for ignitor control.

Logic-level ignition output driver — open collector with active current source for ignitor control.

5.2 Auxiliary Load Switching on Ignition Outputs

When the Ignition output is not configured to drive an ignitor, it can be used to switch or modulate a resistive or inductive load. i.e. relay, waterspray solenoid, Boost solenoid etc.

  • Open collector outputs (low side) with current source is OFF.
  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 40V
  • Continuous current limited to 1A
  • Total current limited to 3A
  • Maximum Frequency 5kHz
  • No internal flywheel diodes. VVT and Idle solenoids require external flywheel diodes
Ignition output used for auxiliary load switching (current source OFF, 40 V flyback clamp).

Ignition output used for auxiliary load switching (current source OFF, 40 V flyback clamp).

5.3 Protection

  • Over current / Short to Battery protection
  • Electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection
  • Flyback Voltage Clamp 40V

6.0 Crank Index and Sync Sensor Inputs

The KV series supports a Crank Index and Sync position inputs.

  • Magnetic and hall/optical effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s); rising, falling and both.
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding
  • Independent programmable arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up to 5.0V
  • Maximum/Minimum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k Ohms to ground
  • OEM patterns supported
Crank Index / Sync magnetic input with switchable pull-up and true zero-crossing detection.

Crank Index / Sync magnetic input with switchable pull-up and true zero-crossing detection.

For the maximum noise immunity and best possible signal to noise ratio both positive ("+") and negative ("-") inputs should be connected directly to the sensor. DO NOT connect a Crank or Cam sensor negative to the ECU ground or engine block, instead use the dedicated negative inputs supplied by the ECU.

NOTE

  1. Emtron Scope function is available on both Crank Index and Sync inputs.
  2. For more information on Arming Thresholds, refer back to section 2.11.

7.0 Knock Control

  • 2x Independent knock input channels
  • Fully differential inputs for each channel
  • Bosch knock integrated circuit technology using advanced digital signal processing
  • Programmable FIR-filter
    • Selectable center frequency from 500Hz - 25kHz
    • Selectable bandwidth from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Selectable Digital Filter Window; Hamming or Blackman
  • Gain Control (1x, 2x, 4x, 8x)
  • Input anti-aliasing Low pass filter
  • Cylinder selectable Knock input
  • Individual cylinder Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes with a 720 sync (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc)
  • Diagnostics available for each pin (includes shorted inputs)

8.0 Lambda Control

The ECU supports on-board dual Lambda controllers using the Bosch LSU4.9 wide band oxygen sensor. The ECU uses Bosch integrated and amplifier control circuitry to give precise sensor control and performs three primary functions:

  • Measurement of oxygen concentration
  • Sensor temperature for heater control.
  • Diagnostics of sensor wiring.

The stability of the LSU4.9 Sensor temperature is critical because measurement of oxygen concentration is temperature sensitive. The ECU uses an advanced control system to measure the internal resistance of the Nernst cell and generate dynamic PID heater and temperature control.

Lambda LSU4.9 Summary

  • 2x Independent on-board lambda channels supporting the Bosch LSU 4.9 sensor
  • Using Bosch integrated circuit technology for precise sensor control
  • Nernst cell temperature measurement for dynamic PID closed loop heater and temperature control
  • Lambda range: 0.580 La to 10.000 La
  • Diagnostics available for each pin includes, Short to ground, Short to Vbatt, Open Load.

9.0 Supply Voltage Inputs

9.1 ECU Supply

The ECUs use a “smart” transient protection system to protect itself from damage against high voltage transients. It constantly monitors the ECU supply voltage and if it exceeds 24V a transient protection system activates and begins limiting/regulating the internal ECU supply at 24V. This effectively clamps the ECU supply protecting it in the short term. Due to the large currents involved, the transient protection system cannot clamp the voltage at 24V indefinitely. After 1 second, if the ECU supply has not returned to less than 24V the transient protection system shuts the power down and the ECU will switch off. The figure below illustrates the operation of the transient protection system by showing the input 300ms transient event vs output characteristics.

“Smart” transient protection behaviour — input voltage surge (80 V) vs the clamped 24 V internal output during a 300 ms event.

“Smart” transient protection behaviour — input voltage surge (80 V) vs the clamped 24 V internal output during a 300 ms event.

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Typical operating current: 390mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection
  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary Channels 1-8 High Side Drivers
  • Flywheel supply for Injector channels when Peak & Hold mode is active
  • Flywheel supply for Auxiliary channels 1-8

9.2 Aux 9-12 Supply

This is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-12 half bridge drivers. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay. See the KV Series Power Distribution Wiring for more information on how this should be wired.

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)

9.3 Aux 13-16 Supply

This is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 13-16. Power must be supplied to this pin for these Auxiliary channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In 4 channel DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)

10.0 Regulated Voltage Outputs

The KV series regulated supplies are designed for the harsh automotive environment. They include protection from reverse battery, jump starting transient voltage surges and automatic shutdown when the output is shorted to ground.

5.0V VRef1

  • Main sensor 5.0V supply
  • Continuous current 0.4 Amps
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C (10mV/V)
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

5.0V VRef2

  • Secondary sensor 5.0V supply
  • Continuous current 0.4 Amps
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C (10mV/V)
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

8V VCAS

  • Continuous current: 0.6 Amps
  • Accuracy: +/- 1.0% at 25 °C
  • Short circuit, Reverse battery protection, Thermal overload protection
  • Operating temperature range -40°C ~ 125°C

11.0 EFI Relay Control

The ECU can control an EFI relay, allowing for management of its own power supply. To achieve this a dedicated Ignition Switch Input and EFI Relay Output are used. When 14V is applied to the Ignition Switch input, the ECU internal circuitry switches the EFI relay output On. This will provide a ground, turning the relay On and supplying power to the ECU. Once powered up the ECU takes control on this output. When the Ignition Switch turns Off the ECU can complete critical tasks before shutting itself down (for example, DBW Self calibration and ECU Logging data storage).

Dedicated EFI relay control circuit — the Ignition Switch input drives the EFI Relay Output (relay ground, 200 mA).

Dedicated EFI relay control circuit — the Ignition Switch input drives the EFI Relay Output (relay ground, 200 mA).

Dedicated EFI Relay Control

  • Provides a relay ground, 200mA Limit
  • Short circuit, thermal overload protection, reverse battery

Dedicated Ignition Switch

  • Used to control Main EFI Relay circuit at key-on
  • Input Analog Voltage Range: 0 - 20.0V
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground
  • Adjustable On/Off software thresholds. Resolution = 0.1V

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL4 ECU Datasheet

Emtron SL4 ECU

Emtron SL4 ECU

1.0 General

Emtron’s SL Series is built upon the outstanding foundation of the KV Series and features the same processing power and logging capacity. This lightweight package is housed in a Billet Aluminium Enclosure and features a 68-pin connector system which is still a very high I/O count. The SL4 ECU will support up to 4 Channels of fully sequential Fuel and Ignition. Up to 32MB permanent memory for on-board logging is available, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control, Knock control using digital filter technology, High Speed Ethernet communications and 3-axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 290mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 120 mm x 130 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 470g
  • Connector system: 68-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
    • Pin diameter: 1 mm
    • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
    • Connector A: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal
    • Connector B: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors
  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)
  • 32MB ECU logging memory
    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage
    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank Index and Sync sensor inputs
    • Includes Digital Inputs 1-4
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor
    • Range 40 - 115.0 kPa
  • 3-Axis accelerometer
    • 16-Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

2.0 Outputs

4x Port Injector Outputs — high ohm

  • 70V clamping
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

4x Ignition Outputs

  • Adjustable TTL Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

10x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW), dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.
  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz
  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs
    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “ECU Supply” pin B1 connector B
    • Auxiliary 9-10 Flywheel to the “ECU 9-12 Supply” pin A34 connector A
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected

Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit
  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-10: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together in H-bridge configuration for DC motor control (DBW)

1x EFI Relay Output

  • Low Side Driver for relay control. Current limited to 200mA (Output will switch ON when Ignition Switch Input (B4) is greater than 4V)

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

3.0 Inputs

10x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-10
  • Accepts a 0.000 - 5.000V analog input. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground

6x Digital/Speed Inputs/Switched Inputs

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up to 30.0kHz on all 6 channels
  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible on DI 1-4 with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Hall effect sensor only on DI 5-6 with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V on DI 1-4
  • Fixed frequency-based arming thresholds on DI 5-6. Rising = 1.2V, Falling = 1.0V.
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1-4.
  • ON/OFF switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 6 channels to 10V
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

2x Knock Inputs with configurable Frequency and Gain

  • Using Bosch digital knock integrated circuit technology
  • Selectable center frequency from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Selectable bandwidth from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Selectable digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman

1x Dedicated Ignition Switch Input

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 4V the EFI Relay output (D9) will switch ON)

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

4.0 Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies power to Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers

1x Auxiliary 9-10 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9-10. (See the SL Series Power Distribution Wiring for more information on how this should be wired. Also see Section 6.1)

1x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 250mA

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 400mA

2x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 30A

1x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection (See note in Section 6.1)

NoteNOTE The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

5.0 Communications

  • 1x high speed Ethernet 100Mbps
  • 1x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps / 6 Channels per node, total 64 messages.

6.0 SL4 Pinout

Connector A: Injection / Ignition / Auxiliary Outputs

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

SL4 Connector A — looking into ECU connector.

SL4 Connector A — looking into ECU connector.

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 1A18Auxiliary Output 9
A2Injection Channel 2A19Auxiliary Output 10
A3Injection Channel 3A20Digital Input 1
A4Injection Channel 4A21Digital Input 2
A5NCA22Digital Input 3
A6NCA23Digital Input 4
A7NCA24Digital Input 5
A8NCA25Digital Input 6
A9Sensor Supply 8VA26Ignition Channel 1
A10Auxiliary Output 1A27Ignition Channel 2
A11Auxiliary Output 2A28Ignition Channel 3
A12Auxiliary Output 3A29Ignition Channel 4
A13Auxiliary Output 4A30NC
A14Auxiliary Output 5A31NC
A15Auxiliary Output 6A32NC
A16Auxiliary Output 7A33NC
A17Auxiliary Output 8A34Auxiliary Output 9-10, 14V Supply

Connector B: Signal / Power / Communications / Triggers / Knock

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

SL4 Connector B — looking into ECU connector.

SL4 Connector B — looking into ECU connector.

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1ECU 14V SupplyB18ECU Ground
B2Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0VB19Analog Input Channel 6
B3EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)B20Analog Input Channel 7
B4Ignition Switch InputB21Analog Input Channel 8
B5Crank Index Sensor +B22Analog Input Channel 9
B6Crank Index Sensor -B23Analog Input Channel 10
B7Sync Sensor +B24Knock 2 +
B8Sync Sensor -B25Knock 2 -
B9Shield (Crank/Sync/Knock)B26ECU Ground
B10Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceB27CAN 1H
B11Analog Input Channel 1B28CAN 1L
B12Analog Input Channel 2B29NC
B13Analog Input Channel 3B30NC
B14Analog Input Channel 4B31Ethernet Tx +
B15Analog Input Channel 5B32Ethernet Tx -
B16Knock 1 +B33Ethernet Rx +
B17Knock 1 -B34Ethernet Rx -

6.1 Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B10)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin B10 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Input (Pin A34)

Pin A34 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-10. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

7.0 Software

Emtron’s comprehensive Emtune tuning software is used to connect to the ECU.

  • Microsoft Windows™ 7-10 compatible
  • Free licence
  • Memory requirements: 0.5GB RAM
  • ECU connection using Ethernet, IPV4 protocol
  • Tuning and data analysis
  • PC and ECU data logging
  • Live pause and data playback
  • Advanced tuning functions
  • Diagnostics
  • Oscilloscope display

8.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron SL4 ECU1912-042
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15
Emtron Communications Cable, Superseal to Emtron Connector 200mm533-02

Appendix A – SL4 ECU Pinout Drawing

SL4 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into ECU. The Sensor 0V Ref pin is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors; connect direct to the sensor 0V pin.

SL4 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into ECU. The Sensor 0V Ref pin is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors; connect direct to the sensor 0V pin.

Appendix B – SL Series ECU Wiring

SL Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A21).

SL Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A21).

Appendix C – SL Series Ethernet Wiring

SL Series Ethernet pinout / tuning cable wiring (drawing A25).

SL Series Ethernet pinout / tuning cable wiring (drawing A25).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL6 ECU Datasheet

Emtron SL6 ECU

Emtron SL6 ECU

1.0 General

Emtron’s SL Series is built upon the outstanding foundation of the KV Series and features the same processing power and logging capacity. This lightweight package is housed in a Billet Aluminium Enclosure and features a 68-pin connector system which is still a very high I/O count. The SL6 ECU will support up to 8 Channels of fully sequential Fuel and Ignition. Up to 32MB permanent memory for on-board logging is available, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control, Knock control up to 2 channels using digital filter technology, High Speed Ethernet communications and 3-axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 290mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 120 mm x 130 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 470g
  • Connector system: 68-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
    • Pin diameter: 1 mm
    • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
    • Connector A: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal
    • Connector B: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors
  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)
  • 32MB ECU logging memory
    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage
    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank Index and Sync sensor inputs
    • Includes Digital Inputs 1-4
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor
    • Range 40 - 115.0 kPa
  • 3-Axis accelerometer
    • 16-Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

2.0 Outputs

6x Port Injector Outputs — high ohm

  • 70V clamping
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

6x Ignition Outputs

  • Adjustable TTL Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

10x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW), dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.
  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz
  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs
    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “ECU Supply” pin B1 connector B
    • Auxiliary 9-10 Flywheel to the “ECU 9-12 Supply” pin A34 connector A
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected

Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit
  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-10: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together in H-bridge configuration for DC motor control (DBW)

1x EFI Relay Output

  • Low Side Driver for relay control. Current limited to 200mA (Output will switch ON when Ignition Switch Input (B4) is greater than 4V)

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

3.0 Inputs

10x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-10
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V analog input. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground

6x Digital/Speed Inputs/Switched Inputs

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up to 30.0kHz on all 6 channels
  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible on DI 1-4 with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Hall effect sensor only on DI 5-6 with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V on DI 1-4
  • Fixed frequency-based arming thresholds on DI 5-6. Rising = 1.2V, Falling = 1.0V.
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1-4.
  • ON/OFF switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 6 channels to 10V
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

2x Knock Inputs

  • 2 Independent knock input channels
  • Using Bosch, Digital Knock Integrated Circuit Technology with programmable digital filter coefficients
  • Center frequency configurable from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Bandwidth window from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman
  • Gain control (x1, x2, x4, x8)
  • Cylinder selectable knock input
  • Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc)

1x Dedicated Ignition Switch Input

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 4V the EFI Relay output (D9) will switch ON)

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

4.0 Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies power to Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers

1x Auxiliary 9-10 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9-10. (See the SL Series Power Distribution Wiring for more information on how this should be wired. Also see Section 6.1)

1x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 250mA

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 400mA

2x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 30A

1x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection (See note in Section 6.1)

NoteNOTE The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

5.0 Communications

  • 1x High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps / 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages

6.0 SL6 Pinout

Connector A: Injection / Ignition / Auxiliary Outputs

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

SL6 Connector A — looking into ECU connector.

SL6 Connector A — looking into ECU connector.

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 1A18Auxiliary Output 9
A2Injection Channel 2A19Auxiliary Output 10
A3Injection Channel 3A20Digital Input 1
A4Injection Channel 4A21Digital Input 2
A5Injection Channel 5A22Digital Input 3
A6Injection Channel 6A23Digital Input 4
A7NCA24Digital Input 5
A8NCA25Digital Input 6
A9Sensor Supply 8VA26Ignition Channel 1
A10Auxiliary Output 1A27Ignition Channel 2
A11Auxiliary Output 2A28Ignition Channel 3
A12Auxiliary Output 3A29Ignition Channel 4
A13Auxiliary Output 4A30Ignition Channel 5
A14Auxiliary Output 5A31Ignition Channel 6
A15Auxiliary Output 6A32NC
A16Auxiliary Output 7A33NC
A17Auxiliary Output 8A34Auxiliary Output 9-10, 14V Supply

NC = No Connect

Connector B: Signal / Power / Communications / Triggers / Knock

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

SL6 Connector B — looking into ECU connector.

SL6 Connector B — looking into ECU connector.

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1ECU 14V SupplyB18ECU Ground
B2Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0VB19Analog Input Channel 6
B3EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)B20Analog Input Channel 7
B4Ignition Switch InputB21Analog Input Channel 8
B5Crank Index Sensor +B22Analog Input Channel 9
B6Crank Index Sensor -B23Analog Input Channel 10
B7Sync Sensor +B24Knock 2 +
B8Sync Sensor -B25Knock 2 -
B9Shield (Crank/Sync/Knock)B26ECU Ground
B10Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceB27CAN 1H
B11Analog Input Channel 1B28CAN 1L
B12Analog Input Channel 2B29CAN 2H
B13Analog Input Channel 3B30CAN 2L
B14Analog Input Channel 4B31Ethernet Tx +
B15Analog Input Channel 5B32Ethernet Tx -
B16Knock 1 +B33Ethernet Rx +
B17Knock 1 -B34Ethernet Rx -

6.1 Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B10)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin B10 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Input (Pin A34)

Pin A34 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-10. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

7.0 Software

Emtron’s comprehensive Emtune tuning software is used to connect to the ECU.

  • Microsoft Windows™ 7-10 compatible
  • Free licence
  • Memory requirements: 0.5GB RAM
  • ECU connection using Ethernet, IPV4 protocol
  • Tuning and data analysis
  • PC and ECU data logging
  • Live pause and data playback
  • Advanced tuning functions
  • Diagnostics
  • Oscilloscope display

8.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron SL6 ECU1912-062
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15
Emtron Communications Cable, Superseal to Emtron Connector 200mm533-02

Appendix A – SL6 ECU Pinout Drawing

SL6 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into ECU. The Sensor 0V Ref pin is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors; connect direct to the sensor 0V pin.

SL6 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into ECU. The Sensor 0V Ref pin is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors; connect direct to the sensor 0V pin.

Appendix B – SL Series ECU Wiring

SL Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A21).

SL Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A21).

Appendix C – SL Series Ethernet Wiring

SL Series Ethernet pinout / tuning cable wiring (drawing A25).

SL Series Ethernet pinout / tuning cable wiring (drawing A25).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL8 ECU Datasheet

Emtron SL8 ECU

Emtron SL8 ECU

1.0 General

Emtron’s SL Series is built upon the outstanding foundation of the KV Series and features the same processing power and logging capacity. This lightweight package is housed in a Billet Aluminium Enclosure and features a 68-pin connector system which is still a very high I/O count. The SL8 ECU will support up to 8 Channels of fully sequential Fuel and Ignition. Up to 32MB permanent memory for on-board logging is available, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control, Knock control up to 2 channels using digital filter technology, High Speed Ethernet communications and 3-axis G-force sensing to name a few.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 290mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 120 mm x 130 mm x 27 mm
  • Weight: 470g
  • Connector system: 68-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
    • Pin diameter: 1 mm
    • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
    • Connector A: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal
    • Connector B: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors
  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)
  • 32MB ECU logging memory
    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage
    • Sampling at 100k samples/second
    • Includes Crank Index and Sync sensor inputs
    • Includes Digital Inputs 1-4
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor
    • Range 40 - 115.0 kPa
  • 3-Axis accelerometer
    • 16-Bit resolution
    • +2g/+4g/+8g dynamically selectable full-scale
    • Output data rate 500Hz

2.0 Outputs

8x Port Injector Outputs — high ohm

  • 70V clamping
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

8x Ignition Outputs

  • Adjustable TTL Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control)

10x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW), dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.
  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 15 kHz
  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs
    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “ECU Supply” pin B1 connector B
    • Auxiliary 9-10 Flywheel to the “ECU 9-12 Supply” pin A34 connector A
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected

Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit
  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-8: High Side 4A continuous, 9A limit

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-10: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together in H-bridge configuration for DC motor control (DBW)

1x EFI Relay Output

  • Low Side Driver for relay control. Current limited to 200mA (Output will switch ON when Ignition Switch Input (B4) is greater than 4V)

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection

3.0 Inputs

10x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-10
  • Accepts a 0.000 - 5.000V analog input. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit)
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground

8x Digital/Speed Inputs/Switched Inputs

  • Frequency range from 0.0Hz up to 30.0kHz on all 8 channels
  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible on DI 1-4 with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Hall effect sensor only on DI 5-8 with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • Independent programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V on DI 1-4
  • Fixed frequency-based arming thresholds on DI 5-8. Rising = 1.2V, Falling = 1.0V.
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed and other frequency-based signals
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1-4.
  • ON/OFF switched inputs: AC request, Launch enable, cruise switch, table control switching etc with arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 20.0V analog input. Resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit)
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on all 8 channels to 10V
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V

2x Knock Inputs with configurable Frequency and Gain

  • Using Bosch digital knock integrated circuit technology
  • Selectable center frequency from 500Hz - 25kHz
  • Selectable bandwidth from 100Hz - 5kHz
  • Selectable digital filter window; Hamming or Blackman

1x Dedicated Ignition Switch Input

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 4V the EFI Relay output (D9) will switch ON)

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 39k ohms to ground

4.0 Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • 6V - 22.0V Range
  • Supplies ECU power
  • Supplies power to Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers

1x Auxiliary 9-10 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited)
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9-10. (See the SL Series Power Distribution Wiring for more information on how this should be wired. Also see Section 6.1)

1x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 250mA

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 400mA

2x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 30A

1x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection (See note in Section 6.1)

NoteNOTE The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

5.0 Communications

  • 1x high speed Ethernet 100Mbps
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps / 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages.

6.0 SL8 Pinout

Connector A: Injection / Ignition / Auxiliary Outputs

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

SL8 Connector A — looking into ECU connector.

SL8 Connector A — looking into ECU connector.

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 1A18Auxiliary Output 9
A2Injection Channel 2A19Auxiliary Output 10
A3Injection Channel 3A20Digital Input 1
A4Injection Channel 4A21Digital Input 2
A5Injection Channel 5A22Digital Input 3
A6Injection Channel 6A23Digital Input 4
A7Injection Channel 7A24Digital Input 5
A8Injection Channel 8A25Digital Input 6
A9Sensor Supply 8VA26Ignition Channel 1
A10Auxiliary Output 1A27Ignition Channel 2
A11Auxiliary Output 2A28Ignition Channel 3
A12Auxiliary Output 3A29Ignition Channel 4
A13Auxiliary Output 4A30Ignition Channel 5
A14Auxiliary Output 5A31Ignition Channel 6
A15Auxiliary Output 6A32Ignition Channel 7 / Digital Input 7
A16Auxiliary Output 7A33Ignition Channel 8 / Digital Input 8
A17Auxiliary Output 8A34Auxiliary Output 9-10, 14V Supply

Connector B: Signal / Power / Communications / Triggers / Knock

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

SL8 Connector B — looking into ECU connector.

SL8 Connector B — looking into ECU connector.

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1ECU 14V SupplyB18ECU Ground
B2Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0VB19Analog Input Channel 6
B3EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)B20Analog Input Channel 7
B4Ignition Switch InputB21Analog Input Channel 8
B5Crank Index Sensor +B22Analog Input Channel 9
B6Crank Index Sensor -B23Analog Input Channel 10
B7Sync Sensor +B24Knock 2 +
B8Sync Sensor -B25Knock 2 -
B9Shield (Crank/Sync/Knock)B26ECU Ground
B10Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceB27CAN 1H
B11Analog Input Channel 1B28CAN 1L
B12Analog Input Channel 2B29CAN 2H
B13Analog Input Channel 3B30CAN 2L
B14Analog Input Channel 4B31Ethernet Tx +
B15Analog Input Channel 5B32Ethernet Tx -
B16Knock 1 +B33Ethernet Rx +
B17Knock 1 -B34Ethernet Rx -

6.1 Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B10)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin B10 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Input (Pin A34)

Pin A34 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-10. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

7.0 Software

Emtron’s comprehensive Emtune tuning software is used to connect to the ECU.

  • Microsoft Windows™ 7-10 compatible
  • Free licence
  • Memory requirements: 0.5GB RAM
  • ECU connection using Ethernet, IPV4 protocol
  • Tuning and data analysis
  • PC and ECU data logging
  • Live pause and data playback
  • Advanced tuning functions
  • Diagnostics
  • Oscilloscope display

8.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron SL8 ECU1912-082
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15
Emtron Communications Cable, Superseal to Emtron Connector 200mm533-02

Appendix A – SL8 ECU Pinout Drawing

SL8 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into ECU. The Sensor 0V Ref pin is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors; connect direct to the sensor 0V pin.

SL8 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into ECU. The Sensor 0V Ref pin is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors; connect direct to the sensor 0V pin.

Appendix B – SL Series ECU Wiring

SL Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A21).

SL Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A21).

Appendix C – SL Series Ethernet Wiring

SL Series Ethernet pinout / tuning cable wiring (drawing A25).

SL Series Ethernet pinout / tuning cable wiring (drawing A25).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Shadow 8 ECU Datasheet

Emtron Shadow 8 ECU

Emtron Shadow 8 ECU

1.0 General

The Shadow ECU range is built upon the outstanding foundation of the KV Series. This lightweight package is housed in a Billet Aluminium Enclosure and features a comprehensive 68-pin connector system. The Shadow ECU will support up to 8 Channels of fully sequential Fuel and Ignition. Up to 16MB permanent memory for on-board logging is available, DBW control, Knock control up to 2 channels using digital filter technology, and High-Speed USB C communications.

Functionality Count

  • 8x Injection
  • 8x Ignition
  • 10x Analog Input
  • 10x Digital Inputs
  • 12x Auxiliary Outputs
  • 2x CAN buses
  • 2x Knock Inputs
  • 2x GDI Pump Logic Control using Aux 11/12
  • 1x DBW Control (Aux 9/10)

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 290mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 152 mm x 139 mm x 26 mm
  • Weight: 520g
  • Connector system: 68-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts
    • Pin diameter: 1 mm
    • Current rating: maximum 15A per pin (wire gauge dependant)
    • Connector A: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal
    • Connector B: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal

Internal

  • 100MHz Processor
  • 16 MB ECU logging memory
    • Over 1200 channels available
    • 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate

2.0 Outputs

8x Port Injector Outputs — high ohm

  • 70V clamping.
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 6A Continuous, 10A Limit.
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected.
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control).

8x Ignition Outputs

  • Adjustable TTL Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA).
  • Outputs can be used for ground switching, 1A Continuous, 3A Limit.
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected.
  • No Flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control).

12x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and Variable Valve Timing Electric (VTiE), Drive by Wire (DBW), dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and many more.
  • All outputs have PWM control, maximum frequency = 10 kHz.
  • Flywheel diodes integrated into all outputs.
    • Auxiliary 1-8 Flywheel to the “Hot Supply” pin B1 connector B
    • Auxiliary 9-12 Flywheel to the “Aux 9-12 Supply” pin B26 connector B
  • All outputs are short circuit and over current protected.

Low Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 1-4: Low Side 4A continuous, 6A peak modulated, 8A limit.
  • Auxiliary 5-8: Low Side 2.5A continuous, 4A peak modulated, 5A limit.

High Side Drivers

  • Auxiliary 5-8: High Side 4A continuous, 8A limit.

Half Bridge Drivers

  • Auxiliary 9-12: Half Bridge 5A continuous and 8A limit. Can be used as Low Side, High Side or together in H-bridge configuration for DC motor control (DBW).

1x Shield Output

  • Connection for Trigger and Knock shielded cables. Short to battery protection.

3.0 Inputs

10x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs

  • Fully configurable including custom calibrations.
  • Switchable 1k ohm pull-up resistors on ANV 7-10.
  • Accepts a 0.0 - 5.000V Analog input. Resolution is 1.22mV (12-Bit).
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground.

10x Digital/Speed Inputs/Switched Inputs/Analog Inputs

  • Frequency Range from 0.0Hz up to 5.0kHz on channels 1-4.
  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible on DI 1-4, with programmable frequency-based arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 12.0V.
  • Hall effect sensor only on DI 5-8 with fixed frequency-based arming thresholds (1.45V).
  • Wheel speed, output shaft speed and other frequency-based signals.
  • VVT position(s) up to 4 channels available on DI 1-4, Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible.
  • DI1-10 all have ON/OFF switched control: AC request, Launch enable, Cruise switch, table control switching etc with arming threshold control, range 0.0 - 20.0V.
  • DI1-10 channels ALL accept a 0.0 - 20.0V Analog input voltage. Resolution is 4.88mV (10-Bit).
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistors on DI1-8 channels to 10V.
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 50V.
  • Input Impedance 110k ohms to ground.

2x Knock Inputs

  • 2 Independent knock input channels.
  • Digital Knock Integrated Circuit Technology with programmable Centre Frequency, Gain and Integrator Time Constant.
  • Centre frequency configurable from 1kHz - 20kHz.
  • Gain control from 0.1 to 2.0.
  • Cylinder selectable knock input.
  • Knock control available on ALL Ignition modes (Direct, Wasted, Distributor etc).

2x Crank Index and Sync Engine Decoding Inputs

  • Magnetic and Hall effect sensor compatible with programmable trigger edge(s)
  • “True” zero crossing detection on magnetic signals for precise engine position decoding.
  • Programmable independent arming threshold control from 0.1V to 12.0V
  • Switchable 4k7 ohm pull-up resistor to 5V
  • OEM patterns supported.
  • Maximum input signal amplitude +/- 80V
  • Input Impedance 100k ohms to ground.

1x Ignition Switch Input / DI10

  • 6.0 - 20.0V input used for EFI Relay Control. (With input > 6V the Internal Hold-power system turns the ECU ON using the HOT Supply). Refer to the document “Shadow 8 Power Supply Wiring”.

4.0 Voltage and Ground Supplies

1x ECU Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited).
  • 6V - 22.0V Range.
  • Supplies ECU power.
  • Supplies power to Auxiliary 1-8 High Side Drivers.

1x Auxiliary 9-12 Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited).
  • Power supply for Auxiliary channels 9-12. (See “Shadow Series Power Distribution Wiring” for more information on how this should be wired. Refer Appendix B).

1x Battery Constant Supply Input

  • 15.0A Max (pin limited).
  • ECU MUST always have constant power. Used by Auxiliary Flywheel diodes and for the ECU automated shutdown procedure.

1x 5.0V Sensor Supply

  • 5V Vref1 output current 250mA.

1x 8.0V Sensor Supply

  • Output current 400mA.

2x ECU Main Grounds

  • 15.0A per pin, total 30A.

1x Sensor 0V Reference

  • Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection (See note in Section 6.1).

NoteNOTE The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) is a specialised ground output for all Analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

5.0 Communications

  • 1x High Speed USB for tuning software connection.
  • 2x CAN 2.0B 1Mbps / 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages.

6.0 Shadow 8 Pinout

Connector A: Signal / Power / Communications / Triggers / Knock

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1ECU SupplyA18Analog Voltage 6
A2Sensor 8.0V Sensor SupplyA19Analog Voltage 7
A3Sensor 5.0V Sensor SupplyA20Analog Voltage 8
A40V Analog ReferenceA21Analog Voltage 9
A5Crank Position SensorA22Analog Voltage 10
A6Sync Position SensorA23CAN Bus 1 Low
A7Trigger GroundA24Knock 2 +ve
A8ShieldA25Knock 2 -ve
A9Ground 1A26Digital Input 1
A10Analog Voltage 1A27Digital Input 2
A11Analog Voltage 2A28Digital Input 3
A12Analog Voltage 3A29Digital Input 4
A13Analog Voltage 4A30Digital Input 5
A14Analog Voltage 5A31Digital Input 6
A15CAN Bus 1 HighA32CAN Bus 2 High
A16Knock 1 +veA33CAN Bus 2 Low
A17Knock 1 -veA34Ground 2

Connector B: Injection / Ignition / Auxiliary Outputs

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1Battery Constant (HOT) SupplyB18Digital Input 7
B2Injector Cylinder 1B19Digital Input 8
B3Injector Cylinder 2B20Digital Input 9
B4Injector Cylinder 3B21Digital Input 10 / Ignition Switch
B5Injector Cylinder 4B22Aux Output 9
B6Injector Cylinder 5B23Aux Output 10
B7Injector Cylinder 6B24Aux Output 11
B8Injector Cylinder 7B25Aux Output 12
B9Injector Cylinder 8B26Aux 9-12 Power Supply
B10Aux Output 1B27Ignition TTL Cylinder 1
B11Aux Output 2B28Ignition TTL Cylinder 2
B12Aux Output 3B29Ignition TTL Cylinder 3
B13Aux Output 4B30Ignition TTL Cylinder 4
B14Aux Output 5B31Ignition TTL Cylinder 5
B15Aux Output 6B32Ignition TTL Cylinder 6
B16Aux Output 7B33Ignition TTL Cylinder 7
B17Aux Output 8B34Ignition TTL Cylinder 8

Digital Inputs Summary

PinChannel NamePullup ControlType
A26Digital Input 1 (Wheel Speed)YesMag or Hall 0-5kHz, OR Analog 0-20V, Adj Arm
A27Digital Input 2 (Wheel Speed)YesMag or Hall 0-5kHz, OR Analog 0-20V, Adj Arm
A28Digital Input 3 (Wheel Speed)YesMag or Hall 0-5kHz, OR Analog 0-20V, Adj Arm
A29Digital Input 4 (Wheel Speed)YesMag or Hall 0-5kHz, OR Analog 0-20V, Adj Arm
A30Digital Input 5YesHall 0-5kHz, Analog 0-20V, Fixed Arm 1.45V, SENT Protocol compatible
A31Digital Input 6YesHall 0-5kHz, Analog 0-20V, Fixed Arm 1.45V, SENT Protocol compatible
B18Digital Input 7YesHall 0-5kHz, Analog 0-20V, Fixed Arm 1.45V, SENT Protocol compatible
B19Digital Input 8YesHall 0-5kHz, Analog 0-20V, Fixed Arm 1.45V, SENT Protocol compatible
B20Digital Input 9No PullupAnalog 0-20V
B21Digital Input 10 / Ignition SwitchNo PullupAnalog 0-20V

Auxiliary Output Summary

PinChannel NameDrive TypeModeDescription
B10Aux Output 1LS Only Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B11Aux Output 2LS Only Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B12Aux Output 3LS Only Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B13Aux Output 4LS Only Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B14Aux Output 5LS or HS Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B15Aux Output 6LS or HS Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B16Aux Output 7LS or HS Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B17Aux Output 8LS or HS Inductive or ResistiveON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid
B22Aux Output 9Half Bridge DBW +PWMEngine Main Throttle
B23Aux Output 10Half Bridge DBW -PWMEngine Main Throttle
B24Aux Output 11Half BridgeON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid or GDI Pump Ctrl Signal
B25Aux Output 12Half BridgeON/OFF or PWMRelay or Solenoid or GDI Pump Ctrl Signal

Analog Input Pull-up Summary

PinChannel NamePullup Control
A10Analog Input Channel 1No
A11Analog Input Channel 2No
A12Analog Input Channel 3No
A13Analog Input Channel 4No
A14Analog Input Channel 5No
A18Analog Input Channel 6No
A19Analog Input Channel 7Yes
A20Analog Input Channel 8Yes
A21Analog Input Channel 9Yes
A22Analog Input Channel 10Yes

6.1 Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin A4)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current Analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin A4 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all Analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins, for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Frequency based sensor 0V pins should be connected to the ECU ground.

Aux 9-12 (Half Bridge) Driver Power Supply Input (Pin B26)

Pin B26 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-12. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Battery Constant Supply Input (Pin B1)

  • Pin B1 should ALWAYS be connected to a constant 12V supply. (NOTE: The ECU draws zero current once completely shut down.)
  • ALL Auxiliary flywheel control is directed to this pin.
  • Constant power to this pin allows the ECU to control its power-down sequence. See “Shadow Series Power Distribution Wiring” for more information on how this should be wired and configured. Refer Appendix B.

Ignition TTL Outputs

WarningWARNING DO NOT connect these outputs directly to a coil. These Outputs are TTL or 0 – 7V which are designed to drive the input of an Ignitor. Connection directly to a coil will permanently damage the ECU!!

7.0 Software

Comprehensive Emtune tuning software is used to connect to the ECU.

  • Microsoft Windows™ 7-11 compatible
  • Free licence
  • Memory requirements: 0.5GB RAM
  • ECU connection using USB C
  • Tuning and data analysis
  • PC and ECU data logging
  • Live pause and data playback
  • Advanced tuning functions
  • Diagnostics

8.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron Shadow ECU1908-082
Emtron USB Tuning Cable (1.5m)

Appendix A – Shadow 8 ECU Pinout Drawing

Shadow 8 ECU pinout — Connector A (signal/power) and Connector B (injection/ignition/aux), looking into ECU. Note the Sensor 0V Ref ground, the TTL ignition outputs, and the constant HOT supply requirement.

Shadow 8 ECU pinout — Connector A (signal/power) and Connector B (injection/ignition/aux), looking into ECU. Note the Sensor 0V Ref ground, the TTL ignition outputs, and the constant HOT supply requirement.

Appendix B – Shadow Series ECU Wiring

Shadow Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A41).

Shadow Series ECU typical wiring (drawing A41).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

YXZ1000R Plugin ECU Datasheet

Emtron YXZ1000R Plugin ECU.

Emtron YXZ1000R Plugin ECU.

1.0 General

Emtron’s YXZ1000R Plugin ECU is built upon the outstanding foundation of the SL Series and features the same processing power and logging capacity. This lightweight package is housed in a Billet Aluminium Enclosure, designed to be plugged into the OEM harness to allow for a true “Plug and Play” install. As few inputs & outputs remain unused for User definition, CAN Bus 2 is made available providing additional I/O expandability. Other features include up to 32MB permanent memory for on-board logging, 4-channel oscilloscope function, DBW control, Knock control using digital filter technology, High Speed Ethernet communications and 3-axis G-force sensing.

Power Supply

  • Operating voltage: 6.0 to 22.0 Volts DC (ECU shutdowns at 24.0V)
  • Operating current: 290mA at 14.0V (excluding sensor and load currents)
  • Reverse battery protection via external fuse
  • “Smart” battery transient protection

Operating Temperature

  • Max operating range: -30 to 110°C (-22 to 230°F)
  • Recommended operating range: -30 to 85°C (-22 to 185°F)

Physical

  • Aluminium 6061 grade CNC billet enclosure
  • Enclosure size 120 × 130 × 27 mm
  • Weight: 470g
  • Connector system: 68-way Super Seal waterproof connectors with gold plated contacts (1mm pin, max 15A per pin). Connector A: 34 pin Key 2 Super Seal; Connector B: 34 pin Key 1 Super Seal.

Internal

  • Dual 100MHz processors
  • 500Mb DDR RAM (0.5Gb)
  • 32MB ECU logging memory — over 1200 channels available, 1Hz to 500Hz logging rate
  • Oscilloscope 4-channel function with 32MB storage (100k samples/second; includes Crank Index, Sync and Digital Inputs 1-4)
  • On-Board barometric pressure sensor (40 - 115.0 kPa)
  • 3-Axis accelerometer (16-Bit, +2g/+4g/+8g selectable, 500Hz output)

2.0 Outputs

8x Port Injector Outputs — high ohm

  • 70V clamping; ground switching 6A Continuous, 10A Limit; short circuit & over current protected; no flywheel diodes (external diode(s) required for VVT control).

4x Ignition Outputs

  • 3× Ignition outputs for direct-to-coil wiring (IGBT)
  • 1× Adjustable TTL Ignition drive current (35mA or 70mA)
  • Ground switching 1A Continuous, 3A Limit; short circuit & over current protected; no flywheel diodes.

10x Auxiliary Outputs

  • Drive by Wire (DBW), dual boost control, gearshift solenoids, stepper motor and more. PWM control, max 15 kHz. Flywheel diodes integrated (Aux 1-8 to ECU Supply pin B1; Aux 9-10 to ECU 9-12 Supply pin A34). Short circuit & over current protected.
  • Low Side: Aux 1-4 = 4A continuous / 6A peak / 8A limit; Aux 5-8 = 2.5A continuous / 4A peak / 5A limit.
  • High Side: Aux 1-8 = 4A continuous, 9A limit.
  • Half Bridge: Aux 9-10 = 5A continuous, 8A limit (Low Side, High Side or paired H-bridge for DBW).

3.0 Inputs

12x Analog Voltage/Temperature Inputs — Fully configurable with custom calibrations; switchable 1k ohm pull-ups on ANV 7-12; 0.0 - 5.000V, 1.22mV (12-Bit); 100k Ohms to ground.

14x Digital/Speed/Switched Inputs — 0.0Hz to 30.0kHz on channels 1-8; Magnetic + Hall on DI 1-4 (programmable trigger edge, adjustable arming 0.0-12.0V); Hall only on DI 5-8 (fixed arming Rising 1.2V / Falling 1.0V); ON/OFF switched inputs; 0.0-20.0V analog, 4.88mV (10-Bit); switchable 4k7 pull-ups on all 12 channels to 10V; max ±80V.

1x Knock Input — 1 independent channel; Bosch Digital Knock IC with programmable filter coefficients; centre frequency 500Hz - 25kHz; bandwidth 100Hz - 5kHz; Hamming or Blackman window; gain x1/x2/x4/x8; cylinder selectable; available on ALL ignition modes.

1x Crank Index Engine Decoding Input — OEM Magnetic sensor compatible; “True” zero crossing detection; programmable arming 0.1V to 12.0V; OEM pattern supported; max ±80V; 39k ohms to ground.

4.0 Voltage and Ground Supplies

  • 2x ECU Supply Input — 15.0A Max (pin limited), 6V-22.0V, supplies ECU power and Auxiliary 1-10 High Side Drivers. (1× Dedicated battery power supply, 1× Ignition Power Supply.)
  • 1x 5.0V Sensor Supply — 5V Vref1, 250mA.
  • 4x ECU Main Grounds — 15.0A per pin, total 60A.
  • 1x Sensor 0V Reference — Analog Sensor 0V Reference with short to battery protection.

NoteNOTE The Sensor 0V Reference pin(s) are specialised ground outputs for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

5.0 ECU Channel Assignment

Injection

ECU ChannelFunction
Injection 1-3Primary Injector Cylinder 1-3
Injection 4Fuel Pump 1 (+Main relay)
Injection 5Cooling Fan 1
Injection 6User Output 3 - Park Belt Buzzer
Injection 7Start Relay Control
Injection 8User Output 2 - Air Induction Relay

Ignition

ECU ChannelFunction
Ignition 1-3Ignition Coil Cylinder 1-3
Ignition 4User Output 1 - Seat Belt Pilot Lamp

Analog Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Analog Voltage 1TPS
Analog Voltage 2Manifold Pressure – Bank 1 (Cyl 1 – Sync)
Analog Voltage 3Manifold Pressure
Analog Voltage 4Gear Voltage
Analog Voltage 5Lean Angle Sensor
Analog Voltage 6User Analog Input
Analog Voltage 7 (Pull-up)Engine Temperature
Analog Voltage 8 (Pull-up)Inlet Air Temperature
Analog Voltage 9 (Pull-up)Trans ECU Current Feedback / User Analog Input
Analog Voltage 10 (Pull-up)Neutral Switch
Analog Voltage 11 (Pull-up)YXZ Differential Lock Rotary Switch 1
Analog Voltage 12 (Pull-up)YXZ Differential Lock Rotary Switch 2

Digital Inputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Digital Input 1Oil Pressure Switch
Digital Input 2Drive Speed / Vehicle Speed
Digital Input 3Battery Voltage Monitor
Digital Input 4User DI (Ethanol / Launch Sw)
Digital Input 5Start/Stop switch
Digital Input 6Clutch Switch
Digital Input 7YXZ Differential Servo Position 1
Digital Input 8YXZ Differential Servo Position 2
Digital Input 9YXZ Differential Servo Position 3
Digital Input 10YXZ Differential Switch 12
Digital Input 11YXZ Differential Switch 1
Digital Input 12YXZ Seat Belt Switch
Digital Input 13Handbrake Switch
Digital Input 14Brake Switch 1
Dedicated – Ign SwIgnition Switch
Internal G-ForceLateral / Longitudinal / Vertical G Force

Auxiliary Outputs

ECU ChannelFunction
Auxiliary 1YXZ Differential Lock relay 1
Auxiliary 2YXZ Differential Lock relay 2
Auxiliary 3Tacho (Used for drive to EPS & Trans)
Auxiliary 4PVC Solenoid (Paddle Model Only)
Auxiliary 5-8Idle Stepper Motor A1 / A2 / B1 / B2
Auxiliary 9-10Spare User Output
Auxiliary 11Fan Relay 2 (Paddle Model Only)
CAN BUS OEMCE Light
Internal EFI Relay CtrlEFI Relay Control
(No Pin Assignment)User Output 4 – Start Lockout

Crank / Cam

ECU ChannelFunction
Crank IndexCrank Sensor
Sync SensorManifold Pressure – Bank 1 (Cyl 1)

5.1 CAN Bus 2 Wiring

The ECU CAN Bus 2 is reserved for Emtron CAN Bus devices (ELC1/2, ETC4/ETC8M, EIC10/EIC16M). All these CAN devices share a common power, ground and CAN pinout using a 4-way DTM (Pin 1 Ground/BLACK, Pin 2 CAN Lo/GREEN, Pin 3 CAN Hi/YELLOW, Pin 4 12V/RED). Each CAN Device must be wired directly to the ECU Header Plug:

Table 3.2 — YXZ1000R ECU Header to CAN Device wiring

NameECU Header PinCAN Device 4-Way DTM
GroundPin A1/2 - ECU Ground (Splice)Pin 1
CAN 2 LoPin B19 (Pinned Directly)Pin 2
CAN 2 HiPin B13 (Pinned Directly)Pin 3
PowerPin B1 - 14V (Splice)Pin 4

Standard CAN bus precautions apply — twisted pair (min one twist per 40mm), minimise connectors, 120 ohm 0.25W termination at each END, stub length < 0.3m (ISO 11898).

5.1a Emtron CAN Gauge specific wiring

NameYXZ1000R ECU Header PinCAN Gauge Wire Colour
GroundPin A1/2 - ECU Ground (Splice)Black
CAN 2 LoPin B19 - Pinned Directly or add to CAN Bus 2Green
CAN 2 HiPin B13 - Pinned Directly or add to CAN Bus 2White
Power 14VPin B1 - 14V (Splice)Red
Illumination 14VN/A - Splice to Headlamp SwitchOrange

5.2 Sensor Wiring

5V VRef2 Sensor Supply (Pin B7 of ECU Header) — A 250mA 5V output designed to supply automotive sensors.

Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B16 of ECU Header) — Connect directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor. DO NOT connect the 0V Reference pin directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. DO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin (use Pin A1 or A2 in the ECU Header).

5.3 Ethanol Content Sensor Wiring

An Ethanol Content sensor can be wired into the ECU. The following channel assignment is recommended for the GM sensor:

GM Sensor PinoutYXZ1000R Plugin ECU PinDescription
Pin 1Pin B1 - 14VSupply - 14V
Pin 2Pin A1/2 - ECU GroundGround
Pin 3Pin B30 - DI 4Output. Temperature and Ethanol Content

NoteNOTE DO NOT connect the Ethanol Content sensor ground to the “Analog Sensor 0V Reference” — splice into the ECU Ground from Pin A1 or A2. (Ethanol Content: 50Hz = 0%, 150Hz = 100%. Fuel Temperature: 1ms = -40°C, 5ms = 125°C.) Set the Ethanol Sensor Input Source to DI 4 and the ECU will automatically decode the Ethanol Content and Fuel Temperature.

6.0 Communications

  • 1× High Speed Ethernet 100Mbps for tuning software connection
  • 2× CAN 2.0B 1Mbps / 6 Channels per node, total 128 messages

7.0 YXZ1000R Pinout

Connector A: Injection / Ignition / Auxiliary Outputs

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

YXZ1000R Connector A — looking into the ECU connector.

YXZ1000R Connector A — looking into the ECU connector.

PinOEM PinChannel NamePinOEM PinChannel Name
A135Power System Ground 1A1852Ignition Coil Cyl 3
A236Power System Ground 1A1953Emtron User Output (e.g. DBW +)
A337Primary Injector Cyl 3A2054Emtron User Output (e.g. DBW −)
A438Idle Stepper – W2 - AA2155Fuel Pump 1
A539Idle Stepper – W1 - BA2256Radiator Fan Relay 1
A640Idle Stepper – W2 - BA2357Hand Brake Switch
A741Idle Stepper – W1 - AA2458Brake Switch 1
A842PVC Solenoid Output (Paddle ONLY)A2559Starter Relay Control
A943Emtron User InputA2660Ignition Coil Cyl 2
A1044Ignition Coil Cyl 1A2761Primary Injector Cyl 2
A1145YXZ Differential Lock Relay 1A2862Primary Injector Cyl 1
A1246YXZ Differential Lock Relay 2A2963Emtron Knock 1+ Input
A1347Seat Belt Pilot LampA3064Emtron Knock 1- Input
A1448User Output 3 - Parking Brake BuzzerA3165Differential Servo Position 3
A1549Tacho - (Drive for EPS / Trans)A3266Clutch Switch (Non-paddle ONLY)
A1650Start/Stop SwitchA3367Trans ECU Current Feedback / Emtron User Input
A1751User Output 2 - Air Induction RelayA3468Battery Constant Voltage

Connector B: Signal / Power / Communications / Triggers / Knock

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

YXZ1000R Connector B — looking into the ECU connector.

YXZ1000R Connector B — looking into the ECU connector.

PinOEM PinChannel NamePinOEM PinChannel Name
B11ECU 14V SupplyB1818Control System Ground 2
B22YXZ Differential Switch 12B1919Emtron CAN 2 Low
B33YXZ Differential Lock Rotary Switch 1B2020YXZ Differential Servo Position 1
B44Engine TemperatureB2121Neutral Switch
B55Manifold Pressure – Bank 1 (Cyl 1)B2222Gear Position Sensor (Non-paddle)
B66Inlet Air TempB2323Lean Angle Sensor
B77Sensor 5V Power SourceB2424Speed Sensor
B88Crank Position SensorB2525YXZ Differential Lock Rotary Switch 2
B99CAN Bus Low (OEM)B2626Emtron Ethernet Tx +
B1010Control System Ground 1B2727Emtron Ethernet Tx −
B1111YXZ Differential Switch 1B2828YXZ Differential Servo Position 2
B1212Battery Voltage MonitorB2929YXZ Seat Belt Switch
B1313Emtron CAN 2 HighB3030User DI (Ethanol/Switch/Analog)
B1414Emtron Ethernet Rx +B3131Throttle Position 1
B1515Emtron Ethernet Rx −B3232Manifold Pressure
B1616Sensor System GroundB3333Oil Pressure Switch
B1717CAN Bus High (OEM)B3434Fan2 Relay (Paddle)

7.1 Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B16) — Connect directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor. DO NOT connect ECU pin B16 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; the sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

WarningWARNING Replacing the MAP Sensor for Boosted applications. The MAP sensor located on Cylinder 1 is used to synchronise the engine — do not replace this MAP sensor with an alternative item, as replacement will result in loss of 720 sync and engine start. When shifting to a boosted application, the correct MAP sensor to replace is located on Cylinder 2 (Input Channel AV3 – Manifold Pressure).

8.0 Software

Emtron’s comprehensive Emtune tuning software is used to connect to the ECU (Windows 7-10, free licence, 0.5GB RAM, Ethernet IPV4). Tuning and data analysis, PC and ECU data logging, live pause and playback, advanced tuning functions, diagnostics and oscilloscope display.

9.0 Ordering Information

ProductPart Number
Emtron YXZ ECU1609-252426
Emtron Ethernet Tuning Cable (1.5m)553-15
Emtron Communications Cable, Superseal to Emtron Connector 200mm533-02

Appendix A – YXZ1000R Series Ethernet Wiring

YXZ1000R Series Ethernet wiring / tuning cable pinout (drawing A26).

YXZ1000R Series Ethernet wiring / tuning cable pinout (drawing A26).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Wiring

Subsections of KV Series

KV8 Pinout Rev2

Image Image

Pin Descriptions

Connector A: Lambda (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel Name
A1NC
A2NC
A3NC
A4NC
A5NC
A6NC
A7NC
A8NC
A9NC
A10Lambda 1 Heater -
A11Lambda 2 Heater -
A12NC
A13NC
A14NC
A15NC
A16Lambda 1 Heater +
A17Lambda 2 Heater +
A18Lambda 1 Nernst Cell (Vs)
A19NC
A20Lambda 2 Cal Resistor (CalR)
A21Lambda 2 Nernst Cell (Vs)
A22Lambda 2 Pump Cell (Ip)
A23Lambda 2 Virtual Ground (VGnd)
A24Lambda 1 Cal Resistor (CalR)
A25Lambda 1 Pump Cell (Ip)
A26Lambda 1 Virtual Ground (VGnd)
Connector B: Auxiliary Outputs /Fuel/Ignition/Ground (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1Injection Channel 1B18Auxiliary Output 9
B2Injection Channel 2B19Auxiliary Output 10
B3Injection Channel 3B20Auxiliary Output 11
B4Injection Channel 4B21Auxiliary Output 12
B5Injection Channel 5B22Auxiliary Output 13
B6Injection Channel 6B23Auxiliary Output 14
B7Injection Channel 7B24Auxiliary Output 15
B8Injection Channel 8B25Auxiliary Output 16
B9ECU GroundB26Ignition Channel 1
B10Auxiliary Output 1B27Ignition Channel 2
B11Auxiliary Output 2B28Ignition Channel 3
B12Auxiliary Output 3B29Ignition Channel 4
B13Auxiliary Output 4B30Ignition Channel 5
B14Auxiliary Output 5B31Ignition Channel 6
B15Auxiliary Output 6B32Ignition Channel 7
B16Auxiliary Output 7B33Ignition Channel 8
B17Auxiliary Output 8B34ECU Ground
Connector C: Signal (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

     **Looking into ECU connector**
PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
C1ECU GroundC18Digital Input 9
C2Analog Input Channel 1C19Digital Input 10
C3Analog Input Channel 2C20Digital Input 11
C4Analog Input Channel 3C21Digital Input 12
C5Analog Input Channel 4C22Digital Input 13
C6Analog Input Channel 5C23Digital Input 14
C7Analog Input Channel 6C24Analog Input Channel 16
C8Analog Input Channel 7C25Analog Sensor 0V Reference
C9Analog Input Channel 8C26ECU Ground
C10Analog Input Channel 9C27Digital Input 1
C11Analog Input Channel 10C28Digital Input 2
C12Analog Input Channel 11C29Digital Input 3
C13Analog Input Channel 12C30Digital Input 4
C14Analog Input Channel 13C31Digital Input 5
C15Analog Input Channel 14C32Digital Input 6
C16Analog Input Channel 15C33Digital Input 7
C17Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceC34Digital Input 8
Connector D: Power/Communications/Triggers/Knock (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

     **Looking into ECU connector**
PinChannel Name
D1ECU 14V Supply
D2Auxiliary Output 13-16 14V Supply
D3Sensor Supply 8V
D4Crank Index Sensor +
D5Crank Index Sensor -
D6Sync Sensor +
D7Sync Sensor -
D8CAN 1H
D9EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)
D10CAN 2H
D11Knock 1 +
D12Knock 1 -
D13Shield (Crank/Cam/ Knock)
D14CAN 1L
D15Ignition Switch Input
D16CAN 2L
D17Knock 2 +
D18Knock 2 -
D19Analog Output (0.0 - 5.0V)
D20Auxiliary Output 9-12 14V Supply
D21Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0V
D22Sensor Supply Vref2: 5.0V
D23Ethernet Tx +
D24Ethernet Tx -
D25Ethernet Rx +
D26Ethernet Rx -

Important Notes

Auxiliary Output Channels 13-16

These are high current Half bridge drivers which switch either to ground or 14V i.e. they do not have a high impedance or OFF state. When the ECU is powered OFF these Auxiliary Channels by default will be switching to ground. This means:

  1. Solenoids or relays connected to these outputs should not use a constant or hot battery feed.
  2. During the ECU powerup sequence, any solenoid or relay connected to these outputs should have a managed power feed to avoid momentary switching during powerup.

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin C17, C25)

These pins should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pins C17, C25 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Inputs (Pin D20, D2)

Pin D20 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-12. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Pin D2 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 13-16. Power must be supplied to this pin for these Auxiliary channels to operate correctly.

.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV12 Pinout Rev2

Image Image

Pin Descriptions

Connector A: Lambda/Injection/Ignition (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 9
A2Injection Channel 10
A3Injection Channel 11
A4Injection Channel 12
A5NC
A6NC
A7NC
A8Ignition Channel 9
A9Ignition Channel 10
A10Lambda 1 Heater -
A11Lambda 2 Heater -
A12NC
A13NC
A14Ignition Channel 11
A15Ignition Channel 12
A16Lambda 1 Heater +
A17Lambda 2 Heater +
A18Lambda 1 Nernst Cell (Vs)
A19ECU Ground
A20Lambda 2 Cal Resistor (CalR)
A21Lambda 2 Nernst Cell (Vs)
A22Lambda 2 Pump Cell (Ip)
A23Lambda 2 Virtual Ground (VGnd)
A24Lambda 1 Cal Resistor (CalR)
A25Lambda 1 Pump Cell (Ip)
A26Lambda 1 Virtual Ground (VGnd)
Connector B: Auxiliary Outputs /Fuel/Ignition/Ground (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1Injection Channel 1B18Auxiliary Output 9
B2Injection Channel 2B19Auxiliary Output 10
B3Injection Channel 3B20Auxiliary Output 11
B4Injection Channel 4B21Auxiliary Output 12
B5Injection Channel 5B22Auxiliary Output 13
B6Injection Channel 6B23Auxiliary Output 14
B7Injection Channel 7B24Auxiliary Output 15
B8Injection Channel 8B25Auxiliary Output 16
B9ECU GroundB26Ignition Channel 1
B10Auxiliary Output 1B27Ignition Channel 2
B11Auxiliary Output 2B28Ignition Channel 3
B12Auxiliary Output 3B29Ignition Channel 4
B13Auxiliary Output 4B30Ignition Channel 5
B14Auxiliary Output 5B31Ignition Channel 6
B15Auxiliary Output 6B32Ignition Channel 7
B16Auxiliary Output 7B33Ignition Channel 8
B17Auxiliary Output 8B34ECU Ground
Connector C: Signal (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
C1ECU GroundC18Digital Input 9
C2Analog Input Channel 1C19Digital Input 10
C3Analog Input Channel 2C20Digital Input 11
C4Analog Input Channel 3C21Digital Input 12
C5Analog Input Channel 4C22Digital Input 13
C6Analog Input Channel 5C23Digital Input 14
C7Analog Input Channel 6C24Analog Input Channel 16
C8Analog Input Channel 7C25Analog Sensor 0V Reference
C9Analog Input Channel 8C26ECU Ground
C10Analog Input Channel 9C27Digital Input 1
C11Analog Input Channel 10C28Digital Input 2
C12Analog Input Channel 11C29Digital Input 3
C13Analog Input Channel 12C30Digital Input 4
C14Analog Input Channel 13C31Digital Input 5
C15Analog Input Channel 14C32Digital Input 6
C16Analog Input Channel 15C33Digital Input 7
C17Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceC34Digital Input 8
Connector D: Power/Communications/Triggers/Knock (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel Name
D1ECU 14V Supply
D2Auxiliary Output 13-16 14V Supply
D3Sensor Supply 8V
D4Crank Index Sensor +
D5Crank Index Sensor -
D6Sync Sensor +
D7Sync Sensor -
D8CAN 1H
D9EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)
D10CAN 2H
D11Knock 1 +
D12Knock 1 -
D13Shield (Crank/Cam/ Knock)
D14CAN 1L
D15Ignition Switch Input
D16CAN 2L
D17Knock 2 +
D18Knock 2 -
D19Analog Output (0.0 - 5.0V)
D20Auxiliary Output 9-12 14V Supply
D21Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0V
D22Sensor Supply Vref2: 5.0V
D23Ethernet Tx +
D24Ethernet Tx -
D25Ethernet Rx +
D26Ethernet Rx -

Important Notes

Auxiliary Output Channels 13-16

These are high current Half bridge drivers which switch either to ground or 14V i.e. they do not have a high impedance or OFF state. When the ECU is powered OFF these Auxiliary Channels by default will be switching to ground. This means:

  1. Solenoids or relays connected to these outputs should not use a constant or hot battery feed.
  2. During the ECU powerup sequence, any solenoid or relay connected to these outputs should have a managed power feed to avoid momentary switching during powerup.

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin C17, C25)

These pins should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pins C17, C25 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Inputs (Pin D20, D2)

Pin D20 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-12. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Pin D2 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 13-16. Power must be supplied to this pin for these Auxiliary channels to operate correctly.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV16 Pinout Rev2

Image Image

Pin Descriptions

Connector A: Lambda/Injection/Ignition (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 9
A2Injection Channel 10
A3Injection Channel 11
A4Injection Channel 12
A5Injection Channel 13
A6Injection Channel 14
A7Injection Channel 15
A8Ignition Channel 9
A9Ignition Channel 10
A10Lambda 1 Heater -
A11Lambda 2 Heater -
A12Injection Channel 16
A13ECU Ground
A14Ignition Channel 11
A15Ignition Channel 12
A16Lambda 1 Heater +
A17Lambda 2 Heater +
A18Lambda 1 Nernst Cell (Vs)
A19ECU Ground
A20Lambda 2 Cal Resistor (CalR)
A21Lambda 2 Nernst Cell (Vs)
A22Lambda 2 Pump Cell (Ip)
A23Lambda 2 Virtual Ground (VGnd)
A24Lambda 1 Cal Resistor (CalR)
A25Lambda 1 Pump Cell (Ip)
A26Lambda 1 Virtual Ground (VGnd)
Connector B: Auxiliary Outputs /Fuel/Ignition/Ground (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1Injection Channel 1B18Auxiliary Output 9
B2Injection Channel 2B19Auxiliary Output 10
B3Injection Channel 3B20Auxiliary Output 11
B4Injection Channel 4B21Auxiliary Output 12
B5Injection Channel 5B22Auxiliary Output 13
B6Injection Channel 6B23Auxiliary Output 14
B7Injection Channel 7B24Auxiliary Output 15
B8Injection Channel 8B25Auxiliary Output 16
B9ECU GroundB26Ignition Channel 1
B10Auxiliary Output 1B27Ignition Channel 2
B11Auxiliary Output 2B28Ignition Channel 3
B12Auxiliary Output 3B29Ignition Channel 4
B13Auxiliary Output 4B30Ignition Channel 5
B14Auxiliary Output 5B31Ignition Channel 6
B15Auxiliary Output 6B32Ignition Channel 7
B16Auxiliary Output 7B33Ignition Channel 8
B17Auxiliary Output 8B34ECU Ground
Connector C: Signal (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
C1ECU GroundC18Digital Input 9
C2Analog Input Channel 1C19Digital Input 10
C3Analog Input Channel 2C20Digital Input 11
C4Analog Input Channel 3C21Digital Input 12
C5Analog Input Channel 4C22Digital Input 13
C6Analog Input Channel 5C23Digital Input 14
C7Analog Input Channel 6C24Analog Input Channel 16
C8Analog Input Channel 7C25Analog Sensor 0V Reference
C9Analog Input Channel 8C26ECU Ground
C10Analog Input Channel 9C27Digital Input 1
C11Analog Input Channel 10C28Digital Input 2
C12Analog Input Channel 11C29Digital Input 3
C13Analog Input Channel 12C30Digital Input 4
C14Analog Input Channel 13C31Digital Input 5
C15Analog Input Channel 14C32Digital Input 6
C16Analog Input Channel 15C33Digital Input 7
C17Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceC34Digital Input 8
Connector D: Power/Communications/Triggers/Knock (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel Name
D1ECU 14V Supply
D2Auxiliary Output 13-16 14V Supply
D3Sensor Supply 8V
D4Crank Index Sensor +
D5Crank Index Sensor -
D6Sync Sensor +
D7Sync Sensor -
D8CAN 1H
D9EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)
D10CAN 2H
D11Knock 1 +
D12Knock 1 -
D13Shield (Crank/Cam/ Knock)
D14CAN 1L
D15Ignition Switch Input
D16CAN 2L
D17Knock 2 +
D18Knock 2 -
D19Analog Output (0.0 - 5.0V)
D20Auxiliary Output 9-12 14V Supply
D21Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0V
D22Sensor Supply Vref2: 5.0V
D23Ethernet Tx +
D24Ethernet Tx -
D25Ethernet Rx +
D26Ethernet Rx -

Important Notes

Auxiliary Output Channels 13-16

These are high current Half bridge drivers which switch either to ground or 14V i.e. they do not have a high impedance or OFF state. When the ECU is powered OFF these Auxiliary Channels by default will be switching to ground. This means:

  1. Solenoids or relays connected to these outputs should not use a constant or hot battery feed.
  2. During the ECU powerup sequence, any solenoid or relay connected to these outputs should have a managed power feed to avoid momentary switching during powerup.

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin C17, C25)

These pins should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pins C17, C25 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Inputs (Pin D20, D2)

Pin D20 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-12. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Pin D2 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 13-16. Power must be supplied to this pin for these Auxiliary channels to operate correctly.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV16M Pinout

Image Image

Mating Connectors Loom Side (Deutsch Autosport AS Series; S = Socket#8202;)
Mating connector A AS616-35SN (Red)
Mating connector B AS616-26SN (Red)
Mating connector C AS616-35SA (Yellow)
Connector A: Injection/Ignition/Digital Inputs. (5.0A continuous current. Shell size 16, 55 Pin. 22 AWG)

Image Image

**Looking into ECU Connector**
PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
1Injection Channel 129Lambda 2 Heater +
2Injection Channel 230Lambda 2 Heater -
3Injection Channel 331Digital Input Ground Out
4Injection Channel 432Ignition Channel 1
5Injection Channel 533Ignition Channel 2
6Injection Channel 634Ignition Channel 3
7Injection Channel 735Ignition Channel 4
8Injection Channel 836Ignition Channel 5
9Injection Channel 937Ignition Channel 6
10Injection Channel 1038Ignition Channel 7
11Injection Channel 1139Ignition Channel 8
12Injection Channel 1240Ignition Channel 9
13Injection Channel 1341Ignition Channel 10
14Injection Channel 1442Ignition Channel 11
15Injection Channel 1543Ignition Channel 12
16Injection Channel 1644Digital Input 3
17Lambda 1 Nernst Cell (Vs)45Digital Input 2
18Lambda 1 Cal Resistor (CalR)46Digital Input 1
19Lambda 1 Pump Cell (Ip)47Digital Input 9
20Lambda 1 Virtual Ground (VGnd)48Digital Input 8
21Lambda 1 Heater +49Digital Input 7
22Lambda 1 Heater -50Digital Input 6
23Digital Input 1351Digital Input 5
24Digital Input 1452Digital Input 4
25Lambda 2 Pump Cell (Ip)53Digital Input 10
26Lambda 2 Virtual Ground (VGnd)54Digital Input 11
27Lambda 2 Nernst Cell (Vs)55Digital Input 12
28Lambda 2 Cal Resistor (CalR)
Connector B: Power/Ground/Auxiliary Outputs (7.5A continuous current. Shell size 16, 26 Pin. 20 AWG)

Image Image

Looking into ECU Connector

PinChannel Name
AECU 14V Supply
BECU 14V Supply
CECU 14V Supply
DECU Ground
EECU Ground
FAuxiliary Output 16
GAuxiliary Output 15
HAuxiliary Output 14
JAuxiliary Output 12
KAuxiliary Output 10
LAuxiliary Output 8
MAuxiliary Output 7
NAuxiliary Output 5
PAuxiliary Output 3
RAuxiliary Output 1
SAuxiliary Output 2
TECU 14V Supply
UECU Ground
VECU Ground
WAuxiliary Output 13
XAuxiliary Output 11
YAuxiliary Output 9
ZAuxiliary Output 6
aAuxiliary Output 4
bECU Ground
cECU Ground
Connector: C Signal. (5.0A continuous current. Shell size 16, 55 Pin. 22 AWG)

Image Image

     **Looking into ECU Connector**
PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
1Analog Input Channel 129Analog Sensor 0V Reference
2Analog Input Channel 230Analog Sensor 0V Reference
3Analog Input Channel 331Analog Sensor 0V Reference
4Analog Input Channel 432Knock 2 +
5Analog Input Channel 533Analog Out
6Analog Input Channel 634CAN 2L
7Analog Input Channel 735CAN 2H
8Analog Input Channel 836CAN 1L
9Analog Input Channel 937CAN 1H
10Analog Input Channel 1038Sensor Supply Vref2: 5.0V
11Analog Input Channel 1139Sensor Supply Vref2: 5.0V
12Analog Input Channel 1240Knock 1 -
13Analog Input Channel 1341Sync Sensor -
14Analog Input Channel 1442Sync Sensor +
15Analog Input Channel 1543Crank Index Sensor -
16Analog Input Channel 1644Crank Index Sensor +
17Analog Input Channel 1745Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0V
18Analog Input Channel 1846Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0V
19Analog Input Channel 1947Knock 1 +
20Analog Input Channel 2048Ethernet Tx +
21Analog Input Channel 2149Ethernet Tx -
22Analog Input Channel 2250Ethernet Rx +
23Analog Input Channel 2351Ethernet Rx -
24Analog Input Channel 2452Sensor Supply 8V
25Knock 2 -53Constant 14V Supply(Backup)
26SHIELD (Crank/Cam/ Knock)54Sensor Supply Vref3: 5.0V
27SHIELD (Crank/Cam/ Knock)55Sensor Supply Vref3: 5.0V
28Analog Sensor 0V Reference

Important Notes

Auxiliary Output Channels 13-16

These are high current Half bridge drivers which switch either to ground or 14V i.e. they do not have a high impedance or OFF state. When the ECU is powered OFF these Auxiliary Channels by default will be switching to ground. This means:

  1. Solenoids or relays connected to these outputs should not use a constant or hot battery feed.
  2. During the ECU powerup sequence, any solenoid or relay connected to these outputs should have a managed power feed to avoid momentary switching during powerup.

Constant 14V Supply/Backup (Pin C53)

This pin has two features:

1) Flywheeling for Auxiliary Channels 1-8.  Any Inductive energy will be sent to the “Constant 14V Supply” pin. To minimise any EMI and allow solenoid current recirculation to operate correctly this pin should be connected to a constant power supply.  If this pin is left unconnected the back EMF will be clamped at 45V.

2) Internal ECU EFI Relay function.  When power is removed from pins " ECU 14V Supply" the ECU automatically switches to the “Constant 14V Supply” to keep the ECU powered.   This will allow the ECU to complete critical tasks before shutting itself down (for example, DBW Self calibration and ECU Logging data storage).

To enable this function, set the EFI Relay Control Channel to “Internal EFI Relay Ctrl”

NOTE: With a Constant 14V supply wired, the ECU draws no additional current when OFF.

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin C28, C29, C30, C31)

As the name indicates these should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect these pins directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to this ground; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. Use either the Digital Input Ground Out pin (A31) or the main ECU ground.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV8 Pinout Rev1

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV12 Pinout Rev1

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV16 Pinout Rev1

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV Series Wiring Harness Specification

1.0 Introduction

This document contains the specification for the Emtron KV Series wiring harness.

  • Loom Length = 2.5 meters
  • Wire Type = AVSS

NoteNOTE Any unused pins or not-fitted wires MUST have blanking bungs fitted to the connector to keep the plug rated at its IP standard.

2.0 Connector A

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description26 Way / Key 2
Part Number3-1437290-8
Connector A — TE Superseal 26 Way / Key 2.

Connector A — TE Superseal 26 Way / Key 2.

2.1 Connector A Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
INJ 9A1Injector Channel 9Blue0.50
INJ 10A2Injector Channel 10Blue0.50
INJ 11A3Injector Channel 11Blue0.50
INJ 12A4Injector Channel 12Blue0.50
INJ 13A5Injector Channel 13Blue0.50
INJ 14A6Injector Channel 14Blue0.50
INJ 15A7Injector Channel 15Blue0.50
IGN 9A8Ignition Channel 9Yellow0.50
IGN 10A9Ignition Channel 10Yellow0.50
Lam 1 H-A10Lambda 1 Heater -Green0.50
Lam 2 H-A11Lambda 2 Heater -Green0.50
INJ 16A12Injector Channel 16Blue0.50
GNDA13Power GroundBlack0.85
IGN 11A14Ignition Channel 11Yellow0.50
IGN 12A15Ignition Channel 12Yellow0.50
Lam 1 H+A16Lambda 1 Heater 12VGreen0.50
Lam 2 H+A17Lambda 2 Heater 12VGreen0.50
LAM 1 NernstA18Lambda 1 Nernst CellGreen0.50
GNDA19Power GroundBlack0.85
LAM 2 Cal RA20Lambda 2 Cal Res.Green0.50
LAM 2 NernstA21Lambda 2 Nernst CellGreen0.50
LAM 2 PumpA22Lambda 2 Pump CurrentGreen0.50
LAM 2 VGNDA23Lambda 2 Virtual GndGreen0.50
LAM 1 Cal RA24Lambda 1 Cal Res.Green0.50
LAM 1 PumpA25Lambda 1 Pump CurrentGreen0.50
LAM 1 VGNDA26Lambda 1 Virtual GndGreen0.50

3.0 Connector B

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description34 Way / Key 2
Part Number4-1437290-1
Connector B — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 2.

Connector B — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 2.

3.1 Connector B Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
INJ 1B1Injector Channel 1Blue0.50
INJ 2B2Injector Channel 2Blue0.50
INJ 3B3Injector Channel 3Blue0.50
INJ 4B4Injector Channel 4Blue0.50
INJ 5B5Injector Channel 5Blue0.50
INJ 6B6Injector Channel 6Blue0.50
INJ 7B7Injector Channel 7Blue0.50
INJ 8B8Injector Channel 8Blue0.50
GNDB9Power GroundBlack0.85
AUX 1B10Auxiliary Channel 1Grey0.50
AUX 2B11Auxiliary Channel 2Grey0.50
AUX 3B12Auxiliary Channel 3Grey0.50
AUX 4B13Auxiliary Channel 4Grey0.50
AUX 5B14Auxiliary Channel 5Grey0.50
AUX 6B15Auxiliary Channel 6Grey0.50
AUX 7B16Auxiliary Channel 7Grey0.50
AUX 8B17Auxiliary Channel 8Grey0.50
AUX 9B18Auxiliary Channel 9Grey0.50
AUX 10B19Auxiliary Channel 10Grey0.50
AUX 11B20Auxiliary Channel 11Grey0.50
AUX 12B21Auxiliary Channel 12Grey0.50
AUX 13B22Auxiliary Channel 13Grey0.50
AUX 14B23Auxiliary Channel 14Grey0.50
AUX 15B24Auxiliary Channel 15Grey0.50
AUX 16B25Auxiliary Channel 16Grey0.50
IGN 1B26Ignition Channel 1Yellow0.50
IGN 2B27Ignition Channel 2Yellow0.50
IGN 3B28Ignition Channel 3Yellow0.50
IGN 4B29Ignition Channel 4Yellow0.50
IGN 5B30Ignition Channel 5Yellow0.50
IGN 6B31Ignition Channel 6Yellow0.50
IGN 7B32Ignition Channel 7Yellow0.50
IGN 8B33Ignition Channel 8Yellow0.50
GNDB34Power GroundBlack0.85

4.0 Connector C

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description34 Way / Key 1
Part Number4-1437290-0
Connector C — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 1.

Connector C — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 1.

4.1 Connector C Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
GNDC1Power GroundBlack0.85
AV 1C2Analog Voltage CH 1White0.50
AV 2C3Analog Voltage CH 2White0.50
AV 3C4Analog Voltage CH 3White0.50
AV 4C5Analog Voltage CH 4White0.50
AV 5C6Analog Voltage CH 5White0.50
AV 6C7Analog Voltage CH 6White0.50
AV 7C8Analog Voltage CH 7White0.50
AV 8C9Analog Voltage CH 8White0.50
AV 9C10Analog Voltage CH 9White0.50
AV 10C11Analog Voltage CH 10White0.50
AV 11C12Analog Voltage CH 11White0.50
AV 12C13Analog Voltage CH 12White0.50
AV 13C14Analog Voltage CH 13White0.50
AV 14C15Analog Voltage CH 14White0.50
AV 15C16Analog Voltage CH 15White0.50
GND OUTC17Sensor 0V Ref (Branched Cable)Black0.50
DI 9C18Digital Input CH 9White0.50
DI 10C19Digital Input CH 10White0.50
DI 11C20Digital Input CH 11White0.50
DI 12C21Digital Input CH 12White0.50
DI 13C22Digital Input CH 13White0.50
DI 14C23Digital Input CH 14White0.50
AV 16C24Analog Voltage CH 16White0.50
GND OUTC25Sensor 0V Ref (Branched Cable)Black0.50
GNDC26Power GroundBlack0.85
DI 1C27Digital Input CH 1White0.50
DI 2C28Digital Input CH 2White0.50
DI 3C29Digital Input CH 3White0.50
DI 4C30Digital Input CH 4White0.50
DI 5C31Digital Input CH 5White0.50
DI 6C32Digital Input CH 6White0.50
DI 7C33Digital Input CH 7White0.50
DI 8C34Digital Input CH 8White0.50

4.2 Pin C17 and C25 Sensor Ground Branched Connections

Connect a 0.50 sq mm AVSS wire, 70mm in length, to Pins C17 and C25. At the end, branch into x4 0.50 sq mm AVSS wires. Colour = Black.

Connect a 0.50 sq mm AVSS wire, 70mm in length, to Pins C17 and C25. At the end, branch into x4 0.50 sq mm AVSS wires. Colour = Black.

5.0 Connector D

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description26 Way / Key 1
Part Number3-1437290-7
Connector D — TE Superseal 26 Way / Key 1.

Connector D — TE Superseal 26 Way / Key 1.

5.1 Connector D Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
ECU SUPPLYD1ECU SupplyRed0.85
AUX 13-16 SupplyD2Power supply for Aux 13-16Red0.85
CAS 8VD38V Cas SupplyWhite/Orange0.50
CRANK INDEX +D4Crank Index position sensor Positive2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D5)
CRANK INDEX -D5Crank Index position sensor Negative2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D4)
SYNC SENSOR +D6Sync Sensor Positive2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D7)
SYNC SENSOR -D7Sync Sensor Negative2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D6)
CAN 1 HID8Main Engine CANWhite0.50
EFI RELAYD9Main Relay ControlGrey0.50
CAN 2 HID10Auxiliary CANWhite
KNK 1 +D11Knock Sensor 1 +2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D12)
KNK 1 -D12Knock Sensor 1 -2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D11)
SHIELDD13Crank/Sync/Knock ShieldWhite0.50
CAN 1 LOD14Main Engine CANGreen0.50
IGN SWITCHD15Ignition SwitchRed0.50
CAN 2 LOD16Auxiliary CANGreen
KNK 2 +D17Knock Sensor 2 +2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D18)
KNK 2 -D18Knock Sensor 2 -2 core Shielded Cable (shared with D17)
AVOUT 1D19Analog Out 1White
AUX 9-12 SUPPLYD20Power supply for Aux 9-12 high sideRed0.85
5V ENG SUPPLYD21Main 5V engine sensor supply (Branched)Orange0.50
5V AUX SUPPLYD225V auxiliary sensor supplyOrange0.50
Ethernet TX+D23Twisted Pair CAT 5E
Ethernet TX-D24Twisted Pair CAT 5E
Ethernet RX+D25Twisted Pair CAT 5E
Ethernet RX-D26Twisted Pair CAT 5E

5.2 Crank and Sync Shielded Cable Connections

  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins D4 and D5
  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins D6 and D7

NoteNOTE The individual core colours are not specified but there MUST be at least one different core colour between the Crank Index cable and Sync Sensor cable — i.e. the exact same cables cannot be used for both connections.

5.3 Knock Shielded Cable Connections

  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins D11 and D12
  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins D17 and D18

NoteNOTE The individual core colours are not specified but there MUST be at least one different core colour between the KNK 1 cable and KNK 2 cable — i.e. the exact same cables cannot be used for both connections. Ideally these core colours should also be different to those used in section 5.2.

5.4 5V Eng Supply Branched Connections (Pin D21)

Pin D21 (5V Eng Supply) is a branched connection feeding the engine sensor 5V supply.

Pin D21 (5V Eng Supply) is a branched connection feeding the engine sensor 5V supply.

5.5 Ethernet Sub Harness - Pins D23-D26

See the document “Ethernet to Superseal Loom Specification V1.x”. This sub harness should be plugged into Connector D, Pins D23 → D26.

Appendix A – KV8 ECU Pinout Drawing

KV8 ECU pinout (Rev 2) — Connectors A, B, C and D, looking into the ECU.

KV8 ECU pinout (Rev 2) — Connectors A, B, C and D, looking into the ECU.

Appendix B – KV12 ECU Pinout Drawing

KV12 ECU pinout (Rev 2) — Connectors A, B, C and D, looking into the ECU.

KV12 ECU pinout (Rev 2) — Connectors A, B, C and D, looking into the ECU.

Appendix C – KV16 ECU Pinout Drawing

KV16 ECU pinout (Rev 2) — Connectors A, B, C and D, looking into the ECU.

KV16 ECU pinout (Rev 2) — Connectors A, B, C and D, looking into the ECU.

Appendix D – KV Series ECU Wiring

KV Series (Rev 2) ECU wiring overview (drawing A20).

KV Series (Rev 2) ECU wiring overview (drawing A20).

Appendix E – KV Series Ethernet Wiring

KV Series Ethernet wiring / tuning cable pinout (drawing A24).

KV Series Ethernet wiring / tuning cable pinout (drawing A24).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV Revision 1 ECU

Revision 1 KV Series ECU has the Ethernet Communications port at the rear of the ECU.

Revision 2 KV Series ECU has the Ethernet Communications port at the front of the ECU in Connector D

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

KV Series Power Distribution

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of SL Series

SL4 Pinout

Image Image

Pin Descriptions

Connector A: Injection/Ignition/Auxiliary Outputs (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 1A18Auxiliary Output 9
A2Injection Channel 2A19Auxiliary Output 10
A3Injection Channel 3A20Digital Input 1
A4Injection Channel 4A21Digital Input 2
A5NCA22Digital Input 3
A6NCA23Digital Input 4
A7NCA24Digital Input 5
A8NCA25Digital Input 6
A9Sensor Supply 8VA26Ignition Channel 1
A10Auxiliary Output 1A27Ignition Channel 2
A11Auxiliary Output 2A28Ignition Channel 3
A12Auxiliary Output 3A29Ignition Channel 4
A13Auxiliary Output 4A30NC
A14Auxiliary Output 5A31NC
A15Auxiliary Output 6A32NC
A16Auxiliary Output 7A33NC
A17Auxiliary Output 8A34Auxiliary Output 9-10, 14V Supply
Connector B: Signal/Power/Communications/Triggers/Knock (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1ECU 14V SupplyB18ECU Ground
B2Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0VB19Analog Input Channel 6
B3EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)B20Analog Input Channel 7
B4Ignition Switch InputB21Analog Input Channel 8
B5Crank Index Sensor +B22Analog Input Channel 9
B6Crank Index Sensor -B23Analog Input Channel 10
B7Sync Sensor +B24Knock 2 +
B8Sync Sensor -B25Knock 2 -
B9Shield (Crank/Sync/ Knock)B26ECU Ground
B10Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceB27CAN 1H
B11Analog Input Channel 1B28CAN 1L
B12Analog Input Channel 2B29NC
B13Analog Input Channel 3B30NC
B14Analog Input Channel 4B31Ethernet Tx +
B15Analog Input Channel 5B32Ethernet Tx -
B16Knock 1 +B33Ethernet Rx +
B17Knock 1 -B34Ethernet Rx -

Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B10)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin B10 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Input (Pin A34)

Pin A34 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-10. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL6 Pinout

Image Image

Pin Descriptions

Connector A: Injection/Ignition/Auxiliary Outputs (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 1A18Auxiliary Output 9
A2Injection Channel 2A19Auxiliary Output 10
A3Injection Channel 3A20Digital Input 1
A4Injection Channel 4A21Digital Input 2
A5Injection Channel 5A22Digital Input 3
A6Injection Channel 6A23Digital Input 4
A7NCA24Digital Input 5
A8NCA25Digital Input 6
A9Sensor Supply 8VA26Ignition Channel 1
A10Auxiliary Output 1A27Ignition Channel 2
A11Auxiliary Output 2A28Ignition Channel 3
A12Auxiliary Output 3A29Ignition Channel 4
A13Auxiliary Output 4A30Ignition Channel 5
A14Auxiliary Output 5A31Ignition Channel 6
A15Auxiliary Output 6A32NC
A16Auxiliary Output 7A33NC
A17Auxiliary Output 8A34Auxiliary Output 9-10, 14V Supply
Connector B: Signal/Power/Communications/Triggers/Knock (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1ECU 14V SupplyB18ECU Ground
B2Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0VB19Analog Input Channel 6
B3EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)B20Analog Input Channel 7
B4Ignition Switch InputB21Analog Input Channel 8
B5Crank Index Sensor +B22Analog Input Channel 9
B6Crank Index Sensor -B23Analog Input Channel 10
B7Sync Sensor +B24Knock 2 +
B8Sync Sensor -B25Knock 2 -
B9Shield (Crank/Sync/ Knock)B26ECU Ground
B10Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceB27CAN 1H
B11Analog Input Channel 1B28CAN 1L
B12Analog Input Channel 2B29NC
B13Analog Input Channel 3B30NC
B14Analog Input Channel 4B31Ethernet Tx +
B15Analog Input Channel 5B32Ethernet Tx -
B16Knock 1 +B33Ethernet Rx +
B17Knock 1 -B34Ethernet Rx -

Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B10)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin B10 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Input (Pin A34)

Pin A34 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-10. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL8 Pinout

Image Image

Pin Descriptions

Connector A: Injection/Ignition/Auxiliary Outputs (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1Injection Channel 1A18Auxiliary Output 9
A2Injection Channel 2A19Auxiliary Output 10
A3Injection Channel 3A20Digital Input 1
A4Injection Channel 4A21Digital Input 2
A5Injection Channel 5A22Digital Input 3
A6Injection Channel 6A23Digital Input 4
A7Injection Channel 7A24Digital Input 5
A8Injection Channel 8A25Digital Input 6
A9Sensor Supply 8VA26Ignition Channel 1
A10Auxiliary Output 1A27Ignition Channel 2
A11Auxiliary Output 2A28Ignition Channel 3
A12Auxiliary Output 3A29Ignition Channel 4
A13Auxiliary Output 4A30Ignition Channel 5
A14Auxiliary Output 5A31Ignition Channel 6
A15Auxiliary Output 6A32Ignition Channel 7
A16Auxiliary Output 7A33Ignition Channel 8
A17Auxiliary Output 8A34Auxiliary Output 9-10, 14V Supply
Connector B: Signal/Power/Communications/Triggers/Knock (15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

Image Image

Looking into ECU connector

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1ECU 14V SupplyB18ECU Ground
B2Sensor Supply Vref1: 5.0VB19Analog Input Channel 6
B3EFI Relay Output (Low Side 200mA)B20Analog Input Channel 7
B4Ignition Switch InputB21Analog Input Channel 8
B5Crank Index Sensor +B22Analog Input Channel 9
B6Crank Index Sensor -B23Analog Input Channel 10
B7Sync Sensor +B24Knock 2 +
B8Sync Sensor -B25Knock 2 -
B9Shield (Crank/Sync/ Knock)B26ECU Ground
B10Analog Sensor 0V ReferenceB27CAN 1H
B11Analog Input Channel 1B28CAN 1L
B12Analog Input Channel 2B29NC
B13Analog Input Channel 3B30NC
B14Analog Input Channel 4B31Ethernet Tx +
B15Analog Input Channel 5B32Ethernet Tx -
B16Knock 1 +B33Ethernet Rx +
B17Knock 1 -B34Ethernet Rx -

Important Notes

Analog Sensor 0V Reference (Pin B10)

This pin should be connected directly to the 0V (Ground) pin on any low current analog sensor, for example Pressure or Temperature.

  • DO NOT connect the ECU pin B10 directly to the Engine Block or ECU Ground. These are dedicated and specialised ground outputs for all analog channels and should be connected directly to the sensor.
  • DO NOT connect frequency-based sensors to these pins; for example, an Ethanol content sensor. The sensor 0V pin should be connected to the ECU ground.

Half Bridge Driver Power Supply Input (Pin A34)

Pin A34 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-10. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly. In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply power can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand. In DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL Series Wiring Harness Specification

1.0 Introduction

This document contains the specification for the Emtron SL Series wiring harness.

  • Loom Length = 2.5 meters
  • Wire Type = AVSS

NoteNOTE Any unused pins MUST have blanking bungs fitted to the connector to keep the plug rated at its IP standard.

2.0 Connector A

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description34 Way / Key 2
Part Number4-1437290-1
Connector A — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 2.

Connector A — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 2.

2.1 Connector A Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
INJ 1A1Injector Channel 1Blue0.50
INJ 2A2Injector Channel 2Blue0.50
INJ 3A3Injector Channel 3Blue0.50
INJ 4A4Injector Channel 4Blue0.50
INJ 5A5Injector Channel 5Blue0.50
INJ 6A6Injector Channel 6Blue0.50
INJ 7A7Injector Channel 7Blue0.50
INJ 8A8Injector Channel 8Blue0.50
CAS 8VA98V Cas SupplyWhite/Orange0.50
AUX 1A10Auxiliary Channel 1Grey0.50
AUX 2A11Auxiliary Channel 2Grey0.50
AUX 3A12Auxiliary Channel 3Grey0.50
AUX 4A13Auxiliary Channel 4Grey0.50
AUX 5A14Auxiliary Channel 5Grey0.50
AUX 6A15Auxiliary Channel 6Grey0.50
AUX 7A16Auxiliary Channel 7Grey0.50
AUX 8A17Auxiliary Channel 8Grey0.50
AUX 9A18Auxiliary Channel 9Grey0.50
AUX 10A19Auxiliary Channel 10Grey0.50
DI 1A20Digital Input CH 1White0.50
DI 2A21Digital Input CH 2White0.50
DI 3A22Digital Input CH 3White0.50
DI 4A23Digital Input CH 4White0.50
DI 5A24Digital Input CH 5White0.50
DI 6A25Digital Input CH 6White0.50
IGN 1A26Ignition Channel 1Yellow0.50
IGN 2A27Ignition Channel 2Yellow0.50
IGN 3A28Ignition Channel 3Yellow0.50
IGN 4A29Ignition Channel 4Yellow0.50
IGN 5A30Ignition Channel 5Yellow0.50
IGN 6A31Ignition Channel 6Yellow0.50
IGN 7 / DI 7A32Ignition Channel 7Yellow0.50
IGN 8 / DI 8A33Ignition Channel 8Yellow0.50
AUX 9-10 SUPPLYA34Power supply for Aux 9-10 high sideRed0.85

3.0 Connector B

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description34 Way / Key 1
Part Number4-1437290-0
Connector B — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 1.

Connector B — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 1.

3.1 Connector B Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
ECU SUPPLYB1ECU SupplyRed0.85
5V SUPPLYB2Main 5V engine sensor supply (Branched)Orange0.50
EFI RELAYB3Main Relay ControlPink/Black0.50
IGN SWITCHB4Ignition SwitchRed0.50
CRANK INDEX +B5Crank Index position sensor Positive2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B6)
CRANK INDEX -B6Crank Index position sensor Negative2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B5)
SYNC SENSOR +B7Sync Sensor Positive2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B8)
SYNC SENSOR -B8Sync Sensor Negative2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B7)
ShieldB9Knock/Trigger Shield (White 70mm)White0.50
Sensor GndB10Sensor Ground (Branched Cable)Black0.50
AV 1B11Analog Voltage CH 1White0.50
AV 2B12Analog Voltage CH 2White0.50
AV 3B13Analog Voltage CH 3White0.50
AV 4B14Analog Voltage CH 4White0.50
AV 5B15Analog Voltage CH 5White0.50
KNK 1 +B16Knock Sensor 1 +2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B17)
KNK 1 -B17Knock Sensor 1 -2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B16)
GNDB18Power GroundBlack0.85
AV 6B19Analog Voltage CH 6White0.50
AV 7B20Analog Voltage CH 7White0.50
AV 8B21Analog Voltage CH 8White0.50
AV 9B22Analog Voltage CH 9White0.50
AV 10B23Analog Voltage CH 10White0.50
KNK 2 +B24Knock Sensor 2 +2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B25)
KNK 2 -B25Knock Sensor 2 -2 core Shielded Cable (shared with B24)
GNDB26Power GroundBlack0.85
CAN 1 HIB27Main Engine CANWhite0.50
CAN 1 LOB28Main Engine CANGreen0.50
CAN 2 HIB29Auxiliary CANWhite
CAN 2 LOB30Auxiliary CANGreen
Ethernet TX+B31Twisted Pair CAT 5E
Ethernet TX-B32Twisted Pair CAT 5E
Ethernet RX+B33Twisted Pair CAT 5E
Ethernet RX-B34Twisted Pair CAT 5E

3.2 Pin B10 Sensor Ground Branched Connections

Pin B10 (Sensor Ground) is a branched connection feeding the analog sensor 0V references.

Pin B10 (Sensor Ground) is a branched connection feeding the analog sensor 0V references.

3.3 Pin B2 5V Supply Branched Connections

Pin B2 (5V Supply) is a branched connection feeding the engine sensor 5V supply.

3.4 Crank and Sync Shielded Cable Connections

  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins B5 and B6
  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins B7 and B8

NoteNOTE The individual core colours are not specified but there MUST be at least one different core colour between the Crank Index cable and Sync Sensor cable — i.e. the exact same cables cannot be used for both connections.

3.5 Knock Shielded Cable Connections

  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins B16 and B17
  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins B24 and B25

NoteNOTE The individual core colours are not specified but there MUST be at least one different core colour between the KNK 1 cable and KNK 2 cable — i.e. the exact same cables cannot be used for both connections. Ideally these core colours should also be different to those used in section 3.4.

3.6 Ethernet Sub Harness - Pins B31-B34

See the document “Ethernet to Superseal Loom Specification V1.x”. This sub harness should be plugged into Connector B, Pins B31 → B34.

Appendix A – SL8 ECU Pinout Drawing

SL8 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into the ECU.

SL8 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into the ECU.

Appendix B – SL6 ECU Pinout Drawing

SL6 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into the ECU.

SL6 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into the ECU.

Appendix C – SL4 ECU Pinout Drawing

SL4 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into the ECU.

SL4 ECU pinout — Connector A and Connector B, looking into the ECU.

Appendix D – SL Series ECU Wiring

SL Series ECU wiring overview (drawing A21).

SL Series ECU wiring overview (drawing A21).

Appendix E – SL Series Ethernet Wiring

SL Series Ethernet wiring / tuning cable pinout (drawing A25).

SL Series Ethernet wiring / tuning cable pinout (drawing A25).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

SL Series Power Distribution Wiring

Image Image

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Subsections of Shadow 8

Shadow 8 Pinout

Shadow 8 ECU pinout — Connector A (signal/power) and Connector B (injection/ignition/aux), looking into the ECU connectors (drawing A40).

Shadow 8 ECU pinout — Connector A (signal/power) and Connector B (injection/ignition/aux), looking into the ECU connectors (drawing A40).

Connector A: Signal / Power / Communications / Triggers / Knock

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
A1ECU SupplyA18Analog Voltage 6
A2Sensor 8.0V Sensor SupplyA19Analog Voltage 7
A3Sensor 5.0V Sensor SupplyA20Analog Voltage 8
A40V Analog ReferenceA21Analog Voltage 9
A5Crank Position SensorA22Analog Voltage 10
A6Sync Position SensorA23CAN Bus 1 Low
A7Trigger GroundA24Knock 2 +ve
A8ShieldA25Knock 2 -ve
A9Ground 1A26Digital Input 1
A10Analog Voltage 1A27Digital Input 2
A11Analog Voltage 2A28Digital Input 3
A12Analog Voltage 3A29Digital Input 4
A13Analog Voltage 4A30Digital Input 5
A14Analog Voltage 5A31Digital Input 6
A15CAN Bus 1 HighA32CAN Bus 2 High
A16Knock 1 +veA33CAN Bus 2 Low
A17Knock 1 -veA34Ground 2

Connector B: Injection / Ignition / Auxiliary Outputs

(15.0A Max continuous current - wire gauge dependant)

PinChannel NamePinChannel Name
B1Battery Constant (HOT) SupplyB18Digital Input 7
B2Injector Cylinder 1B19Digital Input 8
B3Injector Cylinder 2B20Digital Input 9
B4Injector Cylinder 3B21Digital Input 10 / Ignition Switch
B5Injector Cylinder 4B22Aux Output 9
B6Injector Cylinder 5B23Aux Output 10
B7Injector Cylinder 6B24Aux Output 11
B8Injector Cylinder 7B25Aux Output 12
B9Injector Cylinder 8B26Aux 9-12 Power Supply
B10Aux Output 1B27Ignition TTL Cylinder 1
B11Aux Output 2B28Ignition TTL Cylinder 2
B12Aux Output 3B29Ignition TTL Cylinder 3
B13Aux Output 4B30Ignition TTL Cylinder 4
B14Aux Output 5B31Ignition TTL Cylinder 5
B15Aux Output 6B32Ignition TTL Cylinder 6
B16Aux Output 7B33Ignition TTL Cylinder 7
B17Aux Output 8B34Ignition TTL Cylinder 8

NoteNOTE 1 The Sensor 0V Ref pin (A4) is a specialised ground output for all analog sensors. Connect direct to the sensor 0V pin, DO NOT connect to the Engine Block or ECU Ground.

WarningNOTE 2 Ignition Outputs are TTL level designed to drive Ignitors. DO NOT connect directly to a coil.

ImportantNOTE 3 The HOT pin (B1) should be supplied with a constant 12V supply. This pin is used for fly-wheeling and allows an ECU managed power-down procedure.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Shadow 8 ECU Wiring

Shadow 8 Wiring Harness Specification

1.0 Introduction

This document contains the specification for the Emtron Shadow 8 ECU wiring harness.

  • Loom Length = 2.5 meters
  • Wire Type = AVSS

NoteNOTE Any unused pins MUST have blanking bungs fitted to the connector to keep the plug rated at its IP standard.

2.0 Connector A

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description34 Way / Key 1
Part Number4-1437290-0
Connector A — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 1.

Connector A — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 1.

2.1 Connector A Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
ECU SUPPLYA1ECU SupplyRed0.85
8.0V OUTA28V Cas SupplyBlue0.50
5.0V VREF1A3Main 5V engine sensor supply (Branched Cable)Orange0.50
SENSOR 0V REFA4Sensor Ground (Branched Cable)Black0.50
CRANK INDEX +A5Crank Index position sensor Positive2 core Shielded Cable (shared with A7)
SYNC SENSOR +A6Sync Sensor Positive2 core Shielded Cable (shared with A7)
TRIG GNDA7Trigger Ground (Branched Cable, Black 70mm)Black0.50
SHIELDA8Knock/Trigger Shield (White 70mm)White0.50
GNDA9Power GroundBlack0.85
AV1A10Analog Voltage CH 1White0.50
AV2A11Analog Voltage CH 2White0.50
AV3A12Analog Voltage CH 3White0.50
AV4A13Analog Voltage CH 4White0.50
AV5A14Analog Voltage CH 5White0.50
CAN 1 HIA15Main Engine CANWhite0.50
KNK 1 +A16Knock Sensor 1 +2 core Shielded Cable (shared with A17)
KNK 1 -A17Knock Sensor 1 -2 core Shielded Cable (shared with A16)
AV6A18Analog Voltage CH 6White0.50
AV7A19Analog Voltage CH 7White0.50
AV8A20Analog Voltage CH 8White0.50
AV9A21Analog Voltage CH 9White0.50
AV10A22Analog Voltage CH 10White0.50
CAN 1 LOA23Main Engine CANGreen0.50
KNK 2 +A24Knock Sensor 2 +2 core Shielded Cable (shared with A25)
KNK 2 -A25Knock Sensor 2 -2 core Shielded Cable (shared with A24)
DI 1A26Digital Input CH 1White0.50
DI 2A27Digital Input CH 2White0.50
DI 3A28Digital Input CH 3White0.50
DI 4A29Digital Input CH 4White0.50
DI 5A30Digital Input CH 5White0.50
DI 6A31Digital Input CH 6White0.50
CAN 2 HIA32Auxiliary CANWhite0.50
CAN 2 LOA33Auxiliary CANGreen0.50
GNDA34Power GroundBlack0.85

3.0 Connector B

PropertyValue
NameSuperseal
ManufacturerTE
Description34 Way / Key 2
Part Number4-1437290-1
Connector B — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 2.

Connector B — TE Superseal 34 Way / Key 2.

3.1 Connector B Wire Colours

Pin NamePinDescriptionColourWire Size (sq mm)
HOT SUPPLYB1ECU +12V ConstantRed0.85
INJ 1B2Injector Channel 1Blue0.50
INJ 2B3Injector Channel 2Blue0.50
INJ 3B4Injector Channel 3Blue0.50
INJ 4B5Injector Channel 4Blue0.50
INJ 5B6Injector Channel 5Blue0.50
INJ 6B7Injector Channel 6Blue0.50
INJ 7B8Injector Channel 7Blue0.50
INJ 8B9Injector Channel 8Blue0.50
AUX 1B10Auxiliary Channel 1Grey0.50
AUX 2B11Auxiliary Channel 2Grey0.50
AUX 3B12Auxiliary Channel 3Grey0.50
AUX 4B13Auxiliary Channel 4Grey0.50
AUX 5B14Auxiliary Channel 5Grey0.50
AUX 6B15Auxiliary Channel 6Grey0.50
AUX 7B16Auxiliary Channel 7Grey0.50
AUX 8B17Auxiliary Channel 8Grey0.50
DI 7B18Digital Input CH 7White0.50
DI 8B19Digital Input CH 8White0.50
DI 9B20Digital Input CH 9White0.50
DI 10 / IGN SWB21Digital Input CH 10White0.50
AUX 9B22Auxiliary Channel 9Grey0.50
AUX 10B23Auxiliary Channel 10Grey0.50
AUX 11B24Auxiliary Channel 11Grey0.50
AUX 12B25Auxiliary Channel 12Grey0.50
AUX 9-12 SUPPLYB26Aux 9-12 SupplyRed0.85
IGN 1B27Ignition Channel 1Yellow0.50
IGN 2B28Ignition Channel 2Yellow0.50
IGN 3B29Ignition Channel 3Yellow0.50
IGN 4B30Ignition Channel 4Yellow0.50
IGN 5B31Ignition Channel 5Yellow0.50
IGN 6B32Ignition Channel 6Yellow0.50
IGN 7B33Ignition Channel 7Yellow0.50
IGN 8B34Ignition Channel 8Yellow0.50

3.2 Pin A4 Sensor Ground Branched Connections

Pin A4 (Sensor 0V Ref) is a branched connection feeding the analog sensor 0V references.

Pin A4 (Sensor 0V Ref) is a branched connection feeding the analog sensor 0V references.

3.3 Pin A3 5V Supply Branched Connections

Pin A3 (5.0V VRef1) is a branched connection feeding the engine sensor 5V supply.

3.4 Crank and Sync Shielded Cable Connections

  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins A5 and A7 (Crank Index)
  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins A6 and A7 (Sync Sensor)

NoteNOTE The individual core colours are not specified but there MUST be at least one different core colour between the Crank Index cable and Sync Sensor cable — i.e. the exact same cables cannot be used for both connections.

3.5 Knock Shielded Cable Connections

  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins A16 and A17
  • Use x1 2-core shielded cable for Pins A24 and A25

NoteNOTE The individual core colours are not specified but there MUST be at least one different core colour between the KNK 1 cable and KNK 2 cable — i.e. the exact same cables cannot be used for both connections. Ideally these core colours should also be different to those used in section 3.4.

Appendix A – Shadow 8 ECU Pinout Drawing

Shadow 8 ECU pinout — Connector A (signal/power) and Connector B (injection/ignition/aux), looking into the ECU (drawing A40).

Shadow 8 ECU pinout — Connector A (signal/power) and Connector B (injection/ignition/aux), looking into the ECU (drawing A40).

Appendix B – Shadow Series ECU Wiring

Shadow Series ECU wiring overview (drawing A41).

Shadow Series ECU wiring overview (drawing A41).

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Shadow 8 Power Distribution Wiring

Shadow Power Supply System

The Shadow 8 power supply system has been designed to allow flexibility on how the ECU manages power-up and power-down sequencing.

The real advantage is on the power-down sequence, allowing the ECU to power-down once all pending tasks have been completed. This effectively acts as an internal Hold Power System.

ECU Supply (Pin A1)

Pin A1 is the main power supply into the ECU .

Battery Constant Supply (Pin B1)

ImportantPin B1 is a permanent power supply and should ALWAYS be connected to a constant 12V supply.

ALL Auxiliary flywheel control is directed to the pin; therefore, this pin MUST always have power connected.

Note: The ECU draws zero current once completely shut down.

Aux 9-12 (Half Bridge) Driver Power Supply (Pin B26)

Pin B26 is a dedicated power supply for Auxiliary Channels 9-12. Power must be supplied to this pin for these channels to operate correctly.

In non-DBW (Drive by Wire) applications the ECU Supply can be shared, assuming the wire gauge has a sufficient rating for the current demand.

ImportantIn DBW applications power to this pin MUST come from an ECU controlled DBW Relay.

ECU Power Supply Wiring

The ECU power supply can be configured in one of two ways; both options assume constant power is fed to pin B1.

OPTION A – Power Supply Pin Controlled

This is the main option for ECU Power Supply control.

Power-On

Power to the ECU Supply pin A1 can be switched ON using a PDM or from an Ignition switch controlled relay. When the ECU detects power on this pin, it will power up.

Power-Off

When the ECU Supply falls below 6.0V the ECU enters a Shutdown Sequence and uses the Constant Supply to remain ON during this process.

The ECU uses the time value from the “EFI Relay OFF table” to determine Power-down. However, the following tasks will prevent an ECU power-down:

  • ECU CAL file Store in progress
  • ECU Datalogging Store in progress
  • Emtune connected. (Emtune must be disconnected for the ECU to power-down)

Once the ECU has completed all shut down tasks, and the EFI Relay OFF Delay time has elapsed, the ECU will power-down.

ECU Settings

The following settings must be configured for this mode to operate.

  1. Ignition Switch Source Input selected to OFF Image Image

  2. EFI Relay OFF Time Image Image

OPTION B – Ignition Switch Pin Controlled

This mode should only be used when the ECU needs to control an external EFI Relay, normally in OEM applications.

Power-On

This option uses the Ignition Switch Input, shared with DI10(Pin B21) to power-up the ECU.

When Ignition Switch Input Pin B21 is > 6.0V, the internal circuity will turn the ECU ON using the Battery Constant supply.

Once powered on, the ECU can switch/control an external OEM EFI relay using one of the ECU outputs.

For example, Aux 8 could be configured as a High Side Output, suppling power to a relay coil and turning it ON, which in turn supplies power to the ECU Pin A1.

Power-Off

When the Ignition Switch falls below 6.0V the ECU enters the Shutdown Sequence. The same shutdown conditions apply as outlined in Option A.

ECU Settings

The following settings must be configured for this mode to operate.

  1. Ignition Switch Source Input selected to Dedicated – Ign -Sw. In this case this input is shared with DI10. Image Image

  2. EFI Relay OFF Time Image Image

IMPORTANT NOTE

Regardless of the ECU’s settings, a high input on DI10 will cause the ECU to power up. Care should be taken to not unintentionally supply power to this pin.

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Power Supply Wiring

EFI Relay Control

All Emtron ECU systems can control an EFI relay, allowing for management of its own power supply. To achieve this a dedicated Ignition Switch input and dedicated EFI Relay output are used. When 12V is applied to the Ignition Switch input, the ECUs fixed internal circuity switches the EFI Relay output to ground. This can be used to turn ON the Main relay and supply power to the ECU and sub systems. This functionality is controlled at a hardware level, meaning 12V at the Ignition Switch input will ALWAYS make the EFI Relay output turn ON and switch to ground.

Once powered up the ECU takes control of the EFI Relay output, operating independent of the Ignition Switch input. When the Ignition Switch input goes low (turns OFF) this triggers the ECU to enter shutdown mode, but the ECU will only switch the Main relay OFF after all critical self checks have been completed

WarningIt is highly recommended the EFI Relay system be used!

By allowing the ECU to control its power supply, when the Ignition Switch input turns OFF the ECU can firstly complete critical tasks before shutting itself down (for example, DBW Self calibration and ECU Logging data storage).

The below image shows the internal operation of the EFI Relay system. The control on the EFI Relay output (Low side driver) is managed by a diode OR gate i.e if the Ignition Switch input is ON OR the ECU Control is ON, the EFI Relay output will be ON and providing a ground.

EFI Relay Control Diagram EFI Relay Control Diagram

Dedicated EFI Relay Output

  • Provides a relay ground, 200mA Limit.
  • Short circuit, thermal overload protection, reverse battery.

KV Series: Pin D9. SL Series: Pin B3.

Dedicated Ignition Switch

  • Used to control Main EFI Relay circuit at key-on.
  • Input Analog Voltage Range: 0 - 20.0V.
  • Input Impedance 100k Ohms to ground.
  • Adjustable On/Off software thresholds. Resolution = 0.1V.

KV Series: Pin D15. SL Series: Pin B4.

Power Supply Input

The Emtron ECU system has a main power input to run the ECU (ECU supply pin), but also has the capability to distribute power through various outputs as well. The following power supply pins must be fed 12V in order for the ECU to distribute them to the following outputs (as high side outputs).

SL Series ECU

  • Aux 5-8 ECU Supply Pin B1. As well as the main ECU supply, it also provides power to the Aux 5-8 High Side Drivers.
  • Aux 9-10 Power Supply Pin A34. Supplies power to Aux 9/10 Half bridge drivers.

KV Series ECU

  • Aux 1-8 ECU Supply Pin D1. As well as the main ECU supply, it also provides power to the Aux 1-8 High Side Drivers.
  • Aux 9-12 Power Supply Pin D20. Supplies power to Aux 9/12 Half bridge drivers.
  • Aux 13-16 Power Supply Input D2. Supplies power to Aux 13/16 Half bridge drivers.

H-Bridge control

Selected outputs can supply either a ground or battery voltage i.e. there is no “off” state, called Half-bridge outputs. Combine two half bridges and this forms an H-bridge configuration.Since the most common use for this type of output is Drive by Wire (DBW), it is necessary to control the supply power to these supply pins via a separate circuit so that the ECU can control this individually (E-throttle Relay Circuit).

This will allow the ECU to disconnect power to that distribution source in the event of an error being detected, but still maintain functionality of the engine, store fault codes, record logs, etc. Most DBW cars will default mechanical throttle position to a “raised” idle, and an extra level of Limp Mode will also function to cut RPM in the event of unintended mechanical acceleration.

SL Series ECU

  • H-bridge control for Aux 9-10 (1 pair).

KV8/12 ECU

  • H-bridge control for Aux 9-10 / Aux 11-12 (2 pair).

KV16/16M ECU

  • H-bridge control for Aux 9-10 / Aux 11-12 / Aux 13-14 / Aux 15-16 (4 pair).

Grounds

Main ECU Grounds

All Emtron grounds are internally linked, however each ECU major section/plug has dedicated grounds. Most ECU functions in general distribute ground connection to operate components (fuel injectors, relays, boost solenoids, etc). Do NOT try to use one single ground since they are all linked. Pay mind to the fact that all of these outputs need to make complete circuits to ground when being activated, and the current limit of each ECU pin is only 12 amps.

Sensor 0V Reference Grounds

These pins are NOT ECU grounds. Although a multi-meter test will show continuity to the ECU ground, these pins are designed as a low current 0V reference for pressure, position and temperature sensors. The following rules MUST always be observed:

WarningDO NOT connect these pins to the ECU main ground location(s)!

This is a specialized ground reference for all analog sensors and should be connected directly to the sensor 0V(ground) pin.

WarningDO NOT connect frequency-based sensor grounds to the 0V Reference pin.

For example: an Ethanol content sensor. Use the main ECU ground.

Differential Input Grounds

Inputs with +/- (Crank, Sync, Knock) are considered Differential Inputs. These “-” pins are used for as a comparator for the input pin, and are NOT linked to ECU grounds or Sensor 0V Reference grounds (regardless of tested continuity). This is also the reason pulsed signals are safe to be connected to these pins. When wiring these inputs, it is highly recommended to use them without fail, as like the 0V reference for analog volt sensors, the differential input will behave appropriately during all electrical situations such as when voltage drop can be high during cranking, etc.

Hardware Manual

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Firmware Release Notes

Emtron ECU firmware is available with Emtune via EmLauncher.

After an ECU firmware upgrade, please read ALL the firmware update information from the previously installed version up to and including the current version. Connect to Emtune and apply any changes to ensure the ECU is correctly configured to run the latest firmware.
When active, the internal ECU logging will require reactivation after an ECU firmware upgrade.
When performing a firmware upgrade on a plug-in ECU, the ignition coils be should be unplugged!

Loading release notes…


V2.20.22

18/11/2025

  • Added data logging to Shadow 8.
  • Added Next Upshift Lockout Time to Gearshift Control.
  • Added channels to axis selection.
  • Added Gear Detection Tracking input selection to Gear Management so 2 sources can be used at once again.
  • Added ORFC anti lag and rev match lockouts.
  • Increase idle initial position clamp to 150g/s
  • Traction control driver demand clamp status added
  • Traction torque final clamped to 5000nm.
  • Added ORFC Cruise control torque lockout.
  • Compression Ratio correction applied to TMF Torque & Driver Demand Torque.
  • Shadow DI min frequency now 2Hz (from 12Hz).
  • Added Driver Demand Peak Manifold Pressure table. Table must be setup after update for Driver Demand Torque to work.
  • Added Traction exit delay.
  • Added EMAP Estimate baro compensation.
  • R35 TCM can now be flashed with Emtron ECU in place.
  • Added TM16 Torque Gearshift Control mode.
  • Added TM16 CAN data set.

Improvements/Fixes

  • Fixed Fuel Rate (and Fuel Used) calculation (broken in 2.20.0).
  • Updated Evo X CAN data.
  • Fixed Ambient Temp Cal.
  • Fixed fuel pump speed 2 PWM after power cycle.
  • Fixed Cal slot table Y axis.
  • Added max clamp of 10 to cruise up down counter.
  • Fixed stepper motor control on Shadow 8.
  • Cleaned up gear detection runtimes.
  • Traction slip mode rapid on/off during lockouts fixed.
  • Fixed Shadow single zone arming thresholds.
  • NOS torque applied to uncorrected torque.
  • NOS Status updated for clarity.
  • Antilag DBW override on TA Table mode 7 fixed.
  • Cruise paused-pedal error fixed.
  • Shadow ethanol sensor on DI1-8.
  • ORFC lockouts fixed.
  • Fixed cornering speed calculation.
  • Fixed DI High Range input ignoring arming threshold table.
  • Fixed logging of User Switches and User Functions 11-15.

V2.20.0

20/12/2024

  • Added support for Shadow 8 ECU.
  • Simplified Air Mass Model setup and added “Emtron Air Mass Model”.
  • Added Banked Air Mass mode with independent bank VE tables. Not Implemented for Staged Injection.
  • Timers now have additional Reset/Stop Functionality with User Channels 1- 15 added.
  • Altitude Calculation function added.
  • Tyre Pressure input channels added.
  • 5x User Switch inputs added.
  • Added Reverse Switch Input.
  • Torque Limit via CAN Added.
  • Special HKS VCam trigger mode added (36-2 + 3).
  • Added User definable TMF filter mode & table.
  • Added a new CAN Driver Demand Torque Modifier Table.
  • CAN Bus Reported Torque Modifier tables now universal.
  • Added Ideal Torque Compression Ratio Correction Table.
  • Added Advanced CAN Rx Data Set.
  • Added Cruise Set/Resume Counter for general purpose use.
  • Added Cal Slot Tachometer indicator function.
  • Added SENT protocol support
    • Available on Shadow 8 DI6 only.
    • Not available on current KV/SL hardware.
    • Currently supports GM Throttle bodies.

Improvements/Fixes

  • Yamaha YXZ Build Updates including adding Crank Index Input Filtering.
  • Improvements to Staged GDI control.
  • Slip Target Table 1 now 22x11 16-bit Table (from 8-bit).
  • Slip Target Table 2 now 16x10 16-bit Table(from 8-bit).
  • Added “Always On” option to User Torque Limits.
  • Torque limit calibration function added.
  • Added Oil Temperature to BRZ/GT86 and Subaru MY15+ CAN bus set.
  • Added Cruise speed to Subaru MY15+ OEM CAN.
  • Added the correct Fuel Mass/cycle calculation for Subaru CAN Bus (Eco Gauge).
  • New Override settings for the Subaru CAN Bus.
  • Fixed Evo X AC Switch CAN message.
  • Added numerous channels to table axis control.
  • Closed Loop Lambda now holds during Gear Shift cut instead of turning off.
  • DWB Integral Gain ignoring dead-band - FIXED
  • Clutch Pressure labeled as Bar but should be kPa - FIXED
  • Fuel Level 2 & Fuel Level 1 error when both in use - FIXED
  • User Channels 13/14/15 not storing channel 4 properly - FIXED
  • User Idle target offset table doesn’t use Y axis - FIXED
  • VVT Target table interpolation error when crossing 0 - FIXED
  • VVT Exhaust Target Table 2 negative numbers output as positive - FIXED
  • Non functional Ignition Mode 6 “Wasted Spark + Trailing Spark(wasted)” - FIXED
  • Cannot Invert DI Status Inputs when using keypad Button - FIXED
  • Momentary Switch Inputs not working when using keypad button - FIXED
  • Cruise Build not working when Y61 2017+ Build added - FIXED (The Y61 Build will need to be uninstalled then reinstalled to make Cruise Control Active)
  • Changed Engine Torque CAN Modifier table to 16-bit. Now have 0.1Nm of res instead of 5Nm. This may require all OEM CAN Bus data to be validated.
  • Charge Temperature Comp table reduced to 12x11. This may require manual validation if used.
  • Engine Temp Comp Table 2 reduced to 12x11. This may require manual validation if used.
  • TMF Correction Table reduced to 12x11. This may require manual validation if used.
  • Fuel Temperature Comp Table removed. This may require migration to a User Fuel Comp table if used.
  • Boost Clamp table now 16-bit (from 8-bit). This may require manual validation.

V2.19.0

10/7/2023

  • TMF Airflow model revisions. TMF v1.0 no longer available -Calibration will have to be upgraded to current TMF
  • TMF Filter co-efficient added for a smoother response
  • TMF uncorrected outflow correction table added.
  • Torque Limit Torque Strategy features added – User control, CAN receive, Launch Control, Traction Control support.
  • Torque Limit User control feature
  • Revisions to Torque based Traction Control Function. Uses new torque strategy - Calibration will require validation
  • Launch Control Torque Strategy Select tables added for static and moving
  • Downshift Rev Match
  • Autoshift for Drag Racing
  • Channels added to Channel Selector
  • Twin Cylinder VE support
  • Turbosmart E-Gate Blackbox supported
  • LX570 Lexus Application Build support
  • Nissan 370Z Application Build support
  • G-Speed latching feature for rolling start calculations
  • Added generic wheel speed inputs with filtering tables and assignable channels. Wheel Speed Input setup has changed and will require reconfiguration

Image Image

Unfiltered Drive Speed

Image Image

Filtered Drive Speed

  • Added extra User Functions, 15 total, up from 10
  • Race Timer improved resolution (1ms)
  • K24Z7 Trigger support
  • 6B31 Trigger support
  • MR16 Trigger support
  • Lynkco Trigger Support
  • Dodge 420A Trigger support

Improvements/Fixes

  • Ethernet Configuration Tool

  • Firmware Update Wizard

  • Theme Update

  • Quick Help “H” updated

  • User Configurable menu system

  • User Functions/Systems - Labeling

  • User Functions now use Condition Statements for improved logic readability - Configuration will require updating for continued operation

  • Preset sensor calibrations - added

  • ECU Logging calculates max time

  • Tables added and re-structured/Menus Updated - Calibration will require update if the following tables are in use

    • Main VE3 is no longer available
    • Ignition Table 3 is no longer available
    • Charge Temperature Comp Table 2 no longer available
  • Cal Slot Control updated

  • Air Mass final channel reading 0 at high rpm – FIXED

  • Minimum effective PW not storing when below 0.2 after power cycle – FIXED

  • Secondary Injector timing not following any channels in a table – FIXED

  • Gear cut Ignition retard not updating during shift – FIXED

  • Expansion Ratio VE Calculation below 0% causes high VE - FIXED

  • TMF calculation reading dropout when outflow still valid – FIXED

  • 2 Stroke Torque Calculation - FIXED

  • Lambda 2 Integral Gain - FIXED


V2.18.0

1/8/2020

  1. Throttle Mass Flow calculation upgrade to Version 1.1. For tuning consistency the user can select the previous V1.0 or transition to the new V1.1. See Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model -> Throttle Mass Flow Setup.

Image Image

 TMF V1.1 improvements available on ECU Firmware 2.18.0 or later:
    • Converted TMF Mass Flow (g/s) runtime to 2dp for improved resolution
    • Fuel Table 3 has be reassigned to a “TMF Correction Table”.With TMF enabled, this table is active all the time and allows the Throttle Mass Flow to be corrected when required. See Tuning View -> Fuel Menu.

WARNING. Please check this table after a firmware update and initialise to 0.00% if TMF mode enabled

    • Pressure Ratio < 0.528 is now unclamped and user defined. Initialise “TMF Pressure Ratio Min Clamp" to 0.5283.
    • If the Pressure Ratio Min Clamp is set < 0.528 the fueling will need adjustment either by using the Throttle Area table or TMF Correction Table.
    • Pressure Ratio Maximum Clamp is now user defined. Initialise “TMF Pressure Ratio Max Clamp" to 0.9980.
    • Initialise “Throttle Mass Flow Outflow Scaler” to 18.0.
  1. Lambda Sensor ADV 4.9 now supported.

Image Image

  1. Manifold Pressure Sensor Calibration added

  2. Flame function added

  3. EVO X full OEM CAN Bus Integration (Application Build)

  4. CAN-Am full OEM CAN Bus Integration (Application Build)

  5. D-Gain added to Closed Loop Lambda Control.

  6. Temperature channel scaling. Can now select Ohms or Voltage as a calibration option.

  7. Support added for Mid-Lock VVT. Supports Inlet target range of +70 to -20 Degs and Exhaust range of -70 to +20 Degs

  8. Renamed “MAP Modelled’ functions and runtimes to “AIr Mass Modelled”

  9. Added New Fuel Model (TMF + Speed Density (Blend) to Fuel Model setting position 4. The old position 4 (Mass Air Flow Sensor(MAF) + AirMass Modelled (Blend)) has been moved to Option 9

  10. VW Golf Mk 4 OEM CAN Bus supported added

Engine Decoding Added

  1. Lamborghini LP700-4 V12 trigger
  2. Jeep Cherokee V8 4.7L
  3. GT86 2017+ with Mid-Lock VVT
  4. Changan 4D20
  5. Hemi 6.4L
  6. EVO 12-teeth decoding decoding option
  7. Renault F4A

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fixed “Gear Cut End Source” when selected to Clutch Switch
  2. NOS fixes to Entry and Exit Delays
  3. Vanos clamped increased to +/-90% during engine cranking
  4. Gear voltage fault mode

V2.17.0

20/9/2019

  1. Engine Speed Limit 1 now has the option to be Torque controlled. The ECU will target a user feed-forward Torque (Torque Target), then apply closed loop PID control to reach the Target RPM, finally converting Torque into a %Engine Fuel or Ignition Cut. See Config View -> Engine Functions -> RPM Limit 1

Image Image

  1. Ground Speed Limit 1 is now Torque based, giving significant improvement over the previous open loop %Cut system. The ECU will target a user feed-forward Torque(Torque Target), then apply closed loop PID control to reach the Target Ground Speed, finally converting Torque into a %Engine Fuel or Ignition Cut.

NOTE: Please check and initialise the function after the firmware update

  1. Torque based Launch Control. Three new Torque based launch strategies have been added giving significant improvement to engine speed control by precisly controlling the engines torque during the static and moving phases of Launch Control. ECU will target a user feed-forward Torque (Torque Target), then apply closed loop PID control to reach the Target Launch RPM, finally achieving the Torque Target by Throttle Plate control, or/and Ignition Retard or/and %Engine Cutting. The following modes are available, for more information please refer to the help.

Image Image

  1. Multi-tooth Trigger mode as a new Gap Detection option for engines that exhibit rapid acceleration/deceleration (engines with light flywheels and/or big camshafts)

Image Image

  1. Can-Am Application Build including full OEM CAN Integration
  2. Added Nitrous Exit Delay table. This keeps the Ignition Retard and Fuel active after the NOS solenoid has switched OFF
  3. Cruise Control Application Build. This is an advanced feature with the ECU managing engine torque (Nm) by calculating the correct throttle area for the target vehicle speed. Any speed error is then corrected using a PID controller. This will require a dealer to register the ECU serial number to allow the feature to become active and to ensure all the sensors are correctly configured.

NOTE: Please read the “Cruise Control Application Build - Emtron.pdf” document available for download from the Emtron website.

  1. New CAN Bus predefined Datasets available for the new Emtron Display

Image Image

Engine Decoding Added

  1. Jeep 4.7L
  2. Jeep 4.0L
  3. Ford Coswroth
  4. Mercedes 120
  5. Viper Gen 1
  6. Mx5

Fixes/Improvements

  1. All Torque runtimes converted to 1 Decimal Point. NOTE: Please check and initialise any Table/Function using this runtime after the firmware update
  2. Gearshift Mechanical 1st to Neutral inhibits added
  3. Emtron CAN keypad general improvements
  4. Cruise Control added to Y61 Application Build
  5. Distance Reset switch fixed
  6. Output shaft input channel pulled control fixed
  7. Gear Voltage 1 Input fault value not loading correctly in a fault condition has been fixed.

V2.15.0

8/3/2019

  1. Gearshift Function. Added a new Gearshift Setup menu in the Tuning view. This contains a new “Gear Position Order” setting for the user the select the correct gear sequence. This settings allows the ECU to determine the correct shift and half-shift sequence. Also two new Half-Shift control modes have been added for selecting Neutral when its placed half-way between 2 gears. These are:
  • Reverse -> Neutral half-shift

  • 1st -> Reverse half-shift

NOTE: Please check and initialise the settings in this new menu after the firmware update

  1. GDI HPI5 “Closed” pump control added
  2. Sensor Ratiometric Correction added to selected Input Channels. This allows the ECU to correct a sensors output based on its supply voltage. The Manifold Pressure input channel example is shown below.

Image Image

Click this link to download more information: Ratiometric Correction Download

NOTE: Please check and initialise this new setting after the firmware update. The following Input Channels should be checked

  • Manifold Pressure
  • Manifold Pressure - Bank 1
  • Manifold Pressure - Bank 2
  • Boost Pressure
  • Boost Pressure - Bank 1
  • Boost Pressure - Bank 2
  • Engine Oil Pressure
  • Fuel Pressure 1
  • Fuel Pressure 2
  • Exhaust Manifold Pressure 1
  • Exhaust Manifold Pressure 2
  • Crankcase Pressure
  1. Added 29 BIT CAN address for Single and Sequential modes (Transmit and Receive)
  2. Added CAN Channels 5 and 6 to CAN 2 Node.
  3. Emtron Keypad CAN interface firmware.

Engine Decoding Added

  1. Chrysler Jeep 3.6L
  2. Honda L15B VVT

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fixed CAN Transmit issue on CAN 2 Channels 3 and 4.

V2.14.0

20/12/2018

  1. ECU Application Builds are now available. These are primarily OEM integration builds and can be installed into any ECU. Builds can be installed using the File -> Build Management menu when available. Individual Application Build documentation will be available from the website. Currently the follow Build options are available:

Image Image

  1. Completed Nissan Patrol Y61 Application Build. This build allows unique application specific firmware to be installed into the ECU. The Y61 build includes the following:
  • Full CAN Bus OEM integration for both Automatic and Manual Transmissions.
  • Y61 Gearshift control for automatic transmissions. This controls and monitors the Engine Torque during the gearshift.
  1. Gearshift function improvements
    • Gear position tracking feature added

    • Rev-matching corrected

    • Improvements made to the lockout features

    • Added following new settings:

      • “Upshift Torque Reduction Min Time”
      • Upshift Rev-match Max %Cut
      • Upshift Rev-match Cut Type

    Image Image

  1. New DBW PID control strategies.

    The DBW PID control has been significantly changed which may require the PID data to be re-tuned.

    Predefined DBW calibration files are now available from the File -> Import Module File

    a) The most significant change, is the PID control now includes an adjustable System Response time

              (The response time is the time from a commanded input change to the output changing)
    

The PID control will now adjust its behavior based on this response time and should result in a more simplistic approach to the PID tuning. (Use the File -> Import Module File menu to view the different examples)

NOTE: The “DBW Response Time” will need to be initialised after the firmware update. Recommended starting value is 8ms.

Image Image

b) The DBW Target Filter has been converted into a digital Low Pass Filter with the Time Constant adjustable in units on ms.

 This works well at "Softening" the edge during sharp transitions. 

NOTE: The “DBW Target Filer -Time Constant” will need to be initialised after the firmware update.

Image Image

  1. Closed Loop Stepper Motor control added. Available for both Bipolar and Unipolar devices.

  2. Engine Protection Function improvements.

NOTE: Some settings may have changed within the Engine Protection function.

PLEASE check these settings after the firmware update

  1. Added new Knock runtime Status “Knock Count Change Status”. When the Knock Counter increments the Status turns to ON indicating there has been a Knock event. The Status will switch to OFF once all Knock events have stopped(counter stops incrementing). This Status is available in the User Channels and can be setup to control an external Knock warning system.

Image Image

  1. Cruise Control update for Nissan R35 Plugin ECU

Engine Decoding Options added

  1. Chrysler Jeep 3.6L
  2. Lamborghini Gallardo V10
  3. Nissan VQ40
  4. Hemi 6.1L

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Long term and Short term knock Status only updating from Cylinder 1 Knock event - Fixed
  2. Pedal Position Demand does not work in the ECU logger - Fixed
  3. Launch Retard allows ignition to go below the Min Ignition Retard clamp - Fixed
  4. ECU Logged Channel Barometric Pressure had wrong offset x10 - Fixed
  5. Timer 3 when multiple AND conditions used - Fixed
  6. Race Timer when Transbrake = ON - Fixed

V2.12.0

16/4/2018

  1. Toyota GT86/ Subaru BRZ Plugin ECU firmware ready for initial release.

  2. Gearshift protection functions added

    • Neutral -> 1st Lockouts
    • 1st -> Neutral Lockouts
  3. Cam Switch ON -> OFF hold timer allowing the output to remain ON during a gearshift.

  4. Ford Coyote Quad VCT Trigger decoding added.

  5. TMF Idle Speed Control - Idle to Pedal Crossover point is now adjustable.

Image Image

  1. DTC Codes added for:

    • Barometric Pressure
    • Fuel Tank 2 Level
    • MAF Bank 1 Sensor
    • MAF Bank 2 Sensor
  2. Multiple ELC CAN Bus Configuration change: The ECU CAN Bus configuration on Multiple ELC devices can now be completed using only one ECU CAN channel. See Emtron ELC - User Manual 1.1.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Improvements to GDI Pump control strategies and PID algorithm.

  2. Gearshift Throttle Blip Fix

  3. Momentary switching of Auxiliary 9-12 drive at ECU power up has been fixed

  4. Engine Temperature reading on ANV 9-12 Inputs at ECU power up has been fixed

  5. Improvement to CPU %Load

V2.11.0 26/2/2018

  1. Nissan R35 Plugin ECU firmware ready for initial release.

  2. KV16M firmware ready for initial release.

NOTE: The Input Source selection has had a small shuffle around from the CAN Voltage 1 option downwards. Please re-check your settings after the firmware update.

  1. DBW Throttle Mass Flow (TMF) Idle Control added. (Idle Target in g/s). The ECU uses pressure before and after the butterfly to calculate

the correct throttle area for a given flow target (g/s)

  1. DBW Cranking Throttle Area Demand added. This allows the Throttle Area to be controlled during cranking. The

“Throttle Area Demand Status” indicates this state as shown below.

NOTE: Please check and initialise this setting after the firmware update. Use the sample file for base settings.

Image Image

  1. Pedal Position Demand Filter.

The Pedal Position Sensor 1 has an Exponential Smoothing filter applied using the coefficients set in this table. This generates a new output called “Pedal Position Demand” and this filtered signal

can be used to span the Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation tables. For more Help information press the “H” key when the table is selected/opened inside Emtune.

NOTE: Please check and initialise this setting after the firmware update. Use the sample file for base settings.

Image Image

  1. AC Clutch Startup and RPM Lockouts added. NOTE: These will need to be initialized and set correctly

Image Image

  1. Differential Control Override option added.

Image Image

The Function status will update when this mode is active:

Image Image

  1. Transmission Brake Bump PWM mode added. When the frequency of the Trans-brake solenoid is set to greater than 0Hz, the Bump function will modulate the solenoid at the duty cycle entered into the “transmission Brake Bump %DC Table”

Image Image

  1. User Outputs On/Off Status can be selected as the Source Input for a digital Input Switch. Below picture shows Use Output 10 as the source Inputs for the Traction Enable Switch. When User 10 Output is ON, the Traction Switch will be ON

Image Image

  1. Added Fuel Tank 2 Level, Input Channel.

  2. 29-Bit CAN Bus options added.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Charge Temperature Offset Table

  2. Lambda Closed Loop lockout when ELC in fault condition

  3. Gear Cut Function - Next Gear Stable End Cut mode.


V2.9.25

19/9/2017

  1. Added Boost Control Solenoid Deadtime Table to help linearise the boost solenoid(s) response. A “Boost Solenoid Deadtime” runtime has been added converting ms into %DC.

Image Image

  1. Two new calculated runtime added:
    • Input Shaft Speed (Calc). This uses Output Shaft Speed and Gear Ratio to reverse calculate the Input Shaft Speed. Used on applications when there in no Input Shaft Speed or there is insufficient resolution.
    • Clutch Slip (Calculated). This is Clutch Slip based on Engine Speed and Input Shaft Speed (Calc)

Image Image'

  1. Nitrous Function added - Up to 4 Stages.

Key features:

    • Comprehensive list of Lockout parameters
    • PWM Option available on Stages 1 and 2
    • Can individually set the Fuel Flow requirement for each Stage. All scaling is metric with units of g/s.

NOTE: g/s = lb/hr x 0.12599

Image Image

    • Delivery Delay table defines the time for the Nitrous the travel from the solenoid to Nozzle when the solenoid is first turned ON. This includes the solenoid deadtime and transport delay.

    • Ignition Retard is done using a 3D table and spanning one axis from Total Nitrous Flow .. the more flow the more retard can be applied.

      Image Image

    • Nitrous Staging is control using a 3D Table. The stage number can be entered directly into the table:

    0 = OFF

1 = Stage 1 ON

2 = Stage 2 ON

3 = Stage 3 ON

4 = Stage 4 ON

Image Image

    • Comprehensive list of Nitrous runtimes under the Runtime menu -> Motorsport 1 Tab

Image Image

    • Nitrous Torque data has been added. For Gain control see the menu: Engine Functions -> Torque Management -> Engine Torque Setup.

Image Image

  1. “Race Timer Reset” control added.

  2. Pedal and DBW Servo Position Error Tracking Threshold is now adjustable.

Image Image

  1. Added more options to the “Reset Fuel Used " and “Reset Distance” settings.

NOTE: Please check after the firmware update.

  1. Dual Closed Loop Lambda can have the Gain table spanned using the runtime “Lambda 1/2 Target Error - Shared”. This means both Lambda 1 Error and Lambda 2 Error will be used for the interpolation on each channel respectively.

  2. Trigger Decoding added:

    • Toyota 2UZFE VVTi
    • BMW S50 Euro
    • BWM S55
    • Ford Duratec 2.3L
  1. New Input Channels
    • Clutch Pressure
    • Exhaust Pressure 2 (NOTE: If enabled, please recheck “Exhaust Pressure 1” calibration after the firmware update)
    • Exhaust Pressure Average (when Exhaust Pressure 1 and 2 are enabled and NOT in fault an average value will be calculated)
  1. Several functionality changes resulting from the new Exhaust Pressure 2 Channel:
    • Fuel Model: Expansion Ratio. Option 3 has been added. “ON - EMAP Sensor 1/2 AVG "
    • Internal Lambda Pressure Correction. More options have been added so Bank Lambda Pressure correction can be setup. The Options are: OFF, Exh Press 1, Exh Press 2, Exh Press Avg

Image Image

Also the La Pressure Correction Rich/Lean Tables should be spanned using the new runtime " Exhaust Pressure Shared”. This will allow the ECU to internally manage the axis parameter (Exh Press 1 or 2) based

on the user settings. There are new Pressure Correction runtimes for each channel as shown below.

Image Image

  1. The RPM/Speed calculation used for Gear Position now has OutputShaft as a speed option (ie RPM/Output Shaft)

    Image Image

  2. Wastegate Position 1 and 2 added with the option of % or cm for units. See Turbo Dynamics Tab on the Config View.

  3. ACD Diff Control functionality added:

    • Pump Bleed Override
    • Retry system allowing the ECU to restart the Pump in the event of a Timeout Condition (ie Pump could not reach Target Pressure)

Image Image

  1. Additions options added to the Manifold Pressure Estimate calculation. See the Config View -> Channels -> Manifold Pressure Estimate menu.

  2. New Input Channel: “Boost Pressure” . Placed before the Throttle Plate to measure boost pressure which is used in Throttle Mass Flow calculations.

  3. Traction Control has a new “Traction Control State” runtime that indicates when TC is working (shows OFF or ON) . So for example a User Channel could be configured to switch an output when the status shows ON. (Traction Control Light)

Image Image

  1. New Runtime: Outputshaft Speed “Ideal” . See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu.

It is normally used to drag applications and represents the “ideal” or “target” Outputshaft Speed for a run. The ECU can then generated a %Output Slip based on this value and the actual Outputshaft speed. This %Output Slip can then be applied to the Traction Control system.

Image Image

  1. New Runtime: Outputshaft Slip. This is the Slip between the Outputshaft Speed “Ideal” and the selected Source channel. See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu. The Outputshaft Slip can be selected to within the Traction Control Function

  2. New Traction Control mode : “%Slip (Outputshaft Speed)

Image Image

  1. New Runtime: Outputshaft Speed Calculated. This is reverse calculated by using Wheel Speed (kph) and Final Drive ratio to get Outputshaft Speed Calculated. Useful when the actual Outputshaft Speed is unavailable from the the transmission. See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu ->Outputshaft Speed Calculated menu.

  2. New Runtime: Inputshaft Speed Calculated. This is reverse calculated using OutputShaft Speed Source and Gear Ratio. Useful when the actual Inputshaft Speed is unavailable from the the transmission.

See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu ->Inputshaft Speed Calculated menu.

  1. New Runtime: Clutch Slip 2. Now have x2 Clutch Slip channels with independent source channels. See Vehicle Functions -> Vehicle Dynamics menu ->Clutch Slip menu.

  2. Custom DBW 2 PID settings. These can be enabled from the DBW PID Setup menu.

Image Image

  1. Gearshift Functions Changes
    • The Gear Detection Voltage Channel will now show the value -10 when tolerance mode is used AND the Gear voltage is outside the tolerance. This will normally happen during an Upshift or Downshift event. It can also indicate a miss-shift issue when the gearbox is stuck between two gears.
    • When Gear position is selected to use “Gear Detection Voltage” as the source, the “Upshift/Downshift Next Gear Timeout” setting(s) are used to determine when the “Gear Detection Voltage” should be updated to the Gear position.

Example: During a 2rd to 3rd shift the Gear Detection Voltage channel will show 2 > -10 > 3. Corresponding the Gear position will start showing 2, followed by -10, then wait until a valid gear position is available; In this case it will be 3, so the user will see the Gear position 2 -> 3. In the event a valid Gear position is not seen when the Timeout period ends, the Gear channel will be update to a value of -10 indicating a fault.

    • Upshift Cut tables have been separated out into Ignition and Fuel allowing more flexibility around cut strategies.

Image Image

    • Rev-Match Calculation updated during the entire Up/Downshift event.
    • Upshift and Downshift Gear %Position runtime added. During a Gearshift event the ECU calculates the position of the Gear from 0 to 100%. This get calculated using the Gear Voltage Channel.

Example: Upshift from 2nd to 3rd. 2nd = 2.45V, 3rd = 3.15V. During an Upshift event the ECU reads the Gear voltage at 2.88V.

    Upshift Gear %Position = 2.88 - 2.45/ (3.15 - 2.45) = 61.4%

This information can be used for advanced Gearshift Control Strategies.

Image Image

    • “Rev-match Control Range” settings added for both Upshift and Downshift.

Image Image

    • Downshift Rev-match Timeout setting added

Image Image

Fixes/Improvements

  • Pedal Translation Table Z-Axis Control
  • Traction Control Limit Type: “Fuel Cut + Ign Cut” . NOTE: Please check the “Traction Limit Type” and “Traction Cut Pattern” settings after the firmware update.
  • Improvements to KV series Rev 1 runtime availability.
  • Clutch Slip menu misalignment . Please recheck “Clutch Slip Calculation Filter” setting after the update.

V2.9.0 30/6/2017

  1. MAP Modelled, MAP Modelled Bank 1, MAP Modelled Bank 2 are now user controlled calculated runtimes. A 3D table can be used to blend 2 runtimes generating a final Modelled g/cyl and Modelled MAP value.

For example:

  1. Common Plenum. The Manifold Air Mass and TMF (Throttle Mass Flow) can be blended to generate a “Manifold Pressure Modelled” and “MAP Modelled Air Mass”

Parameter 1 = Throttle Mass Flow 1

Parameter 2 = Manifold Air Pressure

As TMF is a more effective way to manage the engine as high pressure ratio across the blade, this example shows the engine only running on TMF when the pressure ratio is less than 0.6, then transitioning to MAP as this sensor becomes more accurate.

NOTE. Pressure ratio moves towards 1.000 as the throttle moves towards the open position. Pressure Ratio = Pressure After Blade/ Pressure Before Blade

See Config view -> Channels -> Calculated Runtimes

Image Image

Image Image

  1. Two new Fuel Models have been added allowing the MAP Modelled runtime to be used. These are:
  • Dual - MAP Modelled Bank1 + Bank2. Individual Bank Fuel control using MAP Modelled.
  • Speed Density (MAP Modelled). Default Speed Density calculation, but using MAP Modelled. For example MAP and TMF can be combined (blended) to form MAP Modelled to run the engine.

*NOTE: - If MAP Modelling is used in the Fuel Model, MAP Modelled should be used to span the Fuel and Ignition tables for consistency reasons.

  1. Options have been added to the Efficient and Load runtime options to account for the new MAP Modelled runtime.

Image Image

  1. “Injector Nozzle Ref Pressure” setting has added to Fuel Main setup menu. This is used by the Fuel Pressure correction allowing the ECU to accurately determine Injector Nozzle Pressure.

NOTE: Please check after the firmware update.

Image Image

  1. DBW Position feedback and Throttle Position inputs have been separated. The DBW Position feedback is now called “DBW  Servo Position Main/Sub”. 

Image Image

NOTE: If DBW is enabled please check these setting after the firmware update. In most situations the ECU will copy the Throttle Position Input channels settings into the new DBW Servo Position Main/Sub settings

  1. Charge Temperature Offset table is now 3D. Allows the Latent Heat of Evaporation to be corrected for different Fuel Type. This table can be imported from the Sample file.

  2. MAP Limit1 and 2 now have a selectable Pressure Input Channel.

NOTE: Please check this after the firmware update.

Image Image

  1. Engine decoding added
  • VQ35HR
  • 3UZFE
  • Jaguar V8 A27
  • Honda VFR
  • Ford Coyote V8 5.0L/Voodoo 5.2L
  • Holden Ecotec
  • BMW N52
  • Toyota 2UR-FSE
  • Mercedes AMG M156
  1. Toyota Variable Valve Timing - intelligent by Electric motor (VVT-iE ) added.

Fixes/Improvements

  • Traction Limiting Options.

    • TC Limiting Ignition option fixed.
    • TC Limiting Fuel + Ignition option fixed

*NOTE: - Please recheck the “Limit Type” and “Cut Pattern” Settings in the Traction Control Setup menu.

  • DI3/4 on Exhaust CAM with Inj15/16 conflict fixed.
  • Boost Control Lockout with Input Sensor failure or MAP Limit active.

V2.8.0 10/4/2017

  1. *Caution please read. - A new control strategy for generating the DBW Target control has been implement. This will require a setup change in most situations.

The new strategy involves demanding a Throttle Area using the Pedal to Throttle Translation Table (which directly relates to torque) and a 2D Throttle Area to Throttle Position conversion table.

a) The Pedal Translation tables have been renamed to “Pedal to Throttle Demand Translation” table. The table(s) generate a percentage Throttle Area demand between 0 and 100%.

b) Throttle Area to Throttle Position correlation table. A new Throttle Area Table is then used to generate the DBW Target Throttle Position based on the Area Demand. The Default table is shown below. If the numbers are not initialised correctly after the firmware update, use the KV Sample file to import the table.

The Throttle Area to Throttle Position correlation table can be located in Engine Functions -> Throttle Body Model menu.

NOTE: This new strategy means the DBW Target Tables are no longer required and have been removed. ALL DBW Target control is done using the Throttle to Pedal Translation Tables.

\ - Please initialise/check this settings after the firmware update .*

Image Image

  1. The ECU can model the Air Mass Flow (g/s) through the Throttle Body(s). The calculation used by the ECU is a direction derivation of the Navier-Stokes equations using pressure ratios and throttle area. The following settings are available:
    • A Throttle Position to Throttle Area table as shown in 1b). Throttle area is a critical component required to calculate Throttle Mass Flow, so this table allows the correlation of throttle position to throttle area as a percentage. The table is located in Engine Functions -> Throttle Model menu.
    • Throttle Diameter (mm). See Engine Functions -> Throttle Model menu -> Throttle Flow Setup.
    • Throttle Body Scaler. Allow a percentage correction on the Throttle Diameter to correct small flow errors. See Engine Functions -> Throttle Model menu -> Throttle Flow Setup.
    • Number of Throttle Bodies (1 - 2). See Engine Functions -> Throttle Model menu -> Throttle Flow Setup.
    • Pressure Channel selection. The pressures before and after the Throttle Body(s) are required to calculate Throttle Mass Flow. See Engine Functions -> Throttle Model menu -> Throttle Flow Setup.

NOTE. On normally aspirated engines the pressure before the butterfly can be selected to Barometric(ECU Internal) so no additional sensors are required.

  1. ECU Torque Modelling. Changes have been made to the ECU Torque Modelling. The calculated Engine Torque in previous firmware versions has been calculated using Fuel Flow and BSFC. This has been revised and the ECU now uses Air Mass to calculate Engine Torque.

Engine Torque (Nm)

    • Engine Torque = Ideal Torque - Frictional Loss. Frictional Loss is an estimate of torque required to overcome engine friction. Make sure the Frictional loss table has been initialised correctly. If required import this table from the KV Sample file.

Image Image

    • Parameters used to calculate Engine Torque

      • Current Air Mass of the Engine(Dependant on MAP, Inlet Temp, %VE, Engine Size, Number cylinder) which is the runtime “Modelled Air Mass”
      • Lambda Target
      • Stoichiometric Ratio
    • A 2D table has been added to adjusted the Torque calculated by the ECU if required. See Tuning View -> Torque Management -> Engine Torque Ideal Correction Table. The Default values should be 1.000 and the x-axis. spanned using “Modelled Air Mass”. The table allows a percentage correction based on Modelled Air Mass.

Image Image

Torque Demand (Nm)

The ECU calculates the best estimate of what the engine Torque Demand should be, based on the Ideal Gas Law and a derivation of the Navier-Stokes equation(s). Parameters used in these calculations are:
    • RPM
    • Engine VE
    • Inlet Temp
    • Boost Target (Represents Max expected engine load)
    • Engine Size
    • Throttle Area Demand (From Translation Table)
    • Throttle Diameter
    • Lambda Target
    • Frictional Loss

    See Runtime menu -> Calculated tab.

    ![Image](</img/Untitled122.png>)
    
  1. A Charge Temperature Offset Table has been added. This can be used to offset the Charge Temperature. This offset should be applied to compensate for the charge cooling due to the latent heat properties in the fuel charge. Some fuels (such as Methanol) have an extremely high latent heat capacity Other factors such as Stoichiometric Ratio will influence the charge temperature. See Fuel -> Compensations.

Image Image

  1. Boost Control Target can be selected as Absolute or Gauge. NOTE: The ECU will always generate the final Boost Target as Absolute value.

Absolute Mode.: This is the Target Boost Pressure *independent - of Barometric Pressure.

Gauge Mode. This is the Target Boost Pressure *above - Barometric Pressure

Example.

Absolute Mode. Target = 250kPa. The ECU will Target an Absolute pressure of 250kPa. Boost Pressure inside the engine will increase as Barometric pressure reduces.

Barometric Pressure of 100kPa. Boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

Barometric Pressure of 80kPa. Boost pressure inside the engine will be 170kPa. (250kPa - 80kPa)

Gauge Mode. Target = 150kPa. The ECU will Target a boost pressure of 150kPa above Barometric pressure.

Barometric Pressure of 100kPa. ECU Boost Target will be 250kPa, boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

Barometric Pressure of 80kPa. ECU Boost Target will be 230kPa, boost pressure inside the engine will be 150kPa.

\ - Please initialise/check this setting after the firmware update .*

  1. Air Mass data now always displayed for any Load Input channel (MAP and MAF). See Runtime menu -> Engine Sensors Tab.

Image Image

  1. Final Air/Fuel Mass data for single and banked Fuel Models displayed in the Runtime menu -> Fuel Tab.

Image Image

  1. Fuel Model. Option 4 has been changed from “Blend MAP + MAF” to “Blend Modelled MAP + MAF”. Modelled MAP can be generated by the tuner using different sensors and gives greater tuning flexibility.

Image Image

  1. Fuel Model. Changed option 3 has been changed to “Blend Modelled MAP + Throttle Mass Flow”

  2. Added pull-up control on User Position and Pressure channels.

  3. EVO 10 Decoding adjusted to account for a 360 offset.

  4. Anti-lag Ignition Retard clamp increased to 250%

  5. Added Dual Boost Control(Bank control). This option allows x2 individual Boost Control functions to operate using 2 different MAP pressure source inputs. Normally used to control boost pressure independently on each engine bank when there is no common plenum. New run times provide PID and duty cycle data for the 2nd Boost Control function.

Image Image


V2.7.20 30/1/2017

  1. Added Race Timer, Resolution of 1ms. See Tuning View -> Timer Function -> Fixed Timer setup. Runtime available in the Calculated Tab

  2. Dodge SRT4 Engine Decoding added.

  3. Added BMW S50 Dual Vanos Engine Decoding

  4. Added Dual Speed Density and Dual Mass Air Flow Fuel Model modes. Used to individually control fueling on each engine bank when there are individual plenum’s.

MAF Mode:

Input “Mass Air Flow Meter 1” controls fueling on Bank 1

Input “Mass Air Flow Meter 2” controls fueling on Bank 2

MAP Mode:

Input “Manifold Pressure - Bank 1” controls fueling on Bank 1

Input “Manifold Pressure - Bank 2” controls fueling on Bank 2

Image Image

Individual air and fuel mass data is available under the Runtime menu -> Fuel Tab.

Image Image

  1. More options have been added to the Efficiency and Load custom runtime:

Image Image

Fixes/Improvements

  1. ECU logging gets paused while Scope Function is active

2 )Renamed Requested Torque menus to Torque Demand Translation

  1. Improvements made to the On-board Lambda header and pump current control during sensor warm up.

  2. Fixed Open Loop Boost control issue introduced when the “Boost 1 PID Input” setting was added.

V2.7.4 23/11/2016

  1. Closed Loop Boost Control, PID Input channel is adjustable from the Boost Closed Loop Control -> Boost PID Setup menu.

Image Image

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Engine Start User Lockout not storing after ECU power cycle.

  2. Toyota 2ZZ Trigger Decoding.

  3. DBW1 and DBW2 Auto calibration.

  4. User Knock Lockout setting has had its memory location changed. If Enabled, this setting will need to be re-initialised

  5. EGT and Lambda Channels with Input Source on CAN Bus.

You can now Scale the CAN data in the Inputs form. This means the 2D Calibration table is used by the firmware and must be set correctly. If no scaling is required, then select

“Predefined Calibration” to read “CAN - EGT 1:1Scaling. This puts 1:1 scaling in the Calibration table as shown below.

 

Image Image

 

However, if you want to scale the CAN data, select “Calibration Type” to “Custom” which enables the 2D table for editing


V2.7.0 26/10/2016

  1. Dedicated Engine Protection Function added for the following:
    • Engine Temperature
    • Oil Pressure
    • Fuel Pressure
    • EGT (Max/Peak value)
  1. DBW 1Throttle Blip Option added into the GearCut Function. See Config View -> Functions -> Motorsport Functions Tab - >GearCut Control

  2. Added Engine Start Inhibit Function. Used on initial cranking to Inhibit/Stop the engine from starting until sufficient Oil Pressure and/or Fuel Pressure and/or Crank Time has been reached.

An Immobiliser option can also be enabled within this function. The Engine Start Inhibit function when ON, will disable Fuel and Ignition.

Image Image

  1. Torque Functional Loss table added. An estimate of torque required to overcome engine friction. This value gets subtracted from the calculated Engine Torque.

  2. EGT Min runtime added.

  3. Porsche 997 Engine Decoding added.

  4. Speed Out Function. Engine Speed added as the Source Channel. Also added an Output filter setting.

  5. New Input IDs have been added:

    • Manifold Pressure - Bank 1
    • Manifold Pressure - Bank 2
    • Boost Pressure - Bank 1
    • Boost Pressure - Bank 2

Image Image

  1. Additional Functionality added to DBW 2:
    • Anti-lag Override and cooldown mode
    • Throttle Blip (Gearcut and Gearshift)
    • Idle Speed Control
  1. New Fuel Model mode added; “Mass Air Flow 1/2 Individual (Separated Plenum)”. On some engine configurations the plenum is not common and each bank operates independently. This Fuel Model allows ECU to independently control the Fueling for the Engine Banks 1 and 2 using two MAF Sensors . Dedicated runtimes also product Air and Fuel Mass information for each Bank.

Image Image

  1. The Boost Control Input or Set point for the PID Control is now adjustable.

** \ - Please re-check this setting after the firmware update to make sure its set correctly for the application.***

Image Image

  1. Overrun Fuel Cut Ramp Time setting added. Allows the transition into Fuel Cut to be smoother.

Image Image

  1. DBW Closed Loop Idle Speed can now be selected to use both DBW 1 and DBW 2.

Image Image

  1. Inputs for Volume Flow Meters 1 and 2 added. Scaling is L/min.

Image Image


V2.6.0 6/6/2016

  1. Fuel Model. *Expansion Ratio Correction - has been added/included into the Fuel Model when switched ON. This uses the of *EMAP / MAP - combined with the engines *Static Compression Ratio - to correct the VE of the engine at different loads. The EMAP can be source from:
  • Actual EMAP from the Exhaust Manifold Pressure Input Channel
  • Estimated EMAP from the EMAP Estimation Table (this is new). This allows a sensor to be temporarily fitted to the exhaust, the pressure mapped and loaded into the table. The sensor can then be removed.

(Tuning view -> Fuel -> Compensations)

*NOTE. - This setting should be switched ON at the start of the tuning process.

Image Image

  1. The runtime menu now gives more Runtime Data and Status Data on the parameters being used in the Fuel Model.. See the ECU Runtime menu -> Fuel 2 tab

Image Image

  1. Changes have been made to the Fuel Model - Fuel Pressure mode allowing Fuel Pressure Correction on fuel systems that run a fixed fuel pressure.

** \ - Please re-check this setting after the firmware update to make sure its set correctly for the application.***

Image Image

  1. Minimum Effective Injector Pulsewidth has been added.

** \ - Please check these settings after the firmware update to make sure its set correctly for the application.***

Image Image

  1. *Gearshift Function - ready for Beta Testing using either Force or Paddle to initiate the cut. This Fuction is fully Closed Loop Control and uses gear position is used as the feedback to end a Gearshift

Request. Therefore the Gear Detection Voltage channel MUST be configured. See Inputs -> Vehicle Tab

A Throttle Downshift Solenoid can be used on non-DBW applications to manually open/blip the throttle on downshift. The ECU will control this as part of the Gearshift function.

Mechanical - Gear Shift Force: When Gear Shift Force is used an Input Source MUST be assigned to Gearshift Force channel.

Positive Force = Upshift Request

Negative Force = Downshift Request

Electronic - Paddle Shift- When Paddle Shift is selected the Up Shift and Down Shift channels MUST have an Input Source assigned.

The Runtime Menu (F3) provides a large amount of data including the actual gearshift time in milliseconds.

Image Image

  1. *Rolling Launch Control - Function added. Rolling Launch Control will limit the Vehicle Speed once moving by limiting the Engine Speed.

The system becomes enabled when the Rolling Launch Switch is ON. When the switch transitions from OFF -> ON the ECU will record the current speed of the selected channel and this is used in a 3D Target Table to determine the actual speed limit. This allows either a 1:1 ratio (as shown below in switch position 1) or a custom ratio (switch position 2-4)

Image Image

  1. Support added for V16 engines. This includes wasted spark on Ignition channels 7,8 and sequential fuel on injection channels 13-16. Bank Trimming and Closed Loop Lambda added for cylinders 13-16.

  2. Filter change to the Ethanol and Fuel Level Inputs. This now uses a cascaded integrator–comb filter implemented as a moving average filter. The Filter value represents the numbers of samples/stages in the filter.

Typical value for Fuel Level: 50 - 100.

  1. Launch Control Functionality change. ****\ - WARNING. This function will need to be reconfigured as there has been major functionality and upgrade changes *9

The Launch Control has been separated into 3 major functionality groups: Lockouts , Arming Control, Disarming Control.

    • Lockouts prevent the system Arming or Disarming.
    • Arming Control are settings used to “Arm” the system which make it active
    • Disarming Control are settings used to “Disarm” the system which turn it off

The Runtime information has also been improved providing more information on the Launch System Status. (See F3 menu -> Motorsport Tab)

  1. Gear Runtime has had an offset change. Can now span -1 fro reverse , -2 for park.

** \ - WARNING. Any table axis spanned using gear will need to be reconfigured. An old gear axis value of 1 will now read -9 so an offset of 10 will need to be added to all axis values to make them correct***

  1. Added *x64 Channels - of Input CAN based runtime data, giving a large Input Expansion to the ECU. See F3 Menu -> Raw Data(CAN). These inputs can be received and scaled using the new CAN Custom Receive Datasets 1-4
    • x20 CAN Analog Inputs
    • x16 CAN Frequency Inputs
    • x16 CAN Lambda Inputs
    • x16 CAN EGT Inputs
    • x10 CAN Speed Inputs
    • x10 CAN Distance Inputs

Image Image

This CAN data can be received by the ECU using Custom Receive Datasets. There are 4 new CAN Receive Channels that can be configured to receive the following grouped data:

    • Voltage
    • EGT
    • Lambda
    • Frequency
    • Speed
    • Distance

Each Group can be scaled. 20 parameters are allowed per Dataset. Example shown below:

Image Image

  1. Gear Position can be calculated from either Voltage or Ratio (rpm/speed). Now both these calculations are done together which means both runtimes are always available.

  2. ECU to Emtune Ethernet connection improvements in speed and smoothness (Requires FPGA Version 1.90 or greater)

  3. ECU Logging changes

    • Logging download speed has been improved by 50% (i.e now 50% faster)
    • 32MB logging enabled for KV series
    • Logging Continuous Mode enabled.
  1. ECU Scope Function (Requires FPGA firmware 1.90 of later). 4 Channels can now be sampled simultaneously up to 100ksps

Image Image

  1. New Input Channels added:
    • Angles of Rotation, Roll, Pitch, Yaw. See F3 Menu -> Vehicle Sensors Tab. Setup from Config View -> Inputs -> Vehicle Tab

    Image Image

    • Steering Angle (*NOTE: - For CAN Bus OEM applications this setting will need to be initialised. Select Input Source to “CAN OEM”)
    • Gear Request Switch 1-5 Inputs
    • Hill Start switch (for OEM applications)
    • Clutch Position
  1. Anti-Lag Change. On DBW applications pedal position is used to control Arming/Disarming conditions and Cooldown modes. More runtime data has been added.

  2. New Gear Requested function. This runtime can be generated by a Binary Position table or Paddle shifts. See Config View -> Functions -> Vehicle Functions 2 tab -> Gear Request Detection

When Binary Position is selected, the binary combination of the Gear Request Switch inputs setup from a table, can be used to select the Gear Request. In the picture below:

Gear Request -2 = Park when Gear Request Sw1 and Sw5 are ON

Gear Request -1 = Reverse when Gear Request Sw1 is ON

Gear Request 3 = 3rd when Gear Request Sw1 and Sw2 are ON ..etc

Image Image

  1. New Gear Output Binary function. The BInary Combination entered into the Table controls which Gear Solenoids are ON and OFF.

Image Image

Example: When Requested Gear 2 selected, Gear Solenoid 1 and 4 are ON. All other solenoids are OFF.

  1. ELC1 and ELC2 integration into the ECU
  • Runtimes menu shows current Emtron CAN devices on the Bus

Image Image

  • ELC CAN Bus setup menu in the Config View -> Communications -> Emtron CAN Devices. From here you can Label each ELC device and change the CAN ID data is transmitted on. You can also control the operation of the ELC device(s) if required.

Image Image

  1. *Transmission Brake - function added. Commonly used function in Drag Racing applications where an Automatic transmission is used.  A transmission brake is fitted which engages reverse and forward speed in at the same time to stop the vehicle from creeping on the staging line. To allow the vehicle to move during the pre stage period the ECU has the ability to momentarily allow the system to disengage before re engaging.

  2. Gear Detection Voltage Input detection now has two options:

  3. Gear Voltage (Tolerance Locked)

  4. Gear Voltage (Tolerance Table)

“Tolerance locked” always uses the halfway voltage between 2 gears

“Tolerance table” gives adjustability using a table. Use the “Tolerance Table” check box to enable this Table.

Image Image

  1. DBW 1 Override Target runtimes now generated.

Image Image

  1. Engine Speed for every Cylinder is calculated for every cylinder. See the Runtime Menu (F3) -> Triggers/Limits Tab

  2. Added Calibration data for Rotary Position Switch Inputs 1 and 2.

Trigger decoding Modes added:

    • Suzuki M13A
    • Suzuki M16A
    • Mazda 2.0L
    • Toyota 2GRFE
    • Toyota 3URFE
  1. CAN Bus Decoding:
    • Yamaha XYZ OEM
    • Subaru MY10 Liberty
    • Honda Jazz
  1. Yamaha YXZ - Plugin OEM integration

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fix 1 cylinder wasted spark application.

  2. New CIC moving average filter added for Fuel Level and E85 Sensor.

  3. Fix for Yamaha YXZ crank index offset not operating when engine speed outside the RPM Lockout value.

  4. Fix to Lambda 1 and 2 channel scaling when Input Source selected as ANV15 or ANV16.

  5. Fix for 5V Aux Regulator on Rev1 ECUs running the latest firmware.

  6. Change to Engine Decoding labels for BWM models.


V2.5.0 19/10/2015

  1. DBW Closed Loop Idle Speed Control. This function has been enabled and available only on DBW 1. This function is enabled from the Config view -> Functions -> Engine Functions Tab -> Idle Speed Control menu.

When the engine enters Idle Conditions and DBW Target Table is switched from the normal DBW 1 Table 1 or 2 or 3 to the Idle Speed Initial Position Table

Image Image

The Idle Speed Initial Position Table acts as a Feed forward table for the Idle PID Control. The Switching between these tables is controlled from the Idle Speed Lockouts Menu.

See the Plugin Sample Files for examples on these settings.

NOTE 1: It is advised to used a PI controller(put D-Gain at zero). Also keep Idle PI Gains small. See Plugin Sample Files for examples on these settings.

*NOTE 2: - If Idle Ignition Control is also ON, make sure the Idle Ignition I-Gain is set to zero so both Idle Ignition and Idle DBW systems are not flighting each other i.e. cannot have I-Gain active on both systems.

  1. In-depth Help has be written explaining the ECU’s different Fuel Models. This includes running the ECU using the MAF Sensor and Blend mode allowing the Speed Density calculated values and MAF sensor measured values to be blended. Select F1 on the Fuel Model Setup menu.

Image Image

  1. Turbo Thermodynamic calculated runtimes have been added. This includes:
    • Turbo Pressure Ratio (y-axis on Compressor MAP)
    • Corrected Flow(x-axis on Compressor MAP)
    • Adiabatic Efficiency

To calculate this data the following Inputs are required:

    • Compressor Inlet Temperature (Ambient)
    • Compressor Output Temperature
    • Compressor Inlet Pressure (Baro)
    • Compressor Outlet Pressure

This data can use overlaid on Compressor MAPs to look at the overall performance of the turbo.

Image Image

  1. ECU now supports 2 Mass Air Flow Sensor inputs. The ECU will sum these when the Fuel Model is selected to MAF Mode. See Runtime menu -> Engine Sensors

Image Image

  1. New Torque Management Settings

a) Requested Torque Tables. Two more tables have been added giving 3 in total. These are now controlled using the “Requested Torque Table Control” option. This allows individual tables selection, or table selection controlled through the Cal Slot function. There are also new Requested Torque runtimes to match (see F3 menu -> Calculated Tab)

Image Image

b) Measured Torque Tables. The Engine Torque can be entered into a Table. An Offset Table is also available allowing the Torque to be trimmed based on Ignition Angle for example. See KV Sample File.

![Image](</img/Untitled58.png>)

c) Calculated Engine Torque. Using inputs from Injector Size, Injector Duty, Fuel Density, Lambda Target and estimated BSFC at lambda 1.000, the ECU generates a calculated/estimation of Engine Power and Torque.

Settings can be adjusted from the Engine Functions -> Torque Management menu.

  1. On board Accelerometer.
    • The ECUs x/y/z Axis can be adjusted/swapped to matched the vehicles Long/Lat/Vert Orientation. These new settings are available from Vehicle Function -> Accelerometer Menu.

    Accelerometer

    • Filtering options have been enabled for each axis, from each corresponding Input Setup Menu. Value 0 - 30 can be used. The higher the number the more filtering.

            ![Image](</img/Untitled57.png>)
      
  1. Lambda 1 and 2 Input Channels changes:
    • DTC Codes added for Lambda 1 and 2 Inputs.
    • Clearing of all Short and Long term trims when the sensor(s) faults(when DTC gets generated). Closed Loop Lambda is also disabled.
    • Can now do a manual sensor calibration with the engine is running. The system will re-enter the heater warm-up phase when the calibration is switched OFF.
    • The FIlter, Fault Value and DTC menus options are now available when the Input Source is set to “Internal Lambda 1/2”

Image Image

  1. Added DBW1 Minimum Target Clamp. Can be adjusted from the DBW 1 PID Setup menu.

Some DBW throttle bodies have non-linear behavior when the plate is close to fully closed. This makes functions like Closed Loop DBW Idle unstable as the

plates response is unpredictable. The setting clamps the minimum Target value and stops the plate entering this region.

  1. New Runtimes (requires FPGA firmware 1.81 or later):
    • New runtime data displaying Fuel and Air Mass data for MAF and Speed Density Fuel Models. Also added Mass Modifiers. See Runtimes Menu (F3) ->Fuel Tab.

Image Image

    • New Acceleration values under the Calculated Tab. The Accel calculation uses the Longitude g-force from the on-board accelerometer to calculable vehicle acceleration in units of m/s/s or Km/hr/s. For example acceleration of 1g equates to 35.3 km/hr/s. This means the vehicle is accelerating at 35.4 km/hr every second.

      Image Image

    • New Calculated Engine Torque data.

      Image Image

    • Lambda 1 and 2 LTFT range values:

      Image Image

  1. Engine Start Control Function. This now has an On/Off control, selected from the Functions -> Vehicle Functions 2 Tab.

WARNING. If the Engine Starter Relay Output is being used, this function will now need to be switched ON to enable it.

Also extended the number of inputs that can be used to control this function. Now both the “Start/Stop Switch” and “Start Position Switch” can be used to control this function. See the Help for more information.

  1. DTC codes added:
    • ACD Pressure Input
    • Rotary Switches 1 and 2 Inputs.
    • Lambda 1 Input with Internal option selected. Fault Value, DTC Control and DTC Engine Limit options available. See the Input Setup menu.
    • Lambda 2 Input with Internal option selected. Fault Value, DTC Control and DTC Engine Limit options available. See the Input Setup menu.
    • MAF Sensor 2
  1. Added Active Center Differential (ACD) control for the hydraulic pump. Enabled when the Motorsport Differential Control Function is ON. A Table can be used to set the Pump Target Pressure for varying conditions.

See F3 menu -> Motorsport Tab for runtimes.

Image Image

  1. Two new Rotary Switch Inputs have been added. These can be edited from the Inputs Pins Setup -> Vehicle Functions 1 Tab. Rotary Switch position can be viewed from the Runtime Menu -> Vehicle Sensors Tab. Table axis control is also available for this input.

  2. New Pedal Position Closed Fixed timer. See Tuning View -> Timer Functions -> Fixed Timer Setup

  3. New “Custom Runtimes” menu. See Config View -> Inputs -> Custom Runtimes. Currently moved the “Efficiency Calculation” and “Load Calculation” into the menu. More runtime to follow.

  4. CAN Bus 2, Channels 3 and 4 enabled.

  5. Engine Decoding mode(s) added:

    • Toyota 3URFE Quad VVT.
    • LS1
  1. User Output Functions now have x2 PWM Modes:
    • Fixed Frequency with 3D Table for Duty Cycle Control.
    • Fixed Duty Cycle with 3D Table for Frequency Control; range is 0 - 1000Hz. (new mode)
  1. Subaru MY15 and MY12-MY14 CAN Bus decoded.

  2. Subaru SI Drive modes (Sport, Intelligent, Sport Sharp) can be selected as a source channel on Switched Inputs.

Image Image

Fixes/Improvements

  1. When the Lambda 1 or Lambda 2 sensor enters a fault condition, ALL Closed Loop Lambda trims are cleared to zero (and DTC will be generated)
  2. Accel Mode. Option 1 and 2 were swapped in the menu description(MAP and PP1). To clarify: value 0 = TPS 1, value 1= MAP, value 2 = Pedal Position 1
  3. Hard/Inconsistent starting on Distributor Ignition mode.

V2.4.0 24/7/2015

  1. The number of degrees over which the Engine Speed is calculated has been made user adjustable. See Config View -> Engine Decode Setup -> Sensor Main.

  2. Engine Decoding modes added:

    • Nissan VK45/VK56
    • Mazda 3 LF Series Engine Decoding beta.
  1. On-board/Internal Lambda Control Changes
    • Simplified enabling on the dual On-board Lambda Function. The ECU now automatically assigns the correct the Heater Output Channel based on ECU Type and Serial Number. The only setup required to enable the Internal Lambda 1 or 2 control is from the Config View -> Inputs-> Engine tab.

      • If “Lambda 1” Input Channel has the Input Source selected to “Internal Lambda 1” the function becomes enabled.
      • If “Lambda 2” Input Channel has the Input Source selected to “Internal Lambda 2” the function becomes enabled.
    • Sensor Calibration. The Lambda Sensor(s) can now be automatically calibrated every time the ECU Powers ups if enabled. Controlled from Tuning View->Engine Functions -> Internal LSU Sensor Control.

Remember that all the On-board/Internal Lambda data is available from the F3 menu, Lambda Tab.

Image Image

  1. CAN Bus OEM implementation for the Nissan D40 truck.

  2. Motorsport Water Spray Function added. There are 4 individual channels available. These can be used to spray the Intercooler, Brakes, Radiators etc. Lockout conditions Enable/Disable the function. Once enabled a 3D table can be used to adjust the output Duty Cycle. The ECU Runtime menu -> Status Tab will provide function status information.

Image Image Image Image

  1. CAN Bus OEM models added:
    • BMW

Fixes/Improvements

  1. DBW 2 Offset Tables 1,2,3 fixed. NOTE. Please recheck Table Axis settings if these tables are used
    • DBW2 Offset Tables 1,2,3
    • Accel/Decel Tables

V2.3.0 1/5/2015

  1. Exhaust Pressure Correction tables added for Lambda 1 and Lambda 2 Inputs. The correction can be enabled from the Config View, Lambda 1/2 Input Setup Form. An Exhaust Pressure Sensor must be fitted to use this function. An Absolute Pressure Sensor MUST be used.

Image Image

There are two tables to select from; Rich and Lean. Table values will be initialised after a firmware upgrade. Sample values can also be used from the KV8 sample file.

NOTE:

When Wideband sensors are used in turbocharged applications, be aware that the sensor itself is sensitive to the back pressure of the exhaust. ie A positive exhaust back pressure compared to what the sensor was calibrated at, will cause the sensor to read differently. Increases in pressure cause the sensor to read farther from stoichiometric eg.

  • A rich reading will appear richer than it really is.
  • A lean reading will appear leaner than it really.
  1. Brake Pressure Inputs have had more high pressure sensor options added; the Bosch 250Bar: 0-265-005-303 250Bar and Bosch 140Bar: 0-261-545-053. Units for these high pressure sensors have been changed to Bar and PSI

  2. A 4th option has been added to the “Pre-Crank Injection Enable” setting. This allows multiple “First Crank” events to trigger the Pre-Crank injection function.

NOTE: Option 2 allows the Pre-Crank injection function to trigger ONLY once while the ECU is powered.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. ECU Logging changes to the storage of the PID Header.

  2. Gear Cut Status in the Runtime F3 menu.


V2.2.0 17/3/2015

  1. Traction Control release 1. Based on %Slip. Additional modes will be added in future releases.

  2. DBW 1 and 2 feed forward value(s) now have available a 3D Table giving greater flexibly when tuning the PID algorithm. This will improve dynamic response on both the plate opening and closing times. ****THE NEW TABLE(S) WILL NEED TO BE INITIALISED / CHEKCED. DEFAULT VALUE SHOULD BE SET TO 5.0%. WITH THE AXISES DISABLED THE TABLE CAN OPERATE AS A SINGLE ZONE SETTING. ****

  3. Launch Control.

    • More Arming/Disarming options have been added.
    • Launch Mode added into the Launch Control setup menu, config view.
    • Both Ignition and Fuel Cuts can operate simultaneously when the system is armed. Ignition cutting can provide the primary limiting to maintain the Launch RPM, while softer Fuel cutting can be used to ensure minimal plug contamination. See the Sample KV8 file for default settings.
    • Disarm delay added. Allows for advanced Table Switching options during the Disarming process.
    • Launched Armed On/Off Status added to Axis control and User functions.
  1. The Input Calibration Table(s) for Lambda Cyl1 -12 and EGT Cyl 1-12 have had a format change. These will need to be reconfigured if they are used.

  2. The following Input Channels have been added under the new Turbo Dynamics tab:

    • Turbo Compressor Inlet Temperature
    • Turbo Compressor Outlet Temperature
    • Turbo Compressor Inlet Pressure
    • Turbo Compressor Outlet Pressure
    • Wastegate Position Sensor
    • Pressure Bypass Valve Position
  1. DTC’s have been added for the new Inputs listed in 4). The DTCs will need to be cleared after the update.

  2. Added Min and Max %Cut settings to the AntiLag Cooldown mode (Cyclic Idle control).

  3. Added Holden Alloytec Engine Decoding.

  4. Knock Control. Two new Status Flags have been added. “Knock Short Term” and Knock Long Term. These get set to ON if any Knock Short/Long Term Ign Trim is not zero. i.e when the knock control is active and retarding ignition timing. One possible use is to span the Lambda Offset Table with this status so the Lambda Target can be adjusted during a Knock event.

Image Image

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Engine Speed Limit 2 and 3 Turn On Delay. Delay was only working on the first pass through the limit.

V2.0.10 19/1/2015

  1. Increased DBW 1 PID displayed rate to 50Hz.\
  2. Added 3D Table for DBW 1 Feed forward (beta)\
  3. Traction control refinement before release.

V2.0.9 19/12/2014

  1. BWM M54/M52 Engine decoding added.

V2.0.8 08/12/2014

  1. Honda B16 Engine decoding added.

  2. Kawasaki Ultra 310 Engine decoding added.

  3. GMx7 (6+1) Engine decoding added.


V2.0.7 21/11/2014

  1. Added Filter setting for slip calculation.

  2. Traction Control ready for Beta testing

  3. Quad DBW ready for Beta Testing. Added Input Channels for Throttle Position 5-8 for DBW channel 3 and 4. Matching DTC codes also added.

  4. CL Narrow Band now working on Sensor 2 and Sensor 1 + 2 modes.\

  5. Added another Engine Decoding diagnostics counter.

**\ - Narrow Band Heater PWM tables have changed .. These will need to be re-initialised if they are used.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fixed Purge Table .. can now use a 3D Table to control solenoid %DC. Purge Control available on all Aux/Fuel/Ign Channels.

V2.0.6 22/10/2014

  1. New initialisation firmware for Quad DBW.

  2. Added more parameters to the Axis Control: DI Voltages, Knock Control data


V2.0.5 7/10/2014

  1. Boost Target Clamp Table added

V2.0.2 1/10/2014

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fixed Launch Disable Speed setting … this setting will need to be rechecked/re-initialised

V2.0.0 15/9/2014 - Major Release

  1. *****\ - ECU Logging release - 16MB ******.

V1.1.138 14/9/2014

  1. Subaru EZ30 Trigger decoding added.

  2. Enabled “User Output Function 1-10” Table Control on the following *Fuel - Tables:

  • Fuel Sec Load Table

  • Fuel Exhaust Pressure Comp Table

  • Fuel Temp Comp Table

  • Fuel Pressure Comp Table

  • Fuel Gear Comp Table

  • Fuel User 1 Comp Table

  • Fuel User 2 Comp Table

  1. Enabled “User Output Function” Table Control on the following *Ignition - Tables:
  • Ignition Sec Load Table

  • Ignition Crank Comp Table

  • Ignition Post Start Comp Table

  • Ignition Engine Temp Comp Table

  • Ignition Charge Temp Comp Table

  • Ignition MAP Comp Table

  • Ignition Exhaust Pressure Comp Table

  • Ignition Gear Comp Table

  • Ignition User 1 Comp Table

  • Ignition User 2 Comp Table


V1.1.137 11/9/2014

  1. BMW OEM Vanos Control added to the Exhaust Cams.

  2. BRZ/GT86 Trigger decoding added.

  3. Changed Max EGT runtime to Peak EGT.

  4. DBW 2 now has PID control independent of DBW 1. This means DBW 2 PID control can either use the Tables from DBW 1 or 2. The following new tables have been added:

    • Proportional Gain Table
    • Integral Gain Table
    • Derivative Gain Table
    • Min Duty Clamp Table
    • Max Duty Clamp Table
    • Positive Integral Limit Table
    • Negative Integral Limit Table

V1.1.136 6/9/2014

  1. Nissan 360 Engine Decoding added.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. BMW Vanos Control switches both Retard and Advance Solenoids off when rpm is zero.

V1.1.133 25/8/2014

  1. Subaru EZ30/EZ36 Engine Decoding added.

  2. Subaru factory CAN Bus decoded for 2007 - 2014 models.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Honda K20/K24 final engine decoding release

  2. Engine Start/Stop function final release.


V1.1.126 13/8/2014

Fixes/Improvements

  1. BMW S62 Vanos Control .. when lockout mode active the ECU forces 20%DC on the Intake Retard solenoid to ensure the Intake Cam is fully retarded and applies 20%DC to the Exhaust Advance Solenoid to ensure the Exhaust Cam is fully advanced.

V1.1.125 9/8/2014

  1. BMW S62 Engine Decoding added\

  2. BMW Vanos control change on Inlet LH and RH(solenoids off during deadband + user adjustable feedforward)

  3. ECU Logging firmware continues in preparation for release.\

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Function channel assignment on Ignition channels 4-8

  2. Conflict issue when a Function and Fuel Channel have the same Injector Output assigned .. Fuel Channel takes priority.


V1.1.122 1/8/2014

  1. Added Engine Start Function. Uses a new Input Channel called “Start/Stop Switch” and Output Function called “Starter Relay Control”. More info can be found at: Engine Start Control
    ****\ - Please check this setting new settings are initialise if required *****

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Narrow Band heater control PWM Duty cycle out by 1dp.

  2. Visibility control for Narrow Band 3D Heater Tables.


V1.1.121 1/8/2014

  1. Added Fuel and Ignition ʺInhibitʺ Status to the runtime menu (F3).\

  2. Subaru 2.0L Quad AVCS Engine Decoding.

  3. Added VVT Exhaust Target Z-axis Control.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. VVT Inlet and Exhaust Offset tables.

  2. Auxiliary Channels 13 and 14 incorrect output polarity when used in switch mode.\

  3. BMW Vanos Control.


V1.1.118 22/7/2014

  1. Enhancements added to the Ignition Distributor mode.

    • Individual Cylinder Trims (a 720 sync is required)

    • Knock per cylinder (a 720 sync is required)

    • Dwell per cylinder (a 720 sync is required)

    • Spark Duration Setting for Distributor Mode .****\ - Please check this setting under Ignition -> Ignition Main.*****

  2. BMW S54 Trigger Decoding added.

  3. Ignition Channels 9 -12 on the KV12/KV16 can be assigned to other functions and used for PWM or On/Off control.


V1.1.116 14/7/2014

  1. Added pull-up control on the following Input Switches: NOS Switch, Traction Control Switch, Brake Switch 1 & 2, Dual DBW Switch.

  2. Pre-crank prime now supports multiple pulses to assist with cold starting. See Fuel -> Starting -> Starting Setup. The Pulse Count of 1 will retain the original pre-crank fueling. ****\ - Please check this setting *****

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Short Term Fuel Trim (STFT) always cleared on a lockout condition.

  2. Any Engine Limiting will lockout the Closed Loop Lambda Control.

  3. LTFT now “holds” its value when STFT is less than “Min STFT lockout (+/-)” settings.

  4. Post Start Delay on Idle Ignition Control.

  5. Pre- Injection Table x and y boundaries incorrect memory locations. After this firmware update the ECU will copy the old settings into the new locations. \ - Please re-check this table(s) under Fuel->Starting->Pre- Injection Comp Table 1 & 2 .*

  6. Overriding Crank Index and Sync Sensor Input settings when the sensor type is selected as magnetic - Pull-up always set to OFF and Edge always to Falling. These menu items are disabled in Emtune to prevent the use of incorrect setting.


V1.1.115 8/7/2014

  1. Speed Limit Function enabled. Table1 and 2 are available for use allowing the tables to either operate independently or together to produce a single speed limit value. “Speed Limit Enable Switch” can also be used for pit lane limiting.

  2. CAN 1 Channels 4-6 enabled.

  3. Added Vehicle Functions -> Calculations -> Fuel Used menu . ʺReset Fuel Used” and “Percentage Correction” adjustments are now available.

  4. Distance Calculation now available. Adjustments from Vehicle Functions -> Calculations -> Distance. ʺReset Distance” and “Percentage Correction” adjustments available. See Runtime Menu -> Calculations Tab for this runtime.

  5. Max EGT added which is the Max value of any enabled EGT Channel. Always cleared on ECU Power up.

  6. Drive Slip added to Axis Control and CAN datasets.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Gear Force DTC added

  2. Gear Cut Timeout time was not operating correctly in all modes

  3. CAN Custom Datasets limiting to 3 sequential PIDs

  4. Engine Fan ʺON Temp Override” functionality fix.

  5. Injector Linearisation Tables have been changed allowing both positive and negative numbers to be entered. \ - Please re-check these settings.*

  6. Startup RPM Target Offset was not working in DBW mode. This setting allows the Idle Target RPM to be increased during crank and for a short time post crank giving an adjustable Idle increase as the engine bursts.

**NOTE. Adjust this setting from Engine Functions -> Idle Speed Control -> Target Offsets -> Startup Offset Target RPM. Normally the DBW 1 Target Offset Table1 is spanned from “Idle Target” so an increase in RPM

Target during crank and post start will provide the required engine flare. A DBW table example is shown below:

Image Image


V1.1.111 28/6/2014

  1. ECU logging Setup Form Implemented. ****\ - Please select the ECU logging Setup menu (Logging -> ECU Logger) and make sure all 6 channels are OFF until the full functionality has been implemented. ****

  2. Added Fuel Used runtime to the CAN datasets.

  3. Yamaha Jetski FZR engine decoding added.

Fixes/Improvements

  1. DBW Offset Tables now working in Z-axis Mode.

  2. Close Loop Lambda Control “hold” mode added during sensor shutdown (occurs when the sensor is incorrectly positioned in the exhaust and gets thermally shocked.)

  3. Internal Lambda PID heater gains reduced slightly.


V1.1.110 23/6/2014

  1. LS2/7 engine decoding added

  2. Added BAP mode to Fuel Model Setup (Can be used in TPS mapping)

  3. When the Ignition Switch is enabled and toggles from OFF -> ON and the ECU already powered up, the fuel pump(s) will re-prime (Used in Motorsport applications when the ECU is always powered on)

  4. “Used Fuel” runtime added. ECU calculates this by summing each effective injector pulsewidth and using the injector size to give a very accurate estimation of Used Fuel. See Runtime menu (F3) Calculations tab.

  5. Added Fuel Used Reset Switch

  6. Added Handbrake Switch\

Fixes/Improvements

  1. User Outputs Channels 1-4 Switch ON and Switch OFF Timer issue.

V1.1.109 09/6/2014

  1. New Speed Input channels added: Undriven Speed Rear L, Undriven Speed Rear R, Vehicle Speed. These are available from Config view -> Inputs Pins (F10) -> Speed Tab

  2. New runtimes added:

    • Front Axle Speed. This is the average of either the Drive Speed Front L+R OR Undriven Speed Front L+R.
    • Rear Axle Speed. This is the average of either the Drive Speed Rear L+ R OR Undriven Speed Rear L+R.

The ECU automatically checks which channels are assigned before generating the Axle Speed.

    • Cornering Speed L. The average between the (Drive Speed Front L or Undriven Speed Front L) and (Drive Speed Rear L or Undriven Speed Rear L)
    • Cornering Speed R. The average between the (Drive Speed Front R or Undriven Speed Front R) and (Drive Speed Rear R or Undriven Speed Rear R)

The ECU automatically checks which channels are assigned before generating the Cornering Speed.

  1. Drive Slip % calculation now available. Adjustable under the Motorsport Tab, Tuning view

All new data can be viewed from the ECU Runtimes menu (F3), Vehicle Sensors tab.

Changes

  • The position of the Internal G-Force data in the Axis Control menu and User Outputs has been moved. If this data is used to span a table or control an output it will need to be reconfigured.
  • The Cal Slot Control Enable has been moved to the Config View -> Functions Tab

V1.1.108 26/5/2014


  1. Sequential Primary/Grouped Staged Fuel Mode added. For example on a KV12: x8 Primary Injectors can be used with 4x Grouped Staged Injectors. On KV16, 12 cylinder engine: x12 Primary Injectors and 4 Grouped Staged Injectors.

V1.1.107 22/5/2014


  1. DBW Throttle Blip function added for Up Shift and Down Shift.

V1.1.106 15/5/2014


  1. EVO 10 Trigger Decoding Beta Version.

  2. BMW S65 Trigger Decoding added.


V1.1.105


  1. Rx8 OEM CAN bus implemented. This includes full dash functionality(Tacho, Speedo, ECT Gauge, OilP Gauge & Light, CEL, Battery Light), electric power steer control, reading of 4 wheel speeds, steering angle .. etc. )

  2. Toyota GT86/BRZ OEM CAN bus started


V1.1.103


  1. Ignition Channels 11 and 12 completed

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fixed Lambda Target Z-Axis Control

V1.1.100


  1. Injector Linearsation 2D Table control finalised for Primary and Secondary Injectors. (See KV8_Sample Cal file for a setup example)

  2. Sequential Staged injection control added.

    • Controls up to 12 injectors on a KV12 which is x6 Primary Injectors and x6 Secondary Injectors.
    • Controls up to 8 injectors on a KV8 which is x4 Primary Injectors and x4 Secondary Injectors. *\ - Secondary Cylinder Injector Pulsewidths are given in the Runtime Display(F3)
  1. Fuel Cylinder Bank trimming is implemented on Cylinders 1-12. Cylinders can be assigned to Bank 1 or Bank 2 from the Config View -> Engine Setup menu. Normal Table Control is used to control this function, adjusted from Tuning View Fuel ->Fuel Table Control menu. Bank Cylinder Trims are also given in the Runtime Display(F3)

  2. User Timers 1 -5 Implemented. Switched on from Config View Functions -> Timer Functions Tab

  3. User Outputs now have addition functionality… ON Delay and OFF Delay. For example the OFF delay can be used as hysteresis control .

  4. E888 now supported

Fixes/Improvements

  1. Fixed knock “Post Start Delay " setting

  2. Internal Lambda 1 and 2 hide all status info when the function is OFF. Also forces a default calibration for Nernst and Pump voltages if they are outside the expected range.

  3. CAN Channel Direction has been spit into 3 options 1) Receive, 2) Transmit, 3) Receive and Transmit.

    This means on OEM CAN applications a channel can receive only, transmit only or do both.This gives greater flexibility to the user. *\ - PLEASE RE-CHECK CAN SETTINGS **


V1.1.97 30/3/14

  1. Lambda Offset Table 2 fix

V1.1.96 28/3/14

  1. Fix Exh RH Cam Pullup Control not working

  2. Dual Tune Switch implemented


V1.1.95 25/3/14

  1. Injector Linearisation beta for primary and secondary injectors

V1.1.94 24/03/14

  1. Added a second Lambda Target Offset Table.

    THESE SETTINGS WILL NEED TO BE INITIALISED WITH VALID VALUES*

  2. Input Channel “Front Brake Pressure” now accepts data over the CAN bus i.e Subaru MY12


V1.1.92 20/03/14

  1. INPUT Channels ʺInlet Temp Before ICʺ and ʺIC Water Temperature added. DTC’s also added

    THESE SETTINGS WILL NEED TO BE INITIALISED WITH VALID VALUES*

  2. 10 User Inputs Channels are now implemented

    a) x4 User Temperature inputs, b) x4 User Pressure inputs, c) x2 User Position inputs. ALL corresponding DTC’s added

    THESE SETTINGS WILL NEED TO BE INITIALISED WITH VALID VALUES*


V1.1.91 17/03/14

  1. Differential Control function added **THIS SETTING WILL NEED TO BE INITIALISED WITH VALID VALUES. IN THE CONFIG VIEW -> FUCNTIONS -> MOTORSPORT TAB MAKE SURE THE FUNCTION IS OFF ***

  2. Added AC Pressure Sensor Input THIS SETTING WILL NEED TO BE INITIALISED WITH VALID VALUES*

  3. Added EGT Cylinders 1-12 functionality.

  4. Added DTC codes for AC Pressure Switch and EGT Cylinders 1-12

  5. Added more accelerometer control options for the ECU’s internal sensor

  6. Added “Handbrake Switch” Input

  7. Added Steering Angle to table Axis Control

  8. Added help and g-force setup, Differential Control and Fuel Overview

  9. Fixed Fuel and Ignition Inhibit functions.

  10. Locked inputs Manifold Pressure and Fuel Pressure to units of kPa.


V1.1.90 10/03/14

  1. Adjusted Decoding Multi-tooth Missing/No sync

V1.1.89 7/03/14

** * - 1) 13B Trigger Decoding added

2) 2 Stroke Mode implemented 

3) Clamped Injector Timing to Max 360 when in 2 stroke mode

V1.1.88 7/03/14

** * - 1) ORFC fix. In some situations it would not trigger.

  1. Added KV12 Ign 11/12 setup.

  2. Added Test Inj/Ign for Cyl11/12


V1.1.85 28/02/14

** * - 1) Launch Control Table control functional

  1. Launch Select Table functional

V1.1.84 27/02/14

1) Added CL lambda Lockout when AntiLag  Cut >0 or Retard > 0 or Fuel != 0 or in cool down mode
  1. Software Note: Moved some INPUTS IDs from switches into Motorsport Tab ..

  2. Cool Down Table working

  3. Add TPS Lo and TPS Hi in Cool Down mode

  4. Added 22 switch options to the Axis Control

  5. Added ““Cooldown Always on”” option

  6. Runtimes (F3) Motorsport AntiLag window now contains ALL relevant data

  7. Stop DTC’s being sent to the ECU on a “Send File to ECU” command.

  8. Added INPUT ID EGT 1 and EGT 2. Required for Anti lag.

MUST INITIALISE THESE SETTINGS FOR ANTI LAG TO FUNCTION CORRECTLY

  1. Implemented EGT lockouts in Antilag which control Arming and Disarming

MUST INITIALISE THESE SETTINGS WITH VALID VALUES

  1. Anti-lag Table control and software menus added.

V1.1.80 25/02/14

1) Anti Lag Revision 1 beta version 

2) EVO 9 Trigger decoding revision for fast start 

V1.1.78 16/02/14

  1. Added LTFT table functionality

V1.1.76 10/02/14

  1. Knock Control Long Term now decays when Knock Level < Threshold instead of when Short Term = 0

  2. Added the following Lambda LTFT Settings

    a) Post Start Lockout b) Min ET lockout, c) Max ET Lockout d) Min STFT lockout e) LTFT Update Rate


V1.1.75 08/02/2014

1) Knock Control Gain control for Knock Levels and Thresholds. 

V1.1.74 04/02/14

  1. Knock Control Closed Loop Long and Short Term trims implemented

  2. Engine Type now works

\ - NOTE\ - The user must reconfigure the engine type.

Goto-> Config->Engine Setup->Engine Main.

By default 2 Stroke is selected. For 4 Stroke Engines select 0 .


V1.1.72 01/02/2014

  1. Lambda Deadband OFF when = 0

V1.1.71 22/01/2014

  1. Injector Test Function fix

  2. Ignition Accel/Decel Control Completed.

****Tables and settings will need to be initialised ****

  1. Ignition Accel Retards and Ignition Decel Advance Ignition added.

  2. Added La1 and La2 Target error run times to Axis control.

  3. Added Lambda Closed Loop Deadband for La1 and La2 sensors


V1.1.70 09/01/2014

  1. Honda K20 decoding added

  2. Gain control on CL Lambda

Copyright © 2026 Emtron Australia Pty Ltd

Emtune Release Notes

Info

The latest version of Emtune is available via EmLauncher.


Loading release notes…